JP7075970B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a special game advantageous to the player is executed when a special result is derived.

As this type of gaming machine, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that gives a right-handed instruction notification in a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, and a time-saving state, and gives a left-handed instruction notification in a normal gaming state. ..

JP-A-2016-104167 (see paragraph 0338 in particular).

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 may be more entertaining in a right-handed gaming state such as a big hit game, a small hit gaming state, or a time-saving state, but may be less entertaining in a left-handed normal gaming state.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game medium launched in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) can pass toward the game area, and when the game medium passes, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the result of the first special symbol lottery. The first special symbol start area (for example, the first start port 5120) that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game from which is derived,
A game medium launched in a specific mode (for example, right-handed) can pass toward the game area, and when the game medium passes, the second special symbol is variably displayed and the result of the second special symbol lottery is performed. The second special symbol start area (for example, the second start port 2140) that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game from which
A first determination means (for example, main CPU 2201) for determining whether or not a special result advantageous to the player is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium to the first special symbol start region.
A second determination means (for example, main CPU 2201) for determining whether or not a special result advantageous to the player is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium to the second special symbol start region.
When the game medium launched toward the game area passes through, the normal symbol start area (for example, the passing gate 2126) that triggers the execution of the normal symbol game in which the normal symbol lottery result is derived by variable display of the normal symbol is performed. , 5125A, 5125B),
A first variable winning device that can be opened when a result advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit, an opening hit of a bonus) is derived in the first special symbol game or the special symbol game as the second special symbol game (for example, a big hit, a bonus opening hit). For example, the large winning opening 2131, V winning opening 2155),
When a predetermined result (for example, per Fuden long opening) is derived in the ordinary symbol game, the game medium is facilitated to pass through the second special symbol starting area (for example, the second starting port 2140). A second variable winning device (for example, an ordinary electric accessory 2146) capable of
At least one of the first determination means and the second determination means is more disadvantageous to the player than the loss result, the special result (for example, a big hit), and the loss result. It is a means that can determine which result is a specific result (for example, a time saving hit) that is advantageous to the player.
Multiple gaming modes with different degrees of advantage for the player (eg, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false), special mode, challenge mode, remaining hold mode) Of these, a gaming machine that can play games in either mode,
The expected value from which a result advantageous to the player is derived is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed (for example, the first special symbol game). Is configured so that the expected value of winning per character opening is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when is executed.
The plurality of game modes are
The normal game mode in which the first special symbol game can be mainly performed by playing the game in the normal mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)). )When,
Including an advantageous game mode (for example, a special mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed by performing the game in the specific embodiment.
The normal game mode includes a first normal game mode (for example, a normal mode) and a second normal game mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A).
When the specific result (for example, time reduction) is determined by at least one of the first determination means and the second determination means in the first normal game mode, the specific result (for example, time reduction) is determined. After the derivation of the hit), the first normal game mode (for example, the normal mode) is shifted to the second normal game mode (for example, the high accuracy mode A) without notifying that the game in the specific mode is performed. It is characterized in that the game in the above-mentioned normal mode (for example, left-handed) can be continued.

(2) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game medium launched in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) can pass toward the game area, and when the game medium passes, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the result of the first special symbol lottery. The first special symbol start area (for example, the first start port 5120) that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game from which is derived,
A game medium launched in a specific mode (for example, right-handed) can pass toward the game area, and when the game medium passes, the second special symbol is variably displayed and the result of the second special symbol lottery is performed. The second special symbol start area (for example, the second start port 2140) that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game from which
A first determination means (for example, main CPU 2201) for determining whether or not a special result advantageous to the player is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium to the first special symbol start region.
A second determination means (for example, main CPU 2201) for determining whether or not a special result advantageous to the player is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium to the second special symbol start region.
When the game medium launched toward the game area passes through, the normal symbol start area (for example, the passing gate 2126) that triggers the execution of the normal symbol game in which the normal symbol lottery result is derived by variable display of the normal symbol is performed. , 5125A, 5125B),
A first variable winning device that can be opened when a result advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit, an opening hit of a bonus) is derived in the first special symbol game or the special symbol game as the second special symbol game (for example, a big hit, a bonus opening hit). For example, the large winning opening 2131, V winning opening 2155),
When a predetermined result (for example, per Fuden long opening) is derived in the ordinary symbol game, the game medium is facilitated to pass through the second special symbol starting area (for example, the second starting port 2140). A second variable winning device (for example, an ordinary electric accessory 2146) capable of
At least one of the first determination means and the second determination means is more disadvantageous to the player than the loss result, the special result (for example, a big hit), and the loss result. It is a means that can determine which result is a specific result (for example, a time saving hit) that is advantageous to the player.
Multiple gaming modes with different degrees of advantage for the player (eg, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false), special mode, challenge mode, remaining hold mode) Of these, a gaming machine that can play games in either mode,
The expected value from which a result advantageous to the player is derived is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed (for example, the first special symbol game). Is configured so that the expected value of winning per character opening is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when is executed.
The plurality of game modes are
The normal game mode in which the first special symbol game can be mainly performed by playing the game in the normal mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)). )When,
Including an advantageous game mode (for example, a special mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed by performing the game in the specific embodiment.
The normal game mode includes a first normal game mode (for example, a normal mode) and a second normal game mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A).
When the specific result (for example, a time saving hit) is determined by at least one of the first determination means and the second determination means in the first normal game mode and the specific result is derived, the said. From the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode) to the second normal game mode (for example, for example) without opening the first variable winning device so that the game in the specific mode is not performed after the derivation of the specific result. It is possible to shift to the high accuracy mode A) and continue the game in the above-mentioned normal mode (for example, left-handed).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machines (1) and (2) above, the normal gaming mode in which the game is performed in the normal mode (for example, left-handed) is not only the first normal gaming mode (for example, the normal mode) but also the first. It includes a second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game mode. Therefore, even when the game is played in the normal game mode in which the game is played in the normal mode, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, it is advantageous to the player in the "first variable winning device that can be opened when a result advantageous to the player is derived in the special symbol game as the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game". The expected value is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed. The "results advantageous to the player" may be the same result (for example, both the former and the latter are big hits, both the former and the latter are hits, and the character opening hit, etc.), or different results. May be good. When the results are different, for example, the former is a big hit and the latter is a bonus hit, the former is a big hit and the latter is a probable change hit, the former is a bonus hit and the latter is a time saving hit, and the like.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
When a result advantageous to the player is derived, it is possible to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the special gaming state includes a plurality of special gaming states (for example, 3Rs) having different degrees of advantage to the player. Big hit, 10R big hit) is included,
When a result advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit, a bonus opening hit) is derived in the special symbol game performed during the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), the first normal game Compared to the case where a result advantageous to the player is derived in the special symbol game performed during the game mode (for example, the normal mode), the state is shifted to the special game state (for example, 10R jackpot) which is advantageous to the player. Expected value is high
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above , the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) is more than the case where a result advantageous to the player is derived in the first normal gaming mode (for example, the normal mode). In the case where a result advantageous to the player is derived, the expected value of shifting to a special gaming state (for example, 10R jackpot) advantageous to the player is higher. As described above, although the first normal game mode and the second normal game mode are both performed in the normal mode, it is possible to give the game a sharpness in the first normal game mode and the second normal game mode. It is possible to enhance the interest.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the front direction. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the forward direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the rear direction. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the game flow of a pachinko machine. This is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of a game state. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine, and (B) is an example of a table showing an idea related to the determination of the decorative symbol stop mode in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a normal symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a type determination table for a normal symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of ordinary symbols in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (2) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (4) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start-up initial setting process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the electric power failure processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter update processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter determination processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition determination processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving setting process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the external masqueradable interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening winning detection processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a sub-variation effect pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead type effect pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process of changing the jackpot system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process of changing the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the common hit system look-ahead effect form to the big hit system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the exclusive common hit system look-ahead effect form to the big hit system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the exclusive common hit system look-ahead effect form to the time saving hit system look-ahead effect form. It is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "Prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the outline of the error in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. In the first pachinko gaming machine, it is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal which is output to the outside of the machine according to the gaming state. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. 2 is a flowchart (No. 2) showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the appearance of the game board unit in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example. Is the first open mode, (B) the open mode of the specific region is the second open mode, and (C) the open mode of the specific region is the third open mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. This is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and is (A) another example of the specific area. It is a figure which shows the case where the opening mode is the 1st opening mode, and (B) the case where the opening mode of a specific region is the 2nd opening mode. It is an example of the front view which shows the appearance of the game board unit in the 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit in the 4th pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a normal symbol in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a type determination table for a normal symbol in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of ordinary symbols in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a gaming state transition diagram in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a reserved image is changed from a common hit look-ahead effect form to a big hit type look-ahead effect form, and then a big hit system reach is performed. It is an image which shows that the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation in the 4th pachinko gaming machine has developed into the jackpot system reach. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a reserved image is changed from a common hit look-ahead effect form to a time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form, and then a time-saving hit system effect is performed. .. It is an image which shows that the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation in the 4th pachinko gaming machine has evolved into the time saving hit system effect. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the 4th pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the mode that the image which an egg hatches is displayed in the substantially center of a display area. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a normal symbol in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of ordinary symbols in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, (a) is a diagram showing a transition transition of an effect mode. (B) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the effect mode. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st production stage notice content lottery processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo 1 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the first notice effect. (B) is a figure which shows the time chart of the 1st notice production. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 2nd notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 2nd notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 2nd notice effect and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 3rd notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 3rd notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 3rd notice effect and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 4th notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 4th notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 4th notice effect and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the effect content of the notice after the icon stop in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after the icon stop and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after the icon stop and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 1st notice effect in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 1st notice effect in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 1st notice effect in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 2nd notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 2nd notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 2nd notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 3rd notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 3rd notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 3rd notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 3rd notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 4th notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 4th notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 4th notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the notice after the icon stop in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the notice after the icon stop in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of the icon in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the 1st staging stage of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the 2nd staging stage of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the 3rd staging stage of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 6th notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 6th notice production in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 6th notice effect and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the seventh notice effect. (B) is a figure which shows the time chart of the 7th notice staging. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a stage change notice effect. (B) is a diagram showing a time chart of a stage change notice effect. (C) is a diagram showing the state of the character lamp before and after the stage change occurs. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change section holding ball in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change section holding ball in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change section holding ball in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of winning the 1st start opening in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change section determination process in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the look-ahead effect in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the look-ahead effect in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change occurrence presence / absence determination process in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the stage count processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change occurrence lottery processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the sub-variation pattern selection table in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the sub-variation pattern replacement table in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the first staging stage. (B) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the second staging stage. (C) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the third staging stage. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the eighth notice effect. (B) is a figure which shows the time chart of the 8th notice production. (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo lamp advance notice effect. (B) is a figure which shows the time chart of the logo lamp notice staging. (C) is a figure which shows the time chart of the logo lamp notice staging. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st staging stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the probability variation mode of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the drum variation effect determination process in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the start of a drum variation effect in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, it is a figure which shows the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation which is currently performed and the normal symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the drum fluctuation effect in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the drum fluctuation effect in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the drum fluctuation effect in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st bonus mode medium big hit time processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the end of the 2nd bonus mode in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the end of the 1st bonus mode in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball counter addition processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the result display processing in a bonus mode in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing at the end of the 2nd bonus mode in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the 1st bonus mode in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process (I) in the 1st bonus mode in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process (II) in the 1st bonus mode in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process (III) in the 1st bonus mode in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining ST number adjustment process in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the display process of the remaining ST number of times for display in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-reading effect process of a normal figure in the probability change mode in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure look-ahead effect processing in the probability change mode in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the first staging stage. (B) is a figure which shows the pattern of the icon stop suggestion notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the hold change effect lottery processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the hold change effect lottery processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the production block in the 6th specific super reach of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 6th specific super reach content lottery processing in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the logo effect advance notice effect for the 1st effect stage in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. (B) is a figure which shows the flow of the logo effect advance notice effect for the 2nd effect stage in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the logo effect advance notice effect for the 2nd effect stage in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the logo effect advance notice effect for the 2nd effect stage in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the logo effect advance notice effect for the 2nd effect stage in the 5th pachinko gaming machine. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a time chart showing the effect control in the normal pattern related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state, and (A) a time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the first normal pattern. (B) A time chart showing an example of staging control performed in the second normal pattern. This is an example of a display effect of the first normal pattern displayed in the display area of the display device in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, it is a time chart showing the effect control in the irregular pattern related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state, and (A) the time showing an example of the effect control performed in the first irregular pattern. It is a chart, (B) a time chart showing an example of an effect control performed in a second irregular pattern, and (C) a time chart showing an example of an effect control performed in a third irregular pattern. It is a modification of the variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 128. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of an external perspective view of the game ball distribution device included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the forward direction. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the game ball distribution device included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the forward direction. This is an example of an external perspective view of the game ball distribution device included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the rear direction. This is an example of an external perspective view of the base member, the rotary distribution mechanism, the croon, and the guide member included in the game ball distribution device of the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed from the rearward improvement. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the guide member and the holding member included in the game ball distribution device of the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the left in the front direction. It is an example of the figure which shows the state which the game ball is distributed to the 2nd passage in the game ball distribution device of the 6th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the figure which shows the flow of the game ball distributed to the 2nd passage, the 3rd passage and the 4th passage in the game ball distribution device of the 6th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the figure which shows the state which the game ball is distributed to the 1st passage in the game ball distribution device of the 6th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 6th pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a normal symbol in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a type determination table for a normal symbol in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of ordinary symbols in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter update processing in the 6th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter determination processing in the 6th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving shift determination processing in the 6th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition processing in the 6th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving setting processing in the 6th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving normal figure determination processing in the 6th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving general drawing management processing in the 6th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving normal figure counter update processing in the 6th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving normal figure counter determination processing in the 6th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game mode transition in the 6th pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the various probabilities for each game mode excluding the 1st jackpot mode and the 2nd jackpot mode in the 6th pachinko gaming machine.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is in the front direction, the back side of the pachinko game machine is in the rear direction, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is in the left direction. The right side when the machine is viewed from the front is to the right, the upper side of the pachinko game machine is upward, the lower side of the pachinko game machine is downward, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is clockwise. , And vice versa, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

The first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are both so-called one-type pachinko gaming machines called digital pachinko machines. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, and only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

Further, the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko machine called a one-kind two-kind mixer, which is a mixture of a so-called one-kind type gaming machine called a digital pachi and a two-kind type gaming machine called a wing mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be described in which only one of them is variably displayed without any problem. However, this does not mean that the pachinko gaming machine, which is a type 1 and type 2 mixer in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, is excluded.

In this specification, when the term "special symbol" is simply referred to, it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Further, the "variable display" as used in the present specification is a concept including both "variable display" in which a symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner and "stop display" in which a symbol is stopped and displayed. Yes, the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter, also referred to as "derivative"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter, also referred to as "special symbol lottery") described later or the normal symbol hit determination The result of the process (hereinafter, also referred to as "ordinary symbol lottery") is confirmed. In addition, although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a mode in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not determined (for example, a temporarily stopped mode). However, such an embodiment is included in the above variable display. Even when the symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not fixed at this point, so that the symbol can be displayed in a variable manner again.

Further, in this specification, in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special). The case of (design) will be described as an example. However, the number of special symbols may be one for the first pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

As a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variable. When the display is suspended, for example, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol and the first. There is a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequentially variable machine") in which the starting conditions are satisfied in the order of winning, including the starting port and the second starting port.

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in variable display, that it is not in the jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. It is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, such as the fact that the first special symbol is not displayed and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended. Further, in the priority variable machine, the starting conditions of the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that the game is not in a big hit game state, and that the second special symbol is variable. It is established when all certain requirements such as display is suspended.

Further, in the sequentially variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in variable display, that it is not in the jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is established when at least all of the fact that the hold is held and that the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the first special symbol are satisfied. Further, in the sequentially variable machine, the starting conditions of the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in the variable display, that the jackpot game state is not present, and that the second special symbol is variablely displayed. It is established when at least all of the fact that the hold is held and that the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the second special symbol are satisfied.

In the following, a priority variable machine will be described as an example.

[1-1. Appearance composition]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a dish unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a gaming board unit 10 (see FIG. 2), and the like are provided. Further, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the dish unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly described, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described. Details will be described later. The above parentheses indicate a reference drawing for a configuration (not shown in FIG. 1).

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the amusement park. A hinge (without reference numeral) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end portion of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 with the hinge as the axis.

The outer frame 2 supports a large number of members such as the payout unit 8, the board unit 9, the display device 7, the game board unit 10, the glass door 4, and the dish unit 5, which will be described later, via the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the effect of the effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be increased in size. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 with, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to maintain high strength while increasing the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a board unit 9 attached to the back surface side, and supports them.

The game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. Further, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, hinges (without reference numerals) are provided at the upper end portion, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion, respectively, and the upper end portion is provided. The glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the middle portion, and the dish unit 5 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, the glass door 4 and the dish unit 5 can be rotated forward integrally or individually with respect to the base door 3 with the hinge as the axis.

Further, the launcher 6 is fixedly attached to, for example, the lower right side of the surface side of the base door 3, and the speaker 32 (see FIG. 2) is fixedly attached to each of the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. There is. From the speaker 32, for example, voice effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, voice notifications, effect sounds such as error notification, and the like are output.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite to the hinge (that is, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member having an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear surface side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) formed in the game board unit 10 and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front in a state where the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be attached by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) pieces of glass with a gap between them, or a plurality of pieces of glass are unitized so as to have a gap with each other. You may. Further, when it is unitized, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of, for example, a transparent resin.

Further, at the lower part of the glass door 4, an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player is provided in order to receive the provision of the game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 described above is provided on the upper portion of the glass door 4. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for light emission effect and the like are arranged on the peripheral edge of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light emitting means for an effect such as notification by light or an effect of emitting light in various variations, but is not limited to the LED as long as such an effect of light emission can be executed, for example, a liquid crystal display, a lamp, or the like. May be.

(Dish unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unitization of the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52. The dish unit 5 is located in the lower front part of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4. As described above, the plate unit 5 is configured to be able to be rotated and opened / closed with respect to the base door 3 so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a clerk at the amusement park or the like can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, respectively, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper plate 51 is provided so that the game balls can be stored, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, an effect button 54, and the like. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 53 to the upper plate 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of a hit determination process of a special symbol. Further, the function of the operation unit 66 may also be used.

The lower plate 52 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 51. The lower plate 52 is provided with a payout outlet 55 communicating with the upper plate 51, and the game ball overflowing from the upper plate 51 is paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower plate 52.

An opening (without reference numeral) that can be opened and closed by the operation of the player is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower plate 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower plate 52. In addition, when the so-called each machine counting system is provided in each machine, not only the ball box is not required, but also the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are stored again. It can also be used for games.

(Launcher)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located at the lower right front of the base door 3 and at the lower right of the dish unit 5. The launch device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a launch handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 61. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 61, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the launch handle 62 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. When operating the firing handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball.

The game ball launched from the launcher 6 arranged at the lower right of the plate unit 5 rolls in an arc shape along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) via the launch rail (not shown) for the game. It is launched into region 105 (see FIG. 4 below). The position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the dish unit 5, and may be the lower left of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, and the versatility can be enhanced.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or one that projects an image using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, an identification symbol for effect (for example, a decorative symbol) is variably displayed to display the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, or the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is displayed. A staging image, a staging image during a jackpot game state, a demo staging image, a staging image showing the pending status of variable display of a special symbol, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged so as to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 is attached to the base door 3. It may be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the plurality of display devices are used for the effect. The image may be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. A game ball is supplied to the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). A game ball is supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81 to, for example, the upper plate 51. Further, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. Various control boards and the like are provided on the board unit 9.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 91 on which the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and the sub control on which the sub control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. The board 92, the payout / launch control board 93 on which the payout / launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout / launch of the game ball is mounted, and the power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (see the figure below). A power supply board or the like on which (see 6) is mounted is provided on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub control board 92, the payout / emission control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but all of these boards are housed in the board case. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs on one board). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of the display control circuit 304, the voice control circuit 305, the LED control circuit 306, and the accessory control circuit 307 (all of which are described later with reference to FIG. 6), which will be described later, are separate substrates. Therefore, the sub control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 10 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. A game area 105 is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 10 so that the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 110, and a substantially center of the game area 105. The center accessory 115, the first starting port 120, the general winning opening 122, the passing gate unit 125, the special electric accessory unit 130, the second starting port 140, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. It includes a 145, an LED unit 160, an out port 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10. As described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, a guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. However, the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a part thereof may be transparent. ..

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference reference numeral). The game area 105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko gaming machine, in the gaming area 105, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the left side area 106, and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the right side area 107. The definitions of the left side region and the right side region are the same for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, which will be described later.

The game ball launched toward the game area 105 by the launching device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 106 or the right side area 107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 107.

In this specification, as an operation mode (striking method) of the launching handle 62, a striking method of launching a game ball so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as “left-handed striking”, and the launching method is to flow down the right side region 107. The method of firing a game ball is called "right-handed". In this way, it is possible for the player to hit the game ball toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

Further, in the center accessory 115, a warp entrance 117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115. The stage 118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7. The stage 118 may be formed of a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 but has not entered the chance entrance 119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later). It should be noted that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, per first special symbol). Random values for judgment, symbol random values of the first special symbol, random values for reach judgment of the first special symbol, and various random values such as random values for effect selection of the first special symbol) are extracted and extracted. Various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as "variation start condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is satisfied, the various stored data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random value for determination per first special symbol, the first). The symbol random value of the special symbol, the reach determination random value of the first special symbol, and various random values such as the effect selection random value of the first special symbol) are referred to as start information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the start information of the first special symbol until the start condition is satisfied is referred to as hold. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General winning opening)
A plurality of general winning openings 122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 122 is replaced with the above general winning opening 122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side region 107, and is a passage gate 126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is a unit body integrated with 127 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected by the passing gate switch 127, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, a random value for determining the normal symbol hit) is extracted, and the extracted various data are a predetermined number. Up to (for example, up to 4) are stored. The various stored data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left side region 106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 107.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is referred to as a starting passage, and various data related to the ordinary symbol extracted by the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 (for example, a random value for determining a normal symbol hit, etc.). ) Is usually referred to as the start information of the symbol. Further, storing the start information of the normal symbol until the start condition is satisfied is referred to as hold.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 integrates the large winning opening 131, the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of the game ball to the large winning opening 131, and the special electric accessory 133. It is a unit body that has become. The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passing gate unit 125 in the right side region 107.

The large winning opening 131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is placed, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

Further, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball has won a prize in the large prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134. The special electric accessory 133, that is, the shutter 134 for special electric power, can win (pass) the game ball to the big winning opening 131 or is easily opened, and cannot win (pass) the game ball to the big winning opening 131. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. In the big hit game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the big hit game state is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big winning opening 131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. Is.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left side region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120). However, in the second starting port 140, it is difficult or impossible to win a left-struck game ball due to, for example, a game nail, and the second starting port 140 allows the right-struck game ball to win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 140 has such a configuration, and may be provided in, for example, the right side region 107. Further, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the second special symbol (for example, per second special symbol). Random values for judgment, symbol random values of the second special symbol, random values for reach judgment of the second special symbol, and various random values such as random values for effect selection of the second special symbol) are extracted and extracted. Various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the second special symbol (also referred to as "variation start condition of the second special symbol" in this specification) is satisfied, the various stored data are subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is not limited to this.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left side region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120), and when the game balls win (pass), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning opening, a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball to the winning opening, and an ordinary electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141.

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes, for example, a movable member 147 for electric power, which is a so-called electric chew, and a solenoid for general electric use 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) for operating the movable member for general electric power. .. The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the movable member 147 for general electric use, is in an open state in which the game ball can be won (passed) to the second starting port 140 or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 140. It is configured to be able to transition to a possible or difficult closed state. The movable member 147 for general electric power includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Out mouth)
The out opening 178 wins any of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 120, second starting opening 140, large winning opening 131, general winning opening 122, etc.) fired toward the game area 105. The purpose is to eject the missing game ball to the outside of the machine. The out port 178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 122, so that the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is discharged to the outside of the machine. You may do it.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a group of staging accessories 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as movable accessories controlled by the sub control circuit 300. The staging accessory group 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. The staging bonus component constituting at least one or more of the staging bonus group 58 functions as a staging bonus that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is located at the lower right of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see, for example, FIG. 4). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display unit 161, a normal symbol hold display unit 162, a first special symbol display unit 163, a second special symbol display unit 164, and a first special symbol hold display unit. A unit 165, a second special symbol hold display unit 166, a probability change notification display unit 167, and a time saving notification display unit 168 are provided.

(Ordinary symbol display)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, and includes the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the normal symbol") is satisfied, the variable display of the normal symbol in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b are alternately turned on and off is started. To. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the combination of turning on / off the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b is a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned on and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned off. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is lost, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b showing the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the movable member 147 for general electric power is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 is driven. It becomes easy to win (pass) the game ball to.

(Holding display for ordinary symbols)
The hold display unit 162 for a normal symbol displays the start information of the normal symbol, that is, the number of variable displays of the normal symbol held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold of the normal symbol") when the variable display is held. It is provided with hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of the normal symbol is suspended" means that the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbol (for example, a random value for determining the normal symbol hit) is extracted. It is the state from the time when the start condition is satisfied until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. It should be noted that the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not in the variable display and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The hold display unit 162 for a normal symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 1, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is two, both the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols are lit. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 3, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol blinks and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol lights up. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is 4, both the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol indicating the number of hold of the normal symbol is not limited to this.

(Special symbol display)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. The first special symbol display unit 163 includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group including eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group including, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 are satisfied. Alternatively, the variable display of the first special symbol is started, in which a part of the first special symbol is repeatedly turned on and off alternately or mutually. When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 is a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the big hit game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 are satisfied. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol, in which a part of the symbol is turned on and off alternately or alternately, is started. When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 is a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the big hit game state is determined.

(Holding display for special symbols)
When the start information of the special symbol, that is, the variable display is suspended, the reserved display unit for the special symbol displays the number of variable displays of the reserved special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols"). It includes a first special symbol hold display unit 165 and a second special symbol hold display unit 166.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of hold of the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is held, and the hold display LED 165a, 165b for the first special symbol. To prepare for. "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, the first The state until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the first special symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is one, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is two, both the holding display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. When the number of hold of the first special symbol is 3, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is 4, both the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol indicating the number of hold of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol hold display unit 166 displays the number of holds of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, and the second special symbol hold display LED 166a, 166b. To prepare for. "The variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, the second is The state until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

The hold display unit 166 for the second special symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the second special symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol. For example, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is one, the holding display LED 166a for the second special symbol is turned on and the holding display LED 166b for the second special symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is two, both the holding display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol are lit. When the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 3, the holding display LED 166a for the second special symbol blinks and the holding display LED 166b for the second special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 4, both the holding display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of holds of the second special symbol is not limited to this.

(Display unit for probability change notification)
The probability change notification display unit 167 can be turned on during execution of the probability change control described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probabilistic change notification display unit 167 may be turned on while the probabilistic change control is being executed. However, for example, the probabilistic change control may be turned on so that it cannot be visually recognized that the probabilistic change control is being executed. You may keep it secret that it is running.

However, when the power is cut off during the execution of the probabilistic control, the data indicating that the probabilistic control is being executed is not lost due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described later. Therefore, when the power is cut off during the execution of the probability change control and then the power is turned on, the probability change notification display unit 167 is turned on in such a manner that the probability change control is being performed.

Even if it is concealed whether or not the probability change control is being executed before the power is turned off, when the power is turned on, the probability change notification display unit 167 is turned on. By doing so, it is configured so that it can be grasped that the probability change control is being executed.

(Display unit for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on while the time saving control described later is being executed, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In the present embodiment, the time-saving notification display unit 168 has, for example, a first time-saving notification display unit 168a and a second time-saving notification display unit 168b, but the number of time-saving notification display units 168 is the same. Not limited.

Further, although the details will be described later, the time-saving game state includes the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. Then, for example, the combination of lighting or extinguishing by the first time saving notification display unit 168a and the second time saving notification display unit 168b is configured so that it is possible to grasp which time saving gaming state is.

The time reduction notification display unit 168 may turn on the first time reduction notification display unit 168a and / and the second time reduction notification display unit 168b according to the time reduction control being executed. By turning on or off in a mode in which it is not possible to visually grasp whether or not it is being executed or the type of time reduction control being executed (for example, all lights are turned off, all lights are turned on, and the mode is not related to the time saving control being executed). It may be concealed so that the fact that the time reduction control is being executed and the type of the time reduction control being executed cannot be grasped by appearance. In particular, it may be possible to grasp from the appearance whether or not the time saving control is being executed, but it may be difficult to grasp which time saving control is being executed from the appearance, so execution is performed. By keeping the type of time reduction control inside secret, it is possible to enhance the interest.

However, when the power is cut off during the execution of the time reduction control, not only the data indicating that the time reduction control is being executed but also the data indicating the type of the time reduction control being executed are obtained by the function of the backup capacitor 207 described later. Does not disappear. Therefore, when the power is cut off during the execution of the time reduction control and then the power is turned on, the time reduction notification display unit 168 can be visually grasped that the time reduction control is in progress and the type of the time reduction control being executed. Turns on or off.

Before the power was turned off, the power was turned on even if the time reduction control was being executed or the type of the time reduction control being executed was kept secret so that it could not be visually grasped. In this case, the time saving notification display unit 168 is configured to be turned on or off in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of the time saving control being executed can be visually grasped.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 300 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game, and payout / launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to the game operation, and the like, and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read / write memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main ROM 202, the main RAM 203, the initial reset circuit 204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 200 has an I / O port 205 connected so as to be communicable with various devices and the like, a command output port 206 connected so as to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 300, and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, in the main control circuit 200, the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, the normal symbol hold display unit 162, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164, and the first special symbol hold display unit 165 , The second special symbol hold display unit 166, the probability change notification display unit 167, the time reduction notification display unit 168, the general electric solenoid 148, the special electric solenoid 135, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170, the error notification monitor 172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. Further, in the error notification monitor 172, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a setting function described later, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process are in progress. It is also possible to display a code or the like during setting confirmation indicating. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a display of a special symbol (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the first start port switch 121, the second start port switch 141, the pass gate switch 127, the count switch 132, the general winning port switch 123, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 200. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is output to the main control circuit 200 via the I / O port 205.

Further, the main control circuit 200 is used when data is transmitted to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. External terminal board 184, setting key 174 operated when changing or checking the set value if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, backup data stored in the main RAM 203 is stored in the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation of is connected. In the present embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the set value described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 of the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 174 and / and backs up. Those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 176 are also included.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / emission control circuit 400 and the power supply circuit 450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the first pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and image data. Is provided with a D / A converter or the like that converts the data as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing decorative symbols, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 32. The voice control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the converted voice signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or a plurality of accessories in the staging accessory group 58). The accessory control circuit 307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout / launch control circuit]
The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout / launch control circuit 400 launches a payout device 82 and a game ball capable of paying out the game balls. A launching device 6 capable of enabling the ball lending, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82, and controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button (both not shown) for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored. For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 400 applies electric power to the launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the rotation operation of the launch handle 62 in the clockwise direction. It supplies and controls the launch of the game ball.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / emission control circuit 400, and the like.

A power switch 95 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying the power required for the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of the game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of the game state. The game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow but a flow that can be grasped by appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation of a player or the like, and when the game ball wins a prize in various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 120 or the like), the gaming ball The payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process of a special symbol is executed based on a winning of a game ball to the start ports 120 and 140, and whether or not to shift to a big hit game state is determined. Further, in the ordinary symbol game, for example, a hit determination process of the ordinary symbol is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126, and the ordinary electric accessory 146 is operated to win a winning opening (second in this embodiment). This is a game for determining whether or not to open the starting port 140). In this specification, the "special symbol game" may be referred to as "game", but "game" is a term used in a broad concept, and for example, an operation unit such as a normal symbol game or an effect button 54 ( For example, a game for staging using (see FIG. 1) is also included in the "game".

Further, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed). (Until the passage of time) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is derived and then the game is controlled to the big hit game state, the game is considered to be one special symbol game until the end of the big hit game state. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the small hit is not included in the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, but in the pachinko gaming machine in which the small hit is included in the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the hit determination of the special symbol is included. If the result of the process is derived and then controlled to the small hit game state, one special symbol game is set up to the end of the small hit game state.

When the stop display mode indicating the jackpot in the special symbol game is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In the big hit game state, a round game is executed in which the big winning opening 131 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30,000 msec) by the operation of the special electric accessory 133, and the possibility of winning the big winning opening 131 is relatively high. Be done.

Further, when the stop display mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 in the normal symbol game, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It becomes an open state, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting port 140 is relatively increased.

The game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game different from these may be able to be executed.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the special symbol game, the special symbol start winning process performed when there is a prize (passing) to the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, and the special symbol are mainly performed. This includes special symbol control processing, etc., which is performed based on the establishment of the start condition of.

When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 120 or the second starting opening 140, the special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, special symbol hit determination random value, special symbol) from various counters for the special symbol (for example, special symbol hit determination counter, symbol determination counter, etc.) The symbol random value, the reach determination random value, and various random values such as the effect selection random value) are extracted (acquired), respectively. Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even while the special symbol control process is being executed.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied. When the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the hit determination process of the special symbol for determining whether or not it is a "big hit" is performed by referring to the random value for the special symbol hit determination extracted from the special symbol hit determination counter. .. After that, the stop symbol determination process for determining the stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter of the special symbol and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, if the probability change flag is on, the probability change control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, when the probability variation flag is off, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively low probability, and when the probability variation flag is on, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively high probability. Is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "big hit" is referred to as a "big hit probability".

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the probability change control. When the probability change flag is on, the game progresses in the game state in which the probability change control is executed (for example, the high probability time-short game state in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game progresses in a game state in which the probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time short game state).

Next, the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the hit determination processing of the above-mentioned special symbol, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is referred to. (Variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the variable display control process of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, a display effect such as a decorative pattern or a character effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a sound effect such as a sound or a sound effect output from the speaker 32, etc. The effect control process is performed. The staging control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the variable display control process and the effect control process of the special symbol are completed, and when it is a big hit, the big hit game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the big hit game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and the game state transition control process to the non-big hit game state that is not a big hit is performed. In this case, the gaming state shifts according to the type of jackpot. For example, when both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to the big hit type, the game shifts to the high probability time saving gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol includes a small hit, the small hit is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. Further, although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a time saving hit, which will be described later, the game shifts to the time saving game state.

Then, each time the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

If a game ball is won in the starting openings 120 and 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start winning process is executed. Further, the start information of the special symbol extracted at the time of winning the game ball to the start ports 120 and 140 (for example, the random value for determining the special symbol hit, the symbol random value of the special symbol, the random value for reach determination, and the effect selection). Various data such as various random values such as random values) are held until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the starting information of the special symbol can be reserved up to a total of eight by the four starting information of the first special symbol and the four starting information of the second special symbol. , The number of start information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the start information of the first special symbol may be reserved more than the start information of the second special symbol, or the start information of the second special symbol may be reserved more than the start information of the first special symbol. You may do it.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 7, it is extracted when the game ball is won (passed) to the starting openings 120 and 140 between the time when the special symbol is started and the starting condition is satisfied. Based on the start information, a look-ahead determination (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 described later) for determining a win (whether or not a "big hit" is won) or a fluctuation pattern is performed prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol, and this look-ahead determination is performed. It may be provided with a look-ahead effect function that performs a predetermined effect based on the result. The pre-reading determination may be performed before the start information extracted by winning the game ball to the start ports 120 and 140 is reserved, or may be performed after the start information is reserved.

[1-3-2. Ordinary design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol start passing process performed mainly when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and the normal symbol start condition are satisfied. It includes ordinary symbol control processing, etc., which are performed based on the above.

When the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, the random value for the normal symbol hit determination) is extracted (acquired) from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and the extracted start information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination random value extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and hits the normal symbol as to whether or not it is "normal symbol hit". The determination process is executed, and then the variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, performs a variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and performs a predetermined effect. Execute the staging control process. The staging control process may not be executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal hit symbol indicating "normal symbol hit" is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Is determined. When it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit is derived, the main CPU 201 executes the game control process for the normal symbol. In this game control process per normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is activated, and a winning ball is won in the winning opening (for example, in the present embodiment, for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)). It becomes an open state where (passing) is possible or easy. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the game control process for the normal symbol and ends the normal symbol control process.

In the gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) in which the time reduction control is not executed, the probability that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control is a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol as compared with the time when the time saving control is not executed, and a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the first prize opening) by operating the ordinary electric accessory 146. 2 The control in which at least one of the electric support controls for increasing the frequency of opening the starting port 140 (see FIG. 4)) is performed corresponds to this. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

Electric support control improves the time saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per ordinary symbol", the variable display time of the ordinary symbol, and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It is a control to make it. The time saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and is a winning probability of "normal symbol hit". , The variable display time of the ordinary symbol, or / and the opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. Further, improving the time saving performance means, for example, making it easier to win a game ball in a winning opening (for example, in the present embodiment, for example, a second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)). That is, when the electric support control is executed, the winning probability of "per ordinary symbol" is increased, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and / or the ordinary electric accessory is increased as compared with the case where the electric support control is not executed. The winning of prizes is facilitated by 146 (increasing the number of opening times, extending the opening time, shortening the waiting time, etc.).

Then, each time the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

If the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. Further, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, the random value for determining the hit of the normal symbol) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is reserved until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is performed in the order in which it is held, and when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the variable display of the start information held first among the start information of the reserved normal symbol is displayed. Run.

In addition, various random value (for example, 1st special symbol hit determination random value, 1st special symbol symbol random value, 1st special symbol reach determination random value, 2nd special symbol hit determination random value, 2nd The extraction method of the symbol random value of the special symbol, the reach determination random value of the second special symbol, the normal symbol hit determination random value, etc.) is within a predetermined range (width) by executing the program by the main CPU 201. A soft random number method for generating a random number value may be used, or a hard random number method for extracting a random number value from a counter in a random number generator in which a random number is updated at a predetermined cycle may be used.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly classified into a non-big hit game state and a big hit game state. In the non-big hit game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when the big hit is derived as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the game shifts from the non-big hit game state to the big hit game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed even in the big hit game state. The description of the small hit game state will be omitted.

The non-big hit game state includes a low probability state in which the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and a high probability gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high. It can be roughly divided.

The high-accuracy gaming state includes a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (high-accuracy high-based) in which the time-saving control is executed. Although not included in the high-accuracy gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 8, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (high-accuracy low-base state) in which the time-saving control is not executed is the high-accuracy gaming state. It may be included in the state.

The low probability state includes a normal gaming state in which the time saving control is not executed (low probability low base) and a time saving gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (low probability high base).

Further, the time-saving game state includes an A time-saving game state, a B time-saving game state, and a C time-saving game state.

The A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that can be changed after the end of a specific big hit game state, and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or the game is changed to the big hit game state, the A time-saving game state is changed. finish. When the A time saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the normal game state in principle.

In the B time saving game state, for example, the jackpot game state has ended, the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high probability game state (that is, the game state in which the probability change flag is off) has started, and the RAM cleared, which will be described later. When the variable display number (for example, the ceiling counter) of the special symbol starting from such a thing reaches the ceiling value (for example, 1000 times), it is a time-saving game state in which the transition is possible, and the specified number of special symbol games are executed. When the game state is changed to the big hit game state, the B time saving game state ends. When the B time reduction game state ends by executing the special symbol game a predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the normal game state in principle.

The C time-saving game state is a time-saving game state in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol performed in the low probability state is "time-saving hit", and can be transferred when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived. When the special symbol game of the specified number of times determined by winning the "time reduction hit" is executed or the game is shifted to the big hit game state, the C time reduction game state ends. When the C time reduction game state ends by executing the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games, the game state shifts to the normal game state in principle. For example, when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games are executed, the C time-saving game state continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether or not a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed in an overlapping manner, the transition condition to the time-saving gaming state is satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, or the transition condition to the plurality of time-saving gaming states is satisfied at the same time. Doing so is referred to as "overlapping" time-saving gaming states. Then, when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the control of the main CPU 201 internally activates any of the overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, the overlapping time-saving gaming states are internally activated. Operating in parallel is called "overlapping execution". However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving game states in an overlapping manner, the time-saving control actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving gaming states. That is, even when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the player understands that the time-saving game state is controlled to any one of the plurality of time-saving game states.

Next, the transition of the gaming state will be described.

Even if it is controlled to a normal game state, a time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), and a high-accuracy game state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving game state), a special symbol If the result of the hit determination process is a big hit, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to shift to any of a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a high-accuracy game state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving game state), depending on the game specifications. However, the time-saving game state that can be shifted when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled to a high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state does not shift to a time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state, except for some pachinko gaming machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, the short-time gaming state or the normal gaming state does not shift to the high-accuracy gaming state unless it goes through the jackpot gaming state.

When controlled to the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, but it is not possible to shift to the A time saving gaming state unless the jackpot gaming state is passed. However, since the game shifts to the normal gaming state when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time saving gaming state, it is possible to shift from the A time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. Regardless of whether the game is controlled in the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, the game shifts to the normal game state when the specified number of special symbol games are executed. It is also possible to shift from the gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, the transition between the time-saving gaming states will be described.

When controlled to the A time-saving game state, the number of times that can be executed in the A time-saving game state is set to be less than the ceiling value that is the transition condition to the B time-saving game state. There is no transition to the time-saving game state. Further, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the big hit game state, the B time saving game state does not shift to the A time saving game state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the A time saving game state is "time saving hit", the transition condition to the C time saving game state is satisfied, so that the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state may overlap. .. However, as described above, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the big hit game state, the C time saving game state does not shift to the A time saving game state.

When controlled to the B time-saving game state, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the transition condition to the C time-saving game state is satisfied, and the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are set. Can overlap. Further, even when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction game state may overlap.

When controlled to the C time saving game state, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the transition condition to the C time saving game state is satisfied, and the C time saving game state and the C time saving game state are set. Can overlap.

The details of the duplication of time-saving gaming states will be described later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probabilistic control nor time saving control is executed, a high probabilistic time saving gaming state in which both probabilistic change control and time saving control are executed, and time saving control in which probabilistic change control is not executed but time saving control is performed. A low-probability time-saving gaming state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 201 can advance the game in any of these gaming states. However, the gaming state advanced by the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal gaming mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed is the regular gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes a control for displaying, for example, a striking method, which is regarded as a normal game mode, in a display area of the display device 7. The "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is not the most disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among the plurality of game modes (for example, the launch mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each set value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a plurality of setting values such as setting 1 to setting 6 are used by using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6), and the like. It can be set to one of the set values. In the case of such a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes the hit determination process of the special symbol based on the set set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag is off (for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-shortening game state in this embodiment) in which the probability change control is not executed is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the second special. Regardless of which of the symbol hit determination processes is executed, for example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about. It is 1/304, about 1/299 with setting 5, and about 1/294 with setting 6. Further, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag for which the probability change control is executed is on (for example, in the high probability time-short game state in this embodiment) is about 1/77 in the setting 1 and about 1/76 in the setting 2. Setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72.

In addition, unlike the big hit probability, the time saving hit probability is a common probability for all set values. For example, the time saving hit probability when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is executed is 1/160, and the time saving hit probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed is 1/140. There is. The time saving hit probability may be different between the case where the hit determination process of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed, but it may be the same.

However, even if the time reduction hit probability is a common probability for all the set values, the time reduction continuation rate (for example, the number of time reductions set) may be different depending on the set value. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times is set as the number of time reductions, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. You may do it.

Although the small hit is not included in the lottery target in the first pachinko gaming machine, the small hit may be included in the lottery target. When the small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit probability may be a common probability for all the set values. In addition, when a small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit is won only when the hit determination process of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. You may make it available. In this case, in the hit determination process of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to the mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not the small hit is won is not performed, whether or not the small hit is won with the small hit probability set to 0. May be an embodiment in which the determination is made.

The above-mentioned time saving hit probability and the small hit probability when the small hit is included in the lottery target are common probabilities for all the set values as described above, but the probability is not limited to this and may differ depending on the set value. good.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for all the set values, but the jackpot probability is not limited to this, and is, for example, the jackpot probability common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, and common to the setting 3 and the setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of set values, such as the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability common to the setting 5 and the setting 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which a game ball is controlled to a big hit game state when a game ball wins in a specific winning opening, the winning probability in the specific winning opening may be different according to a set value. It is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 10 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9 as an example.

The hit determination table of the special symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the special symbol, that is, based on the random value for the special symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball wins the starting openings 120 and 140, the "time reduction" is achieved. It is a table referred to when determining "hit", "big hit" or "missing" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are "time saving hit", "big hit" and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small hits) are not included, but the first starting port 120 or / and When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

As described above, the special symbol hit determination random value is a random value used in the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination random value is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for determination for special symbol hit determination determined as "time reduction hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding time reduction hit Relationship with judgment value data, special symbol hit determined as "big hit" Relationship between range (width) of random value for judgment and corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as "miss" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random value and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

In the present specification, when the value of the probability change flag is "0", the probability change flag is off, and when the value of the probability change flag is "1", the probability change flag is on.

Further, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 has a "time saving hit", a "big hit", or a "big hit" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value, as in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. Decide on "missing". In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for determination for special symbol hit determination determined as "time reduction hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding time reduction hit Relationship with judgment value data, special symbol hit determined as "big hit" Relationship between range (width) of random value for judgment and corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as "miss" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random value and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 is set to ". It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". , Judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 is "time saving hit". And the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". , Judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 is set to "time saving hit". , And the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". , Judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing". , The judgment value data is determined as "missing judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 is "time saving hit". And the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". , Judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing". , The judgment value data is determined as "missing judgment value data".

As described above, in this embodiment, for example, among the special symbol hit determination random values generated in the range of 0 to 65535, 0 to a predetermined width (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the first special symbol hit determination process). Is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time saving determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data. Further, the tail end from the predetermined value (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Further, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing so, for example, when the probability change flag is changed from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is increased (or reduced). It is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other determination value data (for example, time saving hit determination value data) simply by increasing the size.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed and the winning of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making the probability different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed is the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making it higher than the winning probability of "", it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in a normal game state, which tends to be a monotonous game.

However, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the first special symbol is performed. May be. In this case, for example, if the "time saving game state" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is executed repeatedly, and if the "time saving game state" is won just before the end of the time saving game state, the time saving game state is changed. It will be substantially extended, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, the "time saving hit" can be won regardless of whether the probability change flag is on or off. However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state), the main CPU 201 controls the probability variation flag to the time saving gaming state if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving game state", but the probability variation flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving gaming state.

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins at the start ports 120 and 140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This table is referenced when the "design specification command" is selected. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the "symbol specification command" is a special symbol. This is a command to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 can be used as a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 can be used as a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z11" and select "zA10" as the symbol specification command.

In this embodiment, the determination value data is determined based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 10). (See FIG. 11), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the winning of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value and the special symbol symbol random value.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12A is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is referred to when deciding according to the symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of, for example, a region of 0 to 7. It is composed of a 1-byte control signal. Each region of 0 to 7 of the first special symbol has a one-to-one correspondence with any of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. For example, the area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, the area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, the area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, and the area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d. The region 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, the region 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, the region 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163 g, and the region 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to. Corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each region of 0 to 7 of the second special symbol has a one-to-one correspondence with any of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. For example, the area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, the area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, the area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, and the area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d. The second special symbol area 4 corresponds to 164e, the second special symbol area 5 corresponds to 164f, the second special symbol area 6 corresponds to 164 g, and the second special symbol area 7 corresponds to. Corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the LED display mode (display mode per time saving) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. Will be done. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and the first special symbol. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the above is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163b corresponding to 1 and the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163c corresponding to 2 and the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 has the LED 164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and the second special symbol. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164b corresponding to the region 1 of the above and the LED 164h corresponding to the region 7 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 has the LED 164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol and the area of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164c corresponding to 2 and the LED 164h corresponding to the region 7 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the LED display mode (big hit display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and the first special symbol. It is determined to stop and display the first special symbol display unit 163 in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to the region 4 of the above and the LED 163g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163f corresponding to 5 and the LED 163g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. The first special symbol is displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to 4 is turned on, the LED 163f corresponding to the region 5 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163 g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. It is determined to stop and display the unit 163. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 has the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164e corresponding to 4 and the LED 164 g corresponding to the region 6 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 has the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164f corresponding to 5 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the LED display mode (missing display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and the others. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED of the above is turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and the other LEDs. Is determined to stop and display the second special symbol display unit 164 in such a manner that the light is turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stop mode of the special symbol based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the control signal corresponding to the determined mode is transmitted to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164. It outputs to each of the constituent LEDs and controls the stop mode of the special symbol led out to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164.

In FIG. 12A, the LED display mode derived from the first special symbol display unit 163 and the LED display mode derived from the second special symbol display unit 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable that the control signal is transmitted separately by the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164.

FIG. 12B is an example of a table showing an idea related to the determination of the stop mode of the decorative symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 12B, the stop mode (symbol combination) of the decorative symbol derived when the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display device 7 is stopped is determined according to the symbol designation command. To.

Since only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub CPU 1301 can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is controlled so that the display effect of the special symbol being performed is performed by the display device 7. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display effect in such a manner that it can be grasped whether the special symbol that is variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol displayed on the display device 7 is composed of 9 symbols, for example, 1 to 9 on the left, and 10 symbols, for example, 1 to 9 and a time-saving symbol, on the middle symbol. , The symbol on the right is composed of nine symbols, for example, 1 to 9. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a time-saving hit. By stopping and displaying the middle symbol with the time reduction symbol, the player can grasp that the time reduction hit has been won. Further, in the present embodiment, the odd-numbered symbol is defined as a symbol having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the even-numbered symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small hit, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small hit, for example, the symbol constituting the middle symbol has a small hit symbol. (A symbol that is stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, the sub CPU 301 stops and displays the middle symbol with the small hit symbol, so that the player can grasp that the small hit has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 sets a decorative symbol, for example. , The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the even symbol, and the middle symbol is stopped at the time saving symbol.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol, for example, the left symbol and the right symbol with odd symbols. And stop the middle symbol at the time saving symbol. When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), the symbol designation command is "z2" or "z8", as can be seen with reference to FIG. 13 described later. Compared with the case of "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1" or "z7"), the number of time reductions set is large, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit"), the sub CPU 301 uses the decorative symbol, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol as odd symbols. Stop at the same pattern (doublet).

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit"), the sub CPU 301 uses the decorative symbol, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol as even symbols. Stop at the matching pattern (doublet). As can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command "zA4" is used when the probability change flag is set to ON after the end of the jackpot game state (when the selected symbol command is "z4"). There are cases where the probability change flag is not set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub CPU 301 controls to stop the decorative symbol at the even-numbered identical symbols (doublet). In the big hit game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that the hit is a probability change hit (a hit in which the probability change flag is set to ON).

Further, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later. Compared to the case of "", the expected value that the probability change flag is set to on after the end of the big hit game state is small. In this respect, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8", the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "missing"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol with a loose stitch or reach loss. For example, the staggered pattern has a different stop mode between the symbol that is stopped first (for example, the left symbol) and the symbol that is stopped second (for example, the right symbol), and all of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol are mutually exclusive. Different stopping modes correspond. In reach loss, the symbol that is stopped first (for example, the left symbol) and the symbol that is stopped second (for example, the symbol on the right) are common, but the symbol that is stopped last (for example, the middle symbol) is another symbol (for example, left). A stop mode different from that of the symbol and the symbol on the right) corresponds.

In FIG. 12B, the decorative symbol stop mode corresponding to the symbol designation command (for example, when the symbol designation command is “zA1”, the left symbol “2”, the middle symbol “time reduction”, and the right symbol “4”) is displayed. Although illustrated, the stopping mode shown in the column of the stopping mode of the decorative symbol in FIG. 12B is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the mode of the jackpot game state (more specifically, for example, the number of rounds) or / and the mode of the subsequent game state, depending on the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol. It will be referred to when making a decision. The mode of the gaming state after that shows the mode of the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving gaming state without being controlled to the big hit gaming state, so that the mode of the subsequent gaming state is the C time saving gaming state. The aspect is shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the time saving number to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 50 times. To decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving times to 100 times. To decide. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned display mode of the time reduction hit to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then the main CPU 201 derives the display mode. Without controlling to the big hit game state, the time saving flag is set to ON and the determined time saving number is set, and it becomes possible to control to the C time saving game state. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the big hit gaming state is not determined because it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. It is supposed to be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set number of time reductions may be different depending on the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions set according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. Is different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the subsequent game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. It will be possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time saving gaming state even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 201 draws a "time saving hit" as shown in FIG. 10, and the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". In this case, the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" is won is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, but the high accuracy gaming state is continued without being controlled to the C time saving gaming state. You may do it.

Further, the main CPU 201 performs a lottery of "time saving hit" when the probability change flag is on, and even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the display mode of the loss is forcibly changed to the special symbol display unit. It may be derived to 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the random value for special symbol hit judgment, that is, "time saving hit" is included in the lottery result (result of the hit judgment processing of the special symbol). A non-hit determination process may be performed. In this case, when the probability variation flag is off, the time saving hit determination value data is assigned to the special symbol hit determination random value, and when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the width of the random number value assigned to the time saving hit judgment value data when the probability variation flag is off is the loss judgment value data, the big hit judgment value data, or the loss judgment value instead of the time saving hit judgment value data. It is assigned to both the data and the jackpot judgment value data.

In this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variation flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", It may be possible to shift to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the mode of the hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 as the mode of the big hit game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to ON, and that both the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set to 10,000 times. In these cases, the main CPU 201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 and then control the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, control the jackpot gaming state to a high-accuracy time-short game state. Will be.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 as the mode of the big hit game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to ON, and that both the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set to 10,000 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, and can control the jackpot gaming state to a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Become.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 as the mode of the big hit game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON. In addition, it is decided to set the number of time reductions to be set to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, and can control the jackpot gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 as the mode of the big hit game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON. Further, it is decided to set the number of time reductions to be set to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 164, and can control the jackpot gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is also the A time-saving gaming state.

The time saving performance in the highly accurate time saving gaming state is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 is in the mode of the big hit gaming state and None of the subsequent aspects of the gaming state are set. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 201 continuously controls the game state up to that point without shifting the game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the mode of the big hit gaming state and the subsequent mode as described above. Since none of the modes of the gaming state is set, it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the big hit gaming state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 13.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 10, and the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140. Judgment value data is determined based on the random value for hit determination (winning determination is performed), and the winning (“short-time hit”, “big hit” or “missing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. 11, and the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first start port 120 or the second start port 140 and the above determination value. The selected symbol command is determined based on the data, and the type of display mode (type of time saving hit or type of jackpot) derived from the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined. It should be noted that the above-mentioned winning determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that the determination is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the confirmation display. Not the purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is “z5”) or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state controlled when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50. Time (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). That is, the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction gaming state is higher than the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous to the player than the C time-saving game state, the position of the "big hit" can be increased.

Instead of setting the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction gaming state to be higher than the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state. May be set to be higher than the expected value of the number of time reductions in the time reduction game state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. In FIG. 14, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol commands are “z5” and “z10”). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z7") or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z7"). When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In this way, by making the C time saving game state more advantageous to the player than the A time saving game state, the position of "time saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if the state of not winning the "big hit" continues for a long period of time, if the "time saving hit" is won, it is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time saving gaming state, so that the decline in interest is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

In the present specification, as in the case of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag is off when the value of the time saving flag is "0", and the time saving flag is turned on when the value of the time saving flag is "1".

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203 like the probability change flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the time saving control.

The time reduction number is a variable display number of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time reduction control. That is, for example, when the number of time reductions is determined to be "50", if the special symbol is variably displayed 50 times without winning a big hit in this time reduction game state, this time reduction game state ends and the non-time reduction game ends. It shifts to a state (for example, a normal game state).

The probability variation number and time reduction number "10000" shown in FIG. 13 and the like mean that the probability variation control can be continuously executed until it is determined to be a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot) after the end of the jackpot game state. ..

[1-4-6. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 15 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 15 indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a production. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time saving hit or a big hit. Note that FIG. 15 is a variation pattern table of the special symbol when the probability variation flag is off, and the variation pattern table of the special symbol when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140, the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Determine the variation pattern. The variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIG. 15 is a table referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol of S96 of FIG. 28, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random value for reach determination, or /. And, it is determined based on a random number value for effect selection and the like, but the determination is not limited to this, and may be determined based on another value or the like in place of or in addition to any of the above.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag when the effect selection random value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is a specific random value. The sub CPU 301 that has received the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability variation flag is on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may determine.

The main CPU 201 may set the look-ahead flag (so that the look-ahead effect is performed) even when the time saving flag is on or the probability change flag is on. Further, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the look-ahead flag may be set (so that the look-ahead effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The determined fluctuation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301 via the command output port 206. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined may be different for each set value, for example, by changing the range of the random value for effect selection.

Further, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to whether or not the time reduction flag is on regardless of the type of time reduction. , Not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be different depending on the type of time reduction. For example, the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time saving game state]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are prepared as the time-saving game state. These time-saving gaming states will be described below.

The time-saving game state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". Is. That is, in this embodiment, the condition for shifting to the A time saving game state is to win a big hit (a big hit whose selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the condition for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the condition for hindering the transition to the A time-saving gaming state is satisfied instead of always transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state (for example, when the backup is cleared). Etc.), do not shift to the A time saving game state.

Further, the end condition of the A time saving game state is determined in response to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and the case where the selected symbol command is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the set number of time reductions (hereinafter referred to as "A time reduction specified number of times") is executed (see the column of "number of time reductions" in FIG. 13). Of the above, when any of the conditions is satisfied.

The B time-saving gaming state starts from, for example, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high-accuracy gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) starts. As a result, the ceiling counter is updated (1 addition), and the time-saving gaming state is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the condition for shifting to the B time saving game state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time saving game state may be made when the variable display of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final change") is started, or when the ceiling final change is completed. This may be the case when the variable display of the next special symbol of the final fluctuation of the ceiling is started. That is, the timing of transition to the B time saving game state may be any time between the start of the final ceiling fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the final change of the ceiling is "missing", the display mode of the losing is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, but the game shifts to the B time saving game state. Become. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays to the player that the condition for transitioning to the B time saving gaming state is satisfied (for example, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value in the present embodiment) (for example, the decorative symbol is a special symbol). It may be controlled to display on the display device 7 (an effect in which the character is stopped, a special effect is performed by the character, or both of them are performed). Even if the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the condition for hindering the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied instead of always transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state (for example, special in the ceiling final change). When the result of the hit determination process of the symbol is a big hit, etc.), the game is not shifted to the B time saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability change flag is on, and is always counted when the probability change flag is off, regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the game is controlled to the B time saving game state unless the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit". In a pachinko gaming machine that includes a small hit in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the display mode of the small hit. The B time-saving gaming state may be started when is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164, or the B-time saving gaming state may be started after the end of the small hit gaming state. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the display mode of the small hit is only displayed on the special symbol display units 163 and 164. , The display effect indicating to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value as described above is not displayed. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may be different depending on the set value. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state without being controlled to the B time reduction game state.

The ceiling counter has a backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, when the jackpot game state is controlled, and when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process). When a switch other than the above (for example, setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, in the case of a gaming machine whose normal symbol hit probability can be changed, when the high probability of normal symbol hit probability ends, etc. It is reset when the condition of is satisfied. Then, when the ceiling counter is allowed to be updated, the ceiling counter is updated each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. For example, if the probability change flag is on, updating the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. The ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be set in advance as a pachinko gaming machine-specific one instead of being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 is at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol unless the probability change flag is turned on after the end of the jackpot game state. Update the ceiling counter (+1). Also, if the probability change flag is on after the end of the big hit game state, the ceiling counter will not be updated even if the special symbol is variablely displayed. Updates the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol after is turned off. In addition, in the case of the specification that performs the probability change fall lottery, the probability change flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, so when updating the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the special symbol If the probability change flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications in which the probabilistic fall lottery is performed by the main CPU 201, when the sub CPU 301 receives a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the sub CPU 301 has an effect suggesting that the probabilistic fall lottery has been won, or a high probability game. It is preferable not to perform an effect suggesting a transition from the state to the low probability gaming state. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the start time of counting by the ceiling counter, that is, the transition timing to the B time reduction game state based on the display effect displayed on the display device 7, which is interesting. It is possible to provide a certain game quality. When it is difficult to grasp the transition timing to the B time reduction gaming state, for example, by displaying the countdown effect suggesting the transition timing to the B time reduction gaming state and the countdown effect of the Gase on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , It will be possible to further enhance the interest.

Further, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the main CPU 201 starts the first variable display of the special symbol after the clear process in the work area in the RAM 203. Update the ceiling counter (+1) at the hour or end.

Further, when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, a setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 performs the first variable display of the special symbol after the other switch is operated. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the start or end of.

Further, the end condition of the B time saving game state is the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "the following"). This is the case where one of the conditions is satisfied, that is, the variable display of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) for (referred to as "B time reduction specified number of times") is executed. "When the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of B time reductions is executed", which is one of the end conditions of the B time reduction game state, is the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of B time reductions (hereinafter, "B time reduction final change"). It may be when (referred to as) is started, or when the B time reduction final fluctuation is completed. That is, the end timing of the B time reduction game state may be from the start of the B time reduction final variation to the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the B time reduction final variation.

The C time saving game state is a time saving game state controlled when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit". That is, the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is that the time saving hit (the selected symbol command is a time saving hit of "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8") is won, and the display mode of the time saving hit is a special symbol. It is derived (confirmed display) to the display units 163 and 164. Even if the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the condition for hindering the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied instead of always transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state (for example, the B time-saving gaming state). If the specification is such that the C time-saving game state is not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", etc.), the C time-saving game Do not move to the state. In addition, when the condition for hindering the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied even though the transition condition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 hits the time-saving even though the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is not satisfied. The control for deriving the display mode of the above to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is executed.

Further, the end condition of the C time saving game state is determined according to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and the case where the selected symbol command is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the set number of time reductions (hereinafter referred to as "C time reduction specified number of times") is executed (see the column of "number of time reductions" in FIG. 13). Of the above, when any of the conditions is satisfied. As for the C time reduction specified number of times, which is one of the end conditions of the C time reduction game state, the variable display of the special symbol of the time reduction number determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time reduction final variation") starts. It may be when it is done, or when the C time reduction final fluctuation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time reduction game state may be from the start of the C time reduction final variation to the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the C time reduction final variation.

The time saving performance may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. Further, of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the two time-saving game states is the same, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving game states and the other one time-saving game state It may be different from the time saving performance. Further, the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state may be the same.

Further, in addition to the above, for example, the variable display number of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times as the end condition of the A time reduction game state, the end condition of the B time reduction game state, and the end condition of the C time reduction game state. Alternatively, it may be included that the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened a predetermined number of times, a specific opening mode is selected as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146, and the like. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, the fact that the number of small hits has reached the specified number of times may be included in the above-mentioned end condition. Further, a time-saving fall lottery may be performed, and the fact that the time-saving fall lottery has been won may be included in the above-mentioned termination condition.

[1-4-8. Ordinary symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a hit determination table of a normal symbol stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The hit determination table of the normal symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the normal symbol, that is, for the normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game state and the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table referred to when determining "per ordinary symbol" or "missing" by lottery based on the random number value (that is, when executing the ordinary symbol game determination process of S295 of FIG. 43 described later).

As described above, the normal symbol hit determination random value is a random value used in the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random value for determining a normal symbol hit from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "hit the normal symbol" or "missing" based on the extracted random value for determining the hit of the normal symbol. In the normal symbol hit judgment table, the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol hit judgment random value value determined as "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit judgment value data for each type of time reduction. , And, the relationship between the range (width) of the random value for normal symbol hit determination determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in the non-time saving gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state), the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 0 to 79, that is, "normal symbol hit". , Judgment value data is determined as "ordinary symbol hit judgment value data". Further, in the non-time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 0 to 98, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "normal symbol hit", and the determination value data is "normal symbol hit". Judgment value data ”is determined. Further, in the A time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is 99 as "missing", and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 0 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "normal symbol hit", and the determination value data is "normal symbol hit". Judgment value data ”is determined. Further, in the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 0 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "normal symbol hit", and the determination value data is "normal symbol hit". Judgment value data ”is determined. Further, in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

As described above, in this embodiment, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving game state among the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state (shown in FIG. 16). Selection rate (approximate)) is the highest.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving game state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-shortened gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-short-time gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the non-time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is not changed.

It should be noted that the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving game state, the A-time-time-saving game state, the B-time-time-saving game state, and the C-time-time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to make the ratio of the types of ordinary symbols, which will be described later, different for each state without changing the winning probability per ordinary symbol.

[1-4-9. Ordinary symbol judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol judgment table is usually based on the type of time reduction, the above-mentioned judgment value data, and the symbol random value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table referred to when the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the symbol is selected. The "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" is a command for specifying the normal symbol hit symbol determined according to the normal symbol hit type when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random value of the ordinary symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when the ordinary symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the ordinary symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. To.

For example, in the non-time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 does not have any of the normal symbol symbol random values of 0 to 99. , Normal symbol hit selection Select "fz0" as the symbol command.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz1" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and select "fz2" as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69. If the numerical value is any of 70 to 99, "fz3" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz4" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and select "fz5" as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69. If the numerical value is any of 70 to 99, "fz6" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz7" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and select "fz8" as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69. If the numerical value is any of 70 to 99, "fz9" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first determines the determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value by referring to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), and then determines the determination value data. , The normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) is referred to, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value and the normal symbol symbol random value, the winning of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of hitting the normal symbol may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Ordinary symbol per type determination table]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal symbol per type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol hit type determination table sets the open pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 executed in the ordinary symbol game determination process of S295 of FIG. 43, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with the first opening time of 1000 msec and no wait time. It is decided that there will be no second opening. That is, it is determined to be an opening pattern in which the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

When the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with a first opening time of 2000 msec and a wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with a first opening time of 2500 msec and a wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with a first opening time of 3000 msec and a wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 3000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz4" or "fz7", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for the first opening time. It is decided that 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz5" or "fz8", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for the first opening time. It is determined that the wait time is 2000 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is 2000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz6" or "fz9", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for the first opening time. It is determined that the wait time is 2500 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is 2500 msec.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the non-time saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is not. Among the open patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 146 in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving gaming state C, the most advantageous degree is the disadvantageous aspect.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball to the second starting port 140 when the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, and the B time saving. Among the open patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 146 in the gaming state and the C time saving gaming state, the most advantageous degree is the advantageous mode.

Further, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is the hit determination of the normal symbol in the C time saving game state. The degree of advantage is the same as that of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 when the result of the processing is "per ordinary symbol", but the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 19 is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. The variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol executes the variation pattern determination process of the ordinary symbol which is executed in the variable display start process of the ordinary symbol of S293 of FIG. 43 described later when determining the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. When) is referred to. The main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the normal symbol, and is normal based on the game state and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The random value for normal symbol effect selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time saving game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec, regardless of whether the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99. The variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state is the longest among the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 90 to 99. In the case of any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 40 to 79. If any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1000 msec, for example, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1500 msec, for example. To.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 40 to 79. If any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1000 msec, for example, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1500 msec, for example. To.

As described above, the variable display time of the normal symbol per one variable display is A among the variable display times of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state, the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state. The expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state is the shortest. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time until the normal electric accessory 146 is released is the shortest among the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the B time saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the C time saving gaming state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to the time-saving game state]
[1-5-1. Time reduction number set at the time of time reduction]
In the above description, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. However, not limited to this, the number of time reductions set when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the hit determination processing of the special symbol is performed. You may do so.

Further, even in the high probability gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to ON, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may include "time saving hit". In this case, although the main CPU derives the display mode per time reduction to the special symbol display unit, it does not execute the control to shift to the time reduction gaming state, but continuously controls to the high accuracy gaming state. By the way, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine called a so-called ST machine, which turns the probability change flag from on to off when the variable display of a special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times. In such an ST machine, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol performed in the final game as the high probability gaming state is "time saving hit", the time saving hit is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability change flag. When the process of deriving the mode is later, the main CPU may control the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode per time saving.

[1-5-2. Overlapping time-saving game states]
When a plurality of time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving game state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction game state overlap. When the time-saving game states overlap in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner, or the time-saving gaming states may not be overlapped (that is, "time-saving hit" is ignored and the time-saving hit is invalidated). You may do it. In addition, so that the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap, the A time saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the A time saving game state, is smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving game state. It is stipulated.

When the time-saving game states are overlapped, a mode in which the time-saving game states are overlapped and a mode in which the time-saving game states are not overlapped will be described below.

[1-5-2-1. A mode in which time-saving game states are repeatedly executed]
As a mode in which the time-saving game states are repeatedly executed when the time-saving game states overlap, the time-saving game is won in any one of the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C. Occasionally, it is conceivable that the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed and the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is superimposed on one time-saving game state]
When the "time reduction hit" is won in any one of the time reduction game state A, the time reduction game state B, and the time reduction game state C, the main CPU 201 is displayed on the special symbol display unit 163, 164 for the time reduction. Derivation of display mode. In this case, the main CPU 201 adopts the one having a large number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied while maintaining the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state as the time-saving number of times.

For example, if the "time reduction hit" is won in the A time reduction game state and the time reduction remaining number in the A time reduction game state is larger than the time reduction number that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit", the main CPU 201 is A time reduction. While maintaining the time saving performance of the gaming state, unless a "big hit" is derived, the time saving gaming state is controlled until the remaining time saving number of times in the A time saving gaming state is exhausted. To explain by giving specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is 200 times, the "time reduction hit" is won, and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is 50. In the case of times, although the display mode of the time reduction hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the time reduction number from here is as long as the "big hit" is not derived while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. 200 times. Therefore, even if the "time reduction hit" is won in any one of the time reduction game state A, the time reduction game state B, and the time reduction game state C, the appearance of the time reduction number and the time reduction performance is "time reduction". It is the same as the case where the A time saving game state is continued without winning the "hit".

On the other hand, for example, when the "time reduction hit" is won in the A time reduction game state and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is larger than the time reduction remaining number in the A time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 is A. While maintaining the time saving performance of the time saving game state, unless the "big hit" is derived, the time saving gaming state is controlled until the time saving number set based on the "time saving hit" is exhausted. To explain by giving specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is 20 times, the "time reduction hit" is won, and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is 50. In the case of times, the number of time reductions from this point is 50 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state, after that, the special symbol is executed over 30 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. The variable display of is further executed.

[1-5-2-1-2. A mode in which the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 corresponds to the display mode (that is, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Take control.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but in the following, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes the small hit will be described. ..

First, a case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit" or "missing" in the final change of the ceiling will be described.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, if the remaining time saving number in the C time saving game state is larger than the B time saving specified number of times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the C time saving game state. Unless a "big hit" is derived, the game is controlled to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the C time-saving game state is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the number of remaining time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and when the specified number of time reductions in B is 200 times, the C time reduction game state. The number of time reductions from here is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance of. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the appearance of the time reduction frequency and the time reduction performance is the same as the case where the C time reduction game state is continued without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. ..

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction specified number of times is larger than the time reduction remaining number in the C time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. However, unless a "big hit" is derived, the game is controlled to a time-saving game state until the specified number of times of B time-saving is exhausted. Explaining with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time reductions that can be executed in the B time reduction game state is 300 times. In this case, the number of time reductions from this point is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state, after that, the special symbol is executed over 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. The variable display of is further executed.

When the variable display of the special symbol is completed in the final change of the ceiling, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the small hit display mode is derived, and when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "miss", the loss display mode is derived. .. When the small hit display mode is derived, it is controlled to the small hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time saving flag on even during the small hit game state.

Next, in the ceiling final change, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final change, the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state are. The case where it holds will be described. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts the control of the B time saving game state before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is Different controls can be executed depending on whether the control of the B time saving game state is started after being derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164.

First, when the control of the B time reduction game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time reduction hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. At that time, it is already controlled to the B time reduction game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and unless the "big hit" is derived, the time saving number of the B time saving specified number and the time saving number of the C time saving game state is consumed. It is controlled to the time-saving game state.

Next, when the control of the B time saving game state is started after the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. At that time, it is not yet controlled to the B time reduction game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 satisfies the end condition of the time-saving game state (for example, derivation of a big hit display mode, derivation of a small hit or a specific small hit display mode, etc.) while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. Unless otherwise specified, the control is performed in the time-saving game state until the larger number of time-saving times, the B time-saving specified number of times and the time-saving number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, is exhausted. In this case, when the end condition of the time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving performance is maintained or executed is satisfied, the time-saving gaming state may be terminated.

It should be noted that the sub CPU 301 performs the B time reduction when only the transition condition to the B time reduction gaming state is satisfied when the transition condition to the B time reduction gaming state and the transition condition to the C time reduction gaming state are satisfied in the final ceiling change. A special display effect different from the transition display effect and the C time reduction transition display effect performed when only the transition condition to the C time reduction gaming state is satisfied may be performed. Further, instead of this, for example, when the time saving performance in the B time saving game state is maintained, the B time saving transition display effect is performed, and when the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state is maintained, the C time saving transition display effect is performed. The display effect of either the B time reduction transition display effect or the C time reduction transition display effect may be prioritized.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and the B time saving game. It controls the jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time saving performance when executing multiple time saving game states in layers]
In the above, the embodiment in which the C time-saving gaming state is superimposed on one time-saving gaming state and the mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is superimposed on the C time-saving gaming state have been described.

When the specifications are such that a plurality of time-saving game states can be executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state is maintained. In pachinko gaming machines with such specifications, the time saving performance of multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in layers may be different, but the time-saving performance of multiple time-saving gaming states that can be executed in layers may be the same. preferable.

For example, in the case of a specification in which the C time-saving game state can be executed by superimposing the C time-saving game state on one time-saving game state, it is preferable that the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state are the same. Further, when the specifications are such that the B time-saving game state can be superimposed on the C time-saving game state, it is preferable that the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state are the same.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine having specifications that allow a plurality of time-saving gaming states to be executed in an overlapping manner, for example, a time-saving gaming state that can be executed later in comparison to the previously executed time-saving gaming state is executed first. It may be provided with one time saving performance which is the same as that of the current time saving gaming state, and another time saving performance different from this one time saving performance. Then, when the time-saving game state is executed in combination with the time-saving game state executed earlier, one time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving gaming state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving gaming state in the normal gaming state. If it is not executed repeatedly, another time saving performance may be activated.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that can execute the B time-saving game state by superimposing the C time-saving game state on the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state is the same as that of the C time-saving game state, and this one time-saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances with other time-saving performances different from the performance are provided. Then, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, one time saving performance is activated, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, for example, in the normal gaming state which is not in any of the time saving gaming states, the other time saving performance is activated. May be activated.

[1-5-3. A mode in which the time-saving game states are not repeatedly executed]
As a mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed repeatedly, a mode in which a hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which the "time-saving hit" is included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state. It is conceivable that even if the time-saving gaming states overlap, the time-saving gaming states are not executed repeatedly (hereinafter referred to as "the latter aspect"). In the latter aspect, even if one of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state is won in the time-saving game state, this is ignored and the C time-saving game state is repeated. Two modes are conceivable: a mode in which the game is not executed, and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, this is ignored and the B time-saving game state is not executed repeatedly. The above two aspects considered as the latter aspect will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is not superimposed on one time-saving game state]
When the "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B, and the time saving game state C, as described above, the main CPU 201 is displayed on the special symbol display unit 163, 164. , Derive the display mode per time reduction. However, unless the main CPU 201 has a variable display of the last special symbol in one time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving final fluctuation"), the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time-saving game state based on "time-saving hit", and is one. It is controlled to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is exhausted. In this case, being controlled to one time-saving gaming state (excluding the time-saving final fluctuation) is a condition that hinders the transition to the C time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when the "time reduction hit" is won in the time reduction final fluctuation in the time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 is in the one time reduction game state before the display mode of the time reduction hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Different controls can be executed depending on whether the time saving game state ends when the time saving game state ends when the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164.

First, when one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the time-saving hit and then changes to the C time-saving gaming state. Start control.

Next, when one time-saving game state ends when the display mode of time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164, that is, the derivation of the display mode of time-saving hit and the end of one time-saving gaming state are determined. When the interrupt processing is performed within the same interrupt processing, the main CPU 201 may or may not start the control of the C time saving game state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving (confirming display) the display mode per time saving is performed before the ending process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time saving game state. End the time-saving game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode of the time saving game before the ending process of one time saving game state is a condition that hinders the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the process of deriving (confirming display) the display mode of the time saving hit is performed after the ending process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state and controls to the C time saving game state. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time saving performance in one time saving game state, but makes it the time saving performance in the C time saving game state. That is, at the time when the display mode for hitting the time reduction is derived, the main CPU 201 ends the one time reduction game state without controlling to the C time reduction game state if the end processing of the one time reduction game state is not processed. If the end processing of one time-saving game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. A mode in which the B time-saving game state is not superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 corresponds to the display mode (that is, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Take control.

First, in the final change of the ceiling, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "missing" will be described.

In the C time saving game state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "loss", the main CPU 201 consumes the remaining time saving number of times in the C time saving game state. Until it is done, it is controlled to the C time saving game state.

However, when the number of remaining time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 0 in the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start the control of the B time reduction game state according to the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time reduction game state is performed before the start processing of the B time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time reduction game state and controls the B time reduction game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time reduction game state is performed after the start processing of the B time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time reduction game state without controlling to the B time reduction game state. That is, at the time when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time saving game state, if the end processing of the C time saving game state is not processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state without controlling to the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state is finished. If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, the game state is controlled to the B time reduction game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time reduction game state after the start processing of the B time reduction game state is a condition that hinders the transition to the B time reduction game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" in the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and starts controlling the big hit game state.

[1-6. Main control process]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main process (main control main process) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of the main control main process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure signal is at the High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

When it is determined in S11 that the power failure signal is not at the High level (when the determination in S11 is NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when the determination in S11 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the backup clear switch 176 is turned on / off and the setting key 174 is turned on / off. That is, the ON / OFF state of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. Further, in this process, the game permission flag is set to off. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the start wait on the sub control circuit 300 side is performed. The start-up waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 1200.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for the sub-control circuit 300 to start, the main CPU 201 may, for example, check the interrupt request signal, output the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initialize various sensors at predetermined timings. The output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before startup (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, it is determined whether the power failure is normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S14 that the power failure is not normal (NO in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S14 that the power is normally cut off (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then works. The checksum value of the area is collated (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the collation result is abnormal.

When it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, normal (when the determination in S17 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, a NO determination is made, and if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or any of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. If either one is off, a YES judgment is made.

When it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. The processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (when the determination in S18 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). In this process, data for error display is set in the output port of the I / O port 205 to which the signal is output to the performance display monitor 170. As a result, the predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error display is performed. The main CPU 201 enters an endless loop after executing the process of S20.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the collation result of the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch Until it is determined that both of the 176 are on, the game cannot be executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating that the setting has been changed in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and the value indicating that the setting is changed is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the current start state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the start control flag stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, a process of clearing a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like (for example, construction of a work area and address setting) is performed. It should be noted that this process is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs a startup initial setting process. In this process, the initial setting process according to the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) is performed. The details of the initial setting process at startup will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt prohibition process. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power interruption process. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S28. The details of the power interruption process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, the initial value random number of various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a special symbol hit) is updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

When it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor aggregation calculation process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this processing is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

When it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the processing of S26 and performs the processing after S26.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt-prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S37.

In this embodiment, in the main control main process, for example, an interrupt prohibition section of 6 msec (process section of S26 to S35) is performed before execution of various processes related to game control (for example, processes of S37 to S44) described later. Is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition section is set to three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission / reception processing. In this process, a command transmission / reception process for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, a process related to the special symbol game is performed. The details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, a process related to a normal symbol game is performed. The details of this ordinary symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game operation display unit control process. In this process, display data to be output to each display unit of the LED unit 160 (for example, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, etc.) is set. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, external terminal board pulse signal control process, output data setting process, test firing test signal generation process, and the like are performed. The test firing test signal generation process is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the working area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a state monitoring process. In this process, launch position determination process, game abnormality detection determination process, payout abnormality detection determination process, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), the launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

[1-6-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the startup initial setting process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

When it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clear (when S54 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation (when the determination in S54 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power failure processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power interruption process performed in S27 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

When it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (NO determination in S61), the main CPU 201 ends the power interruption process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a checksum value calculation process. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in the corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203, respectively. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the XINT detection flag. Then, after executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs the RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S72.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area or the like of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71 in executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs the demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S72 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S72 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S73 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not held (NO determination in S74), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process. , The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S74 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs processing, S75. Move to.

Returning to S73, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S73 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs processing. Move to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S71 to S75) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the first pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been described, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 140.

[1-6-5. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S75 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the control status number is "0" (when S72 is YES determination), the special symbol management process is the processing target when S73 is YES determination and the second special symbol is the processing target when S74 is YES determination. The first special symbol is the processing target. Further, when the control state number is not "0" (when the determination in S72 is NO), the special symbol being executed is the processing target of the special symbol management process.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S81).

When it is determined in S81 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S81 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S81 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S83. The main CPU 201 performs the processing after S83 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S83 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S84 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S85 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S86 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S87 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S88 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After completing the processes of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variable display start processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S83 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S91).

When it is determined in S91 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S91 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S91 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 10) and using the random value for the special symbol hit determination. Further, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time saving hit, and sets the big hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit. do. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol does not include a small hit, but if the pachinko gaming machine includes a small hit in the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, the hit of the special symbol If the result of the judgment process is a small hit, the small hit flag is set to on. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S94. The time saving hit flag is turned off at the transition to the C time saving gaming state, and the big hit flag is turned off at the start of the big hit gaming state. If the pachinko gaming machine includes a small hit as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the small hit flag is turned off at the start of the small hit gaming state.

In the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined by this process that it is not a big hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a time saving hit is performed. If it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving hit, it is determined to be a loss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S93) of the special symbol (for example, time saving hit, big hit or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a hit type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time saving hit, big hit). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hits are used, but one type of big hit may be used, and one type of hit may be one. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of hits, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may include the small hit, and a plurality of types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S93) of the special symbol, the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), and the random value for reach determination. Or / and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random value for effect selection and the like. It should be noted that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different depending on the game state and the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S96) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15). After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 27) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. S84) will be performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are mainly updated. After executing the process of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt disabled section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S100), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S101)) within the interrupt disabled section. It is preferable to do it in.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

When it is determined in S111 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S111 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S111 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be done. After executing the process of S112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is fixed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions. You may manage the number. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

When it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S121 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S122, when it is determined that the special symbol that is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S122 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 186 (both see FIG. 6) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124. The signal output to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time reduction flag, and a time reduction counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201, for example, performs a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened (S125), a process of setting a big hit signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". Processing (S127), game state specification parameter setting processing (S128), transmission reservation processing (S129) of the jackpot start display command, and the like are performed. By performing the process (S127) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 27). S86) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

Returning to S122, when it is determined in this S122 that the special symbol that is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S122 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving management process (S131). The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, it is possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process (S134) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of loss is derived, the gaming state does not shift.

[1-6-10. Time saving management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a counter update process (S141). The details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs a counter determination process. The details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process, and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time reduction counter update process (S151). The details of the time reduction counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process. The details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time saving counter update process]
Next, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a process when a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner when a plurality of time saving game states are overlapped.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving counter is larger than 0 (S161). In this process, YES is determined when both the time saving flag on and the time saving counter is larger than 0 are satisfied, and NO is determined if either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to on when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state. The probability change flag is set to on when shifting to the high probability gaming state.

The time reduction counter indicates the number of time reductions executed in each of the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, or the C time reduction game state.

When the transition condition to the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state or / and the C time reduction game state is satisfied, the time reduction counter for the time reduction game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is set.

In this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time reduction counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the time reduction game state is terminated when the time reduction counter becomes 0, but this is not limited to this. Instead, an addition method may be adopted in which the time reduction counter is added when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the time reduction game state is terminated when the time reduction counter is set. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time reduction counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time reduction counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the time reduction counter becomes 0 (). The time saving game state may be completed when the time saving counter is set (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time saving number is reached (in the case of the addition method).

In S161, when it is determined that both the time saving flag on and the time saving counter being larger than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S161), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and performs the process. The process returns to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving counter is determined to be larger than 0 in S161 (when the determination in S161 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0. In this process, when the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. When the determination in S163 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S164.

The C time saving counter is a counter set when the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state is satisfied during the time saving gaming state. Although not shown in the flowchart, this C time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time reduction counter, which will be described later, is set.

The time saving mode is a flag set when a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner. In this embodiment, when the time saving mode is configured by, for example, 2 bits, and the C time saving game state is executed overlapping with the time saving game state executed earlier, "time saving mode = 3" is set. Further, when the B time saving game state is executed overlapping with the time saving game state executed earlier, "time saving mode = 2" is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S163 that both the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter being larger than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S163), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time reduction counter. For this process as well, an addition method may be adopted instead of the subtraction method. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter is larger than 0. In this process, when the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. When the determination in S165 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S166.

The B time reduction counter is a counter set when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied during the time reduction game state (in the present embodiment, during the C time reduction game state). Although not shown in the flowchart, this B time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time reduction counter is set.

On the other hand, in S165, when it is determined that both the time reduction mode = 2 and the B time reduction counter is larger than 0 are not satisfied (NO determination in S165), the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction counter update process. , The process is returned to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time reduction counter. For this process as well, an addition method may be adopted instead of the subtraction method. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, when the C time reduction counter = 0 as a result of the processing of S164 or when the B time reduction counter = 0 as a result of the processing of S166, the main CPU 201 is subjected to the time reduction. Set the mode to off (= 0).

By the way, when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, not only the two time-saving gaming states may be overlapped, but also three or more time-saving gaming states may be executed in an overlapping manner. In this case, since the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state do not overlap as described above, the case where three or more time-saving game states overlap is the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state. It corresponds to the case where one or more C time saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability variation flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, when the probability variation flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is stored in the main RAM 203.

The ceiling value is predetermined as a value peculiar to the pachinko gaming machine as a condition for shifting to the B time saving gaming state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot game state ends, the backup clear process is performed, the dedicated operating means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, and the like. The processing may be performed.

In S171, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (when the determination in S171 is NO), that is, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and performs the counter update process (counter update process). (See FIG. 33).

In S171, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (when the determination in S171 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving transition determination process (S181). The details of this time saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving transition process. The details of this time saving transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time reduction counter is smaller than 1.

In S183, when it is determined that the time reduction counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S183), that is, when the time reduction counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S185.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S183 that the time reduction counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S183), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process of S184, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S185.

When it is determined in S183 that the time reduction counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S183), both the B time reduction counter and the C time reduction counter should be smaller than 1 (that is, should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some trouble may occur in executing the process by the main CPU 201, for example, when the B time reduction counter or the time reduction counter is 1 or more even though S183 is a YES determination. , An abnormality alarm may be output, or other abnormality processing may be executed. Further, in place of or in addition to this abnormal time processing, when S183 is determined to be YES, not only the time saving flag is turned off (see S184), but also the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter are reset to shorten the time. Consistency between the counter, the B time reduction counter, and the C time reduction counter may be achieved.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process (S186) of the time saving transition command. The time saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination processing and returns the processing to the time saving management processing (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time saving transition judgment processing]
Next, the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process for shifting to the B time saving game state is performed. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is off (S191).

In S191, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (when S191 is NO determination), that is, when the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process, and performs the process as a counter determination process (counter determination process). (See FIG. 36). That is, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible not to shift to the B time saving game state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the probability change flag is off (when the determination in S191 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling arrival flag is off and the ceiling counter is the ceiling value.

The ceiling arrival flag is a flag that is set to be turned on when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and is a flag indicating whether or not the B time reduction game state has been controlled in the past.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of times that the game can be changed to the B time reduction game state between the end of the big hit game state and the end of the next big hit game state is, for example, once unless RAM clearing or the like is performed. That is, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value and is controlled to the B time saving game state, but the B time saving game state ends and shifts to the normal gaming state without being controlled to the big hit game state, for example, RAM clear etc. is performed. Unless it is done, it will not be controlled to the B time reduction game state again until the next big hit game state ends.

Therefore, in S192, not only whether or not the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, but also whether or not the ceiling arrival flag is off is determined, so that the B time shortening game state is once controlled. However, when the B time-shortening gaming state ends and the game shifts to the normal gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state is not controlled again.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 2201 sets the ceiling arrival flag to off and clears the ceiling counter, for example, when the condition device is operated.

However, the process of setting the ceiling arrival flag to off and / and the process of clearing the ceiling counter are executed when the condition device is activated and when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting (for example, the setting change in FIG. 47 described later). The first normal game pre-processing (see S344) that is called as a subroutine during the execution of the process, or when the RAM is cleared without changing the settings (for example, the first that is called as a subroutine during the execution of the startup initial setting process of FIG. 24. (1) The normal game pre-processing (see S56) may also be executed.

When it is determined in S192 that both the ceiling arrival flag is off and the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (NO determination in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process. , The process is returned to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). When the ceiling arrival flag is on, S192 is determined to be NO. Further, even if the ceiling arrival flag is off, if the ceiling counter is not the ceiling value, S192 is determined as NO.

On the other hand, in S192, when the ceiling arrival flag is off and the ceiling counter is determined to be the ceiling value (when the determination in S192 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling arrival flag to ON. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time saving transition processing]
Next, the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability change flag is off (S202).

In S202, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (when S202 is NO determination), that is, when the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and the process is counter determination process (FIG. FIG. 36). By doing so, when the probability change flag is on, neither the B time saving game state nor the C time saving game state can be started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S202 that the probability change flag is off (S202 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

In S203, when it is determined that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S203), that is, when the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S206.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes the B time saving control mode determination process as the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the B time reduction counter, the time reduction mode to be set to 2, the time reduction performance, and the like are determined. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S208.

The number of time reductions set in the B time reduction counter is a predetermined number of times. Further, among the time saving performances, the winning probability of "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Further, among the time saving performances, the opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is shown in the ordinary symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the ordinary symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). As you can see. Further, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the variation pattern table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is on.

In S206, when it is determined that the time reduction hit flag is not on (NO determination in S206), that is, when the time reduction hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition process, and the process is counter determination process. Return to (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in S206, when it is determined that the time reduction hit flag is ON (S206 is YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the C time saving game state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the C time reduction counter, the time reduction mode to be set to 3, and the time reduction performance are determined. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S208.

The number of time reductions set in the C time reduction counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to the hit type determination table (see, for example, FIG. 13). Further, among the time saving performances, the winning probability of "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Further, among the time saving performances, the opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is shown in the ordinary symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the ordinary symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). As you can see. Further, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the variation pattern table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving setting process. The details of this time reduction setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time saving setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (S211).

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is on (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S212.

The case where S211 is YES is determined when the probability change flag is off and, for example, the B time reduction game state is repeatedly executed while the C time reduction game state is executed first (ceiling counter = ceiling value). Case), or when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first and the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed (when the "time saving hit" is won) is equivalent. do.

Although not shown, when the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where the C time saving game state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 2" and is determined in S205. B Set the time reduction counter. Further, when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first and the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed, the main CPU 201 is set to "time saving mode = 3". At the same time, the C time reduction counter determined in S207 is set.

In S211 when it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (S211 is NO determination), that is, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time reduction counter (the number of time reduction remaining in the previously executed time reduction game state) with the new time reduction number (the number of time reductions determined in S205 or S207), and presents the current time. Determine if the time reduction counter is less than the new number of time reductions.

In S212, when it is determined that the current time reduction counter is not smaller than the new time reduction number (when S212 is NO determination), that is, when the current time reduction counter is larger than the new time reduction number, the main CPU 201 is subjected to the time reduction. The setting process is terminated, and the process is returned to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, in S212, when it is determined that the current time reduction counter is larger than the new time reduction number (YES in S212), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, when the C time-saving game state is executed first and the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed, or when the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is executed first. When the C time reduction game state is repeatedly executed in the present state, the larger time reduction number of the current time reduction counter value (that is, the time reduction remaining number) and the new time reduction number is reset as a new time reduction counter. .. However, even if the time reduction counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the B time reduction counter and the C time reduction counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In addition, when the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where the C time saving game state is executed first, or when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first. When the C time-saving game states are repeatedly executed, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state. That is, the time saving performance of the previously executed time saving game state can be changed to the time saving performance of the new time saving game state, or the time saving game corresponding to the larger of the current time saving counter and the new time saving number of times. It will not be changed to the time saving performance of the state.

As described above, the time saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and is a "normal symbol hit". The winning probability, the variable display time of the normal symbol, or / and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric accessory 146.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter, it is possible to internally manage that the two time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner. Then, in the above-mentioned time saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger number of the current time saving counter value and the new time saving number is reset as a new time saving counter. However, even if the two time-saving game states are executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (which the player can grasp) is the above-mentioned two time-saving game states that are executed internally. Of these, only the time-saving performance for any one of the time-saving gaming states. Therefore, when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner without internally managing that the two time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner (that is, without providing a B time-saving counter and a C time-saving counter). , The value of the current time reduction counter and the new time reduction number, whichever is greater, may be reset as a new time reduction counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process. This process is executed when S211 is determined to be NO, that is, when the non-time-saving game state is changed to the B time-saving game state (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or when the non-time-saving game state is changed to the C time-saving game state. This is the process to be performed when the process is transferred to and executed (when the "time saving hit" is won). In this process, the number of time reductions and the time reduction performance determined by the B time reduction control mode determination process (S205) or the C time reduction control mode determination process (S207) are set. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag on. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

As described above, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, when the main CPU 201 finishes the process of shifting to the B time saving gaming state and the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation is completed. I'm going to. In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the hit determination process includes a small hit, the first in the ceiling final change. The result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 performs a process of shifting to the B time reduction game state based on the end of the small hit game state. Good to do.

Further, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time shortening gaming state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. In particular, in the first pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variablely displayed in parallel, the B time reduction game is based on the start of variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. It is preferable to perform the transition process to the state. This is because if the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed, the game shifts to the B time saving game state, and the other special symbol is variable during the variable display of one of the special symbols as the final ceiling variation. This is because when the display is started, the other variable display of the special symbol cannot benefit from the B time reduction game state, and the interest may be reduced. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed with a long fluctuation such as 600,000 msec. However, in the pachinko gaming machine where the variable display of the special symbol can be performed due to such a long fluctuation, the transition process to the B time shortening gaming state is performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. As a result, even when the variable display of the special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, is performed with a long variation, it is possible to avoid the delay of the start of the B time-shortening gaming state.

Further, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state is shifted to the C time saving gaming state. The process is prioritized over the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the above (see S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the transition to the C time saving game state has priority over the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state. You may do it.

Further, in the above-mentioned ceiling counter update process described with reference to FIG. 35, the ceiling counter is not updated when the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (S171 in FIG. 35 is NO determination), but this is limited to this. I can't. For example, in the ST machine or the pachinko gaming machine that performs the probability change fall lottery, the ceiling counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol is performed even when the probability change flag is on. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it does not shift to the B time reduction game state, and when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variation counter reaches the ceiling value, it may shift to the B time reduction game state. .. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time saving game state only when "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but shifts to the B time saving gaming state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variation counter becomes the ceiling value. Processing will be performed.

Further, the ceiling value, which is a condition for shifting to the B time saving game state, is preferably within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), so the ceiling value. Is preferably in the range of 319 × 2.5 to 319 × 3.0 (times).

Further, it is preferable that the upper limit of the B time reduction specified number of times, which is the end condition of the B time reduction game state, is a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. Similarly, regarding the upper limit of the C time reduction specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time reduction game state, up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off by the specified number (for example, 3. (Up to 8 times) is preferable. In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), the B time reduction specified number and the C time reduction specified number are both approximately 1212 (319 × 319 ×). It is preferable to set 3.8) as the upper limit. It is not essential that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B time reduction and the upper limit of the specified number of times of C time reduction are the same value.

By the way, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine such as the first pachinko gaming machine, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different jackpot probabilities such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above. , The time saving hit probability is a common probability for all set values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the condition for shifting to the B time saving game state, is the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variation flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0) regardless of the set value. If this is the case, the ceiling value will differ depending on the set value, and there is a risk that the set set value will be detected by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of the set value, the ceiling value is not determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variation flag is off) by a specified number. It is preferable to set the same value regardless of the set value.

[1-6-18. Modification example related to time saving management processing]
In the above-mentioned time saving management process (hereinafter referred to as “time saving management process of this embodiment”) described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the ceiling counter update process (see FIG. 35) is the special symbol game end process. (See FIG. 31). Further, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is prioritized over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, a transition flag to the B time reduction gaming state (ceiling flag) and a transition flag to the C time reduction gaming state (time reduction hit flag) are separately provided, and when the ceiling flag is on, the transition to the B time reduction gaming state is performed. When the time saving hit flag is on, the state is changed to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update processing, the priority of the transition to the B time saving game state and the transition to the C time saving game state, the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state. Whether to make the migration flag separate or common is not limited to the above, and the time saving management process can be performed in various variations.

For example, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the variable stop time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the variable stop time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

Also, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the variable stop time, and after confirming that the "time saving hit" is not won when reaching the ceiling, the game is shifted to the B time saving game state. good.

Further, when a plurality of time saving game states are not executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter when the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is larger than 0, and 1 in other cases. It is better not to subtract.

[1-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S86 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

When it is determined in S251 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S253 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S254. On the other hand, when it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S253 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254) and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 27) is performed after the end of the special winning opening opening preparation process. S88) will be performed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 131, the number of prize balls at the time of winning the large winning opening 131, and the like are set. .. The number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those whose big prize openings are opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened / closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the large winning opening 131 is performed. After executing the process of S259, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S260) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process ( (See S87 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

When it is determined in S271 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won in the large winning opening 131 is the maximum number of winnings. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) for counting the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 131 is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening 131 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S272), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S273.

On the other hand, in S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 131 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S272 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S258 in FIG. 40) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has not elapsed (when the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has elapsed (when the determination in S273 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs the closing setting process of the large winning opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S275) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the preparation for opening the large winning opening is made again. Processing (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S281 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S281 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) and various counters (for example, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or the process of resetting is performed. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. However, in the special symbol game end process of FIG. 31, for convenience of explanation, it is shown that the time saving management process (S131) is performed, but this time saving management process (S131) is strictly speaking a special of S130. Although it is executed in the symbol game end process (see FIG. 30), it is not executed in the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 42) of S283, and the process is skipped. After executing the process of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-7-3. Ordinary symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 43 are control state numbers of ordinary symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S291).

When it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S291 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (when the determination in S291 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293. The main CPU 201 performs the processing after S293 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display start processing of a normal symbol. The process of S293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this variable display start processing of a normal symbol, the main CPU 201 is a normal electric accessory when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the variation pattern determination process of the normal symbol, and the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit. The opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, waiting time) of 146 is set. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display end process of a normal symbol. The process of S294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when terminating the variable display of the normal symbol. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game determination process. The process of S295 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, a determination process of a derivation result of a normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a loss) is performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 normally performs an electric accessory opening process. The process of S296 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is performed in a predetermined manner. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol hit termination process. The process of S297 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes the normal symbol per-end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a random number for normal symbol hit determination is generated in the range (width) of, for example, 0 to 99, and for example, 0 to 79 is normal. It is used as the judgment value data per symbol (in the case of non-time saving game state). Since the normal symbol hit probability is determined by the number of normal symbol hit determination value data with respect to the total random number of the normal symbol hit determination random number, for example, the normal symbol hit probability is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is different between the case where the time saving control is executed and the case where the time saving control is not executed, but it may be the same or almost the same. Further, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec in the non-time reduction game state in which the time reduction control is not executed, whereas it is relatively long, for example, 1000 msec in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed. Only run for a short time. When the time saving control is executed in this way, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External masquerade interrupt processing]
Next, the external masqueradable interrupt process executed by the control of the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when a power is cut off. Note that FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the external masqueradable interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads out the state of a predetermined input port of the I / O port 205. The above-mentioned predetermined input port has, for example, a set of states such as a power failure detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, and a solenoid monitoring sensor line. This is the input port to be used. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure is detected.

When it is determined in S303 that the power failure is not detected (NO in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined in S303 that the power failure is detected (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that the power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external masquerade interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 with an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (S312). When it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, when the power failure is detected) (when the determination in S312 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. On the other hand, when it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, when the power failure is not detected) (when the determination in S312 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I / O port 205 (S314), and shifts the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start control flag is a flag for determining which of the power-on recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like is the start state when the power is turned on. For example, in the case of recovery from power failure, it is determined that the game is permitted, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined that the game is not permitted.

The start control flag is composed of a combination of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 on / off information when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, the power is restored, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the setting is changed, and the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (NO in S315), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed in, for example, the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. The details of the setting control process of S316 will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

When the game is not permitted (NO is determined in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits firing of the game ball from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6), a specific switch (for example, setting key 174, backup clear switch 176). Etc.), it is preferable to disable various switches, prohibit payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S315 that the game is permitted (YES in S315), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is the interrupt in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a special symbol hit) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to guarantee the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs a switch input detection process. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs a winning information command setting process. In this process, the winning information command (payout information) is set. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs an effect control command transmission process. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor control process. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) other than the work area (outside the area) in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up and, for example, when the RAM is cleared. Is stored in the area where the data is not cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S311 and ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S331).

When it is determined in S331 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the setting change process (S332). The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S331 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S333 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (YES determination in S333), the main CPU 201 performs the setting confirmation process (S334). The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the setting confirmation process (S334), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S333 that the value of the start control flag is not the value indicating the setting confirmation, that is, when it is determined that the RAM is clear (when the determination in S333 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S337. ..

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation display process. In this process, the currently set value is displayed. After executing the process of S335, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs an effect control command transmission process. In this process, a command (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), the setting confirmation process (S334), or the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25). Is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S336, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), the WDT clear register address read process, the WDT clear process, and the WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is appropriately performed. Then, after the processing of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control processing and returns the processing to the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed in S332 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading out the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205.

When it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (when the determination in S341 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343. On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (YES in S341), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs the update process within the range of the set value. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process. However, in place of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch is provided to operate this setting switch. The set value may be changed by operation.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S343).

When it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S343 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, when it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S343 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when this first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the above-mentioned setting change process (see FIG. 47).

When it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S351 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S351 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal pre-game processing (S352). The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when this second normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the first normal pre-game processing performed in S344 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed when the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 24) is neither a power failure recovery, a setting change, or a setting confirmation, that is, an initial setting process when the RAM is cleared. ..

The main CPU 201 first performs the initialization RAM setting process (S361). In this process, a clear process (for example, construction of a work area and address setting) of an area in the main RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as a “backup area”) in which backup data is stored at the time of power failure is performed. The area where the data is stored is not cleared by the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data are stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. That is, the data backed up at the time of power failure is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S362 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal pre-game process. When this first normal pre-game processing is completed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set.

[1-7-10. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a second normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of recovery from the power failure in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 24).

First, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at the time of recovery from power failure (S371). In this process, for example, the data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. The above-mentioned data is various information necessary for advancing the game, such as game state information, on / off state of a hit flag of a special symbol or a normal symbol, and information on the number of pending numbers. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown, in this process, it is possible to start the game by returning to the same game state as before the power failure, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. The main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S372 after executing the RAM setting processing (S371) at the time of recovery from power failure.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability change flag is on. This process is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S372 that the probability variation flag is not on (when the determination in S372 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is ON (when the determination in S372 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from the power failure. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, to turn on the probability change notification LED (not shown). This makes it possible to visually grasp whether or not the probability change flag is on when the power is restored. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the power failure return command. The power failure recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the staging control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S374 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal pre-game process.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes a start opening winning detection process (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S382. The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (S382). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning a prize in the large winning opening 131 is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random value values (ordinary symbol hit determination random value, etc.) for the ordinary symbol are extracted based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 by the passage gate switch 127. The main RAM 203 holds various random value values (normal symbol hit determination random value, etc.) extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 until the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. It has a storage area (1) to a normal symbol start storage area (4). Then, in the ball passage detection process, it is extracted based on whether or not there is an empty area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is also determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is, for example, less than four. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Start opening winning detection process]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 121 (S391).

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 121 (when the determination in S391 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 121 (when the determination in S391 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 uses various random values (for example, a random value for determining per first special symbol, a symbol random value of the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a first special symbol. Various random values such as random values for effect selection) are extracted, and payout information according to the first start opening winning is set. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning of the first starting port 120 is, for example, less than four. The main RAM 203 holds various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 until the starting condition is satisfied, from the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage. It has an area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is a free area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol start storage area (0) in addition to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), which will be described later.

When the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit is 4, (when the determination in S393 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4 (when the determination in S393 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first special symbols. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 in the main RAM 203 until the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. As a result, the variation display of the first special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead determination process. This process is a process of determining a variation pattern of the special symbol, performing a hit determination process, or the like using the random number value extracted in S392 prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28). It also determines whether the look-ahead flag is set.

The look-ahead determination process may be performed at any timing between the time when the random value is extracted in S392 and the time when the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the variable display of the special symbol is started. In view of performing the look-ahead effect by the sub control circuit 300, it is preferable to perform the pre-reading effect, for example, before and after the processing of S395. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a winning command of the first special symbol. The winning command of the first special symbol is a command including information for increasing the reserved number of the first special symbol by one, variation pattern information of the first special symbol (that is, variation pattern command of the special symbol), and the like. The winning command of the first special symbol reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 141.

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the second start opening switch 141 (when the determination in S398 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and the process is switched input detection process (FIG. FIG. See 51).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 141 (when the determination in S398 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 uses various random values (for example, a random value for determining the second special symbol, a symbol random value of the second special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the second special symbol, and a second special symbol. Various random values such as random values for effect selection) are extracted, and payout information according to the second start opening winning is set. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on the winning of the second starting port 140 is, for example, less than four.

The main RAM 203 holds various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 until the starting conditions are satisfied, and the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special It has a symbol start storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is a free area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). .. The main RAM 203 also has a second special symbol start storage area (0) in addition to the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), which will be described later.

When the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (when S400 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and the process is switched input detection process. Return to (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4 (when the determination in S400 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 in the main RAM 203 until the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. As a result, the variation display of the second special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a winning command of the second special symbol (S403). The winning command of the second special symbol is a command including information for increasing the reserved number of the second special symbol by one, information on the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, and the like, and is a command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like are performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S502.

The initialization process (S501) described above is a process executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes S502 to S508 described later are repeatedly executed.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs a read process of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read and performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect mode determination process. In this process, for example, based on the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6). The mode of sound production is determined.

In the effect mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including the specified information of the effect content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests for operating various effect devices (for example, a drawing request). , Sound request, lamp request, and character request, etc.). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes the drawing control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes voice control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a sound request to the voice control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The voice control circuit 305 performs voice control for causing the speaker 32 to output voice based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes the LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or a part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on the message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes the accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). The accessory control circuit 307 mounts an effect drive motor (not shown) on all or part of the effect members constituting the effect item group 58 based on the message (character item request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. Drive control for operation is performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of the effect mode determination process by the sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub CPU 301) performs the effect mode determination process (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

As one of the various processes performed in the effect mode determination process, the sub CPU 301 is, for example, an effect pattern of a sub-variation effect (hereinafter, “sub-variation”) corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as “the variation”). A sub-variable effect pattern determination process for determining (referred to as an effect pattern), a look-ahead effect pattern determination process for determining an effect pattern for a look-ahead effect (hereinafter referred to as a “look-ahead effect pattern”), and the like are performed. Further, in the effect mode determination process, for example, the effect mode of the countdown effect that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value and the effect mode of the B time saving game state transition effect that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value are determined. It is also performed to determine various production modes related to the progress of the game, such as processing.

The sub-variation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. The sub-variation effect pattern is an effect pattern (for example, a variation pattern or a character of a decorative symbol) performed by the sub CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 along with the variable display of the special symbol as an effect indicating the expected degree of the result of the variation. The pattern of the production, etc.).

In the sub-variation effect, the expectation for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol with the passage of time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop of the special symbol according to the sub-variation effect pattern to be executed. It is possible to show that the degree is maintained or increased.

The sub-variation effect patterns include, for example, time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, big hit system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 described later. Is included. As described above, the time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a production. The jackpot system reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit or a big hit.

For example, when the execution timing of the countdown effect suggesting the transition timing to the B time saving game state and the execution timing of the reach effect overlap, the sub CPU 301 is given priority to execute one of the effects. good.

The look-ahead effect pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a variation pattern of a special symbol determined as a result of the look-ahead determination process. The look-ahead effect is an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process, and is start information such as various random value values extracted based on the winning state after winning the first starting port 120 (that is, after winning the first starting port 120). Is an effect pattern performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 until is subjected to the hit determination process of the special symbol (until the variable display of the special symbol is started).

In the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead determination is made according to the pre-reading effect pattern to be executed, with the passage of time (more specifically, the progress of the variable display of the start information held in advance) while in the hold state. It is possible to show that the expectation for the result of the treatment is maintained or increased.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a reserved image displayed on the display device 7. The hold image is an image showing the current hold status.

The look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead hit type effect pattern that can suggest an expected value for the result type (whether it is a time saving hit or a big hit) of the look-ahead determination process, that is, the special symbol hit determination process, and the special symbol. It includes a look-ahead expected value effect pattern that can suggest an expected value for the result of the hit determination process to be a hit (big hit or time saving hit). That is, in the look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest an expected value for the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol and / or an expected value for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be a hit. Is. Further, in the look-ahead effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later) and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process (see S3008 and S3009 in FIG. 59 described later). See) and is done. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type effect pattern, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variation effect pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation effect pattern determination process will be described. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub-variation effect pattern determination table (detailed description is omitted) in a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the time saving flag is off. This sub-variation effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-variation effect pattern determination table in a gaming state (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state) in which the time-saving flag is on, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation effect pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of FIG. 54, and displays it as a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control circuit 200. A sub-variation effect pattern (shown as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-variation effect pattern includes the time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, the big hit system reach A, B, C, and the common reach A, B, C, D, E. There is.

The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that there is a possibility of time-saving hit as described above, and are reach effects that can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of time-saving hit. The time-saving hit system reach A is a time-saving hit confirmed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss or a big hit, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (FIG. 15). reference). The time-saving hit system reach A is not limited to the sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead target, but may be a sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead mode. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance mode. However, while the time-saving hit system reach B is not a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern, the time-saving hit system reach C is a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern (the column of "look-ahead flag" in FIG. 15, FIG. 54, and FIG. See FIG. 55 below).

The jackpot-type reach A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that there is a possibility of a jackpot as described above, and are reach effects that can be understood from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot. The jackpot system reach A is a jackpot confirmed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss or a "time reduction hit", and is displayed only when the result is a "time reduction hit" (Fig.). 15). The jackpot system reach A is not limited to the sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead target, but may be a sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead mode. The jackpot reach B and the jackpot reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance. However, while the jackpot reach B is not a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern, the jackpot reach C is a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern (see the “look-ahead flag” column in FIG. 15).

The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that there is a possibility of a big hit or a short time hit as described above, and in terms of appearance, it is possible to make a big hit or a big hit. It is a reach production mode in which it is difficult to grasp whether or not there is a sex. The common reach A is a hit (big hit, time saving hit) fixed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is lost, and is displayed only when it is a big hit or a "time saving hit". (See FIG. 15). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance mode. Further, the common reach D is a production that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit system reach C. Further, the common reach E is a production that develops from the common reach C to the jackpot type reach C. The common reach A and the common reach B are not the sub-variable effect patterns to be read ahead, whereas the common reach C, the common reach D, and the common reach E are the sub-variable effect patterns to be read ahead (“look-ahead” in FIG. 15). See the "Flags" column).

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54), and determines the sub-variation effect pattern based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub CPU 301 controls so that the determined sub-variation effect pattern is displayed on the display device 7.

[1-9-2. Look-ahead effect pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process, which are performed as the look-ahead effect pattern determination process, will be described.

The work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) has a first special symbol start storage area (0), a first special symbol start storage area (1), and a first special symbol start storage area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. , The first sub-holding area (0), the first sub-holding area (1), and the first sub-holding area (1), as the areas corresponding to the first special symbol start storage area (3) and the first special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. A sub-holding area (2), a first sub-holding area (3), and a first sub-holding area (4) are provided. In the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4), various extracted random value values are used. Hold information is stored. Further, information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub-holding area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command of the first starting opening winning, the sub CPU 301 stores the received information in the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first special symbol starting storage area.

Further, the work RAM 303 has a second special symbol start storage area (0), a second special symbol start storage area (1), a second special symbol start storage area (2), and a second special symbol provided in the main RAM 203. The second sub-holding area (0), the second sub-holding area (1), and the second sub-holding area (2nd sub-holding area (1)) correspond to the start storage area (3) and the second special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. 2), a second sub-holding area (3), and a second sub-holding area (4) are provided.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the pre-reading effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal gaming state, but the pre-reading effect is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, but in other gaming states (for example, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state). It may be done, or it may be done about the second special symbol.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a reserved image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. In the display area of the display device 7, as an area for displaying the reserved image, a 0th area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0), a first holding area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (1), and a first A second reserved area corresponding to the sub-reserved area (2), a third reserved area corresponding to the first sub-reserved area (3), and a fourth reserved area corresponding to the first sub-reserved area (4) are provided. There is.

[1-9-2-1. Table referred to in the look-ahead type effect pattern determination process]
First, the table referred to in the look-ahead type effect pattern determination process will be described.

By the way, the form of the hold image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern includes a time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit and a possibility of a big hit. The big hit system look-ahead effect form shown and the common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility of both the time saving hit and the big hit are included.

The look-ahead hit type effect pattern changes the form of the reserved image from, for example, the common hit-type look-ahead effect form to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form, or changes from the common hit-type look-ahead effect form to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form. This is an effect pattern capable of suggesting a change in the expected value with respect to the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

FIG. 55 is an example of a look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table. In FIG. 55, among the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 54, only the fluctuation pattern to be read ahead is shown. Further, FIG. 56 is an example of a look-ahead type effect pattern determination table. These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table of FIG. 55, when the sub CPU 301 receives a variation pattern in which the look-ahead flag is set, the sub CPU 301 sets the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number, for example. , Determined based on fluctuation pattern and number of holds. The number of holds here includes start information to be read ahead. That is, when the start information extracted based on the winning of the first start port 120 is held, the number of holds after the hold corresponds to the number of holds shown in FIG. 55.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is "0EH" and the number of reservations is "2", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56 and determines the look-ahead hit type effect pattern. More specifically, as shown in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56, for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is based on the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1. It is determined.

In FIG. 56, for convenience, the “look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number” is referred to as “SASPT number”, and the “look-ahead hit type effect pattern” is referred to as “SAS effect pattern”. The sub-effect selection random number value 1 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, for example, when a variation pattern command of a special symbol is received.

For example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-effect selection random value 1 is "55", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be "07H". Further, for example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-effect selection random value 1 is "77", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 56 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 56, "A" shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1 is , Indicates that the reserved image is displayed in the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode indicating that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit. When the reserved image is displayed in the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode, it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of time-saving hit in appearance.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 56, "B" shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1 is , Indicates that the reserved image is displayed in the jackpot-based look-ahead effect mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in the jackpot-based look-ahead effect mode, it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of a jackpot in appearance.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 56, "C" shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1 is , It is shown that the reserved image is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time saving hit or a big hit. When the reserved image is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect mode, it is difficult to grasp whether there is a possibility of a time saving hit or a big hit in appearance.

For example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "07H", the common hit system look-ahead effect mode is displayed in the third hold area, and the common hit system is also displayed in the second hold area after shifting from the third hold area. The look-ahead effect form is displayed. Then, when shifting from the second holding area to the first holding area, the common hit system look-ahead effect mode changes to the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode, and in the first hold area, the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode of "A" is displayed. Will be done.

Further, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect form of "C" is displayed in the third holding area. Then, when shifting from the third holding area to the second holding area, the common hit system look-ahead effect mode is changed to the big hit system look-ahead effect form, the second hold area, and the first hold after being shifted from the second hold area. In the area, the jackpot look-ahead effect form of "B" is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern includes the following patterns (a) to (e). In this embodiment, the pattern that changes from the big hit system look-ahead effect mode to the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form and the pattern that changes from the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form to the large-short hit type look-ahead effect pattern are the look-ahead hit type effect patterns. Although not included in, these patterns may be included in the look-ahead type effect pattern.
B) The time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect pattern is displayed at the time of holding, and the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern). "09H").
B) The pre-reading jackpot effect pattern (for example, the pre-reading hit type effect pattern "17H"" in which the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of being held and the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter. ).
C) A look-ahead common hit effect pattern A (for example, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern “24H”) that displays the common hit-type look-ahead effect form at the time of holding and then changes to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form.
D) A look-ahead common hit effect pattern B (for example, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern "12H") that is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect form at the time of being held and then changes to the big hit system look-ahead effect form.
E) When it is put on hold, it is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect form, and the common hit system look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing thereafter. Look-ahead common hit effect pattern C (for example, look-ahead hit type effect). Pattern "06H").

As described above, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55), and based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of reservations, the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number). ) Is determined. Then, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and is based on the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the sub-effect selection random value value 1. The look-ahead hit type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) is determined.

Note that FIG. 56 does not show a look-ahead hit type effect pattern in which the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect mode of "A" is displayed at the time of holding, and then changes to the big hit-type look-ahead effect form of "B". However, in this way, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern that changes from the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form of "A" to the big-hit-type look-ahead effect form of "B" may be determined by the sub CPU 301. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead staging.

Further, in FIG. 56, as described above, the jackpot-based look-ahead effect mode of “B” indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (that is, it may be lost). Although it is an effect form, in addition to this, a big hit confirmation look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit confirmation may be displayed. In this case, the look-ahead type effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 301 may include any or all of the look-ahead type effect patterns in (f) to (h) below.
F) A look-ahead jackpot confirmed effect pattern A in which the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of holding, and the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter.
G) At the time of holding, other look-ahead effect forms (for example, "A" time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form, "B" big hit-type look-ahead effect form, "C" common hit-type look-ahead effect form, etc.) are displayed. Then, the look-ahead jackpot confirmation effect pattern B that changes to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form.
H) At the time of holding, another look-ahead effect form (for example, "A" time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form, "C" common hit-type look-ahead effect form, etc.) is displayed, and then "B" big hit system. A look-ahead jackpot confirmation effect pattern C in which the look-ahead effect form is displayed, and then the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form is changed.

Further, in FIG. 56, of the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form of "A", the big hit system look-ahead effect form of "B", and the common hit system look-ahead effect form of "C", "C" is reserved. The display frequency of the common hit system look-ahead effect form is the highest, but it is not limited to this. For example, at the time of holding, the display frequency of the time-saving pre-reading effect form of "A" may be the highest, and at the time of holding, the display frequency of the jackpot-based pre-reading effect form of "B" is the highest. It may be made higher. Further, at the time of holding, the display frequency of the common hit system look-ahead effect form of "C" may be the lowest.

Further, in FIG. 56, a random value 1 for sub-effect selection having a predetermined width is assigned to all “look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific SASPT number is used. It is also possible not to assign a random value for sub-effect selection only to (that is, it is not selected by setting the distribution rate of a specific SASPT number to 0).

[1-9-2-2. Table referenced in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process]
Next, the table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit), which is referred to when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is “time saving hit” or “big hit”. Further, FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss), which is referred to when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost.

By the way, the form of the reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs depending on the expected value for the hit (time saving hit, big hit).

When a reserved image is displayed as a time-saving look-ahead effect mode, for example, the reserved image, which is usually represented by a triangle, is changed in shape such as "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star". Can represent the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the reserved image is a rectangle, and the expected value is the highest when the reserved image is a star.

When the hold image is displayed as a jackpot look-ahead effect mode, for example, the hold image normally represented by white is changed in color such as "blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow". Can represent the change in expected value. In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the reserved image is blue, and the expected value is the highest when the reserved image is a rainbow.

Although the details will be described later, when the hold image is displayed as a common hit system look-ahead effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time saving hit, the hold image is used, for example, the expected value for the big hit. It may be represented by both a color indicating a level and a shape indicating an expected value level for a time saving hit, or it may be represented by a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form.

The hold image on which the look-ahead effect is performed can change from an effect form in which the expected value is relatively low to an effect form in which the expected value is relatively high, but the expected value is relative from the effect form in which the expected value is relatively high. It is preferable that it does not change to a low production form. In addition, when changing the production form of the reserved image, it is not always necessary to change one by one in the order of "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star" or "blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow". For example, it may be changed to "pentagon-> circle" or "yellow-> rainbow". Further, the form of the reserved image does not necessarily have to start from the quadrangle or blue having the lowest expected value, and may start from, for example, a circle or red.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 57 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively, as in FIG. 56.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 57, "0" is shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 2. ~ "5" indicates the high expected value for the hit (short time hit, big hit). For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "quadrangle" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". The above-mentioned "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above-mentioned "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above-mentioned "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5". Is equivalent to.

Hereinafter, in each of the columns "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 57, "0" is shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 2. ~ "5" is referred to as an expected value level "0" to "5".

The look-ahead expected value effect pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is “time saving hit” or “big hit” is, for example, as shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (hit time) in FIG. It is determined based on the number of holds and the random value 2 for sub-effect selection. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is, for example, a hold number and, as shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. It is determined based on the random value 2 for sub-effect selection. The sub-effect selection random number value 2 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, for example, when a variation pattern command of a special symbol is received. Note that, in FIGS. 57 and 58, only the case where the number of holds is “1” to “3” is shown, and the case where the number of holds is “4” is omitted for convenience.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the number of holdings is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "43H". .. When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area. To "3", and the expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the number of holdings is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH". Will be done. When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third hold area, the expected value level is "2" in the second hold area, and the first hold from the second hold area. The expected value level changes from "2" to "4" when shifting to the region.

As described above, the sub CPU 301 has a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) (see FIG. 57) or a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (at the time of loss) based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Refer to), and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined based on the number of holds and the random value 2 for sub-effect selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value effect pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57 and can be changed as appropriate. Is.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the selection rate of the look-ahead expected value effect pattern (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) whose expected value level is relatively low is increased. However, the bias is not limited to this, and it can be changed as appropriate, for example, evenly distributed.

Further, in FIGS. 57 and 58, a random value 2 for sub-effect selection having a predetermined width is assigned to all the “look-ahead expected value effect patterns”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific “look-ahead expected value effect pattern” is assigned. The sub-effect selection random value 2 may not be assigned only to "" (that is, the distribution rate of the specific "look-ahead expected value effect pattern" may be set to 0 and not selected).

[1-9-3. Look-ahead effect pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is an example of a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process only in the normal gaming state in which the left-handed strike is a regular gaming mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

First, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 has been received (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO determination in S3001), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has been received (when the determination in S3001 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the processing to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the look-ahead target hold is not at the present time, that is, whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed for the current hold. When there are a plurality of holds, the look-ahead effect may be performed on a plurality of hold images, but in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only on one hold image.

When the look-ahead effect is executed for the current hold (when the determination in S3002 is NO), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect is not executed for the current hold (when the determination in S3002 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is the read-ahead target (see FIG. 55).

When the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is not the look-ahead target (NO determination in S3003), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is the read-ahead target (when the determination in S3003 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the processing to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than, for example, the upper limit number that can be held (for example, 4 or 8). This process is for avoiding the transition to the B time saving game state before the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the hold for which the look-ahead effect is performed, even though the look-ahead effect is performed. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than the maximum number that can be held, but the variation pattern information received by the winning command is not limited to this. When it is a look-ahead target (when the determination in S3003 is YES), it may be determined whether or not the number is larger than the number of holds including the look-ahead target. Further, the ceiling value and the ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as a command, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referred to, and the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process. In this process, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined with reference to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit". In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, and if this result is a "time saving hit" or a "big hit", a YES determination is made. Will be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "time saving hit" or the "big hit" may be determined by transmitting the winning information of the special symbol from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit" (YES determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3008.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is neither "time saving hit" nor "big hit" (S3007 is NO determination), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value effect pattern (hit time) determination process. In this process, the look-ahead effect pattern (at the time of hit) is determined with reference to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) of FIG. 57. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

Further, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead effect pattern determination process at the time of loss. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) is referred to in FIG. 58, and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern (at the time of loss) is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Action effect by performing look-ahead effect, extended example of look-ahead effect]
In the pre-reading effect described above, not only is it interesting to see whether the pre-reading effect form of the big hit system or the pre-reading effect form of the time-saving hit system changes due to the change in the form of the reserved image, but also the expected value of the hit (big hit, time-saving hit). It is possible to change the level, and it is possible to enhance the interest by performing new productions that have never been seen before. The timing for changing the form of the hold image is not limited to the time when the hold shifts, and may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Further, regarding the form of the reserved image performed as the look-ahead effect (for example, the form of the reserved image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserved area (4) to the first sub-reserved area (1)), the first start port 120 It may be determined at the time of winning a prize, and the form of the reserved image in the variable display of the special symbol of the change may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

By the way, the probability of being determined by the variation pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54) in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead time-shortening effect pattern, and the variation in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern. Comparing with the probability determined by the pattern (see, eg, "06H", "11H" in FIG. 54), the former probability is higher (see, eg, FIG. 15). That is, as for the execution rate of the look-ahead effect, the execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead time-shortening effect pattern is higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern. Therefore, compared to the conventional pachinko gaming machine where the look-ahead effect is performed only when there is a possibility of a big hit, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of the hit. It will be possible to increase.

The execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead time-shortening effect pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for the big hit is higher than the expected value for the short-time hit, so that it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the gaming state in which the probability change flag is off (in the present embodiment, the normal gaming state and the low probability time saving gaming state), the "time saving hit" can be won in the hit determination process of the special symbol (FIG. 10). reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal gaming state, the look-ahead effect is not performed in the low-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", when the C-time-saving game state is executed in combination with the A-time-saving game state, and for the A-time-saving game state. It is unlikely that the number of time reductions will increase in any case where the C time reduction game states are not executed repeatedly. Therefore, by making it as little as possible for the player to know that there is a possibility of winning the "time saving hit" in the A time saving game state, the disappointment given to the player by winning the "time saving hit" is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-accuracy time-shortening game state, and the look-ahead effect is performed not only in the normal gaming state but also in the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state and the high-accuracy low-time-saving gaming state. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect may be performed for the second special symbol as well.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the sub-variation effect pattern, a time-saving hit system reach, a big hit system reach, or a common reach can be executed. In this embodiment, as can be seen with reference to FIGS. 15, 54 to 56, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the look-ahead time-saving effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-variable effect pattern. However, the jackpot reach is not executed. Further, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the pre-reading jackpot effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot system reach as the sub-variation effect pattern, and does not execute the time saving hit system reach.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the look-ahead time-saving hit effect pattern or the look-ahead common hit effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 can execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-variable effect pattern. However, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the pre-reading jackpot effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-variable effect pattern.

Further, a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) “37H” shown in FIG. 56) and a look-ahead time-short hit effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “29H” shown in FIG. 56). ”) And the look-ahead common hit effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead effect pattern (SAS effect pattern)“ 27H ”) shown in FIG. 56), the sub CPU 301 uses the sub-variation effect pattern. (For example, the sub-variation effect patterns “0AH” and “0BH” shown in FIG. 55) may be executed.

Further, an effect pattern may be provided in which the time-saving hit system reach is executed, the loss is clearly indicated in the time-saving hit system reach, and then the big hit system reach is executed. In this case, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation until the end whether or not the jackpot reach with a high profit margin is executed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when the common reach E is executed in the variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "target fluctuation") performed for the start information in which the look-ahead effect is executed, the common reach C and the common reach C are performed. After the common effect is displayed, it is possible to shift to the effect common to the jackpot reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, the game does not shift to the jackpot reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the effect common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the effect common to the time-saving hit system reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, the process does not shift to the time saving hit system reach C.

By the way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even when the look-ahead effect mode (hereinafter referred to as “big hit look-ahead effect”) indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a big hit is already executed, the sub CPU 301 is new. Do not perform look-ahead effect. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed on a plurality of reserved images, it is preferable not to execute a new look-ahead effect when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed.

For example, any one hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") in which the variable display of the special symbol is started after this first hold. ), And when the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “17H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first hold, the look-ahead effect is performed in the second hold. Even if it is executed, the look-ahead effect in this second hold may be meaningless. In particular, when the jackpot is derived for the first hold and controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is controlled to the A time saving gaming state after the end of this jackpot gaming state, for example, "time saving hit" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to receive the benefits of this "time saving hit", and in this case, the interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold that is digested after the hold on which the jackpot look-ahead effect is executed.

Even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which a jackpot is derived), if the look-ahead effect is not executed for the first hold, the look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. It may or may not be executed.

Further, even when the big hit look-ahead effect of Gase (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “53H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, when the time saving hit look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “05H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first hold, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving hit look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. You may. This is because even if a time-saving hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a big hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the pachinko gaming machine including the small hit in the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, the small hit is small in the first hold. Even when the hit look-ahead effect is executed, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a big hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, the look-ahead effect mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a small hit (hereinafter referred to as "small hit look-ahead effect"). ) Is executed in the first hold, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a small hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, as a sub-variation effect pattern, for example, when the first start port 120 is won and the start information is reserved during the execution of the jackpot system reach, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the look-ahead effect for this hold.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect only in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the jackpot display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the look-ahead determination performed by the main CPU 201 is reserved (this). In the paragraph, this hold is referred to as "specific hold"), and the sub CPU 301 is after the end of the jackpot gaming state regardless of whether the look-ahead effect is executed or the look-ahead effect is not executed for this specific hold. , The look-ahead effect is not executed for the specific hold unless it is in the normal gaming state. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold even if it is in the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Furthermore, even if it is a pachinko gaming machine that executes a look-ahead effect in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state), it is specified when the jackpot display mode is derived. When there is a hold, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold after the end of the big hit game state.

Further, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the jackpot display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the look-ahead determination performed by the main CPU 201 is suspended (this). This hold is referred to as "specific hold" in the paragraph), and even if this specific hold is a "time saving hit" hold, the main CPU 201 will perform a C time saving game based on the "time saving hit" after the end of the big hit game state. It may not be controlled by the state. For example, if the specification does not execute a plurality of time-saving game states in an overlapping manner when the time-saving game states overlap, and the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game state, the specific hold is "time-saving hit". Even if it is on hold, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time saving game state based on the "time saving hit".

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead production]
Hereinafter, specific examples of the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 can execute the look-ahead effect using the reserved image based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific example when the look-ahead effect is performed with the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead hit type effect pattern and a look-ahead expected value effect pattern. Here, first, as the pre-reading hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which the pre-reading effect is performed by the pre-reading jackpot effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

60 (a) to 60 (f) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the big hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a big hit changes. It is a figure which shows the process. The look-ahead type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (f) corresponds to “1CH”, “3CH”, “58H”, or “78H” in FIG. 56. Further, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (f) is not shown in FIG. 57.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (f), the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 are areas indicating whether or not the reserved information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (4), respectively. be. Further, the 0th area 410 is an area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0) in which the information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored.

In this embodiment, when the hold information is stored in the first sub hold area, the sub CPU 301 indicates the hold areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub hold area in which the hold information is stored by a triangle. It is displayed as a hold image (hereinafter, simply referred to as "hold image"). Further, when the hold information is not stored in the first sub hold area, the sub CPU 301 does not display the hold image and displays only the frame of the hold area.

In FIG. 60A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413, and the reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that the reserved information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (1) to (3), and the reserved information is not stored in the first sub-reserved area (4).

In FIG. 60 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a). This indicates that the reserved information is newly stored in the first sub-reserved area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the jackpot. In this embodiment, the difference in color is illustrated by the shade of color except for the rainbow.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60B, the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level “0”), and is shown in the fourth reserved area 414. The color of the reserved image is blue (expected value level "1").

FIG. 60 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), and the color of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. 60 (b) is , Is an image showing that the color has changed from blue to yellow (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reserved area 413.

FIG. 60 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (c), and the color of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 60 (c) is , Is an image showing a change from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reserved region 412.

FIG. 60 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (d), and the color of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 60 (d) is , Is an image showing a change from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reserved area 411.

FIG. 60 (f) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (e), and the color of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. 60 (e) is , Is an image showing that the color changed from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when shifted to the 0th region 410.

Further, the color (expected value level) of the hold image indicating the expected value for the jackpot does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. ..

Further, in FIG. 60, the jackpot-based look-ahead effect mode is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the jackpot is derived. The look-ahead effect that changes to the effect form may be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before the change to the jackpot fixed look-ahead effect mode.

[1-10-2. Specific example when the look-ahead effect is performed with the look-ahead time reduction hit effect pattern]
Next, as the pre-reading hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which the pre-reading effect is performed by the pre-reading time-shortening effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (f) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit is provided. It is a figure which shows the changing process. The look-ahead time-saving hit type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (f) corresponds to “0EH”, “2EH”, “4AH”, or “6AH” in FIG. 56. Further, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (f) is not shown in FIG. 57.

In FIG. 61A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413, and the reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a). As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, shape) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the time saving hit.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value for the big hit is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for the time saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61B, the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is a triangle (expected value level “0”), which is shown in the fourth reserved area 414. The shape of the reserved image is a quadrangle (expected value level "1").

FIG. 61 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (b), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. 61 (b) is , Is an image showing that the quadrangle has changed to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reserved area 413.

FIG. 61 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (c), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 61 (c) is , Is an image showing a change from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reserved region 412.

FIG. 61 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (d), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 61 (d) is , Is an image showing that the hexagon has changed to a circle (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reserved area 411.

FIG. 61 (f) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (e), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. 61 (e) is , Is an image showing that the circle has changed to a star (expected value level "5") when shifted to the 0th region 410.

The shape of the reserved image showing the expected value for the time saving hit does not necessarily have to be changed one by one in the order of "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star", for example, it changes to "pentagon → circle". You may let me.

Further, the shape (expected value level) of the hold image showing the expected value for the time saving hit does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and even if it is changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change, for example. good.

Further, in FIG. 61, the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived. It may be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before the change to the jackpot fixed look-ahead effect mode.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a large-value confirmed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big-hit-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when the look-ahead effect is performed with the look-ahead common hit effect pattern]
Next, as the pre-reading hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which the pre-reading effect is performed by the pre-reading common hit effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 62.

62 (a) to 62 (d) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the system look-ahead effect form to the big hit system look-ahead effect form. The change in the common hit system look-ahead effect form is that the expected value level of the hit (time saving hit, big hit) changes, and that the type of hit changes to a big hit or a time saving hit. Is included. The look-ahead type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (d) corresponds to “15H”, “35H”, “51H”, or “71H” in FIG. 56, and corresponds to FIG. 62 (a). )-The look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIG. 62 (d) corresponds to "43H" in FIG. 57.

In this embodiment, both the color indicating the expected value level for the big hit and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving hit are both as a common hit system look-ahead effect mode showing that there is a possibility of both the big hit and the time saving hit. Is displayed.

In FIG. 62A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412, and the third reserved area 413 and the fourth reserved area 414 display the normal reserved image. The hold image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62 (a). The sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color and shape) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the hit (big hit or time saving hit). .. In this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is not executed or the expected value for the hit is the lowest, the reserved image is displayed as a white triangle, and "blue quadrangle <yellow pentagon <green hexagon <red circle <rainbow". Expectations for short hits increase in the order of "stars".

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62B, the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level “0”), and the third reserved area. The form of the reserved image shown in 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

62 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62 (b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 62 (b) is , Is an image showing that the yellow pentagon changed to a green hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reserved region 412.

62 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 62 (c) is , From the green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead effect form of expected value level "3") to the rainbow triangle (big hit system look-ahead effect form of expected value level "5") when shifting to the first reserved area 411. It is an image showing that it has changed to.

That is, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (c), it is determined whether the form of the reserved image is a form showing an expected value for a big hit or a form showing an expected value for a time saving hit. It is a production that is difficult to grasp from the form of. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62 (d), the form of the reserved image indicates the expected value for the big hit, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, the expected value level “5”). It is possible to grasp that there is.

As described above, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is divided into a look-ahead time-saving hit effect pattern showing the expected value for the time-saving hit and a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern showing the expected value for the big hit, depending on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. , A look-ahead common hit effect pattern indicating an expected value for a hit (big hit or time-saving hit) is configured so that the look-ahead effect can be executed by any one of the patterns. Then, when the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead common hit effect pattern, the player is given an interest in whether the reserved image changes to the big hit type look-ahead effect form or the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form. It is possible to enhance the interest.

It is necessary to change the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for the time saving hit one by one in the order of "blue quadrangle <yellow pentagon <green hexagon <red circle <rainbow star". Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common hit system look-ahead effect form) → red triangle (big hit system look-ahead effect form)" or "green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead effect form) → It may be changed to a "triangular star (time saving hit system look-ahead effect form)". Further, the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for the hit does not necessarily have to start from the blue quadrangle having the lowest expected value, and may be started from, for example, the red circle.

Further, the form of the hold image showing the expected value for the hit does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Further, in FIG. 62, the common hit system look-ahead effect mode is changed to change the expected value from which one of the hits (big hit or time saving hit) is derived, or the expected hit is changed from an unknown state to a big hit. However, instead of or in addition to this, for example, the look-ahead effect shown below may be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before the change to the jackpot fixed look-ahead effect mode.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big-hit-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big-hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-4. Modification example of common hit system look-ahead effect form]
In addition, as the form of the reserved image, the common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility of both the big hit and the time saving hit is not necessarily a color showing the expected value for the big hit and a shape showing the expected value for the time saving hit. It is not limited to the form represented by both. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect mode may be provided. If a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form is provided, it will be possible to have a sense of expectation for both big hits and time-saving hits, and since the expected values for each are unknown, future changes in the effect mode will occur. You will be able to play games with a sense of expectation, and you will be able to improve your interest.

63 (a) to 63 (d) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the reserved image is changed from the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect form to the big-hit system look-ahead effect form. It is a figure which shows the process which changes. The look-ahead type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) corresponds to “15H”, “35H”, “51H”, or “71H” in FIG. 56, and corresponds to FIG. 63 (a). )-The look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIG. 63 (d) corresponds to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

Further, FIGS. 64A to 64D are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, from the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect mode to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect mode. It is a figure which shows the process of changing a hold image. The look-ahead type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (d) corresponds to “07H”, “27H”, “43H”, or “63H” in FIG. 56, and corresponds to FIG. 64 (a). )-The look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIG. 64 (d) corresponds to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

In FIGS. 63 (a) and 64 (a), a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412, and the third reserved area 413 and the third reserved area 413 and the third reserved area 412 are displayed. 4 The reserved image is not displayed in the reserved area 414, and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 63 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64 (a).

In both of FIGS. 63 (b) and 64 (b), the form of the hold image shown in the third hold area 413 is a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form, for example, a brilliant form. The expected value level can be changed by changing the degree of brightness of the light.

FIG. 63 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), and is a dedicated common hit system displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 63 (b). It is an image which shows that the look-ahead effect form is shifted to the 2nd hold area 412 as it is.

Similarly, FIG. 64 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64 (b), and is a dedicated image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 64 (b). It is an image which shows that the common hit system look-ahead effect form is shifted to the 2nd hold area 412 as it is.

FIG. 63 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 63 (c) is It is an image showing that when the first reserved area 411 is shifted, the dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect mode is changed to a red triangle (expected value level “4” of the big hit).

On the other hand, FIG. 64 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64 (c), and is a hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 64 (c). It is an image showing that when the form is shifted to the first reserved area 411, it changes from the dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form to a white circle (expected value level “4” per time reduction).

In this way, even when the look-ahead effect form is represented by the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect form, the big hit-type look-ahead effect form and the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form can be changed from the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect form to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is possible to give the player the fun of which way it will change, and it will be possible to enhance the interest.

[1-11. Signal output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer provided on each island (not shown)). The signal will be described. In this embodiment, the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described, but the signal from the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine may be input.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal plate 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door / frame opening", "external information 1" to "external information 8". , "Prize ball information 2" and "security". However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, and these signals may be output. It may be configured so that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 65, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output from CN1, the signal of "door / frame opening" is output from CH2, and the signal of "external information 1" to CH10 is output from CH3 to CH10, respectively. Each signal of "external information 8" is output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The output conditions for the signal from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG. 65.

Next, an example of the timing chart of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec for every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of “Prize ball information 1” among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the large winning opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out and the starting opening (first starting opening 120 or second). For example, if a game ball wins in the starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4), three prize balls are paid out, and if a game ball wins in the general winning opening 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out. Prize balls will be paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine for, for example, 120 msec, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 is set to "prize ball" at the timing when the payout detection switch of the tenth prize ball is turned on, for example, for 120 msec, starting from the time of the previous output of the signal of "prize ball information 1". The signal of "Information 1" is output. It should be noted that outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is only an example, for example, the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is used. It may be between the time it is turned on and the time it is turned off. Further, it is only an example that the signal of "Prize ball information 1" is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out or output for 120 msec, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "Prize ball information 1". Can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be described. The "security" signal is mainly a signal output when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an outline of an error in the first pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, for each error name, the occurrence trigger in the main control circuit 200 and the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6). It is a table showing the output time and remarks of the release trigger in, the signal of "security" (shown as "security signal" in FIG. 67).

Although the first pachinko gaming machine does not have a small hit large winning opening, FIG. 67 also describes a small hit large winning opening abnormal winning error for convenience. Further, in FIG. 67, the big winning opening 131 is described as a big winning opening for big hits.

The outline of the error shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only a part of them may be determined to be an error. For example, an error not shown in FIG. 67 is determined to be an error. You may do so. Those not shown in FIG. 67 but judged to be an error include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when the solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is turned on or off for a predetermined time or longer, and a big winning opening (big hit big hit). If there is an undischarged game ball inside the winning opening or the large winning opening for small hits, or if there is a prize in the large winning opening when the large winning opening is not opened, the large winning opening entry / discharge error and the vibration sensor will run for the specified time. This corresponds to a vibration sensor error or the like when it is turned on. Further, for example, when a specific area is provided in the jackpot game control and the probability variation control is executed after the jackpot game control is completed based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control. In the case of an error in passing to a specific area, or when a game ball passes through a specific area even though there is no undischarged game ball inside the jackpot for big hits, it should be judged as an error. It is preferable to configure it.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) transmits a fraud detection-related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the fraud detection related execution executes the notification control according to the content of the error.

Hereinafter, control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both refer to FIG. 6) will be briefly described by taking as an example the case where an abnormal winning error for a big hit is generated.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, if there is one winning detection after the initial power is turned on and before the first big hit big winning opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) will have the big hit big winning. Winning opening abnormality It is determined that a winning error has occurred, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the big winning opening for big hits is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, since the output time of the “security” signal is 12 seconds regardless of any error, the device outside the machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6)). (See) and the island computer (not shown) can grasp the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the content of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, the device outside the machine that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. May be good.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives, for example, a fraud detection-related command indicating a jackpot abnormal winning error for a big hit, for example, all or part of the following notification control is executed, and the fraud detection-related command is received. After, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control shown below is terminated.
-Notification control for displaying, for example, the characters "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, the voice of "Abnormal winning error at the large winning opening" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control in which the LED group 46 (both, for example, see FIG. 6) is fully lit in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

If, for example, there is a power failure before 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives the fraud detection-related command indicating the jackpot abnormal winning error during the execution of the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of the jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-mentioned Re-execute the notification control.

Next, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the machine according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 68, the signal to be output is indicated by ◯, and the signal not to be output is indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the output signal is different depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, no signal is output during the normal gaming state (other than big hit / small hit, probable change / short time), and during the low probable time / short game state (other than big hit / small hit), "external information 3". And "External Information 7" are output, and the signals of "External Information 3", "External Information 5" and "External Information 7" are output during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). Output. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). Will be done.

In this way, by making the output signal different according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer) capable of receiving the signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) or an island computer (see FIG. 6). (Not shown)) makes it possible to grasp the state of the game in the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability change / time reduction). It is the same as the signal output to (other than). Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time and short game state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time and short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). The signal output during the small hit game control process (during the high accuracy time and short game state) is the same as the signal output during the high accuracy time and short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit), and is the same as the signal output during the small hit game. The signal output during the control process (during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). That is, in the device outside the machine capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)), the small hit game control process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the external information transmission source. It is not possible to know whether or not it is. However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small hit game control process different from the signal output when the small hit game control process is not in progress, the pachinko gaming machine of the external information transmission source has a small hit. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by the device outside the machine that can receive the signal.

Further, during the low-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and during the small hit game control process (low accuracy) shown in FIG. 68. During the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state), the signals are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be assumed that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric support control and the special figure shortening control are executed, or only the electric support control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control. If this is the case, the time saving control may be being executed, or if only the special figure shortening control is being executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control, the time saving control may be being executed.

Further, in the above description of the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to control the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state by the control of the main CPU (function of A time saving game state, B). The explanation is based on the premise that the function of the time-saving gaming state and the function of the C time-saving gaming state are installed), but the explanation is not limited to this. For example, only one of the functions of the A time-saving gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state, and the C time-saving gaming state (for example, the function of the A time-saving gaming state) is installed, and the other functions (for example, the function of the A time-saving gaming state) are installed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine may not be equipped with the functions of the B time-saving gaming state and the C time-saving gaming state). Further, of the functions of the A time-saving gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state, and the C time-saving gaming state, two functions (for example, the function of the A time-saving gaming state, and the function of the B time-saving gaming state or the C time-saving). It may be a pachinko gaming machine equipped with only a gaming state function) and not equipped with other functions (for example, a B time saving gaming state function or a C time saving gaming state function).

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine called an ST machine, in which the probability change flag is set to ON with a 100% probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the function of the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state It may be configured not to be equipped with either the function of the above and the function of the C time saving gaming state.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine is a so-called type 1 type pachinko gaming machine called a digital pachi. However, the second pachinko gaming machine is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, the gaming board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from those of the first pachinko gaming machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the second pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later). (For example, a pachinko gaming machine having a function, shape, arrangement position, etc., such as a signal output to a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). The explanation of the points in common with the above will be omitted as much as possible.

Further, in explaining the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine uses the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the drawings newly adopted in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko gaming machine The explanation shall be given using a code and a step number different from those of the machine.

By the way, as a pachinko gaming machine capable of variablely displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, for example. Including the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol, and the first starting port and the second starting port. There is a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequentially variable machine") in which the starting conditions are satisfied in the order of winning.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 69, a game area 1105 is formed in the game board unit 1010.

The various members arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 1120 and the like) are various members arranged in the gaming area 105 (see FIG. 4) of the first pachinko gaming machine. There are some things in common with, but I will explain them once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 1110, and a substantially center of the game area 1105. Center accessory 1115, first starting port 1120, general winning opening 1122, passage gate unit 1125, special electric accessory unit 1130, second starting port 1140A, 1140B, and ordinary electric combination It includes an object unit 1145, a small hit unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 1010. The LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 1105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference reference numeral). The game area 1105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 by the launching device 1006 flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side region 1107.

Further, in the center accessory 1115, a warp entrance 1117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to the stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in the lower front part of the display area of the display device 1007. The stage 1118 may be formed of a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 1118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 1120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 but has not entered the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 1120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later). It should be noted that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 1120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 1120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize-winning mouth)
A plurality of general winning openings 1122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 1122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later), for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 1122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 1122 is replaced with the above general winning opening 1122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right side region 1107, and is configured to allow the game ball hit to the right to pass through, and the passage gate switch for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126. It is a unit body integrated with 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126 is detected by the passing gate switch 1127, the starting information of the ordinary symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information of the ordinary symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). .. The reserved start information of the normal symbol is used for the hit determination process of the normal symbol. Even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left side region 1106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 1107.

Further, the passing gate 1126 may be made to function as an opportunity to operate the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, the transition condition from the non-big hit gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) to the big hit gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operating device operate, but the stop display mode indicating that the jackpot is a big hit. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126, that is, the detection of the game ball by the passing gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later) causes the accessory continuous operating device to operate. It may be activated to shift to the jackpot gaming state.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a jackpot jackpot 1131 and a jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 below) that detects the winning (passing) of a game ball to the jackpot jackpot 1131. , Is a unit body integrated with the special electric accessory 1133. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right region 1107.

The big hit opening 1131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot for jackpot 1131, a jackpot for jackpots where a left-handed game ball can win is placed, or a center accessory 1115. A big hit opening for a big hit may be placed at the top of the game.

Further, the big hit winning opening 1131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit gaming state which is advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening to be done. When the jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects that a game ball has been won in the jackpot jackpot 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening 1131 for big hits is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 that operates the special electric shutter 1134 (see FIG. 70 described later). The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, is in an open state in which a game ball can or easily wins (passes) the jackpot jackpot 1131, and the game ball wins (passes) through the jackpot jackpot 1131. ) Is impossible or difficult to close, and the state can be transitioned to. The state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big hit winning opening 1131 is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the big hit game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big hit winning opening 1131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is in a game state.

(2nd starting port)
In this embodiment, the second starting port 1140A and the second starting port 1140B are arranged in the game area 1105 as the second starting port, and both of these second starting ports 1140A and 1140B are right-handed. It is possible to win a game ball (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting opening 1140A and / and the second starting opening 1140B.

When the game ball wins in the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described later). Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later). Regardless of which of the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B the game ball wins, it will trigger the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is detected by the second starting port switches 1141A and 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and extracted. The started information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, there are two flow paths 1107a and 1107b on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball, which is hit to the right but does not win the big hit big winning opening 1131. Is formed. A game ball that has been hit to the right and has flowed further toward the downstream side without winning a prize in the big hit opening 1131 is placed in the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b by, for example, the branch nail 1108 shown in FIG. It is sorted.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a win the second starting port 1140A. For example, it is not possible to expect the winning to the second starting port 1140A. Alternatively, the game ball flowing down the upper flow path 1107a may be configured to win a prize with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth). The game ball that has flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but has not won a prize in the second starting port 1140A is configured to be discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 1178.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 1107b can win a prize, and the details thereof will be described later in the description of the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the lower flow path 1107b side, and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects the winning of a game ball and an ordinary electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the above-mentioned winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the above-mentioned winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electric shutter 1147 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a general electric solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) for operating the ordinary electric shutter 1147. The ordinary electric accessory 1146, that is, the shutter 1147 for general electric use, allows or easily wins (passes) a game ball to the second starting port 1140B, and cannot win a game ball to the second starting port 1140B. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 1147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member made of, for example, a blade member, which is a so-called electric tulip, may be adopted. Further, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Small hit unit)
The small hit unit 1150 is a small hit large winning opening 1151 and a small hit large winning opening count switch 1152 for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 70 described later). It is a unit body that integrates a small hit shutter 1153 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction and a small hit solenoid 1154 that can operate the small hit shutter 1153.

By advancing and retreating the small hit shutter 1153 in the front-rear direction, it is possible or easy to win (pass) the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 1151 and the game to the small hit large winning opening 1151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a ball.

If the game ball wins when the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small hit large winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later). When a game ball is detected in the small hit large prize opening count switch 1152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 1151 for small hits is not limited to 10.

Further, the small hit unit 1150 is a lower flow path 1107b and is arranged on the downstream side of the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 1146, even if the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the lower flow path 1107b is small. Since the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side is won before reaching the winning large winning opening 1151, it becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning large winning opening 1151.

In this embodiment, the big hit opening 1131 and the small hit big winning opening 1151 are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening opened when the big hit game control process is executed and the big winning opening. The large winning opening that is opened when the small hit game control process is executed may be the same large winning opening.

(Out mouth)
The out port 1178 is any of the various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 1120, the second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, the big winning opening 1131 for big hits, the general winning opening 1122, etc.) of those fired toward the game area 1105. The purpose is to eject the game balls that did not win the prize to the outside of the aircraft. The out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 1122, between the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 and the small hit unit 1150, and the game is played. The game ball flowing down the area 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the aircraft.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit includes a production accessory group 1058 such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70 described later). The staging accessory group 1058 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 1007. Of these staging accessory groups 1058, at least one of the staging accessories or the staging accessory components constituting the staging accessory group functions as a staging accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. The control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine may be common to the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine, but this will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 1300 that controls the production according to the progress of the game, and payout / launch. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, the processing executed when the power is turned on, the processing related to the game operation, and the like, and includes the main CPU 1201, the main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), the main RAM 1203 (read / write memory), and the initial reset. It includes a circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 1203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to an I / O port 1205 that is communicably connected to various devices and the like, and a command output port 1206 that is connected so that various commands can be output to the sub control circuit 1300. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, in the main control circuit 1200, the normal symbol display unit 1161, the normal symbol hold display unit 1162, the first special symbol display unit 1163, the second special symbol display unit 1164, the first special symbol hold display unit 1165, and the first 2 A hold display unit 1166 for a special symbol, a display unit 1167 for probabilistic change notification, a display unit 1168 for time reduction notification, a solenoid for general electric power 1148, a solenoid for special electric power 1135, a solenoid for small hits 1154, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 1170, the error notification monitor 1172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 1200. The main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, setting values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. Further, in the error notification monitor 1172, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a setting function described later, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process are in progress. It is also possible to display a code or the like during setting confirmation indicating. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a display of a special symbol (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first start port switch 1121, a second start port switch 1141A, 1141B, a passing gate switch 1127, a big hit large winning opening count switch 1132, a general winning opening switch 1123, and a small hit big winning. The mouth count switch 1152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is output to the main control circuit 1200 via the I / O port 1205.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 1186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. The administrator of the game hall uses the external terminal board 1184, the setting key 1174 operated when changing or confirming the set value in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation of is connected. In the present embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing the set value described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party other than the manager of the game hall (for example, a player) cannot easily touch the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 1174 or / and backs up. It also includes those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 1176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / emission control circuit 1400 and the power supply circuit 1450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, a voice control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 70, an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player is also connected to the sub control circuit 1300.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the second pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and a D / A for converting image data as an image signal. Equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing decorative symbols, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 1032. The voice control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 1301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the converted voice signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The bonus control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each bonus (for example, one or a plurality of bonuses in the staging bonus group 1058). The accessory control circuit 1307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout / launch control circuit 1400 launches a payout device 1082 and a game ball capable of paying out game balls. A launching device 1006 capable of enabling the ball lending, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control of ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082, and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / emission control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probabilistic control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-probability time-saving gaming state in which both probabilistic change control and time-saving control are executed, and time-saving control is executed although probabilistic control is executed. A high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state that is not performed, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state in which the probability variation control is not executed but the time saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 plays a game in any of these gaming states. It is possible to proceed. However, the gaming state progressed by the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. It may not be done. For example, even if the game progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the game does not progress in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal gaming mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed is the regular gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 1301 executes a control for displaying a normal game mode (for example, whether to hit right or left) in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 71 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78 described later), that is, the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B. It is a table referred to when the "time saving hit", the "small hit", the "big hit" or the "loss" is determined by lottery based on the random value for determining the special symbol hit extracted at the time. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the first special symbol are "time saving hit", "big hit", and "loss", and "small hit" is not included in the lottery target. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the second special symbol are "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", and "loss". However, "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

As described above, the special symbol hit determination random value is a random value used in the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination random value is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for determination for special symbol hit determination determined as "time reduction hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding time reduction hit Relationship with judgment value data, special symbol hit determined as "big hit" Relationship between range (width) of random value for judgment and corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as "miss" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random value and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

Further, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value. .. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for determination for special symbol hit determination determined as "time reduction hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding time reduction hit Relationship with judgment value data, relationship between range (width) of random value for judgment of special symbol hit determined by "small hit" and corresponding small hit judgment value data, special symbol determined by "big hit" The relationship between the range (width) of the random value for hit judgment and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and the range (width) of the random value for hit judgment and the corresponding loss judgment determined as "loss". The relationship with the value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 is set to ". It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit". , Judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 is "time saving hit". And the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit". , Judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 is set to "time saving hit". , And the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit". , Judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that the data is "missing". , The judgment value data is determined as "missing judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 is "time saving hit". And the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit". , Judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 22696 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "missing". , The judgment value data is determined as "missing judgment value data".

As described above, in this embodiment, for example, among the special symbol hit determination random values generated in the range of 0 to 65535, the range is from 0 to a predetermined width (for example, 0 to 22117 in the case of the second special symbol hit determination process). Is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) excluding the big hit determination value data and the loss determination value data. Further, the tail end (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data from the predetermined value. Further, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing so, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is increased (or reduced) ( It is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other determination value data (for example, time saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) simply by increasing the size.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed and the winning of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making the probability different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed is the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making it higher than the winning probability of "", it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in a normal game state, which tends to be a monotonous game.

However, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the first special symbol is performed. May be. In this case, for example, if the "time saving game state" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is overlapped, and if the "time saving game state" is won just before the end of the time saving game state, the time saving game state is substantially changed. It will be extended, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit" regardless of whether the probability change flag is on or off. .. However, when the probability change flag is off (normal game state, time saving game state), the main CPU 1201 controls to the time saving game state if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving game state", but the probability change flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving gaming state.

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 72 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first start opening 1120 or the second start opening 1140A and 1140B and the above-mentioned determination value data. It is a table referred to when selecting a "selection symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" to be determined (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 of FIG. 78, which will be described later). The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol determined according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and the "symbol specification command" is a command displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command to specify. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 uses, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 2 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 is the selected symbol. Select "z7" as the command and select "zA5" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 uses the selected symbol command. Select "z10" as the symbol specification command, and select "zA8" as the symbol specification command.

When the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small hit game control process, for example, the small hit shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) can be activated to allow or easily open the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69). A prize ball can be paid out by executing the control of the state.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 30 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the determination value data is determined based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 71). (See FIG. 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the winning of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value and the special symbol symbol random value.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when deciding according to the symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display unit 1163, 1164 derives a time-saving hit display mode, a big hit display mode, a small hit display mode, or a loss display mode based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the mode of the winning game state and / or the mode of the subsequent gaming state according to the selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol (that is, described later). (When executing the hit type determination process of S1036 in FIG. 78). The mode of the hit game state shown in FIG. 73 shows the mode of the big hit game state or the mode of the small hit game state. Further, the aspect of the gaming state after that shows the aspect of the gaming state after the end of the hit gaming state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, it is controlled to the C time-saving gaming state without being controlled by the hit gaming state. The aspect is shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the time saving number to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8", the main CPU 1201 determines that only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to on, and sets the time saving number to 50 times. To decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z9", the main CPU 1201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 100 times. To decide. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the time reduction hit described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode. Without controlling the jackpot gaming state, the time saving flag is set to on and the determined number of time saving times is set, so that the C time saving gaming state can be controlled. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the hit game state is not controlled, so that the mode of the hit game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set number of time reductions may be different depending on the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions set according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. Is different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the subsequent game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. It will be possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time saving gaming state even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "time saving hit" as shown in FIG. 72, and the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". In this case, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" is won is derived to the special symbol display unit 1163, 1164, it is not controlled to the C time saving gaming state. Further, the main CPU 1201 draws a "time saving hit" even if the probability change flag is on, and if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the display mode of the loss is forcibly changed to a special symbol. It may be derived to the display units 1163 and 1164. Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the special symbol hit judgment random value, that is, the hit judgment process is performed so that the "time saving hit" is not included in the lottery result. May be good.

In this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the game shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state. You may do so.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the mode of the hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened as one mode of the small hit gaming state. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned small hit display mode to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then determines the big prize for the small hit. By setting the number of times the mouth 1151 is opened, it becomes possible to control the small hit game state. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the main CPU 1201 is controlled to the small hit game state without changing the probability change flag and the time saving flag after the end of the small hit game state. Return to the game state just before the flag.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the mode of the hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the big hit game state, and the probability change flag and the time reduction as the mode of the subsequent game state. It is decided to turn on only the probability change flag among the flags, and to set the probability change number to 10000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. It becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 rounds, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds, respectively, as a mode of the jackpot gaming state. To decide. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, in each case, it is determined to set both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON, and it is determined to set both the probability variation number and the time reduction number to 10,000 times. .. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to control the game state with high accuracy and short game time.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and 10 as the mode of the jackpot gaming state, respectively. Further, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, in any case, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON. Further, the number of time reductions to be set is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to control the game state in a short time. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A time-saving gaming state. The mode of time saving control in the highly accurate time saving gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as “time saving performance”) is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, but may be different from the time saving performance in A time saving gaming state. ..

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), the main CPU 1201 is in the mode of the winning game state and None of the subsequent aspects of the gaming state are set. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 1201 continuously controls the gaming state without shifting the gaming state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), as described above, the mode of the winning game state and the subsequent mode of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the modes of the gaming state is set, it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 73. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clearly indicate that neither the mode of the winning game state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 73.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 1201 is extracted when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B with reference to the hit determination table of the special symbol of FIG. Judgment value data is determined based on the random value for determining the special symbol hit (winning judgment is performed), and the winning (“short hit”, “small hit”, “big hit” or “missing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. 72, and the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B and the above-mentioned The selected symbol command is determined based on the determination value data, and the type of display mode (for example, the type of time saving hit, the type of big hit) derived to the special symbol display units 1163, 1164 is determined. It should be noted that the above-mentioned winning determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that the determination is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the confirmation display. Not the purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is “z6”) or 300. Time (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state controlled when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50. Time (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction gaming state is higher than the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous to the player than the C time-saving game state, the position of the "big hit" can be increased. For example, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to a disadvantage compared to the case where the "big hit" is won but the "big hit" is not won (when the "short-time hit" is won). Will be.

In addition, instead of the expected value of the time saving number in the A time saving gaming state being higher than the expected value of the time saving number in the C time saving gaming state, the expected value of the time saving number in the C time saving gaming state is the time saving number in the A time saving gaming state. It may be higher than the expected value. In this way, by making the C time saving game state more advantageous to the player than the A time saving game state, the position of "time saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if the state of not winning the "big hit" continues for a long period of time, if the "time saving hit" is won, it is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time saving gaming state, so that the decline in interest is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

[2-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 74 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 75 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The columns of "Remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 are shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and the second special when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol of S1037 of FIG. 78, which will be described later.

In the normal gaming state in which left-handed strike is a normal gaming mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to, for example, the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 74.

As shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 74, the main CPU 1201 uses a specific random value as the effect selection random value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 1120. If so, set the look-ahead flag. The sub CPU 1301 that has received the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 1201 performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may determine.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is a regular gaming mode, that is, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, for example, the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the look-ahead flag when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for effect selection. Will be decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination may be made in place of or in addition to any of the above values based on other values or the like.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start of FIG. 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start of FIG. 74. The expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is larger than that in the case of determination. In particular, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start, the second special symbol is variable over an extremely long time, for example, approximately 600,000 msec (for example, long variation A to C). The display is done. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variablely displayed for an extremely short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, ultrafast fluctuation). ..

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301. The sub CPU 1301 controls a display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and a sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for example, the range of the random value for effect selection is changed for each set value so that the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined is different. May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74). In the time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables having different expected values of the variable display times of the special symbol per unit time are provided. The tables referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of may be different.

Further, in the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the “Remarks” column of FIGS. 74 and 75, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a reach production that shows. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time saving hit or a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine, as in the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 has a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and a normal symbol determination table. (See FIG. 17), a type determination table for a normal symbol (see FIG. 18), and a variation pattern table of a normal symbol (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control process]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine may be the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIG. 42, 86), etc.). ), Hereinafter, the special symbol control process will be described again with different step numbers, including the same process as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area or the like of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001 in executing the special symbol control process. ..

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the reserved number of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is held for a fixed time. If it is "0" over the above, the demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demo display effect when the demo display command is a demo display command of the main special symbol.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, but the sub CPU 1301 is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is set as the main special symbol and the other is set as the sub-special symbol, and the effect control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state in which the left-handed strike is the normal gaming mode, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and the right-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode (for example, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state). , High probability non-time saving game state, low probability time saving game state), the second special symbol is regarded as the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of the decorative symbol for the main special symbol, display effect of the character and the like, voice effect for the main special symbol, and the like. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the sub-special symbol is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced. In addition, among the game states in which right-handed strike is a regular game mode, in the low-accuracy time-shortening game state, other effects are performed instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol. An image (for example, a countdown effect of counting down the number of remaining time reductions until the end of the time reduction game state) may be displayed.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

When it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, the main CPU 1201 processes. To S1003. For example, NO is determined in S1002 during the execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is the timing of the variable display start (YES in S1002), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

When it is determined in S1005 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S1005), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the main CPU 1201 processes. To S1006. For example, NO is determined in S1005 during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1005 that the first special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S1005 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1007.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1006, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

When it is determined in S1008 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO in S1008), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1008 that the timing for starting the variable display is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S1008 is YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1009, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

When it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and performs the process in the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 20 to 20). (See FIG. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (YES in S1011), that is, no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. When the variable display can be started without any execution, and when the process related to the first special symbol is not executed and the variable display can be started, the special symbol management process described later is given in the order of priority. Is being executed.

[2-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1003, S1006, S1009, and S1012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, when the special symbol management process is called and executed by S1003 or S1009 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol is the processing target, and the special symbol management process is S1006 or S1006 during the special symbol control process. When it is called and executed in S1012, the first special symbol is the processing target.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S1021).

When it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S1021 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S1021 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023. The main CPU 1201 performs the processing after S1023 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S1023 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S1024 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S1025 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S1026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. This process of S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S1028 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). The main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 when the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S1007 when it is called in S1006, and is called in S1009. If so, the process is returned to S1010, and if it is called in S1012, the special symbol control process is also terminated.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special symbol variable display start processing executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1023 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S1023 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S1023 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S1031).

When it is determined in S1031 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S1031 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S1031 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is a YES determination (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (S1032 is a NO determination). If), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

When it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S1032 is NO), the special symbol variable display start processing does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol variable display. End the start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is off (when the determination in S1032 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 71) and using the random value for the special symbol hit determination. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the first special symbol is a time saving hit, a big hit, or a loss, and the second special symbol is a time saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a loss. It is determined whether or not there is. Further, the main CPU 1201 sets the time saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time saving hit, and turns on the small hit flag when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a small hit. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, set the big hit flag to on. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1035. The time saving hit flag is turned off at the start of the C time saving gaming state, the small hit flag is turned off at the start of the small hit gaming state, and the big hit flag is turned off at the start of the big hit gaming state.

In the hit determination process of the above special symbol (see S1034), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined by this process that it is not a big hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit is performed. If it is determined that it is not a small hit in this process, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving hit, and if it is determined that it is not a time saving hit in this process, it is determined that it is a loss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining a stop symbol of a special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S1034) of the special symbol (for example, time saving hit, small hit, big hit, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, it is not necessary to determine the stop symbol when the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, but a plurality of types of loss are provided to perform the hit determination process of the special symbol. If the result is a loss, the stop symbol may be determined. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time saving hit, small hit, or big hit). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hits are used, but one type of big hit may be used, and one type of hit may be one. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of hits, a plurality of types of other hits (for example, small hits) may be provided, or a plurality of types of loss may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S1034) of the special symbol, the random value for reach determination and / and the randomness for effect selection. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value and the like. In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state in which left-handed strike is a normal gaming mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74). In a gaming state in which right-handed is a regular gaming mode (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start (see FIG. 75). ) Is referred to to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1037, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs a variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S1037) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol. To. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 77) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. (See S1024) will be performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a parameter update process related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. After executing the process of S1040, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are mainly updated. After executing the process of S1041, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and prohibits interrupts from the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S1041) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S1042)). It is preferable to do it within the section.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1024 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target. Further, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol of the processing target is simply referred to as a "special symbol", and the special symbol of the non-processing target is referred to as "the other special symbol".

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

When it is determined in S1051 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S1051 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the processing in the special symbol management processing (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S1051 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded in S1052.

When it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S1053 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the processing in the special symbol management processing (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is off (when the determination in S1053 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be done. After executing the process of S1054, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1056.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is fixed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions. You may manage the number. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit.

In S1057, when it is determined that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (when the determination in S1057 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1057 that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (when the determination in S1057 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping during the execution of the small hit game control process. After executing the process of S1058, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit.

In S1059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a big hit (NO determination in S1059), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and processes it. Is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, when it is determined that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit (when the determination in S1059 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started during the execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is in variable display.

When it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not in the variable display (NO determination in S1061), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is in variable display (YES in S1061), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test firing test signal will be output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to loss. After executing the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol is hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped due to loss. After executing the process of S1064, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1065, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process of S1066, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

As described above, in the special symbol variable display end processing of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination processing of this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78). If the result of is a big hit and the other special symbol is in variable display, the process of forcibly losing the variable display of the other special symbol is performed.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

When it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S1071 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S1071 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S1072, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S1072 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073. On the other hand, in S1072, when it is determined that the special symbol that is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S1072 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small hit.

In S1073, when it is determined in S1073 that the special symbol which is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating a loss (when the determination in S1073 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, when it is determined that the special symbol which is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the small hit (when the determination in S1073 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In this embodiment, the following S1075 to S1081 are common processes for convenience of explanation between the case of a big hit (when S1072 is a YES judgment) and the case of a small hit (when S1073 is a YES judgment). Will be described with reference to. However, in the case of a big hit, the condition device operates, while in the case of a small hit, the condition device does not operate. Therefore, strictly speaking, different processes are executed depending on whether the hit is a big hit or a small hit (for example). , Set the number of rounds for big hits, while setting the number of open times for small hits, etc.).

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a big hit game control process or a small hit game control process start setting process. In this process, a signal output to, for example, a hall computer 1186 (both see FIG. 70) or an island computer (not shown) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 1184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After performing the processing of S1075, the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1076.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time reduction flag, and a time reduction counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process (S1077) of setting an upper limit of the number of times of opening the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 1131 for big hits or the large winning opening 1151 for small hits) to be opened, the external terminal board 1184. Jackpot signal set processing (S1078), processing to set the control status number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), game status specification parameter setting processing (S1080), and transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command (S1081). ) Etc. are performed. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079) and switching the control state number, after the completion of the special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 77). (See S1026) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1074 in the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 81 and 82) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 performs a time saving management process (S1091). Since the details of this time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine, the description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed in this way, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process (S1094) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 81).

If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of loss is derived, the gaming state does not shift.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this special winning opening opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S1101 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S1101 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the large winning opening opening number counter value. The big winning opening open count counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the round game executed in the big hit game state when the big hit game control process is executed, and when the small hit game control process is executed. , A counter that counts the number of times the small hit game control process is executed corresponds to this. The count value of the large winning opening opening number counter (large winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 1131 for big hits or the large winning opening 1151 for small hits) is opened is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the big hit winning opening 1131 is opened in the big hit gaming state, is, for example, four rounds or four rounds as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73). 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened in the small hit gaming state is, for example, once.

When it is determined in S1103 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S1103 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104) and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 77) is performed after the end of the special winning opening opening preparation process. (See S1028) will be performed. After executing the process of S1104, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S1103 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the large winning opening opening number counter value. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the big hit big prize opening 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the big winning opening for opening when the big hit game control process is executed, and for the small hit when the small hit game control process is executed. The big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process of S1108, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, the big winning opening winning The number of prize balls at the time is set. The number of times the big winning opening is opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the big hit game control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small hit big winning opening 1151 is opened when the small hit game control process is executed. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round or the small hit game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened / closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the big hit game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1800 msec when the small hit game control process is executed. To. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at the time of executing the big hit game control process, and is set to, for example, 5 at the time of executing the small hit game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning a large prize is set to 10, for example, for both the large prize opening 1131 for big hits and the large prize opening 1151 for small hits. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the large winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, opening / closing control data generation processing of the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) is performed. After executing the process of S1110, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111) and switching the control state number, the large winning opening opening control process (the large winning opening opening control process) is completed after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process. (See S1027 in FIG. 77) will be performed. After executing the process of S1111, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this large winning opening opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

When it is determined in S1121 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S1121 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S1121 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won in the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hits, large winning opening 1151 for small hits) is the maximum number of winnings. In this process, the large winning opening winning counter that counts the number of winning balls to the large winning opening (for example, the big winning opening count switch 1132 for big hits and the big winning opening count switch 1152 for small hits (see FIG. 70)). Etc.), it is determined whether or not the value counted is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The large winning opening winning counter value counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

In S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) is not the maximum winning number (when S1122 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 Moves the process to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) is the maximum winning number (when S1122 is YES determination). , The main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hits, large winning opening 1151 for small hits) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) has not elapsed (when S1123 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 wins the big winning. The mouth opening control process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) has elapsed (when S1123 is YES determination), the main CPU 1201 The processing is transferred to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 closes the big winning opening (big winning big winning opening 1131, small hit big winning opening 1151). After executing the process of S1124, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1125) and switching the control state number, the preparation for opening the large winning opening is made again after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process. Processing (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed. After executing the process of S1125, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

When it is determined in S1131 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S1131 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S1131 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability change flag, time reduction flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) are set or reset, and various counters (for example, probability change counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, large winning opening opening count, etc.) are set or reset. The process of setting or resetting the value of the counter, the big winning opening winning counter, the ceiling counter, etc. is performed. Both the special symbol pause flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). If the probability variation flag is set to on, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to on. As a result, the ceiling counter is not updated in the high probability gaming state in which the probability change flag is on. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 83 is performed. However, in the special symbol game end process of FIG. 83, for convenience of explanation, it is shown that the time saving management process (S1091) is performed, but strictly speaking, the time saving management process (S1091) is a small hit. In a certain case (when S1073 in FIG. 81 is determined to be YES), the process is executed, but in the case of a big hit (when S1072 in FIG. 81 is determined to be YES), the process is skipped without being executed. After executing the process of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small hit rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine is provided with a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the main CPU 1201 is one of these gaming states. Control to one of the gaming states. As described above, in the normal game state, the left-handed game is a normal game mode, so that the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is mainly executed. Further, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state), right-handed is a normal gaming mode, so that the game is played to the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B. The second special symbol game based on the winning of the ball is mainly executed. When the winning opening included in the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is used as the first starting opening, it is the first in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 1151 is in another gaming state (for example, normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). ), It becomes a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, the game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passing gate 1126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 1146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. Further, since the big hit winning opening 1131 is not opened unless the big hit game control process is executed, the frequency at which the second starting opening 1140B is opened in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. Low compared to the condition. Therefore, if the small hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the game ball that is hit right and distributed to the lower flow path 1107b can win the small hit large winning opening 1151. When a game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. Further, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize in the second starting port 1140A. When a game ball wins in the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), a stop indicating a small hit with a relatively high probability of one-third (approximate). Not only the display mode is derived, but also the ultra-fast fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 75) of the special symbol for high start, so that the small hit is large. The winning frequency of the game ball to the winning opening 1151 is increased as compared with other gaming states (for example, a normal gaming state, a high-probability short-time gaming state, and a low-probability short-time gaming state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time saving gaming state and the low accuracy time saving gaming state), the second starting port 1140B is opened by the electric support control, and is hit right. Most of the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 1107b win the second starting port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the expected value that the game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a wins the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but the second starting port 1140A is hit to the right and flows upward. Of the game balls distributed to the route 1107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win a prize. As described above, in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

Further, in the normal game state, left-handed is a normal game mode, but if right-handed is performed, the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 1126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is displayed. When it is derived, the ordinary electric accessory 1146 operates, and there is a possibility that the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened by winning a game ball in the second starting opening 1140B. However, in the normal gaming state, since the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74), the game ball is tentatively won in the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B. Even so, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long fluctuations A to C having an extremely long fluctuation time, and the frequency at which the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened is extremely low. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state. When the winning opening included in the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is used as the first starting opening, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the normal gaming state is set to, for example, 0 so as not to generate the actual profit of right-handed hitting. May be good. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1, and of course, is smaller than the game state in which the time reduction control is executed. ..

In this embodiment, the game is configured to have a small hit rush in a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may be made in a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state in which the special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of the special symbol is executed without executing the electric support control.

[3. Third pachinko game machine]
Next, the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 and type 2 mixing machine, and the first route and the second route are used as routes until the jackpot gaming state is controlled. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker is released by deriving the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "the accessory opening hit", and the game ball that has entered the opened V attacker is V. This is the case when the V winning opening in the attacker is won.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the start condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variable machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequentially variable machine may be used.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the third pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later). (For example, a pachinko gaming machine having a function, shape, arrangement position, etc., such as a signal output to a hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). As for the points in common with, the explanation will be omitted as much as possible.

In explaining the third pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine uses the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the drawings newly adopted in the description of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko machine The explanation shall be made using a code and a step number different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 87, the gaming board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. The gaming board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. On the front surface of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

The various members (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine may be common to the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. There is, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 2110, and a substantially center of the game area 2105. The center accessory 2115, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the general winning opening 2122, the passing gate unit 2125, the special electric accessory unit 2130, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. It includes a 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an out port 2178, and a back unit (not shown). The LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, a guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 2105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both have no reference numeral) like the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launcher 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 by the launcher 2006 flows down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side region 2107.

Further, in the center accessory 2115, a warp entrance 2117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to the stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. The stage 2118 may be formed of a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 2118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 2120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 but has not entered the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 2120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a left-struck game ball can win a prize (a right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later). It should be noted that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 2120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting port 2140.

When the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize-winning mouth)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a left-struck game ball can win a prize (a right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 2122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2122 is replaced with the above-mentioned general winning opening 2122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right side region 2107, and is configured to allow the game ball hit to the right to pass through, and the passage gate switch for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126. It is a unit body integrated with 2127 (see FIG. 88 described later). When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the start information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The various data on hold are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left side region 2106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 2107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the large winning opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates with. The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passing gate unit 2125 in the right region 2107.

The large winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is placed, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 2115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

The big winning opening 2131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit gaming state which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Is. When the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 2131 is detected by the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large prize opening 2131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 that operates the special electric shutter 2134 (see FIG. 88 described later). The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, is in an open state in which the game ball can be won (passed) to the large winning opening 2131, and it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball to the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be closed and transitionable to. The big winning opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big hit game state is reached through the first route described above. When the big hit game state is reached through the first route described above, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the big hit game state after passing through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big winning opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds. It is a game state that made it possible.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 has a winning opening in which a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out as prize balls when the gaming ball wins (passes), a switch for detecting the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, and an ordinary electric. It is a unit body integrated with the accessory 2146, and is arranged in the right side region 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The ordinary electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electric shutter 2147 that can move forward and backward, and a general electric solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the ordinary electric shutter 2147. The ordinary electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, is capable of winning (passing) a game ball to the second starting port 2140 or is easily opened, and it is impossible to win a game ball to the second starting port 2140. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 2147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be adopted.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided on the downstream side of the passing gate 2126 in the right side region 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening / closing winning opening 2151 opened so that a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 capable of opening / closing the opening / closing winning opening 2151, and the V attacker 2152. The V attacker solenoid 2154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning opening 2151, and the V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning opening 2155 through which the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151 can pass, and the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151 are V. The V winning opening switch 2156 that detects that the game ball has entered (passed) into the winning opening 2155, and the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning opening 2150 from the open / close winning opening 2151 did not enter the V winning opening 2155. A loss opening 2157 through which a game ball can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2158a that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning It is provided with a locking member 2159 capable of holding only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150. The V winning device 2150 may be provided on the upstream side of the passing gate 2126, or may be provided on the left side region 2106.

The V-attacker 2152 is a member along an arc, and is in a closed state in which the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is always closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the stop display mode indicating that it is a "feature opening hit" described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the solenoid for V attacker 2154 ( The operation of FIG. 88 described later) causes the V-attacker 2152 to operate, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is operated once, the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened, for example, by 1800 msec. Then, while the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

The mode for opening the V-attacker 2152 when the stop display mode indicating "per opening of the accessory" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, 900 msec may be opened twice. A predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls may be closed based on the entry into the inside of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. When the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout / launch control circuit 2400, and functions of the main CPU 2201. Add the value of the V attacker winning counter. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open / close the winning even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) that can open the opening / closing winning opening 2151 has not elapsed. The mouth 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155. That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers control to the jackpot gaming state via the second route described above.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened, the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) continues the opening control of the V attacker 2152. That is, it is controlled to the big hit game state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled via the first route, the round game in which the big winning opening 2131 is changed from the closed state to the open state is executed, whereas the second round game is executed. When controlled to the jackpot game state via the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is changed from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the player is controlled to the big hit game state via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but for example, a big winning opening is made from the middle of the round game. You may perform a round game that shifts the 2131 from the closed state to the open state.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in the open state), the V winning opening and the big hit game You may have one attacker released in the state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the accessory is open is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. Is controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit gaming state via the second route).

The loss opening 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning opening 2155 enters (passes). The game ball that has passed through the loss opening 2157 is discharged to the outside of the machine. If all of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and the game balls do not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V shutter 2158 has a closing mode in which the game ball cannot (or is difficult) to pass through the V winning opening 2155 due to the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2158a (see FIG. 88 described later), and the game to the V winning opening 2155. A constant operation is always performed between the opening mode in which the ball can pass (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly performs a constant operation in a cycle (cycle) of 7000 msec in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2159 is provided above the V winning opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. The game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2159 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157. Even when a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls not held by the locking member 2159 are discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157.

Further, after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed from the operation of the V-attacker 2152, the locking member 2159 is released from the locking of the game ball by the operation of the locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball released from the locking member 2159 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, the game ball wins (passes) the V winning opening 2155. If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it will pass through the losing opening 2157. The game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 without providing the locking member 2159.

(Out mouth)
The out port 2178 is of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 2120, second starting opening 2140, large winning opening 2131, V winning device 2150, general winning opening 2122, etc.) fired toward the game area 2105. The purpose is to eject the game balls that have not won or entered any of them to the outside of the aircraft. The out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 2178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting port 2140. The game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the gaming board unit 2010 like the first pachinko gaming machine, and is provided on the rear side of the gaming panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and includes a group of production accessories 2058 such as movable accessories controlled by the sub control circuit 2300. Of these staging accessory groups 2058, at least one or more staging accessory components constituting the staging accessory group functions as the staging accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. The control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine may be common to the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine, but this will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 that controls the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub control circuit 2300, a payout / launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read / write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main ROM 2202, the main RAM 2203, the initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and the main RAM 2203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201. .. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has an I / O port 2205 that is communicably connected to various devices and the like, and a command output port 2206 that is connected to the sub control circuit 2300 so that various commands can be output. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, in the main control circuit 2200, the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal symbol hold display unit 2162, the first special symbol display unit 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164, the first special symbol hold display unit 2165, and the first 2 The hold display unit 2166 for special symbols, the display unit 2168 for time saving notification, the solenoid 2148 for general electric power, the solenoid 2135 for special electric power, the solenoid 2154 for V attacker, the solenoid 2158a for V shutter, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 2170, the error notification monitor 2172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 2200. The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, and the like under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. Further, in addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 indicates, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process in progress. It is also possible to display the code etc. while checking the settings. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a display of a special symbol (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first start port switch 2121, a second start port switch 2141, a passing gate switch 2127, a large winning opening count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning opening switch 2156, and general. The winning opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is transmitted to the main control circuit 2200 via the I / O port 2205.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 2186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. If it is an external terminal board 2184, a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 operated when changing or confirming the set value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 are stored in the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation is connected. If it is a pachinko machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may be used as a switch for changing the set value, or a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided. May be good.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party other than the manager of the game hall (for example, a player) cannot easily touch the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 2174 or / and backs up. It also includes those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 2176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / emission control circuit 2400 and the power supply circuit 2450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, a voice control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 88, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the third pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and a D / A for converting image data as an image signal. Equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing decorative symbols, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, the image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 2032. The voice control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the converted voice signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or a plurality of accessories in the staging accessory group 2058). The accessory control circuit 2307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout / launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 and a game ball for paying out the game balls. A launching device 2006 for launching a ball, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082, and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button (both not shown) for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored. For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a lending ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / emission control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the probability variation control is not executed. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which the time saving control is not executed and a time saving gaming state in which the time saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed is the normal game mode in the short-time game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes a control for displaying, for example, a striking method, which is regarded as a normal game mode, in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 89 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when the game ball wins (passes) in the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 is based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random value for the first special symbol hit determination. , The result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "missing". Further, when the game ball wins (passes) in the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 hits the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random value for the second special symbol hit determination. The result of the determination process is determined to be "time saving hit", "big hit", or "feature opening hit".

It is not essential that the "feature opening hit" is not determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "feature opening hit". It is preferable that the determination is made only with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") as compared with the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. In addition, it is not essential that the hit determination process of the second special symbol is not determined as "missing", but if it is determined as "missing", it is "hit for opening the character". It may be higher than the probability determined by, or it may be lower than the probability determined by "per opening of the character".

In the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202, "time saving hit" and "big hit" are used as data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first start port 2120. The range (width) of the random value for the special symbol hit judgment determined as "or" Loss "and the corresponding judgment value data ("Time saving hit judgment value data "," Big hit judgment value data "," Loss judgment value data " The relationship with ") is stipulated. In addition, as the data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting port 2140, the special determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "feature opening hit". The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for symbol hit judgment and the corresponding judgment value data ("time saving hit judgment value data", "big hit judgment value data", "feature opening hit judgment value data") is defined. Has been done.

It should be noted that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function of changing the jackpot probability determined as "big hit", but this is not essential, and the probability change flag is turned on according to the type of jackpot, for example. It may be set so that the jackpot probability can be increased.

Further, in this third pachinko gaming machine, the total random value of the special symbol hit determination random value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, both the first special symbol hit determination random value and the second special symbol hit determination random value are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability and / and the accessory opening hit probability to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the bonus opening hit probability may be set higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the bonus opening hit probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the jackpot may be set. The probability may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of opening the accessory may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. May be. However, even if the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the time saving hit probability is a probability common to all settings.

Further, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability and the accessory opening hit probability according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of times of shortening of time may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the winning probability of opening the accessory, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 2155 (that is, the operating frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening the time reduction. By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 90 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the start ports 2120 and 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This table is referenced when the "design specification command" is selected. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the "symbol specification command" is a special symbol. This is a command to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 0 to 99. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 can be used as a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the accessory open hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. Further, in the special symbol display unit 2163, 2164, a display mode of a time saving hit, a jackpot display mode, a display mode of a bonus opening, or a loss display mode is derived based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. To.

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table shows the mode of the big hit game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the mode of the subsequent game state (more specifically, according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol). It is referred to when determining the time saving flag and the time saving end condition). The mode of the gaming state after that shows the mode of the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the time saving game state, it is controlled to the C time saving gaming state without being controlled to the big hit gaming state. “L” shown in the column in the time saving end condition of FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable display number of the second special symbol, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is opened. The remarks column in FIG. 91 is described for convenience so that it can be easily understood.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and decides the time saving end condition to L = 30, M = 6, N = 3. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end condition to L = 30, M = 3, N = 3. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the big hit gaming state is not determined.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state (A time saving gaming state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 decides the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag to on, and sets the time saving end condition to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine to N = 2. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 decides the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag to on, and sets the time saving end condition to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine to N = 1. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and does not set the time saving flag to on. When the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines that the time saving flag is set to ON, and sets the time saving end condition to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine to N = 2.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "opening of the accessory" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the game is controlled to the big hit game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 , The number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, the time reduction flag is set to on, and the time reduction end conditions are determined to L = 50, M = 5, N = 2. However, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "opening of the accessory", if it is not controlled to the big hit game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the big hit game state. Not only does it not, but the time reduction flag is not set to on, and after performing control based on the character opening hit, the game state is returned to the state immediately before the character opening hit.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state. Do not set either. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 2201 continuously controls the gaming state without shifting the gaming state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state as described above. Since it is not set, it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the big hit gaming state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 91.

Further, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of the end condition of the time reduction in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the gaming state, but are not limited to this, depending on the gaming state. May be different conditions. For example, all of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, or the A time-saving game state and B may be different. It may be different only in one of the time-saving game states and the time-saving game state C. Further, only one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. , A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state may be different only in one of the time-saving game states. That is, the end condition of at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" is set to the end condition of at least one of the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state. It may be different in the game state.

[3-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 92 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the third pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for convenience so that it can be easily understood. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determine the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140. 2 Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is “time saving hit”, the main CPU 2201 wins the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the game ball wins the first starting port 2120. Determined based on the effect selection random value extracted when (passing).

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", the main CPU 2201 extracts the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the random value for effect selection.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "missing", the main CPU 2201 wins (passes) the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the value of the time saving flag, and the first starting port 2120. ) Is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value extracted at the time. It is considered that the game ball rarely wins a prize in the first starting port 2120 because right-handed hitting is a normal game mode in the short-time game state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 2201 wins (passes) the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the extracted random value for effect selection.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 extracts the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random value for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "a hit for opening the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 sets the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second starting port. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value extracted when the game ball wins in 2140.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "a hit for opening the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the variation time. Is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation effect, for example, 600,000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", the game ball basically does not win (pass) the second starting port 2140, but an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 should be used. Even if the game ball wins a prize, it is done in this way in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantager, but it is not always necessary to do so.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag when the effect selection random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 2301 that has received the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 2201 performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

For convenience, it does not appear in the variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIG. 92, but in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time saving flag is off, and the time saving flag is turned on. If the probability change flag is on, the look-ahead flag is not set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may determine.

The main CPU 2201 may set the look-ahead flag (so that the look-ahead effect is performed) even when the time saving flag is on or the probability change flag is on. Further, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the look-ahead flag may be set (so that the look-ahead effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

Further, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 92 indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a production. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time saving hit or a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine, as in the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 has a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and a normal symbol determination table. (See FIG. 17), a type determination table for a normal symbol (see FIG. 18), and a variation pattern table of a normal symbol (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control process]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include special symbol control processes performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine may be the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIG. 42, 103), etc.). ), Hereinafter, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be described again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display (special symbol game) of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 in executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs the demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demo display effect. Since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as described in the first pachinko gaming machine. There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S2002 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S2002 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S2003 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S2004 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2004 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process, S2005. Move to.

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2003 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process. Move to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been described, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is YES determination), the second special symbol is the processing target when S2003 is YES determination, and the first when S2004 is YES determination. Special symbols are to be processed. Further, when the control state number is not 0 (when the determination in S2002 is NO), the special symbol being executed is the processing target of the special symbol management process.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

When it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S2011 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S2011 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. Then, after executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2013. The main CPU 2201 performs the processing after S2013 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S2015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. This process of S2016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the V-winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening control process. This process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. This process of S2018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S2019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S2020 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the special symbol variable display start processing executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

If the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is the processing called in S2013 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

When it is determined in S2021 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S2021 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S2021 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 89) and using the random value for the special symbol hit determination. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a big hit, or an accessory opening hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, time saving hit, big hit, accessory open hit or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a hit (time saving hit, big hit, hit by opening the accessory). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a bonus opening hit is that the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the bonus opening hit. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of time-saving hits, big hits, and bonus opening hits, but there may be only one type of time-saving hits, jackpots, and / and bonus opening hits. .. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of time saving hits, big hits, and / and bonus opening hits, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 92) is referred to, for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special symbol, the value of the time saving flag, the random value for reach determination, or /. And, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random value for effect selection and the like. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S2026) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92). After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. It will be. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are mainly updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt disabled section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S2030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) within the interrupt disabled section. It is preferable to do it in.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the special symbol variable display end processing executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

When it is determined in S2041 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S2041 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the processing in the special symbol management processing (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S2041 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. Will be. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, the symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of executions of the special symbol game). For example, the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

If this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

When it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S2051 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S2051 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S2052 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol which is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S2052 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the opening hit of the accessory, and when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the loss, NO is determined in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 2186 (both see FIG. 88) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of a special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time reduction flag and a time reduction counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 2131 is opened (S2055), a process of setting a big hit signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and a control state number of the special symbol "5". Processing (S2057), game state specification parameter setting processing (S2058), transmission reservation processing (S2059) of the jackpot start display command, and the like are performed. By performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a bonus opening hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a bonus opening hit.

In S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a hit of opening the accessory, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating a loss (when the determination in S2060 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is the accessory opening hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the accessory opening hit (when the determination in S2060 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process, S2061. Move to.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the game control per opening of the accessory. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per opening of an accessory) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting an upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened set in this process is, for example, once. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a signal setting process (S2063) for opening the accessory to the external terminal board 2184, a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and a game state specification parameter setting process (S2065). ), And the transmission reservation process (S2066) of the start display command for opening the accessory is performed. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving management process (S2071). Since the third pachinko gaming machine, which is called the 1st and 2nd type mixer, is not controlled to the high-accuracy gaming state, the time saving management process executed in the third pachinko gaming machine is shown in FIG. 32 in the first pachinko gaming machine. -There are differences from the processing described with reference to FIG. 39. Specifically, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set on when the probability variation flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The pachinko gaming machine of No. 3 is not controlled to a highly accurate gaming state. Therefore, when the probability variation flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on instead of setting it to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. Is different. Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the probability change flag state (on) in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), and the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38). After determining whether it is on or off (see S191, S202, S211), the processing after S192, S203, and S212, respectively, is performed. However, in the third pachinko gaming machine, the accuracy is high as described above. Since it is not controlled by the gaming state, it differs in that the processing after S192, S203, and S212 is performed without confirming the state of the probability change flag. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is completed, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process (S2074) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V prize device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

When it is determined in S2081 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S2081 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S2081 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time, the maximum number of times of opening, and the like as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operating pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to open a maximum of 1800 msec only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, a maximum of 900 msec may be opened twice at a maximum. The first time may be opened, for example, up to 600 msec, and the second time may be opened, for example, up to 1200 msec. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed the specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each opening of the accessory, and among these multiple opening patterns, for example, one of them is based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. It may be set to one open pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device open / close control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the V winning opening 2155 is performed. After executing the process of S2083, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". By performing the process (S2084) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" in this way, after the completion of the V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94). Will be done. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the V winning device opening display command. The V-winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device open control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

When it is determined in S2091 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S2091 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S2091 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winnings of the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is the value of the maximum number of winnings. To. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2092 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening / closing winning opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2093 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not it has been detected by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. The above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. For example, the game ball by the locking member 2159 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set within the specified time after the locking is released.

When it is determined in S2095 that the V winning detection has been made (when the determination in S2095 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a game control start setting process per V. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per V) output to the hall computer 2186 (both see FIG. 88) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of a special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V-hit game control is executed, for example, 15 rounds of round games are executed as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91), so that the player has executed the big hit game control process. As in the case, you can win a large number of prize balls. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-per game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and referred to, but the V-per game control may also be referred to as the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

Further, in the start setting process of the game control per V in S2093, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time reduction flag and a time reduction counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the winning of the winning combination is processed as the first round game. That is, the game control per V executed by the determination that the V winning detection has been made (YES in S2095) is started from the second round game. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 has, for example, a process of setting an upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 is operated) (S2099), and a process of setting a signal per V to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), the game state specification parameter setting process (S2102), the transmission reservation process of the V-hit start display command (S2103), and the like. By performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, when it is determined that there is no V winning detection in this S2095 (when the determination in S2095 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device release control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of a large winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

When it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S2111 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S2113 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process (S2114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the big hit end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) is performed after the end of the special winning opening opening preparation process. It will be. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S2113 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived (S2052 in FIG. 97 is determined to be YES). In the case of the big hit game control process, the big winning opening 2131 is selected as the big winning opening to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory, the stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (S2060 in FIG. 97 is determined to be YES), and the V prize is detected (FIG. FIG. In the case of the game control per V started by (YES in S2095 of 100), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151) is selected as the opening winning opening. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the large winning prize. The number of prize balls and the like at the time of winning the prize to the mouth 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is set. The number of rounds of opening the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform control for managing the number of rounds and control for managing the number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

The above-mentioned "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the opening large winning opening among the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". By performing the process (S2121) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" in this way, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94). Will be done. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of a large winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

When it is determined in S2131 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "6" (when the determination in S2131 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when the determination in S2131 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. In this process, the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88) for counting the number of winning balls in the large winning opening 2131 or the V attacker count switch for counting the number of entering the game ball into the inside of the V winning opening 2150. It is determined whether or not the value counted by 2153 (see FIG. 88) is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker counting switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is YES), the main CPU 2201 processes the process in S2134. Transfer.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and performs the process. , Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2133 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 closes the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process (S2135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" in this way, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again. See) will be done. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined in S2141 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "7" (when the determination in S2141 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (when the determination in S2141 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) and various counters (for example, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or the process of resetting is performed. After executing the process of S2142, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. However, in the special symbol game end process of FIG. 98, for convenience of explanation, it is shown that the time saving management process (S2071) is performed, but strictly speaking, the time saving management process (S2071) is a bonus release. If it is a hit (when S2060 in FIG. 97 is determined to be YES), it is executed, but if it is a big hit (when S2052 in FIG. 97 is determined to be YES), it is not executed and the process is skipped. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[4. Expansion example]
Hereinafter, an extended example common to the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine described above will be described. Since the reference numerals attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the following description describes specific pachinko gaming machines (particularly the third pachinko gaming machine). Unless the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine), the reference numerals are omitted.

[4-1. Extended example of probabilistic control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to set the probability variation flag on according to the type of jackpot, and when the probability variation flag is set to on, the number of probability variations is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be used.

For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, for example, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the jackpot has passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific region, the jackpot is determined. It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets the probability change flag on at the end of the game control process. In the above specific area, for example, the movable member operates in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, so that the game ball can pass through or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to displace to a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variable machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit When the result is a big hit, the ease of passing the game ball to the above specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and is (A) specified. The figure which shows the case where the opening mode of a region is a 1st opening mode, (B) the opening mode of a specific area is a 2nd opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of a specific area is a 3rd opening mode. Is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area. In the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the large winning opening is opened for a long time after being short-opened, but the opening mode of the large winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104 (A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the large winning opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has become. Therefore, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the large winning opening to the end of the long opening of the large winning opening. ing. Therefore, it is extremely easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. That is, the probability change flag is set on very easily at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), in the third opening mode, a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started (both of these two times are short time). ), The specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even one of the plurality of gaming balls that have won the big winning opening can pass through the specific area in either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. It is also difficult compared to. That is, it is difficult to turn on the probability change flag at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag is turned on at the end of the big hit game control process. It is set.

Note that FIG. 104 is an example of an opening mode of a specific area in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning in the big winning opening is easily passed through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. , An example of providing two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of open modes of the specific region in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning in the jackpot is easy to pass through the specific region is limited to two modes. However, only one aspect may be used, or three or more modes may be used.

Further, in FIG. 104, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, an opening mode of a specific region in which it is difficult to pass through the specific region even if only one of the plurality of game balls winning the big prize opening is executed. As an example of the above, an example of providing the third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the big hit game control process, the number of open modes of the specific area where it is difficult to pass through the specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls winning the big prize opening is 1. The embodiment is not limited to this, and two or more embodiments may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105, when the determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit), the first special symbol and the second The hit selection symbol command for the special symbol is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, for example, in the hit selection symbol command, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. It is selected and "z2" is selected with a selectivity of 50%. When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, for example, in the hit selection symbol command, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. It is selected and "z5" is selected with a selectivity of 35%.

FIG. 106 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the type of jackpot (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (3R normal big hit A) of the third opening mode. Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (10R normal big hit A) of the third opening mode. Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot of the first opening mode (10R probability variation jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (10R normal big hit B) of the third opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot B) of the first opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot C) of the second opening mode.

That is, according to FIGS. 104 to 106 above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of big hit is determined to be 3R normal big hit A with a selectivity of 40%, and 10%. The selectivity of is determined to be 10R normal jackpot A, and the selectivity of 50% is determined to be 10R probability variation jackpot A. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selectivity of 15% and 10R probability variation jackpot B with a selectivity of 50%. , 35 is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot C. In this way, depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability change flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to make the probability of being set on different.

In a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which the specific area is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (C), and is described later, for example. As shown in FIG. 107, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning). (Example) in which the opening mode is controlled based on the winning of the mouth, and (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second. It is a figure which shows the case of an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 107 (A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening count is obtained. When the switch detects the winning of the first game ball, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the big winning opening is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area is open. Therefore, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the specific area is until the winning opening is closed. Does not open, but remains closed. Therefore, it is more difficult than the first open mode to pass through a specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls that have won a prize in the big prize opening is executed during the execution of the big hit game control. That is, it is difficult to turn on the probability change flag at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability changes at the end of the jackpot game control process. The flag is set to on.

In the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, an example in which the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. If the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a type 1 / type 2 mixer such as a third pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. Although the example to be provided has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an opening mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is performed in both the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. An example that can be determined in the difficult third aspect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one. The game ball may be configured to be determined only in an aspect (first aspect or second aspect) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through a specific area.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice at a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has been open for a short time (both for a short time), but if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be opened once or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, the closing of a specific area is closed according to the passage of a predetermined opening time or the end of a round in which the specific area is opened, or is closed according to a specified number of large winning openings or winning a prize in a specific area. It may be controlled to do so. Further, one or a plurality of conditions for closing may be combined.

Further, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability change control is executed (for example, the high probability time-shortening game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are set to a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is repeatedly executed alternately until it reaches the limiter. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. It is controlled to (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the number of loops is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of limiters may be a fixed number, for example, may be determined according to a symbol random value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting machine, the number of limiters may be different depending on the set value.

In the above, the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot gaming state. And the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached. In particular, it is effective when it is a type 1 type 2 type mixer such as a third pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability change machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the probability change control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability variable machine, assuming that the number of limiters is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth big hit game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined number of limiters has been reached. The game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, the game does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, but the game is played in the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. The same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process.

Further, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the probabilistic change control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-probability time-shortening game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which the probability variation control is not executed when the special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variation control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “ST number”) may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may be different depending on the set value. Further, for example, it may be a so-called fall-type gaming machine in which a fall lottery is performed and the probability variation control is completed based on the result of the fall lottery. For example, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area during the big hit gaming state. It may be a so-called V probability variation type gaming machine in which probability variation control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

[4-2. Extended example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving control may be executed after the big hit game control process is completed. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random value among the random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening (for example, for special symbol hit determination). A random value, a special symbol symbol random value, etc.) may be used to perform a time reduction winning determination process for determining whether or not to execute the time reduction control, in addition to the special symbol hit determination process. When the time saving hit judgment is performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, for example, the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is a specific symbol disorder. If it is a numerical value, it can be determined as a "time reduction hit" in which the time reduction control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving winning determination process may be performed.

Further, when the time saving winning determination processing is performed separately from the special symbol hit determination processing, the time saving winning determination processing may be executed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame.

Further, when the above-mentioned time-saving winning determination processing is performed, a random number for determining the time-saving winning, which is exclusively used for the time-saving winning determination processing, is generated in a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving winning is applied based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time-saving winning determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning.

Further, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time saving winning determination process is extracted based on the winning of the game ball at the starting opening, and it is not essential to extract it in other areas (for example, general winning opening, small hit winning opening, etc.). It may be extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening, etc.). Further, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination processing is provided, and a random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted based on, for example, that the game ball has passed through this dedicated area. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time saving winning determination process and the special symbol hit determination processing are executed at different timings, the time saving winning determination process is performed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the confirmation display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time saving hit determination process may be "time saving hit". In such a case, the main CPU may forcibly derive, for example, a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving winning determination process is "time saving hit".

In addition, the sub CPU can visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or an easy effect image (for example, a variation effect of a decorative pattern or a character). It is preferable to execute control to display the display effect (such as display effect) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time saving winning determination processing is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination processing, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, it is possible to visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or instead of displaying an easy effect image on the display device, the time saving winning judgment A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a change effect of a decorative pattern, a display effect by a character, etc.) that is impossible or difficult to grasp from the appearance whether the result of processing is a "time reduction hit" or a "time reduction loss". You may perform the control to display in. In this case, it is possible to maintain the interest until the result of the time saving winning determination process is disclosed.

Further, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the sub CPU displays an effect image showing, for example, a right-handed instruction as a method of launching a game ball recommended in the big hit gaming state. It is controlled so that it is displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this respect, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, when the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU performs the time reduction control. As a recommended method of launching a game ball, for example, an effect image indicating a right-handed instruction is controlled to be displayed on the display device. However, when the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", the effect image showing the recommended method of launching the game ball when the time saving control is executed may always be displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "time reduction hit" is more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), it is not displayed. You may do so. The above-mentioned specific condition is not limited to the condition of the number of time reductions, and may be an arbitrary condition as appropriate.

Further, if the time reduction winning determination processing is executed before the special symbol hit determination processing is executed, the sub CPU is in a situation where the time reduction hit is set (that is, a situation in which the time reduction flag is set to ON). You may execute the control to display the effect image which can be grasped by the appearance or is easy to grasp on the display device whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed.

It should be noted that the type of random value used for the time-saving win judgment process, the extraction timing of the random value used for the time-saving win judgment process, the condition for determining the time-saving hit in the time-saving win judgment process, the execution timing of the time-saving win judgment process, and the time-saving win judgment process. The game state that can be executed, the mode of the time saving game state, the time saving number set at the time saving hit, the start timing of the time saving game state, the end timing of the time saving game state, the time saving number rewriting timing, the time saving hit probability, and the time saving winning judgment. The following is a summary of the processes related to time saving, such as displaying the results of the processes.

(Type of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The random number values used in the time saving winning judgment processing are, for example, a random value for determining a special symbol hit, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for determining a normal hit, a random value for determining a normal symbol, a random value for determining a special symbol fall, and a random value for determining a fall. It may be any one of a plurality of types of random values such as a dedicated time-saving winning determination random value. Further, if it is a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time saving winning determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

Further, the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving winning judgment random value), and a plurality of types of random values (for example, a special symbol hit judgment random value and a symbol determination random value). ) May be used to determine.

(Extraction timing of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The extraction timing of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is such that when the game ball wins the starting port that triggers the special symbol hit judgment processing, the game ball passes through the passing gate that triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit judgment processing. The time may be any timing, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment process may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning opening or the like in which the prize ball is paid out, or a specific gate or a specific out where the prize ball is not paid out. It may be done based on the passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, when the random value for the time saving winning judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting opening, when the game ball wins in either the first starting opening or the second starting opening. Even if there is, the random value for determining the time saving win may be extracted, or the random value for determining the time saving winning may be extracted only when the game ball wins at one of the specific starting openings.

(Conditions for determining time reduction hit in the time reduction hit determination process)
When the time-saving winning judgment processing is performed using the extracted time-saving winning judgment processing random value, the extracted time-saving winning judgment random value is a specific time-saving winning judgment random value (for example, specific time-saving winning judgment value data). It is advisable to make it judged as a time saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time saving winning judgment processing using the special symbol hit judgment random value, the time saving is shortened when it is a specific loss judgment value data, a specific small hit judgment value data and / or a specific big hit judgment value data. It is good to judge it as a hit. In addition, when executing the time saving hit determination process using the symbol random value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that it is a time saving hit when it is a specific lost symbol, a specific small hit symbol, or a specific big hit symbol. .. Further, when the time saving hit determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the specific special symbol fall determination random value value data is used. Further, when the time saving winning determination process is executed using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time saving winning judgment processing is performed using the normal hit determination random value or the normal symbol determination random value. Furthermore, the conditions for determining the time reduction hit in the time reduction winning determination process are not limited to the above conditions, and can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the hit of opening the accessory. When the gaming ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 2152 is opened, whether or not to execute the time saving control and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of the accessory opening. It is good to do so. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the big hit game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not the time reduction control is executed and the number of time reductions based on the "time reduction hit" if the result of the time reduction winning determination process is "time reduction hit". However, the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving loss", the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory, and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened. If does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time saving winning judgment processing)
When the time saving winning judgment process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random value for the time saving winning judgment acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting port, the main CPU performs the start information of the special symbol. Similarly, it is advisable to reserve the acquired random number value for determining the time reduction.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time saving winning determination process immediately (for example, before it is held) when the random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted, or the extracted random number value is reserved. The time saving winning determination processing may be executed until the variable display of the special symbol is started, or the time saving winning determination processing may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

(Game state in which the time saving winning judgment process can be executed)
The time reduction winning determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the high accuracy non-time reduction game state, and the time reduction game state, and the time reduction control may not be executed in the game state (for example, normal). It may be executed only in the gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). Further, for example, conditions for executing the time-saving winning determination process, such as executing the time-saving winning determination process in any game state or executing the time-saving winning determination process only in a specific gaming state, are set in advance. When the specified conditions are satisfied, the time saving winning determination process may be executed.

(Mode of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning determination process may be the same mode or different modes. For example, a first time saving flag and a second time saving flag are prepared, and when the time saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time saving flag is set to on and based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing. When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to on. In this case, it is preferable to execute the time saving control having different functions depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on and the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set to on, both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set to on, the special figure shortening control and the electric support are performed. Only one of the controls can be performed. When the first time saving flag is set to on, the control is performed in the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to, it may be controlled to the second time-shortening gaming state in which only the electric support control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags is set to be turned on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on, for example, the result of the time saving winning determination processing, or the time saving winning determination processing is executed. It may be decided according to the game state at the time of being played.

(Time reduction number set at the time of time reduction hit)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the time reduction winning determination processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a plurality of time saving winning judgment random numbers are specified as time saving hit judgment value data, the set time saving number of times is set to the gaming state when the time saving winning judgment processing is performed. Alternatively or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random value for determining the time saving. For example, if the random number value for determining the time reduction hit, which is extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, is the first time reduction hit determination value data, the number of time reductions is determined to be "100", and the second time reduction is performed. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time reductions to "50".

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may newly set (that is, reset the time saving remaining number) the time saving number determined based on the" time saving hit "instead of the time saving remaining number. In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the number of times of time reduction newly set is larger or less than the number of times of time reduction remaining, and the range of gameplay is widened. It is possible to have a hobby and enhance the interest.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the" time reduction hit "to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the number of remaining time reductions is not less than the current number of remaining time reductions, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU newly sets the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit "instead of the time reduction remaining number, and the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit "is the time reduction remaining number. Of the processes to be added to the number of times, one of them may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in an embodiment satisfying the predetermined conditions.

In the pachinko gaming machine in which the time saving control having different functions is executed when the first time saving flag is set to on and when the second time saving flag is set to on, the time saving winning determination process is performed. When the result of is "time saving hit", the main CPU has a time saving of a function different from the case where the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving control of the same function. The process of setting the number of time reductions may be changed depending on the case of control. For example, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving controls having the same function, the time saving number determined based on the "time saving hit" is used as the remaining time saving number. If the time saving control that is added and executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" are different functions, the time saving control is based on the "time saving hit" instead of the remaining number of times that the time saving is being executed. The number of time reductions determined in the above process may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time reductions may be reset). In addition, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on "time saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time saving times during execution are exhausted, the time saving based on "time saving hit" is performed. Control may be performed.

When the number of time reductions is set based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time reductions to be set is determined to be "0", the time reduction flag is set to on even though the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". Further, when the result of the time reduction winning determination process performed during the execution of the time reduction control is "time reduction hit" and the number of time reductions is set to "0", the execution time reduction control is terminated.

(Start timing of time reduction control)
The start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit" can be the end time of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time reduction control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing is the end time of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning determination processing becomes the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time saving hit judgment process is "time saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is a big hit, "time saving hit" is invalidated (based on "time saving hit"). It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set on) and the time saving flag is set on based on the hit time selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of big hit).

Further, the start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction hit determination process is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the time reduction winning determination processing is performed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame, even if the time reduction control is started immediately (before the special symbol hit determination processing is performed) based on the result of the time reduction winning determination processing. good. In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not the time saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing and the time of executing the time saving winning judgment processing, which can enhance the interest. Will be.

Further, the start timing of the time saving control to be executed based on the result of the time saving winning determination process being "time saving hit" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been executed. In this case, after the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU executes a fanning effect of whether or not the time reduction control is started until the time reduction control is started. It will be possible to enhance the interest.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends. Based on the above, it is advisable to start the time saving control based on the jackpot. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which the time reduction control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155. Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the end of the jackpot game control. Further, the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time reduction hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the accessory opening hit. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the big hit game control is not executed, the main CPU will reduce the time based on the "time saving hit" based on the closing of the opening / closing winning opening 2151. It is good to start the control.

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time reduction game state ends is, for example, "when the variable display of the special symbol is executed over the set number of time reductions in the game state where the time reduction control is executed" and "in the game state where the time reduction control is executed". , When the game is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or" When the number of time reductions is set to 0 even though the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a time reduction hit ", etc. Is.

If the small hit game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the time reduction control is continuously executed even after the small hit game control process is completed. Will be done.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened due to the derivation of the stop symbol mode indicating that the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory during the execution of the time reduction control. However, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not started when the V attacker 2152 is opened, the main CPU 2201 will be used even after the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Continue to execute time reduction control.

(Rewriting the number of time reductions)
When the time saving winning determination process is executed in the gaming state (for example, high accuracy time saving gaming state, time saving gaming state, etc.) in which the time saving control is executed, and the result of this time saving winning determination processing is "time saving hit", the main CPU , The time reduction number may be rewritten, or the time reduction number may not be rewritten (that is, the time reduction control may be executed until the time reduction number in the running time reduction control is exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction hit" when the number of time reductions in the running time reduction control is exhausted. It may be set at the time of executing the special symbol hit determination process, at the start or stop of the variable display of the special symbol, at the time reduction winning determination process, or at various timings. can do. In addition, when it is set at the time of the time reduction winning determination processing, the time reduction number determined based on the "time reduction hit" is overwritten with the time reduction number in the running time reduction control. Further, the number of time reductions may be set in any of "rewriting the number of time reductions" and "adding to the previous number of time reductions" in a manner satisfying the predetermined conditions.

(Probability of shortening the time)
When the time saving winning determination process is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening or the second starting opening, the time saving winning determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening (hereinafter, "No. 1"). The time saving hit probability is referred to as "1 time saving winning determination process") and the time saving winning determination process (hereinafter referred to as "second time saving winning determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening. May be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving winning determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving winning determination process is performed, or the second time saving winning determination process may be performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving hit determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability in the case of being broken, or the time saving winning determination process when the first time saving winning determination process is performed and the second time saving winning determination process. The probability of hitting the time reduction may be the same or almost the same as that of the case where.

(Display of the result of the time saving winning judgment process)
The number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction winning judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (whether it is a time reduction hit or the time reduction loss) and / and the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (time reduction hit). May be provided with a winning time reduction number display unit to display. The time reduction winning determination result display unit and / and the winning time reduction number display unit may be provided in an LED display group provided with a special symbol display unit or the like, and may be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU may display the result of the time reduction winning determination process and / or the number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction hit on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. good.

(interval)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game. The interval time may be longer than the above interval time when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a “time reduction loss”. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, the sub CPU displays, for example, an effect image indicating that it is a "time saving hit" until the above interval time elapses. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the bonus opening hit and the big hit game control process is not executed based on this bonus opening hit, the main CPU 2201 loses the time saving. The interval time after the end of the operation for opening the accessory when the result of the judgment process is "time saving hit" is made longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving loss". It may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Extended example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine described in the present specification play a game using a gaming medium, and a privilege (for example, a prize) is obtained based on the result of the gaming. It can be applied to all gaming machines to which a ball (ball, prize data, etc.) is given. That is, if the game is played by launching or throwing a game medium (for example, a game ball, a medal, etc.) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. Instead, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player and enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game medium that electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player.

In the case of a gaming machine that circulates the enclosed gaming balls to play a game, the gaming balls as a gaming medium are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that the prize balls will be paid out when a prize is won. Instead, prize ball data as a game medium is given. In this specification, the "game value to be paid out" includes the meaning of both the prize ball and the prize ball data. For example, when a prize is won in a prize opening with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls is given to the enclosed gaming machine. Further, the game value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball and the prize ball data, and may be any one corresponding to the prize ball and the prize ball data.

Further, when the gaming medium management device connected to the main control circuit manages the gaming medium management device, the gaming medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the gaming machine, and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to the two-way communication function via a game medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for a game medium lending operation (that is, a player performs a game medium loading operation). When the winning combination related to the payout of the gaming medium is won (the winning combination is established), the payout operation of the gaming medium (that is, the payout of the gaming medium to the player is performed, and the necessary gaming medium is provided. It may be possible to perform an operation of acquiring the game) or electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game. Further, the gaming medium management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of gaming media possessed on the front of the pachinko gaming machine, for example, based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operating means, a return (settlement) operating means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the gaming medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming medium handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, the recording medium is not limited to being discharged, and cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko gaming machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in a pachi-slot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, and an enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it can also prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. As described above, since the gaming ball is configured to be launched from above with respect to the gaming area, the enclosed gaming machine can avoid a so-called return ball (foul ball). Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine. Further, without providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game ball polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game machine are provided. May be good. In this case, the capture mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to capture, or may be configured to capture from a winning opening provided in the game area.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed gaming machine, the gaming ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the gaming ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. Further, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls to be paid out is increased according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. Further, for example, at the end of the game, the entire game value (that is, the ball held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine may be settled, or a part of the ball held may be transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls held is integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held is reduced. .. Furthermore, there is no concept of a foul ball in a type of gaming machine in which a gaming ball is launched from above the gaming area, but a foul ball is generated when a gaming ball is launched from below as in a conventional gaming machine. sell. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine of a type in which a gaming ball is launched from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball is generated. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases depending on consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the gaming medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting (return) of possession balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by a game media management device. In the second embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange or the like in a game field or the like where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening may be continuously detected by the door opening sensor. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The enclosed gaming machine may be configured so that the player cannot touch the gaming ball. For example, the enclosed gaming machine is of a type in which the gaming ball is circulated only by the gaming machine without being circulated by the island equipment. , And the type in which the gaming ball circulates in the island equipment but the player cannot touch the gaming ball, etc. are also included in the enclosed gaming machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received are the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with either one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination receiving the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. You can confirm that it has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demolishing.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is read, it is difficult to decode this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set aside from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is not only confirmed that the regular signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the regular signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities. Further, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game medium management device by communication, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game medium management device, and the main control circuit is connected to the main control circuit via the frame control circuit. The communication connection with the game medium management device may be made. Further, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the launch control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at the symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate the jackpot symbol. Process so that there is nothing to do.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the other Control is performed to forcibly stop the special symbol of the above with a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the general gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state as described above. In this jackpot gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the start of the second special symbol are started. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general game is performed. The timekeeping of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted based on the transition from the state to the small hit gaming state (stopped at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol), and the transition from the small hit gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the end of the small hit game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general gaming state shifts to the small hit gaming state as described above, but in this small hit gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the main CPU is in the variable display. Regarding the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the LED group is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the timing of the fluctuation time is interrupted as described above.

[4. 4th pachinko game machine]
Next, an example of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described below. This fourth pachinko gaming machine is a gaming machine equipped with a small hit rush, and like the second pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Is. However, the fourth pachinko gaming machine is a so-called ST machine that shifts to the normal gaming state even if it is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state when it is controlled to the high probability gaming state for a specified number of times (for example, 120 times). be.

Hereinafter, in explaining the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the description of the points in common with the second pachinko gaming machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine are the same as those of the second pachinko gaming machine.

Further, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described using the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the second pachinko gaming machine. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the drawings newly adopted in the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the second pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko machine The explanation shall be made using a code and a step number different from those of the gaming machine.

[4-1. Configuration of game board unit]
FIG. 108 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 4010 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 109 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In FIGS. 108 and 109, not only the description but also the illustration of the reference numerals will be omitted for the configuration common to the second pachinko gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70.

As shown in FIG. 108, the first starting port 4120 has a first starting port 4120A and a first starting port 4120B, unlike the second pachinko gaming machine.

The fourth pachinko gaming machine has a first start port switch 4121A (see FIG. 109) that detects the passage of the game ball to the first start port 4120A, and a second pachinko gaming machine that detects the passage of the game ball to the first start port 4120B. It has one start port switch 4121B (see FIG. 109).

When the game ball passes through the first starting port 4120A, for example, three game balls are paid out. When the game ball passes through the first starting port 4120B, for example, one game ball is paid out.

The first starting port 4120A is arranged below the display area of the display device 4007, and is arranged so that the left-handed game ball can win (the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing.

The first starting port 4120B is arranged below, for example, the first starting port 4120A, and is arranged so that a left-struck game ball can win a prize (a right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing.

In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the ordinary electric accessory 4146 is arranged below, for example, the first starting port 4120A. The ordinary electric accessory 4146 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (passed) to the first starting port 4120B by operating a movable member 4147, which is a so-called electric chew, or to the first starting port 4120B. It is configured so that the game ball can be changed to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a prize. In the ordinary electric accessory 4146 in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the placement position is below the first starting port 4120A, and the winning opening for which the ease of winning is changed by changing the state is the first starting port 4120B. Although it differs from the second pachinko gaming machine in some respects, other configurations and functions are the same as those of the second pachinko gaming machine, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In FIG. 108, the open state of the movable member 4147 is shown by a alternate long and short dash line, and the closed state of the movable member 4147 is shown by a solid line.

The passage gate 4126 included in the passage gate unit 4125 is not arranged in the right side region 4107, but is arranged in the left side region 4106 so that the left-struck game ball can pass through.

It should be noted that the passage gate 4126 may function as a trigger for operating the accessory continuous operation device in the same manner as the second pachinko gaming machine, but the accessory continuous operation device is separate from the passage gate 4126. A gate that triggers the operation may be arranged in the right side region 4107.

The special electric accessory unit 4130 is arranged below the ordinary electric accessory 4146, and the game ball can be won regardless of whether the left-handed or right-handed hit is performed. The special electric accessory unit 4130 has a jackpot big winning opening 4131 and an opening / closing member 4134 that can be opened / closed in the front-rear direction, and when the opening / closing member 4134 is operated to open the jackpot big winning opening 4131. , The right-handed game ball can win the big hit opening 4131.

In the right side region 4107, for example, two flow paths 4107a and 4107b are formed on the upper and lower sides as flow paths of the game ball hit to the right. In this embodiment, among the right-handed game balls, the ball is distributed to the upper flow path 4107a with a probability of approximately one-third, and is distributed to the lower flow path 4107b with a probability of approximately two-thirds. Has been done.

The second starting port 4140 is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 4107a can win a prize, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 4107a can win a prize. The passage of the game ball to the second starting port 4140 is detected by the second starting port switch 4141 (see FIG. 109). It is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 4107a are configured to win a prize in the second starting port 4140.

Similar to the second pachinko gaming machine, the small hit unit 4150 has a small hit large winning opening 4151 arranged in the right side region 4107. The small hit large winning opening 4151 is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 4107b can win a prize. By operating on, the ease of winning is configured to be changeable. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 4151 for small hits is, for example, 10, but is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, the big hit opening 4131 and the small hit big winning opening 4151 are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening opened when the big hit game control process is executed and the big winning opening. The large winning opening that is opened when the small hit game control process is executed may be the same large winning opening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, the fourth pachinko gaming machine, like the second pachinko gaming machine, has a main control circuit 4200 that controls the game and a sub-control that controls the effect according to the progress of the game. A circuit 4300 or the like is provided.

[4-2. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 110 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, various random numbers acquired based on winning the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B are displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started (that is, the first special). It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4) until the symbol is subjected to the hit determination process. Similarly, various random numbers acquired based on winning the second starting port 4140 are subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol until the variable display of the second special symbol is started (that is, the hit determination process of the second special symbol is started. Up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4) can be reserved.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the special symbol hit determination acquired when the game ball wins in the first start opening 4120A, 4120B or the second start opening 4140. It is a table referred to when determining "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit" or "loss" by lottery based on the random value. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the first special symbol are "time saving hit", "big hit", and "loss", and "small hit" is not included in the lottery target. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the second special symbol are "small hit", "big hit", and "miss". However, "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, or "time saving hit" may be included in the lottery mode in the hit determination process of the second special symbol. ..

The special symbol hit determination random value is a random value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as in the second pachinko gaming machine. In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination random value is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 determines "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for determination for special symbol hit determination determined as "time reduction hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding time reduction hit Relationship with judgment value data, special symbol hit determined as "big hit" Relationship between range (width) of random value for judgment and corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as "miss" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random value and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

Further, the main CPU 4201 determines "small hit", "big hit", or "missing" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value in the hit determination process of the second special symbol. In the hit judgment table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for judgment of special symbol hit determined as "small hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding small hit. Relationship with judgment value data, special symbol hit determined as "big hit" Relationship between range (width) of random value for judgment and corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as "miss" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random value and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in both the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the probability (big hit probability) that the jackpot determination value data is extracted when the probability variation flag is off is 201. It is 1/200, and the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is on is 1/200.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 can be determined to be "time saving hit" even if the probability variation flag is on, but instead, when the value of the probability variation flag is on, "time saving hit". May be excluded from the lottery target so that it is not determined as a "time saving hit".

Further, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, the game is configured not to shift to the C time saving game state, but for example, when the “time saving hit” is won in the high accuracy low base state, the high accuracy high. In the case of a specification that shifts to the base state, by not providing a "time saving hit" in the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, the "time saving hit" is substantially achieved in the high accuracy and low base state. You can avoid winning.

[4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 111 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 (see FIG. 109) included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the first start opening 4120A, 4120B or the second start opening 4140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. It is a table referred to when the "selection symbol command" and the "symbol specification command" to be determined are selected. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol determined according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and the "symbol specification command" is a command displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command to specify. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 responds to the symbol random value of the first special symbol. , For example, one of "z0", "z1" and "z2" is selected as the selected symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 may use, for example, "z3" or "z4" as a selection symbol command according to the symbol random value of the first special symbol. , And select "zA2" or "zA3" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 may use, for example, "z5" as a selection symbol command regardless of the symbol random value of the first special symbol. , And select "zA4" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 may use, for example, as a selection symbol command, regardless of the symbol random value of the second special symbol. Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 may use, for example, "z7" or "z8" as the selected symbol command as the selected symbol command according to the symbol random value of the second special symbol. , And select "zA6" or "zA7" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 may use, for example, "z9" as a selection symbol command regardless of the symbol random value of the second special symbol. , And select "zA8" as the symbol specification command.

Although the description is omitted in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol is displayed on the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, as in the second pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table (FIG. 12 (A)) referred to when the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the unit 4163 or the second special symbol display unit 4164 (see FIG. 109) is determined according to the selected symbol command. )) Is remembered.

[4-4. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 112 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the gaming states are low-accuracy low-base state (normal gaming state), low-accuracy high-base state (low-accuracy time-short game state), high-accuracy high-base state (high-accuracy time-short game state), and It is controlled to either a high-accuracy low-base state (high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state). Of these gaming states, left-handed is the normal gaming mode in the low-accuracy low-base state, low-accuracy high-base state, and high-accuracy high-base state, and the game ball is awarded to the first starting openings 4120A and 4120B. The game progresses based on this. In the high-accuracy and low-base state, right-handed hitting is a normal game mode, and the game proceeds based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 4140.

In the hit type determination table, the mode of the hit game state or / And the mode of the subsequent gaming state, which is referred to in determining. The mode of the hit game state shown in FIG. 112 shows the mode of the big hit game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) or the mode of the small hit game state (more specifically, the number of times of opening). Further, the aspect of the gaming state after that shows the aspect of the gaming state after the end of the hit gaming state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, it is controlled to the C time-saving gaming state without being controlled by the hit gaming state. The aspect is shown.

(In the case of a short time hit)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" in the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state, for example, the main CPU 4201 turns on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag. Decide to set to. Also, the number of time reductions is set to 1 (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 6 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"), or 12 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). Decide to do. When the display mode for hitting the time reduction is derived to the first special symbol display unit 4163, it is possible to shift to the C time reduction game state.

In the high accuracy high base state or the high accuracy low base state, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", it is not controlled to the C time reduction game state. Therefore, in the high-accuracy low-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 does not shift to the C time saving gaming state and is high. Continue the low probability base state. In the high-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may not include "time saving hit".

(When the result of the hit judgment processing of the first special symbol is a big hit)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the A time saving game state are determined as follows.

In the low-accuracy low-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z3" (high-accuracy big hit), the main CPU 4201 As a mode of the winning game state, the number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds, and as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set only the probability variation flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the probability variation number is 120. Decide to set to times. In this case, the main CPU 4201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163 and then control the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, control the jackpot game state to a high accuracy and low base state. Become.

Further, in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z3" (high accuracy big hit), the main The CPU 4201 determines that the number of rounds is set to 4 as the mode of the winning game state, and sets both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON as the mode of the subsequent game state. In this case, it is decided to set the probability variation number to 120 times and the time reduction number to 50 times. The main CPU 4201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and can control the jackpot gaming state to a high accuracy and high base state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Further, in the low probability low base state, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z4" (low probability big hit), the main CPU 4201 is in the hit game state. As an aspect, the number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds, and as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is set to ON. In this case, the main CPU 4201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163 and then control the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, control the jackpot game state to a low probability and low base state. Become.

Further, in the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, or the high accuracy low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", and the selected symbol command is "z4" (low accuracy). In the case of a big hit), the main CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as a mode of the winning game state, and sets only the time saving flag out of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag as the mode of the subsequent gaming state. To decide. In this case, the main CPU 4201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163 and then control the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, control the jackpot game state to a low accuracy and high base state. Become.

(When the result of the hit judgment processing of the second special symbol is a big hit)
In the low-accuracy low-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z7" (high-accuracy big hit), the main CPU 4201 As a mode of the winning game state, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, and as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set only the probability variation flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the probability variation number is 120. Decide to set to times. In this case, the main CPU 4201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164 and then control it to the jackpot gaming state, and after the end of this jackpot gaming state, it can control it to the high accuracy and low base state. Become.

Further, in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z7" (high accuracy big hit), the main The CPU 4201 determines that the number of rounds is set to 10 as the mode of the winning game state, and sets both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON as the mode of the subsequent game state. In this case, it is decided to set the probability variation number to 120 times and the time reduction number to 50 times. The main CPU 4201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, and can control the jackpot gaming state to a high accuracy and high base state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Further, in the low probability low base state, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z8" (low probability big hit), the main CPU 4201 is in the hit game state. As an aspect, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, and as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is set to ON. In this case, the main CPU 4201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164 and then control it to the jackpot gaming state, and after the end of this jackpot gaming state, it can control it to the low probability and low base state. Become.

Further, in the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, or the high accuracy low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit", and the selected symbol command is "z8" (low accuracy). In the case of a big hit), the main CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as a mode of the winning game state, and sets only the time saving flag out of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag as the mode of the subsequent gaming state. To decide. In this case, the main CPU 4201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164 and then control it to the jackpot gaming state, and after the end of this jackpot gaming state, it can control it to the low accuracy and high base state. Become.

(In the case of a small hit)
When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "small hit" (selected symbol command is "z6"), low accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low. In any of the base states, the main CPU 4201 determines the number of times the small hit large winning opening 4151 (see FIG. 108) is opened as one mode of the small hit game state. In this case, the main CPU 4201 is controlled to the small hit gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned small hit display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, and is controlled to the small hit gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state. Return to the game state just before.

(In case of loss)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z5" and "z9"), the main CPU 4201 is the mode of the winning game state and the subsequent gaming state. Do not set any of the aspects of. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 4201 continuously controls the gaming state without shifting the gaming state. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 112. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clearly indicate that neither the mode of the winning game state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 112.

[4-5. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 4201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start or the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start. Since the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start is the same as the table shown in FIG. 74, the description thereof will be omitted. Similarly, since the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start is the same as the table shown in FIG. 75, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the low-accuracy low-base state, the low-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy high-base state in which left-handed strike is a regular game mode, the main CPU 4201 refers to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the main CPU 4201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start.

That is, in the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state, the operation frequency of the ordinary electric accessory 4146 is increased, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the first starting port 4120B is increased. However, even in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start. Therefore, even if the game ball wins the second start opening 4140 by hitting right in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state, the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74). ), The variable display of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely long time of about 600,000 msec. In this respect, in the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second starting port 140B is increased, and the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start is shown (see FIG. 75). This is different from the second pachinko gaming machine in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in an extremely short time of, for example, 1000 msec.

[4-6. Ordinary symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 113 is an example of a hit determination table of a normal symbol stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The hit judgment table of the normal symbol is based on the table referred to in the hit judgment process of the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol hit judgment random value acquired when the game ball passes through the passing gate 4126 (see FIG. 108). This is a table that is referred to when determining "normal symbol hit" or "loss" by lottery.

As described above, the normal symbol hit determination random value is a random value used in the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 extracts a random value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, in the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 4201 determines "hit the normal symbol" or "missing" based on the extracted random value for determining the hit of the normal symbol. In the normal symbol hit judgment table, the range (width) of the normal symbol hit judgment random value value determined as "normal symbol hit" for each state (on / off) of the time saving flag and the corresponding normal symbol hit The relationship with the judgment value data and the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol hit judgment random value determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss judgment value data are defined.

For example, in the low base state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state) in which the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 4201 has an extracted normal symbol hit determination random value of 0 to 94. Determines as "normal symbol hit" and determines the judgment value data as "normal symbol hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 95 to 98, the main CPU 4201 determines "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Further, for example, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) in which the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 4201 has an extracted normal symbol hit determination random value of 0 to 98. If there is, it is determined as "normal symbol hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "normal symbol hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is 99, the main CPU 4201 determines "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

[4-7. Ordinary symbol judgment table]
FIG. 114 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The ordinary symbol determination table determines the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol based on the symbol random value of the ordinary symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the passing gate 4126 (see FIG. 108) and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command". The "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" is a command for specifying the normal symbol hit symbol determined according to the normal symbol hit type when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random value of the ordinary symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). In this embodiment, the number of types per symbol is usually one, but a plurality of types may be provided.

According to the ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIG. 114, when the ordinary symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the ordinary symbol hit determination process, for example, the ordinary symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. To.

For example, in the low base state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201 may use any of the normal symbol symbol random values of 0 to 99. Select "fz0" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the high base state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201 will perform the main CPU 4201 regardless of whether the symbol random value of the normal symbol is 0 to 99. Select "fz1" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

[4-8. Ordinary symbol per type determination table]
FIG. 115 is an example of a normal symbol per type determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol hit type determination table sets an open pattern, which is an operation mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 108), in response to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It will be referred to when making a decision.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 4201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 108), with the first opening time of 1000 msec and no wait time. It is decided that there will be no second opening. That is, it is determined to be an opening pattern in which the ordinary electric accessory 4146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

When the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 4201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 108), with a first opening time of 2000 msec and a wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In this embodiment, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 4146 is two patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, more opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 4146 may be provided, and for example, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 4146 may be determined according to the type of the time-saving gaming state. Further, a plurality of types of normal symbol hit selection symbol commands may be further provided, and for example, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined according to the type of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. Further, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined according to the type of the time-saving gaming state and the type of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

[4-9. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 116 is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The main CPU 4201 changes the normal symbol based on the state of the time saving flag (on / off) and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect acquired when the game ball passes through the passing gate 4126 (see FIG. 108). Determine the pattern. The random value for normal symbol effect selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the low base state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500,000 msec, regardless of whether the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99.

Further, in the high base state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec regardless of the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect of 0 to 99.

In this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol is two patterns, but the variable display time is not limited to this. For example, more patterns of the variable display time of the normal symbol may be provided, and for example, the pattern of the variable display time of the normal symbol may be determined according to the type of the time-saving gaming state. Further, a plurality of types of normal symbol hit selection symbol commands may be provided, and for example, the pattern of the variable display time of the normal symbol may be determined according to the type of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. Further, the variable display time pattern of the normal symbol may be determined according to the type of the time-saving gaming state and the type of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.
[4-10. Game flow]
FIG. 117 is an example of a gaming state transition diagram in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

First, the initial state at the time of shipment or after the RAM is cleared is a low probability low base state. The flow of the game will be described assuming that the game has started in this low accuracy and low base state.

[4-10-1. Game in low accuracy and low base state]
In the low probability low base state, as described above, left-handed is a normal game mode. Therefore, in the low probability and low base state, the game is performed so that the game ball launched toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the first starting openings 4120A and 4120B. Since the electric support control is not executed in the low accuracy and low base state, most of the games are based on winning the first starting port 4120A. When the game ball wins in the first starting openings 4120A and 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time reduction hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and then ends the low probability low base state. Then, shift to the low accuracy and high base state. The winning probability of "time reduction hit" is approximately 1/6 as shown in FIG. 110, and the variable display number (that is, the time reduction number) of the special symbol that can be executed in the low accuracy high base state is shown in FIG. 112. 1 time, 6 times, or 12 times so as to be done.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", 87% is a high-accuracy jackpot (selection symbol command is "z3") and 13% is low-accuracy, as shown in FIG. 111. It is a big hit (selected symbol command is "z4").

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is a high-accuracy big hit, the main CPU 4201 controls the big hit gaming state for four rounds, and after the big hit gaming state ends, Move to a high-accuracy low-base state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is low probability big hit, the main CPU 4201 controls to the big hit gaming state for 4 rounds, and the big hit gaming state ends. After that, control to low accuracy and low base again.

As described above, in the low accuracy and low base state, it is configured not to shift to the high accuracy and high base state based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[4-10-2. Game in low accuracy and high base state]
As described above, in the low accuracy and high base state, left-handed is a normal game mode. Therefore, in the low accuracy and high base state, the game is performed so that the game ball launched toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the first starting openings 4120A and 4120B. In particular, since the electric support control is executed in the low accuracy and high base state, most of the games are based on the winning of the first starting port 4120B. When the game ball wins in the first starting openings 4120A and 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time reduction hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and then continues the low accuracy high base state. do. The type of time-saving gaming state in this low-accuracy high-base state is C time-saving gaming state. In addition, the winning probability of "time saving hit" is about 1/6 as shown in FIG. 110. If the "time reduction hit" is won in the low accuracy and high base state, the time reduction game states will overlap unless the time reduction final fluctuation is made. In this case, the concept of the variable display number (that is, the number of time reductions) of the special symbol that can be executed in the low accuracy and high base state is as described above in the column of "duplication of time reduction gaming states". For example, in the case of executing the time-saving game states in an overlapping manner, the main CPU 4201 has the larger number of time-saving remaining times in the low-accuracy high-based state and the time-saving number of times set based on the "time-saving hit". Continue the low accuracy and high base state until the number of time reductions of the person is exhausted. On the other hand, if the time-saving game states are not overlapped, the main CPU 4201 continues the low-accuracy high-base state until the time-saving remaining number of times in the low-accuracy high-base state is exhausted.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", 87% is a high-accuracy jackpot (selection symbol command is "z3") and 13% is low-accuracy, as shown in FIG. 111. It is a big hit (selected symbol command is "z4").

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is a high-accuracy big hit, the main CPU 4201 controls the big hit gaming state for four rounds, and after the big hit gaming state ends, Move to a high accuracy and high base state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is low probability big hit, the main CPU 4201 controls to the big hit gaming state for 4 rounds, and the big hit gaming state ends. After that, control to low accuracy and high base again. The type of time-saving gaming state in this low-accuracy high-base state is A time-saving gaming state.

If the set number of time reductions is exhausted without winning the jackpot, the main CPU 4201 ends the low accuracy high base state and shifts to the low accuracy low base state.

Obtained based on the winning probability of "time reduction hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the number of time reductions set when "time reduction hit" is won, and the winning of the game ball to the first starting openings 4120A and 4120B. Considering the number of various random numbers that can be reserved, the stay rate in the low-probability high-base state is the highest among the low-probability low-base state, low-probability high-base state, high-probability high-base state, and high-probability low-base state. It gets higher.

[4-10-3. Game in high accuracy and high base state]
In the high-accuracy high-base state, as described above, left-handed is a normal game mode. Therefore, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, the game is performed so that the game ball launched toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the first starting openings 4120A and 4120B. In particular, since the electric support control is executed in the high accuracy and high base state, most of the games are based on the winning of the first starting port 4120B. When the game ball wins in the first starting openings 4120A and 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

In the high accuracy and high base state, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time reduction hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163. The previous high accuracy and high base state will be continued without activating the new C time saving game state. Therefore, the time-saving game states do not overlap. When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 4201 forcibly makes the "time reduction hit" a loss, and the display mode of the loss is derived to the first special symbol display unit 4163. It may be done.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", 87% is a high-accuracy jackpot (selection symbol command is "z3") and 13% is a low-accuracy jackpot (as shown in FIG. 111). The selected symbol command is "z4").

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is a high-accuracy big hit, the main CPU 4201 controls the big hit gaming state for four rounds, and after the big hit gaming state ends, Control to high accuracy and high base state again. The type of time-saving gaming state in this high-accuracy high-base state is A time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is low probability big hit, the main CPU 4201 controls to the big hit gaming state for 4 rounds, and the big hit gaming state ends. After that, it shifts to the low accuracy and high base state. The type of time-saving gaming state in this low-accuracy high-base state is A time-saving gaming state.

If the set number of time reductions is exhausted without winning the jackpot, the main CPU 4201 ends the high-accuracy high-base state and shifts to the high-accuracy low-base state. In this embodiment, when the high-accuracy jackpot is won in the low-accuracy high-base state and when the high-accuracy jackpot is won in the high-accuracy high-base state, the high-accuracy high-base state is controlled. In this case, the number of time reductions set is 50 times. On the other hand, the number of probable changes set is 120. Therefore, the probability variation number (for example, 70 times in this embodiment) remaining after the time reduction number is digested is controlled to the high probability and low base state.

[4-10-4. Game in high accuracy and low base state]
In the high-accuracy and low-base state, as described above, right-handed is a normal game mode. Therefore, in the high-accuracy and low-base state, the game is performed so that the game ball launched toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the second starting port 4140. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 4140, the main CPU 4201 performs the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

In the hit determination process of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 110, the "time saving hit" is not won. Further, it is assumed that the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed due to the winning of the game ball in the first start opening 4120A and 4120B, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit". However, although the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time saving hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, the high accuracy and low base state up to now is continued without operating the C time saving gaming state. When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 4201 forcibly makes the "time reduction hit" a loss, and the display mode of the loss is derived to the first special symbol display unit 4163. It may be done.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit", 87% is a high-accuracy jackpot (selection symbol command is "z7") and 13% is low-accuracy, as shown in FIG. 111. It is a big hit (selected symbol command is "z8").

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is a high-accuracy big hit, the main CPU 4201 controls the big hit gaming state for 10 rounds, and after the big hit gaming state ends, Control to high accuracy and low base state again. That is, it loops in a high-accuracy low-base state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the type of big hit is low probability big hit, the main CPU 4201 controls the big hit game state for 10 rounds, and the big hit game state ends. Later, it will shift to a low accuracy and high base.

By the way, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "small hit", as shown in FIG. 111, the small hit large winning opening 4151 (see FIG. 108) is opened once. As shown in FIG. 110, the winning probability of "small hit" is, for example, approximately 1 / 1.1. Although not shown, the opening time of the small hit large winning opening 4151 in this case is, for example, 1800 msec.

Further, in the high-accuracy low-base state, as described above, the main CPU 4201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start. Therefore, it is high in consideration of the probability of being distributed to the upper flow path 4107a (see FIG. 108) and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 4151 (see FIG. 108). If you hit right in the low probability base state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time becomes a small hit rush that can exceed 1. That is, in the high accuracy and low base state, the so-called holding ball of the player can increase according to the progress of the game. As described above, if the specification is such that when the "time reduction hit" is won in the high accuracy low base state, the specification shifts to the high accuracy high base state, the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is "time reduction hit". By not providing "", it is possible to substantially prevent the "time saving hit" from being won in the high accuracy and low base state.

On the other hand, in the low-accuracy low-base state, the low-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy high-base state, in which left-handedness is a regular game mode, the game value paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time (for example, a prize). The expected value of (number of balls, etc.) is less than 1. That is, in these gaming states (low accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the so-called holding ball of the player decreases as the game progresses. In these game states, even if the game is played in an irregular game mode (for example, right-handed) and the game ball wins in the second start opening 4140, refer to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start. Since the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined, there is no actual benefit to the player.

In this embodiment, a so-called ST machine that shifts to a normal gaming state when controlled to a high-accuracy gaming state over a specified number of times (for example, 120 times) has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol is used. By controlling the game to a high probability game state until the result of the hit determination process becomes a big hit, it may be possible to further increase the number of balls to be ejected during the small hit rush.

[4-11. Control by sub control circuit]
The sub CPU 4301 included in the sub control circuit 4300 controls the effect image displayed in the display area of the display device 4007 via the display control circuit 4304. In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, the sub CPU 4301 displays the same or almost the same effect image in the display area of the display device 4007 in the low accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy high base state. Control to be done. By doing so, it is displayed in the display area of the display device 4007 whether it is controlled by the control by the main CPU 4201 in the low accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, or the high accuracy high base state. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the appearance from the staging image.

In particular, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is on (for example, 1/200) and the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off (for example, 201 minutes) are almost the same. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to realize the difference in the winning probability of the big hit.

According to such a fourth pachinko gaming machine, the low-accuracy low-base state, the low-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy high-base state are regarded as relatively disadvantageous game states for the player, and the high-accuracy low-base state is defined as the high-accuracy low-base state. It is possible to make the gaming state relatively advantageous for the player. In particular, in the high-accuracy and low-base state, it is possible to realize a game property such as increasing the so-called ball possession of the player by the small hit rush.

Further, in the case of a conventional pachinko gaming machine, the stay rate in the most unfavorable gaming state among the plurality of gaming states is the highest. On the other hand, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the probability variation flag is off among the low accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state, and the electric support control is performed. Although the low-accuracy low-base state, which is not executed, is the most disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to realize a new game property that has never been seen before, such as the highest stay rate in the low-accuracy high-base state.

Further, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit in the low accuracy low base state and the type of the big hit is a high accuracy big hit, the low accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy high base state , And the most advantageous high-accuracy low-base state among the high-accuracy and low-base states. Moreover, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the probability that the type of the big hit will be a high probability big hit is as high as 87%, so it is a case where it is controlled to a low probability low base state. However, it is possible to enhance the interest.

Furthermore, in the low accuracy low base state, the "time reduction hit" is won in about 1/6, and the number of time reductions set in that case is in the range of 1 to 12 times, so that the low accuracy low base state and the low accuracy The main game is to go back and forth between the high base state. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is a high-accuracy jackpot, the game can be advanced with the expectation that it will shift to the high-accuracy low-base state without fail, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Become.

Also in the above-mentioned fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is preferable that the sub CPU 4301 also performs a look-ahead effect. An example of the effect of the look-ahead effect performed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described later in association with the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation.

As the above-mentioned fourth pachinko gaming machine, like the second pachinko gaming machine, the pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel has been described as an example. Not limited to. For example, as with the first pachinko machine, it may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. , Similar to the third pachinko gaming machine, it may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 type 2 mixing machine.

[4-12. Look-ahead effect and variable pattern effect example]
Next, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, an example of the look-ahead effect performed in the display area 4007a of the display device 4007 will be described in relation to the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation. The look-ahead effect performed in the display area 1007a and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation are controlled by the sub CPU 4301 via the display control circuit 1304 (see FIG. 70).

FIG. 118 is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 4007a of the display device 4007, from the common hit look-ahead effect form to the big hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes to, and then the big hit system reach is performed as a sub-variation effect pattern. In FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (f), the look-ahead type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) corresponds to “15H”, “35H”, “51H”, or “71H” in FIG. 56, and the look-ahead The expected value effect pattern corresponds to "48H" in FIG. 57 or FIG. 58. Further, referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74), the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55), and the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). As can be seen, the look-ahead hit type effect patterns in the case of a big hit are "15H" and "35H", and the look-ahead hit type effect patterns in the case of a loss are "51H" and "71H".

In FIG. 118 (a), a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 4411 and the second reserved area 4412, and the third reserved area 4413 and the fourth reserved area 4414 are displayed. The hold image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the reserved image is represented by an egg image imitating an egg in order to associate it with the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation. Then, the color of the egg image is changed according to the expected value of the big hit, and the density of the pattern of the egg image is changed according to the expected value of the time saving.

In FIG. 118 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 4413 from the state shown in FIG. 118 (a). The reserved image newly displayed in the third reserved area 4413 is a common hit look-ahead effect mode, and has an expected value level of “2”.

FIG. 118 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 118 (b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 4413 in FIG. 118 (b) is , When shifting to the second reserved area 4412, the expected value level is changed to the form of "3" while keeping the common system look-ahead effect mode.

FIG. 118 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 118 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 4412 in FIG. 118 (c) is It is an image showing that the common system look-ahead effect form of the expected value level "3" has changed to the jackpot system look-ahead effect form of the expected value level "4" when the first reserved area 4411 is shifted.

FIG. 118 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 118 (d), and the form of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 4411 in FIG. 118 (d) is It is an image which shows that it was shifted to the 0th region 4410 as it is without being changed.

FIG. 118 (f) is an image showing that the egg image displayed in the 0th region 4410 has hatched. As shown in FIG. 118 (f), when the egg image displayed in the 0th region 4410 hatches, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a jackpot system reach. On the other hand, if the egg image displayed in the 0th region 4410 does not hatch, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation does not develop into reach, and the lost image is displayed.

FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (e) show that the egg image displayed in the 0th region 4410 of FIG. 118 (f) hatched, and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation developed into a jackpot system reach. It is an image shown.

FIG. 119 (a) is an image showing that the decorative symbol corresponding to the main special symbol (here, the first special symbol) is variably displayed. FIG. 119 (b) is an image showing that the decorative symbol has stopped at the reach symbol. FIG. 119 (c) is a reach effect displayed as an image showing that a bird hatched from an egg grows and flaps in the sky in the 0th region 4410 of FIG. 118 (f). In this embodiment, the reach effect shown in FIG. 118 (c) is a reach effect in which the expected value for the big hit is relatively high among the plurality of reach effects. Therefore, when the reach effect shown in FIG. 118 (c) is performed, the interest of the player is enhanced. After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), when a jackpot image indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot is displayed, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118 (e), when the lost image indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost is confirmed and displayed, the current special symbol game ends.

FIG. 120 is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 4007a of the display device 4007, and shows that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time-saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes to the form, and then the time saving hit system effect is performed as a sub-variation effect pattern. In FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (f), the look-ahead type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) corresponds to “07H”, “27H”, “43H”, or “63H” in FIG. 56, and the look-ahead The expected value effect pattern corresponds to "42H" in FIG. 57 or FIG. 58. Further, referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74), the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55), and the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). As can be seen, the look-ahead hit type effect patterns in the case of time saving hits are "07H" and "27H", and the look-ahead hit type effect patterns in the case of loss are "43H" and "63H".

In FIG. 120 (a), a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 4411 and the second reserved area 4412, and the third reserved area 4413 and the fourth reserved area 4414 are displayed. The hold image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 120 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 4413 from the state shown in FIG. 120 (a). The reserved image newly displayed in the third reserved area 4413 is a common hit look-ahead effect mode, and has an expected value level of “2”.

FIG. 120 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 120 (b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 4413 in FIG. 120 (b) is , When shifting to the second reserved area 4412, the expected value level is changed to the form of "3" while keeping the common system look-ahead effect mode.

FIG. 120 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 120 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 4412 in FIG. 120 (c) is It is an image showing that the common system look-ahead effect form of the expected value level "3" has changed to the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form of the expected value level "4" when the first reserved area 4411 is shifted. The egg image shown in FIG. 120 (d) is an egg image of a crocodile.

FIG. 120 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 120 (d), and the form of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 4411 in FIG. 120 (d) is It is an image which shows that it was shifted to the 0th region 4410 as it is without being changed.

FIG. 120 (f) is an image showing that the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th region 4410 has hatched. As shown in FIG. 120 (f), when the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th region 4410 hatches, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a time-saving hit system effect. On the other hand, if the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th region 4410 does not hatch, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation does not develop into a time-saving hit system effect, and a lost image is displayed.

In the explanation with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (FIG. 74), it was explained that the time reduction hit system reach is performed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is the time reduction hit. In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, instead of the time-saving hit system reach, a time-saving hit effect is performed in which the reach is not displayed but the expected value of the time-saving hit is high so that it can be easily distinguished from the big hit.

In FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (e), the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th region 4410 of FIG. It is an image showing that it was done.

FIG. 121 (a) is an image showing that the decorative symbol corresponding to the main special symbol (here, the first special symbol) is variably displayed, and shows an image of three crocodiles walking. FIG. 121 (b) is an image showing that the decorative symbol on the left stopped at "5". In this embodiment, the decorative symbols normally stop in the order of left, right, and middle (other than the time-saving hit-type effect), but when the time-saving hit-type effect develops, the decorative symbols stop in the order of left, middle, and right. It shall be. FIG. 121 (c) is a diagram showing that the decorative symbol inside has stopped at “0”. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (d), when the decorative symbol on the right stops at "G", it is clearly shown that the game shifts to the C time saving game state of 50 games. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 121 (e), when the decorative symbol on the right stops at "X", it is confirmed that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss, and this special symbol game ends. do.

The images in which the eggs hatch in FIGS. 118 (f) and 120 (f) are both displayed in the 0th region 4410, but instead, as shown in FIG. 122, for example, the eggs. If the image in which the egg hatches is displayed in the substantially center of the display area 4007a of the display device 4007, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation may develop into a big hit system reach or a time saving system effect. It is possible to clearly inform the player and enhance the interest.

[5. Fifth pachinko game machine]
Like the second pachinko gaming machine, the fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the time saving management process (see FIG. 31) of S131 described in the second pachinko gaming machine is also performed. The description of the same configuration and function as that of the second pachinko gaming machine will be omitted. However, in explaining the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the same reference numerals as those of the second pachinko gaming machine will be used.

In addition, the fifth pachinko gaming machine is controlled to a high-probability gaming state until a predetermined number of times (50 times) of variable display of the special symbol is performed after the jackpot gaming state is completed, and the result of the special lottery is "big hit". This is a so-called ST machine, which is a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a low-probability gaming state after a predetermined number of times (50 times) of variable display of a special symbol is performed without becoming. Further, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the probability change flag is set to ON from the so-called first hit until the jackpot gaming state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times), and the jackpot gaming state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times). When this is done, the probability change flag is set to OFF, which is a so-called limiter-equipped pachinko gaming machine.

The fifth pachinko gaming machine includes a gaming board unit 1010 (see FIG. 69) similar to the second pachinko gaming machine. As a result, if the game ball can be won (or easily) into the big hit big winning opening 1131 by the open drive of the special electric accessory 1133 (special electric shutter 1134), the game ball flows down the right side area 1107. Approximately all of the game balls win the jackpot jackpot 1131. If it is impossible (or difficult) to win the game ball to the jackpot jackpot 1131, the game ball flowing down the right area 1107 does not win the jackpot jackpot 1131 and is further downstream. It flows down toward the ordinary electric accessory 1146 on the side and thus toward the second starting port 1140B.

If it is in a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball in the big hit opening 1131, and it is in an open state where it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball in the second starting port 1140B. Approximately all of the game balls flowing down the right area 1107 win the second starting port 1140B. When both the big hit opening 1131 and the second starting opening 1140B are closed, the game ball flowing down the right side area 1107 is a small hit big winning if the small hit big winning opening 1151 is open. Win a prize in mouth 1151. If all of the big hit big winning opening 1131, the second starting opening 1140B, and the small hit big winning opening 1151 are closed, most (at least half or more) of the game balls flowing down the right area 1107 are second. It is configured to win a prize at the starting port 1140A.

Further, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 1126, the main CPU 1201 holds up to four normal symbol start information (normal symbol hit determination random number value and normal symbol variation pattern determination random number). Further, the main CPU 1201 of course holds up to four start information (big hit determination random value or symbol random value) of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 1120, and the second Even when a game ball wins in the starting opening 1140A or the second starting opening 1140B, up to four starting information (big hit determination random value or symbol random value) of the second special symbol is reserved.

[5-1. Basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 128. Each table shown in FIGS. 123 to 128 is stored in the main ROM 1202.

[5-1-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 123 is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 123, when the first special lottery is performed, it is determined to be a "big hit" or a "loss". If the second special lottery is held, it will be decided as "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". In the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 1202, the value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)) is used as the data used for the first special lottery executed based on the winning of the first starting port 1120. "Or" 1 (= on) "), the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as" big hit "or" loss "and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data "," The relationship with the loss judgment value data ”) is stipulated. Further, as the data used for the second special lottery executed based on the winning of the second starting port 1140A or the second starting port 1140B, the value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”. ) ”) The range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as“ big hit ”,“ small hit ”or“ loss ”and the corresponding judgment value data (“big hit judgment value data”, “small hit”. The relationship with "judgment value data" and "loss judgment value data") is defined.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the total random number for the jackpot determination random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number, and the small hit probability is determined by the number of small hit determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination may be changed as appropriate. The jackpot probability and the small hit probability are shown as selectivity in FIG. 123.

Although not shown in FIG. 123, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[5-1-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 124 is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 124, the special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random value acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B and the above-mentioned determination value data. It is a table referred to for determining the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol. For example, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 1140A, the judgment value data is "big hit judgment value data" and the symbol random value is "77", the hit selection symbol command is "z2". The "design designation command" is determined to be "zA4".

[5-1-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 125 is an example of a jackpot type determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 125, the jackpot type determination table is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type (number of rounds, probability variation flag) based on the above-mentioned hit time selection symbol command. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the probability variation flag is determined to be ON.

Regardless of whether the hit selection symbol command is "z0" to "z2", if the jackpot gaming state is not continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the probability changes after the jackpot gaming state ends. The flag is set to ON. However, after the first big hit game state is over, the game is played by right-handed, so the second special lottery is held, but in this second special lottery, when the big hit is won, there is a 10% probability of 10 rounds. Will be decided in 2 rounds with a 90% chance.

Further, even if the hit selection symbol command is any of "z0" to "z2", the electric support control is not executed (the number of electric support is 0). That is, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine is a gaming machine in which electric support control is not executed, but is not limited to this. The electric support control is a control that enables (or easily) wins a game ball in the second starting port 1140B. For example, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 (the shutter 1147 for general electric power is driven). As a result, the time during which the game ball can be opened (or easily) to the second starting port 1140B), the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 1146 is opened, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, and the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol are at least one. It is a control that changes one or more so that a prize can be won (or easily) in the second starting port 1140B. Therefore, when the electric support control is executed, the frequency of enabling (or easily) winning the game ball to the second starting port 1140B is increased.

[5-1-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 126 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 1120, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B. To decide.

As shown in FIG. 126, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the first starting port 1120. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the game ball wins a prize. Further, when the result of the first special lottery is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the situation of the probability change flag, the random number for reach determination extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 1120, and the effect. Determined based on the random number for selection.

When the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the game ball at the second starting port 1140A, 1140B. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the prize is won. In particular, if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of long fluctuations A to C in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time such as about 600,000 msec, and if the probability change flag is ON, the probability change during reach is reached. It is decided to be one of the productions D to F.

Even if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and the game ball wins in the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted at the time of. In particular, if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time such as about 600,000 msec, and if the probability change flag is ON, the fluctuation time is determined. It is determined to be a super-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed only for an extremely short time such as 1000 msec.

When the result of the second special lottery is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and when the game ball wins in the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B. It is determined based on the reach determination random number (only when the probability variation flag is ON) and the effect selection random number extracted in. In particular, if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time such as about 600,000 msec, and if the probability change flag is ON, the probability change is in progress. Although it may be determined to be a reach effect, most of them are determined to be ultra-fast fluctuations in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed only for an extremely short fluctuation time such as 1000 msec.

Since the variation time of the special symbol corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 1201 determines the variation time of the special symbol and the variation pattern of the special symbol at the same time. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the display device 1007 (for example, the liquid crystal display device) by the sub control circuit 1300 (sub CPU 1301).

Further, the column of "effect content" in FIG. 126 is shown for convenience for convenience, and is an effect image (for example, a decorative design) displayed on the display device 1007 by the sub CPU 1301 via the display control circuit 1304. The variable mode) and the content of the voice (for example, the variable sound of the decorative pattern) output from the speaker 1032 by the sub CPU 1301 via the voice control circuit 1305 are shown.

Although not shown in FIG. 126, the random number range for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be determined may be different.

The variation time of the special symbol shown in FIG. 126 is an example, and as the variation time of the special symbol, an arbitrary variation time can be appropriately set according to the result of the special lottery. For example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the first special lottery is lost and the probability variation flag is ON, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is loss and the probability variation flag is ON. And may be configured to have the same fluctuation time (for example, 4500 ms). Further, it may be configured so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is the longest (for example, 299500 ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is OFF. Further, it may be configured so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short (for example, 2000 ms) when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is ON. Further, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (for example, 4500 ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a 2R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON, and the result of the second special lottery is a 10R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON. The fluctuation time of the special symbol in a certain case (for example, 29500 ms) is configured to be longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol (for example, 2000 ms) when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is ON. You may. Further, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit and the probability variation flag is ON may be configured to be the shortest (for example, 500 ms).

[5-1-5. Ordinary symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 127 is an example of a hit determination table of a normal symbol of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 127, when a normal lottery is performed, it is determined to be "normal symbol hit" or "missing". In the hit determination table of the normal symbol stored in the main ROM 1202, "normal symbol hit" or "miss" is determined as the data used for the normal lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the corresponding judgment value data (“normal symbol hit judgment value data”, “missing judgment value data”) is defined.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the total random number of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is 1024. That is, the above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 1023. This range is set as a fixed value. The probability of hitting a normal symbol is determined by the number of judgment value data per normal symbol for a range of random numbers for determining the hit of a normal symbol. The range (width) of the random number for normal symbol hit determination may be changed as appropriate. The probability of hitting a normal symbol is shown as a selectivity in FIG. 127. That is, in this fifth pachinko gaming machine, the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing" at a rate of about once every 43 times. Of course, the selection rate shown in FIG. 127 is not limited to this, but it is preferable that the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing" at a rate of about 30 to 50 times.

[5-1-6. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 128 is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 1126, the main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol using, for example, the variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 128, when the result of the ordinary lottery is per ordinary symbol, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is determined to be the variation pattern (01H) with a variation time of 500 msec.

Further, when the result of the normal lottery is "missing", the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol has a different fluctuation time based on the random number for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 1126. It is determined to be one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns (02H to 05H). In particular, when the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing" and the random number for determining the ordinary symbol variation pattern is a specific random number (98,99), the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed for an extremely long time, for example, 600,000 msec. Determined by the pattern.

Although not shown in FIG. 128, the random number range for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is changed for each set value, and the probability that the high setting is determined to the above specific pattern is higher than the low setting. The fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol determined for each set value may be different.

[5-2. Game flow]
The flow of the subsequent game when the game is started in the normal game state in which the probability change flag is OFF will be described. In the normal gaming state, as shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 126), the variation pattern of the second special symbol is different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation time is extremely long. It is determined to be one of the fluctuations A to C. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a general player plays the game by left-handed. When the game is played left-handed, the game ball launched toward the game area 1105 may win a prize in the first start port 1120 instead of the second start ports 1140A and 1140B.

When the game ball wins in the first starting port 1120 in the normal game state, the main CPU 1201 performs the first special lottery. The probability that the result of the first special lottery will be a "big hit" in the normal game state is approximately 1/319 as shown in the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 123).

Even when the player hits the right in the normal game state, when the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 1126 and the result of hitting the normal symbol is obtained, the normal electric accessory 1146 is used. There is a possibility that the game ball will be awarded to the second starting port 1140B after opening, but only one prize ball will be paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 1140B. Further, even if the game ball wins the second starting port 1140A without opening the ordinary electric accessory 1146, only one prize ball is paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 1140A. Further, when the game ball wins in the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long variation A to C having an extremely long variation time, so that the small hit large winning opening 1151 is used. The frequency of opening is extremely low. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 1120, more prize balls (for example, four) are paid out than when the game ball wins in the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first starting port 1120 is approximately 10,000 msec. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the normal game state, the probability that the result of the normal lottery will be a normal symbol hit (the opening probability of the normal electric accessory 1146) is high (see FIG. 127), and the normal lottery result is a normal symbol hit. Since the fluctuation time of the symbol is relatively short (see FIG. 128), when the player strikes right, the ordinary electric accessory 1146 is in a considerably open state. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 1126 is likely to win the second starting port 1140B, and even if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, it is distributed downstream from the second starting port 1140B. It is less likely that a game ball will flow into the large winning slot 1151 for small hits. Further, even if the result of the normal lottery is lost in the normal game state and the normal electric accessory 1146 is not released, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. However, it is difficult to get a ball from a small hit because it is extremely long.

The large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit and the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be different large winning openings or may be the same large winning opening. Further, the arrangement position of the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit and the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit can be appropriately designed. For example, the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be provided downstream of the ordinary electric accessory 1146, and the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit may be provided upstream of the ordinary electric accessory 1146. Further, both the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit and the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be provided downstream of the ordinary electric accessory 1146. Further, a large winning opening (combined large winning opening) that opens at the time of a big hit or a small hit may be provided downstream of the ordinary electric accessory 1146. Further, in this embodiment, a game ball that does not win the big winning opening that opens at the time of a small hit, a game ball that does not win the big winning opening that opens at the time of a big hit, and a second starting opening 1140B are won. A second starting port 1140A (a starting port for special figure 2 in which an ordinary electric accessory is not provided) is provided so that a game ball or the like that has not been used can win a prize. The position of the second starting port 1140A is downstream from the normal electric accessory 1146 and downstream (downward) from the large winning opening that opens at the time of a small hit, or opens at the time of a small hit with the ordinary electric accessory 1146. It is possible to assume the space between the winning opening and the winning opening. Even when such a second starting port 1140A is arranged, the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit and the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be used in combination. In addition, in a mode in which the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit is provided downstream from the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit, the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit and the opening at the time of a big hit are opened. It is possible to assume a case where the second starting port 1140A is arranged between the large winning opening and the large winning opening, or a case where the second starting opening 1140A is arranged downstream from the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit. Is. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which a starting port for special drawing 2 (second starting port 1140B) is provided as a starting port provided with an ordinary electric accessory is described, but the ordinary electric accessory is described. As the starting port provided with the above, a starting port for the first special symbol may be arranged. For example, a starting port for the first special symbol provided with the ordinary electric accessory may be provided separately from the starting port for the first special symbol not provided with the ordinary electric accessory.

When the result of the first special lottery performed in the normal game state is "big hit", the main CPU 1201 determines the hit time selection symbol command with reference to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 124). After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 125), determines the jackpot type (number of rounds) based on the determined hit time selection symbol command, and controls the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 69, since the big hit winning opening 1131 is arranged in the right side area 1107, the game is played by right-handed in the big hit gaming state.

Next, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state based on the so-called first hit is completed will be described.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the electric support control is not executed, and the probability change flag is set to ON whenever the so-called first hit-based jackpot game state ends, so that the first hit-based jackpot game state ends. Later, the main CPU 1201 controls the high accuracy and low base state. In this high-accuracy and low-base state, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-fast fluctuation with a fluctuation time of, for example, 1000 msec, which is extremely short. (See FIG. 126), the game is played by hitting right.

In the high-accuracy low-base state after the big hit game state based on the first hit is completed, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be super-fast fluctuation with a high probability, and the small hit is derived, so the big prize for the small hit The mouth 1151 is repeatedly opened at an extremely high frequency as compared with the normal gaming state. However, when the result of the ordinary lottery is per ordinary symbol, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is determined to be the variation pattern with the variation time of 500 msec. Further, since most of the right-handed game balls pass through the passing gate 1126 and continuously hit the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 1146 and thus the general electric shutter 1147 are almost fully opened. Therefore, when the result of the normal lottery in the high accuracy and low base state is a normal symbol hit, all or almost all of the right-handed game balls win the second starting opening 1140B, so even if it is a small hit large winning opening. Even if the 1151 is opened frequently, the winning of the small hit large winning opening 1151 is hindered. As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins the second starting port 1140B is one.

On the other hand, in the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be one of 10,000 msec, 20000 msec, 30000 msec and 600,000 msec. Since the main CPU 1201 stops the variable display of the normal symbol and opens the normal electric accessory 1146 and thus the general electric shutter 1147 based on the derivation of the mode indicating the normal symbol hit, the normal symbol is variablely displayed. During this period, or even if the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped, if the normal symbol hit is not derived, the normal electric accessory 1146 is not released. Therefore, while the ordinary electric accessory 1146 is closed, the winning of the small hit large winning opening 1151 is not hindered, and most of the right-handed game balls win the small hit large winning opening 1151. Become. As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in the small hit large prize opening 1151 is 10. Therefore, in the high accuracy and low base state where the result of the normal lottery can be determined to be a normal loss, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1.

In the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the ball ejection increase speed increases as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol increases.

As described above, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time is longer until the jackpot game state is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). It is a game-like nature such as whether it is possible to draw a fluctuation pattern of.

In such a fifth pachinko machine, there is a pattern in which the result of the normal lottery is never lost during one high-accuracy low-base state, or the result of the normal lottery is only once. Even if it is, there are various patterns such as when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 10000 msec, or when the result of the normal lottery is twice normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec both times. Can occur.

Therefore, according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the simple configuration is such that a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times of the normal symbols are provided, which is different from the big hit game state. To provide an unprecedented new gameplay that has made it possible to realize an advantageous gaming state (high accuracy and low base state) in various ball ejection increase patterns as a high accuracy and low base state that is advantageous to the player. Is possible, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, it is preferable that the sub CPU 1301 that has received the normal symbol variation pattern command executes an effect based on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the result of the normal lottery in the high accuracy and low base state is the normal loss. That is, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10,000 msec, when it is 20000 msec, and when it is 30,000 msec, the expected value of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained differs depending on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Then, an effect that can grasp the degree of advantage (for example, the degree of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained) may be executed. For example, when the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is 10,000 msec, an effect such as "per round!" Is executed, and when the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is 20000 msec, an effect such as "per 2 rounds!" Is executed. When the fluctuation time of the pattern is 30,000 msec, an effect such as "per 3 rounds!" May be executed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 600,000 msec, an effect such as "super hit" may be executed. In this way, when an advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time may exceed 1 is executed, an effect indicating the degree of advantage is executed. , It is possible to enhance the interest.

The effects executed by the sub CPU 1301 include a display effect displayed on the display device 1007 via the display control circuit 1304, a sound effect output from the speaker 1032 via the voice control circuit 1305, and the LED control circuit 1306. At least one or more of the light emitting effect of the LED group 1046 executed via the LED group 1046 and the operation effect of the effect group 1058 executed via the accessory control circuit 1307 corresponds to.

By the way, in the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, for example, before the fluctuation of the normal symbol is completed, for example, the second special lottery It is possible that the result will be a "big hit" and the game will be controlled to a big hit game state. Furthermore, since the time controlled for the jackpot gaming state is approximately 180,000 to 300,000 msec, even after the jackpot gaming state ends, the variation display of the normal symbol with a variation time of 600,000 msec continues without ending. Can occur. As described above, since the ordinary electric accessory 1146 is not opened while the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 does not hinder the winning of the small hit large winning opening 1151 and is hit right. Most of the game balls will be awarded in the small hit large winning opening 1151. In this way, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, even if the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is controlled to the jackpot gaming state before the end, it is normal when the jackpot gaming state ends. If the fluctuation display of the symbol continues without stopping, even if the result of the normal lottery does not become "normal loss" in the game state after the big hit game state ends, the advantageous game state immediately after the big hit game state ends. It will be possible to enhance the game interest while being controlled to the jackpot game state. For example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec and the jackpot gaming state of, for example, 300,000 msec is started after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, approximately 300,000 msec after the end of the jackpot gaming state is for small hits. You can win as many prizes as you like in the big prize opening 1151 and you will be able to enhance your interest.

In this embodiment, it is described that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is consumed even in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, but in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, It may be configured so that the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is not digested (the lapse of the fluctuation time is stopped). For example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec and the jackpot gaming state starts when 300,000 msec has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the jackpot gaming state is completed for 300,000 msec. It may be possible to continue the fluctuation of the normal symbol (during the big hit game state, the remaining time of the normal symbol fluctuation does not decrease).

Although the electric support control is not executed in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the present invention is also applied to the pachinko gaming machine in which the electric support control is executed in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed. be able to. In particular, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, even though the electric support control is executed in the game state after the big hit game state ends, It is possible that most of the right-handed game balls win a prize in the small hit large winning opening 1151.

<Transition flow of production mode>
FIG. 129 (a) is a diagram showing a transition transition of the effect mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 129 (b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the effect mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the effect mode (sub game state) as shown in FIG. 129 (a) is managed by the sub control circuit 1300. As the effect mode, a normal mode, a first hit mode, a probability change mode, and a bonus mode are provided.

More specifically with reference to FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b), when the jackpot gaming state starts in the normal mode, the sub control circuit 1300 shifts the effect mode from the normal mode to the first hit mode. (See migration condition (1)).

When the big hit game state ends in the first hit mode, the sub control circuit 1300 shifts the effect mode from the first hit mode to the probabilistic mode (see transition condition (2)). When the variation display (special symbol variation) of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the probability variation mode, the sub control circuit 1300 shifts the effect mode from the probability variation mode to the normal mode (see transition condition (3)). ..

When the jackpot gaming state starts in the probabilistic mode, the sub control circuit 1300 shifts the effect mode from the probabilistic mode to the bonus mode (see the transition condition (4)). Further, in the probability variation mode, when the variation display of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol loss length variation) by the variation pattern “05H” (see FIG. 128) starts, the sub control circuit 1300 shifts the effect mode from the probability variation mode to the bonus mode. (Refer to the transition condition (4)).

When the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is completed in the bonus mode, the sub control circuit 1300 shifts the effect mode from the bonus mode to the probabilistic mode (see transition condition (5)). Further, when the jackpot gaming state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of jackpot gaming states executed from the first hit is less than a predetermined number of times (5 times) (if the limiter has not been reached), the sub control circuit 1300 , Shift the staging mode from the bonus mode to the probabilistic mode (see transition condition (5)). In addition, if the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being executed when the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, the bonus mode is maintained, and when the normal symbol loss length change ends in the bonus mode, the jackpot game state is in progress. If there is, it may be possible to maintain the bonus mode.

When the big hit game state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of times the big hit game state executed from the first hit is a predetermined number (5 times) (if the limiter is reached), the sub control circuit 1300 is in the bonus mode. Shifts the staging mode from to the normal mode (see transition condition (6)).

The normal mode is an effect mode controlled in the normal gaming state. In the normal mode, the effect stage is managed by the sub control circuit 1300. As the staging stage, a first staging stage, a second staging stage, and a third staging stage are provided. Each production stage will be described in detail later.

Further, although not shown, a special effect mode may be provided as a normal mode (effect mode controlled in a normal game state). The special effect mode can be an effect mode in which the variation display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is controlled a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the bonus mode ends.

<Lottery process for the first production stage notice>
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a first production stage notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the lottery process for the first effect stage notice shown in FIG. 130, after the game ball wins the first start opening 1120 in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)), the special symbol change related to the start prize changes. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) at the time of starting. The sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

In the first production stage notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes a pseudo-continuous stage effect outline lottery process (step S9001). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the outline of the effect performed during the special symbol variation related to the first start opening winning, based on the sub variation pattern, by performing a lottery based on the random number value. Although the details will be described later, the sub CPU 1301 performs a sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation related to the first start opening winning before the first production stage notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 130 is started. I have decided. The sub-variation pattern contains information about the pseudo-continuous staging.

The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol is displayed as if it were stopped (temporarily stopped) between the time when the special symbol is variablely displayed based on one start memory and the time when the special symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. .. The state of the temporary stop display is a state in which the decorative symbol is vibrating or the like, and it cannot be said that the temporary stop display is completely displayed. In this embodiment, the pseudo-ream effect may be simply referred to as "pseudo-ream", and the effect in which the pseudo-ream does not occur may be referred to as "no pseudo-ream". As the pseudo continuous effect in this embodiment, a pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop display is generated once and a pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop display is generated twice are provided. The pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop display occurs once is referred to as "pseudo 2", and the pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop display occurs twice is referred to as "pseudo 3".

In "pseudo 2", after the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol occurs once, the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed), and then the decoration is performed. The design is finally stopped and displayed. In "pseudo 3", the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol occurs once, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed), and then the second time. Temporary stop display is generated, and after the change display of the decorative symbol is restarted from the temporary stop display state (the third pseudo change display is performed), the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed. The stage until the first temporary stop display occurs is called "pseudo 1", and the stage from the start of the second pseudo variable display to the occurrence of the second temporary stop display is "pseudo". It is called "2", and the stage after the start of the third pseudo fluctuation display may be called "pseudo 3". Further, in the production of "no pseudo", the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the stop display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as "pseudo 1".

The sub-variation pattern includes information indicating whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred, information indicating the number of times the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbol has occurred (how far the pseudo-continuous effect progresses), and information regarding the pseudo-continuous effect. , Contains information that indicates the outline of the production performed at each stage in the pseudo-continuous production. For example, a sub-variation pattern that includes information that "pseudo 1" is a 20-second effect, "pseudo 2" is a 16-second effect, and "pseudo 3" develops after the reach is established and leads to the latter half of the super reach. When is determined, in the process of step S9001, the sub CPU 1301 uses what kind of effect (while the decorative symbol is fluctuating over 20 seconds) in "pseudo 1" to be described later as "bell". An outline of the effect such as whether to stop the icon or what kind of effect to stop the "watermelon" icon described later in "Pseudo 2" (while the decorative pattern is changing for 16 seconds). decide. As a result, the outline of the production at each stage and final variation in the pseudo-ren is determined.

As the outline of the effect performed at each stage in the pseudo-continuous effect, for example, a [24] 10-second reach (bonus) pattern, a [24] 6-second effect (bonus) pattern, and the like are provided. [24] In the 10-second reach (bonus) pattern, after 10 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol, the tempai has been reached, and then 24 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. The icon is displayed over a time point, and then a notice is generated after the icon is stopped for 4 seconds (see, for example, the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" shown in FIG. 136). [24] In the 6-second effect (bonus) pattern, after 6 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol, the effect is successful and 22 seconds from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. The icon is displayed for 24 seconds from the elapsed time, and then a notice is generated after the icon is stopped for 4 seconds (see, for example, the effect number "76" shown in FIG. 142).

Next, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect intensity lottery process (step S9002). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect intensity at each stage of the pseudo-ream based on the sub-variation pattern by performing a lottery based on a random number value. Specifically, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "no pseudo" is determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect intensity for pseudo 1, and the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo 2" is determined. If so, the effect intensity for pseudo 1 and the effect intensity for pseudo 2 are determined, and if the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo 3" is determined, the effect intensity for pseudo 1 and pseudo The effect strength for 2 and the effect intensity for pseudo 3 are determined. The staging intensity is an index showing the degree of expectation of the staging performed at each stage of the pseudo-ren. Levels 1 to 7 are provided as the effect intensity, and the higher the level, the easier it is to perform an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. The effect intensity (level) for pseudo 2 is set to be equal to or higher than the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 1, and the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 3 is equal to or higher than the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 2. Is set to.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect occurs based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9003). When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect is generated, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9004). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 executes the notice content lottery process for pseudo 3 (step S9005). The notice content lottery process for Pseudo 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

When it is determined in step S9004 that the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3", or after the process of step S9005 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo 2 notice content lottery process (step S9006). The notice content lottery process for Pseudo 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 132.

When it is determined in step S9003 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after the process of step S9006 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 executes the notice content lottery process for pseudo 1 (step S9007). The notice content lottery process for Pseudo 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 133. After executing the process of step S9007, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 3 variation main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 131 is a process performed in the pseudo 3 notice content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 130).

In the pseudo 3 variation main notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 3 variation main notice content based on the pseudo 3 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 3) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 130 (step S9011). ). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the type of the jackpot notice effect performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo-continuous effect and the content of the jackpot advancer effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value. In this embodiment, as the big hit notice effects that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3", a plurality of types of big hit notice effects (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, fourth notice effect, etc.) ) Is provided. In addition, as the content of each jackpot notice effect, a plurality of effect contents are provided. For example, as the contents of the first notice effect, the first notice effect content A, the first notice effect content B, the first notice effect content C, the first notice effect content D, and the like are provided. The first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect will be described in detail later.

In the process of step S9011, the sub CPU 1301 determines one big hit notice effect (for example, the first notice effect) from among a plurality of types of big hit notice effects as the pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice content, and the big hit notice effect. As the content, one effect content (for example, the first notice effect content A) is determined. After that, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

In the pseudo 3 notice content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 130), prior to performing the pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 131, a process of determining the outline of the reach effect is performed. May be good. In the reach effect, the decorative design is displayed in the reach mode (decorative design located on the left side (left decorative design), decorative design located on the right side (right decorative design), and decorative design located in the center (middle decorative design). ), Two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the remaining one decorative symbol is variablely displayed). In this case, in the process of step S9011, the sub CPU 1301 may determine the effect content whose effect time is shorter than the time from the start (restart) of the variable display of the decorative symbol until the reach is established. For example, when there is an effect content that can be completed within 10 seconds and an effect content that takes 10 seconds or more to complete, from the start (restart) of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the reach is established. When the reach effect such that the time is 10 seconds is determined, the pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice content may be configured so that the effect content that can be completed within 10 seconds can be determined. ..

<Pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 2 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 132 is a process performed in the pseudo 2 notice content lottery process (see step S9006 in FIG. 130).

In the pseudo 2 variation main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 2 variation main notice content (provisional) based on the pseudo 2 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 2) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 130. Select (step S9021). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the type of the jackpot notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous effect and the content of the jackpot advancer effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value. In this embodiment, as the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 2", the same type of jackpot advance notice effect as the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" (first advance notice effect, second advance notice effect, The third notice production, the fourth notice production, etc.) are provided. Further, as the content of each jackpot notice effect, the same content as the content of the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" is provided.

In the process of step S9021, the sub CPU 1301 selects one big hit notice effect (for example, the first notice effect) from a plurality of types of big hit notice effects as the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content (provisional), and the big hit. As the content of the advance notice effect, one effect content (for example, the first advance notice effect content B) is selected. The pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) selected here is tentative, and the pseudo 2 variable main notice content may be replaced with another effect content (see step S9024).

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content (provisional) is a specific big hit notice effect (step S9022). The specific jackpot notice effect is a big hit notice effect in which the effect performed at each stage in the pseudo-ren has a story, and a predetermined story is developed as the stage of the pseudo-ren progresses. be. For example, the first notice effect, which is one of the specific jackpot advance notice effects, is an effect in which the characters have a conversation, and the lines of the characters emitted at each stage in the pseudo-ren are associated with each other. For example, the conversation content in "pseudo 3" is premised on the conversation content in "pseudo 2", so that the conversation progresses as the stage of the pseudo-ren progresses. ing. The conversation content is set as an index showing the degree of expectation of a big hit. In this embodiment, as a specific jackpot notice effect, a fifth notice effect is provided in addition to the first notice effect. On the other hand, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect do not correspond to the specific jackpot advance notice effect.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot advance notice effect, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot advance notice selected as the pseudo 2 variable main advance notice content (provisional). It is determined whether or not the type of the effect is the same as the type of the jackpot advance notice effect (see step S9011 in FIG. 131) determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (step S9023). In this process, for example, the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) and the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content are both in the first notice effect. In some cases, the sub CPU 1301 considers these types to be the same. On the other hand, one of the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) and the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (provisional) is the first notice effect. If the other is the fifth notice effect, the sub CPU 1301 considers these types to be different. When the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3" (when the process of step S9005 in FIG. 130 is not executed), the sub CPU 1301 is selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional). It is determined that the type of is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice content.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the type 2 is pseudo 2. The variable main notice content (provisional) is replaced with another effect content, and the effect content after the replacement is determined as the formal pseudo-2 variable main notice content (step S9024).

In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect content after the replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Although not shown, in the conversation content replacement table, for each production content (conversation content) before replacement, the production content after replacement (already) with respect to the conversation content (pseudo 3 variable main notice content) already determined. Conversation content that can be selected for the determined pseudo 3 variable main notice content) is specified. As a result, for example, in a situation where the first notice effect is determined as the pseudo 3 change main notice content (provisional), when the first notice effect is selected as the pseudo 2 change main notice content (provisional), in "pseudo 2". The expectation of the conversation content in "pseudo 2" is higher than the expectation of the conversation content in "pseudo 3" so that the conversation content does not feel strange to the conversation content in "pseudo 3" (for example, the expectation of the conversation content in "pseudo 2" is higher. It is possible to make adjustments (so that there is no such thing). In the process of step S9024, the sub CPU 1301 maintains only the content of the jackpot advance notice effect while maintaining the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main advance notice content (provisional) for the type of the jackpot advance notice effect. Replace.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) in step S9022 is not a specific jackpot notice effect, or selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) in step S9023. If it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) selected in step S9021. ) Is determined as the formal pseudo-2 fluctuation main notice content (step S9025).

After executing the process of step S9024 or step S9025, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo 1 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 1 variation main notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 1 variation main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 133 is a process performed in the pseudo 1 notice content lottery process (see step S9007 in FIG. 130).

Pseudo 1 change main notice content In the lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 1 change main notice content (provisional) based on the pseudo 1 effect intensity (effect strength for pseudo 1) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 130. Select (step S9031). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random number value, so that the type of the big hit notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or the "pseudo-free" effect, and the big hit advance notice. Determine the content of the production. In this embodiment, as the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 1", the same type of jackpot advance notice effect as the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" (first advance notice effect, second advance notice effect, The third notice production, the fourth notice production, etc.) are provided. Further, as the content of each jackpot notice effect, the same content as the content of the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" is provided.

In the process of step S9031, the sub CPU 1301 selects one big hit notice effect (for example, the first notice effect) from a plurality of types of big hit notice effects as the pseudo 1 fluctuation main notice content (provisional), and the big hit. As the content of the advance notice effect, one effect content (for example, the first advance notice effect content C) is selected. The pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) selected here is tentative, and the pseudo 1 variable main notice content may be replaced with another effect content (see step S9034 and step S9036). ).

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main advance notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot advance notice effect (step S9032). As described above, in the present embodiment, the first notice effect and the fifth notice effect are provided as the specific jackpot advance notice effect.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot advance notice effect, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot advance notice selected as the pseudo 1 variable main advance notice content (provisional). It is determined whether or not the type of the effect is the same as the type of the jackpot advance notice effect (see step S9024 and step S9025 in FIG. 132) determined as the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content (step S9033). In this process, when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur (when the process of step S9006 in FIG. 130 is not executed), the sub CPU 1301 has the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main advance notice content (provisional). , Pseudo 2 It is judged that it is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the main notice content.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the pseudo 1 The variable main notice content (provisional) is replaced with another effect content, and the effect content after the replacement is determined as the formal pseudo 1 variable main notice content (step S9034). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect content after the replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As described above, as the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Here, the conversation content already determined is the pseudo 2 variable main notice content. In the process of step S9034, the sub CPU 1301 maintains only the content of the jackpot advance notice effect while maintaining the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main advance notice content (provisional) for the type of the jackpot advance notice effect. Replace.

When it is determined in step S9033 that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 determines. Whether or not the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (see step S9011 in FIG. 131). Is determined (step S9035). In this process, when the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur or the pseudo-continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3" (when the process of step S9005 in FIG. 130 is not executed), the sub CPU 1301 has the pseudo 1 variable main notice content. It is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as (tentative) is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the pseudo 1 The variable main notice content (provisional) is replaced with another effect content, and the effect content after the replacement is determined as the formal pseudo 1 variable main notice content (step S9036). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect content after the replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As described above, as the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Here, the conversation content already determined is the pseudo-3 variable main notice content. In the process of step S9036, the sub CPU 1301 maintains only the content of the jackpot advance notice effect while maintaining the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main advance notice content (provisional) for the type of the jackpot advance notice effect. Replace.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) in step S9032 is not a specific jackpot notice effect, or selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) in step S9035. If it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) selected in step S9031. ) Is determined as the formal pseudo-2 fluctuation main notice content (step S9037).

After executing the process of step S9034, step S9036, or step S9037, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Big hit notice production (only for the first production stage)>
As described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 133, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect are each stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", respectively. Can occur in. For example, the first notice effect is generated at all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", the second notice effect is generated at all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", or "pseudo". The third notice effect occurs at all stages of "1" to "pseudo 3", the fourth notice effect occurs at all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", and "pseudo 1" and "pseudo 3" occur. The first notice effect is generated in "pseudo 2" and the second notice effect is generated in "pseudo 3", or the second notice effect is generated in "pseudo 1" and "pseudo 2" and the third notice is generated in "pseudo 3". An effect is generated, a first notice effect is generated in "pseudo 1", a third notice effect is generated in "pseudo 2" and "pseudo 3", and a first notice effect is generated in "pseudo 1". The second notice effect is generated in "pseudo 2", and the third notice effect is generated in "pseudo 3".

As described above, the type of the jackpot advance notice effect performed in each stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3" is determined regardless of the type of the jackpot advance notice effect performed in the other stages. However, when the first notice effect is performed over a plurality of stages, the degree of expectation decreases as the pseudo-ren stage progresses so that the conversation content generated in these first notice effects does not feel strange. Predetermined control is being performed (see step S9024 in FIG. 132 and steps S9034 and S9036 in FIG. 133).

Here, in this embodiment, an icon may be displayed as the stage in the pseudo-continuous production progresses. For example, when the "bell" icon is displayed in "pseudo 1", it shifts to "pseudo 2", when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2", it shifts to "pseudo 3", or "pseudo 3". When the "cherry" icon is displayed in "3", it shifts to super reach (the one with a relatively high expectation of a big hit among the reach). Based on the above, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect will be described below.

<First notice production>
FIG. 134 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the first notice effect. FIG. 134 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the first notice effect.

The first notice effect shown in FIGS. 134 (a) and 134 (b) is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)).

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "1", the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed as a conversation for the first stage from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 6.5 seconds have elapsed. After being displayed on 1007, it is a production that fades out. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "2", the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed as a conversation for the first stage from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 6.5 seconds have elapsed. It is displayed on 1007, and the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 as a conversation for the second stage from the time when 6.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative pattern has started (restarted) to the time when 10 seconds have passed, and then. , It is a production that becomes a fade-out. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "3", the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed as a conversation for the first stage from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 6.5 seconds have elapsed. It is displayed on 1007, and the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 as a conversation for the second stage from the time when 6.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative pattern has started (restarted) to the time when 10 seconds have passed, and the decoration is displayed. From the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the symbol to the time when 13.5 seconds have passed, the dialogue of the predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 as the conversation for the third stage, and then the fading out is performed. be.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "4", the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed as a conversation for the first stage from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 7.5 seconds have elapsed. After being displayed on 1007, the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and then, from the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol to the time when 13.5 seconds have passed, the conversation for the second stage or As a conversation for the third stage, the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007, which is an effect of fading out. The button image is an image imitating the effect button 1054. The button effective time is set from the time when 8 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 10 seconds have passed. When the effect button 1054 is operated during the button effective time, a predetermined character is used as a conversation for the second stage or a conversation for the third stage for 3.5 seconds from the time when the effect button 1054 is operated. May be displayed on the display device 1007. Further, if the effect button 1054 is not operated during the button effective time, the dialogue of a predetermined character may not be displayed on the display device 1007.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "5", the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed as a conversation for the first stage from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 7.5 seconds have elapsed. After being displayed on the 1007, the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from 10 seconds to 13 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. It is a production. The button effective time is set from the time when 8 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 10 seconds have passed. When the effect button 1054 is operated during the button effective time, the icon may be displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when the effect button 1054 is operated. At this time, the icon may be displayed on the display device 1007 from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol to the time when 12 seconds have elapsed, regardless of the timing when the effect button 1054 is operated. Further, even if the effect button 1054 is not operated during the button effective time, the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 12 seconds have passed. You may do so. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later.

As the conversation for the first stage, the conversation for the second stage, and the conversation for the third stage, a plurality of conversation contents (lines) are provided, and one conversation content is selected. Each conversation content is associated with a predetermined character color, and is displayed on the display device 1007 in the corresponding character color. The character color is associated with the jackpot expectation. For example, when a pseudo-ream occurs, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when a pseudo-ream does not occur, and the fact that the conversation content is displayed in purple suggests that a pseudo-ream occurs. .. In addition, when super reach (SP) occurs, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when super reach does not occur, but when the conversation content is displayed in red, super reach occurs (from purple). Also has high expectations). In addition, the fact that the conversation content is displayed in gold suggests that the probability of being a big hit is very high (higher expectations than red). In addition, the fact that the conversation content is displayed in rainbow colors suggests that it has been confirmed that it is a big hit (premier SP will occur) (higher expectations than gold). The conversation content is displayed in any of the default colors, purple, red, and gold for the first-stage conversation, and the default color, purple, and red for the second-stage conversation. , And, the conversation content is displayed in any of the colors of gold, and as the conversation for the third stage, the conversation content is displayed in any of the colors of red, gold, and rainbow.

As the icons that can be displayed in the first notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon ("premium" icon), and a second specific icon are provided. In this embodiment, the "bell" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 1", and when the "bell" icon is displayed in "pseudo 1", it shifts to "pseudo 2". The "watermelon" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 2", and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2", it shifts to "pseudo 3". The "cherry" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 3", and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", the icon shifts to a predetermined super reach. The first specific icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 3", and when the first specific icon is displayed, it shifts to the first specific super reach (premier SP). The second specific icon is an icon that can be displayed at any stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", and when the second specific icon is displayed, it shifts to the second specific super reach.

<Second notice production>
FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a flow of the second notice effect. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a time chart of the second notice effect. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between the second notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern.

The second advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)).

The effect corresponding to the effect number "11" is performed after a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed. It is a production that becomes a fade-out. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "12", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated counterclockwise from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the display device 1007 has elapsed (restart), and 4 from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restart). This is an effect in which the item is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when .5 seconds have passed to the time when 7.5 seconds have passed. Items that can be displayed here include at least an item that suggests that reach will occur, at least an item that suggests that super reach will occur, at least an item that suggests that a specific super reach will occur, and a Gase item. Can be mentioned.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in a manner as if the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated counterclockwise from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed from the time when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to 6 seconds. An image related to the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point in which 8 seconds have passed, and the mission The image related to the execution is displayed on the display device 1007, and the image corresponding to the failure of the mission result is displayed from 19 seconds to 22 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. It is an effect that the display device 1007 is displayed on the device 1007, and then the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in a manner as if the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated counterclockwise from the time when the fluctuation of the display device 1007 has elapsed from the time when the fluctuation has started (restarted) to the time when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol has been started (restarted) for 6 seconds. An image related to the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point in which 8 seconds have passed, and the mission The image related to the execution is displayed on the display device 1007, and the image corresponding to the success of the mission result is displayed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 19 seconds have passed to the time when 22 seconds have passed. It is an effect that is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 22 seconds have passed to the time when 24 seconds have passed. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later. In addition, during the execution of the mission, the reward (icon) given when the mission is successful is suggested, and the icon will be definitively displayed when the mission is successful.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "15", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated clockwise from the time when 3 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the display device 1007 has elapsed (restart), and 4 from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. . This is an effect in which reliability items are displayed on the display device 1007 as a result of a roulette effect in which a plurality of items are variablely displayed from the time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the time when 10 seconds have elapsed. As reliability items, a plurality of items having different jackpot expectations (for example, a first item with a low jackpot expectation, a second item with a medium jackpot expectation, and a third item with a high jackpot expectation). Etc.) are provided. For example, in the case of loss, the first item is likely to be selected, and in the case of a big hit, the third item is easy to be selected. The display of one of these items suggests a jackpot expectation.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "16", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated clockwise from the time when 3 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the display device 1007 has elapsed (restart), and 4 from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. As a result of the roulette effect in which a plurality of items are variablely displayed from the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed, the icon suggestion type item is displayed on the display device 1007, and then from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative pattern. This is an effect in which the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 10 seconds have passed to the time when 12 seconds have passed. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later.

Icon suggestion items include "bell" icon stop suggestion item, "watermelon" icon stop suggestion item, "cherry" icon stop suggestion item, first specific icon stop suggestion item, and second specific icon stop suggestion item. Has been done. When the "bell" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "bell" icon is displayed immediately after. When the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "watermelon" icon is displayed immediately after. When the "cherry" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "cherry" icon is displayed immediately after. When the first specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first specific icon is displayed immediately after. When the second specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the second specific icon is displayed immediately after.

The icons that can be displayed in the second notice effect include a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon, a second specific icon, and a third specific icon. .. The "bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon are icons that can be displayed even in the first notice effect, and these icons are as described above. Is. In the second notice effect, in addition to these icons, the third specific icon can be displayed. The third specific icon is an icon that can be displayed at any stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", and when the third specific icon is displayed, the process shifts to the third specific super reach.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "17" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated clockwise from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed. It is the same effect as the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", except that the effect is the same. The effect corresponding to the effect number "18" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated clockwise from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed. It is the same effect as the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", except that the effect is the same.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "19", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated upward from the time when 3 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the display device 1007 has elapsed (restart), and 4 from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. . From the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed, an image related to the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character fight is displayed on the display device 1007, and 12 from the time when 10 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. This is an effect in which an image corresponding to the failure of the result of the battle effect is displayed on the display device 1007 over the lapse of seconds.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "20", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated upward from the time when 3 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the display device 1007 has elapsed (restart), and 4 from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. . From the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed, an image related to the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character fight is displayed on the display device 1007, and 12 from the time when 10 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. An image corresponding to the success of the battle effect is displayed on the display device 1007 over the lapse of seconds, and then from the lapse of 12 seconds to the lapse of 14 seconds from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative pattern. It is an effect that the above-mentioned reliability items are displayed on the display device 1007.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "21", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated upward from the time when 3 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the display device 1007 has elapsed (restart), and 4 from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. . From the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed, an image related to the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character fight is displayed on the display device 1007, and 12 from the time when 10 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. An image corresponding to the success of the battle effect is displayed on the display device 1007 over the lapse of seconds, and from the lapse of 12 seconds to the lapse of 14 seconds from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. , The above-mentioned icon suggestion item is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon corresponding to the icon suggestion item is displayed on the display device from 14 seconds to 16 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. This is the effect displayed in 1007. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "22" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated upward from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed. It is the same effect as the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", except that the effect is the same. The effect corresponding to the effect number "23" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated upward from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed. It is the same effect as the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", except that the effect is the same.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "24", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated downward from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the display device 1007 has elapsed (restart), and 4 from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restart). . From the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 9 seconds have passed, the image related to the start of the continuous striking effect is displayed on the display device 1007, and when 9 seconds have passed from the time when the decorative design has started to change (restart) to 15 seconds (effect button). The button image is displayed on the display device 1007 for 1054 (time for accepting repeated hits), and the result of the repeated hits effect fails from the time when 15 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 18 seconds have passed. An image corresponding to the situation is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "25", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decorative symbol has been displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated downward from the time when 3 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the display device 1007 has elapsed (restart), and 4 from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restart). . From the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 9 seconds have passed, the image related to the start of the continuous striking effect is displayed on the display device 1007, and when 9 seconds have passed from the time when the decorative design has started to change (restart) to 15 seconds (effect button). The button image is displayed on the display device 1007 for 1054 (time to accept repeated hits), and the result of the continuous hitting effect is successful from the time when 15 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 18 seconds have passed. An image corresponding to the change is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from 18 seconds to 20 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative pattern. be. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later. It should be noted that during the execution of the continuous striking effect, a reward (icon) given when the continuous striking effect is successful is suggested, and the icon is deterministically displayed when the continuous striking effect is successful.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "26" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated downward from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed. It is the same effect as the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", except that the effect is the same. The effect corresponding to the effect number "27" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated downward from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed. It is the same effect as the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", except that the effect is the same.

FIG. 137 (a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “24” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "24" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 137 (a), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start (restart) of the fluctuation to the time when 18 seconds have elapsed, and then 2 seconds. It will stop over and the design will be confirmed. As a result, from the player's point of view, when the second notice effect is completed and the background is returned to the normal background, each decorative symbol appears to be stopped. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "24".

FIG. 137 (b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “25” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "25" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 20 seconds is determined. FIG. 137
In the example shown in (b), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each exhibit the same behavior, and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation from the start (restart) of fluctuation to the time when 20 seconds have elapsed. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "25".

FIG. 137 (c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect numbers “13”, “17”, “22”, and “26” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 137 (c), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start (restart) of the fluctuation to the time when 22 seconds have elapsed, and then 2 seconds. It will stop over and the design will be confirmed. As a result, from the player's point of view, when the second notice effect is completed and the background is returned to the normal background, each decorative symbol appears to be stopped. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the time when the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26" is performed.

FIG. 137 (d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect numbers “14”, “18”, “23”, and “27” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 137 (d), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation from the start (restart) of fluctuation to the time when 24 seconds have elapsed. .. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27".

<Third notice production>
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a flow of the third notice effect. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a time chart of the third notice effect. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing the relationship between the third notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern.

The third advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 138 and 139 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)).

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "41" and "42" can occur only in "pseudo 1". The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48" can occur only in "pseudo 2". The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "49" to "52" can occur only in "pseudo 3". As the icons that can be displayed in the third notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon are provided. The icon displayed in "pseudo 1" is defined as the "bell" icon, and the icon displayed in "pseudo 2" is defined as the "watermelon" icon, and is displayed in "pseudo 3". The icon is defined as a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it develops into a predetermined super reach. In the third notice effect, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed.

In "pseudo 2" and "pseudo 3", an enemy attack effect is performed. In the enemy attack effect, the three numerical symbols are repeatedly changed and stopped, and each time the continuous roll is stopped and displayed, the ally character attacks the enemy character. As continuous rolls (combination of three numbers and symbols), "1 ・ 2 ・ 2", "2 ・ 3 ・ 3", "3 ・ 4 ・ 4", "4 ・ 5 ・ 5", "5.6"・ 6 ”,“ 6 ・ 7 ・ 7 ”, and“ 7 ・ 1 ・ 1 ”are provided. When an ally character attacks an enemy character, the enemy character's health gauge decreases. The health gauge suggests the possibility of acquiring the icon. If the enemy character collapses in conjunction with the fanning of whether or not the icon stops (icon stopping fanning), situations such as icon acquisition and tempai (expansion to SP) will be given to the player. .. In addition, when the enemy character is defeated, a predetermined character may be displayed, and the color of the character suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number "41" is an effect of fading out after the image related to the title completion fan of the third notice effect is displayed on the display device 1007. As for the effect corresponding to the effect number "42", after the image related to the title completion fan of the third notice effect is displayed on the display device 1007, the image corresponding to the success of the title completion fan is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the "bell" icon is deterministically displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007. If the "bell" icon is displayed (the "bell" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

There are four timings at which the title completion can occur. Specifically, when the image related to the title completion fanning is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1), the title completion fanning is performed from the time when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. When the image related to the title is displayed on the display device 1007 (timing 2), and when the image related to the title completion fanning is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 9 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 3). A case (timing 4) is provided in which an image related to the title completion fanning is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 13 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. The title completion fanning occurs at the timing of one of these four timings.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "43", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "watermelon" icon is confirmed on the display device 1007. It is an effect that is displayed (stopped). If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), then the notification is started after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "44", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, the image corresponding to the failure of the icon stop fanning is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the display device 1007 displays the wipe. It is a production that returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "45", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "watermelon" icon is deterministically displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007. If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), then the notification is started after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "46", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, the image related to the icon stop fanning (third time) is displayed. An image displayed on the device 1007 and corresponding to the failure of the icon stop fanning is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "47", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, the image related to the icon stop fanning (third time) is displayed. It is an effect that is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "watermelon" icon is deterministically displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007. If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), then the notification is started after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "48", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, the image related to the icon stop fanning (third time) is displayed. It is an effect that is displayed on the device 1007, and then a numerical symbol is displayed on the display device 1007 in a tempai manner, and develops into the third specific super reach (first half) through a predetermined connecting effect.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "49", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "cherry" icon is confirmed on the display device 1007. It is an effect that is displayed (stopped). If the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "50", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "cherry" icon is deterministically displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007. If the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "51", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, the image related to the icon stop fanning (third time) is displayed. It is an effect that is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "cherry" icon is deterministically displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007. If the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "52", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and the continuous result is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and further, after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, the image related to the icon stop fanning (third time) is displayed. It is an effect that is displayed on the device 1007, and then a numerical symbol is displayed on the display device 1007 in a tempai manner, and develops into the third specific super reach (second half) through a predetermined connecting effect.

In the production corresponding to the production numbers "49" to "52", the image related to the icon stop fan (first time), the icon stop fan (second time), or the icon stop fan (third time) is displayed on the display device 1007. When displayed in, the button image is also displayed on the display device 1007. As a result, the operation of the effect button 1054 is accepted. When the button image is displayed, a predetermined button effective time (for example, 2 seconds in which the image related to the icon stop fanning is displayed ... See FIG. 139) is set. If the effect button 1054 is operated during the button effective time, the display following the icon stop fanning at the time when the effect button 1054 is operated (even if the button effective time has not expired, immediately after the operation). (Display of "cherry" icon, display of continuous roll, or display of tempai of numerical pattern) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 1054 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment when the button valid time ends), the display following the icon stop fanning (icon display, continuation). The result is displayed or the tempai display of the numerical pattern) is performed. Such a button image is not displayed in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48". That is, in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48", even if the effect button 1054 is operated while the image related to the icon stop fanning is displayed, the operation is triggered (icon). Before the expiration of 2 seconds when the image related to the stop fan is displayed), the display following the icon stop fan (display of "cherry" icon, display of continuous roll, or tempai display of numerical pattern) is performed. There is no. In addition, when the enemy attack effect starts, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by operating a predetermined movable accessory. The relationship between the operation mode of the movable accessory and the expected degree of jackpot is the same as the notice after the icon is stopped, which will be described later.

FIG. 140 (a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “42” (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is determined to be 12 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 140 (a), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 2 seconds have elapsed, and then decelerate over 1 second. Then, after stopping for 1 second, it fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 1).

FIG. 140 (b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “42” (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is 16 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 140 (b), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed again. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 4 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 2).

FIG. 140 (c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “42” (timing 3) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 3) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is determined to be 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 140 (c), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed again. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 10.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 8.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 3).

FIG. 140 (d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “42” (timing 4) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 4) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is determined to be 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 140 (d), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed again. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 14.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 12.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 4).

The "stop" of the decorative symbol in FIG. 140 means a temporary stop display. As described above, the state of the temporary stop display is a state in which the decorative symbol is vibrating or the like, and it cannot be said that the temporary stop display is completely displayed.

<4th notice production>
FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a flow of the fourth notice effect. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a time chart of the fourth notice effect. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the relationship between the fourth notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern.

The fourth advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 141 and 142 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)).

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "71" and "72" can occur only in "pseudo 1". The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "73" to "77" can occur in "pseudo 2" or "pseudo 3". As the icons that can be displayed in the fourth notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon are provided. The icon displayed in "pseudo 1" is defined as the "bell" icon, and the icon displayed in "pseudo 2" is defined as the "watermelon" icon, and is displayed in "pseudo 3". The icon is defined as a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it develops into a predetermined super reach. In addition, in the 4th notice effect, the 1st specific icon, the 2nd specific icon, and the 3rd specific icon are not displayed.

Specifically, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "71", the image related to whether or not the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol and the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) is displayed. After being displayed on the display device 1007, an image corresponding to the failure of the four symbol tempai fanning is displayed on the display device 1007, and the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "72", the image related to whether or not the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol and the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) is displayed on the display device 1007. After being displayed, the image corresponding to the success of the four symbols tempai fanning is displayed on the display device 1007, the image that becomes normal reach in the dedicated background state after the success is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 1007. This is the effect displayed on 1007. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to after the icon is stopped.

4 There are two timings as the timings at which the symbol tenpai can occur. Specifically, when the image related to the four symbol tempai fanning is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1), and from the time when 7 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative design. The case where the image related to the 4 symbol tempai fanning is displayed on the display device 1007 (timing 2) is provided. 4 The symbol tempai tenpai occurs at one of these two timings.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "73" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slips after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 1007. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to after the icon is stopped. The effect corresponding to the effect number "74" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slips after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image relating to whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (7 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and then an icon is displayed. Is an effect displayed on the display device 1007. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to after the icon is stopped.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "75" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slips after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image relating to whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (7 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and "4" is displayed. An image related to whether or not the symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fanning) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and a fanning whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fanning). 7 The image related to the symbol tempai fan) and the image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 1007. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to after the icon is stopped.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "76" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slips after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image relating to whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (7 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and "4" is displayed. An image related to whether or not the symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fanning) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and a fanning whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fanning). An image related to (7 symbol tempai fanning) and an image in which the "7" symbol slips are displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to fanning which of the "4" symbol and the "7" symbol becomes the tempai. Is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 1007. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to after the icon is stopped.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "77" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image relating to whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (7 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and "4" is displayed. An image related to whether or not the symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fanning) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and a fanning whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fanning). An image related to (7 symbol tempai fanning) and an image in which the "7" symbol slips are displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to fanning which of the "4" symbol and the "7" symbol becomes the tempai. Is displayed on the display device 1007, and then any one of the "4" symbol and the "7" symbol is displayed on the display device 1007 in a tempai manner, and develops into the third specific super reach through a predetermined connecting effect. It is a production to do.

In addition, after the notice is given after the icon is stopped in "pseudo 1" via the effect corresponding to the effect number "72", the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "73" to "77" is performed in "pseudo 2". In this case, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "73" to "77" in "pseudo 2", the "4" symbol became a tempai as a result of the production in "pseudo 1" before the dedicated background state was set. The background behind is displayed. Further, after the notification is given after the icon is stopped via any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "73" to "76" in "pseudo 2", the effect number "73" is used in "pseudo 3". When the production corresponding to "77" is performed, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "73" to "77" in "pseudo 3", the production in "pseudo 2" is performed before the dedicated background state is set. As a result, the background after the "4" symbol becomes a tempai is displayed.

FIG. 143 (a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “71” (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 143 (a), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 9 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 18 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 8 seconds have passed, then decelerates for 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then further. It fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. As a result, from the player, after the fourth advance notice effect is completed and the background is returned to the normal background, the same as the default variation when the sub variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 8 seconds is determined. Each decorative pattern will appear to fluctuate depending on the aspect. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 1). The default fluctuation will be described later.

FIG. 143 (b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “71” (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 143 (b), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of the fluctuation to the time when 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 2 seconds, stops for 1 second, and then shakes for 9 seconds. Further, it fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 22 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11.5 seconds have passed, shakes for 0.5 seconds, decelerates for 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, and stops for 1 second. After shaking for 2 seconds, it fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates for 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 2).

FIG. 143 (c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “72” (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 143 (c), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 12 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for another 2 seconds. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed from the start of the fluctuation to the time when 14 seconds have elapsed, then operates at a speed of one frame advance every 0.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at a high speed for another 2 seconds. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 8 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 3 seconds, shakes for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 1).

FIG. 143 (d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “72” (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is determined to be 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 143 (d), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 8.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for another 2 seconds. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed from the start of the fluctuation to the time when 18 seconds have elapsed, then operates at a speed of one frame advance every 0.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at a high speed for another 2 seconds. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 12 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 3 seconds, shakes for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 2).

<Notice after icon stop>
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing the effect content of the notice after the icon is stopped. FIGS. 145 and 146 are diagrams showing the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" is an effect performed after the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "91", after the first connecting effect is performed, the predetermined movable accessory operates in the first mode. The post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "92" is an effect performed after the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "92", after the first connecting effect is performed, the predetermined movable accessory operates in the second mode.

The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93" is an effect performed after the "cherry" icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93", the second connecting effect is performed. The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "94" is an effect performed after the first specific icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "94", a third connecting effect is performed. The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "95" is an effect performed after the second specific icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "95", the fourth connecting effect is performed. The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "96" is an effect performed after the third specific icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "96", the fifth connection effect is performed. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect numbers "93" to "96", the predetermined movable accessory does not operate.

In addition, "the icon is stopped (confirmedly displayed)" means that the icon is stopped and displayed separately from the decorative symbol. As described in detail in this embodiment, the icon is a marker indicating the development to the next stage in the pseudo-ream or super reach. Therefore, at the time when the icon is stopped and displayed, the result of the jackpot determination has not yet been derived, and at that time, at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol changes. It is in the displayed state. In addition, when one icon is stopped and displayed, it is assumed that the icon is temporarily displayed before the display is confirmed. Therefore, in the above, the expression "confirmedly displayed" is used. It is clarified that it is not a provisional display like this. "Temporary display" means that the icon is displayed in a manner that suggests that there is a possibility that one icon will be confirmed and displayed (an effect that encourages the icon to be stopped and displayed). Is done).

FIG. 145 (a) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “91” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91", after the first connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds, the illumination lights are turned on for 1 second and the predetermined movement is performed for 1 second. The accessory operates in the first aspect, and then the movable accessory is stored. The first connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (first background image) is displayed on the display device 1007. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" is generated by displaying the "bell" icon in "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2" is displayed 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. Become. In addition, when a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" is generated by displaying the "watermelon" icon in "pseudo 2", "pseudo 3" is obtained 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. ". That is, the operation of the predetermined movable accessory is performed at the next stage in the pseudo-ream.

FIG. 145 (b) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “92” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92", after the first connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds, the illumination lights are turned on for 1 second and the predetermined time is set for 2.5 seconds. The movable accessory operates in the second aspect, and then the movable accessory is stored. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92" is generated by displaying the "bell" icon in "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2" is displayed 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. Become. In addition, when a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92" is generated by displaying the "watermelon" icon in "pseudo 2", "pseudo 3" is obtained 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. ". That is, the operation of the predetermined movable accessory is performed at the next stage in the pseudo-ream.

A predetermined movable accessory is configured to be capable of being displaced between a first state, a second state and a third state. Specifically, when the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state, the predetermined movable accessory goes through the second state. That is, the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state by being displaced from the first state to the second state and then from the second state to the third state. It is possible. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91", the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the second state (one-step displacement). On the other hand, in the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92", the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state (two-step displacement). The first state is a state in which the predetermined movable accessory is stored in the predetermined position, and when the advance notice ends after the icon is stopped, the predetermined movable accessory returns to the first state.

Further, during the time during which the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92", the predetermined movable accessory is operated in the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91". It's longer than the time I'm there. The time during which the predetermined movable accessory is operating corresponds to the jackpot expectation, and the longer the time, the higher the jackpot expectation. The jackpot expectation degree is the probability that the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol change this time is a jackpot, and is an index showing how much it can be expected to be a jackpot when the effect occurs. As a result, when the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92" is generated, the player is hit with a notice as compared with the case where the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" is generated. You can have a great sense of expectation for.

FIG. 146 (a) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “93” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93", the second connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds. The second connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (second background image) is displayed on the display device 1007. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93" is generated by displaying the "cherry" icon in "pseudo 3", the predetermined super reach is reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. ..

FIG. 146 (b) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “94” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "94", the third connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds. The third connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (third background image) is displayed on the display device 1007. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "94" is generated by displaying the first specific icon, the first specific super reach is reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped.

FIG. 146 (c) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “95” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "95", the fourth connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds. The fourth connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (fourth background image) is displayed on the display device 1007. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "95" is generated by displaying the second specific icon, the second specific super reach is reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped.

FIG. 146 (d) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “96” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "96", the fifth connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds. The fifth connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (fifth background image) is displayed on the display device 1007. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "96" is generated by displaying the third specific icon, the third specific super reach is reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped.

In the first connecting effect, the second connecting effect, the third connecting effect, the fourth connecting effect, and the fifth connecting effect, the background images (first background image to fifth background image) are different from each other. ) Is displayed on the display device 1007. When the "bell" icon is displayed and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed, basically the same connection effect (first connection effect) is performed, but the first connection effect is the first. A connecting effect (common) and a first connecting effect (dedicated) are provided. In the notice after the icon is stopped, which is generated by displaying the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon in the big hit notice effect other than the third notice effect, the first connection effect (common) is performed. On the other hand, in the notice after the icon is stopped, which is generated by displaying the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon in the third notice effect, the first connection effect (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the first joint effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the first joint effect (common). In the third notice effect, a background image different from the usual one is displayed as the background image for the third notice effect, but a background image dedicated to the third notice effect is adopted as the background image displayed in the notice after the icon is stopped. is doing. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by the normal background image being displayed in the notice after the icon is stopped, which occurs following the third notice effect.

Similarly, as the second connecting effect, a second connecting effect (common) and a second connecting effect (dedicated) are provided. In the notice after the icon is stopped, which is generated by displaying the "cherry" icon in the big hit notice effect other than the third notice effect, the second connection effect (common) is performed. On the other hand, in the notice after the icon is stopped, which is generated by displaying the "cherry" icon in the third notice effect, the second connection effect (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the second joint effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the second joint effect (common). As described above, in the third notice effect, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed, so that the third connection effect, the fourth connection effect, and the third As for the connecting effect of 5, there is no effect dedicated to the third notice effect.

In this embodiment, the "connecting effect" refers to an effect in which a background image is displayed to fill the gap time between the end of one effect and the start of another effect. The first connecting effect is a connecting effect dedicated to the case where the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed. Further, the second connecting effect is a dedicated connecting effect when the "cherry" icon is displayed, and the third connecting effect is a dedicated connecting effect when the first specific icon is displayed. The connecting effect is a dedicated connecting effect when the second specific icon is displayed, and the fifth connecting effect is a connecting effect dedicated when the third specific icon is displayed.

Further, the "bell" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), and the "cherry" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (second half). When the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, the first connection effect is performed as a notice after the icon is stopped, but the background image displayed at that time is the first connection effect ( It is slightly different from the background image displayed in (common). Similarly, when the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, the second connection effect is performed as a notice after the icon is stopped, but the background image displayed at that time is the second. It is slightly different from the background image displayed in the joint effect (common). In the third specific super reach, a battle between a friendly character (first friendly character) and an enemy character is performed. If the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), the process shifts to the third specific super reach (second half). If the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (second half), the process shifts to the predetermined super reach.

The third specific super reach is a super reach that can occur only in the first staging stage (see FIG. 129 (a)). On the other hand, the predetermined super reach is a super reach that can occur in any of the first staging stage, the second staging stage, and the third staging stage. When the "cherry" icon is displayed in the jackpot notice effect, the system shifts to the same super reach (predetermined super reach) regardless of the type of the jackpot advance notice effect. In a predetermined super reach, another ally character participates in one ally character. A main ally character (a ally character with a high frequency of appearance) is associated with each of the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage, and the first production stage is basically the first. One ally character appears, the second ally character basically appears in the second production stage, and the third ally character basically appears in the third production stage. For example, the predetermined characters (ally characters) appearing in the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the third notice effect described above are all the first ally characters. When a predetermined super reach occurs in the first production stage, the second ally character participates in the first ally character. Further, when a predetermined super reach occurs in the second production stage, the third ally character participates in the second ally character, and when a predetermined super reach occurs in the third production stage, the third ally character participates in the war. The first ally character participates in the battle against the three ally characters.

As described above, when the icon is displayed in the jackpot notice effect, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol may or may not be temporarily stopped when developing from one stage to the next in the pseudo-continuous production. If the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed when developing from one stage to the next in the pseudo-continuous production, it is a condition for developing to the next stage that the icon is displayed.

<Specific mode of big hit notice production>
FIGS. 147 to 149 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the first notice effect. FIGS. 150 to 152 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the second notice effect. FIGS. 153 to 156 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the third notice effect. FIGS. 157 to 159 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the fourth notice effect. FIGS. 160 and 161 are diagrams showing a specific mode of notice after the icon is stopped. FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining an example of an icon.

FIG. 147 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect corresponding to the effect number “3” (see FIG. 134 (a)). In the effect shown in FIG. 147, first, the decorative symbol 9001 starts to change in the display device 1007 (see FIG. 147 (a)), and then the first ally character 9002 appears (see FIG. 147 (b)). Subsequently, the dialogue of the first ally character 9002 (“Is it hot?”) Is displayed on the display device 1007 as the conversation for the first stage (see FIG. 147 (c)), and then the conversation for the second stage. The dialogue of the first ally character 9002 (“hot!”) Is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 147 (d)), and then the dialogue of the first ally character 9002 (“hot ze!”) As a conversation for the third stage. "Too hot!") Is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 147 (e)), after which the decorative symbol 9001 becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 147 (f)).

FIG. 148 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect corresponding to the effect number “5” (see FIG. 134 (a)). In the effect shown in FIG. 148, first, as an effect in "pseudo 1", the decorative symbol 9001 starts to change in the display device 1007 (see FIG. 148 (a)), and then the first ally character 9002 appears. At the same time, the dialogue of the first ally character 9002 (“pressing the button”) is displayed on the display device 1007 as a conversation for the first stage (see FIG. 148 (b)), and then the button image 9003 is displayed on the display device 1007. Displayed (see FIG. 148 (c)), followed by a large "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 148 (d)), followed by a pseudo-continuous step notification bell image 9021. The "bell" icon is displayed smaller than the confirmed image 9011 on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 148 (e)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 148 (f)). The "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 is an image corresponding to the fact that the "bell" icon is deterministically displayed. The pseudo-ream stage notification bell image 9021 is an image corresponding to the pseudo-ream stage being "pseudo 2", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 1007 during "pseudo 2".

In FIG. 149, after the effect shown in FIG. 148 is performed in “pseudo 1”, the effect corresponding to the effect number “5” is performed in “pseudo 2” and “pseudo 3” (see FIG. 134 (a)). An example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 is shown. In the effect shown in FIG. 149, after shifting to "pseudo 2" as shown in FIG. 148 (f), the first ally character 9002 talks and the button image 9003 is displayed (not shown), and then "watermelon". The icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed large on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 149 (a)), the pseudo-continuous step notification watermelon image 9022 is displayed on the display device 1007, and the process shifts to “pseudo 3” (FIG. 149 (b). )reference). The “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012 is an image corresponding to the fact that the “watermelon” icon is deterministically displayed. The watermelon image 9022 for pseudo-continuous stage notification is an image corresponding to the pseudo-ream stage being "pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 1007 during "pseudo 3".

After that, after the conversation of the first ally character 9002 and the display of the button image 9003 (not shown), the "cherry" icon confirmation image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 149 (c)), and the pseudo-continuous stage. The notification cherry image 9023 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 149 (d)), and shifts to a predetermined super reach (not shown). The “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 is an image corresponding to the fact that the “cherry” icon is deterministically displayed. The pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 is an image corresponding to the development of super reach in "pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 1007 during super reach. After that, if the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 149 (e)), and the big hit is obtained (see FIG. 149 (f)).

FIG. 150 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect (see FIG. 135) corresponding to the effect number “13”. In the effect shown in FIG. 150, first, the decorative symbol 9001 starts to change in the display device 1007 (see FIG. 150 (a)), and then the cut of the first ally character 9002 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 150 (a)). (See FIG. 150 (b)), subsequently the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 150 (c)), and then the first ally character 9002 is displayed in such a manner as to rotate counterclockwise. (See FIG. 150 (d)), subsequently, an image relating to the description and start of the mission is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIGS. 150 (e) and (f)), after which the result of the mission fails. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 150 (g)).

FIGS. 151 and 152 show an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect (see FIG. 135) corresponding to the effect number “16”. In the effects shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, first, the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the display device 1007 (see FIG. 151 (a)), and then the cut of the first ally character 9002 is large in the display device 1007. Displayed (see FIG. 151 (b)), subsequently the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 151 (c)), and subsequently, the first ally character 9002 is rotated to the right. (See Fig. 151 (d)), followed by multiple items (here, "chance", "CHANGE", "chans", "gekiatsu", "super heat", "iron plate", "NEXT". , And a roulette effect to select one item from the "bell" icon stop suggestion item 9031) (see FIGS. 151 (e) to 152 (a)), followed by the result of the roulette effect. The "bell" icon stop suggestion item 9031 is selected (see FIGS. 152 (b) and (c)), and subsequently the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed larger on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 152 (d)). Subsequently, the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 1007 smaller than the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 (see FIG. 152 (e)), and then shifts to “pseudo 2” (FIG. 152). (F)).

FIG. 153 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect (see FIG. 138) corresponding to the effect number “41”. In the effect shown in FIG. 153, first, the decorative symbol 9001 starts to change in the display device 1007 (see FIG. 153 (a)), and then the title completion fan image 9004 is displayed on the display device 1007 (FIG. 153 (FIG. 153). b)) Subsequently, in response to the failure of the title completion fanning, the title completion fanning image 9004 disappears, and the decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (FIG. 153 (c) and FIG. (D)).

FIG. 154 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect (see FIG. 138) corresponding to the effect number “42”. In the effect shown in FIG. 154, first, as an effect in "pseudo 1", the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the display device 1007 (see FIG. 154 (a)), and then the title completion fan image 9004 is displayed in the display device. It is displayed on 1007 (see FIG. 154 (b)), and subsequently, in response to the success of the title completion fanning, the title completion fanning success image 9005 is displayed on the display device 1007 (FIG. 154 (c). ), The decorative symbol 9001 becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 154 (d)), and subsequently, the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 154 (e)). The pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 1007 smaller than the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 (see FIG. 154 (f)), and then shifts to “pseudo 2” (see FIG. 154 (g)). ).

In FIG. 155, after the effect shown in FIG. 154 is performed in "pseudo 1", the effect corresponding to the effect number "43" is performed in "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 138), which is displayed on the display device 1007. An example of the image is shown. In the effect shown in FIG. 155, after shifting to "pseudo 2" as shown in FIG. 154 (g), the enemy character 9006 appears on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 155 (a)), and then continuously appears. Every time the eyes (for example, "2, 3, 3") are stopped and displayed, the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9006 (enemy attack effect) (FIGS. 155 (b) to (d)). (See), and subsequently, the icon stop fanning in which the display of the fanning watermelon image 9007 on the display device 1007 becomes larger and larger was performed (see FIGS. 155 (e) and (f)), and subsequently, the icon stop fanning was successful. Corresponding to, the enemy character 9006 collapses, and the "watermelon" icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 155 (g)), and subsequently, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification is displayed on the display device. In 1007, it is displayed smaller than the “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012 (see FIG. 155 (h)), and then shifts to “pseudo 3”.

In FIG. 156, after the effect shown in FIG. 155 is performed in "pseudo 2", the effect corresponding to the effect number "49" is performed in "pseudo 3" (see FIG. 138), which is displayed on the display device 1007. An example of the image is shown. In the effect shown in FIG. 156, after shifting to “pseudo 3”, an enemy character 9008 appears on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 156 (a)), and subsequently, a continuous roll (for example, “3.4. 4 ”) is stopped and displayed, the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9008 (enemy attack effect) (see FIGS. 156 (b) to (d)), and then the display device 1007. In response to the successful icon stop fanning, the icon stop fanning was performed (see FIGS. 156 (e) and (f)) in which the display of the fanning cherry image 9009 became larger and larger (see FIGS. 156 (e) and (f)). As it collapses, the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 156 (g)), and subsequently, the cherry image 9023 for pseudo-continuous step notification is displayed on the display device 1007 as the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013. It is displayed smaller than (see FIG. 156 (h)), and then shifts to super reach.

When the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the third notice effect, the third notice effect may be performed without fail even in the next pseudo-continuous stage. That is, when the "bell" icon is displayed in the effect ("pseudo 1") corresponding to the effect numbers "41" and "42", the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48" is displayed as "pseudo 2". You may make sure to execute any one of the effects. Further, when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the effect ("pseudo 2") corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48", it corresponds to the effect numbers "49" to "52" as "pseudo 3". You may make sure to execute any of the effects.

FIG. 157 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect corresponding to the effect number “72” (see FIG. 141). In the effect shown in FIG. 157, first, as the effect in "pseudo 1", the variation of the decorative symbol 9001 starts in the display device 1007 (see FIG. 157 (a)), and then "4" as the left decorative symbol 9001L. The symbols are stopped (see FIGS. 157 (b) and (c)), and then, as the right decorative symbol 9001R, the display of the "4" symbol becomes larger and larger, and 4 symbol tempai fanning is performed (see FIG. 157 (d)). Then, in response to the success of the 4 symbol tempai fanning, the background is displayed only when the 4 symbol tempai fanning is successful (background after the success of the 4 symbol tempai) (not shown), and the left decoration. The "4" symbol is displayed in large size as the symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R (see FIG. 157 (e)), followed by the reach of the intermediate decorative symbol 9001C in a horizontally rotated state (see FIG. 157 (f)). The "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed in large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 157 (g)), and subsequently, the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 1007 from the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011. Is also displayed small (see FIG. 157 (h)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2". It should be noted that the normal background is displayed on the display device 1007 before the background becomes the background after the success of the four symbol tempais (at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 9001).

In FIG. 158, after the effect shown in FIG. 157 is performed in “pseudo 1”, the effect corresponding to the effect number “73” is performed in “pseudo 2” (see FIG. 141), which is displayed on the display device 1007. An example of the image is shown. At the start of the effect shown in FIG. 158 (when shifting to "pseudo 2"), it is a specific background. The background may be the same background as the background after the success of the four symbols tempai, or may be a background different from the background after the success of the four symbols tempai. Then, the subsequent production is performed in a dedicated background state. The background in the dedicated background state may be the same background as the background after the success of the four symbols tempai, or may be a background different from the background after the success of the four symbols tempai, and may be the same background as the specific background. It may be a background different from the above specific background. In the dedicated background state, the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R are subjected to 4 symbol tempai fanning in which the "4" symbol fluctuates at high speed (see FIGS. 158 (a) and 158), and the "4" symbol is used. After the display disappears, the "watermelon" icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed in large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 158 (c)), and subsequently, the pseudo-continuous step notification watermelon image 9022 is displayed on the display device 1007 as the "watermelon" icon. It is displayed smaller than the confirmed image 9012 (see FIG. 158 (d)), and then shifts to "pseudo 3".

In FIG. 159, after the effect shown in FIG. 158 is performed in “pseudo 2”, the effect corresponding to the effect number “75” (see FIG. 141) is performed in “pseudo 3”, which is displayed on the display device 1007. An example of the image is shown. At the start time of the effect shown in FIG. 159 (when shifting to "pseudo 3"), it is the above-mentioned specific background. Then, the subsequent production is performed in the above-mentioned dedicated background state. In the dedicated background state, the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R are subjected to 4 symbol tempai fanning in which the "4" symbol fluctuates at high speed (see FIG. 159 (a)), followed by the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decoration. As the symbol 9001R, the "7" symbol fluctuates at high speed. The 7 symbol tempai fanning is performed (see FIG. 159 (b)), and then the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R "4" symbol fluctuate at high speed. 4 symbol tempai fanning is performed (see FIG. 159 (c)), followed by 7 symbol tempai fanning in which the "7" symbol fluctuates at high speed as the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R (Fig. 159 (d)). ), After the display of the "7" symbol disappears, the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 159 (e)), and subsequently, the cherry image for pseudo continuous step notification. The 9023 is displayed on the display device 1007 to be smaller than the “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 (see FIG. 159 (f)), and then shifts to super reach.

The mode of the 4 symbol tempai fanning to the 7 symbol tempai fanning is not particularly limited, and as described above, the "4" symbol to the "7" symbol may be changed at high speed, or "4". The symbol to the "7" symbol may be vibrated.

FIGS. 160 (a) and 160 (b) show an example of an image and a movable accessory 9041 displayed on the display device 1007 in the notice after the icon is stopped (see FIG. 144) corresponding to the effect number “91”. .. FIGS. 160 (c) and 160 (d) show an example of an image and a movable accessory 9041 displayed on the display device 1007 in the notice after the icon is stopped (see FIG. 144) corresponding to the effect number “92”. .. In the notice after the icon is stopped shown in FIGS. 160 (a) and 160 (b), after the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 (or the “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012) is displayed (see FIG. 160 (a)). , The movable accessory 9041 operates in the first aspect (see FIG. 160 (b)). In the notice after the icon is stopped shown in FIGS. 160 (c) and 160 (d), after the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012 (or "bell" icon confirmed image 9011) is displayed (see FIG. 160 (c)). , The movable accessory 9041 operates in the second aspect (see FIG. 160 (d)). The movable accessory 9041 is an accessory that imitates a predetermined character, and has a first state (stored state), a second state (a state in which the character has his arm lowered ... see FIG. 160 (b)), and a second state. State 3 (character raised arm ... Fig. 160
It is configured so that it can be displaced from (d)).

FIG. 161 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the notice after the icon is stopped (see FIG. 144) corresponding to the effect number “93”. In the notice after the icon is stopped shown in FIG. 161, the background image 9042 is displayed on the display device 1007 after the “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed (see FIG. 161 (a)) (see FIG. 161 (b)). ). After that, it develops into a predetermined super reach, and a battle between a friendly character (for example, the first friendly character 9002) and an enemy character 9043 is performed (see FIGS. 161 (c) to (e)), and the result of the jackpot determination is obtained. If it is a big hit, the decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 161 (f)).

As described above, a specific example of the jackpot notice effect has been described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 161. In this example, a case where a predetermined pattern is adopted as an icon such as the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011, the “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012, the “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013, and the like has been described. As the icon in this embodiment, it is possible to appropriately adopt an icon composed of characters, figures, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof and the like. For example, FIG. 162 (a) shows, as an example of the first specific icon, the first specific icon confirmed image 9014 composed of a symbol including the numbers or characters "7" and "PREMIUM". Further, for example, the character image "NEXT" may be adopted as an icon, and when "NEXT" is displayed, it may be developed to the next stage in the pseudo-ren.

Further, for example, instead of the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011, the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012, and the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013, the "X" icon as shown in FIGS. 162 (b) to 162 (d). The confirmed image 9051, the “Y” icon confirmed image 9052, and the “Z” icon confirmed image 9053 may be adopted. As described above, as the icon in this embodiment, it is possible to appropriately adopt a pattern in which a predetermined character (for example, an English word) is surrounded by a square. In this case, instead of the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, the pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022, and the pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023, the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061 and the pseudo continuous stage notification Y Image 9062 and Z image 9063 for pseudo-continuous step notification may be adopted (see FIGS. 162 (e) and 162 (f)). In FIG. 162 (e), the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061 and the pseudo continuous stage notification Y image 9062 are displayed brightly, while the pseudo continuous stage notification Z image 9063 is displayed dark. It is shown to be "pseudo 3". By displaying the “Z” icon confirmed image 9053 in this state, in FIG. 162 (e), the X image 9061 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the Y image 9062 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and Z for pseudo continuous stage notification. All images 9063 are displayed brightly. As a result, it will develop into super reach after that.

Further, in the above, an example in which the decorative symbol 9001 is displayed large (in the center of the display device 1007) and the decorative symbol 9001 is displayed small (in the lower right corner of the display device 1007) in the display device 1007 has been described. In this embodiment, the larger decorative symbol 9001 is not displayed, the smaller decorative symbol 9001 is not displayed, or both decorations are displayed while the icon is displayed and before and after the icon is displayed. It may be configured so that the symbol 9001 is not displayed. Further, when the icon is displayed, the symbol corresponding to the icon may be displayed as a part of the smaller decorative symbol 9001 (for example, the medium decorative symbol 9001C), or the part thereof. (For example, the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R may be stopped and displayed), or the left decorative symbol 9001L, the middle decorative symbol 9001C, and the right may be displayed in a variable manner. The decorative design 9001R may be left in a variable display.

<Big hit notice production (common to each production stage)>
For the first preview effect, the second advance notice effect, the third advance notice effect, and the fourth advance notice effect described above, refer to the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)). ), It can occur only in the first staging stage. On the other hand, the sixth advance notice effect and the seventh advance notice effect described below may occur in any of the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage. Further, while the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect are the effects that can occur during the pseudo-continuous effect, the sixth notice effect to the seventh notice effect occur. If so, the pseudo-ream effect does not occur. In the following, after explaining the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in each effect stage, the sixth advance notice effect and the seventh advance notice effect will be described.

<Variable pattern of decorative pattern>
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first staging stage. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the second staging stage. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the third staging stage.

FIG. 163 (a) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 4 seconds in the first staging stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of the fluctuation to the time when 2 seconds have passed, then decelerate over 1 second, stop for 1 second, and then stop. The design will be confirmed.

FIG. 163 (b) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 8 seconds in the first staging stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3.5 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 4 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 163 (c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 13 seconds in the first staging stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 7 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 10.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 8.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 163 (d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds in the first staging stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 14.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 12.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 164 (a) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 4 seconds in the second staging stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 164 (b) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 8 seconds in the second staging stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 7 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 164 (c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 13 seconds in the second staging stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 12 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 164 (d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds in the second staging stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 16 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 165 (a) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 4 seconds in the third staging stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 2.5 seconds have elapsed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 165 (b) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 8 seconds in the third staging stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 4.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 6.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 5.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 1 second, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 165 (c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 13 seconds in the third staging stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 7.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 9.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 165 (d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds in the third staging stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 15.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 13.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

The variation patterns of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 163 to 165 are default variation patterns, and in this embodiment, except for cases described separately (for example, FIG. 137, FIG. 140, FIG. 143, FIG. 168, etc.), The decorative pattern basically fluctuates according to the above fluctuation pattern.

<6th notice production>
FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a flow of the sixth notice effect. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a time chart of the sixth notice effect. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the relationship between the sixth notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern.

The sixth preview effect shown in FIGS. 166 and 167 occurs when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)). It is a production to get. In the sixth notice production, the first special zone rushing is performed, and if the rushing is successful, the first special zone is rushed. The first special zone is a special zone in the pre-stage that develops into the fourth specific super reach.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number "101" is an effect that fades out after the first sign (effect for the first stage) is generated. In the production corresponding to the production number "102", after the first sign (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second sign (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then fade out. It is a production. In the production corresponding to the production number "103", after the first sign (effect for the first stage) is generated, the second sign (effect for the second stage) is generated, and further, the third sign is generated. It is a production in which a sign of a bullet (effect for the third stage) occurs, and then it fades out.

In the production corresponding to the production number "104", after the first sign (effect for the first stage) is generated, the second sign (effect for the second stage) is generated, and further, the third sign is generated. A sign of a bullet (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the first special zone rushing fails. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display device 1007. In the production corresponding to the production number "105", after the first sign (effect for the first stage) is generated, the second sign (effect for the second stage) is generated, and further, the third sign is generated. A sign of a bullet (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image corresponding to the success of the first special zone rushing is displayed. This is an effect of being displayed on the display device 1007, displaying an image related to the title of the first special zone on the display device 1007, and then entering the first special zone. When the first special zone is completed, the process shifts to the fourth specific super reach.

In the production corresponding to the production number "106", the third sign (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then the image related to the first special zone rushing fan is displayed on the display device 1007, and then. This is an effect in which an image corresponding to the failure to enter the first special zone is displayed on the display device 1007. In the production corresponding to the production number "107", the third sign (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then the image related to the first special zone entry fanning is displayed on the display device 1007, and the first An image corresponding to the success of the special zone entry is displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the title of the first special zone is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the effect of entering the first special zone is achieved. When the first special zone is completed, the process shifts to the fourth specific super reach.

In the first special zone, switching is performed between the screen corresponding to the first character and the screen corresponding to the second character, and the decorative symbol is tempered on either screen. After that, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and develops into the fourth specific super reach, and in the fourth specific super reach, an effect corresponding to the character corresponding to the screen on which the tempai is generated is performed. In addition, in the first sign, the second sign, or the third sign, instead of (or in addition to) generating a predetermined effect, an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed. It may be displayed on the display device 1007. In this case, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "106" and "107", the first special zone rushing is suddenly generated without going through the sign. When the look-ahead effect is performed after the game ball is won in the first start opening 1120 and before the special symbol change related to the start prize is started (when the sixth notice effect is generated via the look-ahead effect). , In the sixth notice effect that occurs at the time of the special symbol change, the sign may always be passed. On the other hand, when the sixth notice effect is generated without going through the look-ahead effect, the sign may or may not be passed in the sixth notice effect generated at the time of the special symbol change.

FIG. 168 (a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “104” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "104" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 168 (a), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 15 seconds have elapsed, and then decelerate over 1 second. Then, it stops for 1 second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 168 (b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “105” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 168 (b), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each exhibit the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to at least entering the first special zone.

FIG. 168 (c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “106” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "106" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 168 (c), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 15 seconds have elapsed, and then decelerate over 1 second. Then, it stops for 1 second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 168 (d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “107” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 168 (d), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each exhibit the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to at least entering the first special zone.

Here, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “104” and “106”, the image related to the first special zone rushing fan is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time when 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, in the default fluctuation pattern (see FIGS. 163 (d) and 165 (d)) in the first effect stage and the third effect stage, the left decorative symbol is decelerated and stopped at the timing. When the decorative symbol is stopped, a predetermined stop sound (for example, a sound that is determined to be lost) is output from the speaker 1032, but if the first special zone rushing is performed. In addition, when the stop sound is generated, there is a possibility that the player may grasp the result of the fanning during the fanning of entering the first special zone. In view of this point, when the production corresponding to the production numbers "104" to "106" is performed, a dedicated fluctuation pattern (first special zone entry fanning) as shown in FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (c) is performed. The decorative pattern is changed by a variable pattern) in which the decorative pattern stops after the end. This makes it possible to prevent the success or failure of the first special zone rushing fan from being spoiled through the stop sound of the decorative pattern. If the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the stop sound of the decorative symbol can be a sound peculiar to the loss (a sound that can occur only in the case of a loss).

Such a variation pattern shown in FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (c) is adopted when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the first effect stage or the third effect stage. When the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the second effect stage, the default variation pattern (FIG. 164 (d)) is used instead of the variation pattern shown in FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (c). (See) may be used to change the decorative pattern. In the variation pattern shown in FIG. 164 (d), the timing at which the decorative symbol is decelerated and stopped is delayed. Therefore, when the effect corresponding to the effect numbers “104” and “106” is performed, the variation pattern is used. Even if the decorative pattern is changed, there is no concern about spoilers as described above. However, even when the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" is performed on the second effect stage, the decorative pattern may be changed by the variation pattern shown in FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (c).

It should be noted that the variation pattern depends on whether the production corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" is performed on the first production stage and the production corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" is performed on the third production stage. May be different. For example, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the third effect stage, each decorative symbol is changed at a higher speed than the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (c). The time may be increased by a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and the deceleration time may be shortened by a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Further, in one of the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage (for example, the second production stage), the sixth preview production is not performed while the pre-reading production is being executed. It may be configured as. In this case, in the production stages other than the one production stage (for example, the first production stage and the third production stage), the sixth preview effect may be performed even during the execution of the look-ahead effect. ..

<7th notice production>
FIG. 169 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of the seventh notice effect. FIG. 169 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the seventh notice effect.

The seventh notice effect shown in FIG. 169 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)). be. In the 7th notice production, the second special zone rushing is performed, and if the rushing is successful, the second special zone is rushed. The second special zone is a special zone in the pre-stage that develops into the fifth specific super reach.

Specifically, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "121", after the screen becomes dark (the screen freezes) as if the display device 1007 is turned off, the freeze is restored and the second special zone is entered. The image related to the fanning is displayed on the display device 1007, the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, the operation of the effect button 1054 is accepted, and then the image corresponding to the failure of the second special zone entry fanning is displayed on the display device. This is the effect displayed on 1007. After that, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is an image related to the second special zone rushing after returning from the freeze after the screen becomes dark (the screen freezes) as if the display device 1007 was turned off. Is displayed on the display device 1007, the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, the operation of the effect button 1054 is accepted, and then the image corresponding to the success of the second special zone rush fan (second special zone rush fan). The success image) is displayed on the display device 1007. When the player enters the second special zone, the display device 1007 displays the appearance of destroying the predetermined enemy character after the appearance of the predetermined ally character. After that, it develops into the 5th specific super reach, and in the 5th specific super reach, a production corresponding to the final battle with the enemy character is performed. The fifth specific super reach is the reach with the highest expectation of a big hit (except for the first specific super reach where the big hit is confirmed).

Two timings are provided as the timings at which the screen freeze may occur. Specifically, there are a case where the screen freezes 6 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1) and a case where the screen freezes 12 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 2). Has been done. The screen freeze occurs at one of these two timings. At timing 2, all the effects following the freeze occur with a delay of 6 seconds as compared with timing 1.

Further, while the button image is being displayed, a predetermined button effective time is set. If the effect button 1054 is operated during the button effective time, when the effect button 1054 is operated (even if the button effective time has not expired, immediately after the operation), the second special zone is entered. A production corresponding to failure or success is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 1054 is not operated during the button valid time, the failure or success of entering the second special zone occurs at the end of the button valid time (at the moment when the button valid time ends). The corresponding production is performed.

Although not shown, the effect corresponding to the success of the second special zone rushing (successful production of the second special zone rushing) is related to the second special zone rushing success image (for example, the title of the second special zone). In addition to the effect of displaying an image and an image related to a predetermined icon), an effect of emitting a predetermined decorative lamp (logo lamp) is performed. The logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the logo cover. The logo cover is provided at a predetermined position (for example, the upper side of the display device 1007) of the game board unit 1010, and is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like). Further, the logo cover is decorated in the shape of characters (for example, characters displayed as icons) indicating a logo or the like according to the model. A full-color LED is adopted for the logo lamp, and it is possible to emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green, and the effect color of the logo cover can be changed.

It should be noted that the successful effect of entering the second special zone (for example, light emission of the logo lamp) is performed for a predetermined time (3 seconds) regardless of whether or not the effect button 1054 is operated or the operation timing. Even if the effect button 1054 is operated during the button effective time, the time is not extended. Since the timing of entering the second special zone (the timing at which a predetermined ally character appears) is fixed (30 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the above timing 1, and the decorative symbol in the above timing 2). If the effect button 1054 is operated during the button valid time (36 seconds after the start of fluctuation), there is a gap between the end point of the successful effect of entering the second special zone and the timing of entering the second special zone. However, the gap time is compensated for by displaying the predetermined icon in a shaken state.

<Stage change>
FIG. 170A is a diagram showing a flow of a stage change notice effect. FIG. 170B is a diagram showing a time chart of the stage change notice effect. FIG. 170 (c) is a diagram showing a state of the character lamp before and after the stage change occurs.

In this embodiment, basically, in each effect stage (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage), the special symbol change is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (20 times). Stay. After shifting to one production stage, if the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (20 times), the production stage may be transferred to another production stage. On the other hand, when the 7th notice effect occurs, even if the number of special symbol changes performed after shifting to one effect stage does not reach the predetermined number (20 times), it is always on the effect stage. A migration will occur.

In this embodiment, such a transition of the staging stage is also referred to as a “stage change”. The stage after the transition is randomly determined by lottery, but the stage after the transition may be the same as the stage before the transition. The transition of the staging stage (stage change) is a concept that includes such cases.

When the stage change is performed, the stage change notice effect shown in FIG. 170 is performed. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (stage change notice effect), after the background transition image corresponding to the effect stage after the transition is displayed on the display device 1007, an image showing the name of the effect stage after the transition is displayed. It is an effect that the display content of the counter image on the display device 1007 is reset (recovered) while being displayed on the display device 1007.

As the background transition image, a first background transition image, a second background transition image, and a third background transition image are provided. The first background transition image is an image suggesting the first effect stage, and when the effect stage after the transition is the first effect stage, the first background transition image is displayed. The second background transition image is an image suggesting a second staging stage, and when the staging stage after the transition is the second staging stage, the second background transition image is displayed. The third background transition image is an image suggesting a third effect stage, and when the effect stage after the transition is the third effect stage, the third background transition image is displayed.

The counter image is an image corresponding to the number of special symbol changes performed after the stage change occurs. When a stage change occurs, "0/20" is displayed as a counter image after reset. The number (20) in the denominator indicates the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. The numerator numbers indicate the number of special symbol changes made after the stage change occurred. The counter image is basically always (some effects are displayed) at a predetermined position of the display device 1007 while staying at each effect stage (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage). It is displayed (except while it is being done). As the number of special symbol changes performed after the stage change occurs, the counter image changes to "1/20", "2/20" ... "19/20".

Here, the counter image (0/20) at the time of stage change is displayed in various colors (white, blue, green, purple, red, rainbow, or gold). In this embodiment, as described in the second pachinko gaming machine, a plurality of setting values (six stages of "1" to "6") in which various data related to the pachinko game are different from each other are provided. White, blue, green, purple, red, and rainbow colors correspond to the set values of "1" to "6", respectively, and the color of the counter image (0/20) displayed when a stage change occurs. Is the color corresponding to the set value. As a result, the counter image (0/20) suggests the set value.

The method of suggesting the set value by the counter image is not limited to this example, and for example, a counter image including a number (“1” to “6”) corresponding to the set value may be displayed. For example, when the set value is "6", the counter image "0/66" may be displayed. In this regard, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol changes related to the stage change occurrence condition is a specified value (20 times), but the number of special symbol changes may be determined by lottery. good. On top of that, for example, when the set value is "6", it is possible to configure it so that "66" is relatively easily determined as the number of times of the special symbol change.

Further, when the counter image (0/20) at the time of the stage change is displayed in gold, it is confirmed that the second special zone is entered. In this regard, as the seventh notice effect, an effect corresponding to the effect number "121" and an effect corresponding to the effect number "122" are provided. Regardless of which of these effects occurs, a stage change will always occur. On top of that, the counter image (0/20) at the time of the stage change can be displayed in gold only when the stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "122". It is configured as follows.

Two timings are provided as the start timing of the stage change notice effect. Specifically, when the background transition image is displayed from the beginning of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1), and when the background transition image is displayed 6 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 2). And are provided. The stage change notice effect occurs at one of these two timings. At timing 2, all the effects are delayed by 6 seconds as compared with timing 1.

When a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh notice effect, the timing at which the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed is the timing at which the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" is performed. It corresponds to. That is, when a stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" (timing 1) or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (timing 1), the effect number "131" The production corresponding to (timing 1) is performed. On the other hand, if a stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" (timing 2) or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (timing 2), the effect number "131" The production corresponding to (timing 2) is performed.

On the other hand, when the stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol changes reaching a predetermined number (20 times), the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (timing 1) is basically produced. Will be done. In this case, the stage change notice effect will be performed immediately after the start of the change of the decorative pattern. Exceptionally, when the 7th notice effect occurs in the special symbol change (game that reaches the specified number) in which the stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol changes reaching the predetermined number (20 times). Is to produce an effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (timing 2). That is, the following conditions (I) and (II) are provided as the conditions for generating the stage change, and if both conditions are satisfied in the same special symbol change, 6 seconds from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. From the lapse of time, the stage change notice production will be performed.

Condition (I): The number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one staging stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times) Condition (II): The seventh notice staging occurs (staging number " The production corresponding to "121" or "122" is selected)

The fact that the number of special symbol changes has reached the predetermined number of times (20 times) can be grasped by the player through the counter image, but when the number of special symbol changes reaches the predetermined number of times (20 times), It is highly probable that the player is aware that a stage change will occur. In this respect, by configuring as described above, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort that the stage change notice effect is not performed immediately after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in the game in which the specified number is reached. In this case, the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" is performed at the timing 2. As a result, the player can be expected to expect the 7th notice effect to occur (entering the 2nd special zone) after the stage change notice effect is performed.

Further, as described above, the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage are associated with the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character, respectively. .. Although not shown, the game board unit 1010 is provided with a first character lamp, a second character lamp, and a third character lamp. The first character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first character decoration unit, and the second character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second character decoration unit. The third character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third character decoration portion.

The first character decoration unit is provided at a first predetermined location (for example, the right side of the display device 1007) of the game board unit 1010, and the second character decoration unit is a second predetermined location (for example, the display device) of the game board unit 1010. The third character decoration unit is provided on the upper left side of 1007), and is provided on the third predetermined position (for example, the lower left side of the display device 1007) of the game board unit 1010. The 1st character decoration part, the 2nd character decoration part, and the 3rd character decoration part are decorated in the shape of the 1st ally character, the 2nd ally character, and the 3rd ally character, respectively. .. Further, the first character decoration part, the second character decoration part, and the third character decoration part are each formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like). A full-color LED is adopted for each of the first character lamp, the second character lamp, and the third character lamp, and it is possible to emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green. As a result, the effect colors of the first character decoration unit, the second character decoration unit, and the third character decoration unit can be changed.

In this embodiment, the first character lamp is basically on and the second character lamp and the third character lamp are off while staying in the first production stage. While staying at the second production stage, the second character lamp is basically on, and the first character lamp and the third character lamp are off. While staying at the third production stage, the third character lamp is basically on, and the first character lamp and the second character lamp are off. Although not shown, in the stage change notice effect, any one of the first character lamp, the second character lamp, and the third character lamp (the character lamp corresponding to the effect stage after the transition) blinks.

Specifically, when the effect stage after the transition is the first effect stage, the first character lamp blinks, and when the effect stage after the transition is the second effect stage, the second character lamp blinks. However, if the staging stage after the transition is the third staging stage, the third character lamp blinks. Such blinking of the character lamp is performed for 1.5 seconds, and the blinking period coincides with the display period of the background transition image. That is, the first character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds while the first background transition image is displayed, and the second character lamp blinks while the second background transition image is displayed. It blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the third background transition image is displayed, the third character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds.

FIG. 170 (c) shows the state of each character lamp before and after the transition from the first staging stage to the second staging stage. In the previous game of the game in which the specified number is reached, the first character lamp is lit, and the second character lamp and the third character lamp are turned off. When the game for reaching the specified number starts, the first character lamp switches from the lit state to the extinguished state, the second character lamp switches from the extinguished state to the blinking state, and the third character lamp remains in the extinguished state. After that, the second character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds and then turns on. After that, the lighting state of the second character lamp continues until the next stage change notice effect occurs, and the lighting state of the first character lamp and the third character lamp continues.

After the stage change notice production is performed, the background shifts to the background corresponding to the production stage after the transition (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage). As described above, after the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" is performed, the normal background is restored. Further, after the production in the fifth specific super reach, which is transferred via the production corresponding to the production number "122", is completed, the normal background is restored. The normal background is a background corresponding to the post-transition staging stage (rather than the pre-shift staging stage).

In the above, it has been described that the above conditions (I) and (II) are provided as the conditions for generating the stage change. Here, regarding the above condition (I), the number of times the special symbol changes is changed when the change display (variation display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120) is performed in the first special symbol display unit 1163. However, it is not counted when the variation display on the second special symbol display unit 1164 (variation display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B) is performed. Therefore, even if the player plays the game by right-handed in the normal game state and the variation display on the second special symbol display unit 1164 is repeatedly performed, the count is not performed, and in this case, the stage change. Will never be done. The count is performed when the special symbol change starts.

Further, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, there is a possibility that the stage change is performed other than the case where the above condition (I) or (II) is satisfied. Specifically, as an effect performed when a special symbol change is performed in a situation where the number of special symbol changes performed after shifting to one effect stage has not reached a predetermined number (20 times). , When a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the fifth specific super reach) occurs, a lottery for shifting to the staging stage before reaching the specified number is performed. Then, the transition of the production stage occurs on condition that the lottery for transition to the production stage before reaching the specified number is won.

Further, even if the number of special symbol changes performed after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times), the stage change may not be performed. Specifically, when a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the fifth specific super reach) occurs in a game that reaches the specified number, a lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached is performed. When the specified number is reached If the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage is not won, the production stage is transferred in the game in which the specified number is reached. On the other hand, if the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached is won, the transition of the production stage does not occur in the game that reaches the specified number, and the transition of the production stage occurs in the next special symbol change of the game that reaches the specified number. Occurs.

<Stage change section hold ball>
FIGS. 171 to 173 are diagrams for explaining the stage change section reserved ball.

Although the details will be described later, when the game ball wins the first starting port 1120, the sub control circuit 1300 selects the sub fluctuation pattern by lottery. Here, the result of the lottery (sub-variation pattern selection lottery) may differ depending on the production stage staying during the special symbol change related to the first start opening prize, but the first start opening prize occurs. If a stage change occurs between the first stage and the special symbol change related to the first start opening prize, the special symbol change (stage change game) in which the stage change is performed starts in the production stage after the transition. Not decided until. Therefore, for such a first start opening prize, the sub-variation pattern cannot be selected at least until the stage change game is started. The lottery related to the look-ahead effect is performed based on the sub-variation pattern, but if the sub-variation pattern is not selected, the lottery related to the look-ahead effect cannot be performed.

In view of this point, in this embodiment, the concept of "stage change section reserved ball" is provided. The stage change section hold ball is a hold ball corresponding to the first start opening prize related to the stage change game, and a special symbol change related to the stage change game after the first start opening prize related to the stage change game occurs. It refers to the reserved ball corresponding to the first starting opening prize that occurred before the start. It is said that the look-ahead effect is not performed for such a stage change section reserved ball. Of the reserved balls in the stage change section, the reserved balls corresponding to the first start opening prize related to the stage change game are also particularly referred to as "the reserved balls in the stage change section".

FIG. 171 (a) shows a state in which the 16th special symbol change is performed after the transition to the current production stage and a state in which the reserved ball does not exist. FIG. 171 (b) shows a state in which four game balls have won a prize in the first starting port 1120 while the 16th special symbol change is being performed after the state shown in FIG. 171 (a). ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls is the 17th to 20th special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. FIG. 171 (c) shows a state in which the 17th special symbol change is started after shifting to the current staging stage after the state shown in FIG. 171 (b). In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to third reserved balls is the 18th to 20th special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. There is no fourth reserved ball.

FIG. 171 (d) shows a state in which one game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 1120 while the 17th special symbol change is being performed after the state shown in FIG. 171 (c). ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol change, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol change is performed in the effect stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. As a result, the fourth reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball (stage change section reserved ball), and the look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the fourth reserved ball.

FIG. 171 (e) shows a state in which the 18th special symbol change is started after shifting to the current staging stage after the state shown in FIG. 171 (d). In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the 1st to 2nd reserved balls becomes the 19th to 20th special symbol fluctuations after shifting to the current production stage, and corresponds to the 3rd reserved ball. The special symbol change to be performed is the first special symbol change after the transition to the next production stage. There is no fourth reserved ball.

FIG. 172 (a) shows a state in which one game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 1120 while the 18th special symbol change is being performed after the state shown in FIG. 171 (e). ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball becomes the second special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. The fourth reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the look-ahead effect cannot be performed on the fourth reserved ball.

In FIG. 172 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 172 (a), the 18th to 20th special symbol changes are performed, during which two game balls win a prize in the first starting port 1120, and then. It shows the state in which the first special symbol change is performed after the stage change occurs and the stage shifts to the next production stage. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to third reserved balls is the second to fourth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The 1st to 3rd reserved balls are stage change section reserved balls, and the 1st to 3rd reserved balls cannot be pre-read. There is no fourth reserved ball.

FIG. 172 (c) shows a state in which one game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 1120 while the first special symbol change is being performed after the state shown in FIG. 172 (b). ing. In this state, the special symbol change corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the fifth special symbol change after the stage change occurs. The fourth reserved ball is a reserved ball corresponding to the first start opening winning that occurs after the special symbol change corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section (special symbol change related to the stage change game) has started. Therefore, the fourth reserved ball is not a stage change section reserved ball, and it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect for the fourth reserved ball.

In FIG. 172 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 172 (c), the first and second special symbol changes are performed after the stage change occurs, and during that time, two games are played in the first starting port 1120. It shows the state where the ball wins a prize and then the third special symbol change is performed after the stage change occurs. In this state, the special symbol change corresponding to the first reserved ball is the fourth special symbol change after the stage change occurs. The first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the look-ahead effect cannot be performed on the first reserved ball. On the other hand, the special symbol variation corresponding to the second to fourth reserved balls is the fifth to seventh special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The 2nd to 4th reserved balls are reserved corresponding to the first start opening prize that occurs after the special symbol change corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section (special symbol change related to the stage change game) has started. It is a sphere. Therefore, the second to fourth reserved balls are not stage change section reserved balls, and the second to fourth reserved balls can be pre-read.

In FIG. 173 (a), after the 20th special symbol change is started after the transition to the current production stage in the absence of the reserved ball, while the 20th special symbol change is being performed. , Shows a state in which four game balls have won a prize in the first starting port 1120. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls is the 21st to 24th special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol change, a stage change occurs, and the 21st to 24th special symbol changes are performed in the effect stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls is the first to fourth special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. As a result, the 1st to 4th reserved balls are stage change section reserved balls, and the look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the 1st to 4th reserved balls.

In FIG. 173 (b), after the 20th special symbol change is started after the transition to the current production stage in the absence of the reserved ball, while the 20th special symbol change is being performed. , A state in which one game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 1120 is shown. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol change, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol change is performed in the effect stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball becomes the first special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. As a result, the first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the look-ahead effect cannot be performed for the first reserved ball. There are no second to fourth reserved balls.

In FIG. 173 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 173 (b), the 20th special symbol change is performed, then a stage change occurs, and the first special after shifting to the next production stage. It shows a state in which four game balls have won a prize in the first starting port 1120 while the symbol change is being performed. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls is the second to fifth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The 1st to 4th reserved balls are reserved corresponding to the first start opening prize that occurs after the special symbol change corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section (special symbol change related to the stage change game) has started. It is a sphere. Therefore, the 1st to 4th reserved balls are not stage change section reserved balls, and the 1st to 4th reserved balls can be pre-read.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 173 (a), the number of special symbol fluctuations for which the look-ahead effect cannot be performed is 4, whereas the examples shown in FIGS. 173 (b) and (c) are shown. Then, the number of times of special symbol change for which the look-ahead effect cannot be performed is one. As described above, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol fluctuations for which the look-ahead effect cannot be performed is not fixed uniformly, but the timing of the stage change occurrence and the timing of winning the game ball to the first starting port 1120. The number of times is changed according to the context of.

<Processing at the time of winning the first starting port>
FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing a first starting port winning process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing a stage change section determination process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 176 and 177 are diagrams for explaining the look-ahead effect.

The process at the time of winning the first start port shown in FIG. 174 is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) by the sub control circuit 1300 when the game ball wins the first start port 1120. Is. The sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 1120 by receiving the winning command of the first starting port winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

In the first start opening winning process, the sub CPU 1301 first executes the stage change section determination process (step S9001). Hereinafter, the stage change section determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 175.

In the stage change section determination process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the reserved ball in the stage change section exists in the reserved balls for the upper limit of four times held (step S9151). As described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, the reserved ball in the stage change section is a reserved ball corresponding to the first starting opening winning prize in the stage change game (special symbol change in which the stage change is performed). In the process of step S9151, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the information indicating the stage change section the reserved ball (stage change section the reserved ball information) is stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 1303.

Specifically, as described above, the work RAM 1303 has the first sub-holding area (0), the first sub-holding area (1), the first sub-holding area (2), the first sub-holding area (3), and the work RAM 1303. , The first sub-holding area (4) is provided. Information corresponding to the current special symbol change (the change) is stored in the first sub-holding area (0), and is held in the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4). Information corresponding to the four special symbol changes is stored. That is, as described above, the first sub-holding area (0) and the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4) are the first special symbol start storage areas provided in the main RAM 1203, respectively. It corresponds to (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The winning command for winning the first starting port, which is transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination and information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. By receiving the winning command of the first starting opening winning, the sub CPU 1301 stores the information corresponding to these information in the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning.

Further, when the stage change is performed in one special symbol change, the sub CPU 1301 stores the stage change section hold ball information in the first sub hold area corresponding to the special symbol change (see step S9155). In the process of step S9151, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the stage change section said holding ball information is stored in any of the first sub holding area (1) to the first sub holding area (3). When one special symbol change ends and the next special symbol change starts, the sub CPU 1301 stores the information stored in the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4). The first sub-holding area (0) and the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (3) are shifted, respectively. At that time, when the stage change section said holding ball information is stored in the first sub-holding area (1), the sub CPU 1301 transfers information from the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (0). With the transfer of, the stage change section the reserved ball information is deleted. Therefore, the situation in which the reserved ball information in the stage change section is stored in the first sub-reserved area (0) does not occur.

In step S9151, when it is determined that the reserved ball in the stage change section exists among the reserved balls for the upper limit of 4 times held, the sub CPU 1301 holds the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time in the stage change section. It is specified as a sphere (step S9152). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information (stage change section hold ball information) indicating that the ball is a stage change section hold ball in the first sub hold area corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. As a result, for example, in a situation where the stage change section the reserved ball information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (3), when the first start opening winning corresponding to the fourth reserved ball occurs, The stage change section hold ball information is stored in the first sub hold area (4) (see FIG. 172 (a)).

In step S9151, when it is determined that the reserved ball in the stage change section does not exist in the reserved balls for the upper limit of 4 times held, the sub CPU 1301 shifts to the current production stage and then counts the special symbol change. It is determined whether or not the number of times (the number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift) reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times) in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time (step S9153). The number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift is stored in the work RAM 1303, and the value is updated every time a special symbol fluctuation is performed.

If it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition does not reach the predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first start opening prize this time, the sub CPU 1301 is special corresponding to the first start opening prize this time. It is determined whether or not the seventh notice effect occurs in the symbol variation (step S9154). In this process, in the sub CPU 1301, the variation pattern (main variation pattern) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time is the seventh notice effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122"). Judge whether or not the fluctuation pattern corresponds to. Since the winning command for the first starting port winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 contains information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 is generated by receiving the winning command for the first starting opening winning. Can recognize the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. In addition, the variation pattern includes information corresponding to the effect performed during the special symbol variation. Based on the information, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the seventh notice effect is performed during the special symbol change.

In step S9153, when it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first start opening prize, or corresponding to the current first start opening winning. When it is determined that the seventh notice effect is generated in the special symbol change, the sub CPU 1301 specifies the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time as the reserved ball in the stage change section (step S9155). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores the stage change section holding ball information in the first sub holding area corresponding to the first winning opening winning this time. As a result, for example, when the special symbol change corresponding to the first start opening winning (corresponding to the fourth reserved ball) is the 21st special symbol change after shifting to the current production stage. Will store the stage change section holding ball information in the first sub-holding area (4) (see FIG. 171 (d)). Further, although not shown, for example, when the 7th notice effect occurs during the special symbol change corresponding to the 1st start opening winning (corresponding to the 4th holding ball), the 1st sub-holding area. Stage change section The reserved ball information is stored in (4).

Although not shown, similarly, a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) will occur during the special symbol change corresponding to the 1st start opening winning. Further, when the lottery for shifting to the stage before reaching the specified number is won, the stage change section may store the reserved ball information in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first winning opening winning this time. In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first start opening prize this time, the number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times), and a specific super reach (for example, the fifth specification) is performed during the special symbol fluctuation. (Any super reach except super reach) will occur, and if the specified number is reached and the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage is not won, the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first start opening prize will be entered. , Stage change section The reserved ball information may be stored. On the other hand, in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time, the number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times), and a specific super reach (for example, the fifth specific) is performed during the special symbol fluctuation. (Any super reach except super reach) will occur, and if you win the stage transition hold lottery when the specified number is reached, the stage will be in the first sub hold area corresponding to the next first start opening prize. Change section The reserved ball information may be stored.

After executing the process of step S9152 or step S9155, or when it is determined in step S9153 that the seventh notice effect does not occur in the special symbol change corresponding to the first start opening winning this time, the sub CPU 1301 performs this subroutine. finish.

As described above, the stage change section determination process performed in step S9101 of FIG. 174 has been described with reference to FIG. 175. The explanation is returned to FIG. 174.

After executing the process of step S9101, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time is a stage change section reserved ball (including the stage change section reserved ball) (step). S9102). When it is determined that the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning is the stage change section reserved ball, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved ball related to the first starting opening winning this time is not the holding ball in the stage change section, the sub CPU 1301 has a fixed value of the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol change corresponding to the current first starting opening winning. It is determined whether or not it corresponds (step S9103). Although not shown, in this embodiment, as a result of the jackpot determination relating to the first special symbol, it is relatively advantageous to the first jackpot (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds or a time-saving jackpot) that is relatively advantageous to the player. It is also possible to provide a disadvantageous second big hit (for example, a big hit with a small number of rounds or a short-time non-big hit). On top of that, the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) will be selected in the case of the first jackpot and the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) will be selected in the case of the second jackpot. Is the same, the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (indefinite jackpot) is selected when the first jackpot is reached and the predetermined fluctuation pattern (indefinite jackpot) is selected when the second jackpot is reached. It may be configured to be different from the probability. In this case, in the predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) and the predetermined fluctuation pattern (indefinite jackpot), the special symbol fluctuation may be performed with the same fluctuation pattern. In the process of step S9103, the sub CPU 1301 has a variation pattern (variation pattern corresponding to a fixed value) other than a predetermined variation pattern (indefinite jackpot) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. Judge whether or not. When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first start opening winning is not the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fixed value, the sub-CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening prize this time is the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fixed value, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the timing when the first start opening prize is generated this time is set. It is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined time (for example, a time corresponding to 41 frames) after the start of the special symbol change in which the stage change is performed (step S9104). When it is determined that the timing at which the first start opening winning is generated is within a predetermined time from the start of the special symbol change in which the stage change is performed, the sub-CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing at which the first start opening prize is generated is not within a predetermined time from the start of the special symbol change in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 1301 performs the sub change pattern (second half) lottery process. Execute (step S9105). The sub-variation pattern is composed of the first half portion and the second half portion, and the main fluctuation pattern (variation pattern of the special symbol) is also composed of the first half portion and the second half portion. In the process of step S9105, the sub CPU 1301 has the main variation pattern information (information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol) included in the winning command of the first starting port winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, and the current effect. The content of the latter half of the sub-variation pattern is determined by performing a lottery based on a random number value based on the stage.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 executes a sub fluctuation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9106). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random number value, and based on the sub fluctuation pattern (second half) determined in step S9105, the main fluctuation pattern, and the current staging stage, the first half portion of the sub fluctuation pattern. Determine the content. Information indicating the current staging stage is stored in the staging stage flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303, and the sub CPU 1301 refers to the staging stage flag storage area to store the current staging stage. Can be recognized.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is in progress (step S9107). When it is determined that the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the result of the second special lottery corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol is a loss or a small hit (step S9108). ). When it is determined that the result of the second special lottery is not a loss or a small hit (a big hit), the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. In this embodiment, as in the case of the second pachinko gaming machine, a method (simultaneous fluctuation type) capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol is adopted. Therefore, it is assumed that a big hit related to the second special symbol suddenly occurs, but by executing the processes of steps S9107 and S9108, unintended playability may occur even in such a situation. There is no such thing.

If it is determined in step S9107 that the variation display of the second special symbol is not in progress, or if it is determined in step S9108 that the result of the second special lottery is a loss or a small hit (not a big hit), the sub CPU 1301 , The look-ahead staging lottery process is executed (step S9109). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random number value, and based on the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106, regarding the current first start opening winning (for the sub-variation pattern). ) It is determined whether or not to generate the look-ahead effect, and when the look-ahead effect is generated, the content of the look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect pattern shown in FIG. 183) is determined (step S9109).

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect is generated for the first start opening winning this time based on the result of the look-ahead effect lottery process in step S9109 (step S9110). When it is determined that the look-ahead effect will occur for the first start opening winning this time, the sub CPU 1301 sets the look-ahead flag to ON (step S9111). The look-ahead flag is a flag indicating that a look-ahead effect is generated for one first start opening prize, and is set to off when the special symbol change corresponding to the first start opening winning is started. This suggests the result of the first special lottery related to the first starting opening prize between the occurrence of the first starting opening winning and the start of the special symbol change corresponding to the first starting opening winning. The effect (look-ahead effect) will be performed.

When it is determined in step S9111 that the look-ahead effect does not occur for the first start opening winning this time, or after the process of step S9111 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

The processing of steps S9109 to S9111 may be configured as follows. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect does not occur for the first start opening winning this time, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the reserved ball related to the first starting opening winning this time is a reserved ball capable of performing the look-ahead effect. do. The reserved ball on which the look-ahead effect can be performed is a specific sub-variation pattern (for example, the sub-variation patterns “1” to “20” shown in FIG. 182), and is based on the main variation pattern corresponding to a fixed value. It is a reserved ball that is produced by the determined sub-variation pattern. When it is determined that the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time is a reserved ball capable of performing the look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 1301 reads ahead to the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning. Possible information (information indicating that the look-ahead effect can be performed) is stored. When it is determined that the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time is a reserved ball that cannot perform the look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 1301 reads ahead to the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning. Stores impossible information (information indicating that the look-ahead effect cannot be performed).

In FIG. 176 (a), one game ball wins in the first starting port 1120 while one special symbol change is being performed, and the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball is read ahead. Indicates the state in which possible information is stored. In FIG. 176 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 176 (a), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 1120 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the second one. It shows a state in which read-ahead information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball. In FIG. 177 (a), one game ball wins in the first starting port 1120 while one special symbol change is being performed, and the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball is read ahead. Indicates the state in which possible information is stored. In FIG. 177 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 177 (a), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 1120 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the second one. It shows a state in which read-ahead unreadable information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball. In FIG. 177 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 177 (b), one game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 1120 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the third one. It shows a state in which read-ahead information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball.

When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is generated for the first start opening prize this time, the sub CPU 1301 performs the look-ahead effect for the first start opening prize in the first sub holding area corresponding to the first start opening prize this time. Information indicating that (pre-reading relevant information) is stored. Then, when the look-ahead information is stored in all the first sub-holding areas (excluding the first sub-holding area (0)) corresponding to the first starting mouth winning before the first starting mouth winning this time, the sub The CPU 1301 rewrites the pre-readable information stored in these first sub-holding areas into the pre-reading information. The look-ahead information is information indicating that the look-ahead effect is performed until the special symbol change corresponding to the first sub-holding area in which the look-ahead information is stored starts.

In FIG. 176 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 176 (b), one game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 1120 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the third one. It shows a state in which the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball. At this time, the pre-reading information is stored in place of the pre-readable information in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first to second holding balls. As a result, while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first and second reserved balls is performed, the look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination related to the third reserved ball is performed. In addition, in FIG. 176 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 176 (c), one game ball is won in the first starting port 1120 while the one special symbol change continues, and four balls are won. It shows a state in which read-ahead information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball of the eye. In this way, when the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to one reserved ball, the pre-reading non-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the next reserved ball.

In addition, when it is determined that a look-ahead effect will occur for the first starting opening winning this time, the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0) corresponding to the first starting opening winning before the first starting opening winning this time). ), When there is a first sub-holding area in which read-ahead information cannot be stored, there are a plurality of first sub-hold areas in which the look-ahead non-reading information is stored. In this case, the look-ahead information stored in the first sub-holding area having a larger number than the first sub-holding area having the highest number is rewritten to the look-ahead information. In FIG. 177 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 177 (c), one game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 1120 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the fourth one. It shows a state in which the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball. At this time, the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the third holding ball instead of the pre-reading information. As a result, while the special symbol change corresponding to the first and second reserved balls is being performed, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed, and the special symbol change corresponding to the third reserved ball is performed. During this time, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination relating to the fourth reserved ball will be performed.

In addition, when the reserved ball related to the first starting opening winning this time is a stage change section holding ball, the pre-reading unreadable information may be stored in the first sub holding area corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time. good. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 172 (d), when it is determined to generate the look-ahead effect for the fourth reserved ball, the look-ahead stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first reserved ball is stored. The unreadable information may be left as it is, and the pre-readable information stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the second to third reserved balls may be rewritten to the pre-reading information. In this case, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed while the special symbol change corresponding to the first reserved ball is being performed, and the special symbol change corresponding to the second to third reserved balls is performed. During the process, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination relating to the fourth reserved ball will be performed.

Alternatively, when the reserved ball related to the first starting opening winning this time is the holding ball in the stage change section, the pre-reading unreadable information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning. If the reserved ball related to the first start opening prize is a stage change section reserved ball other than the stage change section, the look-ahead information is available in the first sub-reserved area corresponding to the current first start opening winning. May be memorized. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 172 (d), when it is determined to generate the look-ahead effect for the fourth reserved ball, it is stored in the first sub-reserved area corresponding to the first to third reserved balls. The pre-readable information that has been set may be rewritten as the pre-reading information. In this case, while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to third reserved balls is performed, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination related to the fourth reserved ball is performed. Become.

As described above, the first sub-holding area is provided in the work RAM 1303 and corresponds to the first special symbol start storage area provided in the main RAM 1203. Information similar to the information stored in the first sub-holding area of the work RAM 1303 can be configured to be stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 1203. In this case, the information stored in the first sub-holding area of the work RAM 1303 is controlled to be generated by the sub-control circuit 1300 according to the information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 1203. Is possible. Further, the determination as to whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect may be performed by the main control circuit 1200 based on the information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 1203. Further, the information stored in the first sub-holding area of the work RAM 1303 may be configured to perform a suggestion effect according to the information to the extent that the player can recognize it.

<Processing at the start of the first special symbol change>
FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing a stage change occurrence presence / absence determination process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing a stage count process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing a stage change generation lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing a sub-variation pattern selection table. FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a sub-variation pattern replacement table.

In the process at the start of the first special symbol change shown in FIG. 178, in the normal mode (see FIG. 129 (a)), after the game ball wins the first start opening 1120, the special symbol change related to the start prize starts. Occasionally, it is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53). The sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200. Further, prior to executing the process shown in FIG. 178, the sub CPU 1301 stores the information stored in the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4) in the first sub-holding area, respectively. (0), and the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (3) are shifted.

In the first special symbol change start processing, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes a stage change occurrence / absence determination processing (step S9201). Hereinafter, the process of determining whether or not a stage change has occurred will be described with reference to FIG. 179.

In the stage change occurrence determination process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the special symbol change this time is the first special symbol change after the transition to the normal mode (step S9251). When it is determined that the special symbol variation this time is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the normal mode, the sub CPU 1301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9252). The stage change flag is a flag indicating that the condition for generating the stage change is satisfied, and the stage change is performed by setting the stage change flag to ON. After executing the process of step S9252, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9251 that the special symbol variation this time is not the first special symbol variation after shifting to the normal mode, the sub CPU 1301 executes the stage count process (step S9253). Hereinafter, the stage counting process will be described with reference to FIG. 180.

In the stage count process, first, the sub CPU 1301 adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage shift (step S9261). The value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition indicates the number of first special symbol fluctuations (number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition) counted after the transition to the current production stage, and is stored in the work RAM 1303. The sub CPU 1301 adds the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition every time the first special symbol variation (variation display in the first special symbol display unit 1163) is performed, while the second special symbol variation (second special symbol display). Even if the fluctuation display in the unit 1164 is performed, the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition is not added.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition is 20 (step S9262). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition is not 20, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition is 20, the sub CPU 1301 sets the specified number arrival flag to ON (step S9263). The specified number arrival flag is a flag indicating that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition has reached the number of special symbol fluctuations (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. If the specified number arrival flag is set to on when one special symbol change starts, basically (unless the specified number is reached, the stage transition hold lottery (see step S9273 in FIG. 181) is won). , The stage change will be performed in the special symbol change.

After executing the process of step S9263, the sub CPU 1301 sets "0" in the post-stage transition variation counter (clears the value of the post-stage transition variation counter) (step S9264). After that, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

The stage counting process performed in step S9253 of FIG. 179 has been described above with reference to FIG. 180. The explanation is returned to FIG. 179.

After executing the process of step S9253, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the read-ahead flag (see step S9111 of FIG. 174) is set to ON (step S9254). If it is determined that the look-ahead flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 executes the stage change occurrence lottery process (step S9255). Hereinafter, the stage change occurrence lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 181.

In the stage change generation lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the change flag at the time of the next change is set to ON (step S9271). The change flag at the time of the next change has reached the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition after the stage transition in one special symbol change, but the stage change occurs next time. It is a flag indicating that the fluctuation is carried over (see step S9279). When it is determined that the change flag at the time of the next fluctuation is set to on, the sub CPU 1301 sets the stage change flag to on (step S9272). As a result, the stage will be changed in this special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9272, the sub CPU 1301 sets the change flag at the time of the next fluctuation to off (step S9273), and ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9271 that the change flag at the time of the next change is not set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the specified number arrival flag (see step S9263 in FIG. 180) is set to ON (step). S9274). If it is determined that the specified number arrival flag is set to ON, does the sub CPU 1301 generate a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the fifth specific super reach) during this special symbol change? It is determined whether or not (step S9275). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol variation this time is a variation pattern corresponding to a specific super reach. As described above, the winning command of the first starting port winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 includes information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the sub CPU 1301 is based on the information and this special symbol. It is possible to recognize the effects that can occur during fluctuations.

If it is determined that a specific super reach will occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 1301 executes a lottery for holding the transition to the effect stage when the specified number is reached (step S9276). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value. Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the lottery for holding the transition to the effect stage when the specified number is reached has been won (step S9277).

If it is determined in step S9275 that a specific super reach does not occur during this special symbol change, or if it is determined in step S9277 that the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines. The stage change flag is set to on (step S9278). As a result, the stage will be changed in this special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9278, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9277 that the lottery for holding the transition to the staging stage when the specified number is reached has been won, the sub CPU 1301 sets the change flag at the time of the next fluctuation to ON (step S9279). As a result, the stage will be changed in the next special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9279, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9274 that the specified number arrival flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the seventh notice effect is generated during the current special symbol change (step S9280). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 refers to the process result of step S9154 of FIG. 175. In the process of step S9154, when the sub CPU 1301 determines that the seventh notice effect is generated in the special symbol change corresponding to the first start opening winning, the sub CPU 1301 is placed in the first sub holding area corresponding to the first starting opening winning. Information indicating that the 7th notice effect is generated during the special symbol change corresponding to the 1st start opening winning (7th notice effect generation information) is stored. At the time of executing the process of step S9280, the information stored in the first sub-holding area is shifted to the first sub-holding area (0). In the process of step S9280, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the seventh notice effect is generated during the current special symbol change when the seventh notice effect generation information is stored in the first sub hold area (0).

When it is determined that the seventh notice effect will occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 1301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9281). As a result, the stage will be changed in this special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9281, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the 7th notice effect does not occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 1301 determines a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the 5th specific super reach) during this special symbol change. ) Is determined (step S9282). This process is the same as the process of step S9275. When it is determined that a specific super reach occurs during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 1301 executes a pre-specified number production stage transition lottery (step S9283). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value. At that time, the sub CPU 1301 makes the winning probability of the staging stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number different according to the value of the fluctuation number counter after the stage transition.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the lottery for shifting to the effect stage before reaching the specified number has been won (step S9284). When it is determined that the pre-specified number of stage transition lottery has been won, the sub CPU 1301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9285). As a result, the stage will be changed in this special symbol change. If it is determined in step S9282 that a specific super reach does not occur during this special symbol change, if it is determined in step S9284 that the lottery for shifting to the staging stage before reaching the specified number has not been won, or the process of step S9285 is performed. After execution, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the stage change generation lottery process performed in step S9255 of FIG. 179 has been described with reference to FIG. 181. The explanation is returned to FIG. 179.

When it is determined in step S9254 that the look-ahead flag is set to ON, or after the process of step S9255 is executed, the sub-CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine. In addition, when the seventh notice effect occurs during the special symbol change this time, all the reserved balls existing at the time when the special symbol change is started are the stage change section reserved balls (see FIG. 175). Since the look-ahead effect is not performed on the stage change section reserved ball (see FIG. 174), if the seventh notice effect occurs during this special symbol change, the determination result in step S9254 is always "NO".

As described above, the stage change occurrence presence / absence determination process performed in step S9201 of FIG. 178 has been described with reference to FIG. 179. The explanation is returned to FIG. 178.

After executing the process of step S9201, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the stage change flag (see step S9273, step S9278, step S9281, and step S9285 in FIG. 181) is set to on (step S9202). ).

If it is determined that the stage change flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 executes the stage change destination lottery process (step S9203). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 refers to the stage change destination lottery table and performs a lottery based on the random number value to determine the effect stage after the transition due to the stage change. Although not shown, in the stage change destination lottery table, each staging stage (first staging stage, second staging stage, and third staging stage) that can be a staging stage after the transition is defined in association with a random value range. Has been done. As the stage change destination lottery table, a stage change destination lottery table for the first production stage, a stage change destination lottery table for the second production stage, and a stage change destination lottery table for the third production stage are provided. In the stage change destination lottery table, the random value ranges are different from each other. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 1301 draws a lot with reference to the stage change destination lottery table for the first production stage, and when the current production stage is the second production stage. Lottery is performed with reference to the stage change destination lottery table for the second production stage, and if the current production stage is the third production stage, the lottery is performed with reference to the stage change destination lottery table for the third production stage. I do.

As a result, when the effect stage after the transition is determined, the sub CPU 1301 controls to shift to the determined effect stage. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 updates the information stored in the effect stage flag storage area to the information corresponding to the effect stage after migration. Then, the sub CPU 1301 sets "0" in the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition (clears the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition) (step S9204).

If it is determined in step S9202 that the stage change flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 determines the sub fluctuation pattern (step S9105 in FIG. 174 and) when the first start opening winning corresponding to the special symbol variation this time occurs. It is determined whether or not (see step S9106) has been determined (step S9205). When it is determined that the sub-variation pattern is determined when the first start opening prize corresponding to the current special symbol change occurs, the sub CPU 1301 determines when the first start opening prize corresponding to the current special symbol change occurs. It is determined whether or not the staging stage (at the time when the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 174 are executed) and the current staging stage are the same (step S9206).

When it is determined in step S9205 that the sub-variation pattern (see steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174) is not determined when the first start opening winning corresponding to the special symbol variation is generated, or in step S9206. It was determined that the production stage (at the time when the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174) when the first start opening prize corresponding to this special symbol change occurs is not the same as the current production stage. In this case, the sub CPU 1301 executes the sub-variation pattern (second half) lottery process (step S9207), and further executes the sub-variation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9208). Since the processes of steps S9207 and S9208 are the same as the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 174, the description thereof is omitted here.

The effect stage (at the time when the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 174 are executed) when the first start opening prize corresponding to the special symbol change is generated in step S9206 is the same as the current effect stage. If it is determined, or after the process of step S9208 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the read-ahead flag (see step S9111 of FIG. 174) is set to ON (step S9209).

When it is determined that the look-ahead flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 executes the sub-variation pattern replacement process (step S9210). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a process of replacing the already determined sub-variation pattern with another sub-variation pattern as needed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be made with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183.

In the sub-variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 182, the main variation pattern and the sub-variation pattern are defined in association with each other. As the main fluctuation pattern, a main fluctuation pattern “1”, a main fluctuation pattern “2”, a main fluctuation pattern “3”, and the like are provided. For example, although not shown, the main variation pattern “10” is the main variation pattern (see step S9154 in FIG. 175) corresponding to the seventh advance notice effect (effect corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122”). There is. A plurality of sub-variation patterns are associated with one main variation pattern, and when the one main variation pattern is selected, any one of the plurality of sub-variation patterns is used. It is designed to be selected. For example, in the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 174, when the sub CPU 1301 receives information indicating that the main fluctuation pattern is "1" from the main control circuit 1200 as a fluctuation pattern command, the sub fluctuation pattern Select one sub-variation pattern from "1" to "30" (30 types of sub-variation patterns).

As the sub-variation pattern, there are a sub-variation pattern (pre-reading possible sub-variation pattern) in which the look-ahead effect can be performed and a sub-variation pattern (pre-reading non-pre-reading sub-variation pattern) in which the look-ahead effect cannot be performed. FIG. 182 also shows whether each sub-variation pattern is classified into a pre-readable sub-variation pattern and a non-pre-readable sub-variation pattern. For example, the sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" are pre-readable sub-variation patterns, and the sub-variation patterns "21" to "30" are pre-readable sub-variation patterns. For example, when it is determined in step S911 of FIG. 174 that the look-ahead effect does not occur for the first start opening winning this time, the sub CPU 1301 may use the look-ahead possible sub-variation pattern as the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106. For example, pre-reading possible information (information indicating that the pre-reading effect can be performed) is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first winning opening winning this time. On the other hand, if the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 is a pre-reading non-pre-reading sub-variation pattern, the pre-reading impossible information (pre-reading effect is performed) in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. Information that indicates that it cannot be done) is memorized.

After that, when the first start opening prize is generated and the look-ahead effect is generated for the first start opening prize (when the look-ahead flag is set to ON in step S9111), FIGS. 176 and 177 will be described. As described above, the sub CPU 1301 rewrites the pre-readable information stored in the first sub-holding area into the pre-reading information. In the process of step S9210 of FIG. 178, when the sub CPU 1301 stores the pre-reading information in the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0)) corresponding to the special symbol change this time (step S9105 and When the sub-variation pattern determined in step S9106 is a look-ahead sub-variation pattern), the sub-variation pattern is replaced. On the other hand, the sub CPU 1301 is a sub determined in steps S9105 and S9106 when the pre-readable information is stored in the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0)) corresponding to the current special symbol change. If the fluctuation pattern is a non-look-ahead sub-variation pattern), the sub-variation pattern is not replaced.

In the sub-variation pattern replacement table shown in FIG. 183, the sub-variation pattern after replacement is defined in association with the look-ahead effect pattern for each sub-variation pattern before replacement. As the sub-variation pattern before replacement, only the pre-readable sub-variation pattern is defined among the pre-readable sub-variation pattern and the non-pre-readable sub-variation pattern. The look-ahead effect pattern indicates the type of look-ahead effect, and is determined in the look-ahead effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 174). The sub-variation pattern after replacement is a sub-variation pattern (pre-reading sub-variation pattern) corresponding to the look-ahead effect. In FIG. 183, as an example of the look-ahead sub-variation pattern, the look-ahead sub-variation patterns “31” to “50” corresponding to the main fluctuation pattern “1” are shown. The look-ahead sub-variation patterns "31" to "35" are associated with the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "1" to "5", and the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "36" to "40" are pre-readable sub-variation patterns. The variation patterns "6" to "10" are associated with each other, and the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "41" to "45" are associated with the look-ahead possible sub-variation patterns "11" to "15". Sub-variation patterns "46" to "50" are associated with pre-readable sub-variation patterns "16" to "20".

In the process of step S9210 of FIG. 178, the sub CPU 1301 newly uses the pre-reading sub-variation pattern in place of the already determined sub-variation pattern (pre-readable sub-variation pattern) by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table. Determined as a sub-variation pattern. For example, the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 174 is the sub-variation pattern "1", and the look-ahead effect pattern determined in the look-ahead effect lottery process (see step S9109 of FIG. 174) is the look-ahead effect pattern. In the case of A, the sub CPU 1301 determines the look-ahead sub-variation pattern “31” as the sub-variation pattern after replacement. Further, the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 174 is the sub-variation pattern "10", and the look-ahead effect pattern determined in the look-ahead effect lottery process (see step S9109 of FIG. 174) is the look-ahead effect pattern. In the case of B, the sub CPU 1301 determines the look-ahead sub-variation pattern “37” as the sub-variation pattern after replacement.

In this way, for example, when the main fluctuation pattern "1" is selected, any one of the sub fluctuation patterns "1" to "50" can be selected, but the sub fluctuation pattern selection table In, the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "31" to "50" are not specified. Thereby, in both the case where the look-ahead effect is performed and the case where the look-ahead effect is not performed, it is possible to select the sub-variation pattern by the common method in steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 174, and the sub-variation pattern can be selected. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the processing related to the determination of the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the sub-variation pattern replacement table is referred to, and the sub-variation pattern is replaced with the look-ahead sub-variation pattern corresponding to the look-ahead effect pattern. It is possible to change the decorative pattern with. The sub-variation pattern selection table and the sub-variation pattern replacement table are stored in the program ROM 1302.

Although not shown, the sub-variation pattern selection table includes a sub-variation pattern selection table for the first effect stage, a sub-variation pattern selection table for the second effect stage, and a sub-variation pattern selection table for the third effect stage. Has been done. In these sub-variation pattern selection tables, the random value ranges assigned to each sub-variation pattern are different from each other, and only in the sub-variation pattern and the second effect stage that can be selected only in the first effect stage. A sub-variation pattern that can be selected and a sub-variation pattern that can be selected only in the third effect stage are set. When the current staging stage is the first staging stage, the sub CPU 1301 selects the sub-variable pattern by referring to the sub-variable pattern selection table for the first staging stage, and the current staging stage is the second staging stage. If, the sub-variation pattern is selected by referring to the sub-variation pattern selection table for the second effect stage, and if the current effect stage is the third effect stage, the sub-variation for the third effect stage is selected. The sub-variation pattern is selected by referring to the pattern selection table.

Similarly, as the sub-variation pattern replacement table, there are a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the third production stage. It is provided. In these sub-variation pattern replacement tables, the correspondence between the sub-variation pattern before the replacement and the sub-variation pattern after the replacement is different from each other, and some of the types of the look-ahead effect pattern are different from each other. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 1301 replaces the sub-variation pattern by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, and the current production stage is the second production stage. If, the sub-variation pattern is replaced by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table for the second effect stage, and if the current effect stage is the third effect stage, the sub-variation for the third effect stage is performed. Sub-variation patterns are replaced by referring to the pattern replacement table.

If it is determined in step S9209 that the look-ahead flag is not set to ON, or after executing the process of step S9210, the sub CPU 1301 changes the already determined sub-variation pattern into a sub-variation pattern according to the variation scale. Perform the replacement process (step S9211). In this process, when the already determined sub-variation pattern is a normal sub-variation pattern (sub-variation pattern corresponding to the default variation pattern shown in FIGS. 163 to 165), the sub CPU 1301 varies as necessary. Change the time. For example, at the time when the first start opening prize corresponding to this special symbol change occurs, the first start opening prize corresponds to the fourth reserved ball, and the sub change corresponding to the 4-second change. When a pattern is selected, but all the reservations are subsequently exhausted and the special symbol variation is reached, a process of replacing the pattern with a sub-variation pattern corresponding to the 13-second variation is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the stage change flag (see step S9273, step S9278, step S9281, and step S9285 in FIG. 181) is set to ON (step S9212). If it is determined that the stage change flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 executes the stage change wipe color lottery process (step S9213). Hereinafter, the stage change wipe color lottery process will be described.

As described above, when the stage change is performed based on the number of times of special symbol change (number of change counts after stage transition) reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times), the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (FIG. 170) is performed. After the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and becomes the effect stage (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) after the transition. Move to the corresponding background. Further, when a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh advance notice effect, the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (see FIG. 169) is performed. After the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" is performed, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and becomes the effect stage (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) after the transition. Move to the corresponding background. Further, after the production in the fifth specific super reach that shifts via the production corresponding to the production number "122" is completed, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display, and the transition stage (first production stage). , The second staging stage, or the third staging stage).

When shifting to the background corresponding to the effect stage after the transition in this way, a predetermined wipe image is displayed on the display device 1007. The wipe image can be displayed in various colors (default color, gold color, or special color). Specifically, when the effect stage after the transition is the first effect stage, a wipe image for the first effect stage in the default color, a wipe image for the first effect stage in gold, or a first effect stage in a special color. Wipe image is displayed. When the effect stage after the transition is the second effect stage, the default color wipe image for the second effect stage, the golden wipe image for the second effect stage, or the special color wipe image for the second effect stage is displayed. Is displayed. When the effect stage after the transition is the third effect stage, the default color wipe image for the third effect stage, the golden wipe image for the third effect stage, or the special color wipe image for the third effect stage is displayed. Is displayed. In the process of step S9213, the sub CPU 1301 determines the color of the wipe image by performing a lottery based on a random number value with reference to the stage change wipe color lottery table. Although not shown, in the stage change wipe color lottery table, various colors (default colors) are used for each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage) that can be the production stage after the transition. , Gold, and special colors) and the random value range are defined in association with each other.

The stage change wipe color lottery table includes the first stage change wipe color lottery table, the second stage change wipe color lottery table, the third stage change wipe color lottery table, the fourth stage change wipe color lottery table, and the fifth stage. A change wipe color lottery table and a sixth stage change wipe color lottery table are provided, and in these stage change wipe color lottery tables, the random number value ranges are different from each other. The 1st stage change wipe color lottery table to the 6th stage change wipe color lottery table correspond to the set values of "1" to "6", respectively, and the sub CPU 1301 corresponds to the stage change corresponding to the current set value. The wipe color lottery table is referenced. Then, in each stage change wipe color lottery table, a random value range for the special color is set so that the probability that the special color is selected increases as the set value increases. For example, when the set value is "2", the probability that the wipe image of the special color is displayed is higher when the set value is "4", and when the set value is "4", it is "6". In the case of, the probability that the wipe image of the special color is displayed is higher. As a result, the set value is suggested through the appearance frequency of the wipe image of the special color.

In the above, as an example, when a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the 7th notice effect (including the case where the 7th advance notice effect occurs in the game reaching the specified number), the effect number is "121". It has been described that the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed before the corresponding effect or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is performed. However, in this case, only the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" may be performed, and the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" may not be performed. Further, while both the production corresponding to the production number "121", the production corresponding to the production number "122", and the production corresponding to the production number "131" are performed, the production number "131" is used. Even if the wipe image is not displayed after the corresponding effect is performed, the wipe image is displayed only after the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is performed. good. When such a configuration is adopted, the wipe image is displayed only once in one stage change. This makes it possible for the player to pay more attention to the wipe image.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, when a predetermined look-ahead effect occurs, the stage change wipe color lottery process may be performed during the previous special symbol change of the stage change game. The predetermined look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect that can be performed during the previous special symbol change of the stage change game when the change pattern corresponding to the seventh notice effect is determined as the main change pattern in the stage change game. In the look-ahead effect, the game freezes while the predetermined image is displayed, and the stage change game is started in that state. In this case, in the stage change game, the processes of steps S9212 and S9213 may not be performed (the wipe image is based on the result of the stage change wipe color lottery process performed during the previous special symbol change). May be displayed). Further, the predetermined look-ahead effect may be configured so that it can occur only in one effect stage (for example, a second effect stage).

When it is determined in step S9212 that the stage change flag is not set to ON, or after the process of step S9213 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect lottery process according to the effect stage (step S9214). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 has a sub-variation pattern finally determined by performing a lottery based on a random number value (a sub-variation pattern determined by executing the process of step S9211) and a current production stage. Based on the above, a process for determining a specific production content is performed. For example, when the current staging stage is the first staging stage, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first staging stage notice content lottery process (see FIG. 130). Further, when the current staging stage is the second staging stage, the sub CPU 1301 executes the second staging stage notice content lottery process, and when the current staging stage is the third staging stage, the sub CPU 1301 is the third staging stage. Direction stage notice contents Execute lottery processing. In the second staging stage notice content lottery process and the third staging stage notice content lottery process, as in the first staging stage notice content lottery process, the special symbol change related to the first start opening prize is based on the sub-variation pattern. The content of the production performed inside is decided. After executing the process of step S9214, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Basic screen display at each production stage>
FIG. 184 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the first staging stage. FIG. 184 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the second staging stage. FIG. 184 (c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the third staging stage.

As shown in FIG. 184 (a), in the first effect stage, the first effect stage name image 9101 showing the name of the first effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) in the display device 1007. As shown in FIG. 184 (b), in the second effect stage, the second effect stage name image 9102 showing the name of the second effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) in the display device 1007. As shown in FIG. 184 (c), in the third effect stage, the third effect stage name image 9103 showing the name of the third effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) in the display device 1007. The first effect stage name image 9101, the second effect stage name image 9102, and the third effect stage name image 9103 are each displayed at the same position on the display device 1007.

Further, in each effect stage, the counter image 9104 is displayed on the display device 1007. As described above, the counter image 9104 is an image corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of fluctuation counts after stage transition) performed after the occurrence of the stage change. The number (20) in the denominator indicates the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. The numerator number indicates the number of fluctuation counts after the current stage transition.

Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), in the first staging stage, a bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, a watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and a cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are displayed. ing. As described above, the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, the pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022, and the pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 are each in either a dark mode or a bright mode. It is possible to display with (see FIG. 162). On top of that, the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, the pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022, and the pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 are always displayed while staying in the first staging stage. It has become.

Specifically, when the pseudo-ream effect has not occurred, or when the pseudo-ream effect has occurred and the pseudo-ream stage is "pseudo 1", the pseudo-ream stage notification bell image 9021 and the pseudo-ream stage notification The watermelon image 9022 and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo-continuous step notification are displayed darkly. When the pseudo-ream effect is generated and the pseudo-ream stage is "pseudo 2", the pseudo-ream stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed brightly, and the pseudo-ream stage notification watermelon image 9022 and the pseudo-ream stage notification are used. The cherry image 9023 is displayed dark. When the pseudo-continuous effect is generated and the pseudo-continuous stage is "pseudo 3", the pseudo-continuous stage notification bell image 9021 and the pseudo-continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022 are displayed brightly for pseudo-continuous stage notification. The cherry image 9023 is displayed dark. When the super reach is developed via the pseudo continuous effect, the bell image 9021 for the pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for the pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for the pseudo continuous stage notification are displayed during the super reach. It is displayed brightly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), the stock timer image 9110 is displayed in the second staging stage. The stock timer image 9110 is an image corresponding to any numerical value (“PLAY TIME”) from “00:00” to “99:99”. The "PLAY TIME" indicates the length of time during which the super reach is performed, and the effect in the super reach is performed over the time corresponding to the "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110. Such "PLAY TIME" is added (stocked) according to the production (time stock notice) performed during the second production stage.

Although not shown, the time stock notice includes a first time stock notice, a second time stock notice, and a third time stock notice. In the first time stock notice, the predetermined item lamp emits light, the predetermined item decoration part (movable accessory) rattles, and the item decoration part pops forward and at the same time, the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME". Will increase. The item lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the item decoration unit. The item decoration unit is provided at a predetermined position of the game board unit 1010 (for example, as a part of the second character decoration unit), and is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like). In addition, the item decoration section is decorated in the shape of a predetermined item. In the second time stock notice, there is no light emission of the item lamp and rattling operation of the item decoration part as in the first time stock notice, and the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" suddenly increases. In the third time stock notice, after the predetermined effect appears on the display device 1007, the image is displayed so that the effect is absorbed by the item decoration portion, and at the same time, the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" increases.

Further, the display pattern of the stock timer image 9110 corresponds to the display pattern of the background image. When "00:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the default pattern. When any numerical value from "05:00" to "30:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level 1 pattern. When any numerical value from "35:00" to "60:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level 2 pattern. When any numerical value from "65:00" to "95:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level 3 pattern. When "99:99" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level MAX pattern. As stock timer images 9110, "00:01" to "04:99", "30:01" to "34:99", "60:01" to "64:99", "95:01" to The numerical value of "99:98" is not displayed.

The effect level 1 pattern has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the default pattern, the effect level 2 pattern has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the effect level 1 pattern, and the effect level 3 pattern has a higher expectation of a jackpot. In comparison, the jackpot expectation is high, and the effect level MAX pattern has the highest jackpot expectation. In the effect level 1 pattern to the effect level 3 pattern, a background image based on orange is displayed, and as the effect level becomes higher, the display mode becomes more flashy. In the effect level MAX pattern, a background image based on red is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), the character appearance meter image 9120 is displayed on the third staging stage. The character appearance meter image 9120 is configured to include a left character appearance meter image 9120L and a right character appearance meter image 9120R. The left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R are images that imitate the meters, respectively.

Specifically, the left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R have an initial display mode (a state in which the meters are not accumulated), a level 1 display mode (a state in which the meters are accumulated in one stage), and respectively. Of the level 2 display mode (state in which the meters are accumulated in two stages), the level 3 display mode (state in which the meters are accumulated in three stages), and the level MAX display mode (state in which the meters are full). It can be displayed in any mode.

The meter shown by the character appearance meter image 9120 accumulates according to the effect (meter UP notice) performed during the third effect stage. In the meter UP notice, there are cases where the meters are accumulated in one stage, two stages, and three stages. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L becomes the level MAX display mode, the left character 9121L appears on the display device 1007 (becomes a standby state). When the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R becomes the level MAX display mode, the right character 9121R appears on the display device 1007 (becomes a standby state).

Of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R, when only the left character 9121L is in the standby state, it develops into a super reach (super reach for the left character) corresponding to the left character 9121L. Of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R, when only the right character 9121R is in the standby state, it develops into a super reach (super reach for the right character) corresponding to the right character 9121R. When both the characters of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R are in the standby state, the super reach corresponding to both characters (super reach for both characters) is developed.

In the left character super reach, when the right character 9121R appears in the display device 1007, it shifts to the super reach for both characters, and in the right character super reach, when the left character 9121L appears in the display device 1007, it shifts to the super reach for both characters. Move to. Further, in the super reach for the left character, when the first ally character appears on the display device 1007, it develops into a predetermined super reach. Similarly, in the right character super reach, when the first ally character appears on the display device 1007, it develops into a predetermined super reach. Further, in the super reach for both characters, if the button repeated hitting effect is successful, it develops into a predetermined super reach. These predetermined super reach are the same super reach as the super reach (see FIG. 146 (a)) that shifts when the “cherry” icon is displayed in the first staging stage.

Even when the meter shown by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full, the silhouettes of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R are displayed on the display device 1007. Specifically, when the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed in the display device 1007 in the default state, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R. Is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed on the display device 1007 in the default state. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 1 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is blinked in blue, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 1 display mode. In that case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed blinking in blue.

When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 2 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is blinked in green, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 2 display mode. In that case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed blinking in green. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 3 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is lit in red, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 3 display mode. In that case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is lit and displayed in red. In this way, as the stage of the meter shown by the character appearance meter image 9120 goes up, the degree of expectation of a big hit increases.

Even if the meter shown by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full, the left character 9121L to the right character 9121R may be in the standby state. Specifically, when the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode, the screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in a rotating manner, and various icons may be stopped and displayed after the rotation is completed. As the icons that can be stopped and displayed in this way, a left character icon, a right character icon, a "cherry" icon, and the like are provided. When the left character icon is stopped and displayed, the screen shifts to the left character super reach. When the right character icon is stopped and displayed, it shifts to the super reach for the right character. When the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to the above-mentioned predetermined super reach.

<8th notice production>
FIG. 185 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of the eighth notice effect. FIG. 185 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the eighth advance notice effect. FIG. 185 (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The eighth advance notice effect shown in FIG. 185 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the second effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)). The eighth notice effect can occur only in the second effect stage.

In the production corresponding to the production numbers "151" to "155", first, a sign that the decorative pattern is tempered (becomes a reach mode) occurs. The sign suggests that the tempai fanning occurs when the second character lamp (see FIG. 170 (c)) blinks. In the above, it has been described that the corresponding character lamp is always turned on while staying at each production stage. However, in a game other than the game in which the specified number is reached, the corresponding character lamp may be basically turned off. In the case of such a configuration, the lighting of the second character lamp may be used as the above-mentioned sign.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "151" is an effect that fades out after the above-mentioned sign occurs. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "152", after the above-mentioned sign occurs, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai (tempai fan) is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, an image corresponding to the failure of the tempai fanning (tempai fanning failure image) is displayed on the display device 1007, and the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "153", after the above-mentioned sign occurs, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image relating to the fanning (tempai fanning) of whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, an image corresponding to the success of the tempai fanning (tempai fanning success image) is displayed on the display device 1007. When the tempai fanning success image is displayed, it shifts to the notice after the tempai success.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "154", after the above-mentioned sign occurs, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image relating to the fanning (tempai fanning) of whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, an image corresponding to the success of the tempai fanning (tempai fanning success image) is displayed on the display device 1007, and "PLAY TIME" is stocked. When the tempai fanning success image is displayed, it shifts to the notice after the tempai success. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "155", after the above-mentioned sign occurs, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image relating to the fanning (tempai fanning) of whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, an image corresponding to the success of the tempai fanning (tempai fanning success image) is displayed on the display device 1007. When the tempai fanning success image is displayed, it shifts to the intense heat notice after that.

The predetermined movable accessory that operates in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "152" to "155" is the same movable accessory that operates in the notice after the icon is stopped (see FIG. 145). Further, when the tempai fanning success image is displayed in the production corresponding to the production numbers "153" to "155", the decorative design is displayed in the reach mode. In addition, after the production corresponding to the production numbers "153" and "154" is performed, the notice shifts to the notice after the success of the tempai, and when the notice after the success of the tempai ends, the 6th specific super reach, the 7th specific super reach, and It develops into one of the first specific super reach. In the notice after the success of Tempai, a connecting production corresponding to the super reach of the development destination will be performed.

In particular, in the case of developing into the sixth specific super reach, an image showing the title of the sixth specific super reach is displayed on the display device 1007 in the notice after the success of the tempai. In the sixth specific super reach, a predetermined slot game is played. In the slot game, a plurality of types of icons including the "cherry" icon are variablely displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right on the display device 1007, and then stopped and displayed. In a slot game, when the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right columns (when all three are aligned), it develops into a predetermined super reach. The predetermined super reach is the same super reach as the super reach (see FIG. 146 (a)) that shifts when the “cherry” icon is displayed in the first staging stage. Therefore, it can be said that the slot game is a mission for shifting to a predetermined super reach.

When the slot game starts, the "PLAY TIME" shown by the stock timer image 9110 gradually decreases. While "PLAY TIME" remains (a value greater than 0), the slot game is repeated. Then, when "PLAY TIME" becomes 0, the slot game ends. That is, the slot game is played over a period of time according to the "PLAY TIME". If three "cherry" icons are lined up within the time, the mission is cleared and the game develops into the prescribed super reach. In other words, "PLAY TIME" is the time limit given to clear the mission.

As described above, in the production corresponding to the production number "154", "PLAY TIME" is stocked, and the stock is due to the above-mentioned second time stock notice. In the second staging stage, both the time stock notice and the jackpot notice staging (for example, the eighth staging) may occur during one special symbol change.

In the intense heat notice that shifts after the effect corresponding to the effect number "155" is performed, one or more characters among the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character are displayed on the display device 1007. Appears in. Then, it develops into a super reach according to the combination of the characters that appeared. The intense heat notice can also occur in the first production stage and the third production stage.

Four timings are provided as the timings at which the above-mentioned signs can occur. Specifically, when the sign occurs 4.5 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1) and when the sign occurs 8.5 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 2). When the sign occurs from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts 12.5 seconds (timing 3), and when the sign occurs from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts 16.5 seconds (timing 4). Is provided. The sign occurs at one of these four timings. At Timing 2, all effects following the sign occur with a delay of 4 seconds compared to Timing 1, and at Timing 3, all effects following the sign occur with a delay of 4 seconds compared to Timing 2. However, at timing 4, all the effects following the sign occur with a delay of 4 seconds as compared with timing 3. In FIG. 185 (b), only timing 1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 185 (c), in the effect (timing 1) corresponding to the effect number “152”, each decorative symbol (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol) starts to change. It is designed to stop at the time when 11 seconds have passed (when the display of the tempai fanning failure image ends). As a result, it is possible for the player to make it appear that each decorative symbol is stopped when the wipe display is displayed after the tempai fanning fails and the background is returned to the normal background. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the fanning during the tempai fanning. Regarding timings 2 to 4, from the same viewpoint, the stop timings of the decorative symbols are 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, 19 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and 23 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, respectively.

<Logo lamp notice production>
FIG. 186 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo lamp advance notice effect. 186 (b) and 186 (c) are diagrams showing a time chart of the logo lamp advance notice effect.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined position (for example, the upper side of the display device 1007) of the game board unit 1010, and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. Hereinafter, the logo lamp will be described in more detail.

The logo cover includes a first logo portion, a second logo portion, and a third logo portion. The first logo part is decorated in the shape of the first word, and the second logo part is decorated in the shape of the second word. The logo part is decorated in the shape of the third word. The first word, the second word, and the third word are predetermined words (character strings), respectively. In this embodiment, for convenience, the first word is "X", the second word is "Y", and the third word is "Y". The third word may be called "Z". The first logo portion is provided on the left side portion of the logo cover, the second logo portion is provided on the central portion of the logo cover, and the third logo portion is provided on the right side portion of the logo cover. ..

The logo lamp is composed of a first logo lamp, a second logo lamp, and a third logo lamp. The first logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first logo portion, and the second logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second logo portion. The third logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third logo portion. As a result, the letter "X" is lit by making the first logo lamp emit light, the letter "Y" is lit by making the second logo lamp emit light, and the letter "Z" is lit by making the third logo lamp emit light. It is possible to create an appearance that lights up.

In this embodiment, the logo lamp advance notice effect is performed using such a logo lamp. The logo lamp advance notice effect shown in FIG. 186 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)). .. The logo lamp advance notice effect is an effect that can occur in combination with other big hit advance notice effects during one special symbol change.

Specifically, in the production corresponding to the production number "161", after the first logo lamp (character "X") is lit for a predetermined time (1 second), the first logo lamp (character "X") is turned on. It is a production that turns off the lights. In the production corresponding to the production number "162", the first logo lamp (character "X") is lit for a predetermined time (1 second), and then the second logo lamp (character "Y") is lit for a predetermined time (1). Lights up for (seconds) (during which the first logo lamp (letter "X") continues to light), then the first logo lamp (letter "X") and the second logo lamp (letter "Y"). Is a production that turns off.

In the production corresponding to the production number "163", the first logo lamp (character "X") is lit for a predetermined time (1 second), and then the second logo lamp (character "Y") is lit for a predetermined time (1). It lights for a period of time (for a second) (the first logo lamp (the letter "X") continues to light), and then the third logo lamp (the letter "Z") lights (the first logo lamp (the letter "X"). The letter) and the second logo lamp (the letter "Y") continue to light up). The lighting of the first logo lamp (letter "X"), the second logo lamp (letter "Y"), and the third logo lamp (letter "Z") continues until the end of the special symbol change.

The production corresponding to the production numbers "161" to "163" is a production related to the fanning (tempai fanning) of whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai. As the characters light up in sequence, such as "X"-> "Y"-> "Z", the possibility that the decorative pattern becomes a tenpai increases. Then, when all the characters are lit (when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed), it is determined that the decorative pattern is a tenpai (always a reach mode). That is, the logo lamp advance notice effect is an effect in which the expectation of a big hit increases as the number of lit logo lamps increases.

FIG. 186 (b) shows a time chart in the case where the logo lamp advance notice effect is performed in the first effect stage or the third effect stage. Here, two timings are provided as the lighting timings of the logo lamp. Specifically, when the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up 5.5 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative pattern (for 10 seconds tempai), 9.5 seconds have passed since the start of the change of the decorative pattern. The case where the first logo lamp (the letter "X") is lit from the time point (for 14-second tempai) is provided. In the first effect stage and the third effect stage, when the decorative symbol fluctuates with the default fluctuation pattern, the reach mode is set 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (10 second tempai) and the reach mode is 14 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. There is a time (14 seconds tempai) (see FIGS. 163 and 165).

The two timings in FIG. 186 (b) correspond to these two types of tempai timings. As a result, when the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the logo lamp can be turned on at the timing shown in "for 10 seconds tempai" in FIG. 186 (b). Further, when the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the logo lamp can be turned on at the timing shown in "14 seconds for tempai" in FIG. 186 (b).

When the logo lamp advance notice is performed on the second stage, four timings are provided as the lighting timing of the logo lamp. Specifically, when the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up 6 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1), and the first logo lamp (the first logo lamp) 10 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1). When the letter "X" is lit (timing 2), and when the first logo lamp (letter "X") is lit 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (timing 3), the decorative symbol The case where the first logo lamp (character "X") is turned on (timing 4) from the time when 18 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation is provided. In FIG. 186 (c), only timing 1 is illustrated. Each of these four timings corresponds to the four timings at which the above-mentioned eighth notice effect is performed. This makes it possible to turn on the logo lamp at the timing when the tempai is fanned in the eighth notice production.

The logo lamp advance staging described above may also be performed at each stage of the pseudo-continuous staging. That is, any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" can occur in each of the "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2", and "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect. For example, in "pseudo 1", the first logo lamp (character "X") lights up from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts to elapse, and in "pseudo 2", the first from the time when the change of the decorative symbol resumes. The logo lamp (letter "X") is lit, and in "pseudo 3", the first logo lamp (letter "X") is lit from the time when a predetermined time has elapsed from the resumption of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. At this time, for example, when the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" is performed in "pseudo 1", the process does not shift to "pseudo 2", while the effect number "163" is supported in "pseudo 1". When the effect is performed, the process may be shifted to "pseudo 2". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" is performed in "pseudo 2", the effect does not shift to "pseudo 3", while the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed in "pseudo 2". If it is done, it may shift to "pseudo 3". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" is performed in "pseudo 3", the process does not shift to the super reach, while the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed in "pseudo 3". In that case, it may be possible to shift to super reach.

<1st staging stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing a first effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 187 is the first effect stage when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 178). Production stage notice content This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 1300 after the lottery process (see FIG. 130).

In the first effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether or not a pseudo continuous effect occurs based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9301). When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect is generated, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9302). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9303). Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 188.

In the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo-continuous production (step S9321). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 has a sub-variation pattern (10-second tempai variation pattern) in which the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of the variation in the decorative symbol in "pseudo 3". ) And the sub-variation pattern (14-second tempai fluctuation pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 3". do.

If it is determined that a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo-continuous production, the sub CPU 1301 will notify the logo lamp for pseudo 3 based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation. Is determined (step S9322). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in the "pseudo 3" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 3", any one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai is generated at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous staging, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the logo lamp warning staging is not performed in "pseudo 3" (step S9323). .. After executing the process of step S9322 or step S9323, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process performed in step S9303 of FIG. 187 has been described with reference to FIG. 188. The explanation is returned to FIG. 187.

When it is determined in step S9302 that the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3", or after the process of step S9303 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9304). Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 189.

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous production (step S9341). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 has a sub-variation pattern (10-second tempai variation pattern) in which the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 2". ) And the sub-variation pattern (14-second tempai fluctuation pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 2". do.

When it is determined that the 10-second tempai or the 14-second tempai is generated at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 is determined (step S9342). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined when the process of step S9322 in FIG. 188 is being executed, while the sub CPU 1301 determines in other cases (step S9323 in FIG. 188). When the process of Pseudo 3 is executed, or when the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "Pseudo 3"), it is determined that the content of the notice of the logo lamp for Pseudo 3 has not been determined.

When it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9343). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. For example, when the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2". -Determine any of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2". Determine the production corresponding to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 has not been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time (step S9344). .. In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2", any one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined.

If it is determined in step S9341 that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous staging, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the logo lamp warning staging is not performed in "pseudo 2" (step S9345). ). After executing the process of step S9343, step S9344, or step S9345, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process performed in step S9304 of FIG. 187 has been described with reference to FIG. 189. The explanation is returned to FIG. 187.

When it is determined in step S9301 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after the process of step S9304 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9305). Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 190.

In the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous production or the "pseudo-free" production. (Step S9361). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 has a sub-variation pattern (10-second tempai variation pattern) in which the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation becomes the reach mode 10 seconds after the start of the variation in the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1". ) And the sub-variation pattern (14-second tempai fluctuation pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 1". do.

When it is determined that a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai is generated at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous production or the "pseudo-free" production, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 is determined. Determine (step S9362). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined when the process of step S9343 or step S9344 of FIG. 189 is being executed, while in other cases (FIG. 189). When the process of step S9345 of the above step S9345 is executed, or when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the notice of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 has not been determined.

When it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S9363). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. For example, when the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". -Determine any of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". Determine the production corresponding to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 has not been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 has been determined (step S9364). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined when the process of step S9322 in FIG. 188 is being executed, while the sub CPU 1301 determines in other cases (step S9323 in FIG. 188). If the process of Pseudo-continuous production does not proceed to "Pseudo 3", or if the pseudo-ream effect does not occur), it is determined that the notice content of the logo lamp for Pseudo 3 has not been determined.

When it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9365). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. For example, when the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". -Determine any of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". Determine the production corresponding to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 has not been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time (step S9366). .. In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1", any one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined.

If it is determined in step S9361 that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production, the sub CPU 1301 performs the logo lamp warning effect in "pseudo 1". It is determined that there is no such thing (step S9367). After executing the process of step S9363, step S9365, step S9366, or step S9367, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process performed in step S9305 of FIG. 187 has been described with reference to FIG. 190. The explanation is returned to FIG. 187.

After executing the process of step S9305, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Second production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a second production stage logo lamp notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The second effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 191 is the second effect stage when the current effect stage is the second effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 178). Staging stage notice content This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 1300 after the lottery process.

In the second effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether or not the eighth notice effect (see FIG. 185) occurs during this special symbol change (step S9401). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the effect performed during the special symbol change based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol change in the second effect stage notice content lottery process. I have decided. In the process of step S9401, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the eighth advance notice effect is determined as the effect to be performed during the special symbol change this time.

When it is determined that the eighth notice effect is generated during the current special symbol change, the sub CPU 1301 determines the logo lamp notice content based on the sub change pattern corresponding to the current special symbol change (step S9402). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the eighth notice effect does not occur during the special symbol change this time, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the logo lamp advance notice effect is not performed (step S9403). After executing the process of step S9402 or step S9403, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Third production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a third effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The third effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 192 is the third effect stage when the current effect stage is the third effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 178). Staging stage notice content This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 1300 after the lottery process.

In the third effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether or not a pseudo continuous effect occurs based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9451). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect is generated, the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9452). In the third staging stage, the stage in the pseudo-continuous staging progresses only to "pseudo 2". Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 193.

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous production (step S9461). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs the decorative symbol in what pattern at the stage of "pseudo 2" during the special symbol variation based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time. It is decided whether to stop (decorative pattern stop pattern). In the process of step S9461, the sub CPU 1301 has a decorative symbol stop pattern (10-second tempai stop pattern) such that the decorative symbol stop pattern becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 2". In "pseudo 2", it is determined whether or not the decorative symbol is one of the decorative symbol stop patterns (14-second tempai stop pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. ..

If it is determined that a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous production, the sub CPU 1301 will notify the logo lamp for pseudo 2 based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation. Is determined (step S9462). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2", any one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai is generated at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous staging, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the logo lamp warning staging is not performed in "pseudo 2" (step S9463). .. After executing the process of step S9462 or step S9463, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process performed in step S9452 of FIG. 192 has been described with reference to FIG. 193. The explanation is returned to FIG. 192.

When it is determined in step S9451 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after the process of step S9452 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9453). Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 194.

In the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous production or the "pseudo-free" production. (Step S4971). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs the decorative symbol in what pattern at the stage of "pseudo 1" during the special symbol variation based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time. It is decided whether to stop (decorative pattern stop pattern). In the process of step S4971, the sub CPU 1301 has a decorative symbol stop pattern (10-second tempai stop pattern) such that the decorative symbol stop pattern becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1". In "pseudo 1", it is determined whether or not the decorative symbol is one of the decorative symbol stop patterns (14-second tempai stop pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. ..

When it is determined that a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai is generated at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous production or the "pseudo-free" production, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 is determined. Determine (step S9472). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined when the process of step S9462 of FIG. 193 is being executed, while the sub CPU 1301 otherwise (step S9463 of FIG. 188). When the process of Pseudo 2 is executed, or when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the notice of the logo lamp for Pseudo 2 has not been determined.

When it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S4973). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. For example, when the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". -Determine any of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". Determine the production corresponding to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has not been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time (step S9474). .. In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1", any one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined.

If it is determined in step S4971 that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production, the sub CPU 1301 performs the logo lamp warning effect in "pseudo 1". It is determined that there is no such thing (step S9475). After executing the process of step S9473, step S9474, or step S9475, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process performed in step S9453 of FIG. 192 has been described with reference to FIG. 194. The explanation is returned to FIG. 192.

After executing the process of step S9453, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Screen display in probabilistic mode>
FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the probabilistic mode.

As described above, when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation display of the normal symbol such that the fluctuation time is 600,000 msec) starts in the probability variation mode, the mode shifts to the bonus mode (see FIG. 129 (a)). In the bonus mode, while the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation) is being performed (over 600,000 msec), most of the right-handed game balls win the small hit large winning opening 1151 and a large number of them. The game ball is paid out.

Therefore, in the probability variation mode, the player plays the game while expecting that the variation pattern (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 128) having a variation time of 600,000 msec is determined as the normal symbol variation pattern. For this reason, in the probabilistic variation mode, every time a normal symbol change is performed, an effect (drum variation effect) corresponding to the pattern of the normal symbol variation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 195, in the probabilistic mode, the drum image 9201 (left drum image 9201L, middle drum image 9201C, and right drum image 9201R) is displayed on the display device 1007. The drum image 9201 is an image imitating a drum (reel). Then, in the area where each drum image 9201 is displayed, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the drum symbol 9202 (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R).

In the example shown in FIG. 195 (a), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in such a manner as to be variable. In the example shown in FIG. 195 (b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped as the "bell" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, and the "cherry" symbol, respectively. It is displayed in such an manner. As described above, in the probabilistic variation mode, every time the symbol is changed, the reel variation display and the stop display (slot game) imitating the effect (drum variation effect) are performed.

As shown in FIG. 195, in the probability variation mode, the remaining ST number image 9203 and the prize ball number image 9204 are also displayed on the display device 1007. The remaining ST number image 9203 is an image corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations (remaining ST number) performed in the probability variation mode. When the probability variation mode is started, "50" is displayed as the remaining ST number image 9203, and thereafter, each time the special symbol change is performed, the number indicated as the remaining ST number image 9203 is decremented by 1. When the number indicated as the remaining ST number image 9203 becomes "0", the probability variation mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. The prize ball number image 9204 is an image corresponding to the total number of game balls paid out after shifting to the first hit mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, the bonus mode that shifts with the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is referred to as the first bonus mode. In the first bonus mode, as in the probabilistic mode, the value indicating the number of remaining STs is updated (subtracted by 1) every time the special symbol change is performed once. Then, when the value indicating the number of remaining STs becomes 0, the mode shifts from the first bonus mode to the normal mode. Therefore, the probability variation mode and the first bonus mode are collectively referred to as the remaining ST number subtraction mode. When shifting from the probabilistic mode to the first bonus mode, the remaining ST number in the probabilistic mode is not reset, and the remaining ST number is inherited in the first bonus mode as well. In this embodiment, the remaining ST number subtraction mode may be referred to as a probability variation mode.

On the other hand, even when the start condition of the big hit game state is satisfied in the probability variation mode, the mode shifts to the bonus mode (see FIG. 129 (a)). In this embodiment, the bonus mode that shifts with the start of the big hit game state as a trigger is referred to as a second bonus mode. When the mode shifts to the second bonus mode, the remaining ST count is reset, and the remaining ST count is not updated (managed) in the second bonus mode. When the second bonus mode ends, if the limiter has not been reached, "50" is set as the remaining number of STs.

<Drum fluctuation effect determination process>
FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing a drum variation effect determination process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The drum variation effect determination process shown in FIG. 196 is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) by the sub control circuit 1300 when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 (gate passage). Is. The sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 1126 by receiving the ball passage detector passage detection command indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 1126. The ball passage detector passage detection command is set by the main control circuit 1200 in the ball passage detector passage detection process and transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300.

In the drum variation effect determination process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the current effect mode is the probability variation mode (see FIG. 129 (a)) (step S9501). Information indicating the effect mode is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303, and the sub CPU 1301 recognizes the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag storage area. Can be done.

When it is determined that the current effect mode is not the probabilistic mode, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the probability variation mode, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the normal symbol variation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time corresponds to the variation of the normal symbol loss length (variation shown in FIG. 128). It is determined whether or not the pattern is “05H”) (step S9502). Since the ball passage detector passage detection command contains information indicating the normal symbol variation pattern, the sub CPU 1301 receives the ball passage detector passage detection command, so that the sub CPU 1301 has the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the current gate passage. Can be recognized.

When it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the remaining ST number of times is a predetermined number (10 times) or more. (Step S9503). The remaining ST count is the remaining number of special symbol changes performed in the remaining ST count subtraction mode (probability variation mode and first bonus mode). A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 1303, and the value is updated every time a special symbol change is performed.

When it is determined that the number of remaining STs is less than a predetermined number (10 times), the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the ST recovery is confirmed (whether it is determined to shift to the jackpot gaming state) (step). S9504). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines ST recovery when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the currently performed special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot. It is judged that it is (it has been decided to shift to the big hit game state). As described above, after the jackpot game state ends, the probability change flag is set to ON (see FIG. 125), and the probability change mode is restored (ST is restored). However, if the number of times of the big hit game state executed from the first hit becomes a predetermined number (5 times) by executing the big hit game state (when the limiter is reached), the probability change mode is not restored. , Moves to normal mode. Therefore, in this case, it may be determined that the ST recovery has not been confirmed.

When it is determined in step S9502 that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is not a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, or in step S9504, ST recovery is not confirmed (big hit game state). If it is determined (it has not been determined to shift to), the sub CPU 1301 determines the drum variation effect pattern to be a loss pattern (step S9505). As the loss pattern, a complete loss pattern and a partial loss pattern are provided. The all-loss pattern is a drum variation effect pattern in which all different symbols are stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R. As for some lost patterns, the same symbol is stopped and displayed as two symbols among the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R, and the remaining one symbol is different from the two symbols. Is a drum fluctuation effect pattern in which is displayed as a stop.

As all the lost patterns, for example, the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. Such a pattern or a pattern such that the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. There are multiple patterns such as. As a partial loss pattern, for example, the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. The "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. A plurality of patterns such as a pattern are provided.

In the process of step S9505, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random number value to obtain one loss pattern from among such a plurality of loss patterns (a plurality of all loss patterns and a plurality of partial loss patterns). It is determined as the pattern of the drum fluctuation effect performed during the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the current gate passage. After executing the process of step S9505, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9503 that the number of remaining STs is a predetermined number (10 times) or more, or in step S9504, it is determined that ST recovery is confirmed (it is determined to shift to the jackpot gaming state). In this case, the sub CPU 1301 determines the drum variation effect pattern as the hit pattern (step S9506). The hit pattern is a drum variation effect pattern in which the same symbols are all stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R. As the hit pattern, for example, as the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R, all the "bell" symbols are stopped and displayed, and all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped and displayed. A plurality of patterns such as a pattern in which the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed are provided. In the process of step S9506, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random number value, so that one of the plurality of hit patterns is selected as a normal symbol variation corresponding to the current gate passage. Determined as a pattern for drum fluctuation production.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 executes a loss length fluctuation look-ahead lottery (step S9507). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value. Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the loss length fluctuation look-ahead lottery has been won (step S9508). When it is determined that the loss length variation look-ahead lottery has been won, the sub CPU 1301 sets the loss length variation look-ahead flag to ON (step S9509). This suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation is determined in the subsequent drum variation effect (the loss length variation look-ahead effect is performed) (see FIG. 197). The loss length variation look-ahead flag is set to off when the normal symbol variation (ordinary symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the current gate passage starts.

When it is determined in step S9508 that the loss length fluctuation look-ahead lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S9509 is executed, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the start of drum fluctuation production>
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing a drum variation effect start processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the processing at the start of the drum variation effect shown in FIG. 197, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 1126, when the normal symbol variation related to the passage through the gate starts, the effect mode determination process (FIG. 53) is performed by the sub control circuit 1300. This is a process performed in step S504). The sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that the normal symbol change starts by receiving the normal symbol change start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 1200 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300, for example, when the variable display of the normal symbol starts in the variable display start processing of the normal symbol (see step S293 in FIG. 43). To.

In the process at the start of the drum variation effect, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether or not the current effect mode is the probability variation mode (see FIG. 129 (a)) (step S9521). Information indicating the effect mode is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303, and the sub CPU 1301 recognizes the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag storage area. Can be done.

When it is determined that the current effect mode is not the probabilistic mode, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the probability variation mode, the sub CPU 1301 has a lost pattern (step 196) in which the drum variation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation this time occurs. It is determined whether or not it is (see S9505) (step S9522).

When it is determined that the drum variation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation this time occurs is not a loss pattern, the sub-CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the drum variation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation this time occurs is a loss pattern, the sub CPU 1301 determines the loss length variation look-ahead flag (see step S9509 in FIG. 196). ) Is set to on (step S9523).

When it is determined that the loss length fluctuation look-ahead flag is not set to ON, the sub-CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the loss length variation look-ahead flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 changes the drum variation effect pattern to the look-ahead pattern (step S9524). The look-ahead pattern is the above-mentioned partial loss pattern.

In the process of step S9524, the sub CPU 1301 has a random value when all the drum fluctuation effect patterns (see step S9505 in FIG. 196) determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation of this time occurs are lost patterns. By performing a lottery based on, one partial loss pattern is selected from a plurality of partial loss patterns, and the pattern of the drum fluctuation effect performed during the current normal symbol change is selected as the selected partial loss pattern. Replace with a pattern. If the drum fluctuation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation this time occurs is a partial loss pattern, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform such a replacement process and has already been determined. Maintain the drum fluctuation effect pattern. After executing the process of step S9524, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Specific aspects of drum fluctuation production>
FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation and the reserved ball currently being performed. FIGS. 199 to 201 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the drum fluctuation effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, up to four normal symbol start information (normal symbol hit determination random number value and normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number) are reserved. In FIG. 198 (a), there are three reserved balls in a situation where one normal symbol change is performed, and 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol change this time, and the first reserved ball. 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to, and 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the second reserved ball, and the normal corresponding to the third reserved ball. It shows a state in which 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the symbol variation.

In FIG. 198 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), one game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 while the normal symbol change is being performed, and the normal lottery accompanying the passage ( It shows a state in which 600,000 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball). FIG. 198 (c) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (b) has ended and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 198 (d) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (c) is completed and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 198 (e) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (d) is completed and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 198 (f) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (e) is completed and the next normal symbol variation (600,000 ms) is being performed.

FIG. 199 (a) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the states shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b). In FIG. 199 (b), the variation display shown in FIG. 199 (a) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 199 (b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R correspond to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b) being 500 ms. However, it is stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 199 (c) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198 (c). In FIG. 199 (d), the variation display shown in FIG. 199 (c) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (c) of 500 ms, in FIG. 199 (d), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have a loss pattern. It is stopped and displayed at.

FIG. 199 (e) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198 (d). In FIG. 199 (f), the variation display shown in FIG. 199 (e) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (d) of 500 ms, in FIG. 199 (f), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have a loss pattern. It is stopped and displayed at.

FIG. 199 (g) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198 (e). In FIG. 199 (h), the variation display shown in FIG. 199 (g) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (e) of 500 ms, in FIG. 199 (h), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have a loss pattern. It is stopped and displayed at.

FIG. 199 (i) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198 (f). In FIG. 199 (j), the variation display shown in FIG. 199 (i) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (f) of 600,000 ms, in FIG. 199 (j), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are hit patterns. It is stopped and displayed at. In FIG. 199 (k), the image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (shifting to the bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 1007.

As described above, one drum variation effect is a variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol. It is composed of a stop display of 9202R. The variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R starts at the same time as the start of the normal symbol variation, is performed over 500 ms, and each drum symbol 9202 stops at the same time. Here, when the result of the normal lottery is per normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is 500 ms, so that the stop timings of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are set. It coincides with the stop timing of the normal symbol.

Further, the stop display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is performed for 1500 ms. Therefore, it is possible to start the variation display of the next drum variation effect 1500 ms after the variation of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R has stopped in one drum variation effect. be. On the other hand, when the result of the ordinary lottery is per ordinary symbol, the time from the end of the ordinary symbol fluctuation (after the ordinary symbol is stopped) to the end of the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 is 1500 ms. Therefore, it is possible to start the next normal symbol change after 1500 ms has elapsed from the stop of the normal symbol in one normal symbol change. This makes it possible to match the cycle of the drum fluctuation effect with the cycle of the normal symbol fluctuation.

FIG. 199 shows an example in which a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation is determined as the normal symbol variation pattern, but the loss length variation look-ahead lottery is not won. On the other hand, FIG. 200 shows an example in which a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined as the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and the lottery for pre-reading the loss length fluctuation is won.

FIG. 200A shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the states shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b). In FIG. 200 (b), the variation display shown in FIG. 200 (a) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 200 (b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R correspond to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b) being 500 ms. However, it is stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 200 (c) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198 (c). In FIG. 200 (d), the variation display shown in FIG. 200 (c) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 200 (d), the left drum symbol 9202L and the middle drum correspond to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (c) is 500 ms and the loss length variation look-ahead lottery is won. The symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially lost and displayed as stopped.

FIG. 200 (e) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198 (d). In FIG. 200 (f), the variation display shown in FIG. 200 (e) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 200 (f), the left drum symbol 9202L and the middle drum correspond to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (d) is 500 ms and the loss length variation look-ahead lottery is won. The symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially lost and displayed as stopped.

FIG. 200 (g) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198 (e). In FIG. 200 (h), the variation display shown in FIG. 200 (g) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 200 (h), the left drum symbol 9202L and the middle drum correspond to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (e) is 500 ms and the loss length variation look-ahead lottery is won. The symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially lost and displayed as stopped.

FIG. 200 (i) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198 (f). In FIG. 200 (j), the variation display shown in FIG. 200 (i) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (f) of 600,000 ms, in FIG. 200 (j), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are hit patterns. It is stopped and displayed at. In FIG. 200 (k), the image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (shifting to the bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 1007.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 200, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in the hit pattern (see FIG. 200 (j)), and are left. The drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially lost and displayed (see FIGS. 200 (d), 200 (f), and 200 (h)). This suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation was determined (the normal symbol loss length variation was won). Even if the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, there is a possibility that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed in the loss pattern ( See step S9505 in FIG. 196). If a partial loss pattern appears even though the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, it can be said that the stop display of the partial loss pattern is a staging effect.

In the above, an example in which a part of the loss pattern is stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect of the loss length fluctuation has been described. The loss length variation look-ahead effect is not limited to this example, and for example, the loss length variation look-ahead effect as shown in FIG. 201 may be adopted.

FIG. 201 (a) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the states shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b). FIG. 201 (b) shows that the variation display shown in FIG. 201 (a) has ended, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have been stopped and displayed. In FIG. 201 (b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R correspond to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b) being 500 ms. However, it is stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 201 (c) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198 (c). FIG. 201 (d) shows that the variation display shown in FIG. 201 (c) has ended, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have been stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (c) of 500 ms, in FIG. 201 (d), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have a loss pattern. It is stopped and displayed at.

FIG. 201 (e) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the states shown in FIGS. 198 (d) and 198 (e). As described above, the variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is usually performed over 500 ms. On the other hand, the variation display shown in FIG. 201 (e) is performed over 4500 ms. FIG. 201 (f) shows that the variation display shown in FIG. 201 (e) has ended, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have been stopped and displayed. In FIG. 201 (f), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R correspond to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIGS. 198 (d) and 198 (e) being 500 ms. However, it is stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 201 (g) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variablely displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198 (f). FIG. 201 (h) shows that the variation display shown in FIG. 201 (g) has ended, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R have been stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (f) of 600,000 ms, in FIG. 201 (h), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are hit patterns. It is stopped and displayed at. In FIG. 201 (i), the image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (shifting to the bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 1007.

In the example shown in FIG. 201, one drum variation effect is performed while the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198 (d) and the ordinary symbol variation (two ordinary symbol variations) shown in FIG. 198 (e) are performed. It is supposed to be done. This suggests that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won. As described above, as the loss length fluctuation look-ahead effect, one drum variation effect may be performed while a plurality of normal symbol variations are performed. It is desirable that such a drum fluctuation effect longer than usual (long-time drum variation effect) be performed when the normal symbol loss length variation is won, but the normal symbol loss length variation is not won. It may be done in some cases. In a form in which a long-time drum fluctuation effect can be performed in both cases where the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won. If this is the case, it is preferable to configure it so that the drum fluctuation effect can be performed for a long time with a high probability as compared with the case where the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won.

As described above, in FIGS. 199 to 201, gate passage occurs in a situation where the remaining number of STs is a predetermined number (10 times) or more, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation corresponds to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to the gate passage. An example in which the pattern was determined was described. In this case, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a hit pattern. On the other hand, when the number of remaining STs is less than the predetermined number of times (10 times), the gate passage occurs, and as the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the gate passage, the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation is determined. In this case, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a loss pattern (see step S9503 in FIG. 196).

The normal symbol loss length fluctuation is performed over a long period of time (600,000 ms), but if the normal symbol loss length fluctuation occurs after the number of remaining STs is reduced, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed. Then, the probability change mode (probability change game state) ends. When the probabilistic game state ends, if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes very long (see FIG. 126). It will be almost impossible to win a prize. Therefore, in this case, since the significance of winning the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is lost, it is decided to refrain from making the hit pattern appear.

Although it is explained that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 600,000 ms, the variation time is not limited to this example. For example, as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, a plurality of fluctuation times such as 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, and 600 seconds are provided. It may be done. In this case, the remaining number of STs in which the hit pattern can appear may be different depending on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. For example, when T1 second (for example, 60 seconds) and T2 seconds (for example, 120 seconds) (T1 <T2) are provided as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation of T1 second is provided. When it is determined, the hit pattern appears on condition that the remaining ST number is N1 times (for example, 10 times) or more, while when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation of T2 seconds is determined, the remaining ST number is N2 times (for example, 10 times). For example, the hit pattern may appear on condition that it is 20 times or more (N1 <N2).

Further, the mode of the hit pattern may be different depending on the number of remaining STs when the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length is determined. For example, when the number of remaining STs when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined is 40 or more, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined. When the number of remaining STs is 20 or more and less than 40, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and the number of remaining STs when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined is less than 20. The "bell" symbol may be stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202.

Further, in the above, it has been described that the variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is started at the same time as the start of the normal symbol variation. The start timing of the variation display of the drum symbol 9202 is not limited to this example, and the variation display of the drum symbol 9202 may be started while the normal symbol variation is being performed. For example, the variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R may be started from the time when 1000 ms has elapsed from the start of the normal symbol variation. In this case, for example, the fluctuation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is performed from the time point where 1000 ms elapses to the time point after 1500 ms elapses from the start of one normal symbol change. , The left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped from the time when 1500 ms has elapsed from the start of the normal symbol change to the time when 1000 ms has elapsed from the start of the next normal symbol change. It can be configured to display.

In this way, by displaying the fluctuation of the drum symbol 9202 and the stop display so as to straddle the two normal symbol fluctuations, for example, while the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198 (e) is being performed ( For example, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in the hit pattern (see FIG. 199 (j)) after 1500 ms have elapsed from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation. Is possible. As a result, the stop display shown in FIG. 199 (j) is performed before the change in the normal symbol loss length shown in FIG. 198 (f) is started. As a result, the change in the normal symbol loss length is started. Immediately after that, the image as shown in FIG. 199 (k) can be displayed. From this point of view, the stop display shown in FIG. 199 (j) may be terminated before the start of the normal symbol loss length variation or at the same time as the start of the normal symbol loss length variation.

In the above, it has been described that after the stop display shown in FIG. 199 (j) is performed, the image as shown in FIG. 199 (k) is displayed, and then or at the same time, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation starts. When the normal symbol loss length fluctuation starts, it may be configured not to display either the stop display shown in FIG. 199 (j) or the image as shown in FIG. 199 (k). However, both may be configured not to be displayed. Further, by displaying a small symbol instead of (or in addition to the display of) the stop display shown in FIG. 199 (j) and the image display as shown in FIG. 199 (k), the normal symbol loss length is obtained. It may be configured to indicate that the fluctuation starts.

<Ordinary symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion production>
FIGS. 202 and 203 are diagrams showing an example of a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect.

As described above, in the probability variation mode (see FIG. 129 (a)), when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation display of the normal symbol such that the fluctuation time is 600,000 msec) starts, the mode shifts to the first bonus mode. .. In the first bonus mode, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect is performed. In the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is displayed on the display device 1007. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is an image showing the time corresponding to the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is suggested through the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image. ..

In FIG. 202A, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is displayed on the display device 1007. In the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a, after the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a hit pattern (see FIG. 199 (j)), the drum symbol 9202 is displayed. Is displayed when the display of is finished. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is an example of an image (see FIG. 199 (k)) corresponding to the start of “BONUS” (shifting to the first bonus mode). In this example, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is an image corresponding to the number "600: 00" as the normal symbol fluctuation of 600,000 ms starts as the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

After the state shown in FIG. 202 (a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is, as shown in FIGS. 202 (b) to (j), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210b → the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. Remaining time image 9210c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210h → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210i → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210j, and so on. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j are sequentially displayed for a short time (for example, about 500 ms), and the numbers indicated by the images decrease with time.

Although not shown in the figure, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j have different color depths, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a → normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image. 9210b → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210h → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210i → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j As the numbers shown by the image change, the color of the image becomes lighter. It will become. The color of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j is considerably lightened, and after the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image disappears. There is.

In the above, an example in which the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is displayed at the start of the first bonus mode has been described, but the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image may be displayed in the middle of the first bonus mode. ..

In the first bonus mode, a battle effect during the first bonus mode may be performed as an effect suggesting the possibility that the result of the second special lottery is a big hit. In the battle effect during the first bonus mode, the display device 1007 displays how the ally character and the enemy character fight. When a ally character defeats an enemy character in such a battle effect during the first bonus mode, a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image may be displayed. That is, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image can be displayed in a situation where the expectation that the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is relatively high.

In FIG. 203 (a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211a is displayed on the display device 1007. In this example, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is about 30,000 ms at the time when the ally character defeats the enemy character in the battle effect during the first bonus mode, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211a Is an image corresponding to the number "30:00".

After the state shown in FIG. 203 (a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is, as shown in FIGS. 203 (b) to (j), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211b → the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. Remaining time image 9211c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211h → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211i → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211j, and so on. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9211a to j are sequentially displayed for a short time (for example, about 500 ms), and the numbers indicated by the images decrease with time.

Similar to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j, they do not appear in the figure, but the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9211a to j have different color depths, and the normal symbol loss is normal. Long fluctuation remaining time image 9211a → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211b → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211e → Normal symbol loss Long fluctuation remaining time image 9211f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211h → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211i → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j and the image As the number indicated by changes, the color of the image becomes lighter. The color of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j is considerably lightened, and after the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image disappears. There is.

It should be noted that the numbers shown by the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image do not necessarily correspond exactly to the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. As a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image, a plurality of remaining times (for example, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds). , And 600 seconds) are provided. Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time When an image is displayed, the image corresponding to the remaining time closest to the (actual) remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation at that time is selected, and the selected normal symbol loss length is selected. The variable remaining time image is displayed. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210 shown in FIG. 202 is a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image corresponding to 600 seconds, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211 shown in FIG. 203 corresponds to 30 seconds. It is an image of the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

In this embodiment, when the normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image as described above is displayed on the display device 1007, the drum variation effect is not performed (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and The right drum symbol 9202R is not displayed on the display device 1007).

<Processing for medium-sized big hits in the 1st bonus mode>
FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing a first bonus mode medium jackpot processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the first bonus mode medium jackpot processing shown in FIG. 204, when the start condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied in the first bonus mode and the jackpot gaming state starts, the effect mode determination process is performed by the sub control circuit 1300 (FIG. FIG. This is the process performed in step S504 of 53). As described above, the first bonus mode is a bonus mode in which the transition is triggered by the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length. The sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the big hit game state starts by receiving the big hit start command.

In the first bonus mode medium jackpot processing, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes the prize ball counter addition processing (step S9601). The prize ball counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 207.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the effect mode from the first bonus mode to the second bonus mode (step S9602). The second bonus mode is a bonus mode that shifts when the start condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied in the probability variation mode or the first bonus mode. In the process of step S9602, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the second bonus mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303. After that, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the second bonus mode>
FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing a process at the end of the second bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The process at the end of the second bonus mode shown in FIG. 205 is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) by the sub control circuit 1300 when the jackpot gaming state ends in the second bonus mode. .. The sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the jackpot gaming state ends by receiving the jackpot end command. The jackpot end command is set by the main control circuit 1200 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300, for example, when the jackpot flag is cleared.

In the process at the end of the second bonus mode, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether or not the number of limiters has been reached depending on the current jackpot game state (step S9621). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 has a predetermined number of times (5 times) of the big hit game states executed from the first hit (the big hit game state ending this time is the fifth big hit after the first hit (including the first hit). It is judged whether or not it is in a gaming state).

When it is determined that the number of limiters has not been reached due to the current jackpot game state, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length is changing (currently, the normal symbol loss length is changing). Determine (step S9622). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern related to the normal symbol variation has expired after the variation display of the normal symbol related to the normal symbol loss length variation is started. The sub CPU 1301 can recognize that the normal symbol change starts by receiving the above-mentioned normal symbol change start command. Further, since the normal symbol change start command includes information indicating the type of the normal symbol change pattern (see FIG. 128), the sub CPU 1301 receives the normal symbol change start command to cause the normal symbol change. The fluctuation time of the pattern can be recognized. Then, while the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is managed by the sub control circuit 1300. The remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is updated by a timer update process (not shown) performed in a predetermined cycle. In the process of step S9622, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the normal symbol loss length change is in progress when the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length change is larger than 0.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length is fluctuating, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the first bonus mode (step S9623). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the first bonus mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol loss length is not fluctuating, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the probabilistic mode (step S9624). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the probability change mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9625). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 128). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. In this embodiment, even when the game ball passes through the passing gate 1126 during the big hit game state, the normal lottery is performed (the normal symbol variation pattern is determined) as in the non-big hit game state. It is supposed to be. The normal symbol variation corresponding to the passage through the gate may be performed during the jackpot gaming state, or may be performed after the jackpot gaming state is completed.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9626). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one of the reserved special symbol variations is a jackpot.

After executing the process of step S9623, if it is determined in step S9625 that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, or if it is determined in step S9626 that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 has the number of prize balls. The counter addition process is executed (step S9627). The prize ball counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 207. After executing the process of step S9627, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9621 that the number of limiters has been reached due to the current jackpot game state, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the normal mode (step S9628). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the normal mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303.

If it is determined in step S9626 that the jackpot has not been won, or after executing the process of step S9628, the sub CPU 1301 executes the result display process during the bonus mode (step S9629). The result display processing in the bonus mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 208. After executing the process of step S9629, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the first bonus mode>
FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing a process at the end of the first bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The process at the end of the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 206 is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) by the sub control circuit 1300 when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation ends in the first bonus mode. Is. As described above, while the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is managed by the sub control circuit 1300, and the sub control circuit 1300 has the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. By referring to the remaining time, it is possible to recognize that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation ends.

In the process at the end of the first bonus mode, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won (step S9641). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 128). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9642). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won if the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one of the reserved special symbol variations is a jackpot.

If it is determined in step S9641 that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, or if it is determined in step S9642 that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the prize ball counter addition process (step S9643). ). The prize ball counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 207.

If it is determined in step S9642 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the result display process in the bonus mode (step S9644). The result display processing in the bonus mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 208.

After executing the process of step S9643 or step S9644, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the effect mode from the first bonus mode to the probabilistic mode (step S9645). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the probability change mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303. After that, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Prize ball counter addition processing>
FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing a prize ball counter addition process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The prize ball counter addition processing shown in FIG. 207 is the first bonus mode medium jackpot processing (see step S9601 in FIG. 204), the second bonus mode end processing (see step S9627 in FIG. 205), or the first bonus. This is a process performed in the mode end process (see step S9643 in FIG. 205).

In the prize ball counter addition process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the extra game flag is set to ON (step S9661). The extra game flag is a flag indicating that an extra game has occurred. In this embodiment, the case of shifting from the probabilistic mode to the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode, and after the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode is completed, the player stays in the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode. There is. In this case, it is considered that the bonus mode is continued (consecutive villa). In the following, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode that first shifts from the probabilistic mode will be referred to as an initial game. Further, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode in which the player stays continuously after the end of the initial game is referred to as an extra game.

If it is determined that the extra game flag is not set to on, the sub CPU 1301 initially sets the game prize ball count counter (step S9662). The value of the initial game prize ball counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as the initial game). The total number of game balls paid out during this bonus mode is managed at any time in the work RAM 1303. In the process of step S9662, the sub CPU 1301 stores the total number as the value of the initial game prize ball number counter in a predetermined area of the work RAM 1303. Subsequently, the sub CPU 1301 sets the extra game flag to ON (step S9663).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the extra game flag is set to on, the sub CPU 1301 sets the value of the extra game prize ball counter to the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as an extra game). The total number of game balls paid out is added (step S9664). The value of the extra game prize ball counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the extra game, and is stored in the work RAM 1303. In the process of step S9664, the sub CPU 1301 pays out the game ball to the value of the extra game prize ball number counter stored in the work RAM 1303 during the current extra game (first bonus mode or second bonus mode). The value obtained by adding the total number of the above is stored in the work RAM 1303 as the value of the new extra game in-game prize ball counter.

After executing the process of step S9663 or step S9664, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Result display processing during bonus mode>
FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing a result display process in the bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The bonus mode result display process shown in FIG. 208 is a process performed in the second bonus mode end process (see step S9629 in FIG. 205) or the first bonus mode end process (see step S9644 in FIG. 206). be.

In the bonus mode result display process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the extra game flag (see step S9663 in FIG. 207) is set to ON (step S9681).

If it is determined that the extra game flag is not set to on, the sub CPU 1301 determines the total number of game balls paid out during this bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as the initial game). Initially, the value of the game prize ball counter is displayed on the display device 1007 (step S9682).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the extra game flag is set to on, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display the total value of the value of the initial game prize ball counter and the value of the extra game prize ball counter (the display device 1007). Step S9683). The total value corresponds to the total number of game balls paid out during the period from the transition from the probability variation mode to the initial game to the present (bonus mode consecutive villa section). Subsequently, the sub CPU 1301 sets the extra game flag to off (step S9684).

After executing the process of step S9682 or step S9684, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Production processing at the end of the second bonus mode>
FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode shown in FIG. 209, for example, when it is determined in step S9622 of FIG. 205 that the normal symbol loss length is changing, the sub-control circuit 1300 is performed before the processing of step S9623 is performed. It is done by.

In the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether or not the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 10 seconds or more (step S9701). As described above, while the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is managed by the sub control circuit 1300, and the sub CPU 1301 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. can do.

When it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 10 seconds, the sub CPU 1301 sets the effect data for returning to the probability change mode (step S9702). The staging data for returning to the probabilistic mode is staging data corresponding to the staging indicating returning to the probabilistic mode (staging for returning to the probabilistic mode), and is stored in the program ROM 1302. By executing the process of step S9702, the probability change mode return effect is performed. For example, a probability change mode return image (an image indicating that the probability change mode is returned) is displayed on the display device 1007.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 10 seconds or more, the sub CPU 1301 sets the extra game entry effect data (step S9703). The extra game rush effect data is the effect data corresponding to the effect indicating that the extra game is rushed (extra game rush effect), and is stored in the program ROM 1302. By executing the process of step S9703, the extra game rush effect is performed. For example, an extra game rush image (an image indicating that the extra game is rushed) is displayed on the display device 1007.

After executing the process of step S9702 or step S9703, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When the process of step S9702 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 may move to the process of step S9625 of FIG. 205. Further, when it is determined in step S9622 of FIG. 205 that the normal symbol loss length is not changing, the sub CPU 1301 is the same as the probability change mode return effect data set in step S9702 (for entering the extra game set in step S9703). The staging data (different from the staging data) may be set, or the staging data different from the probabilistic mode return staging data (different from the extra game entry staging data) may be set.

<Processing during the 1st bonus mode>
FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing a process during the first bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The process during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 210 is a process performed at a predetermined timing in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) by the sub control circuit 1300 in the first bonus mode. For example, the processing during the first bonus mode is performed when the second special symbol change starts in the first bonus mode.

In the process during the first bonus mode, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether or not the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more (step S9721). As described above, while the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is managed by the sub control circuit 1300, and the sub CPU 1301 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. can do.

When it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the sub CPU 1301 executes the process (I) during the first bonus mode (step S9722). The first bonus mode processing (I) will be described later with reference to FIG. 211.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won (step S9723). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 128). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode in-process (II) (step S9724). The first bonus mode processing (II) will be described later with reference to FIG. 212.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode in-process (III) (step S9725). The first bonus mode processing (III) will be described later with reference to FIG. 213.

After executing the process of step S9722, step S9724, or step S9725, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (I)>
FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode processing (I) relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode processing (I) shown in FIG. 211 is a processing performed in the first bonus mode processing (see step S9722 in FIG. 210).

In the first bonus mode processing (I), first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the remaining ST number of times is 5 or more (step S9741). As described above, the remaining ST count is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST count subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 1303, and the value is updated every time a special symbol change is performed.

When it is determined that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9742). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode in-stage effect (A) (step S9743). In the first bonus mode, the effect (A) is that in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number of times is 5 times or more, and the jackpot is won. It is a production performed in some cases. In the process of step S9743, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. Alternatively, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode end fanning lottery, and when the lottery is won, displays the first bonus mode end fanning image on the display device 1007. The first bonus mode end fanning image is an image that fangs the end of the first bonus mode. After executing the process of step S9743, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9742 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode step (B) (step S9744). In the first bonus mode, the effect (B) is that in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number of times is 5 times or more, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production performed in some cases. In the process of step S9744, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. The image displayed by the process of step S9744 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (A) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9744, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9741 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9745). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode step (C) (step S9746). In the first bonus mode, the effect (C) is that in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is less than 5, and the jackpot is won. It is a production performed in some cases. In the process of step S9746, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low but the ST recovery is confirmed. The image displayed by the process of step S9746 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (B) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9746, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9745 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode step (D) (step S9747). In the first bonus mode, the effect (D) is that in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is less than 5, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production performed in some cases. In the process of step S9747, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low and the bonus mode is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9747 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (C) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9747, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (II)>
FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode processing (II) relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode processing (II) shown in FIG. 212 is a processing performed in the first bonus mode processing (see step S9724 in FIG. 210).

In the first bonus mode processing (II), first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the number of remaining STs is 5 or more (step S9761). As described above, the remaining ST count is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST count subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 1303, and the value is updated every time a special symbol change is performed.

When it is determined that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9762). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode step (E) (step S9763). In the first bonus mode staging (E), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, and the remaining ST number of times is 5 times. This is the effect that is performed when the jackpot is won. In the process of step S9763, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9763 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (A) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9763, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9762 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode step (F) (step S9764). In the first bonus mode staging (F), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, and the remaining ST number of times is 5 times. This is the effect that is performed when the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9764, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9764 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (E) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (B) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9764, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9761 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9765). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode in-stage effect (G) (step S9766). In the first bonus mode staging (G), the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, the remaining ST number of times is less than 5, and the remaining ST number is less than 5. This is a production that is performed when a big hit is won. In the process of step S9766, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low but the ST recovery is confirmed. The image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (E) to (F) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (C) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9766, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9765 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode step (H) (step S9767). In the first bonus mode staging (H), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, and the remaining ST number of times is 5 times. It is a production performed when the number is less than and the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9767, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low and the bonus mode is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (E) to (G) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (D) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9767, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (III)>
FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode processing (III) relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode processing (III) shown in FIG. 213 is a processing performed in the first bonus mode processing (see step S9725 in FIG. 210).

In the first bonus mode processing (III), first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the number of remaining STs is 5 or more (step S9781). As described above, the remaining ST count is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST count subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 1303, and the value is updated every time a special symbol change is performed.

When it is determined that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9782). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode step (I) (step S9783). In the first bonus mode staging (I), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, and the remaining ST number of times is 5 or more. And, it is a production performed when a big hit is won. In the process of step S9783, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won again although the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is small. The image displayed by the process of step S9783 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (E) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9782 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode step (J) (step S9784). In the first bonus mode staging (J), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, and the remaining ST number of times is 5 or more. And, it is a production performed when the big hit is not won. In the process of step S9784, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won again although the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is small. The image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (I) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (B) to (F) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

When it is determined in step S9781 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9785). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode step (K) (step S9786). In the first bonus mode staging (K), the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, the remaining ST number of times is less than 5, and the jackpot. It is a production that is performed when you win. In the process of step S9786, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low but the ST recovery is confirmed. The image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (I) to (J) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (C) to (G) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9785 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode step (L) (step S9787). In the first bonus mode staging (L), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, and the remaining ST number of times is less than 5 times. And, it is a production performed when the big hit is not won. In the process of step S9787, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low and the bonus mode is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (I) to (K) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (D) to (H) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

After executing the process of step S9783, step S9784, step S9786, or step S9787, the sub CPU 1301 extends the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation (step S9788). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 sets the fluctuation time (for example, 600,000 ms) of the winning normal symbol fluctuation as the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. The winning ordinary symbol variation is the ordinary symbol variation related to the ordinary symbol loss length variation among the pending ordinary symbol variations. In addition, when a plurality of winning ordinary symbol fluctuations are included in the pending ordinary symbol fluctuations, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the winning ordinary symbol fluctuations start to change first among the plurality of winning ordinary symbol fluctuations. The fluctuation time is set as the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. The remaining time of the new normal symbol loss length change set in this way is not updated by the timer update process until the winning normal symbol change starts, and is subtracted after the start of the winning normal symbol change.

After executing the process of step S9788, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. As a result, after that, the production will be performed according to the remaining time of the new normal symbol loss length fluctuation. In other words, when the content of the production is decided, it is usually treated as if the remaining time of the symbol loss length fluctuation was extended. For example, in the second special symbol variation this time, any of the first bonus mode in-stage effects (I) to (L) shown in FIG. 213 is caused by the processing of step S9725 in FIG. 210. On the other hand, in the next second special symbol change, the process of step S9722 of FIG. 210 is performed, and any of the first bonus mode in-stage effects (A) to (D) shown in FIG. 211 is performed. It will be.

As described above, the processing during the first bonus mode described with reference to FIGS. 210 to 213 may be performed in the first bonus mode as the above-mentioned initial game, or the first bonus as an extra game (see FIG. 207). It may be done in a mode or in both of these first bonus modes. As described above, in the first bonus mode, there are a plurality of times including the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, whether or not the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, the number of remaining STs, and whether or not the jackpot is won. It is possible to perform an effect according to one of the elements or any two or more elements.

In the first bonus mode, the above-mentioned drum variation effect may be performed as an effect according to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. For example, when the result of the jackpot determination related to one special symbol variation is a jackpot, the drum symbol 9202 is stopped and displayed in the hit pattern as a drum variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (performed during the special symbol variation). If the result of the jackpot determination related to one special symbol variation is not a jackpot, the drum symbol 9202 is stopped and displayed in a loss pattern as a drum variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (performed during the special symbol variation). It may be done. Further, when the result of the big hit determination related to one special symbol change is a big hit, a look-ahead effect (for example, an effect similar to the above-mentioned loss length change look-ahead effect) is performed before the special symbol change is started. It may be done. As such a look-ahead effect, the same effect may be performed regardless of the number of remaining STs, or depending on the number of remaining STs (for example, when the number of remaining STs is 5 or more and less than 5). It may be possible that different effects can be performed (in some cases).

Further, when the drum variation effect is performed as the effect according to the special symbol variation, a plurality of drum variation effects may be associated with one special symbol variation. For example, while one special symbol variation is being performed, a plurality of drum variation effects may be performed as an effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation. Further, before the start of one special symbol variation, a plurality of drum variation effects may be performed as an effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation. As described above, one drum variation effect can be completed in about 2 seconds, and it is possible to configure the drum variation effect to be repeated a plurality of times.

<Remaining ST count adjustment process>
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the remaining ST number adjustment process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the above, it has been described that the remaining ST number image 9203 is displayed on the display device 1007 in the probability variation mode (remaining ST number subtraction mode) (see FIG. 195). The remaining ST number image 9203 may show an accurate value of the remaining ST number, or may not necessarily show an accurate value of the remaining ST number (suggest the remaining ST number). In the following, the remaining ST number image 9203 will be described as suggesting the remaining ST number.

The remaining ST number adjustment process shown in FIG. 214 is a process performed at a predetermined timing in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. For example, the remaining ST number adjustment process is performed when the first bonus mode starts or when the first bonus mode ends.

In the remaining ST number adjustment process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether or not there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST number for display and the value of the actual remaining ST number (step S9801). Actually, the value of the remaining ST number is an accurate value of the remaining ST number, and as described above, the value is updated (subtracted by 1) every time the special symbol change is performed. The value of the remaining ST number for display is an approximate value of the remaining ST number, and the value is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The number shown as the remaining ST count image 9203 corresponds to the value of the remaining ST count for display. The value of the actual number of remaining STs and the value of the number of remaining STs for display are stored in the work RAM 1303, respectively.

When it is determined that there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST count for display and the value of the actual remaining ST count, the sub CPU 1301 sets the value of the actual remaining ST count to the value of the remaining ST count for display (step S9802). ). As a result, the value of the remaining ST count for display is actually changed to the value of the remaining ST count, and the remaining ST count image 9203 is corrected so as to show an accurate value of the remaining ST count. For example, when the first bonus mode (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) starts or when the first bonus mode (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) ends, the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 increases or decreases. ..

When it is determined in step S9801 that there is no difference between the value of the remaining ST number for display and the value of the actual remaining ST number of display, or after executing the process of step S9802, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

The ST number adjustment process is not limited to the process shown in FIG. 214. For example, in the normal time, the value of the remaining ST number for display is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, but the value of the remaining ST number for display is actually the remaining ST. If it is larger (smaller) than the number of times, it can be configured to increase (decrease) the update frequency or increase (decrease) the value to be subtracted in one update. ..

<Remaining ST count update process for display>
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing a display remaining ST number update process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the above, it has been described that the value of the remaining ST number for display is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The timing at which the value of the remaining ST count for display is updated is not limited to this example. For example, the value of the remaining ST number for display may be updated every time the drum variation effect is performed (when the variation of the drum symbol 9202 starts), or the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) may be updated. The value of the remaining ST number for display may be updated when the second special symbol variation) starts. Hereinafter, an example in which the value of the remaining ST number for display is updated when the second special symbol change starts will be described.

The display remaining ST number update process shown in FIG. 215 is subordinated when the special symbol change related to the start winning is started after the game ball has won a prize in the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. This is a process performed by the control circuit 1300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53). The sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

In the display remaining ST number update process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot (step S9821). When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination relating to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot this time is a 10R jackpot (see FIG. 125) (step S9822). Since the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 includes the result of the jackpot determination and the information indicating the type of the jackpot, the sub CPU 1301 receives the special symbol effect start command. It is possible to make a judgment.

If it is determined in step S9821 that the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol change is not a jackpot (missing or small hit), or in step S9822, the jackpot this time is not a 10R jackpot (2R jackpot). If it is determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the error in the number of remaining STs for display is a predetermined value (10) (step S9823). The error of the remaining ST number for display is a value obtained by subtracting the value of the remaining ST number for display from the value of the actual remaining ST number. Here, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode is started, 50 is actually set as the value of the remaining ST number, and 40 is set as the value of the remaining ST number for display. Therefore, the initial value of the error of the remaining ST number for display is 10.

When it is determined that the error of the remaining ST number for display is a predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 1301 subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining ST number for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (step S9824). After that, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the error of the remaining ST number for display is not the predetermined value (10), it is determined whether or not the error of the remaining ST number for display is larger than the predetermined value (10) (step S9825). When it is determined that the error of the remaining ST number for display is larger than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 1301 adds 1 to the value of the remaining ST number for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (step S9826). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs either a process of adding 1 to the value of the remaining ST count for display or a process of maintaining the value of the remaining ST count for display by performing a lottery. May be decided. After executing the process of step S9826, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined that the error of the remaining ST number for display is smaller than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 1301 subtracts 2 the value of the remaining ST number for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (step S9827). After that, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9822 that the current jackpot is a 10R jackpot, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts 3 from the value of the remaining number of STs for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (step S9827). Here, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation related to the 10R jackpot is 15 seconds. The sub CPU 1301 may subtract 1 (subtract 3 in total) the value of the remaining number of STs for display stored in the work RAM 1303 every 5 seconds while the special symbol change is being performed. .. After executing the process of step S9827, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

The total time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation related to the 2R jackpot (see FIG. 125) and the time from the end of the special symbol fluctuation to the completion of the opening of the jackpot prize opening 1131 is 10 seconds. It has become. Further, the total time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation related to the small hit and the time from the end of the special symbol fluctuation to the completion of the opening of the small hit large winning opening 1151 is 5 seconds. In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation related to the loss is 5 seconds. Further, when a big hit game state occurs, the value of the remaining ST number for display may or may not be reset, but in the mode in which the remaining ST number for display update process shown in FIG. 215 is performed. , It may be configured so that it is not reset (after the end of the second bonus mode, the value of the remaining ST number for display before the start of the second bonus mode is inherited).

In the above, it has been described that the number of remaining STs is suggested by the number shown as the image 9203. In this embodiment, as an image suggesting the remaining ST number of times, a rank image (not shown) may be displayed on the display device 1007 instead of the remaining ST number of times image 9203. The rank image is, for example, an image corresponding to a character such as "A", "B", "C", "D", etc., and the character (rank) suggests the remaining number of STs. For example, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode is started, 100 is set as the display remaining ST number managed in the process of FIG. 215, and when the display remaining ST number is 60 or more, the rank image is "A". Is displayed, and if the number of remaining STs for display is 40 or more and less than 60, "B" is displayed as a rank image, and if the number of remaining STs for display is 20 or more and less than 40, it is displayed as a rank image. When "C" is displayed and the number of remaining STs for display is 5 or more and less than 20, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which "D" is displayed as a rank image. When the number of remaining STs for display is less than 5, the rank image may be deleted.

Further, when the value of the remaining ST count is actually a predetermined value (for example, 5), the value of the remaining ST count for display is always set to a specific value (for example, 0). The update may be controlled (subtraction or addition). For example, when the remaining ST count subtraction mode starts, 100 is set as the remaining ST count for display, and then every time the special symbol change is performed (when the special symbol change ends), the remaining ST count for display is set to 5 each. After subtraction and the value of the remaining ST number for display reaches 30, control is performed so that the remaining ST number for display may not be subtracted (added or maintained) by lottery even if a special symbol change is performed. .. As a result, when the value of the remaining ST number for display becomes 30 when the value of the actual remaining ST number becomes 11, each time the special symbol change is performed thereafter (when the special symbol change ends), the remaining display time remains. The number of STs is subtracted by 5, and when the value of the actual number of remaining STs becomes 5, the value of the number of remaining STs for display becomes 0. It is possible to adopt such a configuration. When the value of the actual remaining ST count is a predetermined value (for example, 5) or less (when the value of the display remaining ST count becomes a specific value (for example, 0)), the actual remaining ST count is It may be possible to shift to a mode in which a background is displayed different from the case where the value is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 5).

Further, in the above, it has been explained that the remaining ST number (rank) for display is updated based on the result of the jackpot determination or the type of jackpot, but for display based on the result of the ordinary lottery or the type of the ordinary symbol variation pattern. It may be configured so that the remaining ST number (rank) is updated. For example, in the case of winning the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, even if the value to be subtracted or added in one update is increased (smaller) than in the case of not winning the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. good. Similarly, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the value to be subtracted or added in one update may be increased (smaller) as compared with the case where the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit. As a result, it is possible to indicate whether or not the jackpot has been won and whether or not the normal symbol loss length has been won through the remaining ST number image 9203 and the rank image.

<Probability change mode, normal map look-ahead effect processing>
FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading effect process in the probabilistic mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the probabilistic mode, the pre-reading effect process in the probabilistic mode shown in FIG. 216 is a sub-control circuit when the special symbol variation related to the start winning is started after the game ball has won a prize in the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B in the probabilistic mode. This is a process performed by 1300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53). The sub control circuit 1300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

In the probabilistic mode middle normal map look-ahead effect process, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal map look-ahead lottery (step S9841). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the drawing pre-reading lottery has been won (step S9842). When it is determined that the normal drawing look-ahead lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal map look-ahead lottery has been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol change this time is a jackpot (step S9843). Since the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, the sub CPU 1301 makes the determination by receiving the special symbol effect start command. Is possible.

When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination relating to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9844). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 128). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (A) (step S9845). In the normal symbol look-ahead effect (A), when the normal symbol look-ahead lottery is won, the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol change this time is a big hit, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won. It is a production performed in. In the process of step S9845, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that both the jackpot and the normal symbol loss length variation have been won. The sub CPU 1301 may display different images on the display device 1007 according to the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process of step S9845, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9844 that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal map look-ahead effect (B) (step S9846). In the normal symbol look-ahead effect (B), when the normal symbol look-ahead lottery is won, the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol change this time is a big hit, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won. It is a production performed in. In the process of step S9846, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the jackpot has been won. The sub CPU 1301 may display different images on the display device 1007 according to the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9846 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effect (A), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9846, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9843 that the result of the big hit determination related to the current special symbol change is not a big hit, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination related to the current special symbol change is a small hit ( Step S9847). Since the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, the sub CPU 1301 makes the determination by receiving the special symbol effect start command. Is possible.

When it is determined that the result of the big hit determination relating to the special symbol variation this time is a small hit, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9848). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 128). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (C) (step S9849). In the normal symbol look-ahead effect (C), the normal symbol look-ahead lottery is won, the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol change this time is a small hit, and the normal symbol loss length variation is won. It is a production performed in some cases. In the process of step S9849, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that both the small hit and the normal symbol loss length variation have been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9849 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effects (A) to (B), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9849, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9848 that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal map look-ahead effect (D) (step S9850). In the probabilistic mode, the normal symbol look-ahead effect (D) is won in the normal symbol look-ahead lottery, and the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol change is a small hit, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won. It is a production performed in some cases. In the process of step S9850, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the small hit has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9850 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effects (A) to (C), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9850, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9847 that the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation this time is not a small hit, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9851). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 128). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (E) (step S9852). In the probabilistic mode, the normal symbol look-ahead effect (E) is won in the normal symbol look-ahead lottery, and the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol change this time is a loss, and the normal symbol loss length change is won. It is a production performed in. In the process of step S9852, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9852 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effects (A) to (D), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9852, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9851 that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal map look-ahead effect (F) (step S9853). In the probabilistic mode, the normal symbol look-ahead effect (F) is won in the normal symbol look-ahead lottery, and the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol change this time is a loss, and the normal symbol loss length change is not won. It is a production performed in. In the process of step S9853, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that neither the big hit to the small hit nor the normal symbol loss length variation is won. The image displayed by the process of step S9853 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effects (A) to (E), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9853, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

In the normal figure look-ahead effect (A), the normal figure look-ahead effect (C), and the normal figure look-ahead effect (E), the normal figure look-ahead effect (B), the normal figure look-ahead effect (D), and the normal figure look-ahead effect A specific image (an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won) is displayed with a higher probability than in (F). This suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation was won during the special symbol variation. As the image that can be displayed in the normal figure look-ahead effect (A), the normal figure look-ahead effect (C), and the normal figure look-ahead effect (E), an image that cannot be displayed in other effects (normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won). It is also possible to provide an image) that confirms that the work has been done.

In this embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds). , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds) may be provided. In this case, in the normal figure look-ahead effect (A), the normal figure look-ahead effect (C), and the normal figure look-ahead effect (E), different images are displayed according to the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol loss length fluctuation. It may be displayed on the device 1007.

Further, in the above, it has been described that the pre-reading effect processing in the probabilistic mode shown in FIG. 216 is performed in the probabilistic mode, but also in the first bonus mode, the same processing as the processing of steps S9841 to S9853 is performed. It may be that.

<Special figure look-ahead effect processing in probabilistic mode>
FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing a special figure pre-reading effect process in the probabilistic mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the probabilistic mode, the special map pre-reading effect process shown in FIG. 217 is performed by the sub control circuit 1300 when the normal symbol variation related to the passage through the gate starts after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 1126 in the probabilistic mode. This is a process performed in the determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53). The sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that the normal symbol change starts by receiving the normal symbol change start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 1200 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300, for example, when the variable display of the normal symbol starts in the variable display start processing of the normal symbol (see step S293 in FIG. 43). To.

In the special figure look-ahead effect processing in the probability change mode, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes the special figure look-ahead lottery (step S9861). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the special figure look-ahead lottery has been won (step S9862). If it is determined that the special figure look-ahead lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure look-ahead lottery has been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is a pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). It is determined whether or not (step S9863). Since the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the type of the normal symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 128), the sub CPU 1301 may make the determination by receiving the normal symbol variation start command. It is possible.

When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol variation this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9864). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot.

When it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the special figure look-ahead effect (A) (step S9865). In the special figure look-ahead effect (A), the special figure look-ahead lottery is won, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and the jackpot is won. It is a production performed in some cases. In the process of step S9865, for example, the sub CPU 1301 displays an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9845 of FIG. 216) that suggests that both the jackpot and the normal symbol loss length variation have been won. Displayed on the device 1007. The sub CPU 1301 may display different images on the display device 1007 according to the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process of step S9865, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9864 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the special figure look-ahead effect (B) (step S9866). In the special figure look-ahead effect (B), the special figure look-ahead lottery is won, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production performed in some cases. In the process of step S9866, for example, the sub CPU 1301 displays an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9852 of FIG. 216) suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won on the display device 1007. Let me. The image displayed by the process of step S9866 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure pre-reading effect (A), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9866, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9863 that the fluctuation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is not the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9867). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the jackpot has been won when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot.

When it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the special figure look-ahead effect (C) (step S9868). In the special figure look-ahead effect (C), the special figure look-ahead lottery is won, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is not the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and the jackpot is won. It is a production performed in some cases. In the process of step S9868, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the jackpot has been won (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9846 of FIG. 216). The sub CPU 1301 may display different images on the display device 1007 according to the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9868 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure pre-reading effects (A) to (B), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9868, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9867 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the special figure look-ahead effect (D) (step S9869). In the special figure look-ahead effect (D), the special figure look-ahead lottery is won, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is not a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production performed in some cases. In the process of step S9869, for example, an image suggesting that the sub CPU 1301 has not won the jackpot or the normal symbol loss length variation (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9853 of FIG. 216). Is displayed on the display device 1007. The image displayed by the process of step S9869 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (C), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9869, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

In the special figure look-ahead effect (A) and the special figure look-ahead effect (C), a specific image (winning a big hit) has a higher probability than the special figure look-ahead effect (B) and the special figure look-ahead effect (D). An image that suggests) is displayed. This suggests that the jackpot was won during the normal symbol change. As the image that can be displayed in the special figure look-ahead effect (A) and the special figure look-ahead effect (C), an image that cannot be displayed in other effects (an image that confirms that the jackpot has been won) may be provided. Further, in the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (D), depending on the number of remaining STs (for example, when the number of remaining STs is 10 or more, 5 times or more and less than 10 times, and 5 times, respectively. It may be configured to display different images (depending on whether it is less than or equal to). Further, the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (D) may be configured so that the above-mentioned drum fluctuation effect is performed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds). , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds) may be provided. In this case, in the special figure look-ahead effect (A) and the special figure look-ahead effect (B), different images may be displayed on the display device 1007 according to the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

Further, in the above, it has been described that the special figure pre-reading effect processing in the probabilistic mode shown in FIG. 217 is performed in the probabilistic mode, but the same processing as the processing in steps S9861 to S9869 is also performed in the second bonus mode. It may be that.

When the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation becomes a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, basically, the effect corresponding to the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (FIGS. 199 (j) and (Fig. 199 (j)) and ( k)) will be performed, but if the jackpot is won (for example, if the process of step S9865 is performed), the effect may not be performed. That is, in this case, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (first bonus mode) shifts to the jackpot gaming state (second bonus mode) shortly after the start, and until the start time of the jackpot gaming state, "BONUS" It may be possible to suspend the production corresponding to the start of "." For example, when the process of step S9865 is performed, the drum symbol 9202 may be stopped and displayed in the loss pattern (despite the fact that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won), or the drum symbol 9202 may be displayed. It is possible to stop and display the hit pattern and not perform the hit notification effect (see FIG. 199 (k)) at that time. After that, when the game shifts to the big hit game state, it is possible to configure the effect (hit notification effect) to excite the start of "BONUS".

<Icon stop suggestion notice production>
FIG. 218 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the first staging stage. FIG. 218 (b) is a diagram showing a pattern of the icon stop suggestion notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 218 (a), in the first effect stage, the icon stop suggestion meter image 9301 (“bell” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, “watermelon” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and “watermelon” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and “ The "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c) is displayed on the display device 1007. The "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c are images that imitate the meters, respectively.

Specifically, the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c are each in the initial display mode (meters are accumulated). Level 1 display mode (state in which the meter is accumulated in one stage), level 2 display mode (state in which the meter is accumulated in two stages), and level MAX display mode (state in which the meter is full). ) Can be displayed in any of the modes.

Icon stop suggestion meter The meters shown in the image 9301 are accumulated according to the effect (icon stop suggestion notice effect) performed during the first effect stage. The icon stop suggestion warning effect shown in FIG. 218 (b) is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)). The icon stop suggestion notice effect is an effect that can occur in combination with another big hit notice effect during one special symbol change. The icon stop suggestion notice effect is an effect that can be performed only in the first effect stage.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number "171" is an effect in which the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "172" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "173" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" are effects that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "bell" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is "bell" as compared with the case where the display mode is the initial display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is higher than that of the level 1 display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is higher than that of the level 2 display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting stop of the "bell" icon is the level MAX display mode, the "bell" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is confirmed that the transition to "pseudo 2" is performed.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "174" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting the stop of the "watermelon" icon is the level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "175" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting the stop of the "watermelon" icon is the level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "176" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting the stop of the "watermelon" icon is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "174" to "176" suggest that the above-mentioned "watermelon" icon may be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is higher than that of the initial display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is higher than the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is higher than the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting stop of the "watermelon" icon is the level MAX display mode, the "watermelon" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is confirmed that the transition to "pseudo 3" is performed.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "177" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting the stop of the "cherry" icon is the level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "178" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting the stop of the "cherry" icon is the level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "179" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting the stop of the "cherry" icon is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "177" to "179" suggest that the above-mentioned "cherry" icon may be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is "cherry" as compared with the case where the display mode is the initial display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode, as compared with the case where the display mode is the level 1 display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode, as compared with the case where the display mode is the level 2 display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting stop of the "cherry" icon is the level MAX display mode, the "cherry" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is decided to shift to a predetermined super reach.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "179" are basically the special when the special symbol change related to the start prize is performed after the game ball has won the first start opening 1120. It is performed as an effect to suggest to what stage the pseudo-continuous effect performed during the symbol change progresses. That is, the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting that the "bell" icon is stopped during one special symbol change suggests that the "bell" icon may be displayed during the special symbol change. Similarly, the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting stop of the "watermelon" icon during one special symbol change suggests that the "watermelon" icon may be displayed during the special symbol change. Further, the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting that the "cherry" icon is stopped during one special symbol change suggests that the "cherry" icon may be displayed during the special symbol change.

On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173", the look-ahead effect is performed after the game ball wins the first start opening 1120 and before the special symbol change related to the start prize starts. In some cases, in the look-ahead effect, it may be performed as an effect for suggesting to what stage the pseudo-continuous effect performed during the special symbol change progresses. In this case, the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon during one special symbol change may be that the "bell" icon is displayed during the next and subsequent special symbol changes (targeted for pre-reading). Will suggest. Therefore, in the look-ahead effect for one start prize, when the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting stop of the "bell" icon is the level MAX display mode, the pseudo is performed during the special symbol change related to the start prize. In the continuous production, it is confirmed that at least "pseudo 2" will be transferred.

<Icon stop suggestion notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 219 is the first effect stage notice when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 178). This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 1300 after the content lottery process (see FIG. 130).

Icon stop suggestion notice content In the lottery process, the sub CPU 1301 first determines whether or not the look-ahead effect occurs during the current special symbol change based on the information included in the sub change pattern (step S9901). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation is the look-ahead sub-variation pattern (see FIG. 183).

When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is generated during the special symbol variation this time, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is generated based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9902). When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect is generated, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9903).

When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo 3 icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9904). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 3" by performing a lottery based on the random number value, and also performs the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 3". In that case, the content of the production is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "177" to "179" as the icon stop suggestion warning effect performed in "pseudo 3". As a result, in "pseudo 3", the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting stop of the "cherry" icon can be changed.

When it is determined in step S9903 that the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3", or after the process of step S9904 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo 2 icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9905). ). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on the random number value, and also performs the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 2". In that case, the content of the production is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "174" to "176" as the icon stop suggestion warning effect performed in "pseudo 2". As a result, in "pseudo 2", the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting stop of the "watermelon" icon may change.

When it is determined in step S9903 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after the process of step S9905 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 executes the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process for pseudo 1 (step S9906). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value, and also performs the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 1". In that case, the content of the production is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" as the icon stop suggestion warning effect performed in "pseudo 1". As a result, in "pseudo 1", the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting stop of the "bell" icon can be changed.

When it is determined in step S9901 that the look-ahead effect occurs during the current special symbol change, the sub CPU 1301 executes a look-ahead icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9907). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion notice effect in the look-ahead effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value, and when the icon stop suggestion notice effect is performed in the look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 1301 determines. Determine the content of the production. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" as the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect performed in the look-ahead effect. As a result, the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting stop of the "bell" icon may change in the look-ahead effect.

After executing the process of step S9906 or step S9907, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<The pending change production lottery process>
220 and 221 are flowcharts showing the pending change effect lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 218 (a), the reserved ball image 9302 is displayed on the display device 1007 in the first effect stage. The reserved ball image 9302 is an image corresponding to the current (currently performed) special symbol change (the reserved ball). Further, one or more of the first reserved sphere image 9303a, the second reserved sphere image 9303b, the third reserved sphere image 9303c, and the fourth reserved sphere image 9303d, depending on the number of reserved special symbol fluctuations. Image is displayed. The first holding ball image 9303a is an image corresponding to the first holding ball, the second holding ball image 9303b is an image corresponding to the second holding ball, and the third holding ball image 9303c is an image corresponding to the second holding ball. It is an image corresponding to the third reserved ball, and the fourth reserved ball image 9303d is an image corresponding to the fourth reserved ball.

In this embodiment, an effect of changing the color of the hold ball image 9302 (the hold change effect) is performed. Through the color of the reserved ball image 9302, the result of the jackpot determination related to this special symbol change is suggested. The pending change effect is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)). The pending change effect is an effect that can occur in combination with another big hit notice effect during one special symbol change. The colors of the first reserved ball image 9303a, the second reserved ball image 9303b, the third reserved ball image 9303c, and the fourth reserved ball image 9303d may change due to the look-ahead effect.

The pending change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 220 and 221 is the first effect when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 178). This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 1300 after the stage notice content lottery process (see FIG. 130). The pending change effect lottery process may be performed even when the current effect stage is the second effect stage or the third effect stage.

In the hold change effect lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes the hold change pattern combination lottery process (step S9921). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the hold change effect (at what timing and how the color of the hold ball image 9302 is changed) by performing a lottery based on the random number value. The content of the hold change effect is defined by a combination of hold change patterns. The pending change patterns include a pending change pattern (1), a pending change pattern (2), a pending change pattern (3), a pending change pattern (4), a pending change pattern (5), a pending change pattern (6), and a pending change. A pattern (7), a pending change pattern (8), and a pending change pattern (9) are provided.

As the combination of the pending change patterns, for example, the combination of the pending change pattern (1) and the pending change pattern (9), the pending change pattern (1), the pending change pattern (2), the pending change pattern (3), and the pending change pattern (3). Combination of change pattern (9), hold change pattern (1), hold change pattern (2), hold change pattern (3), hold change pattern (4), hold change pattern (7), hold change pattern (8), And the combination of the hold change pattern (9), the hold change pattern (1), the hold change pattern (2), the hold change pattern (3), the hold change pattern (4), the hold change pattern (5), and the hold change pattern ( A combination of 6), a pending change pattern (8), and a pending change pattern (9) is provided. The pending change pattern (9) is always included in the combination of the pending change patterns. Further, when the pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns, the pending change pattern (8) is always included in the combination. In the process of step S9921, the sub CPU 1301 selects one combination from a plurality of combinations of pending change patterns provided in advance.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pending change pattern (1) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns determined in step S9921 (step S9922). The hold change pattern (1) changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or the "pseudo-less" effect starts (when the special symbol change starts this time). It is a pattern that makes you want to.

When it is determined that the pending change pattern (1) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change content based on the pending change pattern (1) (step S9923). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how the color of the reserved ball image 9302 is changed when the "pseudo 1" stage in the pseudo-continuous effect or the "pseudo-free" effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 1301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S992 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 1", the color of the reserved ball image 9302 is changed in the determined manner. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9922 is performed is the same as the color of the first reserved sphere image 9303a immediately before the start of the special symbol change this time. When the color of the reserved sphere image 9303 is changed due to the look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 1301 determines the color change mode of the reserved sphere image 9302 with reference to the color of the first reserved sphere image 9303a.

When it is determined in step S9922 that the pending change pattern (1) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the process of step S9923 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (2) is included in the combination of (step S9924). The hold change pattern (2) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when a tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or the "pseudo-free" effect. The combination including the pending change pattern (2) can be selected only when the sub-variation pattern in which the decorative symbol has the reach mode is determined in "pseudo 1".

When it is determined that the pending change pattern (2) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change content based on the pending change pattern (2) (step S9925). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the reserved ball image 9302 when the tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or the "pseudo-free" effect. For example, the sub CPU 1301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the process of step S9924. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 1" stage, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner. The color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the process of step S9924 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9923 when the process of step S9923 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9923 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved ball image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9922.

When it is determined in step S9924 that the pending change pattern (2) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the processing of step S9925 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (3) is included in the combination of (step S9926). The hold change pattern (3) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous staging starts. The combination including the hold change pattern (3) can be selected only when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs.

When it is determined that the pending change pattern (3) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change content based on the pending change pattern (3) (step S9927). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how the color of the reserved ball image 9302 is changed when the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo-continuous production starts. For example, the sub CPU 1301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9926 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 2", the color of the reserved ball image 9302 is changed in the determined manner. The color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the process of step S9926 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9925 when the process of step S9925 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9925 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved ball image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9924.

When it is determined in step S9926 that the pending change pattern (3) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the processing of step S9927 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (4) is included in the combination of (step S9928). The hold change pattern (4) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous staging. The combination including the pending change pattern (4) can be selected only when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs and the sub-variation pattern in which the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode is determined in "pseudo 2". It has become.

When it is determined that the pending change pattern (4) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change content based on the pending change pattern (4) (step S9929). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the reserved ball image 9302 when the tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous production. For example, the sub CPU 1301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9928 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner. The color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the process of step S9928 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9927 when the process of step S9927 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9927 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved ball image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9926.

When it is determined in step S9928 that the pending change pattern (4) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the processing of step S9929 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (5) is included in the combination of (step S9930). The hold change pattern (5) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo-continuous staging starts. The combination including the hold change pattern (5) can be selected only when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs and the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to the stage of "pseudo 3".

When it is determined that the pending change pattern (5) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change content based on the pending change pattern (5) (step S9931). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how the color of the reserved ball image 9302 is changed when the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo-continuous production starts. For example, the sub CPU 1301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the process of step S9930. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 3", the color of the reserved ball image 9302 is changed in the determined manner. The color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the process of step S9930 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9929 when the process of step S9929 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9929 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved ball image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9928.

When it is determined in step S9930 that the pending change pattern (5) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the processing of step S9931 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (6) is included in the combination of (step S9932). The hold change pattern (6) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo-continuous staging. In the combination including the hold change pattern (6), the pseudo-ream effect is generated, the pseudo-ream effect progresses to the stage of "pseudo 3", and the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode in "pseudo 3". It can be selected only when a sub-variation pattern is determined.

When it is determined that the pending change pattern (6) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change content based on the pending change pattern (6) (step S9933). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the reserved ball image 9302 when the tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo-continuous production. For example, the sub CPU 1301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9932 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 3" stage, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner. The color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the process of step S9932 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9931 when the process of step S9931 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9931 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved ball image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9930.

When it is determined in step S9932 that the pending change pattern (6) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the processing of step S9933 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination of (step S9934). The hold change pattern (7) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 in a situation where the color change that occurs until the hold ball image 9302 reaches the final color remains two more times. .. As the timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (7), for example, the first half of the super reach and the like can be mentioned.

When it is determined that the pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change content based on the pending change pattern (7) (step S9935). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 in a situation where the color change that occurs until the reserved sphere image 9302 reaches the final color remains two more times. decide. For example, the sub CPU 1301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the process of step S9934. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 will change in the determined manner in the situation where the color change remains two more times. The color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the process of step S9934 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9933 when the process of step S9933 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9933 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved ball image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9932.

When it is determined in step S9934 that the pending change pattern (7) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the processing of step S9935 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (8) is included in the combination of (step S9936). The hold change pattern (8) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 in a situation where the color change that occurs until the hold ball image 9302 reaches the final color remains once more. .. Examples of the timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (8) include the first half and the second half of the super reach.

When it is determined that the pending change pattern (8) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change content based on the pending change pattern (8) (step S9937). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 in a situation where the color change that occurs until the reserved sphere image 9302 reaches the final color remains once more. decide. For example, the sub CPU 1301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9936 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 will change in the determined manner in the situation where the color change remains once more. The color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the process of step S9936 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9935 when the process of step S9935 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9935 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved ball image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9934.

When it is determined in step S9936 that the pending change pattern (8) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the processing of step S9937 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of (step S9938). The hold change pattern (9) is a pattern used to change the color of the hold ball image 9302 to the final color. Although detailed description will be omitted, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 is finally changed to which color by a lottery based on a random number value before the reserved change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 220 and 221 is performed. (The final color of the reserved ball image 9302) has been determined. In the process of step S9938, the sub CPU 1301 always determines that the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns. The timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (9) is, for example, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 1" stage, when the "pseudo 2" starts, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage, and "pseudo 3". , When a tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3", the first half and the second half of the super reach, and the like can be mentioned.

When it is determined that the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change content based on the pending change pattern (9) (step S9939). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 in order to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 to the final color. For example, the sub CPU 1301 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9938 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 is changed in the determined mode, and the color of the reserved ball image 9302 is a lottery performed before the reserved change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 220 and 221 is performed. It will be the final color determined by (original lottery). The color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the process of step S9938 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9937 when the process of step S9937 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9937 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved ball image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9936.

When it is determined in step S9938 that the pending change pattern (9) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the process of step S9939 is executed, the sub-CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

If the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the process of step S9938 is already the final color, the sub CPU 1301 determines "NO" in the process of step S9938. May be good. In this case, the sub CPU 1301 may display the reserved ball image 9302 in the final color, or may display it in another color (default color). If the color of the reserved ball image 9302 changes to another color after the color of the reserved ball image 9302 becomes the final color, it may be determined that the reserved ball image 9302 is a false effect.

<Slot game during the 6th specific super reach>
FIG. 222 is a diagram showing the contents of the effect block in the sixth specific super reach. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing a sixth specific super reach content lottery process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in the second effect stage (see FIG. 129 (a)), the eighth advance notice effect (see FIG. 185) may be performed, and when the eighth advance notice effect is performed, the sixth advance notice effect is performed. It may develop into a specific super reach. In the 6th specific super reach, a game (slot game during the 6th specific super reach) is played in which a plurality of types of icons are variablely displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right on the display device 1007 and then stopped and displayed. .. In the 6th specific super reach middle slot game, when the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (when all three are aligned), it develops into a predetermined super reach. The sixth specific super reach slot game is composed of a plurality of production blocks. FIG. 222 illustrates the contents of the staging block.

In the effect block "1", an image corresponding to the description of the sixth specific super reach slot game is displayed on the display device 1007. In the effect block "2", an image (for example, an image showing the title of the predetermined super reach) indicating that the slot game during the sixth specific super reach was successful (developing into a predetermined super reach) is displayed on the display device 1007. Is displayed in. In the effect block "3", an image indicating that the sixth specific super reach slot game has failed (the sixth specific super reach slot game ends) is displayed on the display device 1007.

In the production block "4", a plurality of types of icons are displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right of the display device 1007 for 8 seconds, and an image that encourages the alignment of "additional" icons. Is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "additional" icon is not stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (the "additional" icons are not aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "4" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach ends. In the production block "5", a plurality of types of icons are displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right of the display device 1007 for 8 seconds, and an image that encourages the alignment of "additional" icons. Is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "additional" icon is stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (three "additional" icons are aligned). When the effect corresponding to the effect block "5" is performed, a predetermined number of values of the above-mentioned "PLAY TIME" (see FIG. 184 (b)) are added, and the slot game during the sixth specific super reach continues. ..

In the production block "6", a plurality of types of icons are displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right of the display device 1007 for 8 seconds, and an image that encourages the alignment of the "mission" icons. Is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "Mission" icon is not stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (the "Mission" icons are not aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "6" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach ends. In the production blocks "7" and "8", multiple types of icons are displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right of the display device 1007 for 8 seconds, and the "Mission" icons are aligned. After such an image is displayed on the display device 1007, the "mission" icon is stopped and displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right (three "mission" icons are aligned), and the predetermined mission is entered. After that, the mission fails in the production block "7", and the mission succeeds in the production block "8". When the production corresponding to the production block "7" is performed, the slot game during the 6th specific super reach continues, and when the production corresponding to the production block "8" is performed, the predetermined super reach To develop into.

In the production block "9", a plurality of types of icons are displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right of the display device 1007 for 8 seconds, and an image that encourages the alignment of the "cherry" icons. Is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "cherry" icon is not stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (the "cherry" icons are not aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "9" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach continues. In the production block "10", a plurality of types of icons are displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right of the display device 1007 for 8 seconds, and an image that encourages the alignment of the "cherry" icons. Is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (three "cherry" icons are aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "10" is performed, it develops into a predetermined super reach.

In the sixth specific super reach content lottery process shown in FIG. 223, when the current effect stage is the second effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 178), the effect number “153” is used. This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 1300 when it is determined that the effect corresponding to "" or "154" is to be performed. The content of each effect block is determined by performing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process.

In the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the final effect block (step S9941). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect block "2" as the final effect block when the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is a sub variation pattern that develops into a predetermined super reach. .. On the other hand, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect block "3" as the final effect block when the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is a sub variation pattern that does not develop into a predetermined super reach.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the effect block in the stage immediately before the final effect block (step S9942). In this process, when the effect block "2" is determined as the final effect block, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random number value to use the effect block as an effect block immediately before the final effect block. Determine "8" or "10". On the other hand, when the effect block "3" is determined as the final effect block, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random number value to perform the effect block "4" as the effect block immediately before the final effect block. "Or" 6 "is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9943). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 sets a new stock timer by subtracting the value corresponding to the time corresponding to the effect block determined in step S9942 from the value of the stock timer at the time when the sixth specific super reach starts. Is stored in the work RAM 1303 as the value of. The value of the stock timer at the time when the 6th specific super reach starts corresponds to the value of "PLAY TIME" shown by the stock timer image 9110 at the time when the slot game during the 6th specific super reach starts during this special symbol change. is doing. The value is determined before the sixth specific super reach content lottery process is started.

Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "4" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "4". The time corresponding to the effect block "6" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "6". The time corresponding to the effect block "8" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect (excluding the mission) corresponding to the effect block "8". The time corresponding to the effect block "10" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "10". The value of the stock timer at the time when the sixth specific super reach starts is always a value corresponding to 8 seconds or more.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the value of the stock timer is larger than 0 (step S9944). When it is determined that the value of the stock timer is larger than 0, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the last effect block among the undetermined effect blocks (step S9945). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random number value, and as the final effect block, any one of the effect block "5", the effect block "7", and the effect block "9". Determine the production block.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9946). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 sets a value obtained by subtracting the value corresponding to the time corresponding to the effect block determined in step S9945 from the value of the stock timer stored in the work RAM 1303 as the value of the new stock timer. Stored in the work RAM 1303. Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "5" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "5". The time corresponding to the effect block "7" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect (excluding the mission) corresponding to the effect block "7". The time corresponding to the effect block "9" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "9". When the effect block "5" is determined in step S9945, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts the value of the stock timer and adds the value of the stock timer by a predetermined number (additional time). The value of the stock timer is configured to be N times 8 seconds (N is an integer).

After executing the process of step S9946, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the process to step S9944. If it is determined in step S9944 that the value of the stock timer is 0, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the first effect block (step S9947). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect block "1" as the first effect block. After executing the process of step S9947, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

By executing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process described above, the content of the sixth specific super reach middle slot game is determined. For example, in the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, the staging block "2" is sequentially determined in step S9941, the staging block "10" is determined in step S9942, the staging block "9" is determined in step S9945, and further. If the staging block "5" is determined in step S9945, the staging block "7" is determined in step S9945, and then the staging block "1" is determined in step S9947, the staging block "1" is determined in the sixth specific super reach. Block "1"-> Staging block "7"-> Staging block "5"-> Staging block "9"-> Staging block "10"-> Staging block "2" (6th specific super reach content Lottery process determined order The effect corresponding to each effect block is performed in the reverse order).

<Effects and logo lamps on the LCD screen>
FIG. 224 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo effect preview effect for the first effect stage. FIG. 224 (b) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo effect preview effect for the second effect stage. 225 to 227 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined position (for example, the upper side of the display device 1007) of the game board unit 1010, and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. As an effect using such a logo lamp, a logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage and a logo effect advancer effect for the second effect stage may be performed.

The logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage shown in FIG. 224 (a) is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage. The logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage can occur only in the first effect stage. Further, the logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage is an effect that can occur in combination with another big hit notice effect during one special symbol change.

Although not shown, first, the decorative pattern becomes a tenpai 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, prior to the production corresponding to the production numbers "181" to "184". After that, in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "181" to "184", the button image is displayed on the display device 1007 and the operation of the effect button 1054 is accepted. Then, a predetermined effect appears on the display device 1007, and the image display is such that the effect is absorbed by the logo cover. After that, in the production corresponding to the production number "181", nothing in particular occurs and the production ends. On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "182" to "184", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined mode after waiting for a predetermined time (1 second) to elapse from the absorption of the effect.

Specifically, in the production corresponding to the production number "182", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in white in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively. Further, in the production corresponding to the production number "183", the logo lamp emits red light. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in red in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively.

In the production corresponding to the production number "184", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates the appearance of a given word (eg, "CHANGE") lit in white throughout the logo cover. A large number of LEDs are arranged side by side in a matrix (lattice pattern) on the back side of the logo cover, and an arbitrary word can be formed by appropriately selecting the LED to emit light.

The production corresponding to the production number "182" has a higher expectation of a big hit than the production corresponding to the production number "181", and the production corresponding to the production number "183" corresponds to the production number "182". The jackpot expectation is higher than that of the staging, and the staging corresponding to the staging number "184" has the highest jackpot expectation.

The logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage shown in FIG. 224 (b) is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the second effect stage. The logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage can occur only in the second effect stage. Further, the logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage is an effect that can occur in combination with another big hit notice effect during one special symbol change.

In the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "191" to "193", the image display is such that the screen (monitor) of the display device 1007 is reduced after the decorative design starts to fluctuate (see FIG. 225 (a)). (See FIG. 225 (b)). Then, the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) becomes an image display that moves to the left (see FIG. 225 (c)), and a plurality of icons are displayed instead of the decorative pattern, and each icon is illuminated in sequence. The displayed roulette effect is performed (see FIG. 225 (d)), the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and the operation of the effect button 1054 is accepted (see FIG. 225 (e)). After that, one icon is selected as a result of the roulette effect, and an image showing the title of the effect corresponding to the icon (for example, "CHANGE" shown in FIG. 225 (f)) is displayed on the display device 1007. "CHANGE" indicates the title of the effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 226 and 227) in which the effect on the display device 1007 is absorbed by the logo cover.

While the button image is being displayed, a predetermined button effective time is set. When the effect button 1054 is operated during the button effective time, when the effect button 1054 is operated (even if the button effective time has not expired, immediately after the operation), the next screen (for example, " The screen indicating that "CHANGE" is selected) is displayed. On the other hand, if the effect button 1054 is not operated during the button valid time, the next screen (for example, "CHANGE" is selected at the end of the button valid time (at the moment when the button valid time ends). Screen).

After that, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "191" to "193", the effect on the display device 1007 is absorbed by the logo cover (effect absorption effect). In the effect absorption effect, a predetermined effect appears on the display device 1007, and the image display is such that the effect is absorbed by the logo cover. After that, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "191", the image corresponding to the fact that the logo lamp does not emit light in a predetermined mode and the result of the effect absorption effect fails is displayed on the display device 1007, and the display device 1007 is displayed. Becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

On the other hand, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "192" and "193", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined mode. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in predetermined colors in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively. As a predetermined effect, a plurality of types of effects having different colors (white effect, red effect, etc.) may be provided, and the logo lamp may be configured to emit light in the same color as the appearing effect. .. After the logo lamp emits light, the decorative design becomes a tenpai. At this time, in the production corresponding to the production number "193", "PLAY TIME" is stocked. After that, it shifts to the notice after the success of Tempai. As described above, in the notice after the success of the tempai, a connecting effect corresponding to the super reach of the development destination is performed (see FIG. 185 (b)).

FIG. 226 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 after the start of the effect absorption effect in the effect corresponding to the effect number “192”. As shown in FIG. 226, when the effect absorption effect is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 226 (a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced. It is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the first logo unit 9401L (see FIG. 226 (b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps with the first logo unit 9401L, the first effect image 9402 disappears. At the same time, the first logo unit 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed by the first logo unit 9401L, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410L of "X" is formed (see FIG. 226 (c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the display device 1007, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo unit 9401C while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 226 (c)). ), When the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps with the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed by the second logo unit 9401C, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410C of "Y" is formed (see FIG. 226 (d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the display device 1007, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo unit 9401R while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 226 (d)). ), When the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps with the third logo unit 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears and the third logo unit 9401R emits light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed by the third logo unit 9401R, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the character "Z" 9410R is formed (see FIG. 226 (e)). After that, the reduced monitor (decorative symbol) becomes an image display moving to the right (see FIG. 226 (e)), and the decorative symbol 9001 becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 226 (f)).

FIG. 227 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 after the start of the effect absorption effect in the effect corresponding to the effect number “191”. As shown in FIG. 227, when the effect absorption effect is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 227 (a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced. It is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the first logo unit 9401L (see FIG. 227 (b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps with the first logo unit 9401L, the first effect image 9402 disappears. At the same time, the first logo unit 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed by the first logo unit 9401L, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410L of "X" is formed (see FIG. 227 (c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the display device 1007, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo unit 9401C while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 227 (c)). ), When the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps with the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed by the second logo unit 9401C, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410C of "Y" is formed (see FIG. 227 (d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the display device 1007, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo unit 9401R while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 227 (d)). ), When the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps with the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears, but the third logo portion 9401R does not emit light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed by the third logo portion 9401R, but the character 9410R of "Z" is not formed. After that, the logo lamp goes out (the letter 9410L of "X" and the letter 9410C of "Y" go out), and the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moves to the right (see FIG. 227 (e)). , The decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 227 (f)).

As described above with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227, in the logo effect preview effect for the second effect stage, the effect on the display device 1007 is absorbed by the logo cover (effect absorption effect). Although not shown, the same effect absorption effect is performed in the logo effect preview effect for the first effect stage. The effect absorption effect is an effect in which the image displayed in the vicinity of the logo cover becomes smaller or disappears, so that the image appears as if it acts on the logo cover (is absorbed by the logo cover). Is.

In addition, in FIG. 226 and FIG. 227, the first logo portion 9401L, the second logo portion 9401C, and the third logo portion 9401R are divided (adjacent logo portions are not continuously formed, and a gap is formed. Although the example (formed) has been described, the first logo portion 9401L, the second logo portion 9401C, and the third logo portion 9401R may be integrally formed. In particular, when displaying an arbitrary word on the entire logo cover as in the effect corresponding to the effect number "184", it is desirable that the entire logo cover is integrally formed.

By the way, also in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, not only may it be controlled to the A time saving gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, but also to the B time saving gaming state when the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state is satisfied. Then, when the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied, the transition to the C-time shortening gaming state is performed.
[5-3. B production control related to the transition to the short game state]
In the fifth pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the sub CPU 1301 is in a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which left-handed strike is a normal gaming mode. , In the display device 1007, the display of the first display effect is started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, while the display of the second display effect is performed even if the variable display of the second special symbol is started. do not have. Further, in a gaming state in which right-handed strike is a normal gaming mode (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the sub CPU 1301 is the second display device 1007. While the display of the second display effect is started with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display of the first display effect is not performed even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started. The display device 1007 is preferably a liquid crystal display device.

The first display effect in which the display is started with the variable display of the first special symbol is, for example, a display effect performed in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007 in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol (for example,). Variable display of decorative patterns, display effects by characters, etc.) are equivalent. The symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, for example, blinking in one corner of the display device 1007 regardless of the game state, is not included in the first display effect.

Similarly, the second display effect in which the display is started with the variable display of the second special symbol is, for example, a display effect performed in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007 in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. (For example, variable display of decorative patterns, display effect by characters, etc.) corresponds to this. The symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, for example, blinking in one corner of the display device 1007 regardless of the game state, is not included in the second display effect.

By the way, in a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the final change in the ceiling. If the variable display of the other special symbol is started during the variable display of one of the special symbols, the display effect may be unnatural and the interest may be reduced.

For example, at an arbitrary timing from the start of the variable display of one special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling to the end of the variable display (for example, when the variable display of the special symbol is started), the B time reduction game state is set. In the case of transition, while the first display effect is performed on the display device 1007, a situation may occur in which the display device 1007 is internally transitioned to the B time saving game state. In particular, if the variable display of the other special symbol is started between the start of the variable display of one special symbol and the end of this variable display as the final ceiling variation, the first display effect to the second display effect Switching to can be unnatural.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the display effect performed when shifting to the B time saving game state in the final ceiling fluctuation is performed in a natural manner as described below, so that the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. .. Hereinafter, the staging control related to the transition to the B time saving game state performed by the sub CPU 1301 will be described.

[5-3-1. B Production control with a normal pattern related to the transition to the short game state]
FIG. 228 is a time chart showing the effect control in the normal pattern related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state, (A) a time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the first normal pattern, (B) No. 2 It is a time chart showing an example of staging control performed in a normal pattern.

First, FIG. 228 (A) is mainly referred to, and FIG. 229 is supplementarily referred to, and the staging control in the first normal pattern will be described. FIG. 229 is an example of a display effect of the first normal pattern displayed in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007.

In the first normal pattern shown in FIG. 228 (A), the variable display immediately before the ceiling final change (hereinafter referred to as “ceiling final change”) is the variable display of the first special symbol, and the ceiling final change is the first. This is a pattern when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol in the final change of the ceiling. The "liquid crystal effect" shown in FIG. 228 corresponds to the display effect displayed on the display device 1007. In addition, "Special 1_Loss variation" represents the variation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a loss, and "Special 1_Big hit variation" is the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol. It shows the fluctuation pattern in a certain case. Similarly, "Special 2_Loss variation" represents the variation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss, and "Special 2_Small hit variation" is the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern in the case of a small hit is represented, and "special 1_big hit fluctuation" represents the fluctuation pattern in the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed as the variation before the final ceiling, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of the decorative symbol in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007, as shown in FIG. 229 (a). When the variable display of the first special symbol as the final pre-ceiling variation is completed and the display mode of the loss is derived to the one special symbol display unit 163, the sub CPU 1301 is lost as shown in FIG. 229 (b). The image showing the above is confirmed and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 228 (A), in the first normal pattern, the sub CPU 1301 has a first display effect associated with the variable display of the first special symbol at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol which is the final variation of the ceiling. For example, the shutter closing effect is started. This shutter closing effect functions as an effect indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, that is, a transition effect to the B time saving game state.

The shutter closing effect is an image shown in FIG. 229 (c). In this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 1301 also performs a right-handed navigation effect instructing right-handed. In addition, in the shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 1301 replaces or adds to the right-handed navigation effect, for example, an effect suggesting the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, an effect related to the start of the B time saving game state, and the like. , You may perform the production related to the progress of the game. Further, in this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 1301 also displays an image indicating that the night mode is being prepared. In the present embodiment, the night mode is a display effect suggesting that the game state is controlled to the B time reduction game state, and the night mode is a display effect suggesting that the player is preparing for the B time reduction game state while preparing for the night mode. be.

By the way, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed as the final fluctuation of the ceiling, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol may be a big hit or a time saving hit.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol whose variable display is started as the final ceiling variation is a jackpot, the sub CPU 1301 executes a normal jackpot variation effect without executing the shutter closing effect. ..

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol whose variable display is started as the final ceiling variation is the time saving hit, the sub CPU 1301 performs the B time saving game according to the processing when a plurality of time saving game states overlap. When shifting to the state, it is advisable to perform a transition effect to the B time saving game state (for example, a shutter closing effect), and when shifting to the C time saving game state, it is preferable to perform a transition effect suggesting the transition to the C time saving gaming state. .. In this case, the transition effect to the B time reduction game state and the transition effect to the C time reduction game state may be the same or almost the same in appearance, or may be different effects.

In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol includes a small hit, the first change is as the ceiling final variation. When the special symbol is variablely displayed, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol may be a small hit. In this case, since the main CPU 1201 controls to the small hit game state and then shifts to the B time reduction game state, the sub CPU 1301 performs the small hit winning effect suggesting that the small hit game state has been won, and the B time reduction game state. It is preferable to give priority to the transition effect to (for example, the shutter closing effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may prioritize the transition effect to the B time saving game state over the small hit winning effect.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final change of the ceiling, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol may be a big hit or a time saving hit.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol whose variable display is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a big hit, the sub CPU 1301 ends the shutter closing effect and is irregular. It is advisable to execute the jackpot fluctuation effect. That is, it is preferable that the irregular jackpot variation effect is executed with priority over the transition effect to the B time saving game state.

Also. When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol whose variable display is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling change is a small hit, the sub CPU 1301 shifts to the B time saving game state (for example,). , Shutter closing effect) is finished, and for example, a night mode display effect is started as a display effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the B time saving game state, and a small hit suggesting that the night mode display effect is a small hit. It is advisable to perform a hit suggestion effect. That is, it is preferable to give priority to the small hit suggestion effect rather than the transition effect to the B time saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may prioritize the transition effect to the B time saving game state rather than the small hit suggestion effect.

During the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation, when the variable display of the second special symbol (excluding the jackpot fluctuation) is started as the variable display of the first rotation in the B time saving game state, the main special symbol becomes the first. The 1 special symbol is changed to the 2nd special symbol.

In such a case, when the variable display of the second special symbol (excluding the jackpot fluctuation) is started, the sub CPU 1301 opens, for example, the closed shutter (ends the shutter closing effect), and the second special symbol is displayed. As a second display effect associated with the variable display, a night mode display effect is started (see FIG. 229 (d)). That is, when the main special symbol changes from the first special symbol to the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final change of the ceiling, the sub CPU 1301 changes from the first display effect to the second display effect. Switch to. Therefore, the night mode display effect functions as an effect indicating that the B time reduction game state has been entered.

As shown in FIG. 228 (A), even if the sub CPU 1301 internally shifts to the B time shortening gaming state when the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation is started, the sub CPU 1301 is the first. 2 Until the variable display of the special symbol is started (until the night mode display effect is started), the shutter closing effect as the first display effect is continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to avoid an unnatural situation in which the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the final change of the ceiling, but the display effect accompanying the variable display of the special symbol is not started. Can be suppressed.

When the sub CPU 1301 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform the first display effect after that, at least while being controlled to the B time reduction gaming state.

While the sub CPU 1301 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the first variable display of the special symbol in the B time saving game state, the night mode display effect (see FIG. 229 (d)) and the game explanation effect (see FIG. 229 (d)). A series of display effects such as a landing effect (see FIG. 229 (f)), a right-handed instruction display effect (see FIG. 229 (g)), and a count-up effect, which will be described later, are performed.

As described above, the night mode display effect is a display effect indicating that the B time saving game state has been entered, and is, for example, a display effect in which the background image is at night. The game description (see FIG. 229 (e)) corresponds to a display effect in which a description related to the game is displayed, such as information indicating that the game is in the B time saving game state. The landing effect (see FIG. 229 (f)) displays the characters "Count Up" and, for example, whether a ball of light lands on the 7-segment display 1071 provided at the lower right of the display device 1007. The display effect like this is equivalent. Although it is difficult to grasp from the illustration of FIG. 229, when the landing effect is performed, the sub CPU 1301 starts high-speed fluctuation on the 7-segment display 1071. After that, the sub CPU 1301 performs a right-handed instruction display effect for instructing right-handedness (see FIG. 229 (g)). Although not shown, the count-up effect corresponds to a display effect in which the information displayed on the 7-segment display 1071 (for example, the number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state) increases as if. The sub CPU 1301 stops the high-speed fluctuation of the 7-segment display 1071 at the stop timing of the variable display of the second special symbol after performing a series of display effects from the night mode display effect to the count-up effect, and the B time reduction game. Information indicating the end timing of the state (for example, the number of time reductions) is displayed (see FIG. 229 (h)). After that, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the second display effect accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007.

In the first normal pattern, in this way, it is possible to switch the display effect from the first display effect to the second display effect, which is performed in association with the transition to the B time saving game state, in a natural manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 228 (B), the staging control in the second normal pattern will be described. In the second normal pattern, the change before the final ceiling is the variable display of the first special symbol, the final change of the ceiling is the variable display of the first special symbol, the first time in the B time saving game state is the variable display of the first special symbol, and the B time saving game. This is the pattern when the second time in the state is the variable display of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 228 (B), in the second normal pattern, the sub CPU 1301 accompanies the variable display of the first special symbol at the start of the variable display (loss variation) of the first special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling. As a display effect, for example, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect is started. In this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 1301 also performs a right-handed navigation effect instructing right-handed. In addition, in the shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 1301 replaces or adds to the right-handed navigation effect, for example, an effect suggesting the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, an effect related to the start of the B time saving game state, and the like. , You may perform the production related to the progress of the game.

If the variable display of the second special symbol is not started before the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed, the sub CPU 1301 performs the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation. Is finished, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is not displayed in the shutter effect which is the first display effect, and until the variable display of the first second special symbol is started in the B time saving game state. The first display effect is continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started before the variable display of the second special symbol is started after the variable display of the first special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling is completed, the first variable display is started. No new first display effect will be performed due to the variable display of the special symbol.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (as the second special symbol, the first variable display after shifting to the B time reduction game state) is started as the second time in the B time reduction game state, the sub CPU 1301 changes the ceiling final. The first display effect started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is terminated, and the second display effect associated with the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be displayed. Even if the first special symbol is in the variable display when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the second time in the B time saving game state, the sub CPU 1301 is accompanied by the variable display of the second special symbol. Start the display effect.

When the first variable display of the second special symbol is started after the transition to the B time saving game state, the sub CPU 1301 starts the night mode display effect, and then the game explanation effect, the landing effect, and the count-up effect. Perform a series of display effects up to. By the way, if the variable display time of the second special symbol that is first performed after the transition to the B time saving game state is short, the above series of display effects are performed until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed. There may be cases where it cannot be finished. In such a case, the sub CPU 1301 stops the high-speed fluctuation of the 7-segment display 1071 at the stop timing of the variable display of the second special symbol after performing the above-mentioned series of display effects, and performs a count-up effect. B Display information (for example, the number of time reductions) indicating the end timing of the time reduction game state. That is, if the second special symbol is in variable display when the timing at which the above series of display effects may be terminated is reached, the sub CPU 1301 adjusts to the end timing of the variable display of the second special symbol. , Ends the above series of display effects. However, the second special symbol may not be in the variable display when it is time to end the above-mentioned series of display effects. In such a case, the sub CPU 1301 issues a demo display command from, for example, the main CPU 1201. When it is received, a count-up effect is performed, information indicating the end timing of the B time reduction game state (for example, the number of time reductions) is displayed, and the above-mentioned series of display effects is ended.

In the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, until the variable display number (that is, the number of remaining time reductions) of the special symbol that can be executed in the night mode display effect is displayed. In the meantime, the variable display by the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be performed and the remaining number of time reductions may change. Therefore, in order to absorb and display the variable display number, the second special symbol is displayed. Waiting for the end of the variable display, the count-up effect is performed.

The sub CPU 1301 performs the second display effect when the first variable display of the special symbol in the B time saving game state is the variable display of the second special symbol, while the sub CPU 1301 performs the second display effect, while the first special symbol variable in the B time saving game state. When the display is a variable display of the first special symbol, the first display effect is not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the first variable display of the special symbol in the B time saving game state is the variable display of the first special symbol, the first display effect may be performed only when a specific condition is satisfied. .. However, the frequency with which the first display effect is performed when the first variable display in the B time saving game state is the variable display of the first special symbol is that the first variable display in the B time saving game state is the second special symbol. In the case of variable display, it is preferable that the frequency is lower than the frequency at which the second display effect is performed.

In this embodiment, in the gaming state in which left-handed is a normal game mode, the first special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, the second special symbol corresponds to the sub-special symbol, and the right-handed is normal. The second special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, and the first special symbol corresponds to the sub-special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the game specification is such that the second special symbol is mainly variablely displayed when the game is left-handed, and the first special symbol is mainly variable-displayed when the right-handed game is played. In the game state where left-handed is the normal game mode, the second special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, the first special symbol corresponds to the sub-special symbol, and right-handed is the normal game mode. Then, the first special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol and the first special symbol corresponds to the sub special symbol.

[5-3-2. B Production control with an irregular pattern related to the transition to the short game state]
FIG. 230 is a time chart showing the effect control in the irregular pattern related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state, and (A) a time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the first irregular pattern, (B). ) A time chart showing an example of the staging control performed in the second irregular pattern, and (C) a time chart showing an example of the staging control performed in the third irregular pattern.

First, with reference to FIG. 230 (A), the staging control in the first irregular pattern will be described. The first irregular pattern is a pattern in which the fluctuation before the final ceiling is the variable display of the first special symbol and the final fluctuation of the ceiling is the variable display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 230 (A), when the ceiling final variation is the variable display of the first special symbol and the ceiling final variation is the variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 At the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the fluctuation before the final ceiling, for example, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect is started. That is, even though the variable display of the first special symbol is not started as the final ceiling variation after the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the variation before the ceiling final, the first special symbol is displayed in the above-mentioned normal pattern. A shutter closing effect that functions as the first display effect associated with the variable display is displayed.

After shifting to the B time saving game state, when the sub CPU 1301 starts the variable display of the second special symbol as the first variable display in the B time saving game state, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect is terminated and the night mode display effect is performed. Start. That is, the sub CPU 1301 continuously displays the shutter effect started at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol as the variation before the final ceiling until the variable display of the second special symbol is started after the B time reduction game state. do.

In addition, in FIG. 230 (A), the "ceiling final fluctuation (long fluctuation)" shown in the columns of "special 2_loss fluctuation" and "special 2_small hit fluctuation" is the first over a long period of approximately 600,000 msec. 2 It is a long variation in which the variation of the special symbol is displayed, but it is shown in a narrow width for convenience. The variable display time of the second special symbol performed over a long variation is not limited to approximately 600,000 msec, and may be, for example, in the range of 360000 msec to 600,000 msec.

Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started while the first special symbol is variablely displayed as the final fluctuation of the ceiling, the sub CPU 1301 displays the display device 1007 at a stage where the above-mentioned shutter closing effect has not been started yet. , Right-handed small navigation effect (right-handed instruction display with small letters). That is, even if the first special symbol is being variably displayed (for example, during the reach effect), the right-handed small navigation effect is performed. As a result, even if the variable display of the second special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling starts and the game shifts to the B time reduction game state, the player can be instructed to play the game mode (right-handed) at an appropriate timing. It is possible to suppress the consumption of unnecessary game balls and, by extension, to suppress the decline in interest.

It should be noted that the variable display of the second special symbol executed before the variable display of the second special symbol as the first variable display in the B time saving game state (that is, the variable display of the second special symbol as the final ceiling variation). Even when the reach effect is performed as the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol, the above-mentioned right-handed small navigation effect is performed in this reach effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230 (B), the staging control in the second irregular pattern will be described. The second irregular pattern is during the variable display of the second special symbol (long variation) for the ceiling pre-final variation, the variable display of the first special symbol for the ceiling final variation, and the variable display of the first special symbol for the ceiling final variation. , B This is a pattern when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display after the transition to the short game state.

As shown in FIG. 230 (B), when the ceiling final variation is the variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol and the ceiling final variation is the variable display of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 At the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, for example, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect is started as the first display effect accompanying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display after the transition to the B time saving game state during the variable display of the first special symbol which is the final variation of the ceiling, the sub CPU 1301 is subjected to the final variation of the ceiling. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is not completed, the above-mentioned shutter closing effect is terminated and the night mode display effect is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed, the sub CPU 1301 ends the night mode display effect, and performs a series of display effects up to the game explanation effect, the landing effect, and the count-up effect. After that, a right-handed instruction display effect is performed.

It should be noted that the sub CPU 1301 does not perform the first display effect associated with the variable display of the first special symbol after the end of the final ceiling change and at least until the end of the B time saving game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230 (C), the staging control in the third irregular pattern will be described. In the third irregular pattern, the change before the final ceiling is the variable display of the second special symbol (long variation), the final change of the ceiling is the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first variable display after the transition to the B time saving game state is the first. 2 This is a pattern when the special symbol is variablely displayed.

As shown in FIG. 230 (C), the ceiling final variation is the variable display of the second special symbol (long variation), the ceiling final variation is the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first time after the transition to the B time saving game state. When the variable display is the variable display of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform the shutter closing effect described above, and suddenly starts the night mode at the start of the first variable display of the second special symbol after the transition to the B time saving game state. Perform display production. When the night mode display effect is performed, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform the first display effect associated with the variable display of the first special symbol at least until the end of the B time reduction game state.

Further, the sub CPU 1301 performs a series of display effects up to a game explanation effect, a landing effect, and a count-up effect after performing a night mode display effect for a predetermined time, and then performs a right-handed instruction display effect.

By the way, as described above, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation display of the normal symbol such that the fluctuation time becomes 600,000 msec) is started in the probability variation mode, the mode shifts to the bonus mode. (See FIG. 129 (a)). In the bonus mode, while the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation) is being performed (over 600,000 msec), most of the right-handed game balls win the small hit large winning opening 1151 and a large number of them. The game ball is paid out.

Therefore, like the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the pachinko gaming machine that shifts from the normal gaming state or the C time saving gaming state to the B time saving gaming state shifts to the B time saving gaming state. The probability of being determined to be the loss length fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol may be different between before and after the transition. In this case, before the transition to the B time-shortening gaming state, the loss length fluctuation can be won as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and after the transition to the B time-shortening gaming state, the loss length fluctuation cannot be won as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol. It is preferable to make it possible (probability 0).

After the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit gaming state is increased, but after the transition to the B time-shortening gaming state, it is not possible to win the long fluctuation as a normal symbol variation pattern, so that B After shifting to the time-saving game state, it is possible to suppress the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening for small hits, and thus to suppress the increase in the number of balls.

In addition, after the transition to the B time reduction gaming state, the winning probability of the loss length fluctuation is reduced as compared with before the transition to the B time reduction gaming state, instead of making it impossible to win the long fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol. You may do so. Even in such a case, it is possible to suppress the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening for small hits and thus the increase in the number of balls to be ejected after the transition to the B time saving game state. ..

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the passage gate 1126 is arranged in the right side area 1107, but it may be arranged in the left side area 1106. However, when the passing gate 1126 is arranged in the left side region 1106, it is preferable to reduce the probability of hitting a normal symbol, for example, so that the operation frequency of the normal electric accessory 1146 does not increase.

FIG. 231 is a modification of the variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 128. The time saving flag is off before the transition to the B time saving gaming state, and the time saving flag is on after the transition to the B time saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 231, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 1201 determines the loss length variation (normal symbol variation pattern command 90H05) with a higher probability than when the time saving flag is on. By doing so, before the transition to the B time reduction game state, the game ball can be expected to be paid out by winning the small hit large winning opening 1151 as compared with the transition to the B time reduction game state. On the other hand, after the transition to the B time reduction gaming state, it is possible to suppress the payout of the game ball by the small hit large winning opening 1151 as compared with before the transition to the B time reduction gaming state.

When the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 1201 may determine the loss length variation (normal symbol variation pattern command 90H05) with a higher probability than when the time saving flag is off. In this case, after the transition to the B time reduction game state, the game ball can be expected to be paid out by winning the small hit large winning opening 1151 compared to before the transition to the B time reduction game state. It is possible to make the game state even more interesting.

By the way, the main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74) before the transition to the B time reduction game state, and the B time reduction game state. After the transition to, the determination is made with reference to the special map fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75). Therefore, the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is higher after the transition than before the transition to the B time reduction gaming state. That is, the average variable display time after the transition to the B time reduction gaming state is shorter than the average variable display time before the transition to the B time reduction gaming state. In addition, the probability that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) will be a big hit (big hit probability), and the probability that the result of the hit determination process of the ordinary symbol will be a normal symbol hit (ordinary symbol). The hit probability) is the same before and after the transition to the B time reduction gaming state.

In addition, the sub CPU 1301 is, for example, a 7-segment display, and is a variable display number of special symbols until the transition to the B time reduction gaming state (for example, the transition to the B time reduction gaming state) before the transition to the B time reduction gaming state. (Ceiling counter, etc.) may be displayed, and after the transition to the B time saving game state, the end condition of the B time saving game state (for example, the number of time saving remaining times in the B time saving game state, etc.) may be displayed. In this case, when the content of the display effect displayed on the display device 1007 changes due to the transition of the gaming state, the sub CPU 1301 forcibly changes the display content displayed on the 7-segment display 1071 to 0 and displays the display. It is good to set it to.

[6. 6th pachinko game machine]
Next, an example of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described below. This sixth pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 and type 2 mixing machine, and starts the second special symbol rather than the starting condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variable machine that is satisfied with priority given to the conditions.

Hereinafter, in explaining the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the description of the points in common with the third pachinko gaming machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the description of the sixth pachinko gaming machine are the same as those of the third pachinko gaming machine.

Further, the time saving management process (see S131 in FIG. 31) is basically a process performed in the third pachinko gaming machine and a third pachinko game because it is common to the first pachinko gaming machine. This is the same as the processing for which the explanation is omitted on the machine. Therefore, in the description of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, among the time saving management processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine, different processes are mainly described, and common processes are described as much as possible. The explanation shall be omitted.

Further, the configuration and processing having the same functions as the third pachinko gaming machine will be described using the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the third pachinko gaming machine. However, new reference numerals and step numbers shall be added to the points that are different from the third pachinko gaming machine, that is, the configurations and processes newly described in the description of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

[6-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 232, the game board unit 5010 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be mainly described as being different from the third pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 232 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 5010 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Among the configurations included in the gaming board unit 5010 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the first configuration described below is significantly different from the configuration provided in the gaming board unit 2010 (see FIG. 87) of the third pachinko gaming machine. Different points to the fourth different point.

First, the first difference is the probability that the game ball will pass through the V winning opening 2155 when the game ball enters the inside of the V winning device 2150 due to the operation of the attacker 2152 (hereinafter, simply "V winning probability". "). This V winning probability is not particularly mentioned in the third pachinko gaming machine, but is close to 100% in the sixth pachinko gaming machine (for example, 99.9%). For example, by changing the opening time and closing time of the V-shutter 2158, which was explained in the explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine that the constant operation is always performed by "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed", the V winning probability can be changed. It will be possible to increase.

In this specification, the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 due to the operation of the attacker 2152 passes through the V winning opening 2155 is referred to as "V winning".

The second difference is that the sixth pachinko gaming machine is provided with the first starting port 5120 instead of the first starting port 2120 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine. When the game balls pass through the first starting port 5120, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out. The first starting port 5120 will be described in the game ball distribution device 5400 described later.

The third difference is that the sixth pachinko gaming machine is provided with passing gates 5125A and 5125B in addition to the passing gate 2126 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine. The passing gates 5125A and 5125B will be described in the game ball distribution device 5400 described later.

The fourth difference is that the third pachinko game machine does not have the game ball distribution device 5400, but the sixth pachinko game machine has the game ball distribution device 5400. The game ball distribution device 5400 includes the above-mentioned first start port 5120 and passage gates 5125A and 5125B.

[6-2. Game ball distribution device]
Hereinafter, the game ball distribution device 5400 will be described. The game ball distribution device 5400 has a first start port 5120 and passage gates 5125A and 5125B as passage ports through which the game balls can pass, and the game balls that have flowed into the game ball distribution device 5400 are used. It is a device that appropriately distributes to any one of the passage ports (first start port 5120, passage gates 5125A, 5125B). The game ball distribution device 5400 is arranged in the lower center of the game area 2105, and the game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 can enter, and the game ball flowing down the right side area 2107 cannot enter. It has become extremely difficult.

Although the first starting port 5120 has a different arrangement position from the first starting port 2120 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the gaming balls pass, a predetermined number (for example, three) of gaming balls are paid out and the first. The point that the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed is the same as that of the first starting port 2120.

Further, the passing gate 5125A or the passing gate 5125B is the same as the above-mentioned passing gate 2126 in that the hit determination process of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through, but when the game ball passes, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. It differs from the above-mentioned passage gate 2126 in that it is different from the above-mentioned passage gate 2126. The number of prize balls paid out based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 5125A or the passing gate 5125B is, for example, equal to or greater than the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120. The number of prize balls is small. However, it is not essential that the prize ball is paid out based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 5125A or the passing gate 5125B.

In this embodiment, when the number of first starting ports and the number of passing gates of the game ball distribution device 5400 are compared, the number of passing gates is larger than the number of first starting ports (one of the first starting ports 5120). The number of (2 passage gates 5125A and 5125B) is larger, but the number is not limited to this. For example, the number of first starting ports and the number of passing gates may be the same, or the number of first starting ports may be larger than the number of passing gates. Further, in addition to the first start port and the passage gate, an out port may be provided, or a return port for returning the game ball may be provided in the game area 2105. Although the details will be described later, during the high-accuracy mode described later (in high-accuracy mode A, in high-accuracy mode B (true)), the variable display of the normal symbol is executed rather than the execution frequency of the variable display of the first special symbol. It is preferable that the frequency is higher.

[6-2-1. Configuration of game ball distribution device]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball distribution device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 233 to 240.

First, the overall configuration of the game ball distribution device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 233 to 235. FIG. 233 is an example of an external perspective view of the game ball distribution device 5400 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the front direction. Further, FIG. 234 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the game ball distribution device 5400 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the front direction. Further, FIG. 235 is an example of an external perspective view of the game ball distribution device 5400 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the rear direction.

The game ball distribution device 5400 is for distributing the game ball A (see FIG. 238 described later) to a plurality of passages. The game ball distribution device 5400 includes a base member 5410, a rotary distribution mechanism 5420, a plate-shaped member 5430, a croon 5440, a guide member 5450, a holding member 5460, and a sensor group 5470.

The base member 5410 is a member for guiding the game ball A inside the game ball distribution device 5400. The base member 5410 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open rear side surface. The right portion of the base member 5410 projects upward from the other portions. The base member 5410 includes an inflow port 5411, an introduction path 5412, a left guide path 5413, a right guide path 5414, an installation space 5415, and an opening 5416.

The inflow port 5411 is a hole (entrance) for allowing the game ball A to enter. The inflow port 5411 is formed at the upper right end portion (protruding portion) of the base member 5410. The inflow port 5411 is formed in a substantially square shape in a plan view. The inflow port 5411 is formed so as to have a size that allows the game ball A to enter. The inflow port 5411 is located below the display area of the display device 2007. The inflow port 5411 is configured so that the game ball A can enter from above.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the gaming ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 is configured to be discharged directly above the first starting port 2120. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 but has not entered the chance entrance 2119. He explained that he was supposed to win (pass) the mouth 2120. Instead of this, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the gaming ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 is configured to be discharged directly above the inflow port 5411. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 but has not entered the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to enter the game ball distribution device 5400 from.

As shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, the introduction path 5412 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the inflow port 5411 downward. The introduction path 5412 is formed so as to extend downward from the inflow port 5411. Note that FIG. 236 is an example of an external perspective view of the base member 5410, the rotary distribution mechanism 5420, the croon 5440, and the guide member 5450 when viewed from the rearward improvement.

The left guide path 5413 is a passage for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the lower left. The left guide path 5413 is formed so as to extend downward to the left from the lower end of the introduction path 5412.

The right guide path 5414 is a passage for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the lower right. The right guide path 5414 is formed so as to extend downward to the right from the lower end portion of the introduction path 5412, and the extended end portion extends downward. The right guide portion is formed from the upper and lower middle portion to the lower end portion of the base member 5410. The right guide path 5414 includes a guide portion 5414a.

The guide portion 5414a is for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end portion of the right side guide path 5414 in the rear direction. The guide portion 5414a is formed at the lower end portion of the right side guide path 5414 and is formed in a substantially arc shape in a side view.

The installation space 5415 is an internal space of the base member 5410 on which the crune 5440 and the like, which will be described later, are provided. The installation space 5415 is formed from the left and right halfway portion of the base member 5410 (to the left of the left guide path 5413) to the left end portion. The right end of the installation space 5415 communicates with the left guideway 5413.

The opening 5416 is formed at the upper end of the front side surface of the base member 5410 and penetrates the base member 5410 in the front-rear direction. The opening 5416 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The opening 5416 is formed from the left and right halfway portion of the base member 5410 (to the left of the left guide path 5413) to the vicinity of the left end portion. The opening 5416 communicates with the upper end of the installation space 5415. The opening 5416 is formed so that its vertical width is wide enough to allow the game ball A to enter, and the opening 5416 is configured to allow the game ball A to enter from the front in the entire area thereof. The opening 5416 is closed by the glass door 4 (see, for example, FIG. 1) when the player plays a game, and the game ball A cannot enter the ball.

The rotary distribution mechanism 5420 is for distributing the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414. The rotary distribution mechanism 5420 is provided at the lower end of the introduction path 5412. The rotary distribution mechanism 5420 includes a rotating body 5421, a pin 5422, a sheet metal 5423 and a magnet 5424.

The rotating body 5421 is formed in a substantially inverted T-shape in rear view having a portion extending in the left-right direction and a portion extending in the upward direction. As shown in FIG. 236, the rotating body 5421 includes a base portion 5421a, a protruding portion 5421b, a left side receiving portion 5421c, and a right side receiving portion 5421d.

The base portion 5421a is a portion extending in the left-right direction of the rotating body 5421. The base portion 5421a is formed so that its lateral width is substantially the same as the lateral width of the introduction path 5412.

The protrusion 5421b is a portion extending upward of the rotating body 5421. The protrusion 5421b is formed so as to extend from the left and right central portions of the base portion 5421a.

The left receiving portion 5421c is a portion that receives the game ball A in the left portion of the rotating body 5421. The left receiving portion 5421c is formed by the left portion of the upper side surface of the base portion 5421a and the left side surface of the protruding portion 5421b.

The right receiving portion 5421d is a portion that receives the game ball A in the right portion of the rotating body 5421. The right receiving portion 5421d is formed by the right portion of the upper side surface of the base portion 5421a and the right surface of the protruding portion 5421b.

The pin 5422 is arranged with its axial direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The pin 5422 is inserted through the base portion 5421a of the rotating body 5421. Further, the front end portion of the pin 5422 is fixed to the base member 5410, and the rear end portion thereof is fixed to the plate-shaped member 5430 (see FIG. 235) described later. As a result, the pin 5422 rotatably supports the rotating body 5421 with respect to the base member 5410.

The sheet metal 5423 is a plate-shaped member fixed to the rear side surface of the base portion 5421a of the rotating body 5421. The sheet metal 5423 is formed so that the left end portion and the right end portion thereof are larger than the other portions. The sheet metal 5423 is composed of a magnetic material such as iron that is adsorbed by a magnetic force.

The magnet 5424 shown in FIG. 235 is formed in a substantially disk shape. The magnet 5424 is fixed to a holding member 5460, which will be described later, and is arranged behind the sheet metal 5423. By attracting the left end portion of the sheet metal 5423, the magnet 5424 holds the rotating body 5421 in a state where the right receiving portion 5421d as shown in FIG. 236 faces upward and the left receiving portion 5421c faces left.

A notch (not shown) extending in the left-right direction is formed on the lower side surface of the rotating body 5421 of the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. A protrusion (not shown) formed on the base member 5410 is arranged inside the notch. The rotating body 5421 is restricted from rotating beyond a predetermined angle range by appropriately contacting the notch with the protrusion. The predetermined angle range is a range from a state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward to a state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward (a state shown in FIG. 240 described later). The rotating body 5421 can rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view from the state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward to the state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward. Further, the rotating body 5421 can rotate in the clockwise direction in the rear view from the state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward to the state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward.

In the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 configured as described above, the rotating body 5421 rotates in an appropriate direction to guide the game ball A to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 into the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414. Sort. The distribution operation of the game ball A by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, the plate-shaped member 5430 is for closing the right rear portion of the base member 5410. The plate-shaped member 5430 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The plate-shaped member 5430 is formed so that its vertical width and horizontal width are wider than the vertical width and horizontal width of the base member 5410. The plate-shaped member 5430 includes a left side through hole 5431 and a right side through hole 5432.

The left through hole 5431 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction in the left portion of the plate-shaped member 5430. The left through hole 5431 is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the installation space 5415 in the front view.

The right through hole 5432 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction in the lower right portion of the plate-shaped member 5430. The right through hole 5432 is formed in a substantially square shape in front view. The right through hole 5432 is formed so as to have a size that allows the game ball A to pass through.

The plate-shaped member 5430 is arranged behind the base member 5410 and is fixed to the base member 5410 by screws. As a result, the left through hole 5431 communicates with the installation space 5415. The right through hole 5432 communicates with the lower end of the right guide path 5414.

As shown in FIGS. 234 to 236, the crune 5440 is a dish-shaped member for distributing the game ball A. The crune 5440 is formed in a substantially circular shape in a plan view, and the game ball A is configured to be rollable on the upper side surface thereof. Further, the upper side surface of the Kroon 5440 is formed in a shape that gradually inclines downward toward the central portion thereof. That is, the upper side surface of the Kroon 5440 is formed in a shape that can guide the game ball A to the central portion. The crune 5440 includes a connecting portion 5441, a first starting port 5120, passage gates 5125A, 5125B and a protruding portion 5445.

The connecting portion 5441 is a portion formed so as to extend to the right from the front end portion of the upper side surface (the portion having a substantially circular shape in a plan view) of the Kroon 5440. The connection portion 5441 is configured so that the game ball A can enter from the right end portion thereof. Further, the connecting portion 5441 is configured to be able to guide the game ball A to the left.

The first starting port 5120 is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed in the front portion of the Kroon 5440. The first starting port 5120 penetrates the crune 5440 in the vertical direction. The first starting port 5120 has an inner diameter that allows the game ball A to enter the ball.

The passage gate 5125A is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed in the left rear portion of the Kroon 5440 (left rear portion of the first starting port 5120). The passage gate 5125B is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed at the right rear portion of the Kroon 5440 (to the right of the passage gate 5125A). The passage gates 5125A and 5125B are formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the first starting port 5120.

The protrusion 5445 is a substantially triangular pyramid-shaped portion formed in the central portion of the Kroon 5440. The protrusion 5445 is formed so as to project upward from the upper side surface of the Kroon 5440. The protrusion 5445 appropriately flips the game ball A guided by the crune 5440 to allow the game ball A to enter the first starting port 5120 or the passage gates 5125A and 5125B. As a result, the game ball A guided by the croon 5440 can be distributed to the first starting port 5120 or the passing gates 5125A and 5125B.

The Kroon 5440 configured in this way is fixed to the plate-shaped member 5430 by screws. The front end of the Kroon 5440 projects forward from the left through hole 5431 and is located above the installation space 5415. The right end of the connecting portion 5441 is connected to the left lower end of the left guideway 5413, and the game ball A guided to the left lower end of the left guideway 5413 can be guided to the left. Further, the Kroon 5440 is arranged below the rear of the opening 5416.

As shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, the guide member 5450 is a member for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting port 5120 or the passage gates 5125A and 5125B to the holding member 5460 described later. The guide member 5450 is formed so that the upper side surface of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped member is appropriately recessed downward. The guide member 5450 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction thereof is substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the crune 5440. The guide member 5450 includes a protrusion 5451, a mounting portion 5452, a front guideway 5453, and a rear guideway 5454.

The protruding portion 5451 is a portion that protrudes backward from the left rear end portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450. The protrusion 5451 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape.

The mounting portion 5452 is a recess formed in the front end portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450. The mounting portion 5452 has a side wall and a bottom surface formed in a substantially U-shape in a plan view. A first start port switch 5121, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment portion 5452.

The front guide path 5453 is a recess formed on the upper side surface of the guide member 5450, and is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting port 5120 to the holding member 5460. The front guideway 5453 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a plan view so as to extend to the right and the extended end thereof to extend in the rear direction. The front portion of the front guideway 5453 is arranged below the mounting portion 5452.

The rear guide passage 5454 is a recess formed in the rear portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450, and is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the passage gates 5125A and 5125B to the holding member 5460. The rear guide path 5454 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a plan view so as to extend to the right and the extended end thereof to extend in the rear direction. The rear guide path 5454 is formed between the protrusion 5451 and the mounting portion 5452. The rear guideway 5454 is formed so as not to communicate with the front guideway 5453.

The guide member 5450 thus configured is fixed to the lower part of the crune 5440 by a screw. The guide member 5450 is fixed to the plate-shaped member 5430 via the crune 5440 and is arranged at the lower part of the installation space 5415. The mounting portion 5452 and the front guideway 5453 are arranged below the first start port 5120 of the crune 5440 and are connected to the left guideway 5413 of the base member 5410 via the first start port 5120. Further, the left end portion and the right front end portion of the rear guideway 5454 are arranged below the passage gates 5125A and 5125B, and are connected to the left guideway 5413 via the passage gates 5125A and 5125B.

As shown in FIGS. 234, 235 and 237, the pressing member 5460 is a member for pressing the plate-shaped member 5430 from the rear. The pressing member 5460 is formed in a shape capable of closing the left through hole 5431 and the right through hole 5432 of the plate-shaped member 5430 from the rear direction. The pressing member 5460 is formed in a shape in which the front surface thereof is appropriately recessed in the rear direction. The holding member 5460 includes a mounting portion 5461, a right discharge passage 5462, a front discharge passage 5436, and a rear discharge passage 5464. Note that FIG. 237 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the guide member 5450 and the pressing member 5460 when viewed from diagonally above the left in the forward direction.

The mounting portion 5461 is a recess formed in the upper left portion on the front side surface of the pressing member 5460. The mounting portion 5461 is formed in a substantially arc shape in a plan view so as to follow the shape of the rear portion of the Kroon 5440. The mounting portion 5461 is formed from the left end portion of the pressing member 5460 to the left and right halfway portions. The mounting portion 5461 is recessed downward from the vicinity of the left end portion on the lower side surface to the left and right halfway portions with respect to other portions.

The right side discharge passage 5462 is a passage for discharging the game ball A that has passed through the right side through hole 5432 of the plate-shaped member 5430 to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400. The right discharge passage 5462 is formed so as to extend backward and the lower side surface of the extended end opens to the outside. The right discharge path 5462 is formed at the right end of the front side surface of the holding member 5460.

The front discharge passage 5436 is a recess formed in the lower portion on the front side surface of the holding member 5460, and the game ball A guided to the rear end portion of the front guide passage 5453 of the guide member 5450 is used in the game ball distribution device 5400. It is a passage for discharging to the outside. The front discharge path 5436 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The front discharge passage 5436 is formed below the mounting portion 5461 and to the left of the right discharge passage 5462. The front discharge path 5436 is formed so as to extend downward from below the mounting portion 5461 to the lower end portion of the holding member 5460.

The rear discharge passage 5464 is a recess formed in the lower left portion on the front side surface of the holding member 5460, and the game ball A guided to the rear end of the rear guide passage 5454 of the guide member 5450 is distributed to the game ball. It is a passage for discharging to the outside of the device 5400. The rear discharge passage 5464 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The rear discharge passage 5464 is arranged below the mounting portion 5461 and to the left of the front discharge passage 5436. The rear discharge passage 5464 is formed so as to extend downward from below the mounting portion 5461 to the lower end portion of the holding member 5460.

The holding member 5460 configured in this way is fixed to the rear side surface of the plate-shaped member 5430 by a screw, and closes the left side through hole 5431 and the right side through hole 5432 (front side guide path 5453 and rear side guide path 5454) from the rear direction. do. The rear portion of the Kroon 5440 is mounted on the mounting portion 5461. Further, the protruding portion 5451 of the guide member 5450 is mounted on the portion recessed downward of the mounting portion 5461. The front end of the right discharge passage 5462 is connected to the right through hole 5432. The upper end of the front discharge path 5436 is connected to the rear end of the front guide path 5453. The upper end of the rear discharge passage 5464 is connected to the rear end of the rear guide passage 5454.

The sensor group 5470 is for detecting that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414, the front guide path 5453, and the rear guide path 5454. The sensor group 5470 includes various switches such as a first start port switch 5121 and a passage gate switch 5126B.

The first start port switch 5121 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the front guide path 5453. That is, the game ball A that has passed through the first starting port 5121 is detected by the first starting port switch 5121.

The switch 5126A is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414. The switch 5126A is formed in a flat plate shape with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The switch 5126A includes a through hole 5127A.

The through hole 5127A is a hole having a substantially circular shape in the front view that penetrates the switch 5126A in the front-rear direction. The through hole 5127A has an inner diameter that allows the game ball A to pass through. The through hole 5127A is formed in the lower part of the switch 5126A.

The switch 5126A configured in this way is attached to the right front end portion of the holding member 5460. As a result, the through hole 5127A is arranged behind the right through hole 5432 of the plate-shaped member 5430. The switch 5126A is configured to form, for example, a magnetic field in the through hole 5127A and to detect an eddy current generated when the game ball A passes through the magnetic field (through hole 5127A). The switch 5126A detects that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414 based on the detection result of the eddy current.

The passage gate switch 5126B is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the rear guide path 5454. The passage gate switch 5126B is configured in the same manner as the first start port switch 5121 except that it is attached below the mounting portion 5461 of the holding member 5460. The through hole 5127B is arranged at the bottom of the rear discharge passage 5464.

As shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the game ball distribution device 5400 configured in this way provides a first passage 5501 and a second passage 5502 as a passage for distributing the game ball A flowing in from the inflow port 5411. Be prepared.

The first passage 5501 is a passage for guiding the game ball A distributed to the left guide path 5413 by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. The first passage 5501 includes a left guide path 5413 of the base member 5410, a connection portion 5441 of the crune 5440, a first starting port 5120 and a passage gate 5125A, 5125B, and a front guide path 5453 and a rear guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450. In addition, it is composed of a front discharge passage 5463 and a rear discharge passage 5464 of the holding member 5460. The first passage 5501 branches into two passages at Kroon 5440. The first passage 5501 includes a third passage 5503 and a fourth passage 5504 as the branched passage.

The third passage 5503 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting port 5120 of the Kroon 5440. The third passage 5503 is composed of a first starting port 5120 of the crune 5440, a front guide passage 5453 of the guide member 5450, and a front discharge passage 5436 of the holding member 5460.

The fourth passage 5504 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the passage gates 5125A and 5125B of the Kroon 5440. The fourth passage 5504 is composed of the passage gates 5125A and 5125B of the crune 5440, the rear guide passage 5454 of the guide member 5450, and the rear discharge passage 5464 of the holding member 5460.

In this embodiment, the game ball A distributed to the first passage 5501 by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 passes through the first starting port 5120 with a probability of approximately one-third, and is approximately two-thirds. It is configured to pass through the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B with a probability.

The second passage 5502 is a passage for guiding the game ball A distributed to the right guide path 5414 by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. The second passage 5502 is composed of a right guide path 5414 of the base member 5410, a right through hole 5432 (see FIG. 235) of the plate-shaped member 5430, and a right discharge path 5462 of the holding member 5460.

Next, the operation mode of the game ball distribution device 5400 will be described. In the following, as shown in FIG. 238, it is assumed that the game ball A is inserted from the inflow port 5411 with the right receiving portion 5421d of the rotating body 5421 facing upward. Note that FIG. 238 is an example of a diagram showing a state in which a game ball is distributed to the second passage.

First, the game ball A that has entered the inflow port 5411 is guided downward by the introduction path 5412 and collides with the right receiving portion 5421d of the rotating body 5421 of the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. As a result, the rotating body 5421 and the sheet metal 5423 rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear. By the rotation, the rotating body 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower right direction and distributes the game ball A to the second passage 5502 (right guide path 5414). The right end of the sheet metal 5423 is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 235) when the left receiving portion 5421c is rotated until it faces upward. As a result, the rotating body 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the left side receiving portion 5421c facing upward (see FIG. 240 described later).

The game ball A (hereinafter referred to as “game ball A2”) distributed to the second passage 5502 is guided downward through the right guide path 5414 and then guided backward by the guide portion 5414a. The game ball A2 passes backward through the right through hole 5432 (see FIG. 234) of the plate-shaped member 5430. After that, as shown in FIG. 239, the game ball A2 is guided to the front end portion of the right discharge path 5462 of the holding member 5460. At this time, the game ball A2 passes through the through hole 5127A of the switch 5126A in the rear direction. As a result, the switch 5126A detects that the game ball A2 has been distributed to the second passage 5502 (right side guide path 5414). The game ball A2 that has passed through the through hole 5127A is guided backward along the right discharge path 5462 and is discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400. Note that FIG. 239 is an example of a diagram showing the flow of the game balls distributed to the second passage, the third passage, and the fourth passage.

As described above, in the second passage 5502, the right guide path 5414, the right through hole 5432, and the right discharge path 5462 are arranged in order from the upstream side. Further, the second passage 5502 is arranged on the downstream side of the rotary distribution mechanism 5420, and a switch 5126A is provided in the middle of the second passage 5502.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240, when the game ball A enters the inflow port 5411 of the base member 5410 in a state where the left side receiving portion 5421c faces upward, the game ball A is on the left side of the rotating body 5421. It collides with the receiving portion 5421c. As a result, the rotating body 5421 and the sheet metal 5423 rotate in the clockwise direction in the rear view. By the rotation, the rotating body 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower left direction and distributes the game ball A to the first passage 5501 (left guide path 5413). The left end of the sheet metal 5423 is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 235) when the right receiving portion 5421d is rotated until it faces upward. As a result, the rotating body 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the right receiving portion 5421d facing upward (see FIG. 238). Note that FIG. 240 is an example of a diagram showing a state in which a game ball is distributed to the first passage.

The game ball A distributed to the first passage 5501 is guided in the lower left direction on the left guide path 5413, and then is guided to the vicinity of the first starting port 5120 through the connection portion 5441 of the croon 5440. The game ball A is guided on the upper side surface of the Kroon 5440 in a clockwise direction in a plan view, and is gradually guided to the central portion of the Kroon 5440. At this time, the protruding portion 5445 of the Kroon 5440 plays the game ball A as appropriate. As a result, the Kroon 5440 causes the game ball A to enter either the first starting port 5120 or the passing gates 5125A and 5125B. In this way, the Kroon 5440 distributes the game ball A to the third passage 5503 or the fourth passage 5504.

As described above, in the first passage 5501, in order from the upstream side, the left guide path 5413, the connection portion 5441, the upper side surface of the croon 5440 (a substantially circular portion in a plan view), the third passage 5503, and the fourth passage 5503. The passage 5504 is arranged. The opening 5416 is formed to open to the upper side surfaces of the connection 5441 and the Kroon 5440. That is, the opening 5416 is provided at the same position as the upper side surface of the connecting portion 5441 and the croon 5440 (downstream side from the left guide path 5413 and upstream side from the third passage 5503 and the fourth passage 5504). Further, the first passage 5501 is arranged on the downstream side of the rotary distribution mechanism 5420.

As shown in FIGS. 239 and 240, the game ball A (hereinafter referred to as “game ball A3”) distributed to the third passage 5503 (which has entered the first start port 5120) is the first start. It passes downward through the through hole 5121A (see FIGS. 234, 235, 236, and 238) of the mouth switch 5121. As a result, the first start port switch 5121 detects that the game ball A3 has been distributed to the third passage 5503 (front guide path 5453). The game ball A3 that has passed through the through hole 5121A is guided to the left front end portion of the front guide path 5453. Then, the game ball A3 is guided in the rear direction after being guided to the right side on the front side guide path 5453, and is guided to the upper end portion of the front side discharge path 5436. The game ball A3 is guided downward along the front discharge path 5436 and is discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400.

As described above, in the third passage 5503, the first starting port 5120, the front guide passage 5453, and the front discharge passage 5436 are arranged in order from the upstream side. Further, the third passage 5503 is provided with a first start port switch 5121 in the middle of the passage.

On the other hand, the game ball A (hereinafter referred to as "game ball A4") distributed to the fourth passage 5504 (entering the passing gates 5125A and 5125B) is guided to the left front end of the rear guideway 5454. Will be done. Then, the game ball A4 is guided in the rear direction after being guided to the right side on the rear side guide path 5454, and is guided to the upper end portion of the rear side discharge path 5464. The game ball A4 is guided downward along the rear discharge path 5464 and is discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400. At this time, the game ball A4 passes downward through the through hole 5127B of the passage gate switch 5126B. As a result, the passage gate switch 5126B detects that the game ball A4 has been distributed to the fourth passage 5504 (rear side guide path 5454).

As described above, in the fourth passage 5504, the passage gates 5125A and 5125B, the rear guide passage 5454, and the rear discharge passage 5464 are arranged in order from the upstream side. Further, the fourth passage 5504 is provided with a passage gate switch 5126B in the middle of the passage 5504. That is, the game ball A4 that has passed through the passing gates 5125A and 5125B is detected by the passing gate switch 5126B.

As described above, the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game ball A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 in order (with a probability of 1/2). Further, the Kroon 5440 distributes the game ball A distributed to the first passage 5501 to the third passage 5503 with a one-third probability and to the fourth passage 5504 with a two-thirds probability. .. That is, the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and the Kroon 5440 distribute the game ball A that has entered the inflow port 5411 to the third passage 5503 with a probability of 1/6, and the 4th with a probability of 2/6. Allocate to passage 5504.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment is provided with two means for distributing the game ball A (including a rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and a croon 5440), but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The game ball A may be provided with at least one means for distributing the game ball A (for example, Kroon 5440).

In particular, in this embodiment, the game ball A that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 from the inflow port 5411 is halved into the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. It is sorted by probability. Then, the game ball A distributed to the first passage 5501 passes through the first starting port 5120 with a probability of approximately one-third, and passes through the passage gates 5125A and 5125B with a probability of approximately two-thirds. That is, among the game balls A that have entered the game ball distribution device 5400 from the inflow port 5411, the game ball A that passes through the first starting port 5120 is approximately one sixth.

On the other hand, in the third pachinko gaming machine, the first starting port 2120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the above-mentioned inflow port 5411. Therefore, simply considered, the probability that the game ball A passes through the first starting port 5120 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine is approximately the probability that the gaming ball passes through the first starting port 2120 in the third pachinko gaming machine. It will be 1/6.

Therefore, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, all or almost all of the game balls A that have entered the game ball distribution device 5400 from the inflow port 5411 go to the first passage 5501 without providing the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. By doing so, it is preferable to increase the probability that the gaming ball A passes through the first starting port 5120. However, it is not essential not to provide a distribution mechanism such as a rotary distribution mechanism 5420. For example, a distribution mechanism for distributing more game balls to the first passage 5501 than to the second passage 5502 is provided. Then, more of the game balls A that have entered the game ball distribution device 5400 from the inflow port 5411 may be directed to the first passage 5501.

Further, instead of or in addition to directing more of the game ball A entering the game ball distribution device 5400 from the inflow port 5411 toward the first passage 5501, in the left side region 2106 (see FIG. 232). Compared to the ease of passage of the game ball launched toward the target to the first starting port 2120 in the third pachinko gaming machine, for example, the gauge configuration makes it easier to enter the inflow port 5411. preferable.

The game ball distribution device 5400 does not necessarily have to have different configurations of the means for distributing the game balls A (rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and Kroon 5440), and even if the means for distributing the game balls A have the same configuration. good. Specifically, the game ball distribution device 5400 may be equipped with two crunes 5440 or two rotary distribution mechanisms 5420.

Further, the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game ball A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 (two passages), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 is not limited to this, and has three or more passages. The game ball A may be distributed to the player.

Further, the Kroon 5440 allocates the game ball A to the third passage 5503 or the fourth passage 5504 (two passages), but the game ball A is not limited to this, and the game ball is distributed to three or more passages. It may be the one that distributes A.

Further, the base member 5410 may be provided with an opening through which the game ball A can be inserted in the lower right portion of the front side surface thereof (position overlapping with the right guide path 5414 in front view). With this configuration, when inspecting the second passage 5502, the game ball A can be directly entered into the second passage 5502 from the opening. This makes it possible to efficiently inspect the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502. In this case, the opening 5416 and the opening formed in the lower right portion of the front surface of the base member 5410 function as an opening capable of individually flowing into the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502. do. Further, the switch 5126A functions as a second detecting means capable of detecting the game ball A distributed to the second passage 5502.

Further, the configurations of the switch 5126A, the first start port switch 5121, and the passing gate switch 5126B are not limited to this embodiment, and the game ball A can be detected by an appropriate means.

As another embodiment of the game ball distribution device 5400, unlike the above-mentioned game ball distribution device 5400, the positions of the first start port 5120 and the passage gates 5125A and 5125B may be reversed. By providing the inflow port of the first starting port 5120 on the back side of the crune 5440, it is possible to make it difficult to cheat from the opening 5416. Further, a passage provided with sensors (more specifically, a passage for guiding the game ball flowing into the inflow port) is provided at the back of the Kroon 5440 (that is, placed at a position far from the opening 5416), and the sensor is provided. The passage (the passage that guides the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port) that is not provided with the kind may be arranged at a position close to the opening 5416. For example, a first start port switch is provided at the inflow port on the back side (passing gate 5125A), an out port switch is provided at the inflow port on the back side (similarly, the passing gate 5125A), and the inflow port on the front side (passing gate 5125A) is provided. Similarly, no sensor is provided at the first starting port 5120). With this configuration, even if the opening 5416 is provided, it is possible to prevent the sensor from being fraudulent.

[6-3. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Among the control circuits of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the two points described below are significantly different from the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, in the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine, the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88) for detecting the passage (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 was provided. However, in the control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, instead of this, a first starting port switch 5121 for detecting the passage (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 5120 is provided.

Next, the second point is that the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine is provided with a passing gate switch 2127 (see FIG. 88) for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126. In addition to this, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a passing gate switch 5126B for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passing gates 5125A and 5126B. In this embodiment, the game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 5126B regardless of whether the pass gate 5125A or the pass gate 5125B is passed, but the game ball is not necessarily limited to this, and the game ball that has passed through the pass gate 5125A is detected. A passing gate switch for detecting and a passing gate switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 5125B may be provided separately.

[6-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 250. The sixth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the probability variation control is not executed as in the third pachinko gaming machine. Further, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 can control the time reduction as a gaming state (a gaming state that is not a big hit gaming state) capable of executing variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The normal game state that is not executed, the A time reduction game state that can be executed after the big hit game state ends, the B time reduction game state that can be executed on condition that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol It is configured to be controllable to any of the C time-saving gaming states that can be executed on the condition that it is a "time-saving hit".

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal game mode in the normal game state and C time-shortened game state, and right-handed is the normal game mode in the A time-shortened game state and the B time-shortened game state.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 can be controlled to one of the normal gaming state, the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state, but the B time saving gaming state. It is not essential to be controllable, and for example, it may be possible to control any of the normal game state, the A time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state.

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction game state can be overlapped and executed. When the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state are configured to be executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state is the first time-saving performance, which is the same as the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state, and the C time-saving gaming state. The first method of providing the second time saving performance different from the time saving performance of the above may be adopted. In this first method, when the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state are executed in an overlapping manner (for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value before the end of the C time saving game state), the first time saving performance is performed. Is activated, and when the B time saving game state is executed without overlapping with the C time saving gaming state (for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal gaming state), the second time saving performance is activated.

Further, when the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state are configured to be executed in an overlapping manner, as a method different from the above-mentioned first method, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state is set to the C time-saving game state. A second method may be adopted in which only one time saving performance, which is the same as the time saving performance, is used. In this second method, the above-mentioned one time saving performance is activated in both the case where the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving gaming state and the case where the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal gaming state.

In addition, when the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state are configured to be executed in an overlapping manner, regardless of which of the first method and the second method is adopted, before the end of the C time-saving game state. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the number of time reductions is added without changing the time reduction performance.

[6-4-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 242 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 242, when the game ball wins (passes) in the first starting port 5120, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random value for the first special symbol hit determination. Based on this, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is determined to be "time saving hit", "big hit", or "missing". Further, when the game ball wins (passes) in the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 uses the special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol hit determination random value. The result of the hit determination process is determined to be "time saving hit", "big hit", "character open hit" or "missing".

It is not essential that the "feature opening hit" is not determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "feature opening hit". It is preferable that the determination is made only with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") as compared with the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed.

In the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202, "time saving hit" and "big hit" are used as data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first start port 5120. The range (width) of the first special symbol hit judgment random value determined as "or" loss "and the corresponding judgment value data ("short-time hit judgment value data "," big hit judgment value data "," loss judgment ". The relationship with "value data") is specified. In addition, as the data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting port 2140, "time saving hit", "big hit", "feature opening hit" or "missing" The range (width) of the second special symbol hit judgment random value to be determined and the corresponding judgment value data ("time saving hit judgment value data", "big hit judgment value data", "feature opening hit judgment value data" , "Loss judgment value data") is defined.

When the sixth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and / and the accessory opening hit probability may be set higher in the high setting than in the low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the bonus opening hit probability may be set higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the bonus opening hit probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the jackpot may be set. The probability may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of opening the accessory may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. May be. However, even if the sixth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the time saving hit probability and the accessory opening hit probability are common to all the settings.

Further, as in the case of the third pachinko gaming machine, conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player (for example, jackpot probability, winning probability of opening a bonus, opening frequency of V winning opening 2155 (that is, operating frequency of V attacker 2152). ), Opening time, number of times of shortening of time, etc.), the expected value controlled by the jackpot game state is configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. You may.

[6-4-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 243 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 243, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. In either case, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 6 and 8 to 99 (that is, a symbol random value other than 7), the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command, and the symbol Select "zA2" as the specified command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 7, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 is the selected symbol. Select "z3" as the command and select "zA3" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the main CPU 2201 is selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z4" as the symbol command and select "zA4" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the bonus hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 , Select "z5" as the selected symbol command, and select "zA5" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 is the selected symbol. Select "z6" as the command and select "zA6" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 is the selected symbol. Select "z7" as the command and select "zA7" as the symbol specification command.

Similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the third pachinko gaming machine, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "the first pachinko gaming machine, etc."), the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 has a special symbol stop mode determination table. A special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to (see FIG. 12A) is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 241) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. Further, in the special symbol display unit 2163, 2164, a display mode of a time saving hit, a jackpot display mode, a display mode of a bonus opening, or a loss display mode is derived based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. To.

[6-4-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 244 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table is used to determine the number of rounds, the game state of the transfer destination, and the time saving end condition according to the hit type (selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol). Referenced. The game state of the transition destination indicates a game state that shifts after the end of the big hit game state, or a game state that shifts after the display mode of the time saving hit is derived as a result of the hit determination process in the normal game state. In addition, "A" shown in the column of the game state of the transition destination of FIG. Indicates that the game shifts to a time-saving game state.

Further, "Special 1" shown in the column of the time reduction end condition in FIG. 244 indicates the variable display number of the first special symbol as one of the time reduction end conditions. Similarly, "Special 2" indicates the variable display number of the second special symbol as one of the time saving end conditions. Further, "Public" indicates the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened based on the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol as one of the time saving end conditions. Further, when the time saving end condition includes the condition defined by the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol, the column of "special 1" of the time saving end condition in FIG. 244. It is indicated by "Special 1 + Special 2" across the "Special 2" column. For example, when the time saving end condition includes the condition of "the sum of the variable display count of the first special symbol and the variable display count of the second special symbol = 12 times", the "special 1" column and the "special 2" column It is shown as "Special 1 + Special 2 = 12". Then, when any one of the plurality of time-saving end conditions shown in the time-saving end condition column of FIG. 244 is satisfied, the time-saving gaming state ends. The number of times the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is opened based on the result of the hit determination process of the ordinary symbol is defined as one time the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is released based on the result of the hit determination process of one ordinary symbol. Therefore, for example, in the mode in which the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened twice based on the result of one normal symbol hit determination process (for example, the mode of "first opening ⇒ closing ⇒ second opening ⇒ closing"). Even if there is, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on the result of the hit determination process of one ordinary symbol is once.

When the condition of "special 1 + special 2 = 12" is included in the time saving end condition, the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol (1 time or more) and the variable display number of the 2nd special symbol (1 time or more) is 12 Not only the number of times, the variable display number of the first special symbol is 12 times and the variable display number of the second special symbol is 0 times, and the variable display number of the first special symbol is 0 times and the variable display of the second special symbol is 0 times. Even if the number of times is 12, the time saving end condition is satisfied.

Although not shown in FIG. 244, the operation of the condition device is also one of the time saving end conditions regardless of the type of hit (that is, regardless of the "selected symbol command").

Next, the number of rounds determined according to the hit type, the game state of the transition destination, and the time saving end condition will be described.

As shown in FIG. 244, in the normal gaming state, when the selected symbol command is "z0" or "z4" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit"), the main CPU 2201 For example, the game state of the transition destination is determined to be the C time-saving game state, and the time-saving end condition (the end condition of the C time-saving game state) is set to 20 times for the variable display number of the first special symbol and 1 for the variable display number of the second special symbol. The number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened is determined to be 12 times.

However, in the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), the selected symbol command is "z0" or "z4" (the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit"). Even if there is, the main CPU 2201 ignores the result of the "time reduction hit" and prevents the C time reduction game state from being repeatedly executed for any of the time reduction game states. In this case, the main CPU 2201 derives the display mode of the loss to the special symbol display unit 2163, 2164 (see FIG. 232) even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" (display of time reduction). The mode may not be derived), or the display mode of the time saving hit may be derived to the special symbol display unit 2163, 2164, and the result of the "time saving hit" may be ignored.

The method of preventing the C time-saving game state from being executed overlapping with the time-saving gaming state is not limited to the above method. For example, the result of the special symbol hit determination process executed in the normal gaming state is "time saving". The "hit" (time saving hit determination value data) may be included, and the "time saving hit" may not be included in the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol executed in the time saving game state.

In the normal game state, when the selected symbol command is "z1" (when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "3R big hit"), the main CPU 2201 determines, for example, the number of rounds to 3 rounds and shifts. The previous game state is determined to be the A time reduction game state, and the time reduction end conditions are determined to be special 1 = 5, special 2 = 1, and normal electric = 10000. The condition of special 1 = 5 is stipulated so that it will not be satisfied before the condition of special 2 = 1 as long as the player makes a right-handed strike in the A time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game state. be. That is, even if the number of reserved start information of the first special symbol at the end of the big hit game state is the upper limit of 4, the condition of special 2 = 1 is satisfied first by performing a right-handed strike. It is made to be lucrative. Therefore, the condition of special 1 = 5 may be a number larger than the holding upper limit of the start information of the first special symbol (5 or more in this embodiment). Further, the condition of Fuden = 10000 may be a condition that can hardly be satisfied in theory.

When the selected symbol command is "z1" in the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state) (when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "3R big hit"), For example, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be three rounds, determines the game state of the transition destination to the A time-saving game state, and determines the time-saving end conditions to special 1 + special 2 = 12, and normal power = 10000.

When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z6" regardless of whether it is a normal game state or a time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state) (special symbol). (When the result of the hit determination process is "10R big hit"), the main CPU 2201 determines, for example, the number of rounds to 10 rounds, the game state of the transition destination to the A time saving game state, and the time saving end condition. It is decided that 1 + special 2 = 12 and Fuden = 10000.

In addition, the selected symbol command is "z5" (result of the hit determination process of the special symbol) regardless of whether it is in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, C time-saving gaming state). Is "per opening of the character") and the V prize is won, for example, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines the game state of the transition destination to the A time-saving game state, and sets the time-saving end condition. , Special 1 + Special 2 = 12, Command = 10000. However, even if the selected symbol command is "z5", if V is not won, it is not controlled to the big hit game state, so the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds, the game state of the transition destination, and the time saving end condition. No need. If the selected symbol command is "z5" and a V prize is won, one operation of the V attacker 2152 executed based on the winning of the accessory is regarded as one round, so that the command is executed after the V prize is won. The number of rounds actually executed in the jackpot game state is nine rounds.

According to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 244), the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed in both the normal game state and the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state). As one of the time saving end conditions when the result is a big hit or an accessory opening hit, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) based on the result of the hit determination process of the ordinary symbol is set. Not limited to. For example, in all A time saving game states or specific A time saving gaming states, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is set as the time saving end condition when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit or a hit of the accessory opening. It is possible to include only the variable display number of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) without including the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on the above.

[6-4-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 245 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 246 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The columns of "Remarks" in FIGS. 245 and 246 are shown for convenience for the sake of clarity. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5120, and the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determine the variation pattern. The variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIGS. 245 and 246 is a table referred to when executing, for example, the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol described in the first pachinko gaming machine (see S1037 of FIG. 78).

In the normal gaming state or the C-time shortening gaming state in which left-handedness is a normal gaming mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to, for example, the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 245.

On the other hand, in the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state in which right-handed strike is a normal game mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to, for example, the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 246. Will be done.

In the sixth pachinko gaming machine as well, the look-ahead flag is set to execute the look-ahead effect as in the first to fifth pachinko gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, in this embodiment, the look-ahead flag is not set when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 246), but the present invention is not limited to this. ..

Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start in both the normal gaming state and the C time saving gaming state. Not limited. For example, the variation pattern table A of the special symbol for low start used in the normal gaming state and the variation pattern table B of the special symbol for low start used in the C time saving gaming state are stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main CPU 2201. It may be configured as follows.

[6-4-4. Ordinary symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 247 is an example of a hit determination table of a normal symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As can be seen with reference to FIG. 247, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 2201 is set to any of the normal gaming state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. When the hit determination process of the normal symbol is performed, it is determined as "normal symbol hit" with a probability of 100%, and the judgment value data is determined as "normal symbol hit judgment value data". That is, the probability of being determined as "missing", that is, the determination value data is not determined as "loss determination value data". However, not limited to this, the winning probability of "per ordinary symbol" can be set as appropriate.

[6-4-5. Ordinary symbol judgment table]
FIG. 248 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol judgment table is based on the game state, the judgment value data, and the symbol random value of the normal symbol extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gates 2126, 5125A, 5125B (see FIG. 232). , It is a table referred to when the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is selected.

According to the ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIG. 248, when the ordinary symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the ordinary symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. To.

For example, in a normal game state in which left-handed strike is a normal game mode, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 has a symbol random value of 0 for the normal symbol. If it is any of ~ 2, 4 ~ 6, 8 ~ 65535 (that is, a symbol random value other than 3 and 7), "fz0" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command, and the symbol random value of the normal symbol is 3. Or, if it is 7, "fz1" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the A time saving game state in which right-handed is a normal game mode, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 has a symbol random value of the normal symbol. If it is any of 0 to 5955, select "fz0" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 5956 to 65535, select "fz2" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. Select.

In the B time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state (indicated as "normal ⇒ B time-saving game state" in FIG. 248) shifted by reaching the ceiling in the normal game state and the ceiling reached in the C time-saving game state. In the B time saving game state (indicated as "C⇒B time saving game state" in FIG. 248), the time saving performance, that is, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) shown in FIG. 249 described later. The pattern is different.

Specifically, in the B time-saving game state shifted by reaching the ceiling in the normal game state, as in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, as in the A time-saving game state, The main CPU 2201 selects "fz0" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 5955, and the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 5596 to 65535. For example, select "fz2" as the symbol command to be selected when hitting a normal symbol.

On the other hand, in the B time-saving game state, which is shifted by reaching the ceiling in the C time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination processing, the main CPU 2201 has a symbol disorder of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any of 0 to 5955, select "fz0" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command, and if the normal symbol symbol random value is any of 5596 to 65535, use the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. Select "fz1".

Further, in the C time-saving game state in which left-handedness is a normal game mode, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 has a symbol random value of the normal symbol. If it is any of 0 to 64170, select "fz0" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 64171 to 65535, select "fz1" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. Select.

It should be noted that, in the B time saving game state shifted by reaching the ceiling in the C time saving game state and the C time saving game state, the time saving performance, that is, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) shown in FIG. 249 described later. Is the same.

In this way, in the B time-saving game state, a plurality of time-saving performances are provided, and the B time-saving game state shifted by reaching the ceiling in the normal game state and the B time-saving game shifted by reaching the ceiling in the C time-saving game state. It is designed to activate different time saving performance depending on the state, but it is not limited to this. For example, the same time saving performance is activated without distinguishing between the B time saving gaming state shifted by reaching the ceiling in the normal gaming state and the B time saving gaming state shifted by reaching the ceiling in the C time saving gaming state. You may.

[6-4-6. Ordinary symbol per type determination table]
FIG. 249 is an example of a normal symbol per type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol hit type determination table sets an open pattern, which is an operation mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232), in response to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 executed in the ordinary symbol game determination process of S295 of FIG. 43 described in the first pachinko gaming machine). ..

The "pre-opening interval" shown in the column of the ordinary electric accessory opening pattern in FIG. 249 is, for example, the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (FIG. 232) after the result of the hit determination process of the ordinary symbol is derived to the ordinary symbol display unit 2161. Refer to), which corresponds to the wait time until the first opening is executed. The "first opening time" is, for example, the first opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 executed after the elapse of the pre-opening interval time (that is, from the start of operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 to the closing of the operation). Time) corresponds. The "opening interval" corresponds to, for example, the wait time after the lapse of the first opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 until the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is executed. The "second opening time" corresponds to, for example, the second opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 executed after the lapse of the opening interval time.

In this embodiment, the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is released only once when the normal symbol hit selection symbol commands are "fz0" and "fz2", and the normal symbol hit time. When the selected symbol command is "fz1", it is twice.

In this specification, the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz0" is referred to as "Public short open", and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is used. The operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 in the case of "fz1" and "fz2" is referred to as "Public long open". Further, when the normal electric accessory 2146 is operated by "Public long open" (when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1" and "fz2"), the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is "Public". It is called "long open hit", and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol when the normal electric accessory 2146 operates with "Public short open" (when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz0") is "normal". It is called "per electric short opening".

When the player is hitting to the right, even if the normal electric accessory 2146 is operated by "Public short opening", the game ball flowing down the right side region 2107 will hit the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232). The expected value to pass (win) is extremely low.

Further, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) shown in the column of "Public", which is one of the time saving end conditions shown in FIG. 244, is, for example, the number of "Public short release". It is the sum of the number of "Public Long Open", but it is not limited to this. As described above, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is opened is set to one time based on the result of one hit determination process of the ordinary symbol. For example, as shown in the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 249), when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened twice, but in such a case. Even so, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on the result of one hit determination process of the ordinary symbol is once.

By the way, as can be seen with reference to FIG. 249, the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 is different depending on whether the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1" or "fz2". In particular, the time of the "pre-opening interval" differs greatly between the two.

As described above, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1" can be selected in the normal game state or the C time saving game state in which left-handedness is a normal gaming mode, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2". Can be selected in the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state in which right-handed strike is a regular game mode. When left-handed, even if the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is derived to the normal symbol display unit 2161 and immediately changed to right-handed, the right-handed game ball reaches the normal electric accessory 2146. It takes time. Therefore, in consideration of this time, the time of the "pre-opening interval" when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1" is set to the "before opening interval" when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz2". It is longer than the "interval" time.

However, for example, a command indicating the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol before the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is derived to the normal symbol display unit 2161 (see FIG. 241) (that is, during the variable display of the normal symbol). When the right-handed instruction effect for instructing right-handedness is executed by the control of the sub-CPU2301 received from the main CPU 2201, the time of the "pre-opening interval" when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1" is set. It is not always necessary to make it longer than the time of the "pre-opening interval" when the selected symbol command at the time of hitting a normal symbol is "fz2".

When the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is such that approximately 4 (5 if the timing is good) game balls are second-started. The operation mode is such that it can pass through (win) the mouth 2140 (see FIG. 232). That is, in this embodiment, in the case of "Public long open hit" (when the selected symbol command at the time of hitting the normal symbol is "fz1"), "Public long open" per normal electric accessory 2146. The number of winnings to the second starting port 2140 that can be expected in the above is, for example, approximately four. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz2", the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is such that roughly two (three if the timing is good) game balls are second-started. The operation mode is such that it can pass through (win) the mouth 2140. That is, in this embodiment, in the case of "Public long open hit" (when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz2"), "Public long open" per normal electric accessory 2146. The number of winnings to the second starting port 2140 that can be expected in the above is, for example, approximately two. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

[6-4-7. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 250 is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The main CPU 2201 refers to the variation pattern table of the normal symbol, and is extracted based on the game state and the passing of the game ball through the passage gates 2126, 5125A, 5125B (see FIG. 232). Based on the above, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined. In this embodiment, as will be described later, since the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol determined is the same regardless of whether the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99, the game is substantially in the gaming state. Based on this, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

As shown in FIG. 250, in the normal game state, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is "01H" and the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10000 msec, regardless of whether the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99. Will be decided. Further, in the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is "02H" and the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 1000 msec, regardless of whether the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99. Will be decided. Further, in the C time saving game state, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be "03H" and the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 8000 msec, regardless of whether the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern of the same normal symbol is obtained between the B time-saving game state shifted by reaching the ceiling in the normal game state and the B time-saving game state shifted by reaching the ceiling in the C time-saving game state. Although it is determined, it is not limited to this, and it may be determined to be a variation pattern of a different ordinary symbol.

[6-4-8. Summary of basic specifications]
Based on the above explanation, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state and the B time saving gaming state (for example, 1000 mc) is the variable display time of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state or the C time saving gaming state (for example, 10,000 msec, It is relatively short compared to 8000 msec). Further, as can be seen with reference to FIG. 248, the winning probability (for example, “fz1” or “fz2” of the selected symbol command at the time of hitting a normal symbol) in the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving gaming state (for example, Approximately 1 / 1.1) is relatively high compared to the winning probability of "Public long open hit" (normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1") in the normal gaming state or the C time saving gaming state.

As described above, in the A time saving game state and the B time saving gaming state, the "Public long open" of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) has a high frequency (in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 248, for example. It is a gaming state that is executed with a probability of 1 / 1.1. In this case, in the "Public long opening", approximately two prizes can be expected for the second starting port 2140 for opening the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on the result of one hit determination process of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, as long as the game is played by hitting right, it is assumed that the number of reserved start information of the second special symbol will not be interrupted. That is, the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state are game states in which the game is performed with the expectation that a "big hit" or a "feature opening hit" will be derived as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol. be. Further, in the time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, the expected value of the number of prize balls (or prize data) with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is higher than that in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state, and the player has a ball. Decrease rate is slow.

On the other hand, in the C time saving game state, the "Public long open" of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) has a medium frequency (in this embodiment, for example, a probability of 1/48 as shown in FIG. 248). It is a game state executed in. In this case, in the "Public long opening", approximately four prizes can be expected for the second starting port 2140 for opening the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on the result of one hit determination process of the ordinary symbol. That is, the C time-saving game state becomes a "Public long open hit" until the end condition of the C time-shortened game state is satisfied, and further, in the second special symbol game, the character opening hit is won and V It is a game state in which the game is performed in the expectation that a prize will be won.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 244, the end condition of the C time saving game state includes "the variable display number of the first special symbol 20 times" and "the opening number of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232)". 12 times "is included. Therefore, in the C time-saving game state where the game is performed with the expectation that it will be a "Public long open hit" until the end condition of the C time-saving game state is satisfied, the variable display of the first special symbol is more important. It is preferable that the variable display of ordinary symbols is promoted. Therefore, in the C time shortening game state, it is preferable to set the variable display time of the normal symbol to be the same as or shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbol so that the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. In this embodiment, the variable display time of the first special symbol is 8000 msec or more (see FIG. 245), and the variable display time of the normal symbol is 8000 msec (see FIG. 250) in the C time reduction gaming state.

In addition, in the C time shortening game state, instead of or in addition to making the variable display time of the normal symbol the same as or shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbol, for example, the passing gates 5125A, 5125B ( By making the passing rate to the first starting port 5120 (see FIG. 232) higher than the winning rate to the first starting port 5120 (see FIG. 232), the variable display of the normal symbol is promoted rather than the variable display of the first special symbol. May be good. In this embodiment, the number of passing gates 5125A and 5125B through which the game ball can pass when hitting left is larger than the number of first starting ports 5120 where the game ball can win when hitting left.

Further, it is not essential that the variable display time of the normal symbol is always the same as or shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbol in the C time reduction game state. For example, even if the average value of the variable display time of the normal symbol is shorter than the average value of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is promoted more than the variable display of the first special symbol. It is possible.

Further, in the normal game state, when the "Public long open" of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is executed, approximately four prizes can be expected in the second starting port 2140 per operation. However, it is a gaming state in which it is almost impossible to expect a "per-opening of the Fuden long" (in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 248, it is executed only with a probability of, for example, 1/32768). That is, the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the game is performed with the expectation that a "big hit" or a "time saving hit" will be derived as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

In any of the normal game state, the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state, if it is not "Public long open hit", the prize to the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) is almost the same. It will be an unpredictable "Public short open hit".

Further, the end conditions for each of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are as described above. However, in this embodiment, in the C time saving game state, the establishment of the specific condition is also included in the time saving end condition. As for this specific condition, for example, the display mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1" (that is, "Public long open hit") is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 2161. It is made to hold when it is derived. In this embodiment, if the player wins even once in the "Public game long open hit" in the C time saving game state, the time saving end condition in the C time saving game state is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, "Public game". When the specified number of times is won in "long open hit", the time saving end condition of the C time saving game state may be satisfied. Further, instead of the time saving end condition being satisfied based on the "Public long open hit", the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) based on the "Public long open hit" is completed. The time saving end condition of the C time saving game state may be satisfied. Furthermore, it is not essential to set "Public long open hit" as the time saving end condition of the C time saving game state, and even if you win the "Public long opening hit", do not end the C time saving game state. May be good.

In this embodiment, the establishment of the above-mentioned specific condition is set as the end condition of the C time-saving game state, but instead of or in addition to the end condition of the C time-shortened game state, the end condition of the B time-shortened game state is set. May be.

[6-5. Main control process]
Hereinafter, among the time saving management processes described in the first pachinko gaming machine and the like, different processes will be mainly described.

In the first pachinko gaming machine or the like, the time saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed, but this sixth pachinko game In the machine, the first time saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and the second time saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. When the sum of the variable display count of the first special symbol and the variable display count of the second special symbol reaches the specified value as the end condition of the time-saving gaming state, the variable display count of the first special symbol and the second This is to make it possible to deal with both the case where one of the variable display times of the special symbol reaches the specified value as the end condition of the time-saving gaming state. However, in the first pachinko gaming machine, etc., the end condition of the time-saving gaming state is that the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol reaches a specified value. Needless to say, when either the variable display number of the first special symbol or the variable display number of the second special symbol reaches a specified value, it may be a condition for ending the time-saving gaming state.

[6-5-1. Time saving counter update process]
First, a time saving counter update process, which is one of the processes different from that of the first pachinko gaming machine and the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (S2151).

In S2151, when it is determined that the time reduction flag is not on, that is, the time reduction flag is off (NO determination in S2151), the main CPU 2201 ends the time reduction counter update process, and performs the counter update process (FIG. FIG. 33).

When it is determined in S2151 that the time saving flag is ON (when the determination in S2151 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2152.

In S2152, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is variable display and the first time reduction counter is larger than 0.

In S2152, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the first time reduction counter is determined to be larger than 0 (YES in S2152), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2153.

On the other hand, in S2152, when the first special symbol is variable display and the first time reduction counter is not determined to be larger than 0 (NO determination in S2152), that is, the first special symbol is variable display. If one of the above and the first time reduction counter is larger than 0 is not satisfied, the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2154.

In S2153, the main CPU 2201 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the first time reduction counter. After executing the process of S2153, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2154.

In S2154, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is variable display and the second time reduction counter is larger than 0.

In S2154, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the second time reduction counter is determined to be larger than 0 (YES in S2154), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2155.

On the other hand, in S2154, when the second special symbol is variable display and the second time reduction counter is not determined to be larger than 0 (NO determination in S2154), that is, the second special symbol is variable display. If any one of the above and the second time reduction counter is larger than 0 is not satisfied, the main CPU 2201 ends the time reduction counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

In S2155, the main CPU 2201 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the second time reduction counter. After executing the process of S2155, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

[6-5-2. Counter judgment processing]
Next, a counter determination process, which is one of the processes different from that of the first pachinko gaming machine and the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving transition determination process (S2161). The details of this time saving transition determination will be described later with reference to FIG. 253. After executing the process of S2161, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2162.

In S2162, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving transition process. The details of this time saving transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 254. After executing the process of S2162, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2163.

In S2163, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving mode is 2 or 4. As described in the first pachinko gaming machine and the like, the time saving mode is set to 2 at the time of transition to the B time saving gaming state. That is, the gaming state when the time saving mode is 2 is the B time saving gaming state.

Further, in this sixth pachinko gaming machine, when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state and the selected symbol command is "z1", for example, in the special symbol game end setting process (see S282 in FIG. 42) in the jackpot end process. The main CPU 2201 sets the time saving mode to 1. That is, the gaming state when the time saving mode is 1 is the A time saving gaming state.

Further, in the following cases, for example, in the special symbol game end setting process (see S282 in FIG. 42) in the jackpot end process, the main CPU 2201 sets the time saving mode to 4.
-When the jackpot is won in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state, and the selected symbol command (see FIG. 244) is "z1".
-When the jackpot is won in the normal game state, the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, or the C time reduction game state, and the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z6".
-When a player wins a winning combination (the selected symbol command is "z5") and wins a V in the normal game state, the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, or the C time reduction game state.

That is, the gaming state when the time saving mode is 4 is also the A time saving gaming state. However, the end condition of the A time saving game state is different depending on whether the time saving mode is 1 or 4.

When it is determined in S2163 that the time saving mode is 2 or 4 (YES determination in S2163), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2164.

In S2164, the main CPU 2201 determines, for example, whether or not the requirement represented by the following equation (1) is satisfied.
H- (1st time reduction counter + 2nd time reduction counter) ≤ K ... Equation (1)

In this embodiment, when the game shifts to the A time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving game state in the special symbol game end setting process (see S282 in FIG. 42) in the big hit end process. Set the condition. Further, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 2201 is in the B time saving game state related to the variable display number of the special symbol in the B time saving control mode determination process (see S2182 in FIG. 254 described later), which will be described in detail later. Determine the end conditions, etc. Further, when the time reduction hit is won, the main CPU 2201 is in the C time reduction game state related to the variable display number of the special symbol, although the details will be described later in the C time reduction control mode determination process (see S2185 in FIG. 254 described later). Determine the end conditions, etc. When setting the end condition of the time saving game state related to the variable display number of the special symbol in each of the above processes (S282, S2182, S2185), the main CPU 2201 sets both the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter. , Each value of "H" and "K" shown in the above formula (1) is set. "H" is the sum of the value set in the first time saving counter and the value set in the second time saving counter, and "K" is a value for ending the time saving game state.

For example, when the character is opened (the selected symbol command (see FIG. 244) is "z5") and the V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 sets 12 to the first time reduction counter as the end condition of the A time reduction game state. Set, set 12 in the second time reduction counter, set 24 in "H", and set 12 in "K". Further, when the big hit is won in the normal game state and the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 sets 5 in the first time saving counter, 1 is set in the second time saving counter, and 24 is set in "H". Set and set 12 to "K".

In S2164, when the requirement represented by the above formula (1) is not satisfied (when the determination in S2164 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2168.

On the other hand, in S2164, when the requirement represented by the above equation (1) is satisfied (when the determination in S2164 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2165.

In S2165, the main CPU 2201 executes a flag reset process. In this process, the main CPU 2201 executes a time saving flag, a time saving mode, a first time saving counter, a second time saving counter, values of "H" and "K" shown in the above equation (1), and variable display of a normal symbol. If this is done, the time saving chart counter, etc., which is subtracted, is reset. After executing the process of S2165, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2168.

Returning to S2163, when it is determined that the time saving mode is not 2 or 4 (S2163 is NO determination), that is, when the time saving mode is 1 or 3, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2166. As described above, the gaming state when the time saving mode is 1 is the A time saving gaming state. Further, as described in the first pachinko gaming machine or the like, the time saving mode is set to 3 at the time of transition to the C time saving gaming state. That is, the gaming state when the time saving mode is 3 is the C time saving gaming state.

In S2166, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the first time reduction counter is smaller than 1 or the second time reduction counter is smaller than 1.

In S2166, when the first time reduction counter is not smaller than 1 and the second time reduction counter is not smaller than 1 (NO is determined in S2166), that is, both the first time reduction counter and the second time reduction counter are 1 or more. If, the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2168.

On the other hand, in S2166, when the first time saving counter is smaller than 1, or the second time saving counter is smaller than 1 (when S2166 is determined to be YES), that is, at least one of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter. If either is less than 1, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2167.

In S2167, the main CPU 2201 executes a flag reset process. In this process, the main CPU 2201 resets the time saving flag, the time saving mode, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the time saving normal figure counter, etc., and of "H" and "K" shown in the above equation (1). If the values are set, reset these values as well. After executing the process of S2167, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2168.

In S2168, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process (S2169) of the time saving transition command. The time saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 241) in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. .. Then, after the processing of S2169, the main CPU 2201 ends the counter determination processing and returns the processing to the time saving management processing (see FIG. 32).

[6-5-3. Time saving transition judgment processing]
Next, a time saving transition determination process, which is one of the processes different from that of the first pachinko gaming machine and the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The time saving shift determination process shown in FIG. 253 differs from the time saving transition processing determination process of FIG. 37 in that the process of S191 executed in FIG. 37 is not executed. This is because the probability variation flag is not set to on in this sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In the time saving transition determination process shown in FIG. 253, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the ceiling arrival flag is off and the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (S2171), the ceiling count prohibition flag is on (S2172), and the ceiling. Each process of flag-on (S2173) and ceiling arrival flag-on (S2174) is executed. Each of these processes is executed in FIG. 37 to determine whether the ceiling arrival flag is off and the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (S192), the ceiling count prohibition flag on (S193), and the ceiling flag on (S193). Since it is the same as each process of S194) and the ceiling arrival flag on (S196), the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 sets the ceiling arrival flag to off and clears the ceiling counter, for example, when the condition device is operated. However, the process of setting the ceiling arrival flag to off and / and the process of clearing the ceiling counter are executed when the condition device is activated and when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting (for example, in the setting change process of FIG. 47). The first normal game pre-processing (see S344) called as a subroutine during execution, or the first normal called as a subroutine during RAM clearing without changing settings (for example, during the execution of the startup initial setting process of FIG. 24). It may also be executed in the game pre-processing (see S56)).

[6-5-4. Time saving transition processing]
Next, a time saving transition process, which is one of the processes different from that of the first pachinko gaming machine and the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the ceiling flag is on (S2181).

If it is determined in S2181 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S2181), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2182.

In S2182, the main CPU 2201 executes the B time saving control mode determination process as the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the end condition of the B time saving game state, the time saving mode, the type of the B time saving game state, and the like are set.

The end condition of the B time reduction gaming state determined in the B time reduction control mode determination process (S2182) is, for example, an end condition related to the variable display number of the first special symbol and an end condition related to the variable display number of the second special symbol. And each value of "H" and "K" shown in the above-mentioned equation (1), and an end condition related to the variable display number of ordinary symbols. It should be noted that the end condition related to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (for example, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is opened, the number of times the "Public long open" is derived, etc.) is included in the end condition of the B time saving game state. You may do so.

Further, the time saving mode determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S2182) is, for example, 2.

Further, the types of the B time saving game state determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S2182) are, for example, the B time saving gaming state that reaches the ceiling in the normal gaming state and the B time saving gaming state that reaches the ceiling in the C time saving gaming state. It is information for distinguishing from. It should be noted that the B time-saving game state in which the ceiling is reached in the normal game state and the B time-saving game state in which the ceiling is reached in the C time-saving game state may be distinguished from each other by making the determined time-saving mode different. ..

Returning to S2181, if it is determined that the ceiling flag is not on (NO determination in S2181), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2183.

In S2183, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time reduction hit flag is on.

In S2183, when it is determined that the time reduction hit flag is not on (when S2183 is NO determination), that is, when the time reduction hit flag is off, the main CPU 2201 ends the time reduction transition process and performs the process as a counter determination process. Return to (see FIG. 252).

On the other hand, in S2183, when it is determined that the time reduction hit flag is ON (YES determination in S2183), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2184.

In S2184, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is off.

In S2184, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not off (when S2184 is NO determination), that is, when the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving transition process and performs the process as a counter determination process (FIG. FIG. 252).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2184 that the time saving flag is off (when the determination in S2184 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2185.

In S2185, the main CPU 2201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the end condition of the C time saving game state, the time saving mode, and the like are determined. After executing the process of S2185, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2186.

The end condition of the C time reduction gaming state determined in the C time reduction control mode determination process (S2185) is, for example, an end condition related to the variable display number of the first special symbol and an end condition related to the variable display number of the second special symbol. And the end condition related to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (for example, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is opened, the number of times that "per ordinary electric long opening" is derived, and the like).

Further, the time saving mode determined in the C time saving control mode determination process (S2185) is, for example, 3.

In S2186, the main CPU 2201 executes the time saving setting process. This time reduction setting process will be described below.

[6-5-5. Time saving setting process]
Next, a time saving setting process, which is one of the processes different from that of the first pachinko gaming machine and the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (S2191).

When it is determined in S2191 that the time saving flag is ON (when the determination in S2191 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2192. In this embodiment, YES is determined in S2191 only when the ceiling is reached in the C time saving game state because the ceiling is not reached in the A time saving game state. In this respect, for example, not only when the ceiling is reached in the C time saving game state, but also the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first. It is different from the first possible pachinko machine.

In S2192, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. This process is a process executed when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving game state is executed first, and is a new process with the current time-saving counter value (that is, the number of time-saving remaining times). It is determined which of the number of time reductions is larger, and the number of time reductions, whichever is larger than the number of remaining time reductions or the new number of time reductions, is reset as a new time reduction counter. In this case, it is preferable that the time saving performance to be executed is the same as the time saving performance in the C time saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where the C time saving game state is executed first, the time saving remaining number in the C time saving game state is larger than the time saving number in the B time saving game state. The number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state is always larger than the time reduction remaining number in the C time reduction game state. In such a case, in the time saving counter resetting process (see S2192), whichever of the current time saving counter value (that is, the time saving remaining number) and the new time saving number (that is, the time saving number of times in the B time saving gaming state) is necessarily There is no need to determine if there are many. Therefore, in such a case, the main CPU 2201 resets the time reduction number in the B time reduction game state as a new time reduction counter without determining which of the time reduction remaining number and the new time reduction number is larger. You may do it.

As described above, the time saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 2140 (see FIG. 232) in this embodiment), and is a "normal symbol hit". The winning probability, the variable display time of the normal symbol, or / and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric accessory 2146.

Returning to S2191, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (when the determination in S2191 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2193.

In S2193, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving mode setting process. In this process, the time reduction end condition determined by the B time reduction control mode determination process (S2182) or the C time reduction control mode determination process (S2185) (end condition related to the variable display number of the first special symbol, variable second special symbol). The end condition related to the number of impressions, the respective values of "H" and "K" shown in the above equation (1), the end condition related to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146, etc.) and the time saving mode are set. After executing the process of S2193, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2194.

In S2194, the main CPU 2201 sets the time saving flag on. After executing the process of S2194, the main CPU 2201 ends the time reduction setting process and returns the process to the time reduction transition process (FIG. 254).

[6-5-6. Time saving setting process]
Next, a time-saving normal map determination process, which is one of the processes not described in the first pachinko gaming machine or the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving normal figure determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The time-saving normal diagram determination process shown in FIG. 256 is executed, for example, in the ordinary symbol game determination process (see S295 in FIG. 43) of the ordinary symbol control process described in the first pachinko gaming machine or the like. In FIG. 43, the normal symbol game determination process of S295 is not shown as a subroutine, but in this sixth pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol game determination process of S295 is called as a subroutine. It should be noted that this time-saving normal map determination process may be performed by the time the normal electric accessory opening process (see S296 in FIG. 43) is completed.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving mode is 3, that is, whether or not the C time saving gaming state is in progress (S2201).

In S2201, when it is determined that the time saving mode is not 3 (when S2201 is determined NO), that is, when it is determined that the C time saving gaming state is not in progress, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving normal drawing determination process and processes it. Is returned to the normal symbol game determination process (see S295 in FIG. 43).

On the other hand, in S2201, when it is determined that the time saving mode is 3 (YES in S2201), that is, when it is determined that the C time saving gaming state is in progress, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2202. ..

In S2202, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a "Public power long open hit", that is, whether or not the stopped normal symbol is a stop display mode indicating "Public power long open hit".

In S2202, when it is determined that it is not a "per-electric long open hit" (when S2202 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2204. In this embodiment, since the "normal symbol hit" is won with a 100% probability, S2202 is determined to be NO when the "Public short open hit" is won. However, if the pachinko machine has a specification in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is not 100%, S2202 is determined to be NO even if the normal symbol is not won (it was a loss).

On the other hand, in S2202, when it is determined that it is a "Public electric long open hit" (when S2202 is YES determination), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2203.

In S2203, the main CPU 2201 executes a flag reset process. In this process, the main CPU 2201 resets the time saving flag, the time saving mode, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the time saving normal figure counter, etc., and of "H" and "K" shown in the above equation (1). If the values are set, reset these values as well. After executing the process of S2203, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2204.

In S2204, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving transition command transmission reservation process (S2205). The time saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 241) in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. .. Then, after the processing of S2205, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving normal figure determination processing, and returns the processing to the normal symbol game determination processing (see S295 in FIG. 43).

In this way, the main CPU 2201 ends the C time-saving game state when the "Public long open hit" is derived in the C time-saving game state.

When the "Public long open hit" is derived and the V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 controls the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, if the V prize is not won even though the "Public long open hit" is derived, the main CPU 2201 controls to the normal gaming state.

As described above, when the "Public long open hit" is derived in the B time saving game state, the B time saving game state may be terminated. In this case, the "Public long open hit" is derived, and the game ball is won at the second starting port at the timing when the normal electric accessory 2146 is activated, and the accessory open hit is derived as a result of the second special symbol game. When the V attacker 2152 is opened, the V prize is won with a probability of almost 100% as long as the right-handed hit is performed. Therefore, the B time saving game state is originally a blissful game state for the player. However, in such a B time-saving game state, if the "Public long open hit" is derived but the V prize is not won, the game is performed by ending the B time-saving game state and shifting to the normal game state. It is possible to maintain a sense of tension in the person and suppress the decline in interest. Moreover, when the transition to the normal gaming state is performed in this way, since the above-mentioned ceiling arrival flag is on, in this normal gaming state, unless the jackpot gaming state is once controlled, the B time shortening gaming state may be controlled. do not have.

[6-5-7. Time saving general map management process]
Next, a time-saving normal map management process, which is one of the processes not described in the first pachinko gaming machine or the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 257. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving normal diagram management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol does not become a loss (it is a hit of the normal electric short open or a hit of the normal electric long open), so that the time saving normal figure management process is the first pachinko gaming machine. It is executed in the normal symbol per-end processing (see S297 in FIG. 43) of the normal symbol control processing described in the above. In FIG. 43, the normal symbol hitting end process of S297 is not shown as a subroutine, but in this sixth pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol hitting end process of S297 is called as a subroutine. In a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that include a loss in the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, if the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a loss, the time-saving pachinko game management process is the first pachinko gaming machine or the like. It is executed in the ordinary symbol game determination process (see S295 in FIG. 43) described in the above.

First, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving normal map counter update process (S2211). The details of the time saving normal map counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 258. After executing the process of S2211, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2212.

In S2212, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving normal map counter determination process. The details of the time saving map counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 259. After executing the process of S2212, the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving working hours management process, and returns the process to the normal symbol per-symbol end process (see FIG. 43).

[6-5-8. Time saving normal map counter update processing]
Next, a time-saving normal map counter update process, which is one of the processes not described in the first pachinko gaming machine or the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 258. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving normal figure counter update process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state, the time saving normal figure counter is subtracted.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving normal map counter is larger than 0 (S2221). In this process, when both the time saving flag on and the time saving normal map counter is larger than 0 are satisfied, a YES determination is made, and if either one is not satisfied, a NO determination is made.

The time saving flag is set to on when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state.

The time-saving normal map counter indicates the variable display number of normal symbols that can be executed in each of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving normal figure counter is subtracted when the variable display of the normal symbol is completed, and the time-saving game state is terminated when the time-saving normal figure counter becomes 0. Not limited to this, the addition method is adopted in which the time-saving normal figure counter is added when the variable display of the normal symbol is completed, and the time-saving game state is terminated when the time-saving normal number of times the time-saving normal figure counter is set is reached. You may. In addition, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving normal figure counter when the variable display of the normal symbol ends, the time-saving normal figure counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the time-saving normal figure counter is set. The time-saving game state may be terminated when it reaches 0 (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the number of time-saving times when the time-saving normal figure counter is set (in the case of the addition method).

When it is determined in S2221 that both the time saving flag on and the time saving normal map counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO determination in S2221), the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving normal map counter update process. , The process is returned to the time-saving counter map management process (FIG. 257).

On the other hand, in S2221, when the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving normal map counter is determined to be larger than 0 (YES determination in S2221), the main CPU 2201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving normal map counter (S2222). After executing the process of S2222, the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving normal map counter update process, and returns the process to the time-saving normal map management process (FIG. 257).

[6-5-9. Time saving normal map counter judgment processing]
Next, a time-saving normal map counter determination process, which is one of the processes not described in the first pachinko gaming machine or the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving normal figure counter determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (S2231).

In S2231, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (NO is determined in S2231), that is, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving normal map counter determination processing and performs the processing. Return to the normal map management process (see Fig. 257).

On the other hand, in S2231, when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S2231), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2232.

In S2322, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving map counter is smaller than 1.

In S2232, when it is determined that the time saving normal map counter is not smaller than 1 (NO is determined in S2232), that is, when the time saving normal drawing counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2234. ..

On the other hand, in S2232, when it is determined that the time saving chart counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S2322), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2233.

In S2233, the main CPU 2201 executes a flag reset process. In this process, the main CPU 2201 resets the time saving flag, the time saving mode, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the time saving normal figure counter, etc., and of "H" and "K" shown in the above equation (1). If the values are set, reset these values as well. After executing the process of S2233, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2234.

In S2234, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving transition command transmission reservation process (S2235). The time saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 241) in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. .. Then, after the processing of S2235, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving normal map counter determination processing, and returns the processing to the time saving normal map management processing (see FIG. 257).

[6-6. Game mode]
Next, for example, the game mode performed by the display device 2007 configured by the liquid crystal display will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an example of a game mode transition controlled by the sub CPU 2301 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 261 shows various probabilities for each game mode excluding the first jackpot mode and the second jackpot mode in the sixth pachinko gaming machine (various probabilities in a special symbol game, and probabilities of “Public long open hit” in a normal symbol game. ) Is a table showing an example.

The game mode is a state of the game that the player can grasp by appearance, and is referred to as a game mode in order to distinguish it from, for example, an internal game state controlled by the main CPU 2201. The sub CPU 2301 controls so that the effect image corresponding to the game mode is displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 including, for example, a liquid crystal display.

In the present embodiment, the game modes include the first jackpot mode, the second jackpot mode, the normal mode, the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, the high accuracy mode B (true)), and the high accuracy mode B (false). , Challenge mode (1st challenge mode, 2nd challenge mode), special mode, remaining hold mode, and bliss mode. The sub CPU 2301 is configured to be controllable to any of these plurality of game modes.

Although the term "normal mode" is also used in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the "normal mode" used in the sixth pachinko gaming machine is the "normal mode" used in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. different.

The normal mode, the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, the high-accuracy mode B (true)), and the high-accuracy mode B (false) correspond to the "normal game mode" of the present invention. Further, the special mode corresponds to the "advantageous game mode" of the present invention. Since the bliss mode is not essential in the present embodiment, the bliss mode is not included in the "advantageous game mode" of the present invention, but the bliss mode may be included in the "advantageous game mode" of the present invention.

By the way, in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine and the like, the decorative symbol is composed of 9 symbols, for example, 1 to 9 on the left side, and 10 symbols, for example, 1 to 9 and a time saving symbol, on the middle symbol. It was explained that the right symbol is composed of, for example, 9 symbols 1-9. However, in this sixth pachinko gaming machine, when the second special symbol game is executed, it is possible to win a prize per opening of the character, so that the medium symbols are, for example, 1 to 9, 11 time-saving symbols and chance symbols. It shall be composed of the symbols of. Then, when the result of the second special symbol game is the winning of the character opening, the player can grasp that the winning of the character opening is won by stopping and displaying the middle symbol with the chance symbol.

Hereinafter, the details of each game mode will be described.

[6-6-1. 1st jackpot mode]
In the first jackpot mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the 3R jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, in the first jackpot mode, right-handed is a normal game mode.

The start condition of the first big hit mode is, for example, that the condition device operates based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the normal gaming state being "3R big hit" (selection symbol command is "z1"). Is.

Further, the termination condition of the first jackpot mode is, for example, the termination of the 3R jackpot gaming state.

During the first jackpot mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the 3R jackpot game state, so when the game ball passes (wins) through the starting port (first starting port 5120, second starting port 2140), it is special. Although the start information of the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is reserved, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, even during the first big hit mode, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed.

(Game in the 1st jackpot mode)
In the first big hit mode, right-handed is a regular game mode, so the player plays right-handed. The sub CPU 2301 performs a right-handed instruction effect when shifting the game mode to the first big hit mode.

When the player plays a game by hitting right, the launched game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. In the first big hit mode, the round game in which the big winning opening 2131 (see FIG. 232) shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period (for example, a period in which 10 game balls can be won per round) is, for example, 3 rounds. It is done over. Therefore, in the first big hit mode, the game ball flowing down the right side area 2107 is likely to win the big winning opening 2131. Then, when the game ball flowing down the right side area 2107 wins the large winning opening 2131 (see FIG. 232), for example, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls per winning.

In the first big hit mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the big hit game state (3R big hit game state) has ended, the sub CPU 2301 ends the first big hit mode and sets the game mode to the first challenge mode. Migrate.

In addition, when shifting to the first challenge mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays a zone notice effect image for notifying that the zone effect described later will be performed in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007.

[6-6-2. 2nd jackpot mode]
In the second big hit mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the 3R big hit gaming state or the 10R big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, in the second big hit mode, right-handed is a normal game mode.

The start conditions of the second big hit mode are as follows, for example.
-Based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state) is "3R big hit" (selected symbol command is "z1"). The condition device is activated.
-The condition device operates based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being "10R big hit" (selection symbol command is "z2" or "z6") regardless of the game state.
-Regardless of the game state, the condition device operates based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being "feature open hit" (selection symbol command is "z5") and V winning.

Further, the end condition of the second big hit mode is, for example, the end of the big hit game state (3R big hit game state, 10R big hit game state).

During the second jackpot mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the 3R jackpot gaming state or the 10R jackpot gaming state, so that the game ball passes through the starting port (first starting port 5120, second starting port 2140) ( When the prize is won), the start information of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is reserved, but the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, even during the second big hit mode, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed.

(Game in the second big hit mode)
In the second big hit mode, right-handed is a regular game mode, so the player plays right-handed. The sub CPU 2301 performs a right-handed instruction effect when shifting to the second big hit mode.

When the player plays a game by hitting right, the launched game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. In the second jackpot mode, the above-mentioned round game may be performed over, for example, 10 rounds. Therefore, in the second big hit mode, the expected value that a large amount of game balls are given to the player as a prize ball is higher than in the first big hit mode.

In the second big hit mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the big hit game state (3R or 10R big hit game state) has ended, the sub CPU 2301 ends the second big hit mode and sets the game mode to the special mode. Migrate.

[6-6-3. Normal mode]
In the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, in the normal mode, left-handed is a normal game mode.

(Various probabilities)
The various probabilities when the special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) is executed in the normal mode are as follows, for example. The various probabilities shown below are probabilities based on the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 242), the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 243), and the hit type determination table (see FIG. 244) (others to be described later). The reference table is the same for the game mode of).

(1) When the first special symbol game is executed (1-1) Various probabilities / big hits ... 1/319
・ When the character is open ... 0
・ Short time hit ・ ・ ・ 1/64
(1-2) Distribution rate when a big hit is won ・ 3R big hit (selected symbol command “z1”) ・ ・ ・ 99/100
・ 10R jackpot (selected symbol command “z2”) ・ ・ ・ 1/100

(2) When the second special symbol game is executed (2-1) Various probabilities / jackpots ... 1/319
・ Per opening of the accessory ・ ・ ・ 1 / 10.5
・ Short time hit ・ ・ ・ 1 / 10.5
(1-2) Distribution rate when a big hit is won ・ 10R big hit (selected symbol command “z6”) ・ ・ ・ 100/100

The various probabilities when the hit determination process of the normal symbol is executed in the normal mode are as follows, for example. In this embodiment, when the hit determination process of the normal symbol is executed, as described above, the normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained with a probability of 100%, and the normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained. , The normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 248) is referred to, and the data is sorted into a normal electric long open hit or a normal electric short open hit (the same applies to other game modes described later).

(3) When the normal symbol game is executed ・ Fuden long open hit (normal symbol hit selection symbol command “fz1”) ・ ・ ・ 1/2768
・ Fuden short open hit (normal symbol hit selection symbol command “fz0”) ・ ・ ・ 32768/32768

(Migration conditions and migration destination)
In the normal mode, for example, when any one of the plurality of conditions shown below is satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the other mode. In addition, the transition destination of the game mode based on the establishment of the transition condition is also shown. In addition, in the following "winning in the time saving hit", the display mode indicating the time saving hit may be derived to the special symbol display unit 2163, 2164, and the display mode indicating the time saving hit may be derived in the special symbol display unit 2163, 2. It may be the start of the next game derived in 2164 (the same applies to other game modes).
・ Winning 3R jackpot (selected symbol command “z1”) ⇒ shift to 1st jackpot mode ・ Winning 10R jackpot (selected symbol commands “z2”, “z6”) ⇒ Move to the 2nd big hit mode ・ Win the time saving hit (selected symbol commands "z0", "z4") ⇒ Move to the high accuracy mode A ・ "Public long open hit" is derived ⇒ Move to the 2nd challenge mode・ Ceiling counter reaches ceiling value ⇒ Shift to bliss mode

Although the frequency of occurrence is extremely low, a game ball wins a prize at the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) when the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened based on the "Public short-opening hit". , If the result of the second special symbol game is a winning match (selection symbol command is "z5") and a V prize is won, the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode.

(Direction)
In the normal mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays a normal effect image capable of grasping that the game mode is not advantageous for the player on the display device 2007.

Further, although not particularly shown, the display device 2007 has, for example, a main area that occupies most of the display area, and, for example, a small sub-region that is inconspicuous in one corner of the display area. The sub CPU 2301 performs a variable display effect using a decorative pattern in this main area. Further, the sub CPU 2301 performs a variable display effect using a mini symbol in the sub area. The main area is the area that the player pays the most attention to and visually recognizes, while the sub area is the area that is difficult for the player to pay attention to.

In the normal mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the main area, and a variable display effect of the mini symbol corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Display in sub-area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the main area, and the variable display effect of the mini symbol corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in the sub area. It may be displayed. Further, for example, the mini symbol A and the mini symbol B are displayed in the sub area, the variable display effect of the mini symbol A is performed corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the variable display effect of the mini symbol B is normally performed. It may be performed according to the design.

(Game in normal mode)
In the normal mode, left-handed is a regular game mode, so the player plays left-handed. When the game is played by right-handed, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a left-handed instruction effect for instructing a warning or left-handed. Specifically, the sub CPU 2301 displays a warning image and an effect image instructing left-handedness in the display area of the display device 2007, and outputs a warning sound and a voice instructing left-handedness from, for example, the speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241). Output (hereinafter, simply described as "left-handed instruction effect" or "right-handed instruction effect", and specific explanation is omitted).

When the player plays a game by hitting left, the launched game ball mainly flows down the left side region 2106. When a game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 enters the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232), the game ball enters the first start port 5120, the passage gate 5125A, and the passage gate 5125B (all see FIG. 232). Enter one of them. On the other hand, among the game balls flowing down the left side region 2106, the game balls that did not enter the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232) either win the general winning opening 2122 or are discharged to the outside from the out opening 2178. Will be done.

When the game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the first start port 5120 (winning), the main CPU 2201 holds the start information of the first special symbol up to a predetermined number (for example, four). Then, when the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, the first special symbol game is started. Further, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120, the payout / launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 based on the prize ball control command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, and the payout device Control is performed so that the 82 pays out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls as prize balls.

When the first special symbol game is started, the sub CPU 2301 performs variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, for example, an effect image showing a big hit is displayed with a probability of 1/319, and an effect image showing a time saving hit is displayed with a probability of 1/64, for example.

When the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the display mode indicating the jackpot has been derived from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 terminates the normal mode, for example, shifts to the first jackpot mode with a probability of 99%, and has a probability of 1%. Shift to the second jackpot mode. Further, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the display mode indicating the time saving hit is derived, the sub CPU 2301 terminates the normal mode and shifts to the high accuracy mode A.

On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B, the main CPU 2201 reserves up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of start information of ordinary symbols. , When the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol game is started. Further, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 5125A or the passing gate 5125B, the payout / launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 based on the prize ball control command transmitted from the main CPU 2201. Control is performed so that the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls as prize balls. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out is, for example, the number of prize balls equal to or less than the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120. However, as described above, it is not essential that the prize ball is paid out based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 5125A or the passing gate 5125B.

When the normal symbol game is started, in the normal mode, the winning probability of "Public long open hit" is, for example, 1/32768, so the player almost always wins "Public long open hit". I can't expect it.

Therefore, in the normal mode, the game is played with the expectation of a big hit that is won with a probability of, for example, 1/319, or a time saving hit that is won with a probability of, for example, 1/64. However, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value without winning the jackpot (that is, without shifting to either the first jackpot mode or the second jackpot mode), the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the bliss mode.

In addition, when the normal symbol game is executed in the normal mode and, for example, the "Public long open hit" is won with a probability of 1/32768, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second challenge mode. However, not limited to this, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the second challenge mode when the "Public long open hit" is won in the normal symbol game of the high accuracy mode A or the high accuracy mode B (true), and the normal mode. If you win the "Public Long Open Hit" in the normal symbol game, you may continue the normal mode without shifting to the second challenge mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol game is started in the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 performs variable display on the normal symbol display unit 2161 (see FIG. 241), and the sub CPU 2301 is, for example, the main of the display device 2007. In the area, the variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is performed, and the variable display effect using the decorative symbol, the mini symbol, etc. corresponding to the normal symbol is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable display effect using a decorative symbol, a mini symbol, or the like corresponding to a normal symbol may be performed by using, for example, a display device 2007 or another display device.

Further, as described above, when the game is played by right-handed hitting, a warning or left-handed hitting instruction effect is performed. However, for example, the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) may be opened as a result of the player hitting right against the warning sound or the left-handed instruction effect, or the malicious person may release the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232). ) May be released by fraudulent means, and the second special symbol game may be executed unintentionally. Even in such a case, for example, there is a 1 / 10.5 chance of winning the winning combination, and if a V prize is won, the game mode shifts to the second big hit mode. Therefore, the second special symbol game is executed by winning the "Public long open hit" as a result of the left-handed game, which is a regular game mode, and the second special symbol in an unintended manner. It is preferable that, for example, the hall personnel can distinguish the case where the game is executed. For example, when the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened even though the normal symbol game is not executed, or when the normal electric accessory 2146 is hit right even though it is in the normal mode, the hall computer is passed through the external terminal board 2184. It is preferable to output an invalid signal to 2186 (see FIG. 241 in each case).

[6-6-4. High accuracy mode]
The high-accuracy mode includes a high-accuracy mode A and a high-accuracy mode B (true). In the high-accuracy mode, in both the high-accuracy mode A and the high-accuracy mode B (true), the main CPU 2201 internally controls the C time-saving gaming state. In this embodiment, the high-accuracy mode is a game mode in which left-handedness is a normal game mode in both the high-accuracy mode A and the high-accuracy mode B (true).

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities (big hit probability, per opening of a character) when a special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) is executed in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true)). Probability, time saving hit probability) is the same as the normal mode, so it is omitted.

However, in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true)), even if the time-saving hit is won, it is ignored by the main CPU 2201 and the time-saving hit is invalidated. In this respect, it is different from the normal mode in which the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode (C time saving game state) when the time saving hit is won.

The various probabilities when the hit determination process of the normal symbol is executed in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true)) are as follows, for example.
・ Fuden long open hit (normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1") ・ ・ ・ Approximately 1/48
・ Fuden short open hit (normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz0") ・ ・ ・ Approximately 47/48

In this way, in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), it is possible to win the "Public long open hit" with a higher probability than in the normal mode. That is, the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)) is a gaming mode in which left-handed strike is a normal gaming mode as in the normal mode, but is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode.

(Initiation condition)
The start conditions of the high accuracy mode A are as follows, for example.
-Winning the "time saving hit" in the normal mode, and being controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the C time saving game state.

When the "time saving hit" is won in the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the C time saving game state, but the sub CPU 2301 immediately switches to the high accuracy mode A when the "time saving hit" is won. The transition may be made, or the normal mode may be continued until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a predetermined number of special symbol games are executed). If the normal mode is won, but the normal mode is continued until a predetermined condition is satisfied without immediately shifting to the high-accuracy mode A, the sub CPU 2301 may be used to shift to the high-accuracy mode A, for example. It is possible to carry out a fanning effect as suggested, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

The start conditions for the high accuracy mode B (true) are as follows, for example.
-Winning the "time saving hit" in the remaining hold mode, and being controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the C time saving game state.

(Termination conditions and migration destination)
The end condition is the same in the high accuracy mode A and the high accuracy mode B (true) (the same as the end condition of the above-mentioned C time saving game state). Specifically, for example, one of a plurality of conditions shown below is satisfied. In addition, the transition destination of the game mode based on the establishment of the end condition is also shown.
・ Variable display number of 1st special symbol 20 times ⇒ Shift to normal mode ・ Variable display number of 2nd special symbol based on winning a prize at the 2nd start port by "Public short opening hit" 1 time ⇒ Shift to normal mode (When the result of the second special symbol game is lost)
・ The number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened 12 times ⇒ shift to the normal mode ・ Win the 3R jackpot (selection symbol command “z1”) (when the condition device is activated) ⇒ shift to the second jackpot mode ・ 10R jackpot (selection symbol command “z1”) Winning "z2", "z6") (when the condition device is operating) ⇒ Shift to the second big hit mode / Winning the accessory opening (selection symbol command "z5") and winning V (when the condition device is operating) ⇒ 2nd Move to jackpot mode ・ "Public long open hit" is derived ⇒ Move to 2nd challenge mode ・ Ceiling counter reaches ceiling value ⇒ Move to bliss mode

In this embodiment, since the ceiling counter does not reach the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode B (true), there is no case of shifting from the high accuracy mode B (true) to the bliss mode. However, if the pachinko machine has specifications such that the ceiling counter may reach the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode B (true), the high accuracy mode B (true) may shift to the bliss mode.

In addition, if the player does not win the V prize even though he / she wins the character open hit (selection symbol command "z5"), the condition of "" Fuden long open hit "is derived" is satisfied, and the accuracy is high. The modes (high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true)) are terminated.

The end condition of the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)) includes "the number of variable display times of the second special symbol is once". This is an end condition that is satisfied when the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) is won at the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened due to the derivation of "opening hit". If "Public long open hit" is derived, the end condition is satisfied at this point.

In the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true)), the distribution rate to the 3R jackpot or the 10R jackpot is the same as in the normal mode. However, in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true)), even if either the 3R jackpot or the 10R jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. It is different from the normal mode in which the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the first jackpot mode when the 3R jackpot is won.

(Direction)
In the high-accuracy mode A and the high-accuracy mode B (true), the sub CPU 2301 displays an effect image that can be visually grasped, for example, that it may be more advantageous to the player than the normal mode (FIG. 232). The speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241) outputs an effect sound that is displayed in the display area of (see) and can be grasped that it may be more advantageous to the player than the normal mode.

In the above description, the sub CPU 2301 simply displays the effect image on the display device 2007, but the actual operation is as follows, as described above. That is, the display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed in the display device 2007 in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 2301, and is stored in the frame buffer at a predetermined timing. The image data is supplied to the D / A converter. The D / A converter supplied with the image data converts the image data as an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, the image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In the following, the description of these processes will be omitted, and the description will be simply described with the content that the sub CPU 2301 displays the effect image.

Similarly, in the above, the description is simply that the sub CPU 2301 outputs from the speaker 2032, but in reality, as described above, it is performed as follows. That is, first, the voice control circuit 2305 has a sound source IC, a voice data ROM, an AMP, and the like. Then, the sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM of the voice control circuit 2305 in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301, and the selected voice. The data is read from the voice data ROM, the voice data is converted into a predetermined voice signal, and the converted voice signal is supplied to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects and outputs them from the speaker 2032. In the following, the description of these processes will be omitted, and the description will be simply made with the content that the sub CPU 2301 outputs the effect sound.

The high-accuracy mode A and the high-accuracy mode B (true) are both internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the C time-shortening gaming state, but the sub CPU 2301 has the high-accuracy mode A and the high-accuracy mode B (true). ) And control so that different staging images are displayed in both modes.

Further, in this high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true)), the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol in the main area, and the first special symbol. And the variable display effect of the mini symbol corresponding to each of the second special symbols is displayed in the sub area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the main area, and the variable display effect of the mini symbol corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sub. It may be displayed in the area.

(Game in high accuracy mode)
Although the effect image displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 is different between the high-accuracy mode A and the high-accuracy mode B (true), the same control is internally executed by the main CPU 2201. That is, the same game is performed in the high accuracy mode A and the high accuracy mode B (true).

In the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), since left-handed is a normal game mode, the player plays the game by left-handed. As described above, in this embodiment, left-handed is a normal game mode in both the normal mode and the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)) having different degrees of advantage for the player. ..

When the game is played by right-handed in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), the sub CPU 2301 performs a left-handed instruction effect as in the normal mode.

In the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), the game proceeds in the same flow as in the normal mode, so that the points different from the normal mode will be mainly described.

When the player hits the left and the first special symbol game is executed and the player wins the time saving, the sub CPU 2301 triggers the transition to the high accuracy mode A in the normal mode (that is, the normal game state). In the probability mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), that is, the C time reduction game state), the winning of the time reduction is ignored by the main CPU 2201, and the sub CPU 2301 is high without shifting to another game mode. Continue the confirmation mode.

When a big hit is won in the high probability mode (high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true)), the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the second big hit mode with a probability of, for example, 100%. However, in this case, it is not essential to shift to the second jackpot mode with a 100% probability. For example, the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)) is a player compared to the normal mode. It suffices if the probability of transition to the second jackpot mode is higher in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)) than in the normal mode.

However, in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), when the first special symbol game is executed 20 times without winning the big hit, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high accuracy mode. , Shift the game mode to the normal mode.

In addition, when the player strikes left and the normal symbol game is executed, in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), the probability is, for example, 1/48, unlike the normal mode. Wins the "Public Long Opening Hit". In this respect, the high-accuracy mode A is significantly different from the normal mode in which it can hardly be expected to win the "Public long open hit".

When the "Public long open hit" is won in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second challenge mode. The sub CPU 2301 performs a right-handed instruction effect and various effects (for example, a chance effect indicating that the zone effect described later is highly expected to be performed) when shifting to the second challenge mode.

In this way, in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), the game is played in anticipation of, for example, a "Public long open hit" in which the player wins with a probability of 1/48. Become. However, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value without shifting to either the first jackpot mode or the second jackpot mode, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the bliss mode.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), if the "Public short-open hit" is won, the game ball may be awarded to the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232). Although it is difficult, in rare cases, a game ball may win a prize in the second starting port 2140, and a second special symbol game may be executed. In this case, if the result of the second special symbol game is lost, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high accuracy mode and shifts the game mode to the normal mode. However, if the result of the second special symbol game is a big hit (selected symbol command "z6"), or if the character is released (selected symbol command "z5") and a V prize is won, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high accuracy mode. Then, the game mode is shifted to the second big hit mode. If the character opening hit (selection symbol command "z5") and V is not won (so-called character opening hit is punctured), the sub CPU 2301 may continue the high accuracy mode (that is,). Even if the character opening hit is punctured, the C time shortening game state may be continued), or the high accuracy mode may be terminated and the game mode may be shifted to the normal mode (that is, the character opening hit). Punk may be used as an end condition of the C time saving game state.)

In this embodiment, when the normal symbol game is started in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), the main CPU 2201 is variable in the ordinary symbol display unit 2161 (see FIG. 241). In addition to displaying, the sub CPU 2301 performs a variable display effect of a decorative symbol corresponding to a normal symbol in, for example, the main area of the display device 2007. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the normal mode, for example, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol may be performed in the main area of the display device 2007.

In addition, as in the normal mode, the second special symbol game is executed by winning the "Public long open hit" as a result of the left-handed game, which is a regular game mode, and the unintended second. 2 It is preferable to make it possible to distinguish the case where the special symbol game is executed, to prevent fraud, and to prevent the game in a non-regular game mode.

[6-6-5. High accuracy mode B (false)]
In the high accuracy mode B (false), the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, the high-accuracy mode B (false) is a game mode in which left-handedness is a normal game mode.

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities (big hit probability, bonus opening hit probability, time saving hit probability) when the special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) is executed in the high accuracy mode B (false) are the normal modes. Since it is the same as, it is omitted.

In the high accuracy mode B (false), the main CPU 2201 is internally controlled to the normal gaming state. Therefore, if the time saving hit is won, the main CPU 2201 shifts from the normal gaming state to the C time saving gaming state. ..

The various probabilities when the normal symbol game is executed in the high accuracy mode B (false) are also the same as in the normal mode. That is, the winning probability of the Fuden long open hit (normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1") is extremely low, for example, 1/32768.

(Initiation condition)
The start conditions for the high accuracy mode B (false) are as follows, for example.
-The results of the special symbol game in the remaining hold mode are all lost and the predetermined production conditions are satisfied.

As the predetermined effect condition, for example, at the end of the remaining hold mode, a shift lottery to the high accuracy mode B (false) may be performed under the control of the sub CPU 2301, and the shift lottery may be won. In this case, if the transition lottery is won, the sub CPU 2301 may shift from the remaining hold mode to the high accuracy mode B (false). Further, for example, in the final special symbol game in the remaining hold mode, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the high accuracy mode B (false) according to the symbol random value of the special symbol. Further, when the remaining hold mode ends, the mode may be changed to the high accuracy mode B (false) without fail.

(Termination conditions and migration destination)
The end condition of the high accuracy mode B (false) is, for example, satisfying any one of a plurality of conditions shown below. In addition, the transition destination of the game mode based on the establishment of the end condition is also shown.
・ Variable display number of 1st special symbol 20 times ⇒ Shift to normal mode ・ Variable display number of 2nd special symbol based on winning a prize at the 2nd start port by "Public short opening hit" 1 time ⇒ Shift to normal mode (When the result of the second special symbol game is lost)
・ The number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened 12 times ⇒ shift to the normal mode ・ Win the 3R jackpot (selection symbol command "z1") (when the condition device is activated) ⇒ shift to the first jackpot mode ・ 10R jackpot (selection symbol command "z1") Winning "z2", "z6") (when the condition device is operating) ⇒ Shift to the second big hit mode / Winning the accessory opening (selection symbol command "z5") and winning V (when the condition device is operating) ⇒ 2nd Shift to big hit mode ・ Win a short time hit (selected symbol commands "z0", "z4") ⇒ Shift to high accuracy mode A or high accuracy mode B (true) ・ "Public long open hit" is derived ⇒ Move to the second challenge mode

Although the frequency of occurrence is extremely low, a game ball wins a prize at the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) when the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened based on the "Public short-opening hit". , The second special symbol game may be executed. In this case, if the result of the second special symbol game is a winning combination (selection symbol command is "z5") and a V prize is won, the mode shifts to the second big hit mode. If the result of the second special symbol game is lost, the mode shifts to the normal mode as described above.

Further, in this embodiment, since the ceiling counter does not reach the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode B (false), there is no case of shifting from the high accuracy mode B (false) to the bliss mode. However, if the pachinko machine has specifications such that the ceiling counter may reach the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode B (false), the high accuracy mode B (false) may shift to the bliss mode.

The above-mentioned end condition and the transition destination of the game mode are the same as, for example, the high accuracy mode B (true) except when the big hit is won. By doing so, when the high-accuracy mode B (false) ends, it becomes difficult to grasp whether it was the high-accuracy mode B (true) or the high-accuracy mode B (false). It is possible to increase. If you win the jackpot, the destination is the same as in the normal mode.

However, the end condition of the high accuracy mode B (false) is not limited to the above, and the special symbol game is, for example, over a specified number of times (for example, a predetermined number of times, a number of times determined at the end of the remaining hold mode, etc.). May be executed. If the specification is such that the game always shifts to the high-accuracy mode B (false) when the remaining hold mode ends, for example, the stay period of the high-accuracy mode B (false) at the end of the remaining hold mode (for example, the number of staying games). ) May be determined by the sub CPU 2301, and the sub CPU 2301 may terminate the high accuracy mode B (false) and shift to the normal mode when the determined stay period elapses.

(Direction)
Since the high accuracy mode B (false) is internally controlled to the normal gaming state by the main CPU 2201 as in the normal mode, the probability of "per open long open" is, for example, 1/32768 as described above. It is extremely low, and in this respect, it is more disadvantageous to the player than the high-probability mode (high-probability mode A, high-probability mode B (true)).

However, the sub CPU 2301 performs the same effect in the high accuracy mode B (false) as in the case of the high accuracy mode B (true), for example. That is, in the high accuracy mode B (false), the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, an effect image similar to that in the case of the high accuracy mode B (true) in the display area of the display device 2007 (see FIG. 232) and is high. The same effect sound as in the case of the probability mode B (true) is output from the speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241). Therefore, even if the remaining hold mode ends, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to continue playing the game, and eventually it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest.

As described above, in this embodiment, the same effect is performed in the high accuracy mode B (true) and the high accuracy mode B (false), but the "similar effect" is, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007. By making the displayed background image the same, the appearance is such that the player cannot or is difficult to distinguish between the high-accuracy mode B (true) and the high-accuracy mode B (false). A similar production is equivalent.

If the time saving hit is won in the high accuracy mode B (false), the sub CPU 2301 may shift the game mode to the high accuracy mode A, or the same effect as the high accuracy mode B (true). The high accuracy mode B (false) may be continued.

Further, in this high accuracy mode B (false), the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol in the main area, and the mini corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display effect of the symbol is displayed in the sub area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the main area, and the variable display effect of the mini symbol corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sub. It may be displayed in the area.

(Game in high accuracy mode B (false))
In the high-accuracy mode B (false), since left-handed is a regular game mode, the player plays the game by left-handed. When the game is played by right-handed, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a left-handed instruction effect for instructing a warning or left-handed.

When the player plays a game by hitting left, the launched game ball mainly flows down the left side region 2106. When a game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 enters the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232), the game ball enters the first start port 5120, the passage gate 5125A, and the passage gate 5125B (all see FIG. 232). Enter one of them. On the other hand, among the game balls flowing down the left side region 2106, the game balls that did not enter the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232) either win the general winning opening 2122 or are discharged to the outside from the out opening 2178. Will be done.

When the game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the first start port 5120 (winning), the main CPU 2201 holds the start information of the first special symbol up to a predetermined number (for example, four). Then, when the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, the first special symbol game is started. Further, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120, the payout / launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 based on the prize ball control command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, and the payout device Control is performed so that the 82 pays out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls as prize balls.

When the first special symbol game is started, the sub CPU 2301 performs variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, for example, an effect image showing a big hit is displayed with a probability of 1/319, and an effect image showing a time saving hit is displayed with a probability of 1/64, for example.

When the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the display mode indicating the jackpot has been derived from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high accuracy mode B (false), and for example, shifts to the first jackpot mode with a probability of 99%. There is a 1% chance of shifting to the second jackpot mode.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the display mode indicating the time saving hit is derived from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 is visually the same as the high accuracy mode B (false) or is difficult to distinguish the high accuracy mode B (true). ). That is, since it is difficult or impossible for the player to distinguish between the high-accuracy mode B (high-accuracy mode B (true) and the high-accuracy mode B (false) in appearance), the term "high-accuracy mode B" is intentionally described here. It seems that) is continuing. However, the main CPU 2201 shifts from the normal gaming state to the C time saving gaming state. That is, when the time saving hit is won in the high accuracy mode B (false), the main CPU 2201 internally shifts from the normal gaming state to the C time saving gaming state, but it seems that the same mode continues in appearance. It will be.

Further, when the game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B, the main CPU 2201 reserves up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of start information of normal symbols. , When the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol game is started. Further, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 5125A or the passing gate 5125B, the payout / launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 based on the prize ball control command transmitted from the main CPU 2201. Control is performed so that the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls as prize balls. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out is, for example, the number of prize balls equal to or less than the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120.

When the normal symbol game is started, in the high accuracy mode B (false), the winning probability of "Public long open hit" is, for example, 1/32768, so it should be "Public long open hit". Although it can hardly be expected to win the game, the player may be playing the game by believing that it is in the high probability mode (true), so it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, in the high accuracy mode B (false), when the first special symbol game is played 20 times, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high accuracy mode B (false) and shifts the game mode to the normal mode.

Further, in the high accuracy mode B (false), it is difficult to make the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) win the game ball when the normal symbol game is executed and the "Public short open hit" is won. However, in rare cases, a game ball may win a prize in the second starting port 2140, and a second special symbol game may be executed. In this case, if the result of the second special symbol game is lost, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high accuracy mode B (false) and shifts the game mode to the normal mode. However, if the result of the second special symbol game is a big hit (selected symbol command "z6"), or if the character is released (selected symbol command "z5") and a V prize is won, the sub CPU 2301 is set to the high probability mode B (selective symbol command "z6"). False) is terminated, and for example, there is a 99% chance of shifting to the first jackpot mode and a 1% chance of shifting to the second jackpot mode. If the character opening hit (selection symbol command "z5") and V is not won (so-called character opening hit is punctured), the sub CPU 2301 may continue the high accuracy mode B (false). Then, the high accuracy mode B (false) may be terminated to shift the game mode to the normal mode.

In addition, when the normal symbol game is executed in the high accuracy mode B (false), for example, when the "Public long open hit" is won with a probability of 1/32768, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second challenge mode. Let me.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol game is started in the high accuracy mode B (false), the main CPU 2201 performs variable display on the normal symbol display unit 2161 (see FIG. 241), and the sub CPU 2301 is, for example, In the main area of the display device 2007, the variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is performed, and the variable display effect using the decorative symbol, the mini symbol, or the like corresponding to the normal symbol is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable display effect using a decorative symbol, a mini symbol, or the like corresponding to a normal symbol may be performed by using, for example, a display device 2007 or another display device.

Further, as described above, when the game is played by right-handed hitting, a warning or left-handed hitting instruction effect is performed. However, for example, the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) may be opened as a result of the player hitting right against the warning sound or the left-handed instruction effect, or the malicious person may release the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232). ) May be released by fraudulent means, and the second special symbol game may be executed unintentionally. Even in such a case, for example, there is a 1 / 10.5 chance of winning the winning combination, and if a V prize is won, the game mode shifts to the second big hit mode. Therefore, the second special symbol game is executed by winning the "Public long open hit" as a result of the left-handed game, which is a regular game mode, and the second special symbol in an unintended manner. It is preferable that, for example, the hall personnel can distinguish the case where the game is executed. For example, when the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened even though the normal symbol game is not executed, or when it is hit right even though it is in the high accuracy mode B (false), the external terminal board 2184 It is preferable to output an invalid signal to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 241) via the above.

[6-6-6. Challenge mode]
The challenge mode includes the first challenge mode, which is transferred after the end of the first big hit mode, and the "Public long open hit" in ordinary symbol games such as high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)). There is a second challenge mode that shifts by winning.

In this specification, the challenge is from the time when the start condition of the challenge mode described later is satisfied until the second special symbol game for the start information of all the reserved second special symbols is executed (until the end). Defined as a mode.

As described above, the sixth pachinko gaming machine is a priority variable machine in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol, and therefore the challenge mode must be completed. (That is, unless the second special symbol game for all the reserved start information of the second special symbol is executed), the first special symbol game is not executed. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball wins the first starting port 5120, the first special symbol game is not executed until the challenge mode ends.

(Conditions for starting the first challenge mode)
The conditions for starting the first challenge mode are as follows, for example.
-The first big hit mode (3R big hit game state) is completed.

(Conditions for starting the second challenge mode)
The conditions for starting the second challenge mode are as follows, for example.
-In the normal symbol game of the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), the display mode indicating "Public long open hit" is displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 2161.
-In the normal symbol game in the normal mode, the display mode indicating "Public long open hit" is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 2161.
-In the high accuracy mode B (false) normal symbol game, the display mode indicating "Public long open hit" is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 2161.

The start condition of the second challenge mode is not limited to the display mode indicating "Public long open hit" being displayed on the normal symbol display unit 2161, and the result indicating "Public long open hit" is the normal symbol. It may be a predetermined trigger (that is, during variable display of a normal symbol) before being displayed on the display unit 2161 (see FIG. 241). The predetermined trigger corresponds to, for example, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started (when the hit determination process of the normal symbol is performed), or when the right-handed instruction effect is performed after the start of the variable display of the normal symbol.

(Termination conditions for the 1st challenge mode and the 2nd challenge mode)
The end conditions of the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode) and the transition destination of the game mode are as follows, for example.
・ Win a 10R jackpot (selection symbol command “z6”) ⇒ shift to the second jackpot mode ・ Win a winning match (selection symbol command “z5”) and win a V (when the condition device is activated) ) ⇒Move to 2nd jackpot mode ・ The 2nd special symbol game for the start information of all the 2nd special symbols held is executed (at the end) ⇒Move to high accuracy mode A or normal mode ・ Ceiling counter Reached the ceiling value ⇒ Shifted to bliss mode

However, in the second challenge mode, in addition to the above termination conditions, when the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) at the time of the first operation of the ordinary electric accessory (see FIG. 232). The so-called second challenge mode (when the second challenge mode is punctured) is also an end condition.

If the sub CPU 2301 does not win the V prize even though it wins the winning of the character opening (selection symbol command "z5"), the sub CPU 2301 holds the remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol (hereinafter, "remaining hold"). If there is (apparently), the second challenge mode is continued, and if there is no remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, the second challenge mode is terminated.

Further, when the second special symbol game for the start information of all the reserved second special symbols is executed, the transition destination of the game mode is the high accuracy mode A or the normal mode as described above. Will be described in detail.

In this embodiment, unless the result of the second special symbol game is a big hit, the challenge mode is continued until the second special symbol game for the start information of all the reserved second special symbols is completed.

Therefore, if the sub CPU 2301 is won in any one of the one-time or a plurality of second special symbol games played in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), the sub CPU 2301 is suspended. After the second special symbol game for the start information of all the second special symbols is executed, the game mode is changed from the challenge mode to the high accuracy mode A.

In addition, the results of one or more second special symbol games played during the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode) are all lost (V prize even though it was a hit for opening the character). If not), the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode from the challenge mode to the normal mode.

(Internal game state)
As described above, the first challenge mode is started when the first jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) ends. When the first big hit mode ends, the main CPU 2201 internally shifts to the A time saving game state in which "special 2 = 1" (variable display number of the second special symbol is once) is included in the time saving end condition (FIG. 244). reference). That is, after the end of the first big hit mode, until the first variable display of the second special symbol is executed (until the end), the main CPU 2201 internally controls the A time saving game state. Then, when the first variable display of the second special symbol ends and the A time saving game state ends, the main CPU 2201 internally shifts to the normal game state.

Therefore, in the first challenge mode, the main CPU 2201 is internally controlled to the A time saving game state until the variable display of the first second special symbol is completed, and the variable display of the first second special symbol is performed. After the end, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal gaming state.

Therefore, in the first challenge mode, right-handed is a normal game mode from the start of the first challenge mode to the end of the variable display of the first second special symbol, but the first second special symbol is a normal game mode. After the variable display of is finished, left-handed is the normal game mode.

As described above, in the second challenge mode, the display mode indicating "Public long open hit" in the normal symbol game of the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)) is the ordinary symbol display unit 2161. It starts when it is derived to. Further, when the display mode indicating "Public long open hit" is derived to the normal symbol display unit 2161, the main CPU 2201 controls the normal gaming state, and the sub CPU 2301 produces a right-handed instruction.

In the second challenge mode, right-handed is a normal game mode until the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on winning the "Public long open hit" is completed, but it becomes "Public long open hit". After the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on the winning is completed, left-handed is the normal game mode.

By the way, in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), if the result of the special symbol game is a time reduction hit, the game internally shifts to the C time reduction game state. Even when the game is internally shifted to the C time reduction game state, the sub CPU 2301 continues the challenge mode until the end of the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the reserved second special symbols (internal). The game is set to the high accuracy mode A after the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the reserved second special symbols is completed.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the reserved second special symbols, for example, when the result indicating that the time is shortened is derived. Even if it is not, the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode) may be shifted to the high accuracy mode A.

As described above, in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), when the 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z6") is won, and when the character is released (selected symbol command "z5"). If the sub CPU 2301 wins and wins a V, the sub CPU 2301 ends the challenge mode even if the second special symbol game for the start information of all the reserved second special symbols has not ended, and enters the second jackpot mode. Migrate. In this case, if the start information of the second special symbol remains on hold at the end of the challenge mode, the second special symbol game regarding the start information of the second special symbol is performed in the special mode after the end of the second jackpot mode. Will be executed.

By the way, as described above, even if the time saving hit is won in the A time saving game state, the time saving hit is ignored by the main CPU 2201 and the time saving hit becomes invalid. Therefore, in the case of the first challenge mode, until the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed, even if the time reduction hit is won, the time reduction hit is ignored by the main CPU 2201 and the game does not shift to the C time reduction game state.

However, in the 1st challenge mode, it is indispensable to ignore the time saving hit and not to shift to the C time saving game state even if the time saving hit is won until the first variable display of the 2nd special symbol is completed. do not have. For example, the main CPU 2201 may determine the result of the second special symbol game after executing the end processing of the A time saving game state. That is, in this case, even if the result of the first second special symbol game in the first challenge mode is a time reduction hit, the A time reduction game state is terminated when determining the result of the second special symbol game. It will be. Therefore, when the result of the first second special symbol game in the first challenge mode is a time saving hit, the time saving hit is not ignored, and the main CPU 2201 internally shifts to the C time saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the first challenge mode.

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities (big hit probability, bonus opening hit probability, time saving hit) when a special symbol game (1st special symbol game, 2nd special symbol game) is executed in the challenge mode (1st challenge mode, 2nd challenge mode) (Probability) is the same as the normal mode, so it is omitted.

Further, when the normal symbol game is executed in the first challenge mode, the winning probability of "per Fuden long open" is as shown below, for example. It should be noted that until the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed (in the case of the A time saving game state internally) and after the variable display of the first second special symbol is completed (internally, the normal game state). In the case of) and.

(1) Until the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed-Winning probability per Fuden long open (normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2") ... Approximately 1/1.
(2) After the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed-Winning probability of the Fuden long open hit (normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1") ... 1/2768

That is, in the first challenge mode, the winning probability of "Public long open hit" (normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2") in the normal symbol game until the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed. Is about 1 / 1.1. Therefore, at the time of the first operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 after the end of the first jackpot mode, the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) could not be won until the holding of the second starting information reaches the upper limit. Even so, even after the normal electric accessory 2146 is closed, it is possible to expect to win the "Public Long Opening Hit" in the normal design game, so it is possible to enhance the interest.

However, after the end of the first variable display of the second special symbol in the first challenge mode, the winning probability of "Public long open hit" (normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1") is, for example, 1/32768. It becomes an extremely low probability.

In the second challenge mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the game to the normal game state unless a short-time hit or a big hit is won. Therefore, in the normal symbol game, "Public long open hit" (normal symbol hit selection symbol). The winning probability of the command "fz1") is, for example, 1/32768, which is an extremely low probability.

However, in the challenge mode (1st challenge mode, 2nd challenge mode), if the result of the special symbol game is a time saving hit, the 2nd special symbol game regarding the start information of all the reserved 2nd special symbols ends. If the specification is such that the challenge mode continues until the game is played, the main CPU 2201 may internally control the C time-saving game state. As described above, in the case of the C time shortening game state internally in the challenge mode, the winning probability of "Public long open hit" (normal symbol hit time selection symbol command "fz1") is, for example, 1 of 48.

(Direction)
In this challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), the sub CPU 2301 performs a zone effect indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the jackpot mode in the main area of the display device 2007. This zone effect is an effect performed while the second special symbol game is being executed. For example, the background image of the display area 2007a of the display device 2007 configured by the liquid crystal display is blackened, and the decorative symbol is as if it were. It is a production that makes the player expect the player to stop with doublet.

However, in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), the assumed number of times of the second special symbol game is, for example, 5 times at the maximum (1 time of the fluctuation + the maximum number of holdsable times, hereinafter "specified number of times". The sub CPU 2301 does not execute the zone effect more than this specified number of times. However, as an exception, it cannot be said that the second special symbol game is executed more than the specified number of times in the challenge mode. For example, when the player continues to hit right during the challenge mode and wins the "Public Long Opening Hit" in the normal symbol game, the normal electric accessory 2146 (see Fig. 232) is opened, and the second starting port 2140 is opened. When the game ball wins (see FIG. 232), the second special symbol game may be executed more than the specified number of times in the challenge mode. In particular, if the "short time hit" is won in the second special symbol game performed during the challenge mode, the probability of winning the "Public long open hit" is increased, so the possibility is high. Further, even when the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is illegally released, the second special symbol game may be executed more than the specified number of times in the challenge mode. Therefore, the sub CPU 2301 ends the zone effect when the second special symbol game of the specified number of times is completed, and when the second special symbol is executed more than the specified number of times in the challenge mode, the sub CPU 2301 separately performs an effect lottery. Based on the result of this staging lottery, a single staging is executed. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 2301 executes a predetermined effect that is not executed during the normal mode or is rarely executed, as a single effect to be executed. By doing so, it is easy for the player to know that the second special symbol has been executed more than the specified number of times in the challenge mode, so that it is possible to enhance the interest when the predetermined effect is executed. ..

In this challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the main area, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display effect of the mini symbol corresponding to each symbol is displayed in the sub area (however, the mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is always stopped). In this case, the sub CPU 2301 may perform an effect image capable of grasping the remaining number of times of the challenge mode (that is, the remaining number of reserved start information of the second special symbol), a countdown effect until the end of the challenge mode, and the like. ..

Further, for example, when the mode is changed from the high accuracy mode A to the second challenge mode (that is, when the "Public long open hit" is won in the normal symbol game in the high accuracy mode A, for example), the sub CPU 2301 has the above-mentioned zone effect. It is advisable to create a chance to show that the expectation that the game will be held is high.

(Game in the first challenge mode)
The sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a right-handed instruction effect when shifting to the first challenge mode.

When the player plays a game by hitting right, the launched game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the right area 2107 almost passes through the passing gate 2126, and a normal symbol game is executed.

In the first challenge mode, for example, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the A time saving game state until the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed. Therefore, when the normal symbol game is executed, it is approximately 1.1. There is a one-third chance that you will win the "Public Long Opening Hit". If you win the "Public Long Open Hit", the normal electric accessory 2146 (see Fig. 232) operates in the mode of "Public Long Open", and the player hits right to play about two games. It is possible to make the ball win a prize in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232).

When the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is operated in the mode of "Public long open", if the game ball can be won in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232), the second start is started. The second special symbol game is executed for the number of winnings in the mouth 2140 (maximum 5 pieces (corresponding change + 4 pieces on hold)).

Even if the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) cannot win a prize up to the upper limit (for example, five) of the game balls, for example, the main CPU 2201 until the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed. Since it is internally controlled to the A time saving game state by, by winning the "Public long open hit" again, the game ball is up to the upper limit (for example, 5) at the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232). It will be possible to win a prize.

Therefore, for example, when the first variable display of the second special symbol is not completed in the first challenge mode (when the main CPU 2201 controls the A time saving game state), the variable display time of the second special symbol is set. It is preferable that the variable display of the normal symbol is performed at least once, more preferably a plurality of times during the variable display of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state is 1000 msec (see FIG. 250). In addition, considering the time until the game ball launched toward the right side reaches the passing gate 2126, if the result of the second special symbol game is lost, the second special symbol is variable in the A time saving game state. The display time is set to 7,000 msec (see FIG. 246).

When the second special symbol game is executed, for example, a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/319, and for example, a prize is won with a probability of 1 / 10.5.

When the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a left-handed instruction effect.

In the first challenge mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the jackpot has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the first challenge mode even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, for example. There is a 100% chance of shifting to the second jackpot mode. However, it is not essential to shift to the second jackpot mode with a 100% probability in the first challenge mode.

In addition, the above-mentioned "even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol" is, to be exact, "a command indicating that there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol" is the main CPU 2201. Even if it is received from, it means "(the same applies to the following).

In addition, in the case of winning the winning of the character opening in the first challenge mode, as long as the player hits right, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100%. Then, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the V has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the first challenge mode and shifts to the second big hit mode even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol. Let me.

In the first challenge mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the V prize has not been won even though the sub CPU 2301 has won the prize opening, there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol. If so, the first challenge mode is continued, and if there is no remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, the first challenge mode is terminated and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the game to the normal game state.

In the first challenge mode, when the variable display of the first second special symbol is completed, the A time saving game state is internally terminated and controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal game state, so that the second and subsequent second special symbols are controlled. In the game, in addition to the big hit and the opening hit of the accessory, for example, the probability of winning the time saving hit is 1 / 10.5.

However, in this embodiment, even if the player wins in the first challenge mode in a short time, the first challenge mode is continued if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, and the start information of the second special symbol is obtained. If there is no remaining hold, the first challenge mode is terminated. That is, even if the player wins in the first challenge mode in a short time, the mode shifts to the high accuracy mode A until the second special symbol game is executed (finished) for all the reserved start information of the second special symbol. The first challenge mode is continued without doing so.

In addition, even if the first challenge mode is won in a short time, the first challenge mode is continued, and then, before the end of the first challenge mode, a big hit is won or a character opening hit is won. When the command indicating that the V prize has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second big hit mode. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 2301 does not clearly indicate to the player that the player has won the time saving. As described above, after the end of the second big hit mode, the sub CPU 2301 shifts from the second big hit mode to the special mode.

When the first challenge mode ends, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode A or the normal mode.

The sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high-accuracy mode A when the time saving hit is won in either one or a plurality of second special symbol games executed before the end of the first challenge mode. ..

In addition, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the normal mode because all of the one or multiple second special symbol games executed by the end of the first challenge mode are lost (even if the character is released). Regardless of the case, it includes the case where the V prize is not won). However, if all of the one or multiple second special symbol games executed by the end of the first challenge mode are lost, it is not always necessary to shift to the normal mode, and if the predetermined conditions are satisfied. For example, it may be possible to shift to the high accuracy mode A (false) which is indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish from the high accuracy mode A in appearance.

In this embodiment, even if the player wins the time saving in the first challenge mode, the first challenge mode continues until the second special symbol game for all the reserved start information of the second special symbol is completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the player wins in the first challenge mode in a short time, the first challenge mode may be terminated and the mode may be shifted to the high accuracy mode A regardless of whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved. good.

(Game in the second challenge mode)
Since the second challenge mode starts when the display mode indicating "Public long open hit" is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 2161, the sub CPU 2301 first performs, for example, a right-handed instruction effect.

Then, when the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is operated in the mode of "Public electric long open", the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) can be won a prize for the game ball. 2 The second special symbol game is executed for the number of winnings in the starting port 2140 (maximum 5 pieces (corresponding change + 4 pieces on hold)).

When a command indicating the end of operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a left-handed instruction effect.

When the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) at the timing when the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is activated (so-called second challenge mode is punctured). The second challenge mode ends.

When the second special symbol game is executed, as in the first challenge mode, the jackpot is won with a probability of, for example, 1/319, and the prize is won with a probability of 10.5, for example.

In the second challenge mode, when a command indicating that a big hit has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 has a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol as in the first challenge mode. The second challenge mode is terminated, and for example, there is a 100% probability of shifting to the second jackpot mode. However, it is not essential to shift to the second big hit mode with a 100% probability in the high accuracy mode A.

Further, as in the first challenge mode, when the player wins the winning combination in the second challenge mode, as long as the player hits right, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100%. Then, when a command indicating that the V prize has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the second challenge mode and shifts to the second jackpot mode even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol. Let me.

When the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the player has not won the V prize even though he has won the prize in the second challenge mode, the sub CPU 2301 has the second special symbol as in the first challenge mode. If there is a remaining hold for the start information, the second challenge mode is continued, and if there is no remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, the second challenge mode is terminated and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the game to the normal game state.

Since the second challenge mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal gaming state, in the second special symbol game, for example, a time saving hit can be won with a probability of 1 / 10.5.

However, in this embodiment, as in the first challenge mode, even if the player wins in the second challenge mode in a short time, the second challenge mode is continued if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol. If there is no remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, the second challenge mode is terminated. That is, even if the player wins in the second challenge mode in a short time, the mode shifts to the high accuracy mode A until the second special symbol game is executed (finished) for all the reserved start information of the second special symbol. The second challenge mode is continued without doing so.

In addition, in the second challenge mode, the second challenge mode is continued even though the time reduction hit is won, and then, before the end of the second challenge mode, the big hit is won or the character opening hit is won. When the command indicating that the V prize has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second big hit mode. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 2301 does not clearly indicate to the player that the player has won the time saving.

When the second challenge mode ends, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode A or the normal mode as in the first challenge mode.

Similar to the first challenge mode, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode A in a short time in either one or a plurality of second special symbol games executed before the end of the second challenge mode. If you have won.

Further, as in the case of the first challenge mode, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the normal mode in that all of the one or multiple second special symbol games executed before the end of the second challenge mode are lost (features). This is the case (including the case where the V prize is not won even though it was an open hit).

In this embodiment, even if the player wins the time saving in the second challenge mode, the second challenge mode continues until the second special symbol game for all the reserved start information of the second special symbol is completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the player wins in the second challenge mode in a short time, the second challenge mode may be terminated and the mode may be shifted to the high accuracy mode A regardless of whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved. good.

[6-6-7. Special mode]
In the special mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the A time saving game state. In this embodiment, the special mode is a game mode in which right-handed is a normal game mode.

(Various probabilities)
Because the various probabilities (big hit probability, bonus opening hit probability, time saving hit probability) when the special symbol game (1st special symbol game, 2nd special symbol game) is executed in the special mode are the same as in the normal mode. Omit.

However, in the special mode, as in the high accuracy mode, even if the time saving hit is won, the time saving hit is ignored by the main CPU 2201, and the sub CPU 2301 continues the special mode. In this respect, it is different from the normal mode in which the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode (the main CPU 2201 shifts to the C time saving game state) when the time saving hit is won.

When the hit determination process of the normal symbol is executed in the special mode, the winning probability of the normal symbol hit open hit (normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2") is approximately 1/1.1.

(Initiation condition)
The conditions for starting the special mode are as follows, for example.
-The second big hit mode (3R big hit game state, 10R big hit game state) is completed.

(Termination conditions and migration destination)
The end condition of the special mode is the same as the end condition of the above-mentioned A time saving game state. Specifically, for example, one of a plurality of conditions shown below is satisfied. In addition, the transition destination of the game mode based on the establishment of the end condition is also shown.
-Variable display count of special symbol 12 times (the sum of the variable display count of the 1st special symbol and the variable display count of the 2nd special symbol is 12 times) ⇒ Remaining hold mode-The number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened 10000 times ⇒ Shift to remaining hold mode-Win 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z6") ⇒ Shift to 2nd jackpot mode-Win a winning combination (selected symbol command "z5") and win a V (When the condition device is activated) ⇒ Shift to the 2nd jackpot mode

In this way, the special mode continues until, for example, the variable display of the special symbol is executed 12 times. Moreover, as described above, the winning probability of "Public long open hit" (normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2") is as high as about 1/1.1. Further, the winning probability per opening of the accessory is, for example, 1 / 10.5. Therefore, the special mode is a gaming mode that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal mode, the high accuracy mode A, the high accuracy mode B (true), the high accuracy mode B (false), the challenge mode, and the remaining hold mode. ..

Further, in this embodiment, in the special mode, when the winning character is won (selection symbol command "z5") but the V is not won (so-called puncture per character opening), the main CPU 2201 is a time-saving game. Continue the state. Further, in the special mode, the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the player has won the prize, but receives a command indicating that the V prize has not been won, or a command indicating that the V prize has been won. If no is received, the special mode is continued.

However, not limited to this, in the special mode, if the winning character is won (selection symbol command "z5") but the V is not won (so-called puncture per character opening), the main CPU 2201 is shortened to A time. You may end the gaming state and shift to the normal gaming state. Further, in the special mode, the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the player has won the prize, but receives a command indicating that the V prize has not been won, or a command indicating that the V prize has been won. If is not received, the special mode may be terminated and the game may be shifted to another game mode such as the normal mode, or the normal mode or the remaining mode may be set depending on whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved. Shift to hold mode (for example, if there is no remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, shift to the normal mode, and if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, shift to the remaining hold mode. ) May be done.

(Direction)
The sub CPU 2301 is advantageous to the player in the special mode as compared with, for example, the normal mode, the high accuracy mode A, the high accuracy mode B (true), the high accuracy mode B (false), the challenge mode, and the remaining hold mode. A special effect that can be grasped as being in the game mode (excluding the first big hit mode and the second big hit mode) is executed. Specifically, in the special mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays a special effect image in the display area of the display device 2007 (see FIG. 232), and outputs a special effect sound from the speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241). This makes it possible to enhance the interest in the special mode.

Further, in this special mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the main area, and the mini symbol corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variable. Display The display effect is displayed in the sub area. In the special mode, it is considered that the mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is almost stopped because the holding of the start information of the second special symbol is unlikely to be interrupted.

(Game in special mode)
In the special mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a right-handed instruction effect. When the game is played by left-handed, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a warning or a right-handed instruction effect.

When the player plays a game by hitting right, the launched game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the right area 2107 almost passes through the passing gate 2126, and a normal symbol game is executed.

Since the special mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the A time saving game state, when a normal symbol game is executed, there is a probability of approximately 1 in 1.1 that the player wins the "Public Long Opening Hit". do. Then, each time the "Public Long Opening Hit" is won, the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see Fig. 232) operates in the mode of "Public Long Opening", and the player makes a right-handed strike to approximately two pieces. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232). The operation of such an ordinary electric accessory 2146 continues until the special mode ends.

When the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) operates in the mode of "Public long open", if the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232), the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved. Then, when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the second special symbol game is executed.

When the second special symbol game is executed, for example, a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/319, and for example, a prize is won with a probability of 1 / 10.5.

In the special mode, when a command indicating that a big hit has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the special mode even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, for example, 100%. There is a probability of shifting to the second jackpot mode.

In addition, if the player wins the prize in the special mode, as long as the player hits right, the player can win a V prize with a probability close to 100%. Then, when a command indicating that the V has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the special mode and shifts to the second big hit mode even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol.

In the special mode, if the player wins the prize but does not win the V prize, the special mode will continue unless the end condition of the special mode is satisfied. However, as described above, if the V prize is not won even though the character is won in the special mode, the special mode may be terminated and the mode may be shifted to another game mode such as the normal mode. The mode may be shifted to the normal mode or the remaining hold mode depending on the presence or absence of the remaining hold of the start information of the second special symbol.

Since the special mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the A time saving game state, even if the time saving hit is won, the main CPU 2201 ignores this and invalidates the time saving hit.

In the special mode, except for the case of shifting to the second big hit mode, the command indicating that the end condition (for example, the variable display number of the special symbol is 12 times and the opening number of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is 10000 times) is satisfied is the main CPU 2201. Upon receiving from, the sub CPU 2301 ends the special mode and shifts to the remaining hold mode. However, if the start information of the second special symbol is not held when the special mode ends, it is preferable to shift to a mode different from the remaining hold mode (for example, normal mode or high accuracy mode B (false)). .. Furthermore, even if the start information of the second special symbol is held when the special mode ends, it is not always limited to shifting to the remaining hold mode, and when the special mode ends, the remaining hold If the transition condition to the mode is satisfied, the mode is shifted to the remaining hold mode, and if the transition condition to the remaining hold mode is not satisfied, the mode different from the remaining hold mode (for example, the normal mode or the high accuracy mode B (for example) You may move to false)).

That is, the special mode is a game property such as how to win a prize and win a V prize in a special symbol game in which the number of times is limited.

In the special mode, although right-handed is a regular game mode, the player is left-handed, or the player is right-handed, but the game ball flows down the left side region 2106, and the first The starting port 5120 may win a prize. In this case, the start condition of the first special symbol may be satisfied due to the fact that the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved, and the first special symbol game may be executed. When the first special symbol game is executed, for example, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/319, and the time saving is won with a probability of 1/64. Then, when a command indicating that the jackpot has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second jackpot mode without shifting from the special mode to the first jackpot mode. However, since the winning type when a big hit is won is determined by the main CPU 2201 with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 244), the number of rounds is distributed (that is, the selection symbol commands "z1" and "z2" are used. Ratio) is the same as in the normal mode. On the other hand, if the time saving hit is won, the time saving hit is ignored by the main CPU 2201.

[6-6-8. Remaining hold mode]
In this specification, from the time when the start condition of the remaining hold mode, which will be described later, is satisfied, until the second special symbol game for the start information of all the second special symbols held is executed (until the end). , Defined as remaining hold mode.

As described above, the sixth pachinko gaming machine is a priority variable machine in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol, so that the remaining hold mode is terminated. Otherwise (that is, the second special symbol game for all the reserved start information of the second special symbol is not executed), the first special symbol game is not executed. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball wins the first starting port 5120, the first special symbol game is not executed in the remaining hold mode.

(Initiation condition)
The conditions for starting the remaining hold mode are as follows, for example.
-The special mode (A time saving game state) has ended.

In this embodiment, in the special mode, when the winning character is won (selection symbol command "z5") but the V is not won (so-called puncture per character opening), the special mode (A time saving game) is used. State) continues. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, the mode may be shifted to the remaining hold mode. That is, in the special mode, it may be a condition for starting the remaining hold mode that there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol even though the winning character is won per opening.

(Termination conditions and migration destination)
The end conditions of the remaining hold mode and the transition destination of the game mode are as follows, for example.
・ Win a 10R jackpot (selection symbol command “z6”) ⇒ shift to the second jackpot mode ・ Win a winning match (selection symbol command “z5”) and win a V (when the condition device is activated) ) ⇒ Transition to the 2nd jackpot mode ・ The 2nd special symbol game for the start information of all the 2nd special symbols held is executed (at the end) ⇒ High accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (Fake) or shift to normal mode

When the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the V prize has not been won even though the character has been opened (selected symbol command "z5"), the sub CPU 2301 has about the start information of the second special symbol. If there is a remaining hold, the remaining hold mode is continued, and if there is no remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, the remaining hold mode is terminated and the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

Further, when the second special symbol game for the start information of all the reserved second special symbols is executed, the transition destination of the game mode is the high accuracy mode B (true) and the high accuracy mode B as described above. (False) or normal mode, but this will be explained in detail.

In this embodiment, unless the result of the second special symbol game is a big hit or the character opening hit and the V prize is won, the second special symbol game about the start information of all the reserved second special symbols is The remaining hold mode is continued until it ends.

Therefore, when the main CPU 2201 receives a command indicating that the second special symbol game has been won in either one or a plurality of times during the remaining hold mode, the sub CPU 2301 has been put on hold. After the second special symbol game for the start information of all the second special symbols is executed, the game mode is shifted from the remaining hold mode to the high accuracy mode B (true).

Further, as described above, when the results of the special symbol game in the remaining hold mode are all lost and the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the high accuracy mode B (false). On the other hand, when all the results of the special symbol game in the remaining hold mode are lost and the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the normal mode.

In addition, in the remaining hold mode, if all the results of the second special symbol game are per character opening (selected symbol command "z5"), but the V prize is never won, the player wins the time saving. It is clear that they have not. Therefore, in this case, the sub CPU 2301 always shifts the game mode to the normal mode without shifting to the high accuracy mode B (false). However, this is not essential, and even if it is clear that the player has not won the time saving in the remaining hold mode, the sub CPU 2301 sets the game mode to the high accuracy mode B (false) when the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied. ) May be used.

(Internal game state)
As described above, the remaining hold mode is started when the special mode (A time saving game state) ends. Therefore, the remaining hold mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal gaming state unless the player wins the time reduction.

Further, in the remaining hold mode, as in the challenge mode, if the result of the special symbol game is a time reduction hit, the game internally shifts to the C time reduction game state. Even when a command indicating that the C time reduction game state has been internally received is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 can play the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the reserved second special symbols. The remaining hold mode is continued until the end (internally, the C time saving game state), and the high accuracy mode B (true) after the second special symbol game about the start information of all the held second special symbols is finished. ).

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the second special symbol game regarding the start information of all the reserved second special symbols, for example, when the result indicating that the time is shortened is derived. Even if it is not, the mode may be changed from the remaining hold mode to the high accuracy mode B (true).

As described above, in the remaining hold mode, when a command indicating that the 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z6") has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, and when the accessory is released (selected symbol command "z5"). When a command indicating that the player has won the prize and won the V prize is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 remains even if the second special symbol game for the start information of all the reserved second special symbols has not ended. Exit the hold mode and shift to the second jackpot mode. In this case, if the hold for the start information of the second special symbol remains at the end of the remaining hold mode, the second special symbol game for the start information of the second special symbol is in the special mode after the end of the second jackpot mode. Is executed in.

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities (big hit probability, bonus opening hit probability, time saving hit probability) when the special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) is executed in the remaining hold mode are the same as in the normal mode. Therefore, it is omitted.

Further, when the normal symbol game is executed in the remaining hold mode, the winning probability of "Public long open hit" is, for example, 1/32768, which is an extremely low probability.

However, in the remaining hold mode, if the result of the special symbol game is a time saving hit, the remaining hold mode continues until the second special symbol game for the start information of all the reserved second special symbols is completed. If so, there may be a case where the main CPU 2201 is internally controlled to the C time saving game state. In this way, when the main CPU 2201 internally controls the C time-shortening gaming state in the remaining hold mode, the winning probability of "Public long open hit" (normal symbol hit time selection symbol command "fz1") is, for example, 48. It becomes 1 of.

(Direction)
In this remaining hold mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs a zone effect in the main area of the display device 2007 in the same manner as in the challenge mode.

Further, in this remaining hold mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the main area, and the mini symbol corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display effect is displayed in the sub area (however, the mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is always stopped).

(Game in remaining hold mode)
In the remaining hold mode, when the second special symbol game for the remaining hold is executed, for example, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/319, and for example, the bonus is won with a probability of 1 / 10.5.

When a command indicating that a big hit has been won in the remaining hold mode is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the remaining hold mode even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, for example, 100%. It shifts to the second big hit mode with the probability of.

In addition, if the player wins the winning role in the remaining hold mode, as long as the player strikes right, the player can win a V prize with a probability close to 100%. Then, when a command indicating that the V prize has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the remaining hold mode even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, and shifts to the second big hit mode. ..

Even if the player does not win the V prize even though he has won the prize in the remaining hold mode, the remaining hold mode will continue as long as the remaining hold of the second special symbol remains.

Since the remaining hold mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal gaming state, in the second special symbol game, for example, a time saving hit can be won with a probability of 1 / 10.5.

However, in this embodiment, even if the player wins the time saving in the remaining hold mode, the remaining hold mode is continued if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, and the remaining for the start information of the second special symbol. If there is no hold, the remaining hold mode is terminated. That is, even if the player wins the time saving in the remaining hold mode, the high accuracy mode B (true) is executed until the second special symbol game is executed (finished) for all the start information of the second special symbol held. The remaining hold mode is continued without shifting to.

In addition, in the remaining hold mode, the remaining hold mode is continued even though the time saving hit is won, and then, before the end of the remaining hold mode, the big hit is won or the character opening hit is won and the V prize is won. When the command indicating that the command is received is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second big hit mode. In this case, it is preferable not to clearly indicate to the player that the winner was won in a short time.

When the remaining hold mode ends, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode B (true), the high accuracy mode B (false), or the normal mode.

The transition to the high accuracy mode B (true) is made when one of the plurality of second special symbol games executed before the end of the remaining hold mode is won in a short time.

In addition, the transition to the high-accuracy mode B (false) is due to the fact that all of the second special symbol games executed multiple times before the end of the remaining hold mode are lost (even though the character is released). (Including the case where the V prize is not won), and the above-mentioned predetermined effect conditions are satisfied.

In addition, the transition to the normal mode is due to the loss of all of the second special symbol games executed multiple times before the end of the remaining hold mode (V prize was not won even though it was a hit for opening the character). (Including the case), and the above-mentioned predetermined effect condition is not satisfied.

In this embodiment, even if the player wins the time saving in the remaining hold mode, the remaining hold mode is continued until the second special symbol game for all the start information of the second special symbol held is completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the player wins the time saving in the remaining hold mode, the remaining hold mode is terminated and the mode shifts to the high accuracy mode B (true) regardless of whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is held. May be good.

[6-6-9. Bliss mode]
In the bliss mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the B time saving game state. In this embodiment, the bliss mode is a game mode in which right-handed is a normal game mode.

(Various probabilities)
Because the various probabilities (big hit probability, bonus opening hit probability, time saving hit probability) when the special symbol game (1st special symbol game, 2nd special symbol game) is executed in the bliss mode are the same as in the normal mode. Omit.

Further, in the bliss mode, as in the high accuracy mode, even if the main CPU 2201 wins the time saving, this is ignored, and the sub CPU 2301 continues the bliss mode. In this respect, it is different from the normal mode in which the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode (C time saving game state) when the time saving hit is won.

When the hit determination process of the normal symbol is executed in the bliss mode, the winning probability of "Public long open hit" (normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2") is approximately 1/1.1.

(Initiation condition)
The conditions for starting the bliss mode are as follows, for example.
-When the normal mode, the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, the high-accuracy mode B (true)), or the high-accuracy mode B (false) (that is, the main CPU 2201 controls the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state). ), The ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value.

(Termination conditions and migration destination)
The end condition of the bliss mode is, for example, satisfying any one of a plurality of conditions shown below. In addition, the transition destination of the game mode based on the establishment of the end condition is also shown.
-Variable display count of special symbol 500 times (the sum of the variable display count of the first special symbol and the variable display count of the second special symbol is 500 times) ⇒ Normal mode (however, the ceiling counter is not updated)
-Winning a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z1", "z2", "z6") (when the condition device is operating) ⇒ Shift to the first jackpot mode or the second jackpot mode-Selecting symbol command "z5" ) And V prize (when the condition device is operating) ⇒ Shift to the second big hit mode

In the bliss mode, the winning probability of "Public long open hit" (selection symbol command "fz2" when hitting a normal symbol) in a normal symbol game is as high as 1 / 1.1. Moreover, the winning probability per opening of the accessory in the special symbol game is, for example, 1 / 10.5. Therefore, the condition of "variable display number of special symbols 500 times" is a condition that is not usually satisfied. Therefore, the bliss mode is a game mode in which the transition to the second big hit mode is almost confirmed.

The conditions for ending the bliss mode are not limited to the above. For example, "Public long open hit" is derived, the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened reaches the specified number of times (for example, 10,000 times as a condition that is not normally satisfied), and the accessory is opened. (Selection symbol command "z5") may be included in the end condition of the bliss mode even if the player does not win the V prize (so-called puncture per opening of the character). By including such a condition in the end condition of the bliss mode, it is possible to give a feeling of tension even in the bliss mode, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

(Direction)
In the bliss mode, the sub CPU 2301 executes, for example, a bliss effect that can be grasped as a game mode in which the transition to the second big hit mode is almost confirmed. Specifically, in the bliss mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays the bliss effect image in the display area of the display device 2007 (see FIG. 232), and outputs the bliss effect sound from the speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241). This makes it possible to enhance the interest in the bliss mode.

The bliss mode is a game mode in which the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal mode, the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), or the high accuracy mode B (false), that is, B This is a game mode in a time-saving game state. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the bliss mode in the pachinko gaming machine that does not have the B time saving gaming state.

Further, in this bliss mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the main area, and the mini symbol corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variable. The display effect is displayed in the sub area (however, the mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is always stopped).

(Game in bliss mode)
In the bliss mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a right-handed instruction effect. When the game is played by left-handed, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a warning or a right-handed instruction effect.

When the player plays a game by hitting right, the launched game ball mainly flows down the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the right area 2107 almost passes through the passing gate 2126, and a normal symbol game is executed.

Since the bliss mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the B time reduction game state, when a normal symbol game is executed, there is a probability of approximately 1 in 1.1 that the player wins the "Public Long Opening Hit". do. Then, each time the "Public Long Opening Hit" is won, the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see Fig. 232) operates in the mode of "Public Long Opening", and the player makes a right-handed strike to approximately two pieces. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232). The operation of such an ordinary electric accessory 2146 continues until the bliss mode ends.

When the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) operates in the mode of "Public long open", if the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232), the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved. Then, when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the second special symbol game is executed.

When the second special symbol game is executed, for example, a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/319, and for example, a prize is won with a probability of 1 / 10.5.

In the bliss mode, when a command indicating that a big hit has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the bliss mode even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, for example, 100%. There is a probability of shifting to the second jackpot mode.

In addition, if the player wins the prize in the bliss mode, as long as the player hits right, the player can win a V prize with a probability close to 100%. Then, when a command indicating that the V prize has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the bliss mode and shifts to the second big hit mode even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol.

If the V prize is not won even though the character is won in the bliss mode (so-called puncture in the character release), the bliss mode continues. However, as described above, if the V prize is not won even though the winning combination is won, the sub CPU 2301 may end the bliss mode and shift to the normal mode.

In the bliss mode, since the main CPU 2201 is internally controlled to the B time saving game state, even if the main CPU 2201 wins the time saving hit, it is ignored and the time saving hit is invalidated.

In addition, the bliss mode ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 500 times, for example, but it is possible to win a prize at 1 / 10.5, for example, as long as you hit the right side. Therefore, there is almost no case where the bliss mode ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 500 times, for example.

In this way, it can be said that the bliss mode is a game mode in which the transition to the second big hit mode is almost confirmed as long as the player hits the right side, and the player can enjoy the best mood.

When a command related to the end condition of the bliss mode is received from the main CPU 2201, such as the variable display of the special symbol being executed 500 times, the sub CPU 2301 ends the bliss mode and shifts to the normal mode. In the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the game to a normal game state, so that it is possible to win a short time hit in a special symbol game. However, in the normal mode transitioned from the bliss mode (that is, the normal gaming state transitioned from the B time reduction game state), the ceiling counter is not updated by the main CPU 2201 until the big hit is won, so that the bliss mode (that is, the B time reduction game state) is performed again. There is no transition to.

Further, in the bliss mode, although right-handed is a regular game mode, the player is left-handed, or the player is right-handed, but the game ball flows down the left side area 2106, and the first The starting port 5120 may win a prize. In this case, the start condition of the first special symbol may be satisfied due to the fact that the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved, and the first special symbol game may be executed. When the first special symbol game is executed, for example, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/319, and the time saving is won with a probability of 1/64. Then, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the jackpot has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second jackpot mode. However, if the main CPU 2201 wins the time saving hit, it ignores this and invalidates the time saving hit.

[6-6-10. Overall game flow]
Next, the overall flow of the game as seen by the player will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 and 260. In the flow of the game described below, it is assumed that the game is started in the normal mode. Further, the internal control is executed by the main CPU 2201, and the control of the decorative design and the effect image displayed in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007 is executed by the sub CPU 2301. The description of the main CPU 2201 and the sub CPU 2301 will be omitted in order to explain with an emphasis on the flow.

(Normal mode)
In the normal mode, when the player plays a game by hitting left, the launched game ball mainly flows down the left side region 2106. When the game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 enters the game ball distribution device 5400, the game ball enters any one of the first starting port 5120, the passage gate 5125A, and the passage gate 5125B. On the other hand, among the game balls flowing down the left side region 2106, the game balls that have not entered the game ball distribution device 5400 either win the general winning opening 2122 or are discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 2178.

When the game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 passes through the first starting port 5120 (winning), the starting information of the first special symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). Then, when the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, the first special symbol game is started.

When the first special symbol game is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the result of the first special symbol game is displayed.

As a result of the first special symbol game, the probability that the stop mode indicating the big hit is displayed is, for example, 1/319, and the probability that the stop mode indicating the time saving hit is displayed is, for example, 1/64. If neither the stop mode indicating a big hit nor the stop mode indicating a time saving hit is displayed, the stop mode indicating a loss is displayed.

When the stop mode indicating a big hit is displayed, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the big hit mode. In this case, for example, there is a 99% probability of shifting to the first jackpot mode, and a 1% probability of shifting to the second jackpot mode. When shifting to the first jackpot mode, for example, it is controlled to the 3R jackpot gaming state, and when shifting to the second jackpot mode, it is controlled to, for example, the 10R jackpot gaming state.

When the stop mode indicating the time saving hit is displayed, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the high accuracy mode A.

When the stop mode indicating a loss is displayed, the normal mode continues.

As described above, in the normal mode, the transition to the high-accuracy mode A has a higher probability than the transition probability to the jackpot mode, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the player without boring the player for a long time.

When the game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B, the start information of the normal symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol game is started. However, even if the normal symbol game is started, the winning probability of "Public long open hit" is extremely low (for example, 1/32768), and the normal symbol is only variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 2161. Therefore, it is considered that the player is almost unaware of the result of the normal symbol game.

However, if the "Public Long Opening Hit" is won as a result of the normal symbol game being executed, the mode shifts to the second challenge mode. In the normal mode, as mentioned above, the winning probability of "Public long open hit" is extremely low, so if you win the "Public long open hit", you will be surprised by shifting to the second challenge mode. It is possible to enhance the interest.

(High accuracy mode A)
When shifting from the normal mode to the high-accuracy mode A, the player plays the game with a left-handed strike, which is the same as in the normal mode. It will be dramatically enhanced.

When the game ball launched by left-handedness enters the game ball distribution device 5400 and enters the passing gates 5125A and 5125B, the starting information of the normal symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol game is started.

In the high accuracy mode A, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007 instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the result of the normal symbol game is displayed. However, in the high accuracy mode A, it is not essential that the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007, and the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. You may.

As a result of the normal symbol game, the probability that the stop mode indicating "Public long open hit" is displayed is, for example, 1/48, and the probability that the stop mode indicating "Public short open hit" is displayed is, for example. It is 47/48.

The stop mode indicating "doublet long open hit" is preferably a stop mode that can be grasped to be a favorable result for the player, for example, doublet or chance eye. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol game is "Public long open hit", after performing a reach effect in the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol, the stop indicating "Public long open hit" is performed. It is preferable to display the aspect.

It is preferable that the stop mode indicating "Public short-open hit" is a stop mode that can be grasped as a result that is not advantageous to the player, such as a loose eye or a reach loss.

When the stop mode indicating "Public long open hit" is displayed in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007, the mode shifts to the second challenge mode.

On the other hand, in the high accuracy mode A, when the first special symbol game is played 20 times or the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened 12 times without displaying the stop mode indicating "Public long open hit" (that is, normal). When the symbol game is played 12 times), the high accuracy mode A is changed to the normal mode.

(2nd challenge mode)
When the mode shifts to the second challenge mode, the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is released with a predetermined opening pattern (see the column of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1" with reference to FIG. 249). Further, in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007, a right-handed instruction effect for instructing right-handed stroke and a chance effect indicating that the zone effect is expected to be performed are displayed.

When the player makes a right-handed hit while the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is open and the right-handed game ball wins the second starting opening 2140, the starting information of the second special symbol is a maximum of a predetermined number (for example, 4). Will be held until. That is, in the second challenge mode, the second special symbol game can be executed up to five times. While the second special symbol game is being executed, in the main area of the display device 2007, a zone effect indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the jackpot mode is performed. This zone effect is one of the effect modes in the second challenge mode.

On the other hand, if the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 2140 while the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is open, the zone effect is not performed, the second special symbol game is not executed, and the second challenge is performed. The mode ends.

When the second challenge mode ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode. However, this is not essential. For example, if the first special symbol game is less than 20 times and the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened less than 12 times (that is, the normal symbol game is less than 12 times), the accuracy is high. You may return to mode A.

While the zone effect is being performed, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the result of the second special symbol game is displayed.

As a result of the second special symbol game, the probability that the stop mode indicating the jackpot is displayed is, for example, 1/319, but the probability that the stop mode indicating the bonus open hit is displayed is much higher than the jackpot. (For example, 1 / 10.5).

When the stop mode indicating the jackpot is displayed, the second challenge mode is terminated and the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode.

On the other hand, even if the stop mode indicating the big hit is not displayed, when the stop mode indicating the accessory opening hit is displayed, the V attacker 2152 opens in a predetermined opening pattern, and the game ball is made to enter the V attacker 2152. An effect image or the like is displayed in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007.

Then, when the game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is open passes through the V winning opening 2155, the mode shifts to the second big hit mode. In this embodiment, as described above, when a player wins a winning combination, as long as the player strikes right, the player can win a V prize with a probability close to 100%.

It should be noted that the stop mode indicating the opening hit of the accessory is preferably a stop mode (for example, doublet) indicating an advantageous result for the player. In this case, the stop mode may be such that the mode showing the bonus open hit and the mode showing the jackpot can be distinguished, or the mode showing the bonus open hit and the mode showing the jackpot cannot be distinguished or the difficult stop mode. May be.

If the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 does not pass through the V winning opening 2155 while the V attacker 2152 is open, the second challenge mode is continued if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol. , If there is no remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, the second challenge mode is terminated.

After the end of the 2nd challenge mode, in the 1st or multiple (maximum 5 times) 2nd special symbol game played in the 2nd challenge mode, if the player wins the time saving, the mode shifts to the high accuracy mode A. , If all are lost, shift to normal mode.

Even if the player wins the time-saving hit in the second challenge mode, in order to keep secret whether or not the time-saving hit is won, if the time-saving hit is won, the same stop mode as the stop mode indicating a loss is used. It is preferable to be displayed. As a result, even if the second challenge mode ends without winning a big hit or an opening hit in the second challenge mode, the player expects that there is a possibility of shifting to the high accuracy mode A. It is possible to give it to the public and enhance its interest.

Further, in this embodiment, even if the result of the second special symbol game is a big hit or an opening hit of a character, a long-time effect such as a reach effect is not performed. As shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 245), the variable display time in one second special symbol game is, for example, 8000 msec or 13000 msec regardless of the result of the second special symbol game. Is.

According to the variable pattern table of special symbols for low start (see FIG. 245), when the variable display time of the second special symbol or the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is relatively long in the second challenge mode (see FIG. 245). For example, when the variable display time is relatively short (for example, when it is 13000 msec), the expected value of displaying the stop mode indicating a big hit or the stop mode indicating a bonus opening hit is higher than when the variable display time is relatively short (for example, when it is 8000 msec). However, the variable display time does not differ greatly depending on the result of the second special symbol game, and for example, a simple effect image is displayed as compared with the first special symbol game in the normal mode.

If the first stopped symbol (for example, the left symbol) and the second stopped symbol (for example, the right symbol) are the same symbol (in the case of a sitting reach), for example, "Kakeen" or "Kean". It is preferable that a special production sound such as "" is output from the speaker 2032 to enhance the interest.

In this way, the second challenge mode shifts to the second big hit mode by winning the character opening hit rather than expecting to win the big hit in the second special symbol game that can be executed up to five times. This is a mode in which the game is played with the expectation that it will be played.

(2nd jackpot mode)
The second jackpot mode continues until the 3R jackpot gaming state or the 12R jackpot gaming state ends. Then, when these jackpot gaming states are completed, the second jackpot mode ends and the mode shifts to the special mode.

(Special mode)
In the special mode, the time saving function in the A time saving game state is activated, and the game is performed by right-handed. In this special mode, when the player plays a game by hitting right, the launched game ball mainly flows down the right side region 2107. When the game ball flowing down the right side region 2107 passes through the passing gate 2126, the starting information of the normal symbols is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol game is started.

In the special mode, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the result of the second special symbol game is displayed.

In the special mode, the probability of winning the "Public Long Opening Hit" as a result of the normal symbol game is, for example, 1/11 (see Fig. 248), so when the normal symbol game is played, it seems to be almost every game. In addition, the ordinary electric accessory 2146 opens with a predetermined opening pattern (see the column of the ordinary symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2" with reference to FIG. 249).

When the player makes a right-handed hit while the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is open and the right-handed game ball wins the second starting opening 2140, the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved. Even if the second starting port 2140 cannot win a prize while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open, the special mode is continued.

When the second special symbol game is played, the probability that the stop mode indicating the jackpot is displayed is, for example, 1/319, but the probability that the stop mode indicating the bonus open hit is displayed is much higher than the jackpot. Probability (eg 1 / 10.5).

Then, when the stop mode indicating the accessory opening hit is displayed, the V attacker 2152 opens in a predetermined opening pattern, and the display device 2007 displays an effect image or the like that encourages the V attacker 2152 to enter the game ball. It is displayed in the area 2007a.

Then, when the game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is open passes through the V winning opening 2155, including the case where the big hit is won, the mode shifts to the second big hit mode. As described above, in the case of winning the winning of the character opening, as long as the player hits right, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100%. However, in this embodiment, the special mode continues even if the V prize is not won when the character is opened, but the special mode is not limited to this. For example, the player may shift to another game mode such as the normal mode, or may shift to the normal mode or the remaining hold mode depending on the presence or absence of the remaining hold of the start information of the second special symbol.

In this special mode, the variation pattern and the variable display time are determined with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 246) of the special symbol for high start.

In the special mode, for example, the variable display number of the second special symbol is 12 times (to be exact, the variable display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) without winning either the big hit or the opening of the accessory. When the sum with the variable display number of is performed 12 times), the special mode ends.

When the special mode ends, if the start information of the second special symbol is reserved, the mode shifts to the remaining hold mode, and if the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved, the mode shifts to the normal mode.

(Remaining hold mode)
In the remaining hold mode, the second special symbol game is executed up to four times. Further, in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007, the zone effect described in the second challenge mode is performed while the second special symbol game is being executed.

In this remaining hold mode, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the result of the second special symbol game is displayed. The remaining hold mode is a normal gaming state in which the time saving function does not operate internally.

In the remaining hold mode, as in the special mode, the probability that the stop mode indicating a big hit is displayed as a result of the second special symbol game is, for example, 1/319. On the other hand, the probability that the stop mode indicating the bonus hit is displayed is much higher than the jackpot (for example, 1 / 10.5).

When the stop mode indicating the jackpot is displayed, the remaining hold mode is terminated and the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. At this time, if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, this remaining hold is used in the special mode after the second big hit mode ends, and is executed as the second special symbol game.

On the other hand, even if the stop mode indicating the big hit is not displayed, when the stop mode indicating the accessory opening hit is displayed, the V attacker 2152 opens in a predetermined opening pattern, and the game ball is made to enter the V attacker 2152. An effect image or the like is displayed in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007.

Then, even when the game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is open passes through the V winning opening 2155, the mode shifts to the second big hit mode. In this embodiment, as described above, when a player wins a winning combination, as long as the player strikes right, the player can win a V prize with a probability close to 100%.

It should be noted that the stop mode indicating the opening hit of the accessory is preferably a stop mode (for example, doublet) indicating an advantageous result for the player, as in the second challenge mode. In this case, the stop mode may be such that the mode showing the bonus open hit and the mode showing the jackpot can be distinguished, or the mode showing the bonus open hit and the mode showing the jackpot cannot be distinguished or the difficult stop mode. May be.

If the game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 does not pass through the V winning opening 2155 while the V attacker 2152 is open, the remaining hold mode is continued if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol. If there is no remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, the remaining hold mode is terminated.

After the end of the remaining hold mode, if any of the second special symbol games in the remaining hold mode played four times at the maximum is won, the game shifts to the high accuracy mode B (true). Therefore, when the mode shifts to the high accuracy mode B (true), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest due to the end of the remaining hold mode. Since the game in the high accuracy mode B (true) is the same as the game in the high accuracy mode A described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

After the end of the remaining hold mode, if the result of the second special symbol game in the remaining hold mode played up to 4 times is all lost, it shifts to the high accuracy mode B (false) at a certain rate, and it Other than that, it shifts to the normal mode.

When shifting to high-accuracy mode B (false), the game itself is the same as in normal mode, but the same effect as in high-accuracy mode B (true) is performed to the extent that it is indistinguishable in appearance, so the rest remains. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest due to the end of the hold mode.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol game in the remaining hold mode played up to four times is all the winning of the character opening, but the V prize is never won, the winning of the time saving is not won. Since it is clear, it shifts to the normal mode.

As described above, the remaining hold mode is a mode in which the game is performed in the second special symbol game that can be executed up to four times, with the expectation that the second big hit mode will be pulled back by winning the winning of the winning combination.

In addition, even if the winning of the time saving hit is won in the remaining hold mode, in order to conceal the winning of the time saving hit, the stop mode showing a loss in the variable display of the second special symbol when the time saving hit is won. It is preferable to display the same stop mode. Further, in this embodiment, as can be seen by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (FIG. 245), the result of the second special symbol game usually varies depending on whether the result is a time saving hit or a loss. The selectivity of each of A and normal fluctuation B is the same. As a result, in the second special symbol game that can be executed up to four times in the remaining hold mode, it becomes possible to further grasp whether or not the player has won the time saving, and when the mode shifts to the high accuracy mode B (false). Even if there is, it becomes difficult to detect that it is in a normal game state internally, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, as in the second challenge mode, even if the result of the second special symbol game is a big hit or an opening hit of a character, a long-time effect such as a reach effect is not performed. As shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 245), the variable display time in one second special symbol game is, for example, 8000 msec or 13000 msec regardless of the result of the second special symbol game. Is.

According to the variable pattern table of special symbols for low start (see FIG. 245), the variable display time of the second special symbol (that is, the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol) is relatively long in the remaining hold mode. In the case (for example, when it is 13000 msec), the expected value for displaying the stop mode indicating a big hit or the stop mode indicating a bonus opening hit is displayed as compared with the case where the variable display time is relatively short (for example, when it is 8000 msec). high. However, the variable display time does not differ greatly depending on the result of the second special symbol game, and for example, a simple effect image is displayed as compared with the first special symbol game in the normal mode.

(High accuracy mode B (false))
In the high accuracy mode B (false), when the player plays a game by hitting the left side, the launched game ball mainly flows down the left side region 2106. When the game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 enters the game ball distribution device 5400, the game ball enters any one of the first starting port 5120, the passage gate 5125A, and the passage gate 5125B. On the other hand, among the game balls flowing down the left side region 2106, the game balls that have not entered the game ball distribution device 5400 either win the general winning opening 2122 or are discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 2178.

When the game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 passes through the first starting port 5120 (winning), the starting information of the first special symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). Then, when the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, the first special symbol game is started.

When the first special symbol game is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the result of the first special symbol game is displayed.

As a result of the first special symbol game, the probability that the stop mode indicating the big hit is displayed is, for example, 1/319, and the probability that the stop mode indicating the time saving hit is displayed is, for example, 1/64. If neither the stop mode indicating a big hit nor the stop mode indicating a time saving hit is displayed, the stop mode indicating a loss is displayed.

When the stop mode indicating a big hit is displayed, the mode shifts from the high accuracy mode B (false) to the big hit mode. In this case, for example, there is a 99% probability of shifting to the first jackpot mode, and a 1% probability of shifting to the second jackpot mode. When shifting to the first jackpot mode, for example, it is controlled to the 3R jackpot gaming state, and when shifting to the second jackpot mode, it is controlled to, for example, the 10R jackpot gaming state.

When the stop mode indicating the time saving hit is displayed, the mode shifts from the high accuracy mode B (false) to the high accuracy mode B (true). However, since the high-accuracy mode B (false) and the high-accuracy mode B (true) are the same or difficult to distinguish in appearance, the player sees the high-accuracy mode B (high-accuracy mode B in appearance). Since it is difficult or impossible to distinguish between (true) and high-accuracy mode B (false), it seems that "high-accuracy mode B") is being continued here.

Further, if the first special symbol game is played 20 times without displaying the stop mode indicated by the big hit or the time saving hit, it is preferable that the high accuracy mode B (false) ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. This is not mandatory.

When the game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B, the start information of the normal symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol game is started. However, even if the normal symbol game is started, the winning probability of "Public long open hit" is extremely low (for example, 1/32768). However, in terms of appearance, it is difficult or indistinguishable from the high-accuracy mode B (true), which has a relatively high probability of winning the "Public long open hit" (for example, 1/48), so it is possible to enhance the interest. It will be possible.

However, as described above, although the winning probability of "Public long open hit" is extremely low, if the "Public long open hit" is won as a result of executing the normal symbol game, the mode shifts to the second challenge mode. In this case, it is possible to make the player believe that the game was in the high accuracy mode B (true) (internally in the C time-saving game state) even though the game was in the normal game state internally, and to enhance the interest. Will be.

When the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened 12 times (that is, when the normal symbol game is played 12 times), it is preferable to shift to the normal mode, but this is not essential.

(1st jackpot mode)
As described above, in the normal mode or the high accuracy mode B (false), when the stop mode showing the big hit is displayed as a result of the first special symbol game, the game shifts to the first big hit mode with a probability of 99%. This first jackpot mode continues until the 3R jackpot gaming state ends. Then, when the 3R jackpot gaming state ends, the first jackpot mode ends and the mode shifts to the first challenge mode.

(1st challenge mode)
When the mode shifts to the first challenge mode, the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is released with a predetermined opening pattern (see the column of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz2" with reference to FIG. 249). Further, in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007, an effect image instructing right-handed striking and a zone notice effect image for notifying that the zone effect will be performed are displayed.

When the player makes a right-handed hit while the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is open and the right-handed game ball wins the second starting opening 2140, the starting information of the second special symbol is a maximum of a predetermined number (for example, 4). Will be held until. That is, in the first challenge mode, as in the second challenge mode, the second special symbol game can be executed up to five times. Further, while the second special symbol game is executed, the above-mentioned zone effect is performed in the main area of the display device 2007 as in the second challenge mode.

However, even if the second starting port 2140 cannot win a prize while the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is open, the first challenge mode is not terminated and the second special symbol game is always executed at least once. In that respect, it differs from the second challenge mode.

Further, in the first challenge mode, in the first second special symbol game, the variation pattern and the variable display time are determined with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 246) of the special symbol for high start, and the second and subsequent times are determined. In the second special symbol game, the variation pattern and the variable display time are determined with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 245) of the special symbol for low start. Therefore, when the result of the first second special symbol game in the first challenge mode is lost, the variable display time of the second special symbol is, for example, 7000 msec. It is possible to hold a hold.

Except for the above points, the game in the first challenge mode is the same as the game in the second challenge mode described above except for the control by the main CPU 2201 and the sub CPU 2301, so other explanations will be omitted. ..

(Blessed mode)
Further, in this embodiment, when the variable display number of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number of times (when the ceiling value is reached) in the normal mode or the high accuracy mode A, the mode shifts to the bliss mode. do. However, as mentioned above, this bliss mode is not essential, so unless you win a big hit in normal mode or high-accuracy mode A, or you win a winning prize and win a V, normal mode or high-accuracy mode A will continue. You may try to do it.

In the bliss mode, the time saving function in the B time saving game state is activated, and the game is played by right-handed. However, as described above, the time saving function, that is, the normal electric function, depends on the case where the variable display number of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value in the normal mode and the case where the variable display number of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode A. The opening patterns of objects 2146 are different (see FIGS. 248 and 249). That is, when the variable display number of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode A, the same time saving function as the time saving function in the high accuracy mode A is activated.

However, the time saving function in the bliss mode may be the same depending on whether the variable display number of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value in the normal mode or the variable display number of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode A. In this case, since it is not necessary to mount a plurality of time saving functions, it is possible to suppress the control load.

When the game ball flowing down the right side region 2107 passes through the passing gate 2126, the starting information of the normal symbols is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol game is started.

In the bliss mode, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the result of the second special symbol game is displayed.

In the bliss mode, the probability of winning the "Public long open hit" as a result of the normal symbol game is, for example, 1/11 (see FIG. 248). Therefore, when a normal symbol game is played, the normal electric accessory 2146 has a predetermined opening pattern (see the column of the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1" or "fz2" with reference to FIG. 249). It becomes possible to win a game ball in the second starting port 2140.

When the player makes a right-handed hit while the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is open and the right-handed game ball wins the second starting opening 2140, the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved. Even if the second starting port 2140 cannot win a prize while the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is open, the bliss mode is continued. However, as described above, if the "Public Long Opening Hit" is won as a result of the normal symbol game, the bliss mode may be terminated.

When the second special symbol game is played, the probability that the stop mode indicating the jackpot is displayed is, for example, 1/319, but the probability that the stop mode indicating the bonus open hit is displayed is much higher than the jackpot. Probability (eg 1 / 10.5).

Then, when the stop mode indicating the accessory opening hit is displayed, the V attacker 2152 opens in a predetermined opening pattern, and the display device 2007 displays an effect image or the like that encourages the V attacker 2152 to enter the game ball. It is displayed in the area 2007a.

Then, in addition to the case where the big hit is won, when the game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is open passes through the V winning opening 2155, the mode shifts to the second big hit mode. As described above, in the case of winning the winning of the character opening, as long as the player hits right, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100%.

If the V-attacker 2152 is released in a predetermined opening pattern but does not win a V due to the display of the stop mode indicating the opening of the accessory, the bliss mode continues. However, as described above, if the V-attacker 2152 is released in a predetermined opening pattern but does not win a V, the bliss mode is terminated (so-called bliss mode is punctured) and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. You may do it. However, the normal mode shifted in this way is a normal mode that can no longer be expected to shift to the bliss mode.

In this way, in the bliss mode, when the normal symbol game is played, for example, the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened by winning the "Public long open hit" at 1/11.1. Then, when the second starting port 2140 is awarded a prize when the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is opened, the second special symbol game is executed. In this second special symbol game, for example, it is possible to win a prize per opening of a character with a probability of 1 / 10.5, and shift to the second big hit mode after winning a V. Therefore, once the transition to the bliss mode is made, the transition to the second jackpot mode is almost confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur when the jackpot mode is not shifted to the jackpot mode for a long time in the normal mode or the high accuracy mode A.

As mentioned above, it is not essential to provide the bliss mode, but not only the bliss mode, but also the first jackpot mode, the second jackpot mode, the normal mode, and the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true). )), High accuracy mode B (false), challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), special mode, and remaining hold mode are not essential, and one of these or one of them is not essential. It may not be provided for a plurality of modes.

[7. Expansion example]
Hereinafter, an extended example common to the above-mentioned first pachinko gaming machine to the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described. Since the reference numerals attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko gaming machine to the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the following description describes specific pachinko gaming machines (particularly the third pachinko gaming machine and the sixth pachinko gaming machine). Unless the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine), the reference numerals are omitted.

[7-1. Extended example of probabilistic control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit, the type of this big hit. Whether or not to set the probability change flag to on is determined according to the above, and the number of probability changes is determined when the probability change flag is set to on, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be used. ..

For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, for example, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the jackpot has passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific region, the jackpot is determined. It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets the probability change flag on at the end of the game control process. In the above specific area, for example, the movable member operates in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, so that the game ball can pass through or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to displace to a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variable machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit When the result is a big hit, the ease of passing the game ball to the above specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and is (A) specified. The figure which shows the case where the opening mode of a region is a 1st opening mode, (B) the opening mode of a specific area is a 2nd opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of a specific area is a 3rd opening mode. Is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area. In the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the large winning opening is opened for a long time after being short-opened, but the opening mode of the large winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104 (A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the large winning opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has become. Therefore, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the large winning opening to the end of the long opening of the large winning opening. ing. Therefore, it is extremely easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. That is, the probability change flag is set on very easily at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), in the third opening mode, a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started (both of these two times are short time). ), The specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even one of the plurality of gaming balls that have won the big winning opening can pass through the specific area in either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. It is also difficult compared to. That is, it is difficult to turn on the probability change flag at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag is turned on at the end of the big hit game control process. It is set.

Note that FIG. 104 is an example of an opening mode of a specific area in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning in the big winning opening is easily passed through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. , An example of providing two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of open modes of the specific region in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning in the jackpot is easy to pass through the specific region is limited to two modes. However, only one aspect may be used, or three or more modes may be used.

Further, in FIG. 104, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, an opening mode of a specific region in which it is difficult to pass through the specific region even if only one of the plurality of game balls winning the big prize opening is executed. As an example of the above, an example of providing the third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the big hit game control process, the number of open modes of the specific area where it is difficult to pass through the specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls winning the big prize opening is 1. The embodiment is not limited to this, and two or more embodiments may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105, when the determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit), the first special symbol and the second Special symbol selection The symbol command is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, for the selected symbol command, for example, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. , "Z2" is selected with a selectivity of 50%. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, for the selected symbol command, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. , "Z5" is selected with a selectivity of 35%. Since FIG. 105 is only a diagram showing an extended example of the probability variation control, the determination value data does not include the "time saving hit judgment value data", but the judgment value data includes the "time saving hit judgment value data". It may be included.

FIG. 106 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the type of jackpot (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (3R normal jackpot A) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R normal jackpot A) of the third opening mode. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot A) of the first opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R normal jackpot B) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot B) of the first opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot C) of the second opening mode. As described above, since the determination value data shown in FIG. 105 does not include the "time reduction hit determination value data", the type of "time reduction hit" is not shown in FIG. 106, but the determination value data includes. When the "time reduction hit determination value data" is included, it may be determined to be one of a plurality of types of time reduction hits.

According to FIGS. 104 to 106 above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of big hit is determined to be 3R normal big hit A with a selection rate of 40%, and 10% selection. The rate is determined to be 10R normal jackpot A, and the selectivity is determined to be 10R probability variable jackpot A. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selectivity of 15% and 10R probability variation jackpot B with a selectivity of 50%. , 35 is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot C. In this way, depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability change flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to make the probability of being set on different.

In a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which the specific area is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (C), and is described later, for example. As shown in FIG. 107, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning). (Example) in which the opening mode is controlled based on the winning of the mouth, and (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second. It is a figure which shows the case of an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 107 (A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening count is obtained. When the switch detects the winning of the first game ball, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the big winning opening is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area is open. Therefore, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the specific area is until the winning opening is closed. Does not open, but remains closed. Therefore, it is more difficult than the first open mode to pass through a specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls that have won a prize in the big prize opening is executed during the execution of the big hit game control. That is, it is difficult to turn on the probability change flag at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability changes at the end of the jackpot game control process. The flag is set to on.

In the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, an example in which the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. If the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective when the machine is a type 1 or type 2 mixer such as, for example, a third pachinko gaming machine or a sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. Although the example to be provided has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an opening mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is performed in both the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. An example that can be determined in the difficult third aspect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one. The game ball may be configured to be determined only in an aspect (first aspect or second aspect) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through a specific area.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice at a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has been open for a short time (both for a short time), but if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be opened once or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, the closing of a specific area is closed according to the passage of a predetermined opening time or the end of a round in which the specific area is opened, or is closed according to a specified number of large winning openings or winning a prize in a specific area. It may be controlled to do so. Further, one or a plurality of conditions for closing may be combined.

Further, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability change control is executed (for example, the high probability time-shortening game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are set to a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is repeatedly executed alternately until it reaches the limit. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. It is controlled to (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the number of loops is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of limiters may be a fixed number, for example, may be determined according to a symbol random value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting machine, the number of limiters may be different depending on the set value.

In the above, the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variation control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot game state. , The gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached. In particular, it is effective when it is a one-kind two-kind mixer such as a third pachinko gaming machine or a sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability change machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the probability change control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability variable machine, assuming that the number of limiters is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth big hit game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined number of limiters has been reached. The game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, the game does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, but the game is played in the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. The same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process.

Further, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the probabilistic change control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-probability time-shortening game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which the probability variation control is not executed when the special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variation control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “ST number”) may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may be different depending on the set value. Further, for example, it may be a so-called fall-type gaming machine in which a fall lottery is performed and the probability variation control is completed based on the result of the fall lottery. For example, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area during the big hit gaming state. It may be a so-called V probability variation type gaming machine in which probability variation control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

[7-2. Extended example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine to the sixth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the C time saving control can be executed after the big hit game control processing is completed. However, the lottery for "time saving hit" is not limited to being performed in the hit determination process of the special symbol.

For example, among the random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, a specific random number value different from the special symbol hit judgment random value (for example, a special symbol hit judgment random value, a special symbol symbol). (Random value, etc.) may be used to perform the time saving winning determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the time saving control, in addition to the hit determination processing for the special symbol. When the time saving winning judgment is performed when the result of the hit judgment processing of the special symbol is a small hit or a loss, for example, the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is a specific symbol. When it is a random value, it can be determined to be a "time saving hit" in which the time saving control is executed. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the time saving hit determination process may be performed.

Further, when the time saving winning determination processing is performed separately from the special symbol hit determination processing, the time saving winning determination processing may be executed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame.

Further, when the above-mentioned time-saving winning determination processing is performed, a random number for determining the time-saving winning, which is exclusively used for the time-saving winning determination processing, is generated in a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving winning is applied based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time-saving winning determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning.

Further, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time saving winning determination process is extracted based on the winning of the game ball at the starting opening, and it is not essential to extract it in other areas (for example, general winning opening, small hit winning opening, etc.). It may be extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening, etc.). Further, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination processing is provided, and a random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted based on, for example, that the game ball has passed through this dedicated area. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time saving winning determination processing and the special symbol hit determination processing are executed at different timings, the time saving winning determination processing is performed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the confirmation display is performed. Is executed, and the result of this time saving hit determination process may be "time saving hit". In such a case, the main CPU may forcibly derive, for example, a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving winning determination process is "time saving hit".

In addition, the sub CPU can visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or an easy effect image (for example, a variation effect of a decorative pattern or a character). It is preferable to execute control to display the display effect (such as display effect) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time saving winning determination processing is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, it is possible to visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or instead of displaying an easy effect image on the display device, the time saving winning judgment A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a change effect of a decorative pattern, a display effect by a character, etc.) that is impossible or difficult to grasp from the appearance whether the result of processing is a "time reduction hit" or a "time reduction loss". You may perform the control to display in. In this case, it is possible to maintain the interest until the result of the time saving winning determination process is disclosed.

Further, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU gives, for example, a right-handed instruction as a method of launching a game ball which is regarded as a normal game mode in the big hit game state. It is controlled so that the effect image indicating the above is displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this respect, in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is not a big hit, when the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU is executed when the time reduction control is executed. As a method of launching a game ball, which is regarded as a regular game mode, control is performed so that, for example, an effect image indicating a right-handed instruction is displayed on the display device. However, when the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the display device is always displayed with an effect image showing the method of launching the game ball, which is regarded as a normal game mode when the time reduction control is executed. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "time reduction hit" is more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), it is not displayed. You may do so. The above-mentioned specific condition is not limited to the condition of the number of time reductions, and may be an arbitrary condition as appropriate.

Further, when the time saving winning determination processing is executed before the hit determination processing of the special symbol is executed, the sub CPU is in the situation where the time saving hit is set (that is, the time saving flag is set to ON). ) May be executed to control whether or not the hit determination process of the special symbol is executed by displaying the effect image that can be grasped or easily grasped by the appearance on the display device.

It should be noted that the type of random value used for the time-saving win judgment process, the extraction timing of the random value used for the time-saving win judgment process, the condition for determining the time-saving hit in the time-saving win judgment process, the execution timing of the time-saving win judgment process, and the time-saving win judgment process. The game state that can be executed, the mode of the time saving game state, the time saving number set at the time saving hit, the start timing of the time saving game state, the end timing of the time saving game state, the time saving number rewriting timing, the time saving hit probability, and the time saving winning judgment. The following is a summary of the processes related to time saving, such as displaying the results of the processes.

(Type of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The random number values used in the time saving winning judgment processing are, for example, a random value for determining a special symbol hit, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for determining a normal hit, a random value for determining a normal symbol, a random value for determining a special symbol fall, and a random value for determining a fall. It may be any one of a plurality of types of random values such as a dedicated time-saving winning determination random value. Further, if it is a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time saving winning determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

Further, the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving winning judgment random value), and a plurality of types of random values (for example, a special symbol hit judgment random value and a symbol determination random value). ) May be used to determine.

(Extraction timing of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The extraction timing of the random number value used for the time saving hit judgment process is the game ball to the passing gate that triggers the execution of the hit judgment process of the normal symbol when the game ball wins the starting port that triggers the hit judgment process of the special symbol. It may be any timing, such as when the game ball passes through the dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment process may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning opening or the like in which the prize ball is paid out, or a specific gate or a specific out where the prize ball is not paid out. It may be done based on the passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, when the random value for the time saving winning judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting opening, when the game ball wins in either the first starting opening or the second starting opening. Even if there is, the random value for determining the time saving win may be extracted, or the random value for determining the time saving winning may be extracted only when the game ball wins at one of the specific starting openings.

(Conditions for determining time reduction hit in the time reduction hit determination process)
When the time-saving winning judgment processing is performed using the extracted time-saving winning judgment processing random value, the extracted time-saving winning judgment random value is a specific time-saving winning judgment random value (for example, specific time-saving winning judgment value data). It is advisable to make it judged as a time saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time saving winning judgment processing using the special symbol hit judgment random value, the time saving is shortened when it is a specific loss judgment value data, a specific small hit judgment value data and / or a specific big hit judgment value data. It is good to judge it as a hit. In addition, when executing the time saving hit determination process using the symbol random value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that it is a time saving hit when it is a specific lost symbol, a specific small hit symbol, or a specific big hit symbol. .. Further, when the time saving hit determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the specific special symbol fall determination random value value data is used. Further, when the time saving winning determination process is executed using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time saving winning judgment processing is performed using the normal hit determination random value or the normal symbol determination random value. Furthermore, the conditions for determining the time reduction hit in the time reduction winning determination process are not limited to the above conditions, and can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In the third pachinko gaming machine and the sixth pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time saving hit determination processing is "time saving hit", the hit determination process of the special symbol (see, for example, S2023 in FIG. 95). If the result of the above is the opening of the accessory and the gaming ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened passes through the V winning opening 2155, the time is shortened according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is advisable to determine whether or not control is executed and the number of time reductions. Then, even though the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the big hit game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute the time reduction control and the number of time reductions based on the "time reduction hit" if the result of the time reduction winning determination process is "time reduction hit". However, the game in which the result of the time saving hit determination processing is "time saving loss", the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory, and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the game enters the V winning device 2150. If the ball does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the time reduction control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time saving winning judgment processing)
When the time saving winning judgment process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random value for the time saving winning judgment acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting port, the main CPU performs the start information of the special symbol. Similarly, it is advisable to reserve the acquired random number value for determining the time reduction.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time saving winning determination process immediately (for example, before it is held) when the random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted, or the extracted random number value is reserved. The time saving winning determination processing may be executed until the variable display of the special symbol is started, or the time saving winning determination processing may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

(Game state in which the time saving winning judgment process can be executed)
The time reduction winning determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the high accuracy non-time reduction game state, and the time reduction game state, and the time reduction control may not be executed in the game state (for example, normal). It may be executed only in the gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). Further, for example, conditions for executing the time-saving winning determination process, such as executing the time-saving winning determination process in any game state or executing the time-saving winning determination process only in a specific gaming state, are set in advance. When the specified conditions are satisfied, the time saving winning determination process may be executed.

(Mode of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving hit determination process may be the same mode or different modes. For example, a first time saving flag and a second time saving flag are prepared, and when the time saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time saving flag is set to on and based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing. When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to on. In this case, it is preferable to execute the time saving control having different functions depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on and the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set to on, both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set to on, the special figure shortening control and the electric support are performed. Only one of the controls can be performed. When the first time saving flag is set to on, the control is performed in the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to, it may be controlled to the second time-shortening gaming state in which only the electric support control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags is set to be turned on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on, for example, the result of the time saving winning determination processing, or the time saving winning determination processing is executed. It may be decided according to the game state at the time of being played.

(Time reduction number set at the time of time reduction hit)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the time reduction winning determination processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a plurality of time saving winning judgment random numbers are specified as time saving hit judgment value data, the set time saving number of times is set to the gaming state when the time saving winning judgment processing is performed. Alternatively or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random value for determining the time saving. For example, if the random time value for determining the time reduction hit, which is extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, is the first time reduction hit determination value data, the number of time reductions is determined to be "100", and the second time reduction is performed. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time reductions to "50".

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may newly set (that is, reset the time saving remaining number) the time saving number determined based on the" time saving hit "instead of the time saving remaining number. In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the number of times of time reduction newly set is larger or less than the number of times of time reduction remaining, and the range of gameplay is widened. It is possible to have a hobby and enhance the interest.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the" time reduction hit "to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the number of remaining time reductions is not less than the current number of remaining time reductions, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU newly sets the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit "instead of the time reduction remaining number, and the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit "is the time reduction remaining number. Of the processes to be added to the number of times, one of them may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in an embodiment satisfying the predetermined conditions.

In the pachinko gaming machine in which the time saving control having different functions is executed when the first time saving flag is set to on and when the second time saving flag is set to on, the time saving winning determination process is performed. When the result of is "time saving hit", the main CPU has a time saving of a function different from the case where the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving control of the same function. The process of setting the number of time reductions may be changed depending on the case of control. For example, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving controls having the same function, the time saving number determined based on the "time saving hit" is used as the remaining time saving number. If the time saving control that is added and executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" are different functions, the time saving control is based on the "time saving hit" instead of the remaining number of times that the time saving is being executed. The number of time reductions determined in the above process may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time reductions may be reset). In addition, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on "time saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time saving times during execution are exhausted, the time saving based on "time saving hit" is performed. Control may be performed.

When the number of time reductions is set based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time reductions to be set is determined to be "0", the time reduction flag is set to on even though the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". Further, when the result of the time reduction winning determination process performed during the execution of the time reduction control is "time reduction hit" and the number of time reductions is set to "0", the execution time reduction control is terminated.

(Start timing of time reduction control)
The start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit" can be the end time of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss, the time reduction control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing is the end time of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning determination processing is the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the same frame. If the result of the time saving hit judgment process is "time saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is a big hit, "time saving hit" is invalidated ("time saving hit"). It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set on based on the above, and the time saving flag is set on based on the hit time selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of big hit).

Further, the start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction hit determination process is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the time reduction winning determination processing is performed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame, the time reduction control is started immediately (before the special symbol hit determination processing is performed) based on the result of the time reduction winning determination processing. You may. In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not the time saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing and the time of executing the time saving winning judgment processing, which can enhance the interest. Will be.

Further, the start timing of the time saving control to be executed based on the result of the time saving winning determination process being "time saving hit" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been executed. In this case, after the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU executes a fanning effect of whether or not the time reduction control is started until the time reduction control is started. It will be possible to enhance the interest.

In the third pachinko gaming machine and the sixth pachinko gaming machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot in which the time saving control is executed). , It is preferable to start the time saving control based on the big hit based on the end of the big hit game control. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which the time reduction control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155. Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the end of the jackpot game control. Further, the V attacker 2152 is released based on the fact that the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is the accessory opening hit. Nevertheless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the big hit game control is not executed, the main CPU is based on the "time saving hit" based on the opening / closing winning opening 2151 being closed. It is advisable to start the time reduction control.

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time reduction game state ends is, for example, "when the variable display of the special symbol is executed over the set number of time reductions in the game state where the time reduction control is executed" and "in the game state where the time reduction control is executed". , When the game is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol "or" When the number of time reductions is set to 0 even though the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a time reduction hit " And so on.

If the small hit game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the time reduction control continues even after the small hit game control process ends. Will be executed.

In the third pachinko gaming machine and the sixth pachinko gaming machine, a stop symbol mode indicating that the hit determination process of the special symbol is a hit of the accessory is derived during the execution of the time saving control. If the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened, but the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not started when the V attacker 2152 is opened, the main CPU 2201 is opened / closed. Even after the mouth 2151 is closed, the time saving control is continuously executed.

(Rewriting the number of time reductions)
When the time saving winning determination process is executed in the gaming state (for example, high accuracy time saving gaming state, time saving gaming state, etc.) in which the time saving control is executed, and the result of this time saving winning determination processing is "time saving hit", the main CPU , The time reduction number may be rewritten, or the time reduction number may not be rewritten (that is, the time reduction control may be executed until the time reduction number in the running time reduction control is exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction hit" when the number of time reductions in the running time reduction control is exhausted. It may be set at the time of executing the hit determination process of the special symbol, at the start or stop of the variable display of the special symbol, at the time of the time saving winning determination process, or at various timings. Can be set. In addition, when it is set at the time of the time reduction winning determination processing, the time reduction number determined based on the "time reduction hit" is overwritten with the time reduction number in the running time reduction control. Further, the number of time reductions may be set in any of "rewriting the number of time reductions" and "adding to the previous number of time reductions" in a manner satisfying the predetermined conditions.

(Probability of shortening the time)
When the time saving winning determination process is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening or the second starting opening, the time saving winning determination process is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening (hereinafter, "No. 1"). The time saving hit probability is referred to as "1 time saving winning determination process") and the time saving winning determination process (hereinafter referred to as "second time saving winning determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening. May be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving winning determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving winning determination process is performed, or the second time saving winning determination process may be performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving hit determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability in the case of being broken, or when the first time saving winning determination process is performed and the second time saving winning determination process is performed. The probability of hitting the time reduction may be the same or almost the same as that of the case where.

(Display of the result of the time saving winning judgment process)
The number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction winning judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (whether it is a time reduction hit or the time reduction loss) and / and the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (time reduction hit). May be provided with a winning time reduction number display unit to display. The time reduction winning determination result display unit and / and the winning time reduction number display unit may be provided in an LED display group provided with a special symbol display unit or the like, and may be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU may display the result of the time reduction winning determination process and / or the number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction hit on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. good.

(interval)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game. It may be longer than the above interval time when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a “time reduction loss”. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, the sub CPU displays, for example, an effect image indicating that it is a "time saving hit" until the above interval time elapses. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine and the sixth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is the winning of the accessory opening and the big hit game control processing is not executed based on the opening of the accessory. The main CPU 2201 determines the interval time after the end of the operation for opening the accessory when the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", and the above when the result of the time saving winning determination process is "time saving loss". It may be longer than the interval time of, and may be the same or substantially the same time.

[7-3. Extended example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko gaming machine to the sixth pachinko gaming machine described in the present specification play a game using a game medium, and a privilege (for example, a prize ball, a prize ball, a prize data) is obtained based on the result of the game. Etc.) can be applied to all gaming machines. That is, if the game is played by launching or throwing a game medium (for example, a game ball, a medal, etc.) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. Instead, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player and enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game medium that electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player.

In the case of a gaming machine that circulates the enclosed gaming balls to play a game, the gaming balls as a gaming medium are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that the prize balls will be paid out when a prize is won. Instead, prize ball data as a game medium is given. In this specification, the "game value to be paid out" includes the meaning of both the prize ball and the prize ball data. For example, when a prize is won in a prize opening with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls is given to the enclosed gaming machine. Further, the game value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball and the prize ball data, and may be any one corresponding to the prize ball and the prize ball data.

Further, when the gaming medium management device connected to the main control circuit manages the gaming medium management device, the gaming medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the gaming machine, and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to the two-way communication function via a game medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for a game medium lending operation (that is, a player performs a game medium loading operation). When the winning combination related to the payout of the gaming medium is won (the winning combination is established), the payout operation of the gaming medium (that is, the payout of the gaming medium to the player is performed, and the necessary gaming medium is provided. It may be possible to perform an operation of acquiring the game) or electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game. Further, the gaming medium management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of gaming media possessed on the front of the pachinko gaming machine, for example, based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operating means, a return (settlement) operating means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the gaming medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming medium handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, the recording medium is not limited to being discharged, and cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko gaming machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in a pachi-slot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, and an enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it can also prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. As described above, since the gaming ball is configured to be launched from above with respect to the gaming area, the enclosed gaming machine can avoid a so-called return ball (foul ball). Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine. Further, without providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game ball polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game machine are provided. May be good. In this case, the capture mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to capture, or may be configured to capture from a winning opening provided in the game area.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed gaming machine, the gaming ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the gaming ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. Further, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls to be paid out is increased according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. Further, for example, at the end of the game, the entire game value (that is, the ball held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine may be settled, or a part of the ball held may be transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls held is integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held is reduced. .. Furthermore, there is no concept of a foul ball in a type of gaming machine in which a gaming ball is launched from above the gaming area, but a foul ball is generated when a gaming ball is launched from below as in a conventional gaming machine. sell. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine of a type in which a gaming ball is launched from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball is generated. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases depending on consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the gaming medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting (return) of possession balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by a game media management device. In the second embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange or the like in a game field or the like where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening may be continuously detected by the door opening sensor. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The enclosed gaming machine may be configured so that the player cannot touch the gaming ball. For example, the enclosed gaming machine is of a type in which the gaming ball is circulated only by the gaming machine without being circulated by the island equipment. , And the type in which the gaming ball circulates in the island equipment but the player cannot touch the gaming ball, etc. are also included in the enclosed gaming machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received are the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with either one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination receiving the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. You can confirm that it has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demolishing.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is read, it is difficult to decode this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set aside from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is not only confirmed that the regular signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the regular signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities. Further, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game medium management device by communication, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game medium management device, and the main control circuit is connected to the main control circuit via the frame control circuit. The communication connection with the game medium management device may be made. Further, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the launch control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at the symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate the jackpot symbol. Process so that there is nothing to do.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the other Control is performed to forcibly stop the special symbol of the above with a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the general gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state as described above. In this jackpot gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the start of the second special symbol are started. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general game is performed. The timekeeping of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted based on the transition from the state to the small hit gaming state (stopped at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol), and the transition from the small hit gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the end of the small hit game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general gaming state shifts to the small hit gaming state as described above, but in this small hit gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the main CPU is in the variable display. Regarding the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the LED group is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the timing of the fluctuation time is interrupted as described above.

[7-4. Status display of being in a time-saving game state]
When controlled to the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state, a time-saving state display unit indicating that the time-saving game state may be provided. The time saving state display unit may be provided in the LED display group provided with a special symbol display unit or the like so as to be controlled by the main CPU.

Further, when a time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state is provided, an A time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the A time-saving game state, a B time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the B time-saving game state, and a B time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the B time-saving game state. A C time saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the C time saving game state may be provided. In this case, the main CPU controls the A time saving state display unit so as to display a specific mode in which it can be visually grasped that the A time saving game state is in the A time saving game state, and if it is the B time saving game state, the main CPU controls the A time saving state display unit. , The B time saving state display unit is controlled so that a specific mode that can grasp the B time saving gaming state by appearance is displayed, and if it is the C time saving gaming state, the C time saving gaming state can be grasped by appearance. It is preferable to control the C time saving state display unit so that the mode is displayed. Further, when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU may display all of the time-saving state display units executed in an overlapping manner.

Further, even if the A time saving state display unit, the B time saving state display unit, and the C time saving state display unit are not provided respectively, for example, the time saving gaming state having the same time saving performance may be a common time saving state display unit. For example, if the time saving performance in the B time saving game state and the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state are the same, and these time saving performances are different from the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, it means that the time saving performance is A. It is preferable to provide a time saving state display unit and a BC common time saving state display unit indicating that the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state is provided so as to be controlled by the main CPU.

Further, the sub CPU displays, for example, in the display area of a liquid crystal display device or the like, the time-saving game state, the type of the time-saving game state in the case of the time-saving game state, and / and the time-saving number of times (including the time-saving remaining number of times). You may try to do it.

[7-5. Outer end signal about time-saving game state]
When controlled to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state, the main CPU sends a time saving signal indicating the time saving game state from the external terminal board 4184 to the outside (for example, an island computer). In this case, a time saving signal that does not distinguish between the types of the time saving gaming state may be transmitted, or a signal indicating which time saving gaming state is controlled, that is, the time saving gaming state. You may send by distinguishing the type. When transmitting the time saving signal by distinguishing the types of the time saving game state, the main CPU transmits, for example, the A time saving signal in the case of the A time saving game state, and the B time saving signal in the case of the B time saving game state. Is transmitted, and if the game is in the C time reduction game state, the C time reduction signal is transmitted. Further, when a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU may transmit a plurality of executed time saving signals.

Further, for the time-saving gaming states having the same time-saving performance, a common time-saving signal may be transmitted. For example, if the time saving performance in the B time saving game state and the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state are the same, and these time saving performances are different from the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, the main CPU is in the A time saving gaming state. In this case, the A time saving signal may be transmitted, and in the case of the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, the BC common time saving signal may be transmitted.

[7-6. Interval in case of "time saving hit"]
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU loses the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost. It may be longer than the above interval time in the case. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, the sub CPU displays, for example, an effect image indicating that it is a "time saving hit" until the above interval time elapses. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine and the sixth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU stops the variable display of the special symbol in the game. The interval time may be longer than when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a bonus hit and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on this bonus hit, the same or abbreviated. It may be the same time.

[8. Addendum]
[8-1. Appendix 1]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when a special result is derived, the gaming machine is controlled to a special gaming state advantageous to the player.

As a gaming machine of this type, in addition to the special gaming state that is controlled when a special result is derived, even if the special result is not derived, the variable display of the specified number of times is performed in the high probability time shortening state. A gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability non-time reduction state is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-174800).

The gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-174800 has a new gaming property such as shifting from a high-probability time-shortening state to a high-probability non-time-shortening state to make the gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state. However, in recent years, a gaming machine having further new playability has been desired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 1 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A special symbol lottery means for performing a special symbol lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 201 performing a special symbol variable display start process (S93)).
A special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of a special symbol in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived.
A game state control means capable of controlling a game state (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol game end setting process (S282) or the like) and
Equipped with
The game state control means is
The normal game state, which is the period during which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed, and
A special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed and is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.
It is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed, and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.
The special symbol control means is
A special stop mode (for example, a jackpot display mode) indicating that the game is shifted to the special gaming state, and
A loss stop mode (for example, a loss display mode) indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, and a loss display mode.
It is characterized in that it is possible to derive any one of a plurality of stop modes including a specific stop mode (for example, a display mode per time reduction) indicating that the state is shifted to the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, a specific gaming state is provided separately from the special gaming state as a gaming state advantageous to the player during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed, and the specific stopping mode is derived. Then, it becomes possible to provide a new playability that has never been seen before, such as shifting to a specific gaming state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the special gaming state, and after the end of the special gaming state, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state.
When the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state without shifting to the special gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the specific stopping mode is derived, the pachinko machine shifts to the specific gaming state without shifting to the special gaming state. It becomes possible to provide playability.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The game state control means
When the loss stop mode is derived, the game state continuation control means capable of continuing the game state when the loss stop mode is derived (for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss, the special symbol is lost. The main CPU201), which does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag in the game end process,
Even when the loss stop mode is derived, if a special condition is satisfied (for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value), the game state is not continued by the game state continuation control means. It is characterized by having a specific game state transition control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a B time reduction control mode determination process) capable of transitioning to the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even when the loss stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, which provides a new gaming property that has never been seen before. It becomes possible. Even when the loss stop mode is derived, the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied corresponds to, for example, the case where a specific special gaming state among a plurality of types of special gaming states is completed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
In the specific stop mode,
The first specific stop mode (for example, the mode of the selected symbol command "z0") and
A second specific stop mode different from the first specific stop mode (for example, a mode of the selected symbol command "z1") is included at least.
The game state control means
It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state in which the degree of advantage (for example, the number of time reductions) is different between the case where the first specific stop mode is derived and the case where the second specific stop mode is derived. do.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, it is possible to widen the range of playability by giving variations, and it is possible to provide interesting playability while suppressing gambling.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above.
A specific area provided in the game area (for example, a passing gate 126) and a normal symbol lottery means for performing a normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area (for example, variable display start processing of the normal symbol (S293). ) With the main CPU 201)
With a normal symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a variable display end process (S294) of a normal symbol) that performs variable display of a normal symbol in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived. ,
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol lottery facilitating means (for example, normal) that facilitates the establishment of the predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the special symbol lottery. Main CPU201) that performs the electric accessory release process (S296),
The ordinary symbol probability control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the time saving setting process (S238)) capable of changing the ordinary symbol probability from which the ordinary symbol hit is derived, and
Further prepare
The ordinary symbol probability control means is
When the specific stop mode is derived and the state is shifted to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state), the normal symbol probability is not changed (for example, the hit determination table of the normal symbol is referred to and it is normal. Main CPU 201) that performs the hit determination process of the symbol,
When the specific gaming state (for example, the A time-saving gaming state) is entered after the end of the special gaming state due to the derivation of the special stop mode, the normal symbol probability can be changed (for example, the normal symbol). Main CPU 201 that performs hit determination processing for ordinary symbols with reference to the hit determination table)
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of the above (5), the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, the A time-saving gaming state) is made even after the end of the special gaming state, and the transition to the specific gaming state is achieved by deriving the specific stop mode. If this is the case, the normal symbol probability is not changed, and if the game shifts to the specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the normal symbol probability is changed. In this way, by providing a plurality of specific game states with different transition triggers and making it possible to change the normal symbol probability according to the transition trigger, the range of game playability can be expanded and interesting game playability can be provided. Is possible.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The game state control means
When the special stop mode is derived, after the end of the special gaming state, it is possible to shift to a highly reliable gaming state in which the special stop mode is more likely to be derived than in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state.
The special symbol control means is
In the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (for example, when S221 is YES determination), at least the special stop mode and the specific stop mode can be derived, while the specific stop mode can be derived.
It is characterized in that at least the special stop mode can be derived in the high probability gaming state (for example, when S221 is determined to be NO).

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, both the special stopping mode and the specific stopping mode can be derived in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state in which the interest of the player tends to be lowered. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the gaming state.

In the high-probability gaming state, when the result of the special symbol lottery is the result corresponding to the specific stop mode (for example, a time saving hit), the mode of deriving the specific stop mode but not shifting to the specific game state and the special symbol A mode in which a specific stop mode is not derived even if the result of the lottery corresponds to a specific stop mode, and a mode in which a special symbol lottery is performed so that the result corresponding to the specific stop mode is not included in the result of the special symbol lottery in the first place. It may be either.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The special symbol includes a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and the predetermined condition includes a first condition and a second condition.
The special symbol lottery means
A first special symbol lottery means for performing a first special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the first condition (for example, a main CPU 201 for processing S81 and S82).
It has a second special symbol lottery means for performing a second special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the second condition (for example, a main CPU 201 that processes S78 and S79).
The special symbol control means is
When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol is variablely displayed, and when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the second special symbol is variablely displayed.
It is characterized in that the derivation ratio of the specific stop mode can be different between the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, the derivation ratio of the specific stop mode may differ between the case where the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the case where the second special symbol is variablely displayed. The width can be expanded, and it becomes possible to provide interesting playability.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The game state control means is
When the gaming state under control is the normal gaming state, when the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific game state in a mode corresponding to the specific stop mode (for example, the process of S244 can be executed). On the other hand
When the gaming state under control is the specific gaming state, even if the specific stop mode is derived, the specific game under control is not controlled to the specific gaming state according to the specific stop mode. It is characterized in that the mode according to the state can be continued (for example, the processing of S243 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when the specific stopping mode is derived while being controlled to the specific gaming state, the mode corresponding to the specific gaming state being controlled continues. That is, even if the specific stop mode is derived in the specific game state, it is not invalidated, and the player can give the same effect as when the specific game state under control is extended. Can be increased.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, a random number acquisition means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs processing of S392 or S399) for acquiring a plurality of types of random numbers (for example, a random number for determining a special symbol hit and a symbol random number of a special symbol) is provided.
The special symbol lottery means
The stop mode derived by the special symbol control means using a specific random number (for example, a random number for determining a special symbol hit) among the plurality of types of random numbers is the special stop mode, the loss stop mode, and the specific stop. It is possible to determine which of the plurality of stop modes including the mode is.
Among the plurality of types of random numbers, a predetermined random number (for example, a symbol random number) different from the specific random number (for example, a random number for determining a special symbol hit) is used to determine the type of the special stop mode or the type of the specific stop mode. It is characterized by being decidable.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, a specific random number (for example, a random number for determining a special symbol hit) is used to determine a derived stop mode, that is, a lottery result, and a predetermined random number different from the specific random number (for example, for example). It is possible to determine the type of the special stop mode or the type of the specific stop mode using the symbol random number). Therefore, it is possible to improve the security as compared with the case where not only the derived stop mode but also the special stop mode and the type of the specific stop mode are determined by using only the specific random number.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (9) above.
The game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving game state), the specific stop mode is derived to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state). It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the expected value of the period controlled by the specific gaming state becomes smaller than that in the case of transition.

According to the gaming machine of the above (10), the specific gaming mode is derived due to the derivation of the special stopping mode as compared with the case of shifting to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state) due to the derivation of the specific stopping mode. It is possible to give an advantage when the state (for example, the A time saving game state) is entered. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in a normal game state or a specific game state without increasing the gambling of the person.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (9) above.
The game state control means
When the special stop mode is derived to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving game state), the specific stop mode is derived to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state). It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the expected value of the period controlled by the specific gaming state becomes larger than that in the case of transition.

According to the gaming machine of (11) above, the specific gaming mode is derived due to the derivation of the specific stopping mode, as compared with the case where the pachinko machine is shifted to the specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state) due to the derivation of the special stopping mode. It is possible to give an advantage when the state (for example, the C time saving game state) is entered. In such a case, it is possible to enhance the playability in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state, which tends to reduce the interest, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

[8-2. Appendix 2]
The pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 2 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
When the game ball launched toward the game area passes through the special symbol start area (for example, start port switches 121, 141A, 141B), a random number acquisition means (for example, S392 or S399) for acquiring a random number related to the special symbol is processed. Main CPU201) and
A special symbol lottery means (for example, special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) capable of performing a special symbol lottery including a special result and a specific result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means. Main CPU201) to perform and
A symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of a special symbol and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived.
When the variable display of the special symbol is performed and the special stop mode indicating the special result (for example, the display mode of the jackpot) is derived, the special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed is performed. ), And a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145).
A game state control means that can control the game state in which the special symbol is variablely displayed (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol management process).
Equipped with
The game state control means is
Normal game state and
It is possible to control any of a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state, B time saving gaming state, C time saving gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.
When the result of the special symbol lottery is the specific result (for example, the big hit of the selected symbol commands "0" to "2" in FIG. 112), the result of the special symbol lottery is the special result with respect to the control of the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that it is configured to be advantageous as compared with the case where it is the result (for example, the big hit of the selected symbol command “4” in FIG. 112).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result, it is advantageous in terms of controlling the specific gaming state as compared with the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a special result. It is possible to make the gaming state interesting, and it is possible to provide new playability that has never been seen before.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special symbol lottery means
When the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode per time reduction) is derived by the symbol control means and controlled to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time reduction gaming state), the end condition of the specific gaming state is set as described above. It is characterized in that it can be determined based on the random number value acquired by the random number acquisition means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the specific stopping mode is derived and controlled to the specific gaming state, the end condition of the specific gaming state is determined based on the value of the acquired random number, so that the specific gaming The end timing of the state can be different each time. By doing so, it is possible to have a wide range of playability, and it is possible to provide interesting playability.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
A special display effect (for example, a jackpot system reach) indicating that the special stop mode may be derived, and a specific display effect (for example, a time saving hit) indicating that the specific stop mode may be derived. It is characterized by further comprising a suggestion effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) capable of performing any of a plurality of display effects including the system reach).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, not only the special display effect indicating that the special stop mode may be derived, but also the specific display effect indicating that the specific stop mode may be derived. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to provide new playability that has never been seen before.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The probability that the special stop mode is derived can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values of 6 stages from setting 1 to setting 6), and the probability corresponding to the set set value is set. A gaming machine in which the special symbol lottery is performed so that the special stop mode is derived.
The special symbol lottery means
The special symbol lottery is set in one of the plurality of set values (for example, setting 1) and in another set value (for example, setting 6). It is characterized in that the derivation probability of the special stop mode is different, while the derivation probability of the specific stop mode is the same.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, the set value is low by making the derivation probability of the specific stop mode the same while making the derivation probability of the special stop mode different according to the set value. Even so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
Although the derivation probability of the specific stop mode is the same between the case where one of the plurality of set values is set and the case where the other set value is set, the specific stop mode is derived. It is possible to make the end condition of the specific gaming state controlled different from each other (for example, 50 times of time reduction in the case of setting 1 and 100 times of time reduction in the case of setting 6).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, it is interesting to make the probability of transition to a specific gaming state the same depending on whether it is set to one set value or another set value. It is possible to make it interesting by making the end conditions different while suppressing the decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The special symbol lottery means is
It is possible to perform the special symbol lottery by either a low probability that the probability that the special stop mode is derived is relatively low or a high probability that the probability that the special stop mode is derived is relatively high. And at the same time
When the special symbol lottery is performed with the low probability, the probability that the special stop mode is derived (for example, 1/201 shown in FIG. 110) and the high probability when the special symbol lottery is performed. With a probability relatively higher than any of the probabilities (eg, 1/200 shown in FIG. 110) from which the special stop mode is derived (eg, 1/6 shown in FIG. 110). It is characterized in that the special symbol lottery can be performed so that the aspect is derived.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, since the specific stopping mode is derived with a higher probability than in both the case where the derivation probability of the special stopping mode is low and the case where the derivation probability is high, a new game that has never existed before. It is possible to provide sex and suppress the decline in interest.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The random number acquisition means is
A first random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S392) for acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol, and
It has a second random number acquisition means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs processing of S399) for acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol.
The special symbol lottery means
The first special symbol lottery means (for example, the first special symbol variable display start) for performing the first special symbol lottery including the special result and the specific result in the lottery result using the random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means. Main CPU201) that performs processing (S93) and
A second special symbol lottery means (for example, a second special symbol variable display start process (S93)) that performs a second special symbol lottery including at least the special result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the second random number acquisition means. Main CPU 201), and
The symbol control means is
A first symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a first special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived. When,
A second symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a second special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. And have
When the result of the second special symbol lottery is the special result (for example, the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z7" or "z8"), the result of the first special symbol lottery is the special result (for example, the selected symbol command). It is more advantageous than the case of "z3" or "z4" big hit) and the case where the result of the first special symbol lottery is the specific result (for example, the time saving hit of the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z2"). It is characterized by being configured to be.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, the result of the second special symbol lottery is a special result, the result of the first special symbol lottery is a special result, and the result of the first special symbol lottery is a specific result. Since it is more advantageous than any of the cases, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game in which the second special symbol lottery is performed.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The random number acquisition means is
A first random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that performs the processing of S392) for acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol, and
It has a second random number acquisition means (for example, a main CPU 2201 that performs processing of S399) for acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol.
The special symbol lottery means
The first special symbol lottery means (for example, the first special symbol variable display start) for performing the first special symbol lottery including the special result and the specific result in the lottery result using the random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means. Main CPU 2201) that performs processing (S2013) and
A second special symbol lottery means (for example, a second special symbol variable display start process (S2013)) that performs a second special symbol lottery including at least the special result in the lottery result using the random numbers acquired by the second random number acquisition means. Main CPU 2201) and
The symbol control means is
A first symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 2201 that performs a first special symbol variable display end process (S2014)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived. When,
A second symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 2201 that performs a second special symbol variable display end process (S2014)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. And have
The results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery further include special results (for example, per opening of a character).
The gaming machine is
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a special stop mode showing the special result (for example, a display mode for opening the accessory) is derived, a predetermined area (for example, a display mode for opening the accessory) is derived. , The approach control means (for example, the main CPU 2201) that controls the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 2150) so as to be possible or easy.
A special area (for example, V winning opening 2155) through which a game ball that has entered the predetermined area can pass, and
Further prepare
The special game state control means
When the game ball passes through the special area, it can be controlled to a special game state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (for example, a big hit game state via the second route).
The first special symbol lottery means is
The probability that the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the special stop mode is derived (for example, 0) and the probability that the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the special stop mode is derived (for example, 0). For example, it is characterized in that the first special symbol lottery can be performed so as to be different from 1 / 1.17).

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when the special stop mode is derived, a new game property that is controlled to the specific gaming state when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result is transferred to a predetermined area. It can also be applied to a so-called type 1 and type 2 mixer that shifts to a special gaming state when a gaming ball that has entered the predetermined area enters a special area after the entry of the gaming ball becomes possible or easy. Therefore, even for the so-called type 1 and type 2 mixer, it is possible to provide a new playability that has never been seen before.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
In the specific gaming state,
The first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state are included.
The end conditions of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state are set.
The first end condition (for example, the time reduction in FIG. 91) for ending the specific gaming state when the total of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol becomes the first predetermined number. The end condition L) and the second end condition (for example, the time saving end condition M in FIG. 91) for ending the specific gaming state when the variable display number of the second special symbol reaches the second predetermined number. The third end condition (for example, the end condition N for shortening the time shown in FIG. 91) for ending the specific gaming state when the number of times the special stop mode is derived becomes the third predetermined number is included.
At least one of the first end condition, the second end condition, and the third end condition is the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state. It is characterized by being different in at least one of the specific gaming states.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, it is possible to have a wide range of playability by giving variations to the end conditions of the specific gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific gaming state is
Includes at least two specific gaming states of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state.
The end conditions for each of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state include a variable display number (for example, a time reduction number) of the special symbol.
The game state control means
In any one of the first specific game state, the second specific game state, and the third specific game state (for example, the C time reduction game state), the other specific game state (for example, the B time reduction game). If the transition condition to (state) is satisfied,
The variable display number of the special symbol that can be performed until the end condition for the one specific game state is satisfied, and the above that can be performed until the end condition for the other specific game state is satisfied. Of the variable display times of the special symbol, control can be performed in the same manner as the specific gaming state of the one regardless of the degree of advantage until the special symbol is variablely displayed over the larger variable display number (for example, S243. It is characterized by being able to execute processing).

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the ending condition of a specific gaming state is ensured not to be disadvantageous to the player, and is performed in the same manner as one specific gaming state. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
The game state control means
The normal gaming state (for example, low probability low base state) and
Although the probability that the special stop mode is derived is higher than that of the normal gaming state, the high probability non-specific gaming state (for example, the high probability low base state) in which the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery is the same as that of the normal gaming state,
A low probability specific gaming state (for example, a low probability high base state) in which the probability that the special stop mode is derived is the same as that of the normal gaming state, but the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery is higher than that of the normal gaming state. ,
Both the probability that the special stop mode is derived and the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery can be controlled to either a high-accuracy specific gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy high-base state) higher than the normal gaming state. And
The gaming machine is
It is characterized by comprising a display effect control means capable of controlling the display effect in which it is difficult to visually grasp the normal game state, the low probability specific game state, and the high accuracy specific game state.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state, the low-accuracy specific gaming state, and the high-accuracy specific gaming state are displayed in a mode that is difficult to grasp in appearance, which makes the game interesting. It will be possible to have it, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(12) In the gaming machine described in (11) above,
The gaming machine is
The first aspect (for example, left-handed) in which the game ball is launched toward the first area (for example, the left side area 106) of the game area, and
The second aspect (for example, right-handed) in which the game ball is launched toward the second area (for example, the right side area 107) of the game area.
It is possible to play the game in any of a plurality of modes including the above, and the game is configured to be played in the first mode or the second mode depending on the game state.
In the normal gaming state, the low probability specific gaming state, and the high probability specific gaming state, the game is performed in the first aspect, while the game is performed.
In the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state, the game is configured to be performed in the second aspect.

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, the game is played in the first aspect in the normal gaming state, the low-accuracy specific gaming state, and the high-accuracy specific gaming state, while in the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state, the second aspect. Since the game is played in, it is possible to make the player understand that the high-accuracy non-specific game state is a special game state unlike other game states.

(13) In the gaming machine according to (11) or (12) above,
Further provided with a payout means (for example, payout / launch control circuit 400) for paying out the prize ball or prize data based on the fact that the game ball launched toward the game area has passed through a predetermined winning area.
In the normal gaming state, the low probability specific gaming state, and the high probability specific gaming state, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1.
In the high-accuracy non-specific game state, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

According to the gaming machine of (13) above, it is possible to enhance the interest by setting the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state to a gaming state that is more advantageous than other gaming states.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (13) above.
The game state control means is
When the special stop mode (for example, the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z3") is derived in the normal gaming state (for example, the low probability low base state), the high probability specific gaming state is after the end of the special gaming state. It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state without shifting to.

According to the gaming machine of (14) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the high-accuracy non-specific gaming state, so that the deterioration of the interest in the normal gaming state can be suppressed. Is possible.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

[8-3. Appendix 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 3 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A main control means (for example, a main control circuit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and
A staging control means (for example, a sub control circuit 300) that controls the staging, and
Equipped with
The main control means
A start information acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs processing of S392 or S399) for acquiring start information (for example, various random numbers) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
When the variable start condition is satisfied, the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means is used to draw a lottery that includes at least a special result (for example, a big hit), a specific result (for example, a time saving hit), and a loss in the lottery result. The lottery means to be performed (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) and
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the symbol is variablely displayed in a predetermined display area, and the symbol control means for controlling the result of the lottery to be derived (for example, the special symbol variable display end process (S94)) is performed. CPU201) and
A game state control means for controlling a game state (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol game end setting process (S282) or the like) and
Prior to the lottery by the lottery means, a preceding determination means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a look-ahead determination process (S396)) capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance,
An information transmission means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S322) that transmits information related to the progress of the game to the staging control means, and
Have,
The game state control means
When the special stop mode (for example, the jackpot display mode) showing the special result is derived, the special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed, and
When the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode per time reduction) showing the specific result is derived, the game state in which the symbol is variably displayed, which is more advantageous than the normal game state (for example, the display mode). It is possible to control one of a plurality of gaming states including C time saving gaming state).
The staging control means
It is possible to receive the information transmitted from the information transmitting means and control the effect based on the information to be displayed in a predetermined effect display area.
When the information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means is received, the effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 301) for controlling the effect (for example, the variation effect corresponding to the variation) is performed along with the variable display of the symbol. )When,
When the information indicating the result of the preceding determination by the preceding determination means is received, the preceding effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 301) controls so that the preceding effect (for example, the look-ahead effect) is performed prior to the variable display of the symbol. It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a specific stopping mode indicating a specific result is derived, the effect and the preceding effect are performed on the gaming machine controlled to the specific gaming state, which is a new game that has never existed before. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine having sex.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The preceding effect control means is
A first preceding effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls so that a first preceding effect (for example, display of a time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form) that can suggest that the specific stop mode may be derived is performed. )When,
A second preceding effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls so that a second preceding effect (for example, display of a jackpot system look-ahead effect form) that can suggest that the special stop mode may be derived is performed. When,
A third predecessor that controls so that a third predecessor effect (for example, display of a common system look-ahead effect mode) that can suggest that either the special stop mode or the specific stop mode may be derived may be performed. It is characterized by having an effect control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, as the preceding effect, not only the effect in which the special stop mode may be derived (second preceding effect) but also the specific stop mode may be derived. Since the first suggestive first-stage effect is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new playability that has never been seen before. Moreover, when the third preceding effect is performed, both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode may be derived, so that it is possible to enhance the interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The third preceding effect control means is
The third preceding effect (for example, the display mode of the time saving) is difficult to distinguish from the appearance of the special stop mode (for example, the display mode of the big hit) or the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode of the time saving hit). It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the display of the common system look-ahead effect form) is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the third preceding effect is performed in a mode in which it is difficult to distinguish which of the special stop mode and the specific stop mode is derived from the appearance, which is a new effect that has never been seen before. It is possible to enhance the interest by doing.

(4) In the gaming machine according to (2) or (3) above,
The third preceding effect control means is
The first aspect (for example, a blue rectangle) and
A second aspect (for example, a yellow pentagon) that can be changed from the first aspect and has a higher expected value for the result of the lottery than the first aspect.
A third aspect (for example, a rainbow triangle), which is a mode that can be changed from the first aspect or the second aspect and has a higher expected value for the result of the lottery than the second aspect.
It is possible to control so that the third preceding effect is performed in one or more of a plurality of aspects including.
The first aspect and the second aspect are aspects in which it is difficult to visually distinguish whether the expected value for the result of the lottery is the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result.
The third aspect is characterized in that it is easy to distinguish the expected value for the special result by appearance.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, when the third preceding effect is performed, in the first aspect and the second aspect, it is possible to visually indicate which of the expected value for the special result and the expected value for the specific result is higher. Although it is difficult to distinguish, it is easy to distinguish that the expected value for the special result is high when the third aspect is changed. Therefore, when the third preceding production is performed, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above.
The first preceding effect control means is
The fourth aspect (for example, a dedicated common look-ahead staging form) and
A fifth aspect (for example, a white circle), which is a mode that can be changed from the fourth aspect and has a higher expected value for the specific result than the fourth aspect,
It is possible to control so that the first preceding effect is performed in one or more of a plurality of aspects including.
The fourth aspect is an aspect in which it is difficult to distinguish between the expected value for the special result and the expected value for the specific result by appearance.
The fifth aspect is characterized in that it is easy to distinguish the expected value for the specific result by appearance.

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, in the fourth aspect, it is difficult to distinguish which is higher, the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result, but in the fifth aspect, the expectation for the specific result is difficult. Higher values make it easier to distinguish. Therefore, in the first preceding staging, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest without increasing the gambling of the person by performing the staging in which the expected value for the specific result is high while excluding the expected value for the special result.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (5) above.
It is characterized in that the ratio of the first preceding effect performed by the first preceding effect control means and the ratio of the second preceding effect performed by the second preceding effect control means are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, by making the ratio of the first preceding effect different from the ratio of the second preceding effect, it is possible to give the effect a sharpness, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above.
The symbol control means is
It is possible to derive the specific stop mode in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state.
The first preceding effect control means is
It is possible to control so that the first preceding effect is performed in the normal gaming state, while it is possible to control so that the first preceding effect is not performed in the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of the above (7), it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the interest in the normal gaming state. That is, the case where the specific result is derived in the normal gaming state is more interesting to the player than the case where the specific result is derived in the specific gaming state. Therefore, by enabling the first preceding effect to be performed in the normal gaming state and not performing the first preceding effect in the specific gaming state, the first preceding effect can be effectively performed.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The staging control means is
The first effect control means (for example, sub) that controls the first effect (for example, the time-saving hit system reach) that suggests that the special stop mode may be derived instead of the specific stop mode. CPU301) and
A second effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls the second effect (for example, a jackpot system reach) that suggests that the specific stop mode may be derived, and a second effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301).
A third effect control means (eg, for example) that controls the effect (for example, common reach) that suggests that either the special stop mode or the specific stop mode may be derived. It is characterized by having a sub CPU 301) and.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (7) above.
The staging control means is
The first effect control means (for example, sub) that controls the first effect (for example, the time-saving hit system reach) that suggests that the special stop mode may be derived instead of the specific stop mode. CPU301) and
A second effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls the second effect (for example, a jackpot system reach) that suggests that the specific stop mode may be derived, and a second effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301).
A third effect control means (eg, for example) that controls the effect (for example, common reach) that suggests that either the special stop mode or the specific stop mode may be derived. It is characterized by having a sub CPU 301) and.

According to the gaming machines (8) and (9) above, as the effect. Since not only the effect in which the special stop mode may be derived (the second effect) but also the first effect in which it can be suggested that the specific stop mode may be derived is performed, so far. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine having no new playability. Moreover, when the third effect is performed, both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode may be derived, so that it is possible to enhance the interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (9) above,
The second effect control means is
When the second preceding effect (for example, display of the jackpot system look-ahead effect form) or the third preceding effect (for example, display of the common system look-ahead effect form) is performed, the second preceding effect (for example, the jackpot system reach). Can be controlled to be done, while
When the first preceding effect (for example, display of the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form) is performed, it is possible to control so that the second effect (for example, the big hit system reach) is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of the above (10), the second preceding effect is performed when the second preceding effect or the third preceding effect is performed, but is not performed when the first preceding effect is performed. .. Therefore, at the stage of the preceding production, it is possible to perform the production that enhances the interest by performing the preceding production with a high expectation value for the special result while excluding giving the expected value for the specific result to the person.

(11) In the gaming machine according to (9) or (10) above,
The first effect control means is
When the first preceding effect (for example, the display of the time saving hit system look-ahead effect form) or the third preceding effect (for example, the display of the common system look-ahead effect form) is performed, the first said effect (for example, the time saving hit system). While it is controllable to reach)
When the second preceding effect (for example, display of the big hit system look-ahead effect form) is performed, it is possible to control so that the first said effect (for example, time saving hit system reach) is not performed.
According to the gaming machine of the above (11), the first relevant effect is performed when the first preceding effect or the third preceding effect is performed, but is not performed when the second preceding effect is performed. .. Therefore, at the stage of the preceding production, by performing the preceding production with a high expectation value for a specific result while eliminating giving the expectation value for the special result to the person, the deterioration of the interest is suppressed without increasing the gambling of the person. Is possible.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (11) above.
The third effect control means is
The first preceding effect (for example, display of a time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form), the second preceding effect (for example, display of a big hit system look-ahead effect form), and a third preceding effect (for example, display of a common system look-ahead effect form). It is characterized in that it is possible to control so that the third effect (for example, common reach) is performed regardless of which of the above is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, in the third production, it is difficult to grasp whether the expected value for the special result is high or the expected value for the specific result is high, so that the player is interested for a relatively long time. It will be possible to put it on.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (12) above.
The staging control means is
In the variable display (for example, target variation) of the specific symbol when the preceding effect is performed prior to the variable display of the specific symbol.
When the third effect (for example, common reach C) is started, after the third effect is performed, the first effect (for example, time saving hit system reach C) or the second effect (for example) For example, while it is possible to move to the jackpot reach C),
When the third effect (for example, common reach C) is not started, either the first effect (for example, the time saving hit system reach C) or the second effect (for example, the big hit system reach C). It is characterized by being configured so that it does not migrate.

According to the gaming machine of (13) above, when the preceding effect is performed prior to the variable display of a specific symbol, the third effect is started in the variable display of the specific symbol on which the preceding effect is performed. If it is done, it can enhance the interest. On the other hand, if the third effect is not started, neither the first effect nor the second effect shifts to the effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from inciting the gambling spirit of the player.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

[8-4. Appendix 4]
The pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 4 has the following features.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the start information is acquired, and the acquired start information (for example, various random numbers) can be held up to a predetermined number of holding means (for example, the main CPU 201 that processes S395 or S402).
When the variable start condition is satisfied, the start information held by the holding means is used to perform a lottery including a special result (for example, a big hit), a specific result (for example, a time saving hit), and a loss in the lottery result. The lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) and
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the symbol is variablely displayed in a predetermined display area (for example, special symbol display units 163, 164), and the symbol control means (for example, special) is controlled so that the result of the lottery is derived. Main CPU201) that performs the symbol variable display end processing (S94),
When the variable display of the symbol is performed and the special stop mode (for example, the display mode of the jackpot) showing the special result is derived, the special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed is performed. Special game state control means that can be transferred to
When the variable display of the symbol is performed and the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode per time reduction) indicating the specific result is derived, the game state in which the variable display of the symbol is performed is higher than the normal gaming state. A specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) capable of shifting to an advantageous specific game state, and
The effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls the effect to be performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbol in a predetermined effect area (for example, the display area 7a of the display device 7).
Prior to the lottery by the lottery means, a preceding determination means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a look-ahead determination process (S396)) capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance,
A predecessor effect control means (for example, a sub) that controls so that a predecessor effect (for example, a look-ahead effect) is performed in a predetermined effect area prior to the variable display of the symbol based on the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means. CPU301) and
Equipped with
The preceding effect control means is
It is characterized in that the preceding effect can be performed when the special stop mode or the specific stop mode may be derived.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a specific stopping mode indicating a specific result is derived, the effect and the preceding effect are performed on the gaming machine controlled to the specific gaming state, which is a new game that has never existed before. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine having sex.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The preceding effect control means is
When the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for the time reduction) can be derived, the specific stop mode (for example, the display for the time reduction) is displayed. While it is possible to control to perform a specific preceding effect (for example, display of a time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form) suggesting that an aspect) may be derived.
Even if the specific start information is included in the start information held by the hold means, the special stop mode (for example, the special stop mode) is used as the start information in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied before the specific start information. When the special start information to which the display mode) can be derived is included, it is possible to control so that the advance effect (for example, the look-ahead effect) for the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived is reserved, if the special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived is reserved first, No advance production of specific start information is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest by performing an effective preceding effect while eliminating as much as possible the preceding effect that may become unnecessary.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The preceding effect control means is
When the start information held by the holding means includes special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived, the special stop mode (for example, a jackpot display mode) may be derived. It is possible to control so that a special advance effect (for example, display of a jackpot type look-ahead effect form) that suggests that is performed is performed.
Even when the start information held by the hold means does not include the special start information, it is possible to control so that the special advance effect is performed.
When the special preceding effect is performed even though the start information held by the hold means does not include the special start information, the start information held by the hold means includes the specific stop mode. Even if the specific start information that can be derived is included, it is possible to control so that the preceding effect of the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the special advance effect is performed even though the special start information is not reserved, the advance effect for the specific start information is performed even if the specific start information is reserved. Is not performed, so it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. That is, if the special advance effect is performed even though the special start information is not reserved, the player may be discouraged when the special stop mode is not derived. In such a case, even if the specific start information is reserved, by not performing the preceding effect on the specific start information, the specific stop mode is derived after the player is once discouraged. It will be possible to enhance the interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The preceding effect control means is
Even if the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived in the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, the specific start is included. It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the preceding effect of information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, even if the specific start information is reserved, the advance effect of the specific start information is not performed during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived. Therefore, it is possible to avoid performing the preceding production that may be unnecessary as much as possible. That is, since the player's interest is attracted to the effect during the variable display during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, even if the advance effect for the specific start information is performed, the effect may be useless. Therefore, during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, the preceding effect of the specific start information is not performed.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
In the specific gaming state,
The first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving game state) in which the first specific control (for example, the time saving control in the time saving performance in the A time saving game state) can be executed, and
A second specific gaming state (for example, a C time saving game state) capable of executing a second specific control different from the first specific control (for example, a time saving control in a time saving performance in a C time saving gaming state) is included. Ori,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state) after the end of the special gaming state.
When the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state).
When the special stop mode is derived, the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, and after the end of the special gaming state, the said In the case of shifting to the first specific gaming state, even if the specific stop mode is derived by satisfying the fluctuation start condition for the specific start information, the first specific control is not executed. It is characterized by being able to execute specific control.

Even if the specific start information is reserved when the special stop mode is derived, the gaming machine of the above (5) is transferred to the first specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the specific start information. Even if the variable display of the above is performed and the specific stop mode is derived, the first specific control is executed without executing the second specific control. As a result, it is possible to prevent the merit obtained by the player from the derivation of the special stop mode from being impaired.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above.
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state) after the end of the special gaming state.
The preceding effect control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, and after the end of the special gaming state, the specific stop mode is specified. When controlled to the gaming state, it is possible to control so that the preceding effect of the specific start information is not performed.

Even if the specific start information is reserved when the special stop mode is derived, the gaming machine of the above (6) has the specific start information when it is controlled to the specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. This is to prevent the preceding production from being performed. This makes it possible to prevent the necessary advance staging from being performed.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, even if the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, after the end of the special gaming state, the said It is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to shift to the specific gaming state based on the specific start information.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, when the special stop mode is derived, even if the specific start information is reserved, the pachinko machine does not shift to the specific gaming state based on the specific start information after the end of the special gaming state. Therefore, for example, when the special gaming state is controlled based on the derivation of the special stop mode, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state based on this.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The preceding effect control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, even if the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, after the end of the special gaming state, the said It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the preceding effect of the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when the special stop mode is derived, even if the specific start information is reserved, the preceding effect that may be unnecessary is performed after the end of the special gaming state. Can be suppressed.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
The specific game state control means is
Even if the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived when the special stop mode is derived, after the end of the special gaming state, When the special stop mode is controlled to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a high probability gaming state) in which the expected value from which the special stop mode is derived is controlled, the specific stop mode is derived by satisfying the variation start condition for the specific start information. Even if it is done, it is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to shift to the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of the above (9), after the end of the special gaming state, the advantageous gaming state (for example, the highly reliable gaming state) having a high expected value from which the special stop mode is derived has priority over the specific gaming state. Since it is controlled, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
A counting means (for example, a ceiling counter) for counting the variable display number of the symbol is further provided.
The specific game state control means is
When the variable display number of the symbols counted by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, the ceiling value), it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state).
The preceding effect control means is
Even if the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, the variation start condition for the specific start information is prior to being satisfied. When the variable display number of the symbol counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times, it is possible to control so that the preceding effect of the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, even if the specific start information is reserved, the variable display number of the symbols counted by the counting means before the variable start condition for the specific start information is satisfied. When the specified number of times is reached, the game shifts to the specific gaming state before the specific display mode is derived. In such a case, even if the preceding effect for the specific start information is performed, the preceding effect may become an unnecessary advance effect. Therefore, by avoiding such a pre-production that may be unnecessary, the deterioration of the interest is suppressed.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
The result of the lottery further includes a special result (for example, a small hit) and
When the variable display of the symbol is performed and a special stop mode (for example, a display mode of a small hit) showing the special result is derived, a special game capable of shifting to a special gaming state in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed is possible. Further equipped with state control means,
The preceding effect control means is
The start information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived and special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived. Even if the variation start condition for the special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived is satisfied before the variation start condition is satisfied, the control is performed so that the preceding effect for the specific start information is performed. It is characterized by being possible.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, the specific start information and the special start information are reserved, and the change start condition for the special start information is satisfied before the change start condition for the specific start information. However, it has made it possible to perform a preliminary effect on specific start information. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above.
The result of the lottery further includes a special result (for example, a small hit) and
When the variable display of the symbol is performed and the special stop mode showing the special result is derived, the special gaming state in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed (for example, the small hit game state) can be entered. Further equipped with a control means (for example, main CPU 201),
The preceding effect control means is
In the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, when the start information held by the holding means includes the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, the specific start information is included. It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the preceding effect of is performed.

In the gaming machine of (12) above, when the specific start information is reserved during the variable display of the symbol from which the special stop mode is derived, the preceding effect for the specific start information is performed. .. This makes it possible to enhance the interest.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

[8-5. Appendix 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 5 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main CPU 201 that performs special symbol lottery means (for example, special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) that performs special symbol lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special start area (for example, start port switches 121, 141A, 141B). )When,
A special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of a special symbol in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived.
When the special stop mode (for example, the jackpot display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, the special gaming state control capable of controlling the special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed is performed. Means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) and
A specific game in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and the specific game can be controlled to a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. A state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs time saving management processing) and
A normal symbol lottery means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a variable display start process (S293) of a normal symbol) that performs a normal symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through a normal start area (for example, a passing gate switch 127).
With a normal symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a variable display end process (S294) of a normal symbol) that performs variable display of a normal symbol in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived. ,
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol lottery facilitating means (for example, opening the normal electric accessory) that facilitates the passage of the game ball to the special start area. Main CPU201) that performs processing (S296) and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is
At least one or more of the probability that the stop mode for hitting the normal symbol is derived, the degree of ease of passing the game ball to the special starting area, and the time during which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed is the normal. It is a gaming state in which a specific control different from the gaming state is executed.
A first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) that can be controlled until the first ending condition is satisfied, with the transition condition that the special stop mode is derived and the special gaming state ends.
The transition condition is that the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for hitting the time reduction) is derived by the symbol control means, and the second specific gaming state (for example, the C time reduction gaming state) that can be controlled until the second end condition is satisfied is satisfied. )When,
A transition condition is that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and at least two specific games are in a third specific game state (for example, a B time reduction game state) that can be controlled until the third end condition is satisfied. It is characterized by including a state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state on the condition that the specific stop mode is derived, and the variable display of the special symbol are performed a specified number of times. Since at least two specific gaming states are prepared among the third specific gaming states that are the transition conditions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gaming property that has never been seen before.

The specific control mode may be the same or the specific control mode may be different between the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state. Further, of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state, the specific control mode in the two specific gaming states is the same, and the specific control mode in the remaining one specific gaming state is. It may be different from the specific control mode in the above two specific gaming states.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) are
It is characterized in that the derivation probabilities of the stop mode per normal symbol are the same or substantially the same.

In the gaming machine of (2) above, the derivation probability of the normal symbol hit stop mode is the same or substantially the same in the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest regardless of whether the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state is controlled.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
In the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state), a plurality of different degrees of ease of passing the game ball to the special starting area, respectively. Passability patterns (for example, open patterns for ordinary electric accessories) are available.
The second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state are
It is characterized in that, in at least a part of the passage ease patterns among the plurality of pass ease patterns, the pass ease of the game ball to the special starting region is the same or substantially the same. ..

In the gaming machine of the above (3), the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state pass the gaming ball to the special starting area in at least a part of the passage ease patterns among the plurality of passage ease patterns. It is configured so that the degree of ease of is the same or substantially the same. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest regardless of whether the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state is controlled.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
In the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state), a plurality of time patterns in which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed have different times, respectively. It is prepared,
The second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state are
It is characterized in that, in at least a part of the plurality of time patterns, the time during which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed is the same or substantially the same.

In the gaming machine of (4) above, the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state have the same or abbreviated time during which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed in at least a part of the plurality of time patterns. It is configured to be the same. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest regardless of whether the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state is controlled.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The specific game state control means is
Even if the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode per time saving) is derived in the first specific gaming state, the time saving performance in the first specific gaming state corresponding to the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) is derived. ) Can be maintained.

Even if the specific stop mode is derived in the first specific gaming state, the gaming machine of (5) does not change to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state, and corresponds to the first specific gaming state. The first specific control can be maintained.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode per time reduction) is derived at a specific timing (for example, the time reduction final variation) in the first specific gaming state (for example, A time reduction gaming state), after the specific timing. (For example, the change following the time saving final change) is characterized in that the first specific control can be changed to the second specific control.

The gaming machine of (6) above is capable of changing from the first specific control to the second specific control after the specific timing when the specific stop mode is derived at the specific timing in the first specific gaming state. be.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The specific game state control means is
When the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, the time reduction final variation) in the first specific gaming state, the first specification is performed after the specific timing (for example, the next variation of the time reduction final variation). Both the first specific control corresponding to the gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state) and the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state) are performed. It is characterized by being controllable so that it does not exist.

In the gaming machine of (7) above, when the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the first specific gaming state, neither the first specific control nor the second specific control is performed after the specific timing. It is controllable. Controllable so that neither the first specific control nor the second specific control is performed corresponds to, for example, a control that ends the first specific control and does not start the second specific control.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The specific game state control means is
Even if the specific stop mode is derived in the third specific gaming state, the third specific control is not changed to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state). It is characterized in that the third specific control corresponding to the specific gaming state (for example, the time saving performance in the B time saving gaming state) can be maintained.

Even if the specific stop mode is derived in the third specific gaming state, the gaming machine of (8) does not change to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific gaming state, and corresponds to the third specific gaming state. The third specific control can be maintained.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, time reduction final variation) in the third specific gaming state (for example, B time reduction game state), after the specific timing (for example, the next of the time reduction final variation). The third specific control (for example, the time saving performance in the B time saving gaming state) can be changed to the second specific control (for example, the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state).

The gaming machine of (9) above is capable of changing from the third specific control to the second specific control after the specific timing when the specific stop mode is derived at the specific timing in the third specific gaming state. be.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The specific control mode may be different between the second specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, the B time saving gaming state).

The gaming machine of (10) is configured so that the mode of specific control differs between the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state. As a result, the variation of the game increases, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
The specific game state control means is
When the transition condition to the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state) and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) are satisfied, or the first specific gaming state. When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied in
The larger of the variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the first end condition is satisfied and the variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the second end condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the specific gaming state can be controlled until the special symbol is variably displayed.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, when the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state overlap, the variable display number of special symbols that can be executed until the first end condition is satisfied and the second end condition are Of the variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the establishment, it is possible to control the specific gaming state until the variable display of the special symbol is performed over the larger variable display number.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above.
The specific game state control means is
When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) and the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) are satisfied, or the third specific gaming state. When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied in
The larger of the variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the second end condition is satisfied and the variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the third end condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the specific gaming state can be controlled until the special symbol is variably displayed.

In the gaming machine of (12) above, when the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state overlap, the variable display number of special symbols that can be executed until the second end condition is satisfied and the third end condition are Of the variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the establishment, it is possible to control the specific gaming state until the variable display of the special symbol is performed over the larger variable display number.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), (11), and (12) above.
A counting means capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol is provided.
The counting means is
When the transition condition to the other specific gaming state is satisfied in any one of the at least two specific gaming states, or the transition condition to the one specific gaming state and the other specific gaming state. If the transition conditions to
The variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, and the variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of the other specific game state is satisfied. It is characterized in that both of them can be counted.

In the gaming machine of (13) above, when the transition condition to the other specific gaming state is satisfied in any one specific gaming state, or the transition condition to one specific gaming state and the transition to the other specific gaming state. When the condition is satisfied, the variable display number of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of one specific gaming state is satisfied, and the variable number of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of the other specific gaming state is satisfied. Both the number of impressions and the number of impressions can be counted.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above.
When the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied, the end condition setting means (for example, S235, S237, S238) capable of setting the variable display number of the special symbol is processed as the end condition of the corresponding specific gaming state. Equipped with main CPU201)
The end condition setting means is
The case where the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state) is satisfied and the case where the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, the B time saving gaming state) are satisfied are satisfied. It is characterized in that a different number of times can be set as the variable display number of special symbols (for example, the number of time reductions).

The gaming machine of the above (14) has a different number of times as the variable display number of the special symbol depending on whether the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied and the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is configurable.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (14) above.
In the first specific gaming state,
It is characterized in that the derivation probability of the stop mode per normal symbol is higher than that of either the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state.

In the first specific gaming state, the gaming machine according to (15) has a higher probability of deriving the normal symbol hit stop mode than in either the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state. Thereby, the first specific gaming state can be positioned as a specific gaming state that is more advantageous than the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above.
A counting means (for example, a time saving counter update process) capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped is provided.
The specific game state control means is
When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) and the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) are satisfied, the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is characterized by being controllable.

The gaming machine according to (16) can be controlled to the third specific gaming state when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state and the transition condition to the third specific gaming state are satisfied.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above.
A counting means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a time reduction counter update process) capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped is provided.
The specific game state control means is
When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, the transition to the second specific gaming state is possible even if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied.

When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, the gaming machine of the above (17) can shift to the second specific gaming state even if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is a thing.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above.
A counting means (for example, a time saving counter update process) capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped is provided.
The specific game state control means is
In the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied (for example, the variable display of the special symbol in the number of ceilings), the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied (for example, the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied. For example, when the specific stop mode is not derived), it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state without confirming that the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied. do.

The gaming machine of the above (18) shifts to the second specific gaming state when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied in the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state without confirming that the transition condition of is not satisfied.

(19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above.
A counting means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a time reduction counter update process) capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped is provided.
The specific game state control means is
In the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied (for example, the variable display of the special symbol in the number of ceilings), the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied (for example, the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied. For example, when the specific stop mode is not derived), it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state after confirming that the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied. do.

The gaming machine of the above (19) shifts to the second specific gaming state when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is not satisfied in the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. After confirming that the transition condition of the above is not satisfied, it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

(20) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), (15), and (16) above.
When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time reduction) or the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time reduction) is satisfied, the transition to the specific gaming state is established. Equipped with a means of establishing a flag,
The specific game state control means is
When the transition flag is satisfied, the transition to the specific gaming state is possible.

The gaming machine of the above (20) shifts to the second specific gaming state when the transition condition of the second specific gaming state is satisfied, and shifts to the third specific gaming state when the transition condition of the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is intended to be migrated.

(21) In the gaming machine of (20) above,
The means for establishing the transition flag is
When the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time reduction) is satisfied, the second transition flag is established, and when the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time reduction) is satisfied, the transition condition is satisfied. It establishes the third flag,
The specific game state control means is
When the second transition flag is established, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state, and when the third transition flag is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of the above (21) establishes the second transition flag when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, and sets the third transition flag when the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is to be established, that is, to establish a separate flag.

(22) In the gaming machine of (21) above,
A counting means capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started is provided.
The specific game state control means is
When both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are satisfied (for example, when S203 in FIG. 38 is YES determination), it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state (for example, the B time saving gaming state). It is characterized by being.

In the gaming machine of the above (22), when both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are satisfied, the transition to the third specific gaming state is prioritized.

(23) In the gaming machine of (21) above,
A counting means capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started is provided.
The specific game state control means is
When both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are satisfied, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state).

In the gaming machine of (23) above, when both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are satisfied, the transition to the second specific gaming state is prioritized.

(24) In the gaming machine of (20) above,
The means for establishing the transition flag is
It is used when the transition condition to the second specific gaming state (for example, C time saving gaming state) is satisfied and when the transition condition to the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state) is satisfied. It is characterized in that a common transition flag (for example, a time saving transition flag) is established.

The gaming machine of (24) is configured to establish a common transition flag that is commonly used when the transition condition of the second specific gaming state and the transition condition to the third specific gaming state are satisfied. be.

(25) In the gaming machine of (24) above,
A counting means capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started is provided.
The specific game state control means is
When the common transition flag is satisfied, if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied, the third specific gaming state is satisfied even if the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied. It is characterized by being able to migrate to.

When the common transition flag is satisfied, the gaming machine of the above (25) shifts to the third specific gaming state rather than the transition to the second specific gaming state if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is intended to give priority to the transition of.

(26) In the gaming machine of (24) above,
A counting means capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started is provided.
The specific game state control means is
When the common transition flag is satisfied, if the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, the second specific gaming state is satisfied even if the transition condition to the third specific gaming state is satisfied. It is characterized by being able to migrate to.

When the common transition flag is satisfied, the gaming machine of the above (26) shifts to the second specific gaming state rather than the transition to the third specific gaming state if the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied. It is intended to give priority to the transition of.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

[8-6. Appendix 6]
The pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 6 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 201 for performing a special symbol variable display start process (S93)).
A special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of a special symbol in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the lottery is derived.
When the special stop mode is derived by the special symbol control means, the special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can control the special gaming state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, and
A counting means capable of counting the variable display number of the special symbol (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the ceiling counter update process) when the special gaming state is not reached.
A game state control means that can control the game state in which the special symbol is variablely displayed (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol management process).
The main control means (for example, the main control circuit 200) is provided.
The game state control means is
As a gaming state in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed,
Normal game state and
A plurality of games including a specific game state (for example, a C time saving game state) which can be controlled on the condition that the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times as a transition condition and is more advantageous than the normal game state. It is characterized by being able to control any of the states.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when it is not in the special gaming state, the variable display number of the special symbol is counted, and it is possible to control the specific gaming state with the transition condition that the counted number reaches the specified number of times. It will be possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability that has never been seen before.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The plurality of gaming states controlled by the gaming state control means include
A gaming state in which the variable display count of the special symbol is counted by the counting means (for example, a gaming state in which the probability variation flag is off) and a gaming state in which the variable display count of the special symbol is not counted by the counting means (for example, probability variation). The game state with the flag on) and is included.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the gaming state counted by the counting means and the gaming state not counted are included. This expands the range of games and makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The plurality of gaming states controlled by the gaming state control means include
As the game state in which the variable display number of the special symbol is counted by the counting means, the normal game state, the specific game state (for example, the B time reduction game state), and the probability that the special stop mode is derived are said. A normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state higher than the specific gaming state (for example, a high probability gaming state) are included.
The game state control means
When the variable display number of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times when it is not controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it can be controlled to the specific gaming state.
When controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it is possible not to control to the specific gaming state even if the variable display number of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times.

In the gaming machine of (3) above, counting is performed by the counting means in any of the normal gaming state, the specific gaming state, and the advantageous gaming state. However, if it is not controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it can be controlled to the specific gaming state when the variable display number of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times, but if it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the variable display number of the special symbol is the specified number of times. It is possible not to control to a specific gaming state even if it reaches.

The above-mentioned "case not controlled by the advantageous gaming state" corresponds to, for example, a case where the variable display number of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number without being controlled by the advantageous gaming state even once. Further, the above-mentioned "when controlled to the advantageous gaming state" means, for example, when the ST machine or the specification for performing a probabilistic fall lottery is controlled to the normal gaming state after the advantageous gaming state is completed. Equivalent to.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
As information related to the progress of the game, a storage means (for example, main RAM 203) that can store information including the number of times information counted by the counting means, and
An information erasing operation means (for example, backup clear switch 176) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the storage means, and
The number of times counted by the counting means stored in the storage means separately from when the special gaming state is controlled or when the special gaming state ends and when the information erasing operation means is operated. A counting initialization operation means capable of initializing information (for example, a setting key 174 as a switch different from the backup clear switch 176, a dedicated switch, etc.) and
It is characterized by having.

The gaming machine of the above (4) initially inputs the number of times information counted by the counting means separately from the time when the special gaming state is controlled or the special gaming state ends and the information erasing operation means is operated. It is provided with a counting initialization operation means that can be converted.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
When the counting initialization operation means (for example, the setting key 1174 for changing the setting) is operated, the information erasing means capable of erasing the information stored in the storage means (for example, the main processing of S361) is performed. It is characterized by having a CPU 201).

The gaming machine of the above (5) is capable of erasing the information stored in the storage means when the counting initialization operation means is operated.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
When the special stop mode (for example, the display mode of the small hit) is derived by the special symbol control means, the special game state (for example, the special game state in which the special symbol is not variablely displayed) is not performed as a game state different from the special game state (for example). , A special game state control means that can be controlled to a small hit game state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145),
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls the effect so that the effect is performed in a predetermined effect area.
Equipped with
The staging control means
When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied, the special stop mode is derived rather than the special effect suggesting that the special stop mode is derived. It is characterized in that it is possible to control so that the transition effect suggesting that the transition condition of is satisfied is given priority.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied, the special effect suggesting that the special stop mode is derived is better than the special effect. It is controlled so that the transition effect suggesting that the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied is given priority.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
When the special stop mode (for example, the display mode of the small hit) is derived by the special symbol control means, the special game state (for example, the special game state in which the special symbol is not variablely displayed) is not performed as a game state different from the special game state (for example). , A special game state control means that can be controlled to a small hit game state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145),
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls the effect so that the effect is performed in a predetermined effect area.
Equipped with
The staging control means
When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied, the special transition effect suggesting that the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied is more important. It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that the special effect suggesting that the stop mode is derived is given priority.

In the gaming machine of (7) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol in which the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied, the transition effect suggesting that the transition condition to the specific gaming state is satisfied. Rather, it is controlled so that the special effect suggesting that the special stop mode is derived is given priority.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The counting means can count the variable display number of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and can also count the variable display number of the special symbol.
The special symbol includes a first special symbol and a second special symbol.
The lottery means
A first special symbol lottery means for performing a first special symbol lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first special start area (for example, the first start port switch 121).
A second special symbol lottery means for performing a second special symbol lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second special start area (for example, the second start port switches 141A and 141B).
Have,
The special symbol control means is
The main CPU 201 that performs the variable display of the first special symbol and performs the first special symbol control means (for example, the first special symbol variable display end process (S94)) for controlling the result of the first special symbol lottery to be derived. )When,
Main CPU 201 that performs a second special symbol control means (for example, a second special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. )When,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the expected value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol per unit time and the unit time. The expected value of one of the expected values of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol per unit is configured to be larger than the expected value of the other.
The game state control means
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times (for example, the ceiling value), when the variable display of the special symbol when the specified number of times is reached is started, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state. It is characterized by being.

The gaming machine of (8) above can perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and also has an expected value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol per unit time. In a gaming machine configured so that the expected value of one of the expected values of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the other, the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times. In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol when the specified number of times is reached is started, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the delay in the transition timing to the specific gaming state.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
When the special stop mode (for example, the display mode of the small hit) is derived by the special symbol control means, the special game state (for example, the special game state in which the special symbol is not variablely displayed) is not performed as a game state different from the special game state (for example). , A special game state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs processing of S145) that can be controlled in a small hit game state) is provided.
The game state control means is
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times (for example, the ceiling value), the variable display of the special symbol when the specified number of times is reached is started until the result of the lottery is derived. While it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state during
Even if the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times, if the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol when the specified number of times is reached, after the end of the special gaming state. It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state.

When the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times, the gaming machine of the above (9) can shift to the specific gaming state by the time the result of the lottery is derived, while the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times. When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol at the time, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
The game state control means
As a gaming state in which the special symbol is variablely displayed, the probability that the special stop mode is derived when the special symbol is variablely displayed is higher than in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. It can be controlled to a state (for example, a high-probability gaming state), and
The gaming machine is
In the advantageous gaming state, the fall lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201) capable of performing a fall lottery as to whether or not to end the advantageous gaming state is provided.
The counting means is
When the advantageous gaming state ends as a result of the fall lottery without counting the variable display number of the special symbol in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to start counting the variable display number of the special symbol. It is characterized by.

The gaming machine of (10) above does not count the variable display number of the special symbol in the advantageous gaming state, and starts counting the variable display number of the special symbol when the advantageous gaming state ends as a result of the fall lottery. It is possible.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
The probability that the special stop mode is derived can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values of 6 stages from setting 1 to setting 6), and the probability corresponding to the set set value is set. A gaming machine in which the lottery is performed so that the special stop mode is derived.
The specified number of times is a value obtained by multiplying a specified value within a predetermined range of the denominator of the probability (for example, within a range of 2.5 to 3.0 times) by the denominator of the probability.
The specified value is characterized in that it differs depending on the set value so that the specified number of times is the same or substantially the same regardless of which of the set values is set among the plurality of set values. do.

The gaming machine of (11) above can be set to any of a plurality of set values having different probabilities for deriving the special stop mode, and the special stop mode is derived with a probability corresponding to the set set value. It is a gaming machine where a lottery is held. The specified number of times is a value obtained by multiplying a specified value within a predetermined range of the denominator of the probability that the special stop mode is derived by the denominator of the probability that the special stop mode is derived. The specified value differs depending on the set value so that the specified number of times is the same or substantially the same regardless of which of the set values is set among the plurality of set values. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the set value to be detected based on the specified number of times, which is the condition for shifting to the specific gaming state.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 6, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

[8-7. Appendix 7]
The pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 7 has the following features.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a special symbol lottery means capable of performing a special symbol lottery (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display start process (S93)) and
A special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display end process (S94)) that performs variable display of a special symbol and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived.
When the special stop mode (for example, the jackpot display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, the special gaming state control that can be controlled to the special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed is performed. Means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) and
A game state control means that can control the game state in which the special symbol is variablely displayed (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol management process).
An effect control means that can control the display effect so that the display effect is performed in a predetermined display effect area (for example, a sub CPU 301 that performs an effect mode determination process (S504)).
Equipped with
The game state control means
Normal game state and
A plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, a B time saving gaming state) which is a gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state and in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times as a transition condition. Can be controlled by any of
The staging control means
In the variable display (for example, the final ceiling fluctuation) before the variable display of the special symbol of the specified number of times, the game progress effect (for example, shutter closing effect, right-handed navigation effect, night mode display effect) related to the progress of the game is performed. It is characterized by being controllable to be initiated.

The above-mentioned gaming machine (1) has a new playability that has never been seen before, such as making it possible to perform a game progress effect related to the progress of a game in the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol of the specified number of times. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine to be equipped.

In addition, "in the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol of the specified number of times, the game progress effect related to the progress of the game is started" means that the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is started. Not only the game progress effect is performed in, but also the game progress effect is performed after that (for example, the variable display of the special symbol at the specified number of times).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special symbol includes one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) and another special symbol (for example, the second special symbol).
The special symbol lottery means is
One special symbol lottery means for performing a special symbol lottery for the one special symbol (for example, the main CPU 201 for performing the first special symbol hit determination process (S104)) and the special symbol lottery for the other special symbol. It has another special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the second special symbol hit determination process (S104)).
The special symbol control means is
With one special symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing of the first special symbol) that variablely displays the one special symbol and controls so that the result of the one special symbol lottery is derived. ,
With other special symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the special symbol management process of the second special symbol) that variablely displays the other special symbol and controls so that the result of the other special symbol lottery is derived. ,
And, even if one of the one special symbol and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the other can be variably displayed.
The gaming machine is
When another condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied, the ordinary symbol lottery means for performing the ordinary symbol lottery (for example, the main CPU 201 for performing the variable display start processing (S293) of the ordinary symbol).
A normal symbol control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a variable display end process (S294) of a normal symbol) that performs variable display of a normal symbol and controls so that the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived.
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol lottery facilitating means (for example, a normal electric combination) that makes it possible to increase the execution frequency of the other special symbol lottery. Main CPU201) that performs object release processing (S296) and
Further prepare
The staging control means
It is possible to perform a first display effect associated with the variable display of the one special symbol or a second display effect associated with the variable display of the other special symbol.
Before the transition to the specific gaming state, the first display effect is prioritized over the second display effect, while the first display effect is prioritized.
After the transition to the specific gaming state, the first display effect can be performed so that the execution frequency is lower than that before the transition to the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of (2) above is a gaming machine in which one special symbol and another special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, and the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times before the transition to the specific gaming state. Until then, the first display effect is displayed along with the variable display of one special symbol, and after the transition to the specific gaming state, the display frequency of the first display effect is reduced.

After the transition to the specific gaming state, it is preferable that the second display effect (for example, the night mode display effect) associated with the variable display of other special symbols is displayed with priority over the first display effect.

Further, "the first display effect is performed so that the execution frequency is lower than before the transition to the specific game state" means that the execution frequency of the first display effect is lower than that before the transition to the specific game state. The purpose is to include not only the case where the value is lowered, but also the mode in which the first display effect is not displayed at all after the transition to the specific gaming state.

Further, the special symbol lottery facilitation means makes it possible to increase the execution frequency of other special symbol lottery, but a plurality of execution opportunities for other special symbol lottery are provided (for example, a second start port is provided). (Providing a plurality of them), the frequency of executing the other special symbol lottery may be increased by the special symbol lottery facilitation means for only one of them.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The staging control means
When the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is the variable display of the one special symbol, the first display effect can be performed until the second display effect is started. (For example, the second normal pattern)
It is characterized by that.

When the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is the variable display of one special symbol, the gaming machine of the above (3) performs the first display effect until the second display effect is started. It made it possible.

As a mode in which the first display effect is performed until the second display effect is started, for example, a mode in which the first display effect is loop-displayed corresponds to.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game state control means
It is possible to control the specific gaming state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
The staging control means
When the first variable display of the special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up effect for displaying the number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state). It is possible to do
If the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is completed before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent special symbols after the transition to the specific gaming state are completed. It is possible to perform the third display effect when the variable display is completed or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (for example, the second normal pattern).
It is characterized by that.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (2) or (3) above.
The game state control means
It is possible to control the specific gaming state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
The staging control means
When the first variable display of the special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up effect for displaying the number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state). It is possible to do
If the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is completed before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent special symbols after the transition to the specific gaming state are completed. It is possible to perform the third display effect when the variable display is completed or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (for example, the second normal pattern).
It is characterized by that.

The gaming machines (4) and (5) above can perform a third display effect related to the end condition of the specific gaming state when the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is completed. It is the one that was made. In such a gaming machine, if the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is completed before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The third display effect is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is completed or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed.

The above (4) can also be paraphrased as follows in the gaming machine described in the above (1). Similarly, the above (5) can be paraphrased as follows in the gaming machine according to the above (2) or (3).
The game state control means is
It is possible to control the specific gaming state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
The staging control means
When the first variable display of the other special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined ending condition (for example, a count-up for displaying the number of time reductions in the B time saving game state). It is possible to perform (directing),
The first variable display of the special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is the variable display of the one special symbol, and at the end of the variable display of the one special symbol, the other special symbol is in the variable display. In some cases or when the variable display of the other special symbol is not performed, when the variable display of the other special symbol after the variable display of the other special symbol is completed or the variable display of the other special symbol is performed, the variable display of the other special symbol is performed. It may be characterized in that the third display effect can be performed when it is not used.

(6) In the gaming machine according to (2), (3) or (5) above.
The staging control means
The first variable display of the special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is the variable display of the other special symbol, and the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol. When the variable display of the one special symbol ends, the first display effect can be performed when the variable display of the one special symbol ends (for example, the first irregular pattern).
It is characterized by that.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is the variable display of another special symbol, and the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols. When the variable display of one special symbol ends during the variable display of the special symbol, it is possible to perform the first display effect when the variable display of one special symbol ends.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
The staging control means
The game progress effect can be displayed at the start of the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol, which is the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific game state. (For example, the first irregular pattern)
It is characterized by that.

The gaming machine of the above (7) is a game at the start of the variable display of another special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol which is the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state. It is possible to display the progress effect.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (7) above,
The staging control means
During the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol, which is the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state, the variable display of the one special symbol is displayed. Even when the reach effect is performed as the first display effect associated with the variable display of the one special symbol, the game progress effect (for example, a right-handed small navigation effect) can be displayed (for example). , 1st irregular pattern)
It is characterized by that.

The gaming machine of the above (8) is one special during the variable display of other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols which is the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state. When the variable display of the symbol is performed and the reach effect is performed as the first display effect accompanying the variable display of one special symbol, the game progress effect (for example, the right-handed small navigation effect) can be displayed.

In addition, "the game progress effect can be displayed" is not limited to displaying all of the game progress effect described in (1) above, and only a part of the game progress effect described in (1) above. Is also included.

(9) In the gaming machine according to (2) or 3 above.
The staging control means
The first variable display of the special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is the variable display of the other special symbol, and the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol. When the variable display of the above-mentioned one special symbol is not performed, it is possible not to perform a part of the game progress effect (for example, a third irregular pattern).
It is characterized by that.

In the gaming machine of (9) above, the variable display of the first special symbol after the transition to the specific gaming state is the variable display of another special symbol, and the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols. When the variable display of one special symbol is not performed during the variable display of the special symbol, the second display effect is performed without performing the first display effect.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2), (3), and (5) to (9) above.
The ordinary symbol control means is
The variable display of the normal symbol is performed with a short-normal symbol variable display mode (for example, the normal symbol variation pattern “02H” in FIG. 231) in which the expected value of the variable display number of the normal symbol performed per unit time is relatively large. , A plurality of normal symbols including at least a long normal symbol variable display mode (for example, the normal symbol variation pattern “05H” in FIG. 231) in which the expected value of the variable display number of the normal symbols performed per unit time is relatively small. It is possible to do it in any of the variable display modes in the figure.
Before the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, the time saving flag = 0 shown in FIG. 231), the variable display of the normal symbol in the long-form diagram variable display mode is displayed after the transition to the specific gaming state (for example,). , The time saving flag = 1) shown in FIG. 231 can be performed at a different frequency.

The gaming machine of the above (10) makes it possible to perform variable display of a normal symbol in a variable display mode of a long-form figure at a different frequency than after the transition to the specific gaming state before the transition to the specific gaming state. It is a thing.

The "frequency different from that after the transition to the specific gaming state" may be performed at a higher frequency than after the transition to the specific gaming state, or a lower frequency (probability) than after the transition to the specific gaming state. (Including 0) may be used.

In addition, "Before the transition to the specific gaming state, the variable display of the normal symbol in the variable display mode of the long-form map is performed at a different frequency than after the transition to the specific gaming state" means before the transition to the specific gaming state. Also includes a mode in which the variable display of a normal symbol is not performed at all in the variable display mode of the long-form map. Here, "do not perform at all" may be either a case where the probability of the lottery is 0 or a case where the lottery result is discarded.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2), (3), and (5) to (10) above.
The other special symbol control means is
The variable display of the other special symbol is performed in a short special symbol variable display mode (for example, variation of the special symbol for high start) in which the expected value of the variable display number of the other special symbol performed per unit time is relatively large. (Pattern) and a long special symbol variable display mode (for example, a variation pattern of a special symbol for a low start) in which the expected value of the variable display number of the other special symbols performed per unit time is relatively small. It can be performed in any of a plurality of variable display modes including the special figure.
The probability that the special stop mode (for example, the jackpot display mode) is derived is the same before and after the transition to the specific gaming state, but before the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is reached. It is possible to perform the variable display of the other special symbol in the long special symbol variable display mode with a higher frequency than after the transition of the above (for example, the second irregular pattern).
It is characterized by that.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, the probability that the special stop mode is derived is the same before and after the transition to the specific gaming state, but before the transition to the specific gaming state, the transition to the specific gaming state occurs. It is possible to perform variable display of other special symbols in the long special symbol variable display mode more frequently than later.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above.
The staging control means
It is possible to perform a normal effect that can be displayed in the normal game state and a specific effect that can be displayed in the specific game state.
It has a count effect control means capable of performing a count effect capable of grasping the variable display number of the special symbol performed until the normal effect is switched to the specific effect.
The count effect control means is
When shifting from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, the variable display number of the special symbol performed until the normal effect is switched to the specific effect can be reset and displayed.

The gaming machine according to (12) can reset and display the variable display number of special symbols performed until the normal effect is switched to the specific effect when the normal game state is changed to the specific game state.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 7, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

[8-8. Appendix 8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to perform various effects is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-221523).

The inventor of the present invention has come up with the idea that, in the process of diligently studying various effects performed on a gaming machine, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the development of the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In this respect, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has the following features.

(A-1) A staging execution means capable of performing a staging,
It is provided with an icon display means capable of displaying an icon (“bell” icon, “watermelon” icon, “cherry” icon, etc.) in the effect executed by the effect execution means.
The icon display means are of the same system as each other when the first effect (first notice effect) is executed by the effect execution means and when the second effect (second notice effect) is executed. It is possible to display an icon ("bell" icon),
The effect executing means differs from each other after the display of the icon, depending on whether the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. It is possible to perform the production,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first effect (first notice effect) is executed and when the second effect (second notice effect) is executed, the icons of the same system are used for each other. ("Bell" icon) can be displayed. Then, when the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), and the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system in the second effect (second notice effect). ) Is displayed, and after the icon (“bell” icon) is displayed, different effects can be executed. As a result, while giving variations to the effects performed before and after the icons are displayed, by making the icons displayed between those effects the same system, it is easy for the player to understand the development of the effects. can do. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

As described in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, as the icon in the present invention, it is possible to appropriately adopt an icon composed of characters, figures, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof and the like. "Icons of the same type" means that at least a part of characters, figures, symbols, and colors is the same in one icon and another icon. For example, when the "X" icon confirmed image 9051 (see FIG. 162 (b)) is adopted as an icon, the first effect (first notice effect) is executed and the second effect (second notice effect) is executed. ) May be displayed, the exact same "X" icon confirmed image 9051 may be displayed, or "X" when the first effect (first notice effect) is executed. When the "X" icon confirmed image 9051 in which the character of is the first color (for example, blue) is displayed and the second effect (second notice effect) is executed, the character "X" is displayed. The “X” icon confirmed image 9051, which is the second color (for example, red), may be displayed. Further, when the first effect (first notice effect) is executed, the "X" icon confirmed image 9051 in which the character "X" is a predetermined color (for example, yellow) is displayed, and the second effect is displayed. When the effect of (second notice effect) is executed, the "Y" icon confirmed image 9052 (FIG. 162 (FIG. 162)) in which the character "Y" is the same color as the character "X" (for example, yellow). c) See) may be displayed.

In the fifth pachinko machine, various icons (“bell” icon, “watermelon” icon, “cherry” icon, first specific icon, second specific icon, and third specific icon) are various. In the jackpot notice effect (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect), it is displayed as "icons of the same system". For example, the various icons (“bell” icon, “watermelon” icon, “cherry” icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon) displayed in the first effect (first notice effect) are each. With various icons ("bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon) displayed in the second effect (second notice effect) and "same system" be.

(A-2) The gaming machine of the above (A-1).
The effect executing means is common to the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect (FIG. 144). After executing the effect number "91" or "92" corresponding to the icon stop notice), it is possible to execute the different effects.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the same system icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect) and the same in the second effect (second notice effect). It is possible to execute a common effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) when the system icon ("bell" icon) is displayed. It is configured in. This makes it easier for the player to understand the progress of the effect through a common effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144). It can be made easier to understand. Further, as the data for the effect performed when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, the data for the first effect (first notice effect) and the second effect (second notice effect). Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the staging, the staging control can be simplified.

(A-3) The gaming machine according to (A-1) or (A-2).
In the effect executing means, a first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed as an icon of the same system, and a second icon (“watermelon” icon) different from the first icon is displayed. It is possible to execute a common effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144).
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko machine, the case where the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed as an icon of the same system and the second icon (“bell” icon) different from the first icon (“bell” icon) It is configured so that it is possible to execute a common effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) when the "watermelon" icon) is displayed. There is. This makes it easier for the player to understand the progress of the effect through a common effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144). It can be made easier to understand. Further, as the data for the effect performed when the icon is displayed, both the data for the first icon (“bell” icon) and the data for the second icon (“watermelon” icon) are stored. Since it is not necessary to keep it, the effect control can be simplified.

It should be noted that "common" is a concept that can be paraphrased as "same type" as in the above-mentioned "same system", and one effect and the other effect do not have to be exactly the same. As long as the same element is included in at least a part of one production and the other production, these productions can be said to be common productions. For example, if the basic landscape is the same in the background image displayed in one effect and the background image displayed in the other effect, even if a part of the landscape is slightly different, these background images May be considered "common".

(A-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-3).
Movable members and
With advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means (sub-control circuit 300 for performing the effect shown in FIG. 160) is expected to perform the advantageous control throughout the operation time of the movable member when the icon of the same system is displayed. It is possible to suggest,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when an icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, it suggests the degree of expectation that control that is advantageous to the player will be performed throughout the operating time of the movable member. It is configured to be possible. This makes it possible to raise the player's interest in displaying the icon of the same system (“bell” icon), and from the display of the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) to the operation of the movable member. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the production.

(A-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-4).
Movable members and
With advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means is
A notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the first specific effect (effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) performed when the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed as the icon of the same system. ), While it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed through the operating time of the movable member, a third icon (“cherry” icon) different from the first icon. In the second specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93" shown in FIG. 144), which is performed when is displayed, the control for operating the movable member is not performed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the first specific effect (effect number "91" or "effect number" 91 "shown in FIG. 144) is performed when the first icon ("bell" icon) is displayed as an icon of the same system. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to "92"), it is configured so that it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the control advantageous to the player is performed through the operation time of the movable member. This makes it possible to raise the player's interest in displaying the icon of the same system (“bell” icon), and from the display of the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) to the operation of the movable member. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the production. On the other hand, it corresponds to the second specific effect (effect number "93" shown in FIG. 144) performed when a third icon (“cherry” icon) different from the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed. In the notice after the icon is stopped), it is configured not to control the operation of the movable member. In this way, by making the presence or absence of the movement of the movable member different depending on the type of the displayed icon, it is possible to associate the type of the displayed icon with the effect mode after the icon is displayed. It is possible to make it easier to understand the development of the effect after the icon is displayed.

The operation of the movable member may be started after the display of the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is completed, or the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) may be started while the operation of the movable member is being performed. The display of the "bell" icon) may be continued.

(A-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-5).
The effect executing means is
While it is possible to execute a specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect. , The specific effect can be executed even when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect.
In the second effect, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "16" shown in FIG. 135, which suggests that the icon of the same system is displayed before the icon of the same system is displayed. It is possible to execute (display icon suggestion items),
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the specific effect (effect number “91” shown in FIG. 144 or the effect number “91” or While it is possible to execute the icon corresponding to "92" (notice after stop of icon), it is also specified when the icon of the same system ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect). It is configured so that the effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) can be executed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the effect through the specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144), so that the development of the effect is further enhanced. It can be made easy to understand. Further, in the second effect (second notice effect), it is suggested that the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed before the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed. It is configured to be able to execute the pre-effect (display of the icon suggestion type item in the effect corresponding to the effect number “16” shown in FIG. 135). As a result, when it is suggested that an icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, the player can be made to predict the development of the effect one step ahead.

(A-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-6).
Equipped with advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means is
While it is possible to execute a specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect. , The specific effect can be executed even when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect.
In the second effect, a predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (roulette effect) is provided.
The predetermined effect executing means is
A first suggestion means (sub-control circuit 300 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number "16" shown in FIG. 135) capable of suggesting that the icon of the same system is displayed, and
A second suggestion means (sub-control circuit 300 for performing an effect corresponding to the effect number “15” shown in FIG. 135) capable of suggesting the degree of expectation that the advantageous control is performed is provided.
The effect executing means is
When it is suggested that the icon of the same system is displayed by the first suggestion means in the second effect, the specific effect can be executed after the icon of the same system is displayed. On the other hand, when the expectation degree is suggested by the second suggestion means in the second effect, the specific effect is not executed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the specific effect (effect number “91” shown in FIG. 144 or the effect number “91” or While it is possible to execute the icon corresponding to "92" (notice after stop of icon), it is also specified when the icon of the same system ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect). It is configured so that the effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) can be executed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the effect through the specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144), so that the development of the effect is further enhanced. It can be made easy to understand. Further, in the second effect (second notice effect), it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (roulette effect), and in the predetermined effect (roulette effect), an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is used. There are cases where it is suggested that it is displayed, and there are cases where it is suggested that the control is favorable to the player. Then, when it is suggested that the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect), the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed. After that, it is possible to execute a specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144), while the above expectation level in the second effect (second notice effect). Is suggested, the specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) is not executed. As a result, when it is suggested that an icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, the player can be made to predict the development of the effect one step ahead. On the other hand, when the above expectation level is suggested, it is possible to create a player's expectation without developing the effect, so that the attractiveness of the second effect (second notice effect) should be improved. Can be done.

(A-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-7).
The effect executing means is
A common specific effect (first joint effect (common)) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. ), After that, it is possible to execute the different effects.
When the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the third effect (third notice effect) different from the second effect, the specific effect different from the common specific effect (first). It is possible to execute 1 connecting effect (dedicated),
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the same system icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect) and the same in the second effect (second notice effect). It is configured so that a common specific effect (first joint effect (common)) can be executed when the system icon (“bell” icon) is displayed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the staging through a common specific staging (first joint staging (common)), so that the development of the staging can be made easier to understand. Further, as the data for the effect performed when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, the data for the first effect (first notice effect) and the second effect (second notice effect). Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the staging, the staging control can be simplified. Further, when an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect), the specific effect is different from the above-mentioned common specific effect (first joint effect (common)). It is configured so that the effect (first joint effect (dedicated)) can be executed. As a result, it is possible to realize an appropriate specific effect according to the content of the third effect (third notice effect) different from the first effect (first notice effect) and the second effect (second notice effect). Can be done.

In the present invention, the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect) for the specific effect different from the above common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)). It may appear only when the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in an effect other than the third effect (third notice effect). It may be. Further, in the present invention, even when an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect), the above-mentioned common specific effect (first joint effect (common)) is also displayed. ) May be performed.

(A-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-8).
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 54) capable of accepting operations by the player,
The icon display means is
A first icon display means capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is operated (when the effect button 54 is operated in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "49" to "52" shown in FIG. 138). When,
A second icon capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is not operated (when the effect button 54 is not operated in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48" shown in FIG. 138). With display means,
The effect executing means executes a specific effect (connecting effect) in either case where the icon is displayed by the first icon display means or when the icon is displayed by the second icon display means. Is possible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the icon is displayed when the operating means (effect button 54) is operated, and when the icon is displayed even when the operating means (effect button 54) is not operated. There is. Then, it is configured so that a specific effect (connecting effect) can be executed regardless of the situation in which the icon is displayed. As a result, the situation in which the specific effect (connecting effect) is executed when the operating means (effect button 54) is operated and the specific effect (connecting effect) are executed even if the operating means (effect button 54) is not operated. It is possible to create various situations, and through such situations, it is possible to provide variations in the development of the production.

A specific effect (connecting effect) executed when the operating means (effect button 54) is operated, and a specific effect (connecting effect) executed when the operating means (effect button 54) is not operated. May be a common effect (partially different effect) or may be exactly the same effect.

(A-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-9).
The effect executing means is
A symbol effect execution means capable of executing a symbol effect on which a symbol is displayed, and a symbol effect execution means.
When a specific symbol display (image display related to 4 symbol tempai fanning) is performed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state (normal background is displayed), the first effect state is changed from the first effect state. It is equipped with a staging state switching means that can switch to 2 staging states (a state in which the background is displayed after the success of 4 symbols tempai).
The icon display means is
When the specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state, the first icon (“bell” icon) can be displayed as the icon of the same system.
A second icon (“watermelon”) different from the first icon when the specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect after being switched to the second effect state by the effect state switching means. Icon) can be displayed,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a specific symbol display (image display related to 4 symbol tempai fanning) is performed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state (normal background is displayed). , It is possible to switch from the first effect state (normal background is displayed) to the second effect state (the background is displayed after the success of the 4 symbol tempai), and the icon of the same system is the first. It is possible to display one icon (“bell” icon). Then, after switching to the second effect state (the state in which the background is displayed after the success of the 4 symbol tempai), when a specific symbol display (image display related to the 4 symbol tempai fanning) is performed in the symbol effect, It is configured so that a second icon (“watermelon” icon) different from the first icon (“bell” icon) can be displayed. In this way, the first icon (“bell” icon) and the second icon (“watermelon” icon) are displayed step by step, and a specific symbol display (image display related to the four symbol tempai fanning) and the staging state. By associating the switching of, it is possible to create an attractive production development.

The first effect state and the second effect state may be states in which different backgrounds are displayed, and the frequency of appearance of a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed) is high. They may be in different states. For example, in the first effect state, the probability that the first effect is performed is higher than that in the second effect, while in the second effect state, the probability that the second effect is performed is higher than that in the first effect. It may be configured to be. Further, in the first effect state, the probability of the first character appearing is higher than that of the second character, while in the second effect state, the probability of the second character appearing is higher than that of the first character. It may be configured to be.

(A-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-10).
Equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols.
The symbol display means can temporarily stop and display the symbol before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed.
The effect executing means is a symbol when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol. It is possible to execute the different effects from each other in the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) after the variable display of the above is restarted.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the same type of icon (“bell” icon) is used in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol. ) Is displayed, it is configured so that the above-mentioned different effects can be executed in the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) after the variable display of the symbol is restarted. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) to the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) with the display of the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system as a mark. Therefore, the development of the production can be made easier to understand.

In the present invention, a unit game (special symbol variation game) is configured from the start of the variation display of the symbol to the final stop display of the symbol. One unit game (special symbol fluctuation game) corresponds to one special symbol start prize (one reserved ball), and the number of reserved balls does not decrease even if the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure it as follows.

[8-9. Appendix 9]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to perform various effects is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-221523).

The inventor of the present invention has come up with the idea that, in the process of diligently studying various effects performed on a gaming machine, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the development of the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In this respect, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has the following features.

(B-1) An effect mode control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of effect modes (first effect stage, second effect stage, and third effect stage) is provided.
In the plurality of effect modes, the rate of occurrence of each effect is different from each other.
The effect mode control means is one effect mode when a specific condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one effect stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is satisfied. It is possible to transition from to another production mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the fifth staging machine, in a plurality of staging modes (first staging stage, second staging stage, and third staging stage), the rate of occurrence of each staging is different from each other, and specific conditions (1st staging stage, 2nd staging stage, and 3rd staging stage). When the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one staging stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)), one staging mode (staging stage) is changed to another staging mode (staging). It is configured so that it can be transitioned to the stage). As a result, as the game progresses, by gradually transitioning between the production modes (production stages) in which the production tendencies are different from each other, which production mode (production stage) is currently staying and which production mode (production stage) is next. It can be of interest to the player as to whether or not to move to. As a result, it is possible to create an interesting development of the production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, in each of a plurality of production modes (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), a lottery is performed based on a random number value, based on the production lottery table. , The content of the production to be generated is determined. In each effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, and third effect stage), different effect lottery tables are used. In the staging lottery table used in each staging mode (first staging stage, second staging stage, and third staging stage), at least one of the lottery values (random value range) specified for each staging Some are different. As a result, when a predetermined effect that can occur in any of the effect modes (first effect stage, second effect stage, and third effect stage) is provided, the effect mode (first effect stage, first effect stage, third effect stage) is provided. The occurrence probability (frequency) of the effect is different for each of the two effect stages and the third effect stage, or the effect that can occur in one effect mode (for example, the first effect stage) is another effect mode (for example). , 2nd production stage and 3rd production stage) may not occur. That is, in each effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, and third effect stage), the tendency (system) of the effect is different from each other. For example, in the first staging stage, pseudo-continuous staging is more likely to occur as compared with the second staging stage and the third staging stage. Further, the time stock notice can occur only in the second staging stage. Further, the meter UP notice can be generated only in the third staging stage.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a specific condition (condition for generating a stage change) is satisfied, the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is determined by lottery. Explained as being done. In the present invention, the method for determining the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) of the transition destination is not particularly limited. For example, each time a specific condition (condition for generating a stage change) is satisfied, the effect mode (first effect stage) is performed in a predetermined order (for example, first effect stage → second effect stage → third effect stage). , The second staging stage, or the third staging stage) may be sequentially shifted. In addition, a mode (random mode) in which the transition destination effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) is determined by lottery, and an effect mode (first effect) in a predetermined order. It is configured so that the player can select one of the modes (order mode) in which the stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage shifts (order mode) by operating a button or the like. You may. Further, the player can select to play the game in any one effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) by operating a button or the like. It may be configured as. For example, a random mode, an order mode, a first production stage fixed mode (a mode in which a game is played only in the first production stage), a second production stage fixed mode (a mode in which a game is played only in the second production stage), and a third production stage. One of the fixed modes (modes in which the game is played only in the third staging stage) may be configured so that the player can select one of them by operating a button or the like. At this time, even when the first staging stage fixed mode, the second staging stage fixed mode, or the third staging stage fixed mode is selected, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, A stage change notice effect may be generated.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, as a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition), the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one staging stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times). An example of adopting the condition that the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 169 is selected has been described. The specific conditions (conditions for generating stage changes) in the present invention are not particularly limited, and any conditions can be appropriately adopted. For example, the predetermined number of times may be a numerical value selected by lottery from a plurality of numerical values (for example, 0 to 99) instead of a predetermined numerical value. For example, at the start of one special symbol change (for example, after executing the process of step S9203 in FIG. 178), one numerical value is selected by lottery, and the special symbol change is performed for the number of times corresponding to the numerical value. If (a specific condition is satisfied according to the lottery result), the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) may be changed. At this time, when 0 is selected by lottery, after the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) is once changed in one special symbol variation, the special symbol is concerned. The staging mode (first staging stage, second staging stage, or third staging stage) may be changed again in the fluctuation. Alternatively, when a specific condition is satisfied according to a predetermined winning (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting port 120), the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect). The stage) may be changed.

When the RAM clear is executed, the player may stay in a predetermined effect mode (for example, the first effect stage). Further, at this time, "0" may be set in the fluctuation number counter after stage transition (see step S9261 in FIG. 180). The RAM clear is a process of clearing the backup area in the main RAM 203 as described in the first pachinko gaming machine, as described in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is stored in the work area of the main RAM. It is a process to clear the existing information. When the RAM clear (backup clear process) is executed, information indicating that the RAM clear (backup clear process) has been executed is sent as a command from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. By receiving the command, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the RAM clear (backup clear process) has been executed. As described in the first pachinko gaming machine, in RAM clear (backup clear processing), the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is in principle. Not cleared.

Further, when the power is turned on, the staging stage managed by the sub control circuit 300 may be allowed to stay in a predetermined staging mode (for example, the first staging stage). As a result, regardless of the gaming state managed by the main control circuit 200, the display device 7 displays the image corresponding to the effect mode (for example, the first effect stage). Further, at this time, "0" may be set in the fluctuation count counter after the stage shift.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state and a probabilistic gaming state (high-probability gaming state) are provided as gaming states managed by the main control circuit 200, and special symbol fluctuations occur a predetermined number of times (high probability gaming state) in the probabilistic gaming state. It was explained that when it is performed (50 times), it shifts from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state. Here, when shifting from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state, another gaming state (intervening gaming state) may be passed through. For example, when the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the probabilistic game state, the probabilistic game state shifts to the intervening game state, and the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in the intervening game state. Once done, it can be configured to transition from the intervening gaming state to the normal gaming state. In the intervening gaming state, the lottery may be performed using a table different from the various tables (for example, the variable pattern table of the special symbol) used in the normal gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state.

Further, as the effect mode managed by the sub control circuit 300, an effect mode (intervene mode) corresponding to the intervening game state may be provided. For example, when the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the probabilistic mode, the mode shifts from the probabilistic mode to the intervening mode, and when the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in the intervening mode. It can be configured to transition from the intervening mode to the normal mode. For example, when the probabilistic mode ends, a result screen corresponding to the result during the bonus (for example, an image showing the total number of game balls paid out after shifting to the first hit mode) may be displayed. It is conceivable that the display of the result screen may be continued even in the intervention mode.

When shifting from such an intervention mode to a normal mode, a stage change may always occur (transition to an effect stage determined by lottery). Further, when irregularity (electric power interruption or the like) occurs or RAM clear is executed, the gaming state managed by the main control circuit 200 is the intervening gaming state, while the effect mode managed by the sub control circuit 300. May be configured so that a situation such as a predetermined effect mode (for example, an image display corresponding to the first effect stage is performed) can occur. In this case, the player may be allowed to stay in the predetermined effect mode (for example, the first effect stage) until the number of special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (20 times).

(B-2)
The gaming machine of the above (B-1).
A game control means capable of controlling game execution based on a set value of one of a plurality of set values, and a game control means.
A set value suggestion means capable of suggesting the set value is provided.
The plurality of effect modes include a first effect mode (first effect stage) and a second effect mode (second effect stage).
The effect mode control means can transition from the first effect mode to the second effect mode when the specific condition is satisfied.
The set value suggestion means can suggest the set value by a display indicating the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs).
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a specific condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one staging stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is satisfied, the fifth pachinko game machine is used. It is possible to transition from the 1st effect mode (1st effect stage) to the 2nd effect mode (2nd effect stage), and a display showing the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs). It is configured so that the setting value can be suggested by. In this way, since the display indicating the specific condition (display of the counter image when the stage change occurs) is performed, the first effect mode (first effect stage) to the second effect mode (second effect stage) are performed. It is possible to make the player interested in the conditions for transitioning to. At the same time, since it is possible to make the player predict the set value through the display (display of the counter image when the stage change occurs), the player's interest in the condition can be increased.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, while the image showing the name of the effect mode (effect stage) after the transition is displayed, the content of the display indicating a specific condition (display of the counter image when a stage change occurs) is displayed. It was explained as being reset (recovered). As described above, in the present invention, when a specific condition (condition for generating a stage change) is satisfied, it corresponds to the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) of the transition destination. It is possible to change the display indicating a specific condition (display of the counter image when a stage change occurs) while displaying the image (background, name, etc.) to be displayed.

In the present invention, as a display indicating a specific condition, it is possible to adopt a display of a counter image when a stage change occurs. The counter image may be a counter image displayed in a stage change game (special symbol change in which the stage change is performed), or may be a game before the stage change game (for example, 1 of the special symbol change in which the stage change is performed). It may be a counter image displayed in the previous special symbol variation). For example, in the special symbol variation immediately before the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, the effect of changing the color of the counter image to the color corresponding to the set value may be performed.

(B-3)
The gaming machine according to (B-1) or (B-2).
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means is
The first effect mode (effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166) and the second effect mode (effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 166). It is possible to execute a specific effect (sixth notice effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes including.
It is possible to display the symbols in different patterns depending on whether the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode or the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode. be,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the first effect mode (effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166) and the second effect mode (effect number "104" shown in FIG. 166). It is possible to execute a specific effect (sixth notice effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes including the effect mode corresponding to "106"), and a specific effect (sixth effect). The case where the advance notice effect) is executed in the first effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166), and the specific effect (sixth advance notice effect) is the second effect. It is configured so that the symbols can be displayed in different patterns depending on the mode (the staging mode corresponding to the staging numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 166). As a result, it is possible to display the symbol in a pattern corresponding to the effect mode, and it is possible to realize an effect in which the effect mode and the symbol display are appropriately linked.

(B-4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-3).
Identification information display means (display device 7) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production,
The plurality of effect modes include a first effect mode (first effect stage) and a second effect mode (second effect stage).
A first effect (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed only in the first effect mode among the plurality of effect modes. Has been
A second effect (eighth notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed only in the second effect mode among the plurality of effect modes.
A third effect (sixth notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode.
The effect executing means is
The first effect mode (effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166) and the second effect mode (effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 166). It is possible to execute the third effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes including the above.
Identification is performed after the variable display of the identification information is started depending on whether the third effect is executed in the first effect mode or the third effect is executed in the second effect mode. It is possible to display the identification information in different fluctuation patterns as the fluctuation pattern of the identification information until the information is stopped and displayed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the first effect mode (effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166) and the second effect mode (effect number "104" shown in FIG. 166). It is possible to execute the third effect (sixth notice effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes including the effect mode (corresponding to "106"), and the third effect (third effect mode). The sixth effect (sixth notice effect) is executed in the first effect mode (effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166), and the third effect (sixth notice effect) is the third. Identification in the case of being executed in the effect mode 2 (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 166) from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display of the identification information. As the fluctuation pattern of the information, it is configured so that the identification information can be displayed in the fluctuation patterns different from each other. As a result, the identification information can be displayed in a variation pattern according to the effect mode, and it is possible to realize an effect in which the effect mode and the display of the identification information are appropriately linked. Further, the first effect (first advance notice effect, second advance notice effect, third advance notice effect, and fourth advance notice effect) and the second effect (eighth advance notice effect) are each in the first effect mode (first effect). The third effect (sixth notice effect) is the first effect mode (first effect stage), whereas the effect can be performed only in the effect stage) and the second effect mode (second effect stage). It is an effect that can be executed in both the second effect mode (second effect stage) and the second effect mode (second effect stage). Therefore, when a specific condition (condition for generating a stage change) is satisfied, for example, the transition from the first staging mode (first staging stage) to the second staging mode (second staging stage) occurs. , The first effect (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect) will not be performed, while the second effect (eighth notice effect) will be performed. In addition, it is possible to create a situation in which the third effect (sixth notice effect) is continued. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in each effect mode (effect stage) and specific conditions (stage change occurrence conditions).

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "104" to "106" is performed, the decorative pattern is changed by a dedicated variation pattern as shown in FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (c). Explained as letting. On the other hand, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" are performed, for example, the default fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 163 (d) (FIGS. 168 (a) to (c)). It is possible to change the decorative pattern in a variation pattern in which the timing at which the decorative symbol stops is earlier than the variation pattern shown).

(B-5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-4).
The specific condition can be satisfied according to the variation display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation), but cannot be satisfied according to the variation display of the second symbol (second special symbol variation). ,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a specific condition (condition for generating a stage change) can be satisfied according to the variation display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation), while the variation of the second symbol. It is configured so that it cannot be established according to the display (second special symbol change). As a result, the transition of the effect mode (effect stage) does not occur in the situation where the variation display of the second symbol (second special symbol variation) is performed, but the variation display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation) In the situation where the above is performed, a transition of the effect mode (effect stage) will occur. As a result, in contrast to the situation where the second symbol variation display (second special symbol variation) is performed, the situation where the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed is set to the effect mode (effect stage). ) Can be characterized as a situation in which the transition occurs, and the situation in which the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed can be made interesting.

(B-6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-5).
Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 163) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 120) is satisfied, and
A display control means capable of variablely displaying and then stopping and displaying the identification information in the identification information display means based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means.
A suggestion means capable of giving a suggestion (pre-reading effect) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery is provided.
The suggestion means
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the variable display of the identification information based on the fulfillment of one predetermined condition (stage change section, the reserved ball) out of the multiple times of the predetermined condition is satisfied is the display control. When the transition of the effect mode is performed by the effect mode control means in response to the effect performed by the means, the predetermined condition is satisfied after the variable display of the identification information based on the satisfaction of the one predetermined condition is started. With respect to the predetermined lottery conducted in response to the above, while the result of the lottery can be suggested, the predetermined condition is satisfied before the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is started. With respect to the predetermined lottery performed in response to the above, no suggestion regarding the result of the lottery can be made.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 120) is satisfied a plurality of times, the predetermined condition (first starting port 120) is performed a plurality of times. When the transition of the effect mode (effect stage) is performed in response to the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of one of the predetermined conditions (stage change section, the reserved ball). , Corresponding to the fact that the predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120) is satisfied after the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (stage change section, the reserved ball) is started. With respect to the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) performed in the above, while it is possible to give a suggestion (look-ahead effect) regarding the result of the lottery, the change in the identification information based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition (stage change section, the reserved ball). Regarding the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120) before the display is started, the suggestion regarding the result of the lottery ( It is configured so that pre-reading production) cannot be performed. As a result, depending on the context of the timing of establishment of each predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120) and the timing of the variable display in which the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed. The number of predetermined lottery (big hit determination) in which suggestions regarding the result (look-ahead effect) can be performed will change. Therefore, the number of predetermined lottery in which the suggestion (look-ahead effect) can be performed is compared with the case where the number of predetermined lottery (big hit determination) in which the suggestion (look-ahead effect) regarding the result cannot be performed is predetermined. There is a possibility that (big hit determination) can be increased, and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to give suggestions (pre-reading effect) regarding the result of a predetermined lottery.

(B-7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-6).
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment),
Suggestion means capable of giving suggestions (pre-reading effect) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery, and
A transition destination effect mode determining means (sub CPU 301 for executing the process of step S9203 in FIG. 178) capable of determining the effect mode of the transition destination is provided.
The effect mode control means can make a transition from one effect mode to the transition destination effect mode determined by the transition destination effect mode determining means when the specific condition is satisfied.
The suggestion means
When the predetermined lottery is performed a plurality of times, the predetermined lottery performed after the transition destination effect mode is determined by the transition destination effect mode determining means among the plurality of predetermined lottery times. , While suggesting the result of the lottery, the predetermined lottery performed before the transition destination staging mode is determined by the transition destination staging mode determining means may suggest the result of the lottery. do not have,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed a plurality of times, the effect mode (effect stage) of the transition destination among the plurality of predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is set. Regarding the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) performed after the determination, the suggestion (look-ahead effect) regarding the result of the lottery can be performed, while the effect mode (effect stage) of the transition destination is determined. The predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is configured so that no suggestion (look-ahead effect) regarding the result of the lottery can be made. As a result, suggestions regarding the result (pre-reading effect) can be performed according to the context of the timing at which each predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed and the timing at which the effect mode (effect stage) of the transition destination is determined. The number of lottery (big hit judgment) will change. Therefore, as compared with the case where the number of predetermined lottery (big hit determination) in which the suggestion (look-ahead effect) regarding the result cannot be performed is predetermined, the predetermined lottery (big hit) in which the suggestion (look-ahead effect) can be performed is compared with the case where the number is predetermined. There is a possibility that the number of determinations) can be increased, and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to give suggestions (pre-reading effect) regarding the result of a predetermined lottery.

(B-8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-7).
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect mode control means satisfies the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one effect stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) as the specific condition. In addition, it is possible to transition from one production mode to another production mode.
The effect executing means is
When the transition of the effect mode is performed by the effect mode control means in response to the satisfaction of the first condition, the fourth effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 170) is executed. The first staging execution means that can be done,
A second effect executing means capable of executing a fifth effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169) different from the fourth effect is provided.
The effect mode control means (sub CPU 301 for executing the process of step S9281 in FIG. 181) has a second condition (effect shown in FIG. 169) relating to the fifth effect even if the first condition is not satisfied. When the main variation pattern corresponding to the number "121" or "122" is selected), it is possible to transition from one effect mode to another effect mode.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one staging stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is satisfied. It is possible to transition from one staging mode (staging stage) to another staging mode (staging stage), and the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one staging stage) When the transition of the effect mode (effect stage) is performed according to the establishment of the predetermined number of times (20 times)), the effect corresponding to the fourth effect (effect number "131" shown in FIG. 170) is performed. ) Can be executed. Further, even if the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one effect stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is not satisfied, the fourth effect (Fig.) The second condition (the effect shown in FIG. 169) regarding the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169), which is different from the effect number "131" shown in 170). When the main variation pattern corresponding to the number "121" or "122" is selected), the transition from one effect mode (effect stage) to another effect mode (effect stage) can be performed. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one effect stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) and the second condition (effect number shown in FIG. 169 ". The main variation pattern corresponding to "121" or "122" is selected), and the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 170) and the fifth effect (shown in FIG. 169). Regarding the effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122"), it is possible to make the player interested in which condition is satisfied and which effect is generated. As a result, the development of the production related to the transition of the production mode (production stage) can be made more interesting.

(B-9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-8).
A staging execution means that can perform a staging,
It is provided with an effect selection means capable of selecting an effect to be executed by the effect execution means.
The effect mode control means is different from one effect mode when a predetermined effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 (a)) is selected by the effect selection means. It is possible to transition to the staging mode of
The effect executing means is at any timing of a plurality of timings including the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169 (b)) and the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169 (b)). , It is possible to carry out the predetermined effect,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 (a)) is selected, one effect mode (effect stage). It is possible to shift from to another effect mode (effect stage), the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169 (b)) and the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169 (b)). It is configured so that a predetermined effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 (a)) can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings including the above. ing. As a result, the predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 (a)) related to the condition for transitioning the effect mode (effect stage) is the first timing (FIG. 169). Since it occurs at the timing 1) shown in (b) or at the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169 (b)), there are many variations related to the transition of the staging mode (staging stage). However, it is possible to create a development of staging.

The execution timing of the predetermined effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 (a)) is the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169 (b)) and the first timing. In addition to the timing of 2 (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169 (b)), one or more timings may be provided. For example, the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169 (b)) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) later than the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169 (b)), and further. A predetermined effect (effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 (a)) at a predetermined timing (for example, 6 seconds) later than the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169 (b)). It may be configured so that the effect corresponding to "" can be executed.

(B-10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-9).
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment),
A staging execution means that can perform a staging,
An effect pattern selection means capable of selecting an effect pattern (sub-variable pattern) according to the effect executed by the effect execution means, and an effect pattern selection means.
The effect pattern replacement means (sub CPU 301 for executing the process of step S9210 in FIG. 178) capable of replacing the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means with another effect pattern is provided.
The effect executing means includes a suggestion effect executing means capable of performing a suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) that can suggest the result of the predetermined lottery.
When the suggestion effect is performed by the suggestion effect execution means, the effect pattern replacement means has a first effect pattern (sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 182) by the effect pattern selection means. When is selected, the effect pattern is replaced, while when the second effect pattern (sub-variation patterns "21" to "30" shown in FIG. 182) is selected by the effect pattern selection means. Does not replace the staging pattern,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) that can suggest the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed, the first effect pattern (sub-variation pattern "1" shown in FIG. 182 is performed. When "20") is selected, the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) is replaced, while the second effect pattern (sub-variation patterns "21" to "30" shown in FIG. 182) is selected. If so, the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) is not replaced. In this way, as the first step for determining the staging pattern (sub-variation pattern), one staging pattern (sub-variation pattern) is selected without considering whether or not the suggestion staging (look-ahead staging) is performed. On top of that, as the second step, when the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) is performed, the effect pattern (sub-variable pattern) is replaced as needed to create an appropriate effect pattern according to the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect). In determining (sub-variation pattern), it is possible to improve the efficiency of processing.

(B-11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-10).
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect mode control means is
When the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after shifting to one effect stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is satisfied as the specific condition, the effect mode is changed from one. A first effect mode control means capable of transitioning to another effect mode,
When the second condition (the main variation pattern corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 is selected) is satisfied as the specific condition, one effect mode is changed to another effect mode. With a second staging mode control means that can be transitioned to
The effect executing means is
When the transition of the effect mode is performed by the first effect mode control means in response to the satisfaction of the first condition, the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 170) is performed. The first staging execution means that can be executed,
Corresponds to the fifth effect (effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169) when the effect mode transition is performed by the second effect mode control means in response to the satisfaction of the second condition. It is equipped with a second staging execution means capable of executing the staging).
When both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the second effect executing means does not execute the fourth effect, but the second effect executing means does not execute the fourth effect. It is possible to perform 5 productions,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one staging stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is satisfied. It is possible to transition from one staging mode (staging stage) to another staging mode (staging stage), and the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one staging stage) When the transition of the effect mode (effect stage) is performed according to the establishment of the predetermined number of times (20 times)), the effect corresponding to the fourth effect (effect number "131" shown in FIG. 170) is performed. ) Can be executed. Further, when the second condition (the main variation pattern corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 is selected) is satisfied, one effect mode (effect stage) is selected for another effect. It is possible to transition to the mode (staging stage), and the second condition (the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to the staging number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 is selected) is satisfied. When the transition of the effect mode (effect stage) is performed accordingly, it is possible to execute the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169). Then, the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one effect stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) and the second condition (effect number "121" shown in FIG. 169). "Or the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to" 122 "is selected), the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number" 131 "shown in FIG. 170) is executed. It is configured so that the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169) can be executed without doing so. In this way, the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one effect stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) and the second condition (effect number shown in FIG. 169). When both conditions of "121" or "the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to" 122 "is selected), the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number" 131 "shown in FIG. 170) is satisfied. By preferentially executing the fifth effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169), the effect corresponding to the fourth effect (effect number "131" shown in FIG. 170). ) Is not generated, which gives the player unexpectedness, and can increase the player's interest in the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 169).

The fifth pachinko gaming machine corresponds to the fifth effect (effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169) rather than the fourth effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 170). It was explained that the production) can be performed preferentially. On the other hand, in a situation where a predetermined effect and a fourth effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 170) can be performed, the fourth effect (effect shown in FIG. 170) is higher than the predetermined effect. The effect corresponding to the number "131") may be preferentially executed. The predetermined effect includes an effect (for example, a symbol action notice effect) performed when the special symbol change starts. The symbol action notice effect is an effect of generating a predetermined effect on the decorative symbol at the start of the special symbol change. Even if it is decided to generate a symbol action notice effect at the start of one special symbol change, if a stage change is performed in the special symbol change, the symbol action notice effect is not performed. It is possible to do.

(B-12)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-11).
A symbol display means capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of symbols, and
A staging execution means capable of executing a staging with one staging pattern among a plurality of staging patterns (staging patterns corresponding to the staging numbers "161" to "163" shown in FIG. 186).
As the pattern of the effect executed by the effect execution means, the effect pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of effect patterns is provided.
The symbol display means can temporarily stop and display the symbol before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed.
The effect executing means is one of the plurality of effect patterns in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol. In the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) after the effect is executed in, and the variation display of the symbol is resumed, it is possible to execute the effect with one of the plurality of effect patterns. can be,
The effect pattern selection means (sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9363 of FIG. 190 and the process of step S9743 of FIG. 194) selects the pattern of the effect to be performed in the second pseudo game, and then is based on the pattern. , It is possible to select the pattern of the effect performed in the first pseudo game.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol, a plurality of staging patterns (FIG. 186). The second pseudo game ("pseudo 2") after the effect is executed by one of the effect patterns (effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163") and the variation display of the symbol is resumed. In, it is possible to execute the effect with one of the plurality of effect patterns (effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" shown in FIG. 186). Then, after selecting the pattern of the effect performed in the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”), the pattern of the effect performed in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) can be selected based on the pattern. It is configured to be possible. This makes it easy to design the development of the effect performed from the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) to the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”).

[8-10. Appendix 10]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), A player is provided so as to shift to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-110576).

The inventor of the present invention has come up with the idea that, in the process of diligently studying the above-mentioned gaming machines, it may be possible to improve the interest of the gaming by devising the fluctuation time of the identification information. ..

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In this respect, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has the following features.

(C-1) The first lottery means capable of performing the first lottery (ordinary lottery) and
A second lottery means capable of performing a second lottery (second special lottery) and
Based on the result of the first lottery performed by the first lottery means, the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161) capable of variablely displaying the identification information and then stopping the display, and
A second display means (second special symbol display unit 164) capable of variablely displaying the identification information and then stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the second lottery performed by the second lottery means. Prepare,
When the result of the first lottery is the first result (per ordinary symbol), the first display means can variablely display the identification information over the first time (500 ms). On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is the second result (normal loss), the identification information is varied and displayed over a second time (600,000 ms) longer than the first time. Is possible,
When the result of the second lottery is a specific result (small hit), the second display means variablely displays the identification information over a third time (1000 ms) shorter than the second time. It is possible to let
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (per ordinary symbol), the identification information is changed over the first time (500 ms). While it is possible to display, if the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the second time (600,000 ms) longer than the first time (500 ms). ), It is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner. Further, when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit), the identification information is displayed over a third time (1000 ms) shorter than the second time (600,000 ms). It is configured so that it can be displayed in a variable manner. As a result, while the variable display of the identification information (first variable display) in the case where the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss) is performed, the second lottery is performed. It is possible to complete the variable display (second variable display) of the identification information when the result of the (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit). Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game playability by using the time from the end of the second variation display to the end of the first variation display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(C-2) The gaming machine of the above (C-1).
The first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) in which a game ball can enter,
A second winning means (small hit large winning opening 151) that allows a game ball to enter,
When the result of the first lottery is the first result, it is possible to control the first winning means so that the game ball can easily enter the first winning means. 1 Control means and
If the result of the second lottery is the specific result when the identification information is variablely displayed at least over the second time by the first display means, the second winning means is used. A second control means capable of controlling the second winning means so that the game ball can easily enter the ball is provided.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (per ordinary symbol), the game is played in the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145). It is possible to control the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) so that the ball can easily enter the ball, and at least the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161) provides a second. When the identification information is varied and displayed over time (600,000 ms) and the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit), the second winning means (small). It is configured so that the second winning means (small hit large winning opening 151) can be controlled so that the game ball can easily enter the winning large winning opening 151). As a result, a second result (ordinary) different from the first result (per ordinary symbol) that triggers control to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145). When a loss occurs), the second winning means (small hit large winning opening) is performed while the variation display (first variation display) of the identification information based on the second result (normal loss) is performed. It is possible to control the game ball to easily enter 151), and the time until the end of the first variation display is used for the second winning means (small hit large winning opening 151). It is possible to create a situation where a game ball is easy to enter.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, while the variation display of the identification information (ordinary symbol loss length variation) based on the second result (ordinary loss) is being performed, the second winning means (small hit large winning opening) is performed. It was explained in 151) that a situation is created in which a pachinko ball is easy to enter. The second result in the present invention is not limited to loss (ordinary loss), and may be a hit (ordinary symbol hit). The second time can be about 10 to 100,000 times (or 100 to 10000 times, 500 to 5000 times, 1000 to 2000 times, etc.) of the first time. It is possible to set the time to about 5 times to 10000 times (or 100 times to 5000 times, 500 times to 1000 times, etc.) of the third time. Further, the time during which the control for facilitating the entry of the game ball into the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) is 0.5 to 50 times (or 1 time to) the above-mentioned first time. It is possible to set the time to about 10 times, 2 times to 5 times, etc.). Further, the time for which the control for facilitating the entry of the game ball into the second winning means (large winning opening 151 for small hits) is performed is 0.5 to 100 times (or 1 time) of the above-mentioned third time. It is possible to set the time to about 50 times, 2 times, 10 times, etc.).

(C-3) The gaming machine according to (C-1) or (C-2).
A symbol display means (display device 7) capable of displaying a symbol, and
The symbol display means includes a symbol effect executing means capable of executing a symbol effect (drum variation effect) in which a plurality of symbols are displayed.
When the result of the first lottery is the first result, the symbol effect executing means is such that one of the plurality of symbols is different from at least one of the remaining symbols. While it is possible to execute the symbol effect, when the result of the first lottery is the second result, the symbol effect is executed so that the plurality of symbols all have the same symbol. It is possible to
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (per ordinary symbol), one of the plurality of symbols is the remaining symbol. When the symbol effect (drum fluctuation effect) can be executed differently from at least one of the symbols, while the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss). Is configured so that it is possible to execute a symbol effect (drum variation effect) so that a plurality of symbols all have the same symbol. As a result, the player is made to understand that the variable display of the identification information is performed over a relatively long time (second time (600,000 ms)) by displaying the same symbol as a plurality of symbols. Can be done.

(C-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-3).
An image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image, and
An image display control means capable of controlling image display in the image display means,
A state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (probability change mode) is provided.
When the image display control means is controlled to the second state, predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means are used. , Right drum symbol 9202R) can be displayed on the image display means, but when the first state is controlled, the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display means.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when controlled to the second state (probability variation mode), a predetermined image corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161). While it is possible to display (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R), when controlled to the first state (normal mode), the predetermined image ( The left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R) are not displayed. As a result, the second state (probability variation mode) is compared with the first state (normal mode), and the effect (predetermined image) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161). The player can be made aware of the state in which (the effect using the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R) is performed.

(C-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-4).
A staging execution means that can perform a staging,
A state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (probability change mode) is provided.
The state control means can end the second state when a predetermined number of times (50 times) of unit games are played in the second state.
When the result of the first lottery is the second result, the effect executing means has a predetermined effect (drum according to a hit pattern) according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state. There are cases where the variable effect) is executed and cases where the predetermined effect is not executed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined number of times (50 times) of unit games are played in the second state (probability change mode), the second state (probability change mode) can be terminated. be. Further, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), a predetermined effect is determined according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability change mode). (Drum variation effect by hit pattern) may be executed, and the predetermined effect (drum variation effect by hit pattern) may not be executed. In this respect, when the number of remaining unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability change mode) is small (for example, the time required to execute the remaining unit games in the second state (probability change mode) is the first. In the case where the result of the lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the variation display time of the identification information (a situation in which the time is relatively shorter than the second time (600,000 ms))). There is a possibility that the significance that the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) becomes the second result (ordinary loss) is diminished. According to the invention of (5), since it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect (drum variation effect due to a hit pattern) from being generated in such a case, it is possible to appropriately realize an effect according to the situation of the game. Can be done.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is a specific number of times (10 times) or more, the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first. It was explained that a predetermined effect (drum variation effect by a hit pattern) is performed based on the result of 2 (normal symbol loss length variation). Here, as the second result (normal symbol loss length fluctuation), a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, And 600 seconds, etc.), the specific number of times may be different depending on the determined fluctuation time. For example, in the probabilistic game state, when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is lost, the variation display time of the identification information is 5 seconds, and the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is. It is assumed that the total time of the variable display time of the identification information in the case of a small hit and the opening time of the second winning means (large winning opening 151 for small hits) is 5 seconds. In such a form, when 60 seconds is determined as the fluctuation time corresponding to the second result (normal symbol loss length fluctuation), the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is 12. If it is more than once, the fluctuation display can be almost completed during the second state (probability change mode). In this case, the specific number of times can be set to 12 times. A value obtained by dividing the determined normal symbol fluctuation time by the expected value of the special symbol fluctuation time (for small hits, the total time of the special symbol fluctuation time and the opening time of the small hit winning opening). The number of times according to the above may be determined as the specific number of times.

Further, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is a specific number (10 times) or more. It was explained that it is performed when the gate passage that triggered the lottery (ordinary lottery) of 1 occurs. In the present invention, the determination may be made when the normal symbol variation corresponding to the passage through the gate starts. Therefore, even if the remaining number of times (remaining ST number of times) at the time when the gate passage occurs is the specified number of times (10 times) or more, the remaining number of times (remaining ST number of times) at the time when the normal symbol fluctuation starts is specified. If it is less than the number of times (10 times), the predetermined effect (drum variation effect according to the hit pattern) may not be performed.

As described in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) based on the hit pattern are identification information based on the second result (normal loss). It is possible to configure the variable display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) to be stopped before the start. After the stop display of the predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) is completed, a hit notification effect (see FIG. 199 (k)) is performed. The hit notification effect should end at the same time as the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to classify the effect mode, such as the probability variation mode while the hit notification effect is being performed, and the first bonus mode after the hit notification effect is performed. In the probabilistic mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 216 and 217 are performed, and in the first bonus mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 210 to 213 are performed. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display means (second special symbol display unit 164) in a manner corresponding to a big hit (for example, a 10R big hit) while the hit notification effect is being performed (big hit game). When the start condition of the state is satisfied), a predetermined jackpot effect is performed. As a result, the mode shifts to the first bonus mode. The predetermined jackpot effect can be the same effect as that performed when the start condition of the jackpot game state is satisfied at other timings in the probability variation mode (when the hit notification effect is not performed). be. On the other hand, when the start condition of the big hit game state is satisfied in the first bonus mode, an effect different from the predetermined big hit effect may be performed.

(C-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-5).
An image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image, and
An image display control means capable of controlling the image display in the image display means is provided.
The image display control means displays in the image display means according to the fluctuation time of the identification information in the first display means, and changes the mode of the display over time so that the display gradually becomes thinner. Is possible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the display is performed according to the fluctuation time of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161), and the display mode is changed over time so that the display gradually becomes thinner. It is configured so that it can be changed to. As a result, the fluctuation time of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161) can be burned into the player's mind, and the player can be strongly aware of the time.

(C-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-6).
An image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image, and
An image display control means capable of controlling the image display in the image display means is provided.
The image display control means is
A first image capable of causing the image display means to display predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means. Display control means and
The image display means is provided with a second image display control means capable of displaying a time according to the fluctuation time of the identification information in the first display means (display of a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image).
The first image display control means does not display the predetermined image on the image display means when the time display is performed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161). ) Can be displayed, and the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) according to the fluctuation time of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161) can be performed. It is possible. Then, when the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed, the predetermined image (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) is not displayed. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the time display (display of the image of the remaining time with the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length), and it is possible to make the player strongly aware of the time.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary symbol loss length fluctuation), the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is displayed. Described as being done (see FIG. 202). The time may be the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation at the time when one normal symbol loss length fluctuation starts (that is, the fluctuation time itself of the normal symbol fluctuation related to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation). , It may be the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length change at the time when one normal symbol loss length change is being performed.

In the present invention, the situation in which the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed is not particularly limited, and the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (per ordinary symbol). Even if the time display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image display) is performed in some cases or when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a predetermined result (loss or big hit). good. For example, in a situation where the remaining time of the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length is less than a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), all the reserved fluctuation patterns of the normal symbol correspond to the first result (per normal symbol). When the fluctuation pattern is used, or when the result of the jackpot determination related to all the reserved special symbol fluctuations is a loss, the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed. It is possible to adopt. As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the remaining time for the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length has decreased.

(C-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-7).
A staging execution means that can perform a staging,
A state control means capable of controlling any of a plurality of states including a specific state (second bonus mode) is provided.
The effect executing means, when a part or all of the second time has elapsed when the specific state ends, the remaining time of the second time (ordinary symbol loss length variation). It is possible to perform the production according to the remaining time),
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a specific state (second bonus mode) ends and a part or all of the second time (600,000 ms) has elapsed, the second It is configured so that it is possible to perform an effect according to the remaining time of the time (the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation). As a result, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the variable display of the identification information (first variable display) and the specific state (second bonus mode) are displayed. In a situation that occurs in a superimposed manner, the production content is different depending on how much time (second time) of the fluctuation display remains at the end of a specific state (second bonus mode). be able to. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the remaining time of the second time (the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation), and it is possible to make the player strongly aware of the remaining time.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) continues at the end of a specific state (second bonus mode), the remaining time of the second time (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) ( It was explained that the production is performed according to the normal pattern loss length remaining time). In the present invention, the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) may be terminated at the time when the specific state (second bonus mode) is terminated. That is, when the first fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) is finished (when the remaining time of the second time is 0) when the specific state (second bonus mode) is finished. When the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues (when the remaining time of the second time is not 0), different effects may be performed.

If the first fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) continues at the end of the specific state (second bonus mode), the first lottery (normal) in the second state (probability change mode). The result of the lottery) becomes the second result (ordinary loss), the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the first lottery (ordinary lottery) occurs, and the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) occurs. While the normal symbol loss length fluctuation) is being performed, the transition to a specific state (second bonus mode) is performed, and even when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the first fluctuation display (normal) is performed. When the symbol loss length fluctuation) continues, and in a specific state (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) becomes the second result (ordinary loss), and the first lottery When the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) corresponding to (ordinary lottery) occurs and the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) Can be assumed if is continuing. Here, in a specific state (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) becomes the second result (ordinary loss), and the first variation corresponding to the first lottery (ordinary lottery). When the display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) occurs, the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss) in the second state (probability change mode), and the first lottery is concerned. An effect (special effect) different from the effect performed when the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the (ordinary lottery) occurs may be performed.

(C-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-8).
A staging execution means that can perform a staging,
A state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is provided.
The state control means can end the second state when a predetermined number of times (50 times) of unit games are played in the second state.
The effect executing means executes an effect according to the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state when the identification information is variablely displayed over the second time. It is possible to
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined number of times (50 times) of unit games are played in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode), the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is set. It is possible to terminate it. Further, when the identification information is variablely displayed over the second time (600,000 ms), it depends on the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode). It is configured so that it is possible to perform the effect. As a result, when the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number of times) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number of times subtraction mode) is large (the second state (remaining ST number of times subtraction mode) continues for the time being). ) Or when the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number subtraction mode) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is small (the end of the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is approaching. In such a situation), it is possible to appropriately realize the effect according to the situation of the game.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the predetermined number (5 times) or more, and the predetermined number (5 times). ), It was explained that the production content may differ depending on the case. In the present invention, it is possible to divide the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) into a plurality of periods, and to make the production contents performed in each period different. The plurality of periods include, for example, a period in which the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is equal to or greater than the first predetermined number (for example, 30 times) (for example, 30 times). The remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) in the first period) is the second predetermined number (for example, 10 times) or more and the first predetermined number (for example). The remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the period (second period) less than 30 times (30 times) and the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the third predetermined number (for example, 5 times). The remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) during the period (third period) less than the second predetermined number (for example, 10 times) is the fourth. The remaining number of unit games that can be executed in a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) or more and less than a third predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) (fourth period) and a second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode). A period (fifth period) or the like in which (the number of remaining STs) is the fifth predetermined number of times (for example, once) can be set.

(C-10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-9).
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means may suggest that the result of the first lottery is the second result while the identification information is variablely displayed in the second display means (normal drawing look-ahead). It is possible to perform (directing),
It is characterized by that.

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result while the identification information is variablely displayed on the second display means (second special symbol display unit 164). It is configured so that it is possible to perform a suggestion effect (normal map look-ahead effect) that can suggest that it has become (normal loss). As a result, the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 161) is performed through the suggestion effect (normal symbol look-ahead effect) performed while the identification information is variablely displayed in the second display means (second special symbol display unit 164). It is possible to expect the player to perform variable display of the identification information over a relatively long time (second time (600,000 ms)).

[8-11. Appendix 11]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a special game advantageous to the player is executed when a special result is derived.

As a gaming machine of this type, a gaming machine that gives a right-handed instruction notification in a big hit game state, a small hit game state, and a time-saving state, and a left-handed instruction notification in a normal gaming state is Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-104167 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-104167). In particular, it is disclosed in paragraph 0338).

The gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-104167 are enhanced in a right-handed gaming state such as a big hit game, a small hit game state, and a time-saving state, while are less entertaining in a left-handed normal gaming state. There is a risk.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 11 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game medium launched in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) can pass toward the game area, and when the game medium passes, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the result of the first special symbol lottery. The first special symbol starting area (for example, the first starting port 5120) that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game from which is derived,
A game medium launched in a specific mode (for example, right-handed) can pass toward the game area, and when the game medium passes, the second special symbol is variably displayed and the result of the second special symbol lottery is performed. The second special symbol starting area (for example, the second starting port 2140) that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game from which is derived,
When the game medium launched toward the game area passes through, the normal symbol start area (for example, the passing gate 2126) that triggers the execution of the normal symbol game in which the normal symbol lottery result is derived by variable display of the normal symbol is performed. , 5125A, 5125B),
A first variable winning device that can be opened when a result advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit, an opening hit of a bonus) is derived in the first special symbol game or the special symbol game as the second special symbol game (for example, a big hit, a bonus opening hit). For example, the large winning opening 2131, V winning opening 2155),
When a predetermined result (for example, per Fuden long opening) is derived in the ordinary symbol game, the game medium is facilitated to pass through the second special symbol starting area (for example, the second starting port 2140). A second variable winning device (for example, an ordinary electric accessory 2146) capable of
Multiple gaming modes with different degrees of advantage for the player (eg, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false), special mode, challenge mode, remaining hold mode) Of these, a gaming machine that can execute games in either mode,
The expected value from which a result advantageous to the player is derived is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed (for example, the first special symbol game). Is configured so that the expected value of winning per character opening is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when is executed.
The plurality of game modes are
The normal game mode in which the first special symbol game can be mainly performed by playing the game in the normal mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)). )When,
Including an advantageous game mode (for example, a special mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed by performing the game in the specific embodiment.
The normal game mode is
The first normal game mode (for example, normal mode) and
It is characterized by including a second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) which is more advantageous for the player than the first normal game mode.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the normal gaming mode in which the game is performed in the normal mode (for example, left-handed) is not only the first normal gaming mode (for example, the normal mode) but also the first normal gaming mode. Also includes a second normal gaming mode (eg, high accuracy mode A) that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, even when the game is played in the normal game mode in which the game is played in the normal mode, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, it is advantageous to the player in the "first variable winning device that can be opened when a result advantageous to the player is derived in the special symbol game as the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game". The expected value is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed. The "results advantageous to the player" may be the same result (for example, both the former and the latter are big hits, both the former and the latter are hits, and the character opening hit, etc.), or different results. May be good. When the results are different, for example, the former is a big hit and the latter is a bonus hit, the former is a big hit and the latter is a probable change hit, the former is a bonus hit and the latter is a time saving hit, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit) is derived in at least one of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game performed during the first normal game mode, the second It is characterized in that it is configured to shift to a normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if it is in the first normal gaming mode (for example, normal mode), it shifts to the second normal gaming mode when a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit) is derived. .. Therefore, even in the first normal game mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

When the first special symbol game is performed in the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode), the probability that a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit) is derived is a result advantageous to the player (for example, C time reduction). It is preferable that the probability is higher than the probability that a big hit or an opening hit) is derived. By doing so, it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest in the first normal game mode.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The first normal game mode (for example, the normal mode) and the second normal game mode (for example, the high accuracy mode A) are the probability that a result advantageous to the player is derived in the first special symbol game and the above. The second special symbol game is characterized in that all of the probabilities of deriving a result favorable to the player are the same.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the probability that a result advantageous to the player is derived in the first special symbol game and the probability that the result advantageous to the player is derived in the second special symbol game are the first. It is the same in the normal game mode (for example, the normal mode) and the second normal game mode (for example, the high probability mode A). As described above, although the probability that the result advantageous to the player is derived is the same in the first normal game mode and the second normal game mode, the first normal game mode is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game mode. 2 It becomes possible to realize a normal gaming mode, and it becomes possible to provide a new gaming machine that has never existed before.

The "probability of deriving a result advantageous to the player" includes a probability of 0. Further, the probability 0 corresponds not only to the case where the lottery is performed in which the probability of deriving the result advantageous to the player is 0, but also to the case where the lottery related to the derivation of the result advantageous to the player is not performed. For example, even when the lottery result A is regarded as a result advantageous to the player and only the lottery result B and the lottery result C are included in the lottery result (that is, the lottery result A is not included in the lottery result), the lottery is performed. The probability that the result A is derived is 0.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
In the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), it is expected that the predetermined result (for example, per Fuden long opening) is derived as compared with the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode). It is characterized by a high value.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, in the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), a predetermined result (for example, Fuden Long) is compared with the first normal gaming mode (for example, normal mode). Since the expected value from which (per opening) is derived is high, the second special symbol game is likely to be executed. Further, when the second special symbol game is executed, the expected value which is advantageous to the player is higher than when the first special symbol game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the second normal game mode.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), it is possible to shift to the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode).
The predetermined end condition is
The first condition (for example, the number of times of operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is 12 times) related to the operation of the second variable winning device (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 2146) and
The variable display number of the first special symbol and / and the second condition related to the variable display of the second special symbol (for example, the variable display number of the first special symbol is 20 times, the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1 time). And, at least, including
When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), the first normal game mode is changed from the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A). It is characterized in that it is configured to shift to (for example, normal mode).

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) Shifts to the first normal game mode. Here, the first condition is a condition related to the operation of the second variable winning device (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 2146), for example, the number of times the second variable winning device (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 2146) is operated. It corresponds to a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times the Fuden short is opened 12 times (that is, the number of winnings per the Fuden short is 12 times), etc.). The second condition is a condition related to the variable display number of the first special symbol and / and the variable display of the second special symbol, for example, the variable display number of the first special symbol and / and the variable display of the second special symbol. It corresponds to the number of display times being a predetermined number of times (for example, the variable display number of the first special symbol is 20 times, the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1 time, and the like). In this way, in the second normal game mode, whether or not a predetermined result (for example, per hobby long open) is derived in the normal symbol game before the transition to the first normal game mode. It will be possible to have fun and enhance the interest.

In the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), it is preferable that the first condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second condition. Compared to the case where the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first condition, it is possible to increase the possibility that a predetermined result (for example, per Fuden long opening) will be derived in a normal symbol game to enhance the interest. Because it becomes. In a mode in which the first condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second condition, for example, the expected value of the number of executions of the normal symbol game per unit time is made larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the special symbol game per unit time. Alternatively, the game medium may be facilitated to pass through the normal symbol starting area (eg, passage gates 2126, 5125A, 5125B) rather than the special symbol starting area (eg, first starting port 5120, second starting port 2140). It can be realized by increasing the number of times of operation of the second variable winning device as the first condition or by combining these than the number of times of variable display of the special symbol as the second condition.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
When a result advantageous to the player is derived, it is possible to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the special gaming state includes a plurality of special gaming states (for example, 3Rs) having different degrees of advantage to the player. Big hit, 10R big hit) is included,
When a result advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit, a bonus opening hit) is derived in the special symbol game performed during the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), the first normal game Compared to the case where a result advantageous to the player is derived in the special symbol game performed during the game mode (for example, the normal mode), the game is shifted to a special game state (for example, 10R jackpot) which is advantageous to the player. It is characterized by high expected value.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) is more than the case where a result advantageous to the player is derived in the first normal gaming mode (for example, the normal mode). In the case where a result advantageous to the player is derived, the expected value of shifting to a special gaming state (for example, 10R jackpot) advantageous to the player is higher. As described above, although the first normal game mode and the second normal game mode are both performed in the normal mode, it is possible to give the game a sharpness in the first normal game mode and the second normal game mode. It is possible to enhance the interest.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
When the predetermined result (for example, per Fuden long opening) is derived in the normal symbol game performed during the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), the second normal game mode (for example, the second normal game mode) For example, it is characterized in that it is configured to shift to a specific mode (for example, a second challenge mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the high accuracy mode A) and is different from the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode). do.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, in the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), there is a specific mode (for example, for example) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous gaming mode (for example, special mode). It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not to shift to the second challenge mode high accuracy mode A). In particular, when the first normal game mode (for example, the normal mode) is included, the gameability of shifting between a plurality of modes having different degrees of advantage for the player, such as the first normal game mode, the second normal game mode, and the specific mode, can be achieved. It can be realized and it will be possible to enhance the interest.

It should be noted that the specific mode (for example, the second challenge mode) is advantageous to the player by increasing the execution frequency of the second special symbol game as compared with, for example, the second normal game mode (for example, the high accuracy mode A). It becomes possible to do.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
When the predetermined result (for example, per Fuden long opening) is derived in the normal symbol game performed during the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A).
Opportunity to show that there is a high expectation that a special effect (for example, a right-handed instruction effect) or a zone effect related to the transition to a specific mode (for example, the second challenge mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game mode will be performed. While the production) is performed
When the game medium does not pass through the second special symbol start area even though the game medium can easily pass through the second special symbol start area, the second special symbol game is performed in the specific mode. It is characterized in that it is configured to exit the specific mode without being executed.

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, a predetermined result (for example, per Fuden long opening) was derived in the ordinary symbol game performed during the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A). When the player cannot pass the gaming medium through the second special symbol starting area even though the game medium can be easily passed through the second special symbol starting area, the second special symbol game Will end without being executed. Therefore, in the second normal game mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and enhance the interest.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
The normal game mode is
In addition to the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode) and the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), it is more advantageous for the player than the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode). A third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)) is further included.
When the transition condition to the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) is satisfied (for example, when the C time reduction hit is won in the normal mode), the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) is satisfied. )
The conditions are different from the conditions for shifting to the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), and the third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)). ) Is satisfied (for example, when the C time reduction hit is won in the remaining hold mode, or when the results of the special symbol game in the remaining hold mode are all lost and the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied). , The third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)) is entered.
The third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)) is
The expected value from which the predetermined result (for example, per normal electric long opening) is derived is the same as the expected value from which the predetermined result is derived in the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A). It is characterized by being configured in some cases.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, the transition condition to the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) and the third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B). Although the transition condition to (false)) is different, the expected value from which the predetermined result is derived in the second normal game mode and the expected value from which the predetermined result is derived in the third normal game mode are the same. In some cases. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the second normal game mode and the third normal game mode.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (9) above,
After the end of the advantageous game mode (for example, a special mode), it is possible to shift to a special mode (for example, a remaining hold mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed in a game mode different from the advantageous game mode. With
When the game medium passes through the second special symbol start area, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number, and the second special symbol game is executed using the reserved second special symbol. Is configured to
The third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)) is a mode in which a transition is possible when a specific transition condition is satisfied when the special mode ends. And
The specific transition conditions are
The first transition condition that can be migrated when the reserved start information of the second special symbol includes the start information from which a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit) is derived.
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, in the remaining hold mode), although the start information from which the specific result (for example, C time reduction hit) is derived is not included in the hold start information of the second special symbol. Includes a second transition condition that can be transitioned to (when all the results of the special symbol game are lost and the predetermined production conditions are satisfied).
The third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true)) that is shifted when the first transition condition is satisfied is the third normal game that is shifted when the second transition condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that it is a mode more advantageous to the player than the mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (false)).

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, both when the first transition condition is satisfied and when the second transition condition is satisfied, the third normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode). B (false)), but the third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true)) that is shifted when the first transition condition is satisfied shifts when the second transition condition is satisfied. This is a mode that is more advantageous to the player than the third normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (false)). In this way, regardless of which of the first transition condition and the second transition condition is satisfied, the transition destination is the same third normal game mode, but the third normal transition is made when the first transition condition is satisfied. By making the degree of advantage for the player different between the game mode and the third normal game mode that has been transferred due to the establishment of the second transition condition, it is possible to enhance the interest.

(11) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The predetermined end condition is
Further including a third condition relating to the result of the normal symbol game performed during the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A).
In the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), the second normal game mode is not only when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, but also when the third condition is satisfied. (For example, the high accuracy mode A) is configured to shift to the first normal game mode (for example, the normal mode).

According to the gaming machine of the above (11), even when the third condition is satisfied during the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), the second normal gaming mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) is started. The mode shifts to the first normal game mode. Here, the third condition is a condition related to the result of the ordinary symbol game, and corresponds to, for example, a predetermined result (for example, per Fuden long opening) being derived a predetermined number of times (for example, once). In this way, when any one of a plurality of conditions such as the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition is satisfied, the first normal game mode is shifted from the second normal game mode to the first normal game mode. It is possible to further enhance the fun of the game, such as deriving a predetermined result (for example, per Fuden long open) in a normal symbol game before the mode is changed, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 11, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[8-12. Appendix 12]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a special game advantageous to the player is executed when a special result is derived.

As a gaming machine of this type, a gaming machine that gives a right-handed instruction notification in a big hit game state, a small hit game state, and a time-saving state, and a left-handed instruction notification in a normal gaming state is Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-104167 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-104167). In particular, it is disclosed in paragraph 0338).

The gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-104167 are more interesting in right-handed gaming states such as big hit games, small hit games, and time-saving states, but when the right-handed games are completed, There is a risk that the interest in playing games will be significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 12 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game medium launched in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) can pass toward the game area, and when the game medium passes, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the result of the first special symbol lottery. The first special symbol starting area (for example, the first starting port 5120) that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game from which is derived,
A game medium launched in a specific mode (for example, right-handed) can pass toward the game area, and when the game medium passes, the second special symbol is variably displayed and the result of the second special symbol lottery is performed. The second special symbol starting area (for example, the second starting port 2140) that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game from which is derived,
When the game medium launched toward the game area passes through, the normal symbol start area (for example, the passing gate 2126) that triggers the execution of the normal symbol game in which the normal symbol lottery result is derived by variable display of the normal symbol is performed. , 5125A, 5125B),
A first variable winning device (for example, a first variable winning device) that can be opened in a special game state that can be transferred when a special result (for example, a big hit or a bonus opening hit) is derived in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game. , Large winning opening 2131, V winning opening 2155),
When a predetermined result (for example, per Fuden long opening) is derived in the ordinary symbol game, the game medium is facilitated to pass through the second special symbol starting area (for example, the second starting port 2140). A second variable winning device (for example, an ordinary electric accessory 2146) capable of
Multiple gaming modes with different degrees of advantage for the player (eg, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false), special mode, challenge mode, remaining hold mode) Of these, a gaming machine that can execute games in either mode,
The expected value that gives a favorable result to the player is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed (for example, the first special symbol game is executed). It is configured so that the expected value of winning per character opening is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when it is played.
The plurality of game modes are
The normal game mode in which the first special symbol game can be mainly performed by playing the game in the normal mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)). )When,
An advantageous game mode (for example, a special mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed by performing the game in the specific mode, and
The second special symbol game is mainly performed, and includes a special mode different from the advantageous game mode (for example, a remaining hold mode).
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the advantageous game mode, the advantageous game mode can be shifted to the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the advantageous gaming mode (for example, the special mode) is a mode in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed by playing the game in a specific mode. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in such an advantageous game mode, the advantageous game mode ends, but the second special symbol is mainly performed, and the mode shifts to a special mode (for example, a remaining hold mode) different from the advantageous game mode. Therefore, even if the advantageous game mode in which the game is performed in a specific mode (for example, right-handed) ends, the interest is reduced by shifting to the special mode instead of immediately shifting to the normal game mode (for example, the normal mode). Can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The advantageous game mode (for example, a special mode) is characterized in that the game is configured to be played for a longer period than the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the advantageous gaming mode (for example, the special mode) can be given an advantage over the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode), and even if the advantageous gaming mode ends. It is possible to give the special mode a function to prevent the player from immediately shifting to the normal game mode (for example, the normal mode), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
When the second special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) in the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode), the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode B (true)) is set. It is characterized by being migratory.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the game does not shift to the normal gaming mode (for example, the normal mode) until the second special symbol game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) in the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode). .. In addition, by gradually shifting the game mode, such as shifting to the special mode when the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) ends, and shifting to the normal game mode (for example, normal mode) when the special mode ends. , It becomes possible to make the game interesting.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
When the game medium passes through the second special symbol starting area (for example, the second starting port 2140), the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four), and the reserved said. The second special symbol game can be executed by using the start information of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol game can be executed.
When a specific condition is satisfied in the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) (for example, when the last second special symbol game in the advantageous game mode ends, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved, or , If you win the prize but do not win the V prize, etc.), you can shift to the normal game mode (eg, normal mode) without shifting to the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode). It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of the above (4), after the advantageous gaming mode (for example, the special mode) is finished, the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode) is not always shifted to, and the final second in the advantageous gaming mode. Only when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved when the special symbol game is completed, the mode shifts to the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode). Therefore, the player is required to pass the game medium through the second special symbol start area (for example, the second start port 2140) just before the end of the advantageous game mode, which gives a feeling of tension to the advantageous game mode. It will be possible to enhance the interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The plurality of game modes are
Predetermined transition conditions (for example, first special symbol game or second special symbol game) in the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)). The transition is possible when a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit) is established, and further includes a specific mode (for example, a challenge mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed.
The special mode is
If the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit), it does not shift, and if it is the special result (for example, 3R big hit), it can be shifted. On the other hand
The specific mode is
It is possible to shift not only when the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is the special result (for example, 3R big hit) but also when the specific result (for example, C time reduction hit). It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, in the normal gaming mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)), the first special symbol game or the first special symbol game or the first. 2 Regardless of whether the result of the special symbol game is a special result (for example, 3R big hit) or a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit), it is possible to shift to the specific mode (for example, challenge mode). Therefore, in the normal game mode, even if the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is not a special result, if it is a specific result, it is possible to shift to the specific mode, which is a hobby in the normal game mode. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The special result includes a first special result (for example, a big hit) and an opening time of the first variable winning device (for example, a big winning opening, a V winning device) rather than the first special result (for example, a big hit). Includes a relatively short second special result (eg, per opening of a bonus).
The expected value (for example, jackpot probability) from which the first special result (for example, big hit) is derived is the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode). B (false)) and the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) are the same, while
The expected value from which the second special result (for example, opening of the accessory) is derived is the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false). )), The advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) is larger than the above-mentioned advantageous game mode (for example, special mode).

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, the expected value (for example, jackpot probability) from which the first special result (for example, big hit) is derived is the normal gaming mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode). B (true), high probability mode B (false)) and advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) are the same, but the expected value from which the second special result (for example, character opening) is derived is usually. Since the advantageous game mode is higher than the game mode, it is possible to give the advantageous game mode an advantage over the normal game mode without inciting the gambling spirit. In addition, "the expected value from which the second special result (for example, opening of the accessory) is derived is higher in the advantageous game mode than in the normal game mode" means that, for example, the probability that the second special result is derived is high. Although it is the same in the normal game mode and the advantageous game mode, the probability that the second special result is derived is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed. In addition, the advantageous game mode includes a mode in which the second special symbol game is more likely to be executed than in the normal game mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the second special result is derived may be higher in the advantageous game mode than in the normal game mode.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game has a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit) which is more advantageous for the player than the loss but more disadvantageous than the special result (for example, a big hit). Included and
When the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) is the specific result (for example, C time reduction hit), the other from the advantageous game mode. While not transitioning to the mode of (for example, high accuracy mode B (true))
When the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode) is the specific result (for example, C time reduction hit), another from the special mode. It is characterized in that it can be configured to be able to shift to at least one of the modes (for example, high accuracy mode B (true)).

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the advantageous gaming mode (for example, special mode) is a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit). Even so, the advantageous game mode in which the second special symbol game is mainly performed continues without shifting to another mode, so that the interest can be maintained. On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode) is a specific result, the special mode is changed by shifting from the special mode to another mode. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest that may occur due to the termination of.

In addition, "when the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the special mode is the specific result, it is possible to shift from the special mode to another mode" is the first special. When the result of the symbol game or the second special symbol game is a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit), even if the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode) is in the middle, the start of the second special symbol immediately (that is, the start of the second special symbol). Even if there is a remaining hold of information, it may be transferred to another mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true)) without executing the second special symbol game, or a special mode (for example, a remaining hold mode) may be transferred. ) To the end (that is, if there is a remaining hold of the start information of the second special symbol, after all the second special symbol games for this remaining hold are completed), the mode may be shifted to another mode.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), (6), and (7) above.
The plurality of game modes are
Predetermined transition conditions (for example, first special symbol game or second special symbol game) in the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)). Is possible to shift when a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit) is established (for example, winning a C time reduction hit), and the second special symbol game can be mainly performed in the specific mode (for example, C time reduction hit). For example, it also includes (challenge mode)
The specific mode (for example, challenge mode) is
The first specific mode (for example, the first challenge mode) that can be transferred when the first condition is satisfied, and
Including a second specific mode (for example, a second challenge mode) that can be transferred when the second condition is satisfied,
The second specific mode is
It is characterized in that the second special symbol game may be terminated without being performed even though the transition is made due to the fulfillment of the second condition.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The specific mode (for example, challenge mode) is
The first specific mode (for example, the first challenge mode) that can be transferred when the first condition is satisfied, and
Including a second specific mode (for example, a second challenge mode) that can be transferred when the second condition is satisfied,
The second specific mode is
It is characterized in that the second special symbol game may be terminated without being performed even though the transition is made due to the fulfillment of the second condition.

According to the gaming machines (8) and (9) above, when the first condition is satisfied, the mode shifts to the first specific mode (for example, the first challenge mode), and when the second condition is satisfied, the second specific mode is entered. The mode (for example, the second challenge mode) is entered. When the mode is changed to the first specific mode, the second special symbol game is always performed, but when the mode is changed to the second specific mode, the second special symbol game may not be performed and the second specific mode may be terminated. Therefore, the variation of the game increases, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest.

The first condition corresponds to, for example, the end of a special gaming state (for example, a 3R jackpot gaming state). Further, the second condition corresponds to, for example, deriving a predetermined result (for example, per Fuden long opening) in a normal symbol game.

(10) In the gaming machine according to (8) or (9) above,
The first specific mode (for example, the first challenge mode) can be continued until the second special symbol game is executed at least once.
The second specific mode (for example, the second challenge mode) is characterized in that the second special symbol game can be ended without being executed.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the first specific mode always executes the second special symbol game once, whereas the second specific mode ends without executing the second special symbol game. In this way, by providing superiority or inferiority between the first specific mode and the second specific mode, it is possible to enhance the interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
When the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the specific mode (for example, challenge mode) is a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit), the specific mode to the first mode (for example, for example). , While it is possible to shift to high accuracy mode A),
When the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode) is the specific result (for example, C time reduction hit), the game is started from the special mode. Although the degree of advantage for the person is common to the first mode (for example, the jackpot probability, the accessory open hit probability, and the normal electric long open hit probability are all common to the high probability mode A), they are different from the first mode. It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to a second mode (for example, high probability mode B (true)) in which control (for example, effect control) is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (11) above, the first mode (for example, high-accuracy mode A) and the second mode (for example, high-accuracy mode B (true)) have the same degree of advantage, but control. By making (for example, staging control) different, it is possible to increase the variation of the game without increasing the control load unnecessarily, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above.
In the specific mode (for example, challenge mode),
The specific effect (for example, zone effect) related to the second special symbol game can be executed until the second special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times).
The specific effect is
While the second special symbol game can be executed until the specified number of times (for example, 5 times) is performed, while the second special symbol game can be executed.
If the start information of the second special symbol is reserved even though the second special symbol game has been performed the specified number of times (for example, five times), the specific effect is not executed. It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, in the specific mode (for example, challenge mode), a common specific effect is executed until the second special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). 2 When the special symbol game is performed more than the specified number of times (for example, 5 times), the above-mentioned specific effect is not executed. In this case, it is preferable to separately perform a single production lottery and execute the production based on the result of the single production lottery.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above.
When the number of times the first special symbol game is executed and / or the number of times the second special symbol game is executed reaches a specific number of times (for example, 1000 times) without shifting to the special game state (for example, the ceiling counter is reached). If this is the case), it is characterized in that it is possible to shift to a super-advantageous game mode (for example, a bliss mode) that can be more advantageous to the player than the advantageous game mode (for example, a special mode).

According to the gaming machine of (13) above, the number of executions of the first special symbol game and / and the number of executions of the second special symbol game are a specific number of times even if the special gaming state is not entered for a long period of time. When it reaches (for example, 1000 times), it is possible to shift to the super-advantageous gaming mode (for example, the blissful mode), so that the decrease in the motivation for playing can be reduced and the decline in the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, "the number of times the first special symbol game is executed and / and the number of times the second special symbol game is executed becomes a specific number of times" means that the number of times the first special symbol is executed becomes a specific number of times (for example, 1000 times). Either the number of times the second special symbol is executed becomes the specific number of times, or the sum of the number of times the first special symbol is executed and the number of times the second special symbol is executed becomes the specific number of times.

In addition, the "super-advantageous game mode that can be more advantageous to the player than the advantageous game mode" means that the super-advantageous game mode (for example, bliss mode) is better than the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) in all aspects. It is not limited to being advantageous to the player, and when viewed from one side, the advantageous game mode is more advantageous to the player than the super advantageous game mode (for example, the advantageous game mode does not puncture, but the super advantageous game). It may be punctured in the mode, etc.).

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above.
The advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) is
When any one of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the advantageous game mode to another mode (for example, the remaining hold mode).
The plurality of termination conditions are
The first end condition (for example, the variable display number of the second special symbol is 12 times) on the condition that the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is executed the first predetermined number of times.
It is characterized by including a second termination condition (for example, the number of times of operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is 10,000 times) on the condition that the second variable winning device has been operated a second predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine of (14) above, the first end condition (for example, the variable display number of the second special symbol is 12 times) and the second end condition (for example, the operation number of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 is 10,000 times). When any of these is established, the advantageous game mode (for example, the special mode) ends. In this way, by providing a plurality of conditions for ending the advantageous game mode, it is possible to enhance the interest.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of Appendix 12, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

201,1201,201 main CPU
301, 1301, 301 Sub CPU
120, 120A, 120B, 1120, 2120, 5120 1st starting port 140A, 140B, 1140, 2140 2nd starting port 2126, 5125A, 5125B Passing gate

Claims (3)

A game medium launched in a normal manner toward the game area can pass through, and when the game medium passes through, the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived. The first special symbol start area, which triggers the execution of the special symbol game,
A game medium launched in a specific manner toward the game area can pass through, and when the game medium passes through, the second special symbol is variably displayed and the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. The second special symbol start area, which triggers the execution of the special symbol game,
A first determination means for determining whether or not a special result advantageous to the player is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium to the first special symbol starting area.
A second determination means for determining whether or not a special result advantageous to the player is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium to the second special symbol starting area.
When the game medium launched toward the game area passes through, the normal symbol start area, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol game, in which the normal symbol is variablely displayed and the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived.
A first variable winning device that can be opened when a result advantageous to the player is derived in the first special symbol game or the special symbol game as the second special symbol game.
A second variable winning device capable of facilitating the passage of the game medium to the second special symbol starting region when a predetermined result is derived in the ordinary symbol game is provided.
At least one of the first determination means and the second determination means is more disadvantageous to the player than the loss result, the special result, and the special result, but more advantageous to the player than the loss result. It is a means that can determine which result is a specific result.
A gaming machine capable of executing a game in any of a plurality of gaming modes having different degrees of advantage for the player.
It is configured so that the expected value from which a result advantageous to the player is derived is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed.
The plurality of game modes are
A normal game mode in which the first special symbol game can be mainly performed by performing the game in the normal mode, and
Includes an advantageous game mode in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed by performing the game in the specific embodiment.
The normal game mode includes a first normal game mode and a second normal game mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game mode.
When the specific result is determined by at least one of the first determination means and the second determination means in the first normal game mode, the game in the specific embodiment is performed after the specific result is derived. A gaming machine characterized in that a game can be continued in the normal mode by shifting from the first normal game mode to the second normal game mode without notifying the player to perform the game. A game medium launched in a normal manner toward the game area can pass through, and when the game medium passes through, the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived. The first special symbol start area, which triggers the execution of the special symbol game,
A game medium launched in a specific manner toward the game area can pass through, and when the game medium passes through, the second special symbol is variably displayed and the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. The second special symbol start area, which triggers the execution of the special symbol game,
A first determination means for determining whether or not a special result advantageous to the player is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium to the first special symbol starting area.
A second determination means for determining whether or not a special result advantageous to the player is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium to the second special symbol starting region.
When the game medium launched toward the game area passes through, the normal symbol start area, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol game, in which the normal symbol is variablely displayed and the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived.
A first variable winning device that can be opened when a result advantageous to the player is derived in the first special symbol game or the special symbol game as the second special symbol game.
A second variable winning device capable of facilitating the passage of the game medium to the second special symbol starting region when a predetermined result is derived in the ordinary symbol game is provided.
At least one of the first determination means and the second determination means is more disadvantageous to the player than the loss result, the special result, and the special result, but more advantageous to the player than the loss result. It is a means that can determine which result is a specific result.
A gaming machine capable of executing a game in any of a plurality of gaming modes having different degrees of advantage for the player.
It is configured so that the expected value from which a result advantageous to the player is derived is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed.
The plurality of game modes are
A normal game mode in which the first special symbol game can be mainly performed by performing the game in the normal mode, and
Includes an advantageous game mode in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed by performing the game in the specific embodiment.
The normal game mode includes a first normal game mode and a second normal game mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game mode.
When the specific result is determined to be the specific result by at least one of the first determination means and the second determination means in the first normal game mode, the specific result is derived and then the specific result is derived. It is possible to continue the game in the normal mode by shifting from the first normal game mode to the second normal game mode without opening the first variable winning device so as not to play the game in the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized by that. When a result advantageous to the player is derived, it is possible to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the special gaming state includes a plurality of special gaming states having different degrees of advantage to the player. Ori
When a result advantageous to the player is derived in the special symbol game performed during the second normal game mode, a result advantageous to the player in the special symbol game performed during the first normal game mode is derived. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the expected value of shifting to a special gaming state favorable to the player is higher than that in the case where is derived.

Images